Itb 13.01.20 PDF

PEMEX MINATITLAN CCR REVAMP
INVITATION TO BID
R060 UOP TECHNICAL REQUISITION FOR FABRICATION
GRAL. LAZARO CARDENAS REFINERY

MINATITLAN, VERACRUZ, MEXICO
JANUARY 20, 2013
PemexMinatitlanRevamp
970086FITBTOCRev0
FABRICTORINVIATIONTOBID
TABLEOFCONTENTS
I.
BidInstructions
A.
II.
III.
970086TBITechnicalBidInstructions
ScopeofWork
A.
970086SOSTable1,ScopeofSupply
B.
Photographs/Model
1.
SitePhotographs
2.
3DModel
FabricationRequisition
A.
970086R060FabricationTechnicalRequisition
Page1of1
PEMEX REFINACION
INVITATION TO BID
SECTION I
BID INSTRUCTIONS
2013-01-14
TECHNICAL BID INSTRUCTIONS
Project# 970086
970086-TBI-Rev0
1. Bid Package Contents

1. The bid package consists of project specifications, bills of material and engineering
design drawings, defined as follows:
A. Project specifications define the requirements for supply, assembly, installation,
fabrication, inspection, testing, and documentation of the CCR SECTION revamp and
are broken out by discipline as follows:
000 Series Design and Fabrication
100 Series General Information
600 Series Instrumentation
700 Series Electrical
800 Series Piping
900 Series Structural Steel, Painting, and Insulation
B. Bills of material define the materials to be supplied by either UOP or Contractor as
defined in Section II, Table 1 Scope of Supply. Bills of material are included in
Section III, R060 Fabrication Requisition, of the Bid Package.
C. Engineering design drawings define the scope of work to assemble and/or install the
materials defined in the bills of material. Engineering design drawings are included
in Section III, R060 Fabrication Requisition, of the Bid Package.
2. The scope of supply defined in Section II, Table 1, together with the scope of work
defined in Section III, shall form the cost basis for Contractors bid.
3. In case of discrepancy between documents, the document order of precedence shall be as
follows (from highest to lowest):
Technical Bid Instructions
Table 1 Scope of Supply
Bills of material
UOP specifications and data sheets
Engineering design drawings
Pemex specifications
4. Contractors bid shall be submitted using the Bid Tabulation form included as an
attachment to the inquiry.
Page 1 of 6
Rev. 2
2013-01-14
Project# 970086
970086-TBI-Rev0
2. Contractor Bid Preparation

1. Contractor Bid Expectations
a. Contractor will utilize the R060 Fabrication Requisition as the basis for their bid
proposal.
b. The documents contained within the R060 are to be used for bidding purposes only
and are representative of the scope of work required for this project. The actual
project specifications, bills of material and design drawings will be provided to the
successful bidder during the execution of the job.
c. Contractors bid proposal shall include the following components:
i. Detailed Material Cost
ii. Detailed Labor Cost
iii. List of Clarifications/Exemptions that the Contractor is taking with respect to
the R060
2. Material Cost Preparation
a. The bills of material provided within the R060 shall be utilized by the Contractor to
prepare the material cost for the bid proposal.
b. Contractor shall follow Table 1 Scope of Supply to determine what materials the
fabricator will need to supply for the project.
c. Bills of material are provided for the following components:
i. Piping
ii. Piping Supports
iii. Heat Tracing
iv. Structural Steel
v. Insulation
vi. Instruments
vii. Electrical
viii. Civil
3. Labor Cost Preparation
a. The engineering design drawings and project specifications shall be utilized by the
Contractor to prepare the labor cost for the bid proposal.
b. Contractor shall follow Table 1 - Scope of Supply to determine the extent of the labor
within the Contractors scope.
c. Contractor shall utilize the process equipment weights and dimensions provided in
the R060 to ensure that they are capable of performing the demolition, fabrication,
modification and installation. Any additional construction equipment, including
scaffolding, which the Contractor may have to rent or sub-contract in order to
complete the project, shall be included in the labor cost.
d. The engineering design drawings included in the R060 are representative of the level
of detail that will be provided to the Contractor during the execution of the project.
4. Project Schedule
Page 2 of 6
Rev. 2
2013-01-14
Project# 970086
970086-TBI-Rev0
a. The Project Schedule has been included as a component of the R060. Contractor
should review and ensure that they are capable of performing the scope of work
within the time periods designated within the schedule.
b. Contractor shall indicate the amount of labor hours per daily shift required to
complete the scope of work within the time frame of the project schedule.
5. Clarifications and Exceptions
a. Contractor shall provide a list of all clarifications and/or exceptions that they are
taking within the bid proposal. It will be assumed that all aspects of the R060 will be
included within the Contractors bid proposal unless explicitly specified otherwise.
b. Contractor shall not assume any disruptions or delays to work due to Pemex
Refinacion. Any delays experienced will be addressed through contract change
orders between the Contractor and UOP.
6. Bid Options
a. Contractor shall provide an optional cost to execute during the Site Shutdown
(Turnaround) with 24 hour labor and construction coverage in an effort to reduce the
scheduled outage to less than twelve weeks (Line 573 of the Project Schedule, Refer
to subsection 1.7, Project Schedule, of Section III).
b. Contractor shall provide an optional cost to provide the components in UOP
Requisition 970086 R300P-0, Vessel Ship Loose Parts for Revamp. Contractor shall
possess an ASME R-stamp and be able to provide ASME R-3 forms for these
components.
c. Contractor shall provide an optional cost to provide the components in UOP
Requisition 970086 R701SS-0, Electrical Substation No. 3 Modification.
3. Project Background
1. The CCR SECTION is an existing process unit that is being revamped to replace certain
existing equipment, piping and instrumentation, add new equipment, piping and
instrumentation, and modify certain existing equipment, piping and instrumentation in
place.
2. The process engineering design, detailed engineering design and procurement of custom
equipment will be performed by UOP. Contractor is requested to submit a bid to perform
certain material procurement and site construction services required to implement the
revamp work in accordance with the requirements of the Bid Package.
3. Some of the new equipment, piping and instrumentation will be installed in a new add-on
structure that will stand alongside of the existing structure.
4. The proposed new add-on structure shall be built as an independent structure that will not
be rigidly tied to the existing structure.
5. Steel and piping for the proposed new add-on structure shall be prefabricated offsite.
Prefabricated components shall be shipped to site and installed next to the existing
structure. The estimated maximum shipping envelope within the refinery is 40 feet in
length, 15.75 feet in width and 12 feet in height.
Page 3 of 6
Rev. 2
2013-01-14
Project# 970086
970086-TBI-Rev0
6. Refer to subsection 3.1.a (Demolition Mechanical Flow Diagrams) of Section III for a
schematic representation of equipment, piping and instrumentation to be removed from
the existing unit.
7. Refer to subsection 2.11.a (Mechanical Flow Diagrams) of Section III for a schematic
representation of equipment, piping and instrumentation to be added and replaced. The
scope of work of this project will only include items that are bolded on these drawings.
Items that are not bolded on the Mechanical Flow Diagrams will not be included in the
scope of work.
8. Refer to subsection 2.11.b (Equipment General Arrangement Drawings) of Section III for
the configuration of the existing unit and proposed new add-on structure.
9. It is in the Contractors scope to take demolished equipment and materials to a specified
location on-site. It is the Clients responsibility to dispose of the demolished materials.
4. Equipment
1. Scope of supply for new and modified equipment shall be as defined in Section II, Table
1.
2. Refer to subsection 2.10.a (Equipment List) of Section III for a list of new equipment,
existing equipment being replaced, and existing equipment being modified, including
location within the unit.
schematic representation of the equipment to be removed.
representation of the equipment to be replaced and modified.
5. Refer to subsection 3 (Demolition and Modification) of Section III for a description of
the work involved in removal, replacement and modification of equipment. Demolition
drawings included in subsections 3.1.b through 3.1.d represent 60% completion of the
design of the final scope of work. Estimate to determine the cost of the final scope of
work.
6. Contractor shall have an ASME R Stamp for alterations and repairs to the existing
pressure vessels within the scope of work. Contractors ASME R Stamp shall be valid
for both shop and field alterations and repairs.
5. Structural Steel
1. Scope of supply for structural steel shall be as defined in Section II, Table 1.
2. Refer to subsection B.10.k (Structural Steel Bill of Material) of Section III for the
quantity of steel to be assembled and installed for the revamp. The Structural Steel Bill
of Material included represents 60% completion of the design of the final scope of work.
Estimate to determine the cost of the complete scope of work.
3. Structural connections for pre-fabricated components of the new add-on structure will be
bolted for ease of assembly at site.
4. Exposed structural steel, including beams, columns bracing, ladders, cages and handrails,
shall be galvanized. Structural steel underneath fireproofing shall be painted.
Page 4 of 6
Rev. 2
2013-01-14
Project# 970086
970086-TBI-Rev0
5. Fireproofing shall be installed on the structural steel in the new structure per the project
specifications.
6. Piping
1. Scope of supply for piping shall be as defined in Section II, Table 1.
schematic representation of piping to be removed.
representation of piping to be replaced and modified.
4. Refer to subsection 2.10.c (Piping Line List) of Section III for a summary of the lines
included in the revamp.
5. Refer to subsection 2.10.e (Piping Bill of Material) of Section III for the quantity of
piping materials required for the revamp modifications. The Piping Bill of Material
included represents 85% completion of the design of the final scope of work. Estimate to
determine the cost of the complete scope of work.
6. Line numbers listed in subsection 2.10.c (Piping Line List) of Section III correspond to
line numbers shown in subsection 2.11.a (Mechanical Flow Diagrams) of Section III.
7. Piping Isometrics in subsection 2.11.f represent 80% completion of the design of the final
scope of work. The small bore piping has not yet been included in the isometrics.
7. Electrical
1. Scope of supply for the electrical system shall be as defined in Section II, Table 1.
2. Refer to subsection 2.2 (970086 R701F Electrical Systems) of Section III for a
description of the work involved in completing the electrical system revamp
modifications.
3. Refer to subsection 2.10n (Electrical Bill of Material) of Section III for the quantity of
electrical system materials required for the revamp modifications. The Electrical Bill of
Material included represents 75% completion of the design of the final scope of work.
4. Electrical and instrument cable support system shall be PVC coated conduit.
8. Instrumentation
1. Scope of supply for the instrumentation system shall be as defined in Section II, Table 1.
schematic representation of instruments to be removed.
representation of instruments to be replaced and modified.
4. Refer to subsection 2.1 (970086 R601F Instrument Installation) of Section III for a
description of the work involved in completing the instrumentation system revamp
modifications.
Page 5 of 6
Rev. 2
2013-01-14
Project# 970086
970086-TBI-Rev0
5. Refer to subsection 2.10.m (Instrument Bill of Material) of Section III for the quantity of
instrument materials required for the revamp modifications. The Instrument Bill of
Material included represents 75% completion of the design of the final scope of work.
5. Quantities for hook-up materials (electrical, mechanical and support) are shown on the
installation and support details included in subsection 2.11.c (Instrument Engineering
Design Drawings) of Section III.
9. Heat Tracing
1. Scope of supply for heat tracing shall be as defined in Section II, Table 1.
schematic representation of equipment and piping that has heat tracing that must be
removed as part of equipment and piping removal (heat tracing is indicated by dashed
lines above or below piping and around equipment).
representation of equipment and piping that must be heat traced as part of equipment and
piping installation.
4. Heat tracing system shall be steam type.
10. Insulation
1. Scope of supply for insulation materials and installation shall be as defined in Section II,
Table 1.
schematic representation of existing equipment and piping that has insulation that must
be removed as part of equipment and piping removal or modification (insulated
equipment is indicated by the word INSULATE and insulated piping is indicated by the
letters INS).
3. Refer to subsections 2.10.c (Piping Line List) and 2.10.l (Equipment Insulation
Summary) of Section III for a representation of equipment and piping that must be
insulated as part of equipment and piping installation.
4. Insulation material for non-heat traced piping and equipment shall be expanded perlite.
Insulation material for heat traced piping and equipment shall be mineral wool.
Removable insulation shall be used at control valves in insulated lines and manways on
insulated vessels.
5. Personnel protection for Lift Engager No. 1 and Lift Engager No. 2 shall be in the form
of metal guards.
Page 6 of 6
Rev. 2
PEMEX REFINACION
INVITATION TO BID
SECTION II
SCOPE OF WORK
PEMEX REFINACION
INVITATION TO BID
SECTION II.A
970086 SOS TABLE 1, SCOPE OF SUPPLY
2013-01-14

TABLE 1 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
Project# 970086
970086-SOS-Rev0
PROCUREMENT AND SITE CONSTRUCTION

The following tables identify the general split of the scope of work, services and supply
between CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR and UOP/CLIENT.
SCOPE OF WORK, SERVICES AND SUPPLY

1. General
1.1. Licenses and permits required for CONTRACTORs
work at JOBSITE
1.2. Labor, materials, supervision, services, tools,
consumable supplies, facilities, testing and testing
devices, utilities, insurance, and warehousing necessary
to implement the CCR SECTION revamp at JOBSITE
1.3. Receiving and storage of equipment, instrumentation,
and materials free-issued by UOP
1.4. Receiving and storage of materials purchased by
CONTRACTOR
1.5. Project management services required to implement the
CCR SECTION revamp as defined below:
a. Project manager to act as CONTRACTORs
commercial and technical liaison with UOP
throughout the project
b. Revamp project implementation and coordination
c. Revamp schedule monitoring and control
d. Document control for revamp activities
e. Monthly status report of procurement and
construction activities
1.6. Office facilities and access to phone, fax, and high speed
internet services for UOP Resident Engineer while at
CONTRACTORs office at JOBSITE
1.7. Construction plan including project schedule, HSE,
subcontracting, lifting plan, etc.
1.8. Scaffolding as required for complete project scope
1.9. Provide all safety equipment required to execute the
project scope.
1.10. Off-site disposal of demolished equipment and materials
2. QA/QC
2.1. Construction quality plan
2.2. Examination, testing, and inspection plan and record
2.3. Monitoring of documentation for materials and services
in order to verify compliance with project codes,
standards, drawings, and data
2.4. Witness testing as required
2.5. Approval of project NDE reports
2.6. Review of vendor and subcontractor systems for nonconformances
2.7. Inspection activities for major equipment installation and
modification
Page 1 of 9
UOP/CLIENT
CONTRACTOR
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rev. 2
2013-01-14


3. Equipment
3.1. Equipment procurement, including expediting, shipping
and payment
a. Vessels and Internals (New)
1. Lift Engager No. 1 (FA-512)
2. Disengaging Hopper (FA-513)
3. Lift Engager No. 2 (FA-517)
b. Heat Exchangers and Electric Heaters (New)
1. Regeneration Heater shell and bundle (BH-500)
2. Regeneration Heater power controller
3. Air Heater shell and bundles (BH-502)
4. Air Heater power controller
5. Lift Gas Blower Spillback Cooler (EA-516)
6. Vent Gas Cooler (EA-520)
7. Preheat Gas Heater (EA-521)
c. Rotating Equipment and Drivers (New)
1. Lift Gas Blower and motor (GB-503)
2. Regeneration Blower and motor (GB-505)
3. Variable frequency drive for the Regeneration
Blower motor
4. Organic Chloride Injection Pumps and motors
(FD-502)
5. Regeneration Cooler Fan and motor (GB-506)
6. Instrument Air Compressor Package
(GB-507A/B)
d. Miscellaneous Equipment (New)
1. Air Drier Package (ME-502)
2. Dust Collector (ME-503)
3. Booster Gas Coalescer (ME-504)
4. Oil Mist Lubrication System
3.2. Isolation and removal of existing equipment being
removed from service as shown in subsection 3.1.a
(Demolition Mechanical Flow Diagrams) of Section III in
accordance with subsection 3 (Demolition and
Modification) of Section III
3.3. Installation of new equipment shown in subsection
2.11.a (Mechanical Flow Diagrams) of Section III in
accordance with subsection 3 (Demolition and
Modification)
3.4. Modification of existing equipment as shown in
subsection 2.11.a (Mechanical Flow Diagrams) of
Section III in accordance with subsection 3 (Demolition
and Modification) of Section III and UOP specifications
and drawings
a. General
1. Site modification plan / schedule
2. Detailed field inspection of equipment
3. Verification of existing dimensions in field
Page 2 of 9
Project# 970086
970086-SOS-Rev0
UOP/CLIENT
CONTRACTOR
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rev. 2
2013-01-14


b. Reactor modification
1. Fabricate and install a new cylindrical shell at
the upper section of the reduction zone
2. Install one new vapor disengaging pipe that
goes between the reduction pot
3. Fabricate and install one new cone in the bottom
of the reduction pot
c. Regeneration Tower (FA-510) modification
1. Isolation of Regeneration Tower vessel and
disassembly of catalyst transfer pipes
2. Pulling and support of Regeneration Tower top
head and inner screen assembly
3. Supply of new inner screen, baffles, nozzles,
outlet pipe and multi-point thermocouples
4. Cutting and removal of existing screens,
nozzles, baffles, and outlet pipe
5. Lifting and lowering of new Regeneration Tower
components and discarded existing components
between grade and Regeneration Tower deck
6. Temporary rigging/support of new screens and
Burn Zone inlet nozzle during installation
7. Field installation of new Regeneration Tower
screens, nozzles and internals
8. Field installation of new multi-point
thermocouples
9. Replacement of Regeneration Tower top head
and inner screen assembly, and installation of
new catalyst transfer pipes
d. Surge Hopper (FA-515) modification
1. Isolation of Surge Hopper vessel
2. Supply of new inlet flow dampener, panel coils
and water supply/return nozzles (if needed)
3. Lifting and lowering of new Surge Hopper
components and discarded existing components
between grade and Surge Hopper deck
4. Removal of existing flow dampener and
installation new flow dampener
5. Removal of existing plate coils and installation of
new plate coils
6. Modification of cooling water inlet/outlet nozzles,
as needed
7. Reconnection of piping connected to the Surge
Hopper vessel
e. Regeneration Cooler (EA-515) modification
1. Lengthen the outer jacket
2. Replacement of expansion bellows, if needed
Page 3 of 9
Project# 970086
970086-SOS-Rev0
UOP/CLIENT
CONTRACTOR
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rev. 2
2013-01-14


4. Civil/Structural
4.1. Engineering/Documentation
a. Lifting / rigging study
b. Shop detail drawings for steel fabrication
4.2. Material procurement, including expediting, shipping,
and payment
a. Structural steel material listed in subsection 2.10.k
(Structural Steel Bill of Material) of Section III.
b. Temporary structural steel required to support and
brace equipment being removed, replaced or
modified in the existing structure during revamp work
c. All materials and equipment to install foundation in
accordance with subsections 2.4 (970086 R901F
Civil and Structural Steel) and 2.11.g (Structural
Steel and Civil Engineering Drawings) of Section III.
4.3. Installation / Assembly
a. Assembly and installation of new steel structure
alongside existing structure in accordance with
project specifications
b. Fireproofing of new steel structure in accordance
with project specifications
c. Temporary removal and replacement of steel in
existing structure as required to remove and replace
equipment and piping
d. Installation of new foundation in accordance with
subsections 2.4 (970086 R901F Civil and Structural
Steel) and 2.11.g (Structural Steel and Civil
Engineering Drawings) of Section III.
4.4. Inspection/Testing
a. Receiving and shop inspections to ensure correct
material receipt and utilization
b. Non destructive examination in accordance with
UOP specifications and CONTRACTORs
examination, testing, and inspection plan
5. Piping
a. Piping engineering design drawings (isometrics,
plans and elevations, etc.)
b. Piping spool drawings for fabrication
and payment
a. Piping materials listed in subsection 2.10.e (Piping
Bill of Materials) of Section III in accordance with
UOP pipe class specifications
b. Pipe support materials for piping systems (shoes,
guides, etc.) listed in subsection 2.10.i (Pipe Support
Bill of Material) of Section III.
Page 4 of 9
Project# 970086
970086-SOS-Rev0
UOP/CLIENT
CONTRACTOR
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rev. 2
2013-01-14


c.
Piping specialty items (engineered spring supports,

tagged steam traps, filler flanges, Dur O Lok
couplings and Y-strainers shown on UOPs
Mechanical Flow Diagrams)
Installation/Assembly
a. Isolation and removal of existing piping being
demolished as shown in subsection 3.1.a
(Demolition Mechanical Flow Diagrams) of Section
III.
b. Fabrication, assembly, and installation of new piping
system materials (piping, piping specialty items, pipe
supports) in the existing structure and in the new
structure as depicted in subsection 2.11.a
(Mechanical Flow Diagrams) of Section III in
accordance with UOP specifications
c. Modification of existing piping as required to
accommodate the revamp changes (e.g.,
lengthening, shortening, branching, etc.) in
accordance with UOP specifications
d. Increase length of booster gas steam jacket to Lift
Engager No. 2 as shown on drawing 970086-D112
in subsection 2.11.a (Mechanical Flow Diagrams) of
Section III.
e. Increase length of recycle gas steam jacket to
Catalyst Collector as shown on drawing 970086D105 in subsection 2.11.a (Mechanical Flow
Diagrams) of Section III.
b. Leak testing and non destructive examination in
accordance with UOP specifications and
CONTRACTORs examination, testing, and
inspection plan
6. Electrical
a. Electrical system material specifications and
engineering design drawings
b. Assessment of existing power, control and ground
cable
and payment
a. Electrical system materials listed in subsection
2.10.n (Electrical Bill of Material) of Section III.
b. Motor starters for new motors
Project# 970086
970086-SOS-Rev0
UOP/CLIENT
CONTRACTOR
5.3.
Page 5 of 9
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rev. 2
2013-01-14


6.3.
Project# 970086
970086-SOS-Rev0
UOP/CLIENT
a. Isolation and removal of electrical system materials
for equipment being demolished shown in
subsection 3.1.a (Demolition Mechanical Flow
Diagrams) of Section III in accordance with
subsection 2.2 (Electrical Installation) of Section III.
b. Installation of electrical system materials in
accordance with subsection 2.2 (Electrical
Installation) of Section III.
Rearrangement of cabinets and wiring in MCC as

needed for installation of new Regeneration Heater
and Air Heater control panels
d. Installation of variable frequency driver for
Regeneration Blower and integration with existing
MCC
e. Installation of new heater control panels for Air
Heater and Regeneration Heater in MCC room
f. Installation of motor starters for new motors in MCC
room
b. Electrical system test in accordance with UOP
specifications and CONTRACTORs examination,
testing, and inspection plan
7. Instrumentation
a. Instrumentation system material specifications and
engineering design drawings
and payment
a. Tagged instruments shown on the drawings in
subsection 2.11.a (Mechanical Flow Diagrams) of
Section III.
b. Board mounted and control room instruments shown
on the drawings in subsection 2.11.a (Mechanical
Flow Diagrams) of Section III.
c. Lock Hopper Control System (LHCS) software
modifications
d. Hook-up materials (mechanical, electrical, support)
shown on the installation and support details
included in subsection 2.11.c (Instrument
Engineering Drawings) of Section III.
e. Cables for all field wiring and homerun cables to
control room and MCC
f. Instrument junction boxes and splitter boxes as
required
c.
Page 6 of 9
CONTRACTOR
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rev. 2
2013-01-14


7.3.
a. Isolation and removal of existing instruments shown
in subsection 3.1.a (Demolition Mechanical Flow
Diagrams) of Section III and associated supports
and hook-up materials.
b. Installation of new instruments shown in subsection
2.11.a (Mechanical Flow Diagrams) and associated
supports and hook-up materials in accordance with
subsection 2.11.c (Instrument Engineering
Drawings) of Section III.
c. Implementation of LHCS software modifications
d. Installation of wiring between new field instruments

and new junction boxes in new structure and existing
structure
e. Installation of wiring between new junction boxes
and LHCS and/or client DCS
f. Installation of wiring between new heater control
panels and LHCS and/or client DCS
g. Installation and setup of communication between
LHCS and client DCS
h. Programming at client DCS to implement
new/modified logic
b. Instrumentation system test in accordance with UOP
specifications and CONTRACTORS examination,
testing, and inspection plan
c. Communication test between LHCS and client DCS
d. Site acceptance test of both LHCS and modified
client DCS
8. Cable Support System
a. Cable support system material specifications and
engineering design drawings (plans and elevations)
and payment
a. Electrical cable support system materials listed in
subsection 2.10.n (Electrical Bill of Material) of
Section III.
b. Instrument cable support system materials shown on
the details in subsection 2.11.c (Instrument
Engineering Design Drawings) of Section III.
8.3.
a. Installation of cable support system materials in
accordance with subsections 2.11.c (Instrument
Engineering Design Drawings) and 2.11.d (Electrical
Engineering Design Drawings) of Section III and
UOP specifications
Page 7 of 9
Project# 970086
970086-SOS-Rev0
UOP/CLIENT
CONTRACTOR
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rev. 2
2013-01-14


Inspection/Testing
9. Heat Tracing
a. Heat tracing engineering design drawings
and payment
a. Heat tracing materials for new heat traced
equipment and piping shown in subsection 2.11.a
(Mechanical Flow Diagrams) of Section III.
Project# 970086
970086-SOS-Rev0
UOP/CLIENT
CONTRACTOR
8.4
9.3.
9.4.
a. Isolation and removal of heat tracing materials from
equipment and piping being removed from service
as shown in subsection 3.1.a (Demolition
Mechanical Flow Diagrams) of Section III.
b. Installation of heat tracing materials on new heat
traced equipment and piping shown in subsection
2.11.a (Mechanical Flow Diagrams) of Section III.
Inspection/Testing
10. Insulation and Weather Shielding

a. Insulation and weather shielding system material
specifications and installation details
and payment
a. Insulation and weather shielding materials defined in
UOP specifications for insulated equipment and
piping shown in subsections 2.6 (970086 R907F
Insulation and Insulation Installation), 2.10.c (Piping
Line List) and 2.10.l (Equipment Insulation
Summary) of Section III.
10.3. Installation
a. Removal of insulation and weather shielding
materials from equipment and piping being removed
from service as shown in subsection 3.1.a
(Demolition Mechanical Flow Diagrams) of Section
III.
a. Installation of equipment insulation and weather
shielding materials on insulated equipment listed in
subsection 2.10.l (Equipment Insulation Summary) of
Section III in accordance with UOP specifications
b. Installation of piping insulation and weather shielding
materials on insulated lines listed in subsection
2.10.c (Piping Line List) of Section III in accordance
with UOP specifications
Page 8 of 9
Rev. 2
2013-01-14


10.4. Inspection
b. Inspection of insulation system per CONTRACTORs
examination, testing, and inspection plan
11. Protective Coating (Painting/Galvanizing)
a. Coating system selection, material specifications,
and installation specifications
11.2. Material Procurement, Including Expediting, Shipping,
and Payment
a. Protective coating materials for UOP supplied
equipment and instrumentation
b. Protective coating materials specified in UOP
coating system data sheets for CONTRACTOR
supplied items
11.3. Application
a. Surface preparation and application of coating
materials for UOP supplied equipment and
instrumentation
b. Surface preparation and application of coating
materials for CONTRACTOR supplied items in
accordance with UOP data sheets and specifications
c. Touch-up of coated items damaged during
installation (if required)
b. Dry film thickness testing for CONTRACTOR applied
paint systems in accordance with UOP specifications
and CONTRACTORs examination, testing, and
inspection plan
12. Drawings
12.1. Supply of all engineering and design drawings
12.2. As-built record drawings of work performed during
construction (hand marked hard copy)
12.3. Final update of engineering drawings with as-built
information
Page 9 of 9
Project# 970086
970086-SOS-Rev0
UOP/CLIENT
CONTRACTOR
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rev. 2
PEMEX REFINACION
INVITATION TO BID
SECTION II.B
PHOTOGRAPHS AND MODEL
Reactor Structure
CCR Unit
Location of the
New Structure
PHOTO 001
PHOTO 002
CCR STRUCTURE
REACTOR
STRUCTURE
PHOTO 003
CCR STRUCTURE
LOCATION OF NEW STRUCTURE
PHOTO 004
AREA DIRECTLY WEST OF THE EXISTING CCR

STRUCTURE
PHOTO 005
CCR AND REACTOR

STRUCTURES LOOKING
NORTHEAST
AREA TO THE SOUTH OF THE EXISTING CCR

AND REACTOR STRUCTURES
PHOTO 006
PHOTO-007
DETAIL DESIGN 3D MODEL - LOOKING NORTHEAST
Existing Structures - Green

New Structures - Blue
Existing CCR Structure

New Structure
PEMEX REFINACION
INVITATION TO BID
SECTION III
FABRICATION REQUISITION
2013-01-24
UOP Technical Requisition

Fabrication
1.
Page 1 of 3
970086 R060-0
General/Administrative/Safety Requirements
Modules and related goods and services shall be provided in accordance with
the following documents:
1. 970086 S011P-, SpecificationExecution Plan and Reporting
2. 970086 S060-, SpecificationModule Fabrication
3. 970086 S072, SpecificationReporting Shipping Damage, Shortage, and
Loss
4. 970086 S140A-0, SpecificationLanguage and Units
5. 970086 S140C-0, SpecificationDocuments for Custom-Designed Goods
and Services
6. 970086 S140V-0, SpecificationDocumentation Submittal
7. 970086 Project Schedule
8. Pemex Minatitlan Refinery Site Information
a. Map of Refinery Including Project Specific Locations
b. Entrance and Routing within the Refinery
9. Pemex Requirements
a. Applicable Standards and Codes
b. Minimal Indivisible Units Requirement
c. Provisions for Safety, Health and Environmental Protection
d. Country of Origin Requirements
2.
Fabrication/Installation
Fabrication/Installation shall be provided in accordance with the following
documents:
1. 970086 R601F-0, RequisitionInstrument Installation
2. 970086 R701F-0, RequisitionElectrical Installation
3. 970086 R801F-0, RequisitionPiping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and
Examination
4. 970086 R901F-0, RequisitionStructural-Steel and Concrete Construction
5. 970086 R905F-0, RequisitionPainting
6. 970086 R907F-0, RequisitionInsulation Supply and Installation
Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any
manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.
2013-01-24

Fabrication
Page 2 of 3
970086 R060-0
7. 970086 S999F-0, SpecificationCross-Discipline Clearance and Accessibility

8. 970086 Inspection Requirements
a. 970086 S150-0, SpecificationExamination, Testing, and Inspection
Planning
b. 970086 U060F-AFabrication Inspection Data Sheet
c. 970086 U601F-AInstrumentation Inspection Data Sheet
d. 970086 U701F-AElectrical Inspection Data Sheet
e. 970086 U801F-APiping Inspection Data Sheet
f.
970086 U901F-AStructural Steel Inspection Data Sheet
g. 970086 U907F-AInsulation Inspection Data Sheet

9. 970086 V060-0, Documentation Data Sheet Fabrication
10. 970086 Material Take-Offs
a. Mechanical Equipment List
b. Equipment Outline Drawings
c. Piping Line List
d. Piping Tie-In List
e. Piping Bill of Materials
f.
Piping Specifications
g. Piping Specialty Items

h. Valve Specifications
i.
Pipe Support Bill of Material
j.
Steam Tracing Bill of Material To be provided later
k. Structural Steel Bill of Material

l.
Equipment Insulation Summary
m. Instrument Bill of Material

n. Electrical Bill of Material
o. Civil Works Bill of Material To be provided later
11. 970086 Preliminary Drawings
a. Mechanical Flow Diagrams
b. General Arrangement Drawings
2013-01-24

Fabrication
Page 3 of 3
970086 R060-0
c. Instrument Engineering Design Drawings

d. Electrical Engineering Design Drawings
e. Heat Tracing Engineering Design Drawings
f.
Piping Engineering Design Drawings
g. Structural Steel and Civil Engineering Design Drawings
3.
Demolition and Modification

Demolition and Modification shall be provided in accordance with the following
documents:
1. 970086 Demolition Drawings
a. Demolition Mechanical Flow Diagrams
b. Demolition Instrument Drawings To be provided later
c. Demolition Electrical Drawings
d. Demolition Piping Drawings
2. 970086 Equipment Demolition and Modification Scopes
4.
Customer Specifications (Attached Separately)

All goods and services shall comply with the following documents:
1. List of Project Pemex Specifications
2. Pemex Specifications
5.
Conflicts
In case of conflicts among the documents in this Requisition, the document
order of precedence shall be as follows (from highest to lowest):
1. Bills of Material
2. UOP Specifications and Data Sheets
3. Engineering Design Drawings
4. Pemex Specifications
PEMEX REFINACION
INVITATION TO BID
SECTION 1
GENERAL/ADMINISTRATIVE/SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
2013-01-18
1.
UOPSpecification
Execution Plan and Reporting
Page 1 of 2
970086 S011P-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for project execution plan and reporting.
2.
Execution plan
1.
3.
a.
Objectives
b.
Schedule
c.
Organization for project
d.
Names of lead project personnel
2.
Approval of execution plan shall be obtained from UOP prior to start of work.
1.
Schedule shall include the following:
Schedule
2.
3.
4.
Project execution plan shall include the following:
a.
Work breakdown structure
b.
Start date and duration of each task
c.
Total duration of work
d.
Agreed upon dates for UOP-supplied data, approvals, and equipment
e.
Critical path method (CPM) dependencies
Fabrication/Installation schedule shall include subdivisions for the following:

a.
Foundation
b.
Demolition
c.
Structural steel
d.
Piping
e.
Instrumentation
f.
Electrical
g.
Insulation
h.
Procurement
i.
Equipment installation
j.
Pressure testing
k.
Site Pre-Shutdown Activities
l.
Shutdown Activities
Approved baseline schedule shall be frozen prior to the start of work.
Progress report
1.
Progress reports shall be provided monthly.
2.
Progress report shall include the following:

a.
Schedule with the following for each subdivision and total project:
Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner
or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.
2013-01-18
5.
UOPSpecification
Execution Plan and Reporting
1.
Comparison against baseline
2.
Actual start
3.
Actual finish
4.
Percentage of work completed
Page 2 of 2
970086 S011P-0
b.
Status of major milestones for period
c.
Procurement status reports
d.
Problem and issue areas with brief analysis
e.
Recovery plan, with cost impact, if project falls behind schedule
f.
Information needed from UOP
g.
Change order status
Progress photos
1.
Photos of progress on fabrication and installation shall be provided weekly.
2.
Progress photos shall include the following:

a.
Overall shots from each corner of the unit
b.
Close-up shots of tagged equipment and instruments as they are installed and
piped up
3.
File format shall be JPG.
4.
Image density shall be less than or equal to 200 DPI.
5.
There shall be one image per file.
6.
Photos shall be transmitted to via e-mail.
2013-01-29
1.
UOP Specification
Fabrication and Installation
Page 1 of 4
970086 S060-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for fabrication and installation of the
revamp components.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Definitions
1.
Contractor Fabricator and installation contractor executing scope of work
2.
Customer PEMEX Refinacion
3.
Site Gral. Lazaro Cardenas Refinery Minatitlan, Veracruz, Mexico
4.
Project PEMEX Minatitlan CCR Revamp
Customer Requirements
1.
Contractor shall follow all applicable specifications within this requisition including
all applicable Customer standards and codes referenced in section 1.9.a of 970086
R060
2.
Contractor shall provide Minimal Indivisible Units information per section 1.9.b of
970086 R060 for the entire scope of work.
3.
Contactor shall provide Country of Origin information for procured material and
equipment per section 1.9.d of 970086 R060
Labor/Qualifications
1.
Contractor shall provide all labor to manage and execute the project scope of work
2.
Contractor shall have an ASME R Stamp for performing alterations and repairs to
existing pressure vessels within the scope of work. ASME R Stamp shall be valid
for both shop and field work and Contractor shall be able to supply ASME R-1, R-2
or R-3 forms as applicable.
1.
UOP will have a dedicated on-site Safety Supervisor to coordinate and direct the
Contractors safety personnel.
2.
Contractor shall have an established safety program that meets or exceeds

requirements defined within the PEMEX Provisions for Safety, Health and
Environmental Protection.
3.
Contractor shall supply their labor force with the required safety gear and equipment
to complete the scope of work.
4.
The following site safety personnel are required:
Safety
a.
Safety Supervisor
b.
Confined Space Entry Monitor
c.
Hot Work Monitor
Schedule
1.
Contractors activities shall comply with the overall Project Schedule in section 1.7
of 970086 R060
2013-01-29
7.
UOP Specification
Site Execution
1.
UOP will have a staff of on-site personnel that will include a Construction Manager,
Contracts Manager, Administrative Assistant and Safety Supervisor.
2.
Contractor will interface with UOP to define scopes of work and execution. UOP is
responsible for interfacing with Customer regarding any discrepancies.
3.
Contractor will be required to obtain all refinery personnel and vehicle entry permits
for their labor force.
4.
Contractor will be required to apply and obtain all daily working permits from the
Customer.
5.
Supply all temporary off-site and on-site offices and work facilities, including all
equipment and materials, to execute the project scope of work.
6.
New structure and components within will be installed while the existing unit is
operating.
7.
Modifications to the existing unit will be performed during a planned Turnaround

outage in November of 2013. Refer to Section 1.7 of 970086 R060
8.
Space within the refinery will be provided for lay down, work facilities and storage
as indicated in 1.8. Contractor shall include any additional off-site space that will be
required to execute the work.
a.
8.
Page 2 of 4
970086 S060-0
The Project has requested 12,000 m2 (80m x 150m) on-site to be used as work
space and storage facilities. Refer to section 1.8.a
Procurement
Goods and services shall be provided by Contractor except as follows:
1.
9.
The following items shall be obtained from UOP:

a.
Tagged Equipment - as indicated on the Mechanical Flow Diagrams
b.
Tagged Piping Specialty Items as indicated on the Mechanical Flow Diagrams
c.
Tagged Instruments as indicated on the Mechanical Flow Diagrams
d.
Regeneration Tower (FA-510) inner screen, baffles, nozzles, outlet pipe and
multi-point thermocouples
e.
Surge Hopper (FA-515) inlet flow dampener and panel coils
f.
Dur-o-lok Couplings
g.
Power Control Panels
h.
Engineered pipe supports
Component receiving and storage

1.
Contractor shall have local facilities to receive and store equipment and materials.
2.
Components shall be received, inspected for damage and quantity, logged in, and
stored.
3.
Inconel, Hastalloy, and stainless steel material shall be segregated from each other
and carbon steel and galvanized material.
4.
Storage of component shall comply with component suppliers instructions.
2013-01-29
10.
UOP Specification
Page 3 of 4
970086 S060-0
Fabrication, Modification and Installation

10.1. Fabrication/Installation plan
1.
2.
Fabrication/Installation plan shall include the following:

a.
Sequence of assembly
b.
Component receiving, storage, and protection plan
c.
Protective coating plan
d.
Fabrication access plan
e.
Equipment-insertion plan
f.
Lifting plans
g.
Transportation plan
h.
Demolition plan
i.
Modification plan
Approval of plan shall be obtained from UOP prior to fabrication/installation.
10.2. Isolation of Inconel, Hastalloy, and Stainless Steel

Inconel, Hastalloy, and stainless steel shall be isolated from cutting, grinding, and
welding of galvanized material that is above or within 10 ft (3 m) of these materials.
10.3. Protective coating

1.
Protective coatings that are damaged during fabrication shall be repaired.
2.
Painting shall be completed prior to bolted connections being assembled.
3.
Approval for welding after painting shall be obtained from UOP.
10.4. Equipment installation
11.
1.
Carbon-steel slings shall not touch stainless-steel equipment.
2.
Equipment shall be installed per equipment-suppliers instructions.
3.
Equipment and related spare parts shall be protected from entry of dirt and moisture
and maintained per equipment suppliers instructions.
4.
Equipment supported from steel at grade shall have the lower nuts tack welded to the
supporting beam flange.
As-built documents
1.
Changes made to engineering design shall be marked in red pen on a copy of

engineering design documents.
2.
Changes shall show as-built condition.
3.
As-built documents shall be:

a.
Maintained by Contractor and available to visiting UOP personnel
b.
Provided to UOP at end of construction.
2013-01-29
12.
UOP Specification
Spare parts
1.
13.
Page 4 of 4
970086 S060-0
The following spare parts shall be provided:

a.
One set of permanent gaskets plus 10% for every size and class purchased for
the project.
b.
10% of piping and miscellaneous bolts, nuts, and washers to be utilized for field
installation.
References
The most recent edition, except as otherwise specified, of the following documents are
cited in this document.
None
2013-01-18
1.
UOP Specification
Reporting Shipping Damage, Shortage, and Loss
Page 1 of 1
970086 S072-0
Scope
This document defines requirements for reporting shipping damage, shortage, and loss.
2.
3.
4.
Receiving
1.
Shipments shall be inspected for visible damage and shortage upon arrival.
2.
Shipping damage and shortage shall be:

a.
Noted on carriers document before signing.
b.
Photographed
c.
Set aside for further inspection
d.
Reported
3.
If shipping damage is on packaging, only, cargo may be moved to inventory.
1.
Shipping damage and shortage to cargo shall be reported to UOPs assigned Modular
buyer and resident engineer by telephone and fax within one business day of receipt.
2.
Report shall contain the following as a minimum:
Reporting
a.
Material receipt number
b.
Date received
c.
Shipping company name
d.
Packing List
e.
Bill of lading
f.
Supplier name
g.
Item tag number(s)
h.
Description of damage or incorrect quantity
i.
Estimated value of the loss
j.
Location of damaged goods
k.
Container and seal number where applicable.
l.
Any other applicable information
Other
1.
Breaking of seal(s) on damaged container(s) shall be witnessed by UOP

representative.
2.
Damaged goods shall be stored until released by UOP representative.
3.
A recommendation for disposition (repair, destruction, or return) of damaged goods

shall be made after UOP inspection.
2012-10-08
1.
UOP Specification
Language, Units, and Documents
Page 1 of 3
970086 S140A-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for language, units, and documents.
2.
3.
Language
1.
Writing shall be in English language for technical documents.
2.
Writing shall be in Spanish language for nameplates.
1.
Values of physical quantities shall be expressed in MKS units.
2.
MKS units shall be defined as follows:
Units
a.
Temperature
b.
Pressure (gauge)
kg/cm(g)
c.
Pressure (absolute)
kg/cm(a)
d.
Mass
kg
e.
Volume
f.
Length
g.
Alternate Length
mm
h.
Liquid Relative Density
sp gr TC/15C
i.
Liquid Absolute Density kg/m at 15C
j.
Vapor Flowing Density
k.
Flowing Quantities
l.
4.
1.
Mass
kg/h
2.
Vapor
m/h
3.
Liquid
m/h
kg/m
Standard Quantities
1.
Vapor
normal m/h at 0C and 1.033 kg/cm(a)
2.
Liquid
std m/h at 15C
m. Enthalpy
kcal/kg
n.
Heat Rate
mm kcal/h
o.
Electrical Power
kW
p.
Viscosity
cP
Document identification
Document shall contain the following identification:
1.
Supplier or original-equipment-manufacturer name
2.
Supplier or original-equipment-manufacturer document designator
3.
Revision designator and date
2012-10-08
5.
6.
7.
UOP Specification
4.
Title
5.
Item tag number
Page 2 of 3
970086 S140A-0
Transmittal letter
1.
Transmittal letter shall be provided with document or documents.
2.
Transmittal letter shall contain the following information:

a.
Supplier name
b.
UOP purchase order number
c.
UOP Technical Requisition designator
d.
Supplier reference number
e.
Date of submittal
f.
Street address of location to which comments and approval should be returned
g.
Name and phone number of contact who can confirm receipt of comments and
approval
3.
Submitted document shall be listed in transmittal letter.
4.
For each document listed in the transmittal letter, the following shall be shown:
a.
b.
c.
Title
d.
Number of copies submitted
e.
Reason for submittal, which shall be one or the following:

1.
For bid
2.
For approval
3.
Final
4.
As-built
Reduced copies
1.
If C or D-size document is provided, a copy reduced to A or B size shall be provided.
2.
If A1 or A2-size document is provided, a copy reduced to A3 or A4 size shall be

provided.
Certification of final documentation

1.
2.
Final document shall be both of the following:

a.
Marked Certified for Construction
b.
Signed by a person authorized to bind supplier
Document shall not be certified for construction unless either of the following is true:
a.
It has been approved without comment.
2012-10-08
UOP Specification
b.
8.
Page 3 of 3
970086 S140A-0
If approved with comment, comments have been incorporated without

modification.
References
None
2012-10-08
1.
UOP Specification
Documents for Custom-Designed Goods and Services
Page 1 of 1
970086 S140C-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for documents.
2.
Revisions
1.
3.
a.
Change shall be clouded.
b.
A triangle, with the revision number or letter inside, shall abut cloud.
2.
If information on data sheet changes, an indication of which lines changed shall be

provided.
3.
If information not on data sheet or drawing changes, a markup showing changes shall
be provided.
a.
Addition shall be underlined.
b.
Deletion shall be struck through.
Native File Submittal

1.
4.
If information on drawing changes, the following shall apply:
Final submittal shall include the native file, if available.
Order-specific document
Document created specifically for the order shall comply with this section.
4.1.
Inapplicable information
Inapplicable information shall be excluded or crossed out.
4.2.
Document size
Document size shall be ANSI Y14.1 flat size A, B, C, or D.
5.
References
American National Standard
ANSI Y14.1, Decimal Inch Drawing Sheet Size and Format
2012-10-08
1.
UOP Specification
Electronic Documentation Submittal
Page 1 of 1
970086 S140V-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for submittal of documents in electronic
form for proposals and review.
2.
3.
Requirements
1.
Final documentation shall be submitted in both hard copy and electronic format.
2.
Electronic documentation shall be in both of the following formats:

a.
Adobe PDF file or TIFF file
b.
Native format documents, when available.
3.
Electronic files shall be converted directly into PDF or TIFF from the native file
rather than scanned.
4.
For multi-page documents, a single file containing all pages shall be provided.
5.
Background color shall be white. Text color, line work and diagram shall be black
unless color differentiation clarifies the document.
6.
File size should be kept to a minimum and shall not exceed 9 megabytes.
7.
The file name shall be the same as the paper document designator.
8.
File name shall include revision designator.
Transmittal letter
1.
Transmittal letter shall be provided with each document submittal.
PEMEX REFINACION
INVITATION TO BID
SECTION 1.7
970086 PROJECT SCHEDULE
PEMEX MINATITLAN
UOP ATMOSPHERIC CCR MODERNIZATION
PROJECT SCHEDULE
ID
Task Name
Reqn#
Duration
Start
Finish
Jul
PEMEX MINA CCR REVAMP SECTION SCHEDULE
88.2 wks
12-08-03
14-04-11
0 wks
12-08-03
12-08-03
CCR Schedule A Specs Complete
MOBILIZATION
44.8 wks
12-08-03
13-06-12
27
FRONT END ENGINEERING DESIGN PACKAGE (FEED)
22.6 wks
12-08-22
13-01-25
28
MFD's, GA's, PLOT PLAN, Specifications
22.6 wks
12-08-22
13-01-25
37
Pre-Design Specifications
18.6 wks
12-09-10
13-01-16
52
DETAILED DESIGN
26.4 wks
12-09-18
13-03-20
170
PROCUREMENT
58.4 wks
12-08-03
13-09-16
7 wks
12-08-03
12-09-21
171
DETAILED DESIGN SUBCONTRACT
177
ELECTRIC HEATERS/POWER CONTROLLERS
209
50.6 wks
12-09-10
13-08-28
187
VESSELS
301
51 wks
12-09-10
13-08-30
201
REGENERATION TOWER SCREEN
305
46 wks
12-09-10
13-07-26
210
TUBULAR (HAIRPIN) EXCHANGERS
401H
43.2 wks
12-09-10
13-07-08
219
SHELL & TUBE EXCHANGERS
401S
43.2 wks
12-09-10
13-07-08
228
REGENERATION COOLER DESIGN/FAB
410
47.6 wks
12-09-12
13-08-09
237
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS & DRIVERS
503
45.2 wks
12-09-10
13-07-22
246
INSTRUMENT AIR COMPRESSOR PACKAGE
510
51 wks
12-09-10
13-08-30
255
FANS & DRIVERS (BLOWERS)
514
53.2 wks
12-09-10
13-09-16
264
COMPRESSOR (LIFT GAS BLOWER)
532
40.6 wks
12-09-10
13-06-19
273
OIL MIST LUBE SYSTEM
533
36 wks
12-09-10
13-05-17
282
INSTRUMENTATION
44.4 wks
12-09-10
13-07-16
283
PRESSURE GAUGES (602)
602
26 wks
12-10-22
13-04-19
290
DIFFERENTIAL INSTRUMENTS (ELECTRONIC) (6604
34 wks
12-09-27
13-05-22
297
PRIMARY FLOW ELEMENTS (ORIFICE PLATES) 605
20.6 wks
12-10-22
13-03-13
306
THERMOCOUPLES & WELLS (606)
606
36 wks
12-10-29
13-07-05
315
TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS (609)
609
34 wks
12-09-27
13-05-22
322
NUCLEAR LEVEL INSTRUMENTS (613)
613
31.6 wks
12-09-27
13-05-06
332
CONTROL VALVES (GLOBE) 616
616
38.6 wks
12-09-27
13-06-24
342
V-BALL VALVES (Auto) 616V
616V
42.2 wks
12-09-10
13-07-01

970086 Pemex Mina Revamp 13.01.16
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
2012
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Critical Task
Baseline Critical
Milestone - Baseline
Summary
External Milestone
Current Schedule
Progress
Milestone - Actual
summary baseline
Deadline
Baseline
Milestone - Current
Penalty Milestone
External Milestone
1 of 5
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Wed 13-01-16
PEMEX MINATITLAN
PROJECT SCHEDULE
ID
Task Name
Reqn#
Duration
Start
Finish
Jul
351
ROTAMETERS (621)
621
30 wks
12-10-29
13-05-24
358
OXYGEN ANALYZERS (630)
630
29.8 wks
12-10-08
13-05-02
367
SPECIAL TEMP DETECT INSTR - REGEN TOWER640G
41.8 wks
12-09-27
13-07-16
376
MASS FLOW METER (642)
642
32.8 wks
12-10-08
13-05-23
385
BALL VALVES (B-BALL)(Auto & Manual) (671)
671
38.8 wks
12-09-27
13-06-25
394
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
807
33 wks
12-12-24
13-08-09
403
SPRING HANGERS
851
21 wks
13-02-21
13-07-17
410
DUROLOCK COUPLINGS
861
19 wks
13-02-26
13-07-08
417
COALESCER
913
38 wks
12-09-17
13-06-07
426
DUST COLLECTOR (Design, Internals, Housing)
923
41 wks
12-09-10
13-06-21
435
AIR DRYER
981
44.6 wks
12-09-10
13-07-17
444
STRUCTURAL STEEL
19 wks
13-03-14
13-07-25
447
SITE INSTALLATION SUBCONTRACT
8.2 wks
13-01-17
13-03-14
60.4 wks
12-08-03
13-09-30
58.8 wks
12-08-03
13-09-18
16 wks
13-06-11
13-09-30
453
EQUIPMENT & INSTRUMENTS SHIPMENTS
454
CONSOLIDATED SHIPMENTS
504
DIRECT SHIPMENTS
505
Ship Dust Collector (Housing & Internals)
923
4 wks
13-08-05
13-08-30
506
Ship S & T Exch to Site
401S
4 wks
13-06-11
13-07-08
507
Ship Elec Heaters to Site
209
4 wks
13-08-15
13-09-11
508
Ship Diseng Hopper to Site
301
4 wks
13-08-05
13-08-30
509
Ship Other Vessels to Site
301
4 wks
13-08-05
13-08-30
510
Ship Regen Tower Screen to Site
305
4 wks
13-07-01
13-07-26
511
Ship Regen Cooler to Site
410
4 wks
13-07-25
13-08-21
512
Ship Fans & Drivers to Site
514
6 wks
13-08-20
13-09-30
513
Ship Air Compressor to Site
510
4 wks
13-08-05
13-08-30
23 wks
13-03-15
13-08-22
11 wks
13-03-15
13-05-30
514
515
FABRICATION
PRE- FABRICATION DOCUMENTATION
516
Steel Fabricator Prepare Weld Procedures
8 wks
13-03-15
13-05-09
517
UOP Review and Approve Steel Fab Weld Pocedure
2 wks
13-05-10
13-05-23
518
Steel Fabricator Prepare Quality Plan
8 wks
13-03-15
13-05-09

Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
2012
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Critical Task
Baseline Critical
Summary
External Milestone
Current Schedule
Progress
Milestone - Actual
summary baseline
Deadline
Baseline
Milestone - Current
Penalty Milestone
External Milestone
2 of 5
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Wed 13-01-16
PEMEX MINATITLAN
PROJECT SCHEDULE
ID
Task Name
Reqn#
Duration
Start
Finish
Jul
519
UOP Review and Approve Steel fab Quality Plan
2 wks
13-05-10
13-05-23
520
Site Installation Contractor Prepare Piping Weld Pro
8 wks
13-03-22
13-05-16
521
UOP Review and Approve Piping Site Install Weld P
2 wks
13-05-17
13-05-30
522
Site Installation Contractor Prepare Quality Plan
8 wks
13-03-15
13-05-09
523
UOP Review/Approve Site Installation Contractor's Q
2 wks
13-05-10
13-05-23
17 wks
13-03-15
13-07-11
4 wks
13-03-15
13-04-11
16 wks
13-03-22
13-07-11
12 wks
13-03-15
13-06-06
524
STRUCT PLATE & PIPING BULKS PROCUREMENT
525
Procure Plate and Misc Steel
526
Piping Bulks Procurement
527
STRUCTURAL SHOP DETAIL DRAWINGS
528
Structural Shop Detail Dwgs
8 wks
13-03-15
13-05-09
529
Struct Shop Detail Dwgs - Grating
4 wks
13-05-10
13-06-06
8 wks
13-05-24
13-07-18
530
STRUCTURAL PRE-FAB
531
Structural Steel Pre-Fab
8 wks
13-05-24
13-07-18
532
Struct Steel Pre-Fab & Ship - Grating
6 wks
13-06-07
13-07-18
6 wks
13-07-12
13-08-22
6 wks
13-07-12
13-08-22
12 wks
13-03-22
13-06-13
12 wks
13-03-22
13-06-13
8 wks
13-03-22
13-05-16
58.8 wks
12-10-01
13-11-14
4 wks
13-03-22
13-04-18
58.8 wks
12-10-01
13-11-14
37.8 wks
12-10-01
13-06-20
10 wks
12-10-01
12-12-07
533
PIPING PRE-FAB
Pre-Fabricate Piping
534
535
INSTRUMENT & ELECTRICAL BULKS PROCUREMEN
536
Bulk Electrical Materials Procurement
537
Bulk Instr. Materials Procurement
538
SITE Pre-Shutdown Activities
539
Removal of Abandoned Equipment
540
New Structure Installation

Foundation
541
542
Soil Studies and Report
543
Foundation Design
5 wks
12-12-24
13-01-25
544
Mobilization, Grading and Demolition
2 wks
13-03-15
13-03-28
545
Pile Construction
4 wks
13-03-29
13-04-25
546
Pile Head Preparation and Header Excavation
4 wks
13-04-26
13-05-23
547
Header Construction
4 wks
13-05-24
13-06-20
8 wks
13-07-26
13-09-19
Structure Erection
548

Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
2012
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Critical Task
Baseline Critical
Summary
External Milestone
Current Schedule
Progress
Milestone - Actual
summary baseline
Deadline
Baseline
Milestone - Current
Penalty Milestone
External Milestone
3 of 5
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Wed 13-01-16
PEMEX MINATITLAN
PROJECT SCHEDULE
ID
Task Name
Reqn#
Duration
Start
Finish
Jul
549
Equipment Installation
13.2 wks
13-07-26
13-10-25
550
Lift Gas Blower
8 wks
13-08-13
13-10-07
551
Lift Gas Blower Spillback Cooler
8 wks
13-07-26
13-09-19
552
Booster Gas Coalescer
8 wks
13-08-13
13-10-07
553
Dust Collector
8 wks
13-09-02
13-10-25
554
Air Drier
8 wks
13-08-13
13-10-07
555
Preheat Gas Heater
8 wks
13-07-26
13-09-19
556
Vent Gas Cooler
8 wks
13-07-26
13-09-19
557
Disengaging Hopper
8 wks
13-09-02
13-10-25
558
Pipe Installation
4 wks
13-08-23
13-09-19
559
Instrument Installation
7 wks
13-09-20
13-11-07
560
Install Intruments
2 wks
13-09-20
13-10-03
561
Install Instrument Junction Boxes
2 wks
13-09-20
13-10-03
562
Install Main Instrument Cable Tray
2 wks
13-10-04
13-10-17
563
Install Conduit to User
3 wks
13-10-04
13-10-24
564
Install Instrument Wiring
2 wks
13-10-25
13-11-07
8 wks
13-09-20
13-11-14
Electrical Installation
565
566
Install Electrical Junction Boxes
2 wks
13-09-20
13-10-03
567
Install Main Electrical Cable Tray
2 wks
13-10-04
13-10-17
568
Install Lights
2 wks
13-09-20
13-10-03
569
Install Electrical Conduit to User
3 wks
13-09-20
13-10-10
570
Pull Electrical Wiring
4 wks
13-10-11
13-11-07
571
Install Grounding
4 wks
13-10-18
13-11-14
8 wks
13-09-20
13-11-14
12 wks
13-11-14
14-02-06
0 wks
13-11-14
13-11-14
Insulation Installation
572
573
SITE Shutdown Activities (Turnaround)
574
Start Shutdown
575
Remove Catalyst (by others)
2 days
13-11-15
13-11-18
576
Complete Unit Shut Down (by others)
3 days
13-11-19
13-11-21
577
Demolition of Existing Unit
2 wks
13-11-22
13-12-05
2 wks
13-11-22
13-12-05
Equipment Demolition
578

Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
2012
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Critical Task
Baseline Critical
Summary
External Milestone
Current Schedule
Progress
Milestone - Actual
summary baseline
Deadline
Baseline
Milestone - Current
Penalty Milestone
External Milestone
4 of 5
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Wed 13-01-16
PEMEX MINATITLAN
PROJECT SCHEDULE
ID
Task Name
Reqn#
Duration
Start
Finish
Jul
579
Electrical and Instruments Demolition
2 wks
13-11-22
13-12-05
580
Piping Demolition
2 wks
13-11-22
13-12-05
581
Equipment Modifications
8 wks
13-11-22
14-01-16
582
Surge Hopper
8 wks
13-11-22
14-01-16
583
Regeneration Tower
8 wks
13-11-22
14-01-16
584
Regeneration Cooler
8 wks
13-11-22
14-01-16
585
Reactor
8 wks
13-11-22
14-01-16
586
New Equipment Installation
8 wks
13-11-22
14-01-16
587
Regeneration Heater
8 wks
13-11-22
14-01-16
588
Air Heater
8 wks
13-11-22
14-01-16
589
Lift Engager No. 1
8 wks
13-11-22
14-01-16
590
Lift Engager No. 2
8 wks
13-11-22
14-01-16
591
Chloride Injection Pump
8 wks
13-11-22
14-01-16
592
Regeneration Blower
8 wks
13-11-22
14-01-16
593
Regeneration Cooler Fan
8 wks
13-11-22
14-01-16
594
Instrument Air Compressor
8 wks
13-11-22
14-01-16
595
Piping Installation and Tie Ins
6 wks
13-12-27
14-02-06
596
Instrument and Electrical Installations and Interconnectio
6 wks
13-12-27
14-02-06
597
MCC and Control Room Installations
6 wks
13-12-27
14-02-06
598
Mechanical Complete
0 wks
14-02-14
14-02-14
599
Commissioning, Start-Up and Performance Test Services
4 wks
14-02-17
14-03-14
600
Start-Up Completed
0 wks
14-03-14
14-03-14
601
Data Book Delivery
8 wks
14-02-17
14-04-11

Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
2012
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Critical Task
Baseline Critical
Summary
External Milestone
Current Schedule
Progress
Milestone - Actual
summary baseline
Deadline
Baseline
Milestone - Current
Penalty Milestone
External Milestone
5 of 5
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Wed 13-01-16
PEMEX REFINACION
INVITATION TO BID
SECTION 1.8
PEMEX MINATITLAN REFINERY SITE INFORMATION
PROJECT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS
Project has requested 700m2 (50m x 14m) of space

adjacent to the Existing CCR Site to locate temporary
offices. This location is beneath a pipe rack
Project has requested 12,000m2 (80m x 150m) to

use as work space and storage facilities.
Refinery Entrance and Transportation Routing

De la autopista MinatitlnVillahermosa (nuevo
acceso)
Gral. Lazaro Cardenas Refinery

Minatitlan, Veracruz, Mexico
Puerta
Administrativa
rea CCR
Portada
Oficina
Pemex
Residencia
rea propuesta
para almacn y
talleres
Route From Contractor Entrance to CCR Unit

Route to Pemex Residents Office
PEMEX REFINACION
INVITATION TO BID
SECTION 1.9
PEMEX REQUIREMENTS
APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND CODES

MINIMAL INDIVISIBLE UNITS REQUIREMENTS
PROVISIONS FOR SAFETY, HEALTH AND
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN REQUIREMENTS
REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS

MINATITLN, VER. MXICO
PROYECTO:
MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL.

LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE
MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.
ANEXO B
NORMAS Y CDIGOS APLICABLES

PROYECTO:

CDIGOS Y NORMAS APLICABLES.
Para el correcto desarrollo de los alcances del contrato, el contratista es responsable de cumplir de
acuerdo a sus alcances de manera estricta con todos los cdigos, normas, prcticas recomendadas,
especificaciones y los reglamentos aplicables, en caso de existir alguna discrepancia entre estos cdigos
y la ingeniera del proyecto. El contratista deber informar oficialmente a la supervisin de Pemex Refinacin dichas discrepancias y solicitarle los cdigos a aplicar. La supervisin de Pemex-Refinacin
determinar los cdigos que procedan.
Deber usarse la edicin/revisin y adendas ms recientes de los citados documentos. La lista incluida
se deber considerar como el requerimiento normativo mnimo exigido, a menos que se especifique lo
contrario en los anexos de la seccin II.
NORMAS OFICIALES MEXICANAS (NOM):
Regulacin tcnica de observancia obligatoria expedida por las dependencias competentes, conforme a
las finalidades establecidas en el artculo 40 de la Ley Federal Sobre Metrologa y Normalizacin, que
establece reglas, especificaciones, atributos, directrices, caractersticas, o prescripciones aplicables a un
producto, proceso, instalacin, sistema, actividad, servicio o mtodo de produccin u operacin, as como
aquellas relativas a la terminologa, simbologa, embalaje, marcado o etiquetado y las que se refieran a
su cumplimiento o aplicacin.
El contratista del servicio podr consultar todas las Normas Oficiales Mexicanas (NOM'S), para su
seleccin y aplicacin, a travs del portal de la Secretara de Economa, la cual mantiene un catalogo
actualizado de ellas
http://www.economia-noms.gob.mx
NORMAS MEXICANAS (NMX):
Documento de aplicacin voluntaria que elabora un Organismo Nacional de Normalizacin o alguna
Secretara, que prev para un uso comn y repetido, reglas, especificaciones, atributos, mtodos de
prueba, directrices, caractersticas, o prescripciones aplicables a un producto, proceso, instalacin,
sistema, actividad, servicio o mtodo de produccin u operacin, as como aquellas relativas a la
terminologa, simbologa, embalaje, marcado o etiquetado.
El contratista del servicio podr consultar todas las Normas Mexicanas (NMX'S), para su seleccin y
aplicacin, a travs del portal de la secretara de economa, la cual mantiene un catlogo actualizado de
ellas.
http://www.economia-noms.gob.mx
NORMAS DE REFERENCIA:
Son creadas por las entidades de la administracin pblica federal a travs de sus comits de
normalizacin y conforme a las cuales se adquieran, arrienden o contraten bienes o servicios, cuando las
normas mexicanas o internacionales no cubran los requerimientos de las mismas o bien, las consideren
inaplicables u obsoletas.
El contratista del servicio podr consultar todas las normas de referencia, a travs del portal de la
secretara de economa, la cual mantiene un catlogo actualizado de ellas.
El contratista del servicio deber aplicar las normas de referencia de PEMEX, stas se encuentran en el
portal de PEMEX, el cual mantiene un catlogo actualizado de ellas.
http://www.pemex.com.mx.

PROYECTO:

NORMAS O REGULACIONES TCNICAS EXTRANJERAS:
Es aquel documento normativo emitido por un organismo de Normalizacin Extranjero y que es de
aplicacin exclusiva en su pas de origen y que Pemex Refinacin puede utilizarlo como referencia de
conformidad con lo dispuesto en el artculo 28, fraccin IV del reglamento de la Ley Federal sobre
Metrologa y Normalizacin.
NORMAS Y ESPECIFICACIONES GENERALES.

Como mnimo, pero sin ser limitante, las normatividades a emplear durante el proyecto son las siguientes:
A. NORMAS OFICIALES MEXICANAS (NOM)

IDENTIFICACIN
NOM-005-STPS-1998
NOM-011-STPS-2001
NOM-015-STPS-2001
NOM-017-STPS-2008
NOM-020-STPS-2002
NOM-021-STPS-1994
NOM-022-STPS-2008
NOM-024-STPS-2001
NOM-025-STPS-2008
NOM-026-STPS-2008
NOM-027-STPS-2008
NOM-031-STPS-2011
NOM-100-STPS-1994
NOM-113-STPS-2009
NOM-115-STPS-2009
NOM-001-SEDE-2005
PEC-NOM-001-SEDE-2005
NOM-007-ENER-2004
NOM-014-ENER-2004.
NOM-016-ENER-2010
NOM-017-ENER/SCFI-2005
NOM-003-SCFI-2000
NOM-063-SCFI-2001
NOM-064-SCFI-2000
NOM-041-SEMARNAT-2006
DESCRIPCIN
Condiciones de seguridad e higiene en los centros de trabajo para el manejo, transporte y
almacenamiento de sustancias qumicas peligrosas.
Relativa a las condiciones de seguridad e higiene en los centros de trabajo donde se
genere ruido.
Relativa a la exposicin laboral de las condiciones trmicas elevadas o abatidas en los
centros de trabajo.
Relativa a la seleccin y manejo de equipo de proteccin personal para los trabajadores en
los centros de trabajo.
Recipientes sujetos a presin y calderas-funcionamiento-condiciones de seguridad.
Relativa a los requerimientos y caractersticas de los informes de los riesgos de trabajo que
ocurran, para integrar las estadsticas.
Electricidad esttica en los centros de trabajo condiciones de seguridad e higiene.
Relativa a las condiciones de seguridad e higiene en los centros de trabajo en donde se
generen vibraciones.
Condiciones de iluminacin en los centros de trabajo.
Colores y seales de seguridad e higiene e identificacin de riesgos de productos
conducidos por tuberas.
Condiciones de seguridad industrial en los trabajos de soldadura y corte.
Construccin-condiciones de seguridad y salud en el trabajo.
Establece las especificaciones de los extintores contra incendio a base de polvo qumico
seco.
Calzado de proteccin.
Especificaciones, mtodos de prueba y clasificacin de los Cascos de proteccin.
Instalaciones Elctricas (Utilizacin)
Procedimiento para evaluacin de la conformidad de la norma oficial mexicana NOM-001SEDE-2005.
Eficiencia energtica para sistemas de alumbrado en edificios no residenciales. (Nota:
aplicar slo para sistemas de control de alumbrado)
Eficiencia energtica de motores de corriente alterna monofsicos, de induccin, tipo jaula
de ardilla, en potencia nominal de 0,180 a 1,500 kW. Lmites, mtodos de prueba y
marcado.
Eficiencia energtica de motores de corriente alterna trifsicos de induccin, tipo jaula de
ardilla, de uso general, en potencia nominal de 0,746 a 343 kW. Lmites, mtodos de
prueba y marcado.
Eficiencia energtica de lmparas fluorescentes compactaslmites y mtodos de prueba.
Productos elctricosespecificaciones de seguridad.
Conductoresrequisitos de seguridad.
Luminarias para uso en interiores y exterioresespecificaciones de seguridad y mtodos de
prueba.
Que establece los lmites mximos permisibles de emisin de gases contaminantes
provenientes del escape de los vehculos automotores en circulacin que usan gasolina
como combustible.

PROYECTO:

IDENTIFICACIN
NOM-008-NUCL-2003
NOM-025/1-NUCL-2000
NOM-025/2-NUCL-1996
NOM-127-SSA1-1994
NOM-230-SSA1-2002
NOM-201-SSA1-2002
DESCRIPCIN
Que establece los niveles mximos permisibles de opacidad del humo proveniente del
escape de vehculos automotores en circulacin que usan diesel o mezclas que incluyan
diesel como combustible
Vehculos en circulacin que usan gas licuado o natural u otros combustibles alternos.
Que establece los lmites mximos permisibles de emisin de ruido provenientes del
escape de los vehculos automotores, motocicletas y triciclos motorizados en circulacin y
su mtodo de medicin.
Que establece los lmites mximos permisibles de emisin de ruido de las fuentes fijas y su
mtodo de medicin.
Control de la contaminacin radioactiva.
Requisitos para equipos de radiografa industrial Parte 1: Requisitos generales.
Requisitos para equipos de radiografa industrial Parte 2: Operacin.
Salud Ambiental. Agua para uso y consumo humano. Lmites permisibles de calidad y
tratamientos a que debe someterse el agua para su potabilizacin.
Salud ambiental. Agua para uso y consumo humano. Requisitos sanitarios que se deben
cumplir en los sistemas de abastecimiento pblicos y privados durante el manejo del agua.
Procedimientos sanitarios para el muestreo
Productos y servicios. Agua y hielo para consumo humano, envasados y a granel,
especificaciones sanitarias.
B. NORMAS MEXICANAS (NMX)

IDENTIFICACIN
NMX-B-254-CANACERO-2008
NMX-B-482-1991
NMX-C-030-ONNCCE-2004
NMX-C-072-1997-ONNCCE
NMX-C-090-1978
NMX-C-117-1978
NMX-C-155 ONNCCE 2004
DESCRIPCIN
Industria siderrgica-acero estructural-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba.
Industria siderrgica-malla electrosoldada de acero liso o corrugado para refuerzo de
concreto-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba
Capacitacin, calificacin y certificacin de personal de ensayos no destructivos.
Industria de la construccin-agregados-muestreo
Industria de la construccin-cemento hidrulico -mtodo de prueba para la determinacin
de la finura de cementantes hidrulicos mediante la malla 0,045 mm (No. 325)
Industria de la construccin-cementantes hidrulicos- determinacin de la finura de los
cementantes hidrulicos (mtodo de permeabilidad al aire)
Industria de la construccin-cementantes hidrulicos -determinacin de la consistencia
normal.
Industria de la construccin-cementos hidrulicos-determinacin del tiempo de fraguado de
cementantes hidrulicos (mtodo VICAT)
Industria de la construccin-cementos hidrulicos-determinacin de la resistencia a la
compresin de cementantes hidrulicos
Industria de la construccin-cementos hidrulicos-determinacin de la sanidad de
cementantes hidrulicos.
Industria de la construccin -Agregados- Determinacin de partculas ligeras. TII:
BUILDING INDUSTRY - AGGREGATES - DETERMINATION OF LIGHTWEIGHT PIECES
Industria de la construccin -Agregados para concreto -Anlisis granulomtrico-mtodo de
prueba. TII: BUILDING INDUSTRY - AGGREGATES FOR CONCRETE-GRANULOMETRIC
ANALYSIS-METHOD OF TEST
Industria de la construccin -Agregados-Determinacin de impurezas orgnicas en el
agregado fino. BUILDING INDUSTRY - AGGREGATES-DETERMINATION OF ORGANIC
IMPURITIES IN FINE AGGREGATE.
Mtodo de prueba para aditivos expansores y estabilizadores de volumen del concreto.
Industria de la construccin-agregados para concreto hidrulico-especificaciones y mtodos
de prueba.
Aditivos estabilizadores de volumen.
Industria de la construccin-agua para concreto-especificaciones.
Industria de la construccin-concreto-concreto hidrulico industrializado-especificaciones.
Industria de la construccin-concreto hidrulico-determinacin del revenimiento en el
concreto fresco.

PROYECTO:

IDENTIFICACIN
NMX-C-265- ONNCCE-2010
NMX-C-283-1982
NMX-C-305-1980
NMX-CC-9001-IMNC-2008
NMX-EC-17025-IMNC-2006
NMX-J-010/1-ANCE-2010
NMX-J-010-ANCE-2005
NMX-J-019-ANCE-2006
NMX-J-035-ANCE-2001
NMX-J-075/1-ANCE-1994
NMX-J-075/3-ANCE-1994
NMX-J-098-ANCE-1999
NMX-J-109-ANCE-2010
NMX-J-118/1-ANCE-2000
NMX-J-118/2-ANCE-2007
NMX-J-170-ANCE-2002
NMX-J-199-ANCE-2002
NMX-J-294-ANCE-2008
NMX-J-295/1-ANCE-2010
NMX-J-295/2-ANCE-2010
NMX-J-429-ANCE-2002
NMX-J-438-ANCE-2003
NMX-J-451-ANCE-2011
NMX-J-503-ANCE-2005
DESCRIPCIN
Industria de la construccin-agregados-determinacin de la masa especfica y absorcin de
agua del agregado grueso.
Industria de la construccin-agregados-determinacin de la masa especifica y absorcin de
agua del agregado fino-mtodo de prueba
Industria de la construccin - agregados - reduccin de las muestras de agregados
obtenidas en el campo, al tamao requerido para las pruebas. TII:BUILDING INDUSTRY AGGREGATES - REDUCING FIELD SAMPLES OF AGGREGATES FOR TESTING SIZE
Industria de la construccin-cemento hidrulico-determinacin de la reactividad potencial de
los agregados con lcalis de cementantes hidrulicos por medio de barras de mortero.
Industria de la construccin -Aditivos qumicos para concretoespecificaciones, muestreo y
mtodos de ensayo.
Industria de la construccin-agregados para concreto hidrulico-examen petrogrficomtodo de ensayo.
Industria de la construccin-agua para concreto-muestreo.
Industria de la construccin - agua para concreto anlisis
Industria de la construccin- agregados para concreto- descripcin de sus componentes
minerales naturales.
Industria de la construccin-concreto hidrulico para uso estructural.
Industria de la construccin-varilla corrugada de acero proveniente de lingote y palanquilla
para refuerzo de concreto-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba.
Industria de la construccin-cementantes hidrulicos-especificaciones y mtodos de
ensayo.
Sistemas de gestin de la calidad-requisitos.
Requisitos generales para la competencia de los laboratorios de ensayo y de calibracin.
Productos elctricosconductoresconductores con aislamiento termoplstico a base de
policlorur de vinilo con medidas internacionales-especificaciones.
Conductores-conductores con aislamiento termoplstico para instalaciones hasta 600 V.
Especificaciones.
Iluminacin-lmparas-lmparas incandescentes de filamento metlico para alumbrado
general-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba.
Conductoresalambres de cobre semiduro para usos elctricosespecificaciones.
Aparatos elctricos-Maquinas rotatorias-Parte 1: Motores de induccin de corriente alterna
del tipo rotor en cortocircuito en potencias de 0.062 a 373 Kw. Especificaciones.
Aparatos elctricos-Maquinas rotatorias-Parte 3: Mtodos de prueba para motores de
induccin de corriente alterna, del tipo de rotor en cortocircuito, en potencias desde 0.062
Kw.
Sistemas elctricos de potenciasuministrotensiones elctricas normalizadas.
Transformadores de corriente-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba
Productos elctricos-Tableros de alumbrado y distribucin en baja tensinespecificaciones
y mtodos de prueba.
Tableros-Tableros de distribucin de fuerza en baja tensinespecificaciones y mtodos de
prueba.
Conectadores-Conectadores de tipo compresin para lneas areas-especificaciones y
mtodos de prueba.
Terminales para cable aislado con pantalla para uso interior y exterior, 2.5 Kv a 230 Kv en
corriente alternaespecificaciones y mtodos de prueba.
Conductores-resistencia de aislamientomtodo de prueba.
Iluminacinlmparas fluorescentes para alumbrado generalespecificaciones y mtodos
de prueba.
Iluminacin-lmparas fluorescentes de doble base para alumbrado generalespecificaciones y mtodos de prueba.
Conductores-alambres, cables y cordones con aislamiento de PVC 80C, 90C y 105C,
para equipos elctricos-especificaciones.
Conductores-cables con aislamiento de policloruro de vinilo, 75 C y 90 C para alambrado
de tableros-especificaciones.
Conductores-conductores con aislamiento termfijo-especificaciones.
Iluminacin-balastros para lmparas de descarga de alta intensidad y lmparas de vapor de

PROYECTO:

IDENTIFICACIN
NMX-J-519-ANCE-2006
NMX-J-549-ANCE-2005
NMX-W-144-1996
NMX-W-147-1996
DESCRIPCIN
sodio de baja presin-especificaciones.
Conectadores-conectadores sellados-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba.
sistema de proteccin contra tormentas elctricas especificaciones, materiales y mtodos
de medicin
Escaleras metlicas porttiles-recomendaciones para seleccin, uso y cuidado.
Escaleras metlicas porttiles-informacin de seguridad.
C. NORMAS DE REFERENCIA (NRF).

IDENTIFICACIN
NRF-004-PEMEX-2003
NRF-006-PEMEX-2011
NRF-009-PEMEX-2004
NRF-010-PEMEX-2004
NRF-028-PEMEX-2004
NRF-027-PEMEX-2001
NRF-032-PEMEX-2005
NRF-034-PEMEX-2004
NRF-035-PEMEX-2005
NRF-036-PEMEX-2003
NRF-046-PEMEX-2003
NRF-048-PEMEX-2007
NRF-051-PEMEX-2006
NRF-053-PEMEX-2006
NRF-065-PEMEX-2006
NRF-070-PEMEX-2004
NRF-091-PEMEX-2007
NRF-095-PEMEX-2004
NRF-115-PEMEX-2006
NRF-125-PEMEX-2005
NRF-137-PEMEX-2006
NRF-138-PEMEX-2006
NRF-139-PEMEX-2006
NRF-140-PEMEX-2005
NRF-146-PEMEX-2011
NRF-147-PEMEX-2006
NRF-148-PEMEX-2005
NRF-149-PEMEX-2005
NRF-150-PEMEX-2005
NRF-152-PEMEX-2006
NRF-159-PEMEX-2006
NRF-160-PEMEX-2007
NRF-162-PEMEX-2006
NRF-163-PEMEX-2006
NRF-164-PEMEX-2006
NRF-168-PEMEX-2006
DESCRIPCIN
Proteccin con recubrimientos anticorrosivos a instalaciones superficiales de ductos.
Ropa de trabajo para trabajadores de Petrleos Mexicanos y Organismos Subsidiarios
Identificacin de productos transportados por tuberas o contenidos en tanques de
almacenamiento.
Espaciamientos mnimos y criterios para la distribucin de instalaciones industriales en
centros de trabajos de Petrleos Mexicanos y Organismos Subsidiarios.
Diseo y construccin de recipientes a presin.
Esprragos y tornillos de acero de aleacin y acero inoxidable para servicios de alta y baja
temperatura.
Sistemas de tuberas en plantas industriales-diseo y especificaciones de materiales.
Aislamiento trmico para altas temperaturas, en equipos, recipientes y tubera superficial.
Sistemas de tuberas en plantas industriales. Instalacin y pruebas.
Clasificacin de reas peligrosas y seleccin de equipo elctrico.
Protocolos de comunicacin en sistemas digitales de monitoreo y control.
Diseo de instalaciones elctricas en plantas industriales.
Sistemas de aire acondicionado.
Sistemas de proteccin anticorrosiva a base de recubrimientos para instalaciones
superficiales.
Recubrimientos A Base de Concreto A Prueba de Fuego en Estructuras y Soportes de
Equipos
Sistema de proteccin a tierra para instalaciones petroleras.
Grupo generador (planta de emergencia).
Motores elctricos.
Mangueras para servicio de contraincendio.
Sistemas fijos contra incendio cmaras de espuma.
Diseo de estructuras de acero.
Diseo de Estructuras de concreto
Soportes de concreto para tubera.
Sistemas de drenajes.
Tablero de distribucin en media tensin.
Apartarrayos tipo estacin.
Instrumentos de medicin para temperatura.
Secadores de aire para instrumentos.
Pruebas hidrostticas de tuberas y equipos.
Actuadores para vlvulas.
Cimentacin de estructuras y equipo.
Demoliciones y desmantelamientos.
Placas de orificio concntricas.
Vlvulas de control con actuador tipo neumtico.
Manmetros.
Bancos de resistencia.

PROYECTO:

D. ESPECIFICACIONES DE PEMEX
IDENTIFICACIN
3.243.01 (1976)
3.301.01 (1988)
800-18540-DE-SISOPA-001
DESCRIPCIN
ESCALERAS MARINAS Y RECTAS.
EMBALAJE Y MARCADO PARA EMBARQUE DE EQUIPOS Y MATERIALES.
DISPOSICIONES ESPECFICAS DE SISOPA PARA EL USO DE EQUIPOS DE
IZAJE (GRAS Y TORRES).
800-18540-DE-SISOPA-002
DISPOSICIONES ESPECFICAS DE SISOPA PARA TRABAJOS EN ALTURA.
800-80000-DCSIPA-L-001
LINEAMIENTOS PARA LA REALIZACIN DE OPERACIONES PELIGROSAS.
800-80000-DCSIPA-L-002
LINEAMIENTOS PARA EL CONTROL DE ACCESO Y CIRCULACIN DE

VEHCULOS AUTOMOTORES Y VEHCULOS PESADOS EN LOS CENTROS DE
TRABAJO.
CME-004 REV. 1
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA RECEPCIN DE MOTORES ELCTRICOS.
CME-010 REV. 3
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA PRUEBAS DE CAMPO PARA LA RECEPCIN DE

CABLES AISLADOS DE ALTA TENSIN
CME-035 REV. 2
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA PRUEBAS ELCTRICAS A ARRANCADORES MAYORES

DE 600 VOLTS.
CME-036 REV.1
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA PRUEBAS DE INTERRUPTORES TERMO MAGNTICOS.
CME-048 REV. 2
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA INSTALACIN DE PORTACANDADO, CANDADOS,

ETIQUETAS Y DOBLE SEGURO DE DESCONEXIN EN ARRANCADORES
CME-049 REV. 1
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA PUESTA EN SERVICIO DE UNA SUBESTACIN

ELCTRICA O DE UN CENTRO DE CONTROL DE MOTORES (INSTALACIONES
NUEVAS)
DG-ASIPA-SI-08600 REV. 1
DG-GPASI-IT-00202 REV. 2
DG-GPASI-IT-00204
DG-GPASI-IT-00400 REV. 1 (1996)
DG-GPASI-IT-04006 REV. 1 (1995)
DG-GPASI-SI-02510 REV. 3 (2008)
GUA PARA ORIENTAR LAS ACTIVIDADES DE DIFUSIN, EXPLICACIN Y

APLICACIN DE LA POLTICA DE SEGURIDAD INDUSTRIAL Y DE PROTECCIN
AMBIENTAL DE PETRLEOS MEXICANOS.
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA LA INSPECCIN DE TUBERA RECIN CONSTRUIDA
ANTES DE OPERAR.
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EL REGISTRO, ANLISIS Y PROGRAMACIN DE LA
MEDICIN PREVENTIVA DE ESPESORES.
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EFECTUAR LAS PRUEBAS HIDROSTTICAS A
TUBERAS Y EQUIPOS DE LAS INSTALACIONES DEPENDIENTES DE PEMEX
REFINACIN.
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EL ESTABLECIMIENTO DEL INDICE DE CONFIABILIDAD
DEL ESTADO FISICO DE LAS INSTALACIONES DE LOS CENTROS DE TRABAJO
DE PEMEX REFINACION
REGLAS DE SEGURIDAD PARA EFECTUAR TRABAJOS EN ESPACIOS
CONFINADOS.
DG-GPASI-SI-02520 REV. 1
GUA PARA EL VAPORIZADO DE LNEAS Y EQUIPOS DE PROCESO.
DG-GPASI-SI-02703 (1999)
DRENAJES EN LAS REAS INDUSTRIALES DE PEMEX REFINACIN.

SISTEMAS AUTOMTICOS PARA LA DETECCIN Y ALARMA POR FUEGO O POR
ATMSFERAS RIESGOSAS.
DG-GPASI-SI-06101 REV. 2 (2007)
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EL ANLISIS DE INCIDENTES. (RBOL DE CAUSAS DE

RAZ).
DG-GPASI-SI-08200 REV. 4 (2008)
REGLAMENTO DE SEGURIDAD PARA CONTRATISTAS.
REGLAMENTO DE SEGURIDAD FSICA

INDUSTRIALES DE PEMEX REFINACION.
DG-SASIPA-SI-04901 REV. 6 (2007)
ADMINISTRACIN
INDUSTRIALES
DE
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA
ACCIDENTES
CAMBIOS
EN
PARA
LAS
INSTALACIONES
INSTALACIONES
DE
INCIDENTES Y
PROCESOS
EL ANLISIS Y
REPORTE

PROYECTO:

IDENTIFICACIN
DG-SASIPA-SI-06920 REV. 3
GNT-SNP-E008
GNT-SNP-T001
GNT-SNP-T003
GNT-SSIME-G002-2008 REV. 0
GPASI-IT-0209
NO.2.425.01 (1991)
NO.2.431.01(1986)
P.1.0000.06 (2000)
P.1.0000.09 (2005)
P.2.0220.01 (2000)
P.2.0401.01 (1999)
P.2.201.01 (1990)
P.2.201.03 (1990)
P.2.211.03 (1998)
P.2.211.04 (1999)
P.2.220.02 (1999)
P.2.225.01(1990)
P.2.231.01 (1999)
P.3.0226.01(2000)
P.3.0403.01(2007)
P.3.223.01 (2000)
P.3.231.01 (1999)
P.3.346.01 (1983)
P.4.0217.03 (2000)
SP-SASIPA-SI-02310
DESCRIPCIN
GUA PARA LA COMUNICACIN DE ACCIDENTES.
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA VERIFICAR LAS CONDICIONES DE SEGURIDAD Y LOS
REQUERIMIENTOS AMBIENTALES ANTES DE INICIAR LA OPERACIN DE
INSTALACIONES INDUSTRIALES NUEVAS.
DISPOSICIN ADMINISTRATIVA PARA EL USO DE ROPA Y EQUIPO DE
PROTECCIN POR PERSONAL AJENO A PETRLEOS MEXICANOS.
RTULOS PARA EQUIPO ELCTRICO EN PLANTAS Y SUBESTACIONES
ELCTRICAS.
FLEXIBILIDAD DE TUBERAS.
DISEO DE TUBERAS.
LINEAMIENTOS PARA ELABORAR PLANOS Y DOCUMENTOS.
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EFECTUAR LA INSPECCIN DE TUBERAS DE
PROCESO Y SERVICIOS AUXILIARES EN OPERACIN DE LAS INSTALACIONES
DE PEMEX REFINACIN.
SISTEMAS DE TUBERAS DE REFINERAS DE PETRLEO.
SISTEMAS PARA AGUA DE SERVICIO CONTRAINCENDIO
ESTRUCTURACIN DE PLANOS Y DOCUMENTOS TCNICOS DE INGENIERA
EMBALAJE Y MARCADO DE EQUIPOS Y MATERIALES.
DISEO DE SISTEMAS DE TIERRAS.
SIMBOLOGA DE EQUIPO DE PROCESO.
SMBOLOS ELCTRICOS
SMBOLOS DE COMUNICACIONES ELCTRICAS
CABLES DE ENERGA MULTICONDUCTORES.
CABLES DE ENERGA MONOCONDUCTORES.
CANALIZACIONES ELCTRICAS Y TELEFNICAS.
CANALIZACIONES ELCTRICAS Y TELEFNICAS
ALUMBRADO PARA INSTALACIONES INDUSTRIALES.
CONSTRUCCIN DE CANALIZACIONES ELCTRICAS SUBTERRNEAS
(EMPALMES).
COLORES Y LETREROS PARA IDENTIFICACIN DE INSTALACIONES Y
VEHICULOS DE TRANSPORTE.
INSTALACIN DE SISTEMAS DE CONEXIN A TIERRA
INSTALACIN DE SISTEMAS DE ALUMBRADO PARA PLANTAS INDUSTRIALES.
PRUEBAS DE AISLAMIENTO EN CAMPO DE EQUIPO ELCTRICO.
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA LA AUTORIZACIN DE TRABAJOS EN INSTALACIONES
INDUSTRIALES DE LA SUBDIRECCIN DE PRODUCCIN.
E. CODIGOS, ESTANDARES Y PRCTICAS RECOMENDADAS

Deber usarse la edicin/revisin y adendas ms recientes de los citados documentos.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)

IDENTIFICACIN
ASME B1.1
ASME B16.1
ASME B16.10
ASME B16.11
ASME B16.20
ASME B16.21
ASME B16.25
ASME B16.34
ASME B16.36
ASME B16.47
DESCRIPCIN
UNIFIELD INCH SCREW THREADS (UN AND UNR THREAD FORM)
GRAY IRON PIPE FLANGES AND FLANGED FITTINGS CLASSES 25, 125, AND 250
FACE TO FACE END TO END DIMENSIONS OF VALVES.
FORGED FITTINGS, SOCKET-WELDING AND THREADED
METALLIC GASKETS FOR PIPE FLANGES. RING-JOINT, SPIRAL-WOUND, AND JACKETED
NONMETALLIC FLAT GASKETS FOR PIPE FLANGES
BUTTWELDING ENDS
VALVES-FLANGED, THREADED, AND WELDING END.
ORIFICE FLANGES.
LARGE DIAMETER STEEL FLANGES. NPS 26 THROUGH NPS 60 METRIC/INCH

PROYECTO:

IDENTIFICACIN
ASME B16.5
ASME B16.9
ASME B18.2.1
ASME B31.3
ASME B36.10M
ASME B36.19M
ASME B46.1
ASME MFC 3M
ASME PTC 19.5
ASME SEC. VIII DIV. 1
ASME SEC. VIII DIV. 2
DESCRIPCIN
STANDARD
PIPE FLANGES AND FLANGED FITTINGS. NPS 1/2 THROUGH NPS 24 METRIC/INCH
STANDARD
FACTORY-MADE WROUGHT BUTTWELDING FITTINGS
SQUARE, HEX, HEAVY HEX, AND ASKEW HEAD BOLTS AND HEX, HEAVY HEX, HEX
FLANGE, LOBED HEAD, AND LAG SCREWS (INCH SERIES)
PROCESS PIPING
WELDED AND SEAMLESS WROUGHT STEEL PIPE.
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE
SURFACE TEXTURE (SURFACE ROUGHNESS WAVINESS, AND LAY).
MEASUREMENT OF FLUID FLOW IN PIPES USING ORIFICE, NOZZLE, AND VENTURI.
FLOW MEASUREMENT
BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE, RULES FOR CONSTRUCTION OF PRESSURE
VESSELS.
BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE, ALTERNATIVE RULES.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

IDENTIFICACIN
DESCRIPCIN
FOR CARBON STEEL
ASTM A105/A105M
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
APPLICATIONS
ASTM A106/A106M
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS CARBON STEEL PIPE FOR HIGHTEMPERATURE SERVICE
ASTM A139/A139M
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRIC-FUSION (ARC)-WELDED STEEL PIPE (NPS

4 AND OVER)
ASTM A153/A153M
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ZINC COATING (HOT-DIP) ON IRON AND STEEL

HARDWARE.
ASTM A182/A182M
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR FORGED OR ROLLED ALLOY AND STAINLESS STEEL

PIPE FLANGES, FORGED FITTINGS, AND VALVES AND PARTS FOR HIGHTEMPERATURE SERVICE
ASTM A193/A193M
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ALLOY-STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL BOLTING FOR

HIGH TEMPERATURE OR HIGH PRESSURE SERVICE AND OTHER SPECIAL PURPOSE
APPLICATIONS.
ASTM A194/A194M
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON AND ALLOY STEEL NUTS FOR BOLTS FOR
HIGH PRESSURE OR HIGH TEMPERATURE SERVICE, OR BOTH.
ASTM A216/A216M
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL CASTINGS, CARBON, SUITABLE FOR FUSION

WELDING, FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
ASTM A217/217M
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL CASTINGS, MARTENSITIC STAINLESS AND

ALLOY, FOR PRESSURE-CONTAINING PARTS, SUITABLE FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE
SERVICE
ASTM A234/A234M
ASTM A240/240M
ASTM A269
ASTM A27/A27M
FORGINGS
FOR
PIPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR PIPING FITTINGS OF WROUGHT CARBON STEEL

AND ALLOY STEEL FOR MODERATE AND HIGH TEMPERATURE SERVICE
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CHROMIUM AND CHROMIUM-NICKEL STAINLESS
STEEL PLATE, SHEET, AND STRIP FOR PRESSURE VESSELS AND FOR GENERAL
APPLICATIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS AND WELDED AUSTENITIC STAINLESS
STEEL TUBING FOR GENERAL SERVICE
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL CASTINGS, CARBON, FOR GENERAL
APPLICATION

PROYECTO:

IDENTIFICACIN
ASTM A285/285M
DESCRIPCIN
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE VESSEL PLATES, CARBON STEEL, LOW
AND INTERMEDIATE-TENSILE STRENGTH
ASTM A307
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STEEL BOLTS AND STUDS, 60 000 PSI
TENSILE STRENGTH
ASTM A312/A312M
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS, WELDED, AND HEAVILY COLD WORKED

AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL PIPES
ASTM A320/320M
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ALLOY-STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL BOLTING

MATERIALS FOR LOW-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
ASTM A335/A335M
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS FERRITIC ALLOY-STEEL PIPE FOR HIGHTEMPERATURE SERVICE
ASTM A351/A351M
CONTAINING PARTS
ASTM A358/A358M
STANDARD
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ELECTRIC-FUSION-WELDED
AUSTENITIC
CHROMIUM-NICKEL STAINLESS STEEL PIPE FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE AND
GENERAL APPLICATIONS
ASTM A36/36M
FOR
CASTINGS,
AUSTENITIC,
FOR
PRESSURE-
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STRUCTURAL STEEL
ASTM A370
STANDARD TEST METHODS AND DEFINITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TESTING OF STEEL

PRODUCTS
ASTM A377
STANDARD INDEX OF SPECIFICATIONS FOR DUCTILE-IRON PRESSURE PIPE
ASTM A403/A403M
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR WROUGHT AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL PIPING

FITTINGS
ASTM A409/A409M
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR WELDED LARGE DIAMETER AUSTENITIC STEEL PIPE

FOR CORROSIVE OR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
ASTM A47/A47M
ASTM A500/A500M
ASTM A516/516M
ASTM A53/A53M
ASTM A532/532M
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR FERRITIC MALLEABLE IRON CASTINGS

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR COLD-FORMED WELDED AND SEAMLESS CARBON
STEEL STRUCTURAL TUBING IN ROUNDS AND SHAPES
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE VESSEL PLATES, CARBON STEEL, FOR
MODERATE- AND LOWER-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR PIPE, STEEL, BLACK AND HOT-DIPPED, ZINCCOATED, WELDED AND SEAMLESS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ABRASION-RESISTANT CAST IRONS
ASTM A536
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR DUCTILE IRON CASTINGS
ASTM A563
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON AND ALLOY STEEL NUTS
ASTM A74
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CAST IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
ASTM B443
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR NICKEL-CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM-COLUMBIUM

ALLOY (UNS N06625) AND NICKEL-CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM-SILICON ALLOY (UNS
N06219) PLATE, SHEET, AND STRIP.
ASTM B62
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR COMPOSITION BRONZE OR OUNCE METAL

CASTINGS
AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)

IDENTIFICACIN
API RP 500
DESCRIPCIN
RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR CLASSIFICATION OF LOCATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL

PROYECTO:

IDENTIFICACIN
DESCRIPCIN
INSTALLATIONS AT PETROLEUM FACILITIES CLASSIFIED AS CLASS I, DIVISION 1 AND
DIVISION 2
RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR CLASSIFICATION OF LOCATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS AT PETROLEUM FACILITIES CLASSIFIED AS CLASS I, ZONE 0, AND
ZONE 2
SIZING, SELECTION AND INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE-RELIEVING DEVICES IN
REFINERIES. PART 2 - INSTALLATION
SIZING, SELECTION AND INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE-RELIEVING DEVICES IN
REFINERIES. PART 1- SIZING AND SELECTION
PRESSURE-RELIEVING AND DEPRESSURING SYSTEMS
FLANGED STEEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
SEAT TIGHTNESS OF PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
VALVE INSPECTION AND TESTING
SPECIAL PURPOSE COUPLINGS FOR PETROLEUM, CHEMICAL, AND GAS INDUSTRY
SERVICES.
MANUAL OF PETROLEUM MEASUREMENT STANDARDS CHAPTER 14 NATURAL GAS
FLUIDS MEASUREMENT SECTION 3 CONCENTRIC, SQUARE-EDGED ORIFICE METERS
PART 1 GENERAL EQUATIONS AND UNCERTAINTY GUIDELINES
API RP 505
API RP 520
API STD 520
API STD 521
API STD 526
API STD 527
API STD 598
API STD 671
API MPMS 14.3.1
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

IDENTIFICACIN
ANSI/ISA 12.12.01
ANSI/ISA 60079-7 (12.16.01)
ANSI/ISA 60079-1 (12.22.01)
ANSI/ISA 60079-18 (12.23.01)
ANSI/ISA 60079-0 (12.00.01)
DESCRIPCIN
NONINCENDIVE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR USE IN CLASS I AND II, DIVISION 2
AND CLASS III, DIVISIONS 1 AND 2 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS
EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES-PART 7: EQUIPMENT PROTECTION BY INCREASED
SAFETY "E".
EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES-PART 1: EQUIPMENT PROTECTION BY FLAMEPROOF
ENCLOSURES D.
ELECTRICAL APPARATUS FOR USE IN CLASS I, ZONE 1 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED)
LOCATIONS: TYPE OF PROTECTION - ENCAPSULATION M
EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERESPART 0: EQUIPMENTGENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PIPE FABRICATION INSTITUTE (PFI).

IDENTIFICACIN
PFI ES-7
PFI ES-24
PFI ES-27
PFI ES-35
DESCRIPCIN
MINIMUM LENGTH AND SPACING FOR WELDED NOZZLES
PIPE BENDING METHODS, TOLERANCES, PROCESS AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
VISUAL EXAMINATION" THE PURPOSE, MEANING AND LIMITATION OF THE TERM
NONSYMMETRICAL BEVELS AND JOINT CONFIGURATIONS FOR BUTT WELDS
IDENTIFICACIN
AWS D1.1/D1.1M
DESCRIPCIN
STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE STEEL.
STANDARD WELDING TERMS AND DEFINITIONS INCLUDING TERMS FOR ADHESIVE
BONDING, BRAZING, SOLDERING, THERMAL CUTTING, AND THERMAL SPRAYING.
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

AWS A3.0
AWS A5.1/A5.1M
SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STEEL ELECTRODES FOR SHIELDED METAL ARC

WELDING.
AWS A5.5/A5.5M
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW-ALLOY STEEL ELECTRODES FOR SHIELDED METAL ARC

WELDING.
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY

(Estndares MSS)
IDENTIFICACIN
MSS SP 6
DESCRIPCIN
STANDARD FINISHES FOR CONTACT FACES OF PIPE FLANGES AND CONNECTING-END
FLANGES OF VALVES AND FITTINGS

PROYECTO:

IDENTIFICACIN
MSS SP 45
MSS SP 58
MSS SP 72
MSS SP 75
MSS SP 80
MSS SP 85
ANSI/MSS SP 69
MSS SP 97
DESCRIPCIN
BYPASS AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS MATERIALS, DESIGN, MANUFACTURE, SELECTION,
APPLICATION, AND INSTALLATION.
BALL VALVES WITH FLANGED OR BUTT-WELDING ENDS FOR GENERAL SERVICE
SPECIFICATION FOR HIGH-TEST, WROUGHT, BUTT-WELDING FITTINGS
BRONZE GATE, GLOBE, ANGLE, AND CHECK VALVES
GRAY IRON GLOBE& ANGLE VALVES, FLANGED AND THREADED ENDS
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS - SELECTION AND APPLICATION.
INTEGRALLY REINFORCED FORGED BRANCH OUTLET FITTINGS - SOCKET WELDING,
THREADED AND BUTTWELDING ENDS
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS AND ENGINEERS (IEEE)

IDENTIFICACIN
IEEE PUBL. 98
IEEE STD 4
IEEE STD C37.010
IEEE STD C37.20.1
IEEE STD C37.20.2
IEEE STD C37.20.2
IEEE STD C37.20.2B
IEEE STD C37.91
IEEE STD C37.96
IEEE STD C37.101
IEEE STD C37.102
IEEE STD 43
IEEE STD C50.12
IEEE-STD-56
IEEE STD C57.12.01
IEEE STD C57.12.23

IEEE STD C57.12.58
IEEE STD C57.12.91
IEEE STD C57.13
IEEE STD C57.19.100
IEEE STD C57.109
IEEE STD C57.116
IEEE STD C57.127
IEEE STD C62.92.1
IEEE STD C62.92.2
DESCRIPCIN
GUIDE FOR THE PREPARATION OF TEST PROCEDURES FOR THE EVALUATION AND
ESTABLISHMENT OF TEMPERATURE INDICES OF SOLID ELECTRICAL INSULATION
MATERIALS
IEEE STANDARD TECHNIQUES FOR HIGH-VOLTAGE TESTING.
IEEE APPLICATION GUIDE FOR AC HIGH-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS RATED ON A
SYMMETRICAL CURRENT BASIS
IEEE STANDARD FOR METAL-ENCLOSED LOW-VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER
SWITCHGEAR
IEEE STANDARD FOR METAL-CLAD AND STATION-TYPE CUBICLE SWITCHGEAR
IEEE STANDARD FOR METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
SUPPLEMENT TO IEEE STANDARD FOR METAL-CLAD AND STATION-TYPE CUBICLE
SWITCHGEAR: CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ACCURACIES
IEEE GUIDE FOR PROTECTIVE RELAY APPLICATIONS TO POWER TRANSFORMERS
IEEE GUIDE FOR AC MOTOR PROTECTION
IEEE GUIDE FOR GENERATOR GROUND PROTECTION
IEEE GUIDE FOR GENERATOR GROUND PROTECTION.
RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR TESTING INSULATION RESISTANCE OF ROTATING
MACHINERY
STANDARD FOR SALIENT-POLE 50 HZ AND 60 HZ SYNCHRONOUS GENERATORS AND
GENERATOR/MOTORS FOR HYDRAULIC TURBINE APPLICATIONS RATED 5 MVA AND
ABOVE
GUIDE FOR INSULATION MAINTENANCE OF LARGE ALTERNATING-CURRENT ROTATING
MACHINERY (10,000 KVA AND LARGER)
IEEE STANDARD GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DRY-TYPE AND POWER
TRANSFORMERS INCLUDING THOSE WITH SOLID CAST AND/OR RESIN-ENCAPSULATED
WINDINGS
IEEE STANDARD FOR TRANSFORMERSTYPE UNDERGROUND, SELF-COOLED, SINGLEPHASE. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS WITH SEPARABLE, INSULATED, HIGH-VOLTAGE
CONNECTORS; HIGH VOLTAGE (24 940 GRD Y / 14 400 V AND BELOW) LOW VOLTAGE
(240/120 V, 167 KVA AND SMALLER)
IEEE GUIDE FOR CONDUCTING A TRANSIENT VOLTAGE ANALYSIS OF A DRY-TYPE
TRANSFORMER COIL
IEEE STANDARD TEST CODE FOR DRY-TYPE DISTRIBUTION AND POWER
TRANSFORMERS
IEEE STANDARD REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
IEEE GUIDE FOR APPLICATION OF POWER APPARATUS BUSHINGS
IEEE GUIDE FOR LIQUID-IMMERSED TRANSFORMER THROUGH-FAULT-CURRENT
DURATION
IEEE GUIDE FOR TRANSFORMERS DIRECTLY CONNECTED TO GENERATORS
IEEE TRIAL-USE GUIDE FOR THE DETECTION OF ACOUSTIC EMISSIONS FROM PARTIAL
DISCHARGES IN OIL-IMMERSED POWER TRANSFORMERS
IEEE GUIDE FOR THE APPLICATION OF NEUTRAL GROUNDING IN ELECTRICAL UTILITY
SYSTEMS PART I- INTRODUCTION

PROYECTO:

IDENTIFICACIN
IEEE STD C62.92.3
IEEE STD C62.92.4
ANSI-IEEE STD 80
IEEE STD 81
IEEE STD 100
IEEE STD 112
IEEE-STD-115
IEEE STD 141
IEEE STD 142
IEEE STD 241
IEEE STD 242
IEEE STD 399
IEEE STD 446
IEEE STD 484
IEEE STD 488
IEEE STD 493
IEEE STD 519
IEEE STD 522
IEEE STD 525
IEEE STD 602
IEEE STD 605
IEEE STD 665
IEEE STD 666
IEEE STD 738
IEEE STD 739
IEEE 802.3
IEEE STD. 802-5-89
IEEE STD. 802-7-89
IEEE STD 1100
IEEE STD. 1110
DESCRIPCIN
SYSTEMS PART II- GROUNDING OF SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR SYSTEMS
SYSTEMS, PART III- GENERATOR AUXILIARY SYSTEMS.
SYSTEMS PART IV- DISTRIBUTION
IEEE GUIDE FOR SAFETY IN AC SUBSTATION GROUNDING
IEEE GUIDE FOR MEASURING EARTH RESISTIVITY, GROUND IMPEDANCE, AND EARTH
SURFACE POTENTIALS OF A GROUND SYSTEM.
THE IIIE STANDARD DICTIONARY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS TERMS
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD / IEEE STANDARD TEST PROCEDURE FOR POLYPHASE
INDUCTION MOTORS AND GENERATORS.
TEST PROCEDURES FOR SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES PART I ACCEPTANCE AND
PERFORMANCE TESTING PART II TEST PROCEDURES AND PARAMETER
DETERMINATION FOR DYNAMIC ANALYSIS
IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR ELECTRIC POWER DISTRIBUTION FOR INDUSTRIAL
PLANTS RED BOOK
IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR GROUNDING OF INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL
POWER SYSTEMS GREEN BOOK
IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS IN COMMERCIAL
BUILDINGS. GRAY BOOK.
IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR PROTECTION AND COORDINATION OF INDUSTRIAL
AND COMMERCIAL POWER SYSTEMS. BUFF BOOK.
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL POWER SYSTEMS ANALYSIS
IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR EMERGENCY AND STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS
FOR INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL APPLICATIONS. ORANGE BOOK.
IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR INSTALLATION, DESIGN, AND IMPLEMENTATION OF
VENTED LEAD-ACID BATTERIES FOR STATIONARY APPLICATIONS.
STANDARD DIGITAL INTERFACE FOR PROGRAMABLE INSTRUMENTATION.
IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR DESIGN OF
RELIABLE INDUSTRIAL AND
COMMERCIAL POWER SYSTEMS GOLD BOOK.
IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND REQUIREMENTS FOR HARMONIC CONTROL IN
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM
GUIDE FOR TESTING TURN INSULATION OF FORM-WOUND STATOR COILS FOR
ALTERNATING-CURRENT ELECTRIC MACHINES
IEEE GUIDE FOR THE DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF CABLE SYSTEMS IN SUBSTATIONS
IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR ELECTRIC SYSTEMS HEALTH CARE FACILITIES.
WHITE BOOK.
IEEE GUIDE FOR DESIGN OF SUBSTATION RIGID-BUS STRUCTURES
IEEE GUIDE FOR GENERATING STATION GROUNDING
IEEE DESIGN GUIDE FOR ELECTRIC POWER SERVICE SYSTEMS FOR GENERATING
STATIONS
IEEE STANDARD FOR CALCULATING THE CURRENT-TEMPERATURE RELATIONSHIP OF
BARE OVERHEAD CONDUCTORS
IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT IN INDUSTRIAL AND
COMMERCIAL FACILITIES.
BRONZE BOOK.
STANDARD
FOR
INFORMATION
TECHNOLOGY
TELECOMMUNICATIONS
AND
INFORMATION EXCHANGE BETWEEN SYSTEMS LOCAL AND METROPOLITAN AREA
NETWORKS SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS PART 3: CARRIER SENSE MULTIPLE ACCESS
WITH COLLISION DETECTION (CSMA/CD) ACCESS METHOD AND PHYSICAL LAYER
SPECIFICATIONS
STANDARD FOR LOCAL AREA NETWORK.
RECOMENDED PRACTICE BROADBAND LOCAL AREA NETWORK
IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR POWERING AND GROUNDING ELECTRONICS
EQUIPMENT. ESMERALD BOOK.
GUIDE FOR SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR MODELING PRACTICES IN STABILITY
ANALYSES

PROYECTO:

IDENTIFICACIN
DESCRIPCIN
IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR SIZING NIKEL-CADMIUM BATTERIES FOR
STATIONARY APPLICATIONS
IEEE GUIDE FOR THE SELECTION AND SIZING OF BATTERIES FOR UNINTERRUMPIBLE
POWER SYSTEMS
IEEE GUIDE FOR INSTALLATION METHODS FOR GENERATING STATION CABLES
IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR INSTALLATION DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF
VALVE-REGULATED LEAD-ACID STORAGE BATTERIES FOR STATIONARY APPICATIONS
IEEE GUIDE FOR FIRE HAZAR ASSESSMENT OF ELECTRICAL INSULATING MATERIALS IN
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS
IEEE GUIDE FOR IMPROVING THE LIGHTNING PERFORMANCE OF TRANSMISSION LINES
IEEE GUIDE FOR PARTIAL DISCHARGE MEASUREMENT IN POWER SWITCHGEAR
IEEE STANDARD FOR INSULATION COORDINATION-DEFINITIONS, PRINCIPIES AND RULES
IEEE STD 1115

IEEE STD 1184
IEEE STD 1185
IEEE STD 1187
IEEE STD 1221
IEEE STD 1243
IEEE STD 1291
IEEE STD 1313.1
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

IDENTIFICACIN
NEMA 250
NEMA IC56-78
NEMA ICS 6
NEMA MG 1
NEMA MG 2
NEMA PB 1
NEMA PB 2
NEMA PE 1
NEMA PE 5
NEMA SG 3
NEMA SG 4
NEMA SG 5
NEMA SG 6
NEMA SM23
NEMA VE 1
NEMA VE 2
NEMA WD6
DESCRIPCIN
ENCLOSURES FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (1000 VOLTS MAXIMUM)
ENCLOSURE FOR INDUSTRIAL CONTROL AND SYSTEMS.
INDUSTRIAL CONTROL AND SYSTEM ENCLOSURES.
MOTORS AND GENERATORS
SAFETY STANDARD AND GUIDE FOR SELECTION, INSTALLATION, AND USE OF
ELECTRICAL MOTORS AND GENERATORS
PANELBOARDS
DEADFRONT DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEMS (UPS)-SPECIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE
VERIFICATION
UTILYTY BATTERY CHARGERS
POWER SWITCHING EQUIPMENT
ALTERNATING HIGH-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
POWER SWITCHGEAR ASSEMBLIES
POWER SWITCHING EQUIPMENT
STEAM TURBINES FOR MECHANICAL DRIVE SERVICE.
METAL CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS
METAL CABLE TRALY INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
WIRING DEVICESDIMENSIONAL SPECIFICATIONS
WELDING RESEARCH COUNCIL (WRC)

IDENTIFICACIN
WRC No. 107 BULLETIN
WRC No. 297 BULLETIN
WRC NO. 368 BULLETIN
DESCRIPCIN
LOCAL STRESS IN SPHERICAL AND CYLINDRICAL SHELLS DUE TO EXTERNAL
LOADINGS IN NOZZLES.
CYLINDER TO CYLINDER INTERSECTIONS (NOZZLE FLEXIBILITY).
STRESS IN INTERSECTING CYLINDERS SUBJECTED TO PRESSURE.
EXPANSIN JOINT MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATON (EJMA)

IDENTIFICACIN
EJMA
DESCRIPCIN
STANDARDS OF EXPANSION JOINT MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION, INC.
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC. (UL)

IDENTIFICACIN
UL 6
UL 6A
UL 50
UL 83
UL 508
DESCRIPCIN
ELECTRICAL RIGID METAL CONDUIT-STEEL
ELECTRICAL RIGID METAL CONDUITALUMINUM, RED BRASS, AND STAINLESS STEEL
ENCLOSURES FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, NON-ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
THERMOPLASTIC-INSULATED WIRES AND CABLES
INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

PROYECTO:

UL 698A
UL 698
UL 886
UL 913
UL 1203
UL 1604
UL 1778
INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANELS RELATING TO HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS

INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT FOR USE IN HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS
OUTLET BOXES AND FITTINGS FOR USE IN HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS
INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS AND ASSOCIATED APPARATUS FOR USE IN CLASS I, II,
AND III, DIVISION 1, HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION-PROOF AND DUST-IGNITION-PROOF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR USE IN
HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR USE IN CLASS I AND II, DIVISION 2, AND CLASS III HAZARDOUS
(CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEMS
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)

IDENTIFICACIN
ASCE/SEI 7-10
DESCRIPCIN
MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS FOR BUILDINGS AND OTHER STRUCTURES.
COMISIN FEDERAL DE ELECTRICIDAD (CFE)

IDENTIFICACIN
CFE SECCIN C.1.3
CFE SECCIN C.1.4
DESCRIPCIN
MANUAL DE DISEO DE OBRAS CIVILES SECCIN C.1.3.- DISEO POR SISMO
MANUAL DE DISEO DE OBRAS CIVILES SECCIN C.1.4.- DISEO POR VIENTO
F. LEGISLACIN APLICABLE.
La legislacin aplicable pero sin ser limitativa que regir el proyecto se menciona a continuacin:
DOCUMENTO
Ley General del Equilibrio Ecolgico y la Proteccin al Ambiente.
Reglamento de la Ley General del Equilibrio Ecolgico y la Proteccin al
Ambiente en Materia de reas Naturales Protegidas.
Ambiente en Materia de Autorregulacin y Auditoras Ambientales
Ambiente en Materia de Evaluacin del Ambiental.
Ambiente en Materia de Ordenamiento Ecolgico.
Ambiente en Materia de Prevencin y Control de la Contaminacin de la
Atmsfera.
Ambiente en Materia de Registro de Emisiones y Transferencia de
Contaminantes.
ACTUALIZACIN
ltima reforma publicada DOF 28-01-2011
Ley de Aguas Nacionales
Reglamento de la ley de Aguas Nacionales

Ley General para la Prevencin y Gestin Integral de los Residuos
Ley Federal Sobre Metrologa y Normalizacin
Reglamento de la Ley Federal Sobre Metrologa y Normalizacin
Ley del Seguro Social
Ley Federal de Derechos

Ley de Desarrollo Regional y Urbano del Estado de Nuevo Len.
ltima reforma publicada P.O. 19-01-2011
Ley Ambiental del Estado de Nuevo Len
ltima reforma publicada P.O. 03-06-2011.
Ley General de Salud
Ley Federal del Trabajo

PROYECTO:

DOCUMENTO
Reglamento Federal de Seguridad, Higiene y Medio Ambiente de Trabajo.
ACTUALIZACIN
Ley de Petrleos Mexicanos
DOF 28-11-2008
Reglamento de la Ley de Petrleos Mexicanos

Disposiciones administrativas de contratacin en materia de adquisiciones,
arrendamientos, obras y servicios de actividades sustantivas de carcter
productivo de Petrleos Mexicanos y Organismos Subsidiarios.
Reglamento de Seguridad e Higiene de Petrleos Mexicanos y Organismos
Subsidiarios.
DOF 04-09-2009
DOF 06-01-2010
Ao 2007

PROYECTO:
MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO
CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN,
MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.
ANEXO U
UMIS (UNIDADES MNIMAS INDIVISIBLES)
1 de 6
2 de 6
3 de 6
4 de 6
5 de 6
6 de 6

PROYECTO:
MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500, DE LA REFINERA

GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA
DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.
ANEXO G
DOCUMENTACIN REQUERIDA POR LAS
FUENTES DE FINANCIAMIENTO
1 de 9

PROYECTO:

Anexo G:
Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento
1. Introduccin
Para llevar a cabo el desarrollo de los programas de operacin e inversin de
Petrleos Mexicanos, Petrleos Mexicanos o cualquier entidad financiera y/o
filial que Petrleos Mexicanos designe para tal efecto, recurre a los mercados
financieros para obtener parcial o totalmente los fondos necesarios para
financiar las obligaciones derivadas de la ejecucin de dichos proyectos y
programas.
En este sentido, y dado que para la utilizacin de ciertos instrumentos
financieros se requiere de documentacin e informacin detallada y especfica
sobre los bienes y/o servicios que se estn suministrando y financiando, los
Contratistas y Proveedores deben entregar a Pemex Refinacin, o a quin ste
le indique, la documentacin e informacin correspondiente. A esta
documentacin e informacin se le denomina Documentacin Requerida por las
Fuentes de Financiamiento (la Documentacin).
La participacin de los Contratistas y Proveedores en la obtencin y
presentacin de la Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento
es fundamental para la utilizacin eficiente de estos crditos, lo cual le permite a
Petrleos Mexicanos continuar con el desarrollo de sus proyectos, generando
ms oportunidades de negocio para los Contratistas y Proveedores.
El objetivo de este Anexo G es el de informar a los Contratistas y Proveedores,
de manera general, sobre la Documentacin que debe presentar a Pemex
Refinacin, o a quin ste le indique. Adicionalmente, el Instructivo de Petrleos
Mexicanos y sus Organismos Subsidiarios para la Entrega de la Documentacin
Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento, (el Instructivo) mismo que les
fue proporcionado oportunamente, detalla de manera especfica los formatos y
documentos que se deben recabar y presentar. El Instructivo vigente tambin se
encuentra
disponible
en
la
pgina
Internet
de
Pemex:
(www.pemex.com/proveedores/documentacion).
Es importante sealar que el Contratista deber entregar al (a las) rea(s)
responsable(s) (Mdulo(s) de Financiamiento) de Pemex Refinacin
la
2 de 9

PROYECTO:

Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento (documentos y/o

documentos electrnicos), que en su caso corresponda.
Si el Contratista ha cumplido con la entrega de la Documentacin Requerida por
las Fuentes de Financiamiento, el rea responsable (Mdulo de
Financiamiento):
a) registrar en los sistemas sobre dicho cumplimiento, con lo que el
Contratista podr continuar con los trmites de pago de su(s)
factura(s), o
b) emitir el Comprobante de Seguimiento de Documentacin, el cual
formar parte de la documentacin que el Contratista presente para
continuar con los trmites de pago de su(s) factura(s).
Pemex Refinacin no estar obligado a dar trmite al pago de su(s) factura(s)
cuando el Contratista injustificadamente no entregue la Documentacin
Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento que corresponda.
El Contratista debe considerar las acciones necesarias para la obtencin y
presentacin correcta y oportuna a Pemex Refinacin de la Documentacin.
Asimismo, el Contratista debe informar, con la debida anticipacin, a sus
proveedores, subcontratistas y a cualquier otra empresa que le suministre,
directa o indirectamente, bienes y/o servicios para el cumplimiento del presente
contrato, las obligaciones y sus necesidades de informacin, a que se refiere el
presente Anexo G, as como a lo indicado en el Instructivo de Petrleos
Mexicanos y sus Organismos Subsidiarios para la Entrega de la Documentacin
Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento.
La Documentacin que debe proporcionar el Contratista depende del pas de
origen de los bienes y/o servicios que se suministren y/o utilicen para el
cumplimiento del objeto del presente contrato.
2.
Fuentes de Financiamiento
Petrleos Mexicanos puede acceder a diversas fuentes de financiamiento, ya

sea directamente, o a travs de cualquier entidad financiera y/o filial que
Petrleos Mexicanos designe para tal efecto. Estas lneas de crdito constituyen
3 de 9

PROYECTO:

fuentes de financiamiento alternativas a las utilizadas por el gobierno federal, las

cuales por ley, deben utilizarse preferentemente. Sobresalen, entre otras en lo
que se refiere a la Documentacin, las lneas de crdito garantizadas y/o
aseguradas por Agencias de Crdito a la Exportacin (ECAs).
2.1
Lneas de Crdito Garantizadas o Aseguradas por

Agencias de Crdito a la Exportacin (ECAs)
Dado que un porcentaje significativo de los suministros y servicios utilizados en

la industria petrolera son de importacin, la utilizacin de este tipo de lneas es
fundamental para el desarrollo y continuidad de los proyectos de Petrleos
Mexicanos y Organismos Subsidiarios.
Es importante sealar que el uso de este tipo de lneas no condiciona a los
Contratistas o Proveedores a utilizar bienes y/o servicios de importacin; sin
embargo, si el Contratista o Proveedor utiliza bienes y/o servicios importados
directa o indirectamente, Petrleos Mexicanos est obligado a financiar el pago
de los mismos preferentemente a travs de lneas de crdito garantizadas o
aseguradas por Agencias de Crdito a la Exportacin (ECAs). Estas lneas son
de uso exclusivo para Petrleos Mexicanos.
A continuacin se incluye, para fines informativos, una relacin de las Agencias
de Crdito a la Exportacin, con las cuales se tiene relacin, o con las que
potencialmente Petrleos Mexicanos podr suscribir lneas de crdito.
Nombre
Siglas
Pas
Export-Import Bank of the United

States
Ex-Im Bank
Estados Unidos de Amrica
EDC
ECGD
Canad
Reino Unido
JBIC
Japn
NEXI
Japn
HERMES
GIEK
ATRADIUS
Alemania
Noruega
Holanda
SACE
Italia
Export Development Canada

Export Credits Guarantee Department
Japan Bank for International
Cooperation
Nippon Export and Investment
Insurance
Hermes Kreditversicherungs-AG
Guarantee Institute for Export Credits
Atradius
Istituto per i Servizi Assicurativi e il
Credito all'Esportazione
4 de 9

PROYECTO:

Compagnie Franaise d Assurance
pour le Commerce Extrieur
Compaa Espaola de Seguros de
Crdito a la Exportacin, S.A.
Export-Import Bank of Korea
Export Risk Guarantee Agency
Finnvera plc
Export Kredit Fonden
Oesterreichische Kontrollbank
Aktiengesellschaft
Exportkreditnamnden
Companhia de Seguro de Crditos
S.A
3.
COFACE
Francia
CESCE
Espaa
K-Exim
ERG
Finnvera
EKF
Repblica de Corea
Suiza
Finlandia
Dinamarca
OeKB
Austria
EKN
Suecia
COSEC
Portugal
Cdula sobre el Pas de Origen de los Bienes y/o Servicios.

Mediante esta Cdula, el Contratista debe proporcionar a Pemex Refinacin,
la informacin detallada sobre el pas de origen de los bienes y/o servicios
que se utilicen para dar cumplimiento al objeto del contrato, as como
informacin sobre las personas fsicas y/o morales y/o extranjeras que le
suministren, directa o indirectamente, dichos bienes y/o servicios.
La Cdula sobre el Pas de Origen de los Bienes y/o Servicios, presentada
con anterioridad a la firma del presente contrato, se integra al presente
contrato como Anexo F, en la inteligencia de que Pemex Refinacin podr
solicitar al Contratista cualquier aclaracin o informacin adicional relativa a
la Cdula a que se refiere esta clusula, durante la vigencia del contrato.
Asimismo, en caso de que la informacin contemplada en dicha Cdula
llegara a modificarse durante la vigencia de este contrato, el Contratista se
obliga a hacerla del conocimiento de Pemex Refinacin , inmediatamente
despus de que el Contratista tenga conocimiento de la modificacin, lo que
no implicar realizar una modificacin al presente contrato.
La Cdula sobre el Pas de Origen de los Bienes y/o Servicios deber ser
requisitada atendiendo las indicaciones contenidas en el Instructivo de
Petrleos Mexicanos y sus Organismos Subsidiarios para la Entrega de
Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento.
5 de 9

PROYECTO:

La informacin presentada por el Contratista en dicha Cdula, deber ser

congruente con aquella informacin tcnica y econmica incluida en su oferta
y en el presente contrato.
4.
Documentacin para la Utilizacin de Lneas de Crdito

Garantizadas o Aseguradas por Agencias de Crdito a la
Exportacin
La Documentacin depende del pas de origen de los bienes y/o servicios y
generalmente consiste en copias, documentos originales y/o documentos
electrnicos de: Facturas, Certificados de Origen, Documentos de Embarque,
Evidencias de Pago, Cartas Aclaratorias, Contratos Comerciales, entre otros.
En las secciones 4.1 a 4.3 del presente documento, se indica, de manera
general, la Documentacin segn el pas de donde procedan los bienes y/o
servicios. En el Instructivo de Petrleos Mexicanos y sus Organismos
Subsidiarios para la Entrega de la Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes
de Financiamiento, (el Instructivo), mismo que les fue proporcionado
oportunamente, se detallan, de manera especfica, los formatos y
documentos que se deben recabar y presentar. El Instructivo tambin se
encuentra
disponible
en
la
pgina
Internet
de
Pemex:
(www.pemex.com/proveedores/documentacion).
Pemex Refinacin
informar oportunamente al Contratista, mediante
comunicacin oficial, cul ser el (las) rea(s) responsable(s) (Mdulo(s) de
Financiamiento) en donde el Contratista deber entregar la Documentacin
Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento correspondiente a este
contrato.
El Contratista deber entregar al(a las) rea(s) responsable(s) (Mdulo(s) de
Financiamiento) de Pemex Refinacin la Documentacin Requerida por las
Fuentes de Financiamiento, que en su caso corresponda.
Si el Contratista ha cumplido con la entrega de la Documentacin Requerida
por las Fuentes de Financiamiento, el rea responsable (Mdulo de
Financiamiento):
a) registrar en los sistemas sobre dicho cumplimiento, con lo que el
Contratista podr continuar con los trmites de pago de su(s)
factura(s), o
6 de 9

PROYECTO:

b) emitir el Comprobante de Seguimiento de Documentacin, el cual

formar parte de la documentacin que el Contratista presente para
continuar con los trmites de pago de su(s) factura(s).
Pemex Refinacin no estar obligado a dar trmite al pago de su(s)
factura(s) cuando el Contratista injustificadamente no entregue la
Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento que
corresponda.
La Documentacin entregada por el Contratista estar sujeta a la revisin
detallada del(de los) Mdulo(s) de Financiamiento, de la Direccin
Corporativa de Finanzas de Petrleos Mexicanos, de las ECAs y/o del
Banco Agente correspondiente, por lo que, Pemex Refinacin podr solicitar
a el Contratista cualquier modificacin, aclaracin o informacin adicional
relativa a la Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento.
De la misma forma, el Contratista acepta que, para ciertos casos, la
Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento deber ser
entregada a la persona (Banco Agente, Agencia de Crdito a la Exportacin,
Direccin Corporativa de Finanzas, etc.) que Pemex Refinacin le indique
oportunamente.
4.1. Documentacin para bienes y/o servicios procedentes

de los Estados Unidos de Amrica
El Ex-Im Bank de Estados Unidos de Amrica solicita actualmente la
siguiente informacin:
Factura Maestra Electrnica (e-Master Invoice) en archivo electrnico
formato PDF.
Certificado del Exportador (Exporters Certificate) en original.
Anti-Lobbying Certificate en original.
Datos de los tres documentos anteriores, en archivo electrnico formato
Excel.
Copia del conocimiento de embarque martimo.
Cartas Aclaratorias, en algunos casos especficos.
7 de 9

PROYECTO:

Otra informacin necesaria para identificar la procedencia, uso y forma

de pago de los bienes y/o servicios.
En el Instructivo de Petrleos Mexicanos y sus Organismos Subsidiarios
para la Entrega de la Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de
Financiamiento, se incluyen los formatos especficos, instrucciones y
ejemplos de los documentos antes mencionados.

de Canad, Europa y Asia
Export Development Canada (EDC) as como las ECAs de los pases
europeos y asiticos solicitan la informacin y documentacin siguiente para
que Petrleos Mexicanos y/o sus Organismos Subsidiarios pueda hacer uso
de los recursos de las lneas de crdito garantizadas por dichas Instituciones:
Nombre completo y direccin de los Exportadores y/o de los

Subcontratistas y/o Comercializadores y/o Importadores Mexicanos
que utilicen y/o suministren bienes y/o servicios con contenido
canadiense, europeo o asitico.
Copia de los Contratos firmados entre el Exportador y la contraparte.
Breve descripcin de los bienes y/o servicios.
Monto estimado de las importaciones.
Nombre y datos de los contactos.
Evidencia de pago al Exportador.
Informacin sobre aspectos ambientales.
Informacin adicional y/o evidencia documental razonable que pueda
solicitar el EDC y las ECAs de otros pases.
Es importante sealar que el Contratista y/o Exportador deber entregar la

documentacin a Pemex Refinacin
o a quien ste le indique. La
informacin general deber entregarse, mediante archivo electrnico en
formato Excel, antes del embarque de los bienes o del inicio de la prestacin
de los servicios, segn corresponda, de acuerdo con el Instructivo de
Petrleos Mexicanos y sus Organismos Subsidiarios para la Entrega de la
Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento.
8 de 9

PROYECTO:


de otros pases, incluyendo Mxico
Documentacin requerida por otros Agentes Financieros y/o Petrleos
Mexicanos:
En caso de bienes y/o servicios procedentes de Mxico o regiones
diferentes a Estados Unidos, Canad, Europa y Asia, se requiere
bsicamente la misma informacin que para ECAs de Canad, Europa
y Asia. Sin embargo, slo se solicitar caso por caso, despus de
analizar la informacin del Anexo denominado Cdula sobre el Pas de
Origen de los Bienes y/o Servicios.
En caso necesario, se podr solicitar lo siguiente:
Mayor informacin para verificar el origen de los bienes.
Copia de las Facturas Comerciales Individuales.
9 de 9

PROYECTO:
MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO
CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN,
MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.
ANEXO J
DISPOSICIONES EM MATERIA DE SSPA
1 de 26
SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS
COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD
SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD
INDICE
CONCEPTO
ADMINISTRATIVAS
Organigrama de SSPA del Contratista
Programa de SSPA del Contratista
Poltica de SSPA
Identificacin y Cartilla de Capacitacin
Aula de Capacitacin
Programa de Capacitacin
Permisos de Trabajo
Suministro de Equipo de Proteccin Personal
Archivo especfico de SSPA de la Obra
Funciones y Obligaciones del Responsable de SSPA del Contratista
Funciones y Obligaciones del Supervisor de SSPA del Contratista
Evaluaciones de SSPA
PUNTO
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
SEGURIDAD
II
Almacenamiento, Manejo y Uso de Cilindros de gases comprimidos

Equipos de Seguridad y Herramientas para la Obra
Personal, Equipo y Materiales para Proteccin Contraincendio
Equipo de Proteccin Personal Respiratoria
Trabajos en Espacios Confinados
Equipo de Proteccin Personal para Trabajos Elctricos
Equipos de Izaje y Materiales
Delimitar reas de Riesgo
Indicadores de Viento
Transito Interior de Vehculos en Instalaciones de Pemex
Andamios
Escaleras
Excavaciones
Personal y Equipo para Rescate
Actos y condiciones inseguras
Trabajos de Corte y Soldadura
Instalaciones Elctricas Provisionales
Orden y Limpieza en las reas de Trabajo
Materiales y Sustancias Peligrosas, Almacenamiento, Manejo y Uso Adecuado
Delimitar Instalaciones Provisionales
Restricciones en las Comunicaciones
Alumbrado Provisional
SALUD
Exmenes Mdicos a Personal de Nuevo Ingreso
Personal Mdico para la Obra
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
III
1
2
2 de 26
Bitcora de Servicios Mdicos

Condiciones Trmicas Elevadas
Exmenes Mdicos a Operadores de Equipo
Baos Porttiles
Fosas para drenaje
Hielo y Agua Purificada
Instalaciones Temporales de Servicios
Operadores de Vehculos para Transporte de Materiales y Residuos Peligrosos
Vibraciones
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL
IV
Ruido
Emisin de Contaminantes de Vehculos
Descarga de Aguas Residuales
Gestin Integral de Residuos
Atencin a las Condicionantes de la Autoridad Ambiental
Identificacin
Indicadores de Accidentabilidad
1
2
3
4
5
Figura 1
Tabla 1
3 de 26
DISPOSICIONES EN MATERIA DE SEGURIDAD, SALUD Y PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL (SSPA), PARA LA

GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE,
PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO
El Contratista realizar toda la Obra objeto de este Contrato en materia de Seguridad, Salud
y Proteccin Ambiental, en apego a: la Ley Federal del Trabajo, al Reglamento Federal de
Seguridad, Higiene y Medio Ambiente de Trabajo, a la Ley General de Salud y su
Reglamento, a la Ley General del Equilibrio Ecolgico y la Proteccin al Ambiente y sus
Reglamentos; a la Ley General para la Prevencin y Gestin Integral de los Residuos y su
Reglamento, a la Ley de Aguas Nacionales y su Reglamento, a las Normas Oficiales
Mexicanas (NOMs), (en especial la NOM-031-STPS-2011.- Construccin-Condiciones de
seguridad y salud en el trabajo), Normas Mexicanas (NMXs) y Normas de Referencia de
PETRLEOS MEXICANOS en materia de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental; al
Reglamento de Seguridad e Higiene de Petrleos Mexicanos y Organismos Subsidiarios, a
los Reglamentos y Procedimientos de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental de PEMEX
REFINACIN y al Reglamento de Seguridad, Salud en el trabajo y Proteccin Ambiental
para Contratistas y Proveedores de PEMEX REFINACIN DG-SASIPA-SI-08200, adems
pondr en prctica sus procedimientos y polticas aplicables en la materia, empleando el
personal especializado, con experiencia en su funcin y debe conocer los riesgos existentes
en el Proyecto.
El Contratista debe contar con una Poltica en materia de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin
Ambiental, para el contrato, acorde a la de PETRLEOS MEXICANOS y difundir ambas
polticas a todo su personal, as como al de sus Subcontratistas.
PEMEX REFINACIN se reserva el derecho de requerir al Contratista, la sustitucin o
remocin, de cualquier persona del Organigrama o de sus subcontratistas para lo Obra, que
incumpla los requerimientos de seguridad establecidos en este contrato, a cuyo efecto el
Contratista se obliga dentro de un trmino no mayor de diez das naturales a partir de la
solicitud de PEMEX REFINACIN, para sustituir o remover, as como para proponer para
efectos de autorizacin al personal que lo sustituir.
El Contratista debe tener pleno conocimiento que de incumplir los aspectos sealados en
este Anexo, as como los requerimientos que se deriven de los anlisis de riesgo de trabajo,
el Contratista se obliga a corregir estas desviaciones y PEMEX REFINACIN tendr el
derecho de interrumpir los trabajos por razones de seguridad, hasta que se corrija la
desviacin, sin que el atraso que se origine por cualquiera de estas circunstancias de lugar a
prorrogas o diferimientos del programa de ejecucin de los trabajos, ni su interrupcin por
estas causas, dar lugar al pago de gastos no recuperables o cualquier otro concepto.
El horario de trabajo del personal del Contratista estar sujeto a la aprobacin de la
Residencia de Obra.
Debido a la ubicacin del sitio donde se desarrollar la Obra, el Contratista, adems de
cumplir con las disposiciones establecidas en el presente documento, debe dar cumplimiento
a los lineamientos, polticas e instrucciones que en materia de SSPA establezca el Centro de
trabajo.
4 de 26
Para garantizar la Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental durante el desarrollo de la Obra,

el Contratista ser responsable de realizar las actividades contratadas cumpliendo y sin ser
limitativo, con todas y cada una de las siguientes disposiciones:
I. ADMINISTRATIVAS.
1. El Contratista debe contar con un Organigrama de todo el personal de Seguridad, Salud y
Proteccin Ambiental (SSPA) que participe en la Obra, en el cual se presente su
estructura, funciones y responsabilidades. En dicho Organigrama debe especificarse con
claridad la relacin directa del Responsable de SSPA, con la mxima autoridad del
Contratista en la Obra; dicho Organigrama, debe incluir a los Supervisores de SSPA, los
cuales debern ser contratados por el Contratista directamente, al menos uno al inicio de
la Obra y uno ms por cada 50 trabajadores propios y/o subcontratados, o bien cuando
por el riesgo de los trabajos requiera supervisin de SSPA continua. En este sentido
personal de SSPA contratado directamente por los subcontratistas no sern tomados en
cuenta en la contabilidad del personal de SSPA que debe proporcionar el Contratista.
En las clusulas del contrato entre el Contratista y sus Subcontratistas, se deber
establecer que el subcontratista y su personal se sujetan a las disposiciones de SSPA
sealadas en este Anexo. A efecto de que el Contratista cumpla con lo dispuesto en el
primer prrafo del presente Anexo, debe implementar las acciones pertinentes para que
tanto su personal como sus subcontratistas conozcan y den cumplimiento a las
disposiciones de SSPA sealadas en este Anexo.
Para el caso del Responsable de SSPA, debe ser profesionista con experiencia en
Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental dentro del rea de construccin, prearranque,
pruebas y arranque de instalaciones industriales, mnima de dos proyectos para Petrleos
Mexicanos, adems de aprobar la evaluacin que les aplicar el rea de SSPA de la
Residencia de Obra y contar con acreditacin vigente de capacitacin en materia de
SSPA, expedida por alguna institucin avalada por PEMEX REFINACIN, sus
designaciones debern ser aceptada por la Residencia de Obra con anterioridad al inicio
de sus funciones, quien determinar, a su juicio, si el Responsable y los Supervisores de
SSPA en Obra designados se encuentran calificados para desempear las funciones
inherentes a dichos cargos, lo anterior para asegurar que la Obra sea dirigida y
supervisada en materia de SSPA por personal calificado y con experiencia. Tanto el
Responsable como los Supervisores de SSPA deben ser del propio Contratista,
independientemente de que parte de la Obra sea subcontratada. El personal de SSPA del
Contratista debern identificarse usando ropa 100% de algodn color naranja, pantaln y
camisa de manga larga u overol y casco blanco con franjas laterales color verde con la
leyenda SEGURIDAD. El personal de contraincendio deber usar ropa color rojo y
casco rojo.
Por ningn motivo podr fungir como Responsable de SSPA el Superintendente de
Construccin del Contratista.
2. El Contratista debe elaborar, presentar a PEMEX REFINACIN, difundir a su personal de
primera lnea y mandos medios (Jefes de rea y Supervisores de especialidad) y los
avances peridicos (mensuales) de un Programa de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin
Ambiental (SSPA), con la descripcin de sus objetivos generales y metas, para prevenir
5 de 26
incidentes a su personal y al de PEMEX REFINACIN, as como evitar daos a las

Instalaciones de la Obra, del Centro de Trabajo y al Medio Ambiente, estableciendo
medidas preventivas generales y especficas en SSPA para el desarrollo del trabajo, as
como las acciones que se deben tomar en caso de una emergencia, las medidas de
mitigacin, las rutas de evacuacin y puntos de reunin. Este programa debe incluir por lo
menos los siguientes aspectos:
2.1. Actividades para dar cumplimiento a los objetivos y metas, entre otros: Plticas y
Prcticas Contraincendio; Revisin de Extintores; Plticas y Prcticas de Salud en el

Trabajo (rescate y primeros auxilios), Campaas de Seguridad y Reuniones de Inicio
de Jornada (plticas de 5 minutos donde se indique a los trabajadores las actividades
a realizar y los riesgos de estas y del rea donde laboran).
2.2. Definicin de los criterios aplicables para el control de riesgos potenciales en materia
de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental, derivados de los trabajos que se

desarrollarn durante la Obra, incluyendo los agentes presentes en el medio
ambiente de trabajo y sus alrededores.
2.3. El Programa SSPA ser complementado con un Atlas de Riesgo del proyecto, que
deber elaborar el Contratista, acorde a los riesgos propios de las actividades a

realizar y del rea de la Obra, mismo que debe presentar a PEMEX REFINACIN
para su revisin.
2.4. Manual de
Procedimientos Constructivos para ejecutar la Obra contratada;

procedimientos que debern incluir los requerimientos de SSPA. As mismo, el
Contratista debe elaborar sus propios procedimientos de seguridad de acuerdo a la
Obra, mismos que debern estar apegados a los de PEMEX REFINACIN, los que
de manera enunciativa ms no limitativa se relacionan a continuacin:
2.4.1. Para implantar la Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental en la Obra.

2.4.2. Para identificar, evaluar, verificar y manejar los agentes ambientales, sus
riesgos y consecuencias por exposicin laboral y su difusin, incluyendo

acciones para la reduccin de la exposicin laboral.
2.4.3. Para establecer requerimientos de SSPA para el uso de sustancias qumicas
(Corrosivas, Reactivas, Explosivas, Txicas, Infecciosas y Biolgicas) que se

utilicen durante el desarrollo del proyecto, respaldada en las Hojas de Datos de
Seguridad.
2.4.4. Para asegurar que la informacin sobre los riesgos a la salud, fuego, explosin
y riegos ambientales de las sustancias qumicas utilizadas est disponible de

acuerdo a la reglamentacin emitida por la STPS.
2.4.5. Para respuesta a emergencias (PRE), incluye evacuacin de personal.

2.4.6. Para reportar, analizar y difundir los incidentes con y sin consecuencias.
2.4.7. Para realizar maniobras con equipos y dispositivos de izaje.
6 de 26
2.4.8. Para control de acceso a las reas de trabajo, mismo que deber considerar
todas las disposiciones sealadas en el Reglamento DG-SASIPA-SI-08200 de

PEMEX REFINACIN.
2.4.9. Para tareas crticas:

2.4.9.1.
2.4.9.2.
2.4.9.3.
2.4.9.4.
2.4.9.5.
2.4.9.6.
2.4.9.7.
2.4.9.8.
Entrada segura a espacios confinados.

Proteccin contraincendio.
Equipo de proteccin personal.
Prevencin de cadas.
Seguridad elctrica.
Bloqueo de energa y materiales peligrosos.
Delimitacin de reas de riesgos.
Apertura de lneas y equipos de procesos.
2.4.10. Para armado, desarmado y uso de andamios.

2.4.11. Para la inspeccin peridica de herramienta y equipo elctrico manual.
2.4.12. Para realizar excavaciones y trabajos en excavaciones.
2.4.13. Para almacenamiento y transporte de productos qumicos y fuentes radiactivas
utilizados (reactivos, combustibles, pinturas, solventes).
2.4.14. Para uso, transporte y almacenaje de cilindros con gases comprimidos.

2.4.15. Para soldadura y corte con equipo de oxigeno-acetileno.
2.4.16. Para acceso y transporte de personal en el interior de la Obra.
2.4.17. Para trnsito interior de vehculos en instalaciones industriales.
2.4.18. Para trmite y uso de permisos de trabajo de PEMEX REFINACIN.
2.4.19. Para trmite y uso de permisos de trabajo del propio Contratista.
2.4.20. Para aplicacin de primeros auxilios.
2.4.21. Para efectuar maniobras de rescate de personal lesionado.
2.4.22. Para suministro de agua purificada.
2.4.23. Para suministro, instalacin y servicio de sanitarios porttiles a los trabajadores.
2.4.24. Para realizar trabajos en zonas donde existan equipos y tuberas.
2.4.25. Para realizar trabajos en zonas donde existan instalaciones subterrneas [entre
otras; ductos elctricos, telefnicos, de fibra ptica, de drenajes (qumico,

aceitoso, pluvial y sanitario), tuberas de conduccin, de servicios auxiliares
(agua, aire y vapor) y de agua contraincendio, red de tierras].
2.4.26. Para pruebas hidrostticas y neumticas.

2.4.27. Para coordinar los trabajos de las diferentes especialidades del Contratista
(civil, mecnica, elctrica e instrumentos), en la etapa de energizacin de
7 de 26
equipos e instalaciones elctricas (motores, centros de control de motores,

cuartos de control centralizado, subestaciones elctricas, entre otros); que
incluya el cumplimiento de los requisitos en materia de SSPA.
2.4.28. Para lavado y soplado de lneas y equipos.
2.4.29. Para el manejo y gestin integral de residuos.
2.4.30. Para el tratamiento, manejo y descarga de aguas residuales, incluyendo las
provenientes de lavado y pruebas hidrostticas de tuberas y equipos.
2.4.31. Para realizar anlisis de seguridad de los trabajos (AST).

2.4.32. Para estimular y sancionar la actitud del personal.
3. El Contratista debe difundir su poltica en materia de SSPA para la Obra, misma que ser
acordada con PEMEX REFINACIN, as como tambin mensajes relativos a la
Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental mediante carteles de tipo; informativo,
preventivo y restrictivo.
4. El Contratista debe proporcionar identificacin con fotografa a todo su personal y de sus
subcontratistas y registrar en el reverso de dicha identificacin los temas 6.1 y 6.2 del
Programa de Capacitacin del numeral 6, la cual deber incluir al menos el nombre del
Contratista, el nombre del trabajador, nmero de empleado, nmero de registro en el
IMSS, informacin referente a alergias, as como los datos de a quien informar en caso de
algn evento, ver Figura 1. El Contratista deber tomar las medidas necesarias para que
todo su personal y el de sus subcontratistas porten la citada identificacin durante su
estancia en la Obra.
El Contratista ser responsable de entregar a la Residencia de Obra las credenciales de
los trabajadores que causen baja en un periodo no mayor de tres das hbiles posteriores
a la baja.
5. El Contratista debe contar, dentro de las instalaciones provisionales de la Obra, por su
propia cuenta y cargo, con un local para la capacitacin del personal propio y personal
subcontratado, con el equipo y material requerido para poder impartir la capacitacin.
6. El Programa de Capacitacin debe incluir, sin ser limitativo los siguientes temas, mismos
que debern impartirse con la frecuencia indicada.
TEMAS
6.1 Pltica de induccin en materia de SSPA y
Poltica de SSPA del Contratista y de
PEMEX REFINACIN.
6.2 Requerimientos en materia de SSPA de
PEMEX REFINACIN aplicables a la Obra

y los estipulados en el contrato.
6.3 Recomendaciones
diferentes
manuales.
de SSPA para las

especialidades de trabajos
PARTICIPANTES
FRECUENCIA
Todo el personal
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
Todo el personal
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
Personal tcnico y manual
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
8 de 26
6.4 Identificacin y sealizacin de riesgos en
sustancias qumicas,
Hoja de datos de seguridad
Modelo Rombo
Todo el personal
que lo requiera
6.5 Permiso de trabajo.

6.6 Reglas de Seguridad para efectuar trabajos
en espacios confinados.
6.7 Manejo y Almacenamiento de Materiales
Inflamables
y
Cilindros
de
Gases
Comprimidos.
6.8 Uso, mantenimiento y pruebas del equipo
de proteccin personal de acuerdo a las
actividades a desarrollar.
6.9 Seleccin y uso de equipo de Proteccin
Respiratoria:
Para trabajos en espacios confinados.
Para trabajos en atmsferas txicas.
6.10 Trabajos en altura:
Proteccin contra cadas.
Rescate y primeros auxilios.
6.11 Difusin de incidentes ocurridos durante el
desarrollo de la obra y la causa raz que
los origin, para evitar su recurrencia.
6.12 Prcticas
contraincendio
especialidad del contrato.
sobre
la
6.13 Plan de Respuesta a emergencias.

6.14 Reglamento de SSPA para Contratistas y
Proveedores DG-SASIPA-SI-08200.
6.15 Informacin sobre los Sistemas de alarma
por fuego, por atmsferas riesgosas y por
emergencias.
6.16 Pruebas elctricas a arrancadores.
6.17 Pruebas
para
interruptores
termomagnticos.
6.18 Pruebas de campo para la recepcin de
cables aislados de alta tensin.
6.19 Puesta en servicio de centro de control de
motores o de subestacin elctrica.
6.20 Recepcin de motores elctricos.
6.21 Reglamento para libranzas en circuitos y
equipos elctricos.
6.22 Libranza de circuitos, sistemas y equipos
elctricos que operan a tensiones
inferiores a 480 volts.
6.23 Instalacin de portacandado, candados,
etiquetas y doble seguro de desconexin
en arrancadores.
1 vez al inicio y
anualmente
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)

que lo requiera
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)

que lo requiera
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
Personal tcnico y
manual.
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)

que lo requiera.
1 vez antes de iniciar el

trabajo
Personal tcnico, Mandos

medios y Supervisores.
Cada vez que se

concluya el anlisis de un
incidente y/o accidente.
Todo el personal
contraincendio y de las
brigada.
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
Todo el personal
Todo el personal
Todo el personal
Personal que lo requiera.
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
Personal que lo requiera
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
9 de 26
6.24 Colocacin y retiro de juntas ciegas en
lneas y equipos en y fuera de operacin.
6.25 Trabajos de corte y soldadura.
6.26 Para trabajos de Radiografiado.
6.27 Procedimiento
para
verificar
las
condiciones de seguridad en el Prearranque.
Personal Tcnicoadministrativo involucrado.
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
1 vez al inicio
(nuevo ingreso)
Los temas arriba referidos, as como la frecuencia de capacitacin no son limitativos, el

Programa se puede ampliar segn las polticas del Contratista y las necesidades de la
Obra. Todo el material de capacitacin en materia de SSPA deber ser presentado a la
Residencia de Obra y autorizado por sta.
La Pltica de Induccin en materia de SSPA sealada en el Tema 6.1 de la lista de
capacitacin ser impartida por el personal de SSPA de la Residencia de Obra, con una
frecuencia no mayor a dos veces por semana, una vez que el trabajador haya recibido la
pltica, el instructor firmar la identificacin con fotografa que se menciona en el punto 4
de este Anexo.
El Contratista deber programar a su personal para que ste inicie los cursos sealados
en los Temas 6.2 y 6.3 del temario anterior, segn corresponda, antes del inicio de
labores en la Obra. A fin de asegurar que el personal obrero identifique y conozca los
riesgos particulares de la actividad que le sea encomendada; adems el Contratista
deber implementar un esquema de plticas diarias de al menos 5 minutos a todo su
personal obrero, impartidas por el responsable de cuadrilla (Cabo), con apoyo del
Responsable de la actividad a ejecutar y el Supervisor de SSPA, en las que se informe al
personal, las actividades que deber realizar y los riesgos propios de stas y del rea
donde se realizarn los trabajos.
El Programa debe incluir controles administrativos de la seleccin y capacitacin de cada
trabajador, donde se registren los temas impartidos y las fechas correspondientes con los
datos generales del mismo, debidamente avalados por las instituciones y/o instructores
que hayan impartido dicha capacitacin e informar a PEMEX REFINACIN
mensualmente sobre el cumplimiento del programa.
7. El Contratista debe utilizar los formatos de Permiso de Trabajo de PEMEX
REFINACIN, para la ejecucin de actividades de construccin. Los formatos de
permisos de trabajo de PEMEX REFINACIN debern ser impresos y suministrados por
el Contratista a la Residencia de Obra para su Administracin. Los requerimientos
especficos para su llenado sern entregados al Contratista en las reuniones diarias de
planeacin de los trabajos para el siguiente da.
Todos los trabajos debern realizarse de una manera planeada y ordenada, bajo el
control de un responsable de la especialidad del trabajo que se est realizando, en el
caso de trabajos crticos, ser necesaria la autorizacin expresa de la Residencia de Obra
para la realizacin de los mismos, as como la supervisin conjunta de los responsables
de SSPA del Contratista, de la Residencia de Obra y de la Refinera.
10 de 26
El Contratista debe programar e informar a los Supervisores de la Residencia de Obra

con al menos 3 das de anticipacin de los trabajos crticos (interconexiones, libranzas,
etc.) a fin de que se tramiten oportunamente todos los Permisos de trabajo y se
verifiquen las condiciones necesarias para la realizacin del trabajo, evitando as los
tiempos muertos. Ningn trabajo considerado como crtico, podr efectuarse sin la
autorizacin correspondiente.
8. El Contratista debe suministrar a su personal el Equipo de Proteccin Personal necesario,
para laborar en la Obra. El equipo de proteccin personal bsico, a considerar, para todos
los trabajadores es: ropa 100% de algodn color naranja (pantaln y camisa de manga
larga u overol) con el logotipo de la Compaa, casco (naranja) de seguridad, con
barboquejo, lentes de seguridad y calzado de proteccin con casquillo metlico, excepto
para aquellos cuya actividad presente riesgos elctricos, el cual deber ser dielctrico, al
igual que el casco, de acuerdo a la normatividad. El Contratista deber tambin proveer el
equipo complementario, especfico de acuerdo a las actividades a desarrollar (proteccin
facial, auricular y respiratoria, guantes, prevencin de cadas, cinturones porta
herramientas, para todo el personal que lo requiera).
Todo el personal del Contratista y de sus subcontratistas tanto tcnico-administrativo
como manual deber utilizar en la obra en todo momento su equipo de proteccin
personal bsico.
9. El Contratista debe contar con un archivo especfico para hacer acopio de lo relativo a la
Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental, mismo que deber contener la informacin
organizada y actualizada de al menos los siguientes temas:
9.1.
Programa de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental.
9.2.
Programa de Capacitacin de Personal y registros de cumplimiento.
9.3.
Programa y Registro del suministro y dotacin de equipo de proteccin personal.
9.4.
Control administrativo que contenga: Relacin, programa de inspeccin y ubicacin

de equipos y material contraincendio (extintores, hidrantes, monitores, entre otros).
9.5.
Copia de los Permisos de Trabajo.
9.6.
Copia de los Permisos para el trnsito de equipo pesado en el interior de la Obra.
9.7.
Control de acceso y retiro del almacn de cilindros de gases comprimidos.
9.8.
Control de entrada y salida de almacn de materiales peligrosos.
9.9.
Relacin de parque vehicular del Contratista y Subcontratistas, plizas de seguros

de vehculos y copia de licencias expedidas por la SCT, para operadores de
vehculos de transporte de materiales y residuos peligrosos.
9.10. Programa de Auditorias Efectivas y de Auditorias de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin
Ambiental e Informes mensuales de cumplimiento de las acciones realizadas para la

atencin de desviaciones.
9.11. Reportes de incidentes con y sin consecuencias que ocurran durante el desarrollo
de la Obra, Anlisis de Causa Raz, Informes de Investigacin y Anlisis de los
11 de 26
mismos, Informes de Seguimiento y Cierre de las Recomendaciones derivadas de

los Anlisis.
9.12. Reporte mensual de Indicadores de Accidentabilidad del Contratista.
9.13. Resultados de las Auditorias de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental realizadas
por PEMEX REFINACIN al Contratista y los reportes de cumplimiento de

recomendaciones.
9.14. Reportes mensuales del cumplimiento de cada uno de los puntos contenidos en
este Anexo de Disposiciones en materia de SSPA, revisados por la Residencia de

Obra.
9.15. Copia de la pliza de seguro de responsabilidad civil por contaminacin del medio
ambiente.
9.16. Trmites ante autoridades (pago de derechos de agua, descarga de aguas
residuales, uso de bancos de tiro para depositar los residuos slidos, incluyendo los
de construccin, etc.) y dems sealados en el anexo Permisos y Licencias de las
Bases de Licitacin
9.17. Copia del Manifiesto de Empresa Generadora de Residuos Peligrosos y Manifiestos
de Entrega, Transporte, Recepcin de Residuos Peligrosos Enviados a Tratamiento

y/o Disposicin Final, Reporte Semestral de Residuos Peligrosos Enviados para
Tratamiento y/o Disposicin Final.
9.18. Certificados de inspeccin de equipos de izaje.
Esta informacin deber estar disponible para la Residencia de Obra en todo momento
durante la ejecucin de la Obra, y a solicitud de sta el Contratista deber presentar las
evidencias que le requiera.
10. El Responsable de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental; (SSPA) del Contratista
debe:
10.1. Permanecer en el Sitio durante la realizacin de la Obra y verificar que se cumplan
las Normas, Procedimientos y Disposiciones en materia de SSPA, as como actuar

en nombre y por cuenta del Contratista en todo lo referente a en materia de SSPA.
10.2. Elaborar el Programa de SSPA de acuerdo a lo sealado el punto 2, del apartado I,
de ste documento y coordinar su implementacin con los Supervisores de SSPA,

el seguimiento al mismo, el informe mensual de avances y entregarlo a la
Residencia de obra.
10.3. Elaborar el Plan de Respuesta a Emergencias de la Obra (PRE-O) acorde a los
riesgos propios de las actividades a realizar y del rea de la Obra, en coordinacin

con la Residencia de Obra. En caso de ocurrir cualquier emergencia en la Obra,
debe mantenerse informado de la evolucin de la misma, a travs de la Residencia
de Obra, para en caso necesario, proceder de acuerdo a lo establecido en el PREO. De ser necesaria la evacuacin del personal, la dirigir, auxiliado por los
Supervisores de SSPA, de acuerdo a las instrucciones de la Residencia de la Obra.
12 de 26
10.4. Elaborar el Atlas de Riesgo del proyecto, considerando los riesgos por el manejo de
sustancias qumicas utilizadas en la Obra, as como la informacin contenida en las

Hojas de Datos de Seguridad, mismas que debern estar disponibles de acuerdo a
lo indicado en el punto II.19 de este anexo.
10.5. Definir y tramitar conjuntamente con la Residencia de Obra las rutas para el acceso
de personal, ya sea en vehculos o caminando.
10.6. Tramitar los permisos para el bloqueo de calles en el interior de la Refinera,
originado por maniobras y/o trabajos relativos al desarrollo del Proyecto, anexando
un croquis con la ruta alterna propuesta y sealizacin a utilizar.
10.7. Mantener actualizada una Bitcora de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental, en
la que registre todos los eventos relevantes relacionados con estas materias, desde
el inicio hasta el trmino la Obra, la cual debe estar disponible siempre para revisin
por parte de PEMEX REFINACIN.
10.8. Realizar Auditorias Internas (procedimientos, permisos de trabajo, almacn general,
talleres de; fabricacin, elctrico y mecnico; entre otros) al Sistema de Seguridad,

Salud y Proteccin Ambiental, de acuerdo a un programa establecido e informar
mensualmente al Residente de Obra los resultados obtenidos y las acciones
correctivas desarrolladas para atender las desviaciones, hasta su total cumplimiento
(seguimiento). Debe realizar un anlisis estadstico de la informacin presentada
por sus supervisores; as como participar en las Auditoras Externas de SSPA que
se realicen a la Obra.
10.9. Reportar inmediatamente a la Residencia de Obra todas las emergencias y los
incidentes (con o sin consecuencias), que ocurran durante el desarrollo de la Obra,

participar conjuntamente con los Supervisores de SSPA y los trabajadores
involucrados, en la investigacin, anlisis y seguimiento de las medidas que se
deriven hasta su conclusin y llevar la estadstica de ndices de accidentalidad, con
reportes mensuales, de acuerdo al formato Indicadores de Accidentabilidad de
Compaas Contratistas (Tabla 1).
10.10.Suministrar, para su distribucin, los carteles relativos a la Seguridad, Salud y
Proteccin Ambiental.
10.11.Gestionar ante la Residencia de Obra, los permisos de trabajo que representen
riesgo (potencialmente peligrosos), as mismo los de acceso y pases de salida de

vehculos del Contratista.
10.12.Administrar y verificar el adecuado manejo y gestin integral de los Residuos.

10.13.Integrar el archivo especfico de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental de
acuerdo a lo establecido en el Punto 9 del apartado I.
10.14.Participar en los Anlisis de Seguridad en el Trabajo.

10.15.Reportar mensualmente las actividades realizadas para el cumplimiento de las
condicionantes establecidas en el Oficio Resolutivo que en su momento emita la

SEMARNAT.
11. Los Supervisores de SSPA del Contratista, deben:

13 de 26
11.1. Permanecer durante toda la jornada de trabajo en su rea de responsabilidad,
verificar y dar soporte al Responsable de especialidad del trabajo en ejecucin,

para que se cumplan las normas, procedimientos y disposiciones en materia de
SSPA en todos los trabajos que se realicen.
11.2. Conocer el Plan de Respuesta a Emergencias de la Obra. En caso de ocurrir
cualquier emergencia, deben mantenerse informados de la evolucin de la misma,

a travs del Responsable de SSPA y proceder de acuerdo a lo establecido en el
Plan de Respuesta a Emergencias de la Obra. De ser necesaria la evacuacin del
personal, la realizarn de acuerdo a las instrucciones del Responsable de SSPA.
11.3. Conocer y aplicar el Atlas de Riesgo del Proyecto.

11.4. Supervisar
el cumplimiento del Programa de SSPA, en sus reas de

responsabilidad, verificando su estricto cumplimiento por parte de todos los
trabajadores.
11.5. Supervisar que el personal accese por las rutas autorizadas y realizar las acciones
necesarias para mantenerlas limpias y libres de obstculos.
11.6. Supervisar el cabal cumplimiento de los permisos para el trnsito de equipo pesado
y para el bloqueo de calles en la Refinera.
11.7. Mantener informado al Responsable de SSPA, de los eventos relevantes ocurridos
en su rea de responsabilidad.
11.8. Realizar continuamente Inspecciones Preventivas de Riesgo, en su rea de
responsabilidad e informar al Responsable de SSPA los resultados obtenidos y las

acciones correctivas desarrolladas para atender las desviaciones. Debe generar un
reporte donde sealen las desviaciones encontradas en el rea de trabajo, as
como las acciones tomadas, y en su caso proponer las modificaciones necesarias
para mejorar el desempeo en materia de SSPA.
11.9. Dar aviso inmediato al Responsable de SSPA, sobre la ocurrencia de cualquier
emergencia o incidente en las reas de su responsabilidad y en su caso aplicar los

procedimientos establecidos, participar en la investigacin y anlisis de los
incidentes y dar seguimiento a las recomendaciones que se deriven de los mismos.
11.10. Instruir y supervisar al personal bajo su responsabilidad, para que antes de iniciar
sus actividades, siempre observe el entorno, la direccin del viento a travs de los
conos indicadores color naranja, detecte las posibles condiciones inseguras y las
reporte para su eliminacin mitigacin.
11.11. Instruir y supervisar los trabajos a realizar por el personal de contraincendio.

11.12. Supervisar la colocacin y conservacin, por parte de todo el personal, de los
carteles relativos a la Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental y asegurar su

cumplimiento.
11.13. Para los permisos de trabajo propios del Contratista, elaborar y entregar al
Responsable de SSPA, para su trmite, los permisos de trabajo que representen
14 de 26
riesgo, (potencialmente peligrosos). En el caso especfico de los permisos de

trabajo que tengan continuidad, supervisar el trmite de revalidacin.
11.14. Supervisar desde el inicio hasta su conclusin, todos los trabajos peligrosos en las
instalaciones que requieran autorizacin escrita por parte de PEMEX REFINACIN,

como son entre otros: trabajos en espacios confinados, excavaciones,
demoliciones, de tipo elctrico, de corte y/o soldadura, con flama abierta, con
proteccin respiratoria.
11.15. Verificar la instalacin de matachispas en el escape a los equipos de combustin
interna.
11.16. Verificar que se
suspenda la operacin de los equipos de combustin interna,

mientras se les suministra combustible; as como que esta operacin se realice con
bomba y manguera con dispensador (vlvula ON/OFF, pistola) y que de
preferencia, se realice antes de iniciar actividades, a la hora de comida o al trmino
de la jornada. Los vehculos que sean utilizados para el transporte y suministro de
combustibles dentro de las instalaciones de la obra debern contar con autorizacin
de la Residencia de Obra.
11.17. Supervisar el adecuado manejo y gestin integral de los Residuos.
12. PEMEX REFINACIN a travs de la Subgerencia de Seguimiento, Proteccin

Ambiental y Calidad, efectuar Evaluaciones al Contratista en materia de SSPA, durante
el desarrollo de la Obra para verificar el cumplimiento de estas disposiciones y las
condiciones estipuladas en el contrato; para lo cual, el Contratista otorgar las
facilidades necesarias para su desarrollo y participar en las mismas. Los resultados de
estas evaluaciones se darn a conocer por escrito al Residente de Obra.
II. SEGURIDAD.
1. El Contratista debe almacenar los cilindros de oxgeno, acetileno y otros gases
comprimidos que se utilicen en los trabajos de corte y soldadura y otros, en lugares secos
y ventilados y fuera de las reas de trabajo, en interiores no deber almacenarlos a una
distancia menor de 6 metros por tipo de gas, en caso contrario separarlos por material
divisorio resistente al fuego, adems de separar los vacos de los llenos, con sus
capuchones respectivos, sujetos en posicin vertical e identificados, el sitio de
almacenamiento debe ser de materiales resistentes al fuego y debe contar con
sealamientos de seguridad, extintores y control de acceso y retiro de los cilindros. Para
su transporte deben utilizarse carritos diseados ex profeso, donde los cilindros deben
estar sujetos por medio de cadenas y/o barandales, para su uso debe incluirse
arrestaflama en los equipos de oxicorte.
2. El Contratista debe proporcionar sin cargo econmico para el trabajador, el equipo de
seguridad y herramientas requeridos en ptimas condiciones adecuado para cada
actividad que se realice durante el desarrollo de la Obra: arns de seguridad para el
cuerpo, cables de sujecin de 1.80 m de longitud mximo, con amortiguamiento,
proteccin ocular, proteccin facial, proteccin auricular, proteccin respiratoria, etc., y
15 de 26
reemplazar el equipo que se deteriore y/o no cubra los requisitos establecidos por las
Normas de Seguridad aplicables.
3. El Contratista debe suministrar desde el inicio de la Obra y hasta el final de las pruebas
de comportamiento, personal de contraincendio capacitado que formar parte de las
brigadas contraincendio, mismo que deber contar con la aprobacin de PEMEX
REFINACIN, as como el equipo requerido para proporcionar la proteccin
contraincendio y de acuerdo a la etapa del proyecto, detectores de gases (explosmetros),
mangueras de 2 y 1 pulgadas de dimetro, llaves, reducciones de 2 a 1 pulgadas,
conexiones, boquillas de chorro regulable y cierre rpido, extintores de polvo qumico
seco y de CO2, de 20 a 150 libras. En caso de requerirse la utilizacin de agua de la red
contraincendio de la Refinera en su oportunidad, cuando se realicen trabajos que por su
naturaleza puedan ocasionar un incendio, se deber acordar con la Residencia de Obra
el apoyo requerido. Como medida preventiva de contraincendio, se efectuar revisin a
los registros de drenaje en las reas adyacentes a los trabajos de construccin para
verificar el nivel de explosividad y en caso de requerirse, tomar las medidas preventivas
necesarias.
4. El Contratista debe suministrar, sin cargo econmico para el trabajador, el equipo y
accesorios, necesarios para la realizacin de trabajos que requieran proteccin
respiratoria (espacios confinados, colocacin y/o retiro de juntas ciegas, entre otros), los
cuales deben cumplir con la normatividad correspondiente, como son: respiradores,
mascaras, equipos autnomos, ventiladores y/o extractores de aire, el uso y por tanto la
actividad est restringido para personas con vello facial o barba; equipo de monitoreo
para determinar condiciones ambientales seguras (O2, CO2, CO, SO2, H2S, Txicos,
Explosividad, entre otros) en cantidad suficiente, al menos 2 equipos para cada
parmetro, mismos que debern estar debidamente calibrados. Lo anterior debe
permanecer hasta el trmino de la Obra.
5. El Contratista debe suministrar la proteccin necesaria para los trabajos en espacios
confinados de acuerdo a su procedimiento especfico, haciendo nfasis en la planeacin
de las actividades a realizar, el conocimiento de los riesgos potenciales o existentes,
instrumentos apropiados, calibrados y certificados para la evaluacin de la atmsfera
(oxgeno, inflamabilidad, toxicidad, temperatura); la iluminacin, fuentes de alimentacin,
conexiones y accesorios deben ser intrnsecamente seguras, a prueba de explosin y con
circuitos protegidos con interruptores de falla a tierra; evaluaciones mdicas a los
trabajadores; observador de entrada/salida al espacio confinado (registro, ventilacin,
extraccin,
comunicacin
permanente,
sealamientos);
bloqueo
(tarjeta/candado/despeje/prueba); rescate y evacuacin en situacin de emergencia.
6. El Contratista debe suministrar, sin cargo econmico para el trabajador, el equipo de
proteccin personal correspondiente, en calidad y cantidad suficiente, necesario para la
realizacin de trabajos de tipo elctrico (conexiones de baja, media y alta tensin e
instalacin de equipos, entre otros), los cuales deben ser aprobados por PEMEX
REFINACIN, como son tapetes, guantes, casco y calzado de proteccin dielctricos,
entre otros. Lo anterior debe permanecer hasta el trmino de la Obra.
16 de 26
7. El Contratista debe verificar las condiciones de los equipos (gras, malacates,

montacargas, etc.) y accesorios de izaje (eslingas, estrobos, grilletes, separadores,
ganchos, etc.), utilizados para el movimiento de equipos y materiales, debiendo en el
caso de los equipos de izaje, obtener previo al inicio de actividades, el Certificado de
Inspeccin emitido por una Empresa Certificadora, en el que se incluyan las condiciones
mecnicas, elctricas, electrnicas, dispositivos de seguridad, as como las pruebas con
carga; no se permitir la operacin de equipos certificados que tengan observaciones que
limiten su capacidad. En caso de que se vaya a certificar en Sitio se deber notificar al
personal de SSPA de la Residencia de Obra para que atestige la revisin y las pruebas.
Adicionalmente, todos estos equipos debern contar con su bitcora de mantenimiento,
tablas de carga, y deber ser sujeto a una verificacin previa a cada maniobra (lista de
verificacin). Toda maniobra que se realice en reas en operacin, requiere de un plan de
izaje.
8. El Contratista debe delimitar con malla de polipropileno color naranja y letreros alusivos,
las zonas de riesgo derivadas de la ejecucin de la Obra, como son: trabajos en altura,
demoliciones, excavaciones, compactaciones, armado de fierro, colados, montaje de
tuberas y almacenamiento de materiales, entre otros; en caso de utilizar cadenas y/o
cintas de advertencia, considerar el color rojo como restrictivo y el amarillo como
preventivo. En los trabajos de limpieza abrasiva y aplicaciones de recubrimiento
anticorrosivo, se deben instalar mamparas para evitar contaminacin por dispersin de
partculas.
9. El Contratista debe instalar estratgicamente conos indicadores de viento color naranja,
en cantidad acorde al avance de la Obra.
10. El Contratista debe cumplir con la normatividad de trnsito interior de vehculos en
instalaciones industriales, administrativas y de servicio de PETRLEOS MEXICANOS,
para su acceso en vehculos, el Contratista se obliga a contar con las plizas de seguro
de todos los vehculos, con vigencia hasta el trmino de los trabajos, cubriendo las
responsabilidades derivadas del uso de los vehculos utilizados en la ejecucin de la
Obra. Tratndose de transportes de carga, deber incluirse la cobertura de daos por la
carga, en el caso de transporte de materiales o residuos peligrosos, el monto mnimo de
la cobertura por daos al medio ambiente, se establecer de acuerdo a lo dispuesto en la
Ley aplicable.
Cuando su personal conduzca un vehculo debe observar las siguientes prioridades:
10.1. El peatn y los ciclistas, en ese orden, siempre tendrn la preferencia.
10.2. Los vehculos de atencin de emergencias (ambulancias y camiones de bomberos)
tienen prioridad de paso sobre cualquier otro vehculo.
10.3. Dar preferencia a cualquier otro tipo de trnsito (gras y/o vehculos pesados con
carga) y respetar
estacionamientos.
los
lmites
de
velocidad,
tanto
en
calles
como
10.4. Contar con la licencia de conducir/operar correspondiente y vigente.
17 de 26
en
10.5. Portar en el vehculo los documentos reglamentarios de trnsito vigentes (tarjeta de
circulacin y/o permisos), as como copia legible de la pliza de seguro del vehculo.
10.6. Verificar adems del buen funcionamiento del vehculo (condiciones mecnicas y
elctricas), la colocacin de matachispas en el escape, la existencia de extintor,

silenciador, de cinturones de seguridad y alarma de reversa para gras, vehculos
de carga y de emergencia.
10.7. Utilizar el cinturn de seguridad y verificar que los pasajeros lo usen.

10.8. Transitar por las reas de la Refinera solo con la autorizacin correspondiente.
10.9. Estacionar los vehculos slo en los lugares indicados (autorizados y siempre en
reversa).
10.10.Estacionar los vehculos sin obstaculizar; hidrantes, casas de bombas, centrales
contraincendio, subestaciones elctricas y vialidades de circulacin.
10.11.La capacidad de carga de los camiones no deber ser rebasada para evitar la cada
de materiales.
10.12.Colocar lona a los vehculos que realizarn el traslado de materiales ptreos y
residuos no peligrosos, para evitar la cada de los mismos y evitar la emisin de

polvos a la atmsfera.
10.13.Los vehculos para el transporte de personal debern estar acondicionados no
permitindose para este efecto camiones de carga, de redilas y volteo. Los

operadores debern contar con la credencial de identificacin sealada en el
numeral I.4 de este anexo.
11. El Contratista debe instalar andamios metlicos de uso industrial para efectuar trabajos
en altura (incluyendo en el interior de excavaciones) que deben cumplir los requisitos de
la NOM-009-STPS-2011, en general:
11.1. Los andamios deben tener capacidad para soportar su propio peso y por lo menos
cuatro veces la carga mxima que se le aplique.
11.2. El armado y desarmado de los andamios debe ser realizado por personal con
entrenamiento bsico y supervisado por una persona experimentada y competente,

quin validar diariamente con tarjetas color verde (que son seguros) o rojas (en
proceso de modificacin o inseguros).
11.3. Antes de iniciar el armado del andamio el Supervisor responsable del trabajo, debe
verificar que las partes no estn alteradas (libres de deformaciones, corte,

perforacin, doblado, abolladuras, corrosin severa). Todos los andamios
defectuosos debern marcarse y desecharse.
11.4. Los andamios deben desplantarse sobre un piso slido y nivelado, en caso
contrario, se deben emplear tornillos niveladores que no podrn extenderse mas de

0.3 m. o calzas de madera de 12 x 12 x 2 pulgadas.
11.5. Las escaleras deben ser diseadas especficamente para el tipo de andamio con el
cual se utilizan e instaladas de manera continua desde la base hasta la plataforma
18 de 26
de trabajo. No se deben mezclar secciones y/o accesorios de andamios de

diferentes marcas.
11.6. Cualquier nivel de trabajo sobre un andamio debe tener plataformas completas
para cubrir el nivel, conformada por secciones de 0.30 m. de ancho como mnimo,
metlicas fijadas a la estructura para evitar deslizamientos o cualquier otro
movimiento que ponga en riesgo de cada a los trabajadores; debe contar con
barandal de proteccin compuesto por un pasamanos tubular de 1 metro de altura,
barra intermedia de proteccin y rodapi de 0.15 m. de altura.
11.7. Los andamios que tengan una altura cuatro veces mayor que el ancho de su base
no podrn tener ruedas, y deben contar con plataformas de descanso en las

escaleras y estar amarrados a estructuras fijas adyacentes.
11.8. Todo el personal que desarrolle actividades en la plataforma del andamio debe
utilizar arns de seguridad para el cuerpo Clase II y doble cable de sujecin con
gancho de seguridad, de 1.80 m. de longitud mximo, con amortiguador de
choque. En caso necesario se debe instalar cable de vida.
11.9. No se debern realizar trabajos sobre andamios al estar lloviendo con vientos
mayores a 30 Km/hr.
11.10. No se acepta el uso de andamios de carga como plataformas de trabajo.

11.11. Cualquier configuracin de plataforma de trabajo distinta a lo antes sealado,
deber ser propuesta con la documentacin necesaria, para su aprobacin, a la

Residencia de Obra.
12. El Contratista debe proporcionar escaleras en buen estado del tipo I y IA, para carga
pesada y extrapesada, en todos aquellos trabajos que lo requieran y adherida la
informacin de seguridad (calcomanas), queda prohibido el uso de escaleras tipo II y III,
para trabajos elctricos debe utilizar escaleras de fibra de vidrio.
13. El Contratista debe instalar escaleras de acceso en todas las excavaciones de ms de
1.20 m. de profundidad y ademes dependiendo del tipo de suelo, acordonarlas y
humedecer, de ser necesario el producto de estas, para evitar la emisin de polvos a la
atmsfera; se deben considerar las instalaciones subterrneas existentes tanto en el rea
de la excavacin como en sus proximidades, as como las afectaciones a y de, la
circulacin de vehculos; todo el material producto de la excavacin deber ser colocado
a una distancia no menor a 1 metro del borde de la excavacin y solamente en un lado de
la misma.
14. El Contratista debe disponer de equipo y personal capacitado para efectuar maniobras de
rescate de personal, mismo que debe permanecer desde el inicio de la Obra y hasta el
final de las pruebas de comportamiento.
15. El Contratista debe evitar actos y condiciones inseguras que pongan en riesgo al
personal, a las instalaciones y/o al medio ambiente, llevando a cabo Inspecciones
Preventivas de Riesgo.
19 de 26
16. El Contratista debe suministrar la proteccin contraincendio necesaria con material

retardante al fuego en los trabajos de corte y soldadura, para proteger ductos en
operacin o por la existencia de materiales inflamables en reas cercanas al sitio de los
trabajos (madera, cartn, grasas, entre otros). Se debe verificar con explosmetro, que no
exista mezcla explosiva antes y durante la ejecucin de los trabajos, as como las
condiciones de los equipos de soldar, mismos que deben estar aterrizados, contar con
matachispas y guardas de proteccin en sus partes mviles.
17. Las instalaciones elctricas provisionales, generadores y tableros de distribucin, debern
cumplir con los requerimientos que apliquen de acuerdo a la Norma Oficial Mexicana
NOM-001-SEDE-2005 Instalaciones elctricas (utilizacin), considerando que:
17.1. Las instalaciones elctricas provisionales en general, deben estar rotuladas, contar
con cajas de fusibles segn carga, clavijas industriales con seguro de de vuelta y
cables de uso rudo, sin empalmes, deben estar perfectamente sujetas y aterrizadas,
no deben obstruir la circulacin de vehculos ni de personas, en caso de que se
requiera cruzar calles, deber realizarse por el piso, protegindolos con conchas
metlicas o de manera area a una altura no menor de 7.6 metros, no deben estar
cerca de registros de drenaje, ni materiales inflamables y combustibles.
17.2. Los tableros debern se construidos con estructura de acero ligero (ngulo), sus
paredes, fondo y techo sern de madera de primera, debern estar pintados de

color amarillo y rotulados (rtulos informativos, preventivos y prohibitivos) y tener
puertas con candados.
17.3. El rea de los tableros deber estar delimitada con malla cicln, colocar el tablero
sobre tarimas de madera que sobrepasen al menos un metro alrededor del tablero.
17.4. El tablero deber contar con un techo estructural para cubrirlo de la lluvia.
17.5. Los accesorios en los tableros debern ser para uso a la intemperie, (interruptores
termomagnticos, clavijas de seguridad de de vuelta y cables de uso rudo sin

empates, las capacidades de los accesorios sern de acuerdo a la carga que se
este utilizando.
17.6. Los generadores debern contar con mecanismos de interrupcin accesibles y
operables los cuales

correspondiente.
se
encontrarn
sealizados
con
el
instructivo
17.7. Todos los equipos y herramientas que por sus caractersticas operativas
representan un riesgo particular, debern contar con los dispositivos de seguridad

necesarios de acuerdo a las normas correspondientes y ser operados por personal
calificado.
17.8. Ya que los equipos de soldar por su naturaleza y la de las reas donde se realizan
los trabajos, han demostrado ser fuentes potenciales de accidentes, el Contratista y

sus Subcontratistas debern poner especial cuidado en los mismos, por lo que
deben de ser operados solo por personal calificado, las mquinas de soldar deben
contar con su tarjeta de identificacin, inspeccin y mantenimiento, proteccin
acstica en el caso de las de combustin interna, estar aterrizadas, contar con
20 de 26
matachispas, sus cables deben ser de una sola pieza sin empalmes ni remiendos
(slo se aceptan conectores especficamente diseados para este efecto), no deben
cruzar reas peligrosas ni convertirse en un estorbo para el trnsito de personas ni
vehculos y sus partes mviles deben contar con proteccin.
18. El Contratista debe mantener ordenada y limpia toda el rea de la Obra y las adyacentes,
almacenando adecuadamente los equipos y materiales de uso continuo, sin que se afecte
el avance de la Obra. Los desechos que se generen en la ejecucin de los Trabajos
debern ser retirados del Sitio en un plazo no mayor de cinco Das, los desechos
orgnicos deben ser retirados diariamente, as como los residuos peligrosos tambin
deben ser retirados del Sitio diariamente al almacn temporal del Contratista, el cual debe
contar con reas cercadas, techadas y sobre superficies impermeables dotadas de dique
contenedor y con crcamo para captar derrames, con sealamientos de seguridad, entre
otros los rombos de comunicacin de riesgos de cada sustancia, as como un control de
acceso.
19. El Contratista debe manejar y almacenar adecuadamente todos los productos qumicos,
reactivos, combustibles, pinturas, solventes, materiales diversos, fuentes radiactivas,
entre otros, que se requieran durante la Obra, designando un lugar especfico como
almacn. En este sitio se debe contar con las Hojas de Datos de Seguridad de los
materiales considerados como peligrosos, debiendo estar disponibles para el personal
que los maneja.
20. El Contratista debe delimitar con malla cicln todas las instalaciones provisionales que
construya en la Obra, quedando bajo su responsabilidad la vigilancia y el resguardo de
las mismas.
21. En el rea de construccin no est permitido el uso de telfonos celulares, por lo que de
requerir medios de comunicacin entre su personal, el Contratista deber proveer radios,
los cuales debern ser intrnsecamente seguros, y sujetarse a la aprobacin por la
Residencia de Obra en funcin de sus caractersticas y reas donde se pretenden
emplear. Todo el personal de SSPA del Contratista (Responsable y Supervisores)
debern contar con equipo de radiocomunicacin con una frecuencia exclusiva y acceso
a la frecuencia abierta del resto del personal. El Contratista deber proveer a la
Coordinacin de Seguridad de la Residencia de Obra al menos 5 equipos con las mismas
caractersticas, con acceso nicamente a la frecuencia de seguridad.
22. El Contratista debe instalar un sistema de alumbrado provisional, en caso de requerirse la
realizacin de actividades nocturnas, el cual deber cumplir con la normatividad aplicable.
III. SALUD.
1. El Contratista debe contratar personal fsicamente apto para desarrollar las actividades
propias del puesto a ocupar y deber evaluar su estado general de salud mediante
exmenes mdicos antes de su contratacin (examen de nuevo ingreso).
2. El Contratista debe instalar y equipar un Consultorio Mdico y contar con Ambulancia de
urgencias bsicas, destinada al servicio de pacientes que requieren atencin
prehospitalaria de la urgencias mdicas mediante soporte bsico de vida, los cuales
21 de 26
debern permanecer desde el inicio de la Obra hasta el final de las pruebas de

comportamiento, mismos que estarn ubicados en forma estratgica dentro del rea de
construccin. El Consultorio debe contar con bao y tarja con agua corriente, agua
purificada, mobiliario, equipo y material necesario para la auscultacin y atencin de
primeros auxilios a los trabajadores, as como, el personal capacitado para dar atencin a
curaciones y urgencias, que debe incluir, sin ser limitativo:
2.1 Un Mdico.
2.2 Un Tcnico en Urgencias Mdicas y
2.3 Operador de Ambulancia.
Siendo responsabilidad del Contratista la afiliacin de todos sus trabajadores al Instituto

Mexicano del Seguro Social (IMSS), para recibir la atencin mdica especializada que se
llegara a requerir a juicio del mdico, quien decidir, en caso necesario, su traslado al
hospital del IMSS o de alguna Institucin Mdica que preste servicio al Contratista. En
caso de requerirse efectuar actividades despus del horario normal de trabajo establecido
o si hubiera doble jornada de trabajo, se deber contar durante toda la jornada o en el
segundo turno, con la cantidad mnima antes indicada para dar atencin a curaciones y
urgencias.
3. El Mdico debe asentar en una bitcora de Servicios Mdicos, toda circunstancia y/o
acontecimiento relacionado con los servicios en salud brindados al personal del
Contratista y sus Subcontratistas, particularmente lo referente a enfermedades,
accidentes o lesiones de trabajo y casos de primeros auxilios, esta bitcora debe estar
disponible en todo momento al personal de SSPA de la Residencia de Obra. El
Contratista pondr a disposicin de la Residencia de Obra las evidencias documentales,
que le sean solicitadas de aquel personal que se encuentre involucrado en un incidente.
4. El Contratista debe cumplir con todos los puntos indicados en la NOM-015-STPS-2001,
independientemente de lo sealado en el 5.10 de la misma, para todas aquellas
actividades a desarrollar, donde exista exposicin de los trabajadores a condiciones
trmicas, provocadas por fuentes que generen que la temperatura corporal de los
trabajadores sea superior a 38 C.
5. El Contratista debe contar con los registros de que su personal est en condiciones
saludables para su ingreso a la obra, con mayor nfasis para los operadores de gras y
equipo de izaje, as como el que labora en altura, espacios confinados y equipos
energizados, quienes deben ser evaluados por el Servicio Mdico del Contratista, previo
al inicio de las actividades diarias.
6. El Contratista debe instalar y mantener hasta el final de la Obra, lavamanos y sanitarios
porttiles para el personal masculino y femenino en forma independiente, los cuales
deben ubicarse estratgicamente en el rea de construccin, considerando 1 sanitario por
cada 20 personas, considerando el total de trabajadores, tanto del contratista como el de
sus subcontratistas. Los sanitarios deben contar con receptculos para el manejo de los
desechos, mismos que deben ser retirados con frecuencia de dos veces por jornada; el
Contratista debe verificar la limpieza de los mismos y de la disposicin final de acuerdo a
la autorizacin municipal. En caso de utilizar un vehculo para el servicio de limpieza de
22 de 26
los sanitarios, ste deber estar equipado para este fin, deber contar con las
protecciones necesarias para su ingreso a la obra y la autorizacin del personal de SSPA
de la Residencia de Obra.
7. El Contratista deber instalar fosas para captar las descargas del drenaje sanitario de las
oficinas, comedores y otras instalaciones temporales, mismas que debern limpiarse
peridicamente y ser retiradas al final de la obra. El tipo deber ser de acuerdo a la
normatividad especfica y la localizacin debe ser acordada con la Residencia de Obra.
8. El Contratista debe suministrar agua purificada con hielo para el personal, en depsitos
limpios con tapa de sello hermtico. Se debe verificar la calidad del agua en estos
depsitos peridicamente, mediante anlisis bacteriolgicos, previo acuerdo con la
Residencia de Obra; las muestras deben ser tomadas de dichos depsitos. La cantidad
de agua depender de la fuerza de trabajo con que se cuente para la realizacin de las
Obras, considerando un mnimo de 3 litros por persona por jornada de trabajo.
9. El Contratista debe construir sus oficinas temporales, en el lugar que PEMEX
REFINACIN le indique, as como comedores techados con lamina y con piso de
concreto, adecuadamente ventilados y cerrados para evitar la contaminacin con polvos
de las reas de construccin, equipados con sillas, mesas, alumbrado, con capacidad
suficiente en los turnos establecidos para la fuerza de trabajo mxima esperada, de tal
manera que todo el personal de campo consuma sus alimentos en sta rea, lavamanos
con jabn, papel para las manos y tarja con agua corriente con descarga al drenaje
sanitario de las instalaciones temporales del Contratista, instalaciones elctricas,
contenedores hermticos para la basura, identificados con letreros y colores distintos
para la clasificacin y separacin de la basura, misma que debe mantenerse limpia,
donde no se debe fumar, ni utilizar hornillas de cualquier tipo ni encender fuego. En los
contenedores hermticos, recolectar los materiales orgnicos e inorgnicos de desecho,
por separado, mismos que deben ubicarse fuera del rea de preparacin de alimentos y
en lugares accesibles; as mismo retirar diariamente la basura de estos recipientes,
trasladarla y depositarla en el sitio que indique la autoridad municipal. Los contenedores
deben mantenerse limpios despus de ser retirada la basura.
No se admitirn carpas provisionales.
10. El Contratista debe contratar personal capacitado y en condiciones saludables para
operar la maquinaria y equipo, para operadores de vehculos de transporte de materiales
y residuos peligrosos debe contar con licencia vigente expedida por las autoridades de la
SCT.
11. El Contratista debe cumplir los requerimientos de la normatividad, respecto a los tiempos
de exposicin del personal que opere equipos que transmitan vibraciones, como son
rotomartillos, compactadores, entre otros.
IV. PROTECCION AMBIENTAL.
1. El Contratista debe cumplir con lo establecido en las Normas Oficiales Mexicanas,
relativas a la contaminacin por ruido.
2. El Contratista debe utilizar en las diferentes etapas de la Obra, equipo y maquinaria en
ptimas condiciones de operacin. Referente a vehculos automotores, debern cumplir
23 de 26
con los niveles mximos permisibles de emisin de contaminantes provenientes del

escape, de acuerdo a la normatividad aplicable.
3. El Contratista debe cumplir con lo indicado en las Normas Oficiales Mexicanas respecto a
la descarga de las aguas residuales que se generen en cualquier etapa de la Obra,
incluyendo las utilizadas en pruebas hidrostticas, de inundacin y durante el lavado de
maquinaria y equipo.
4. El Contratista debe manejar y disponer los residuos que se generen en la Obra de
acuerdo a lo previsto en la Ley General para la Prevencin y Gestin Integral de los
Residuos y su Reglamento y las Normas Oficiales Mexicanas aplicables.
Debe depositar en tambores debidamente identificados, los materiales impregnados con
hidrocarburos, aceites, pinturas y/o solventes (madera, estopa, ropa de algodn, trapo,
guantes, calzado, botas, entre otros), bateras (acumuladores) de desecho, envases
vacos, as como los que hayan contenido materiales y/o residuos clasificados como
peligrosos, los cuales deben ser entregados para su disposicin a empresas
debidamente autorizadas.
Debe asentar en una bitcora el manejo de los residuos peligrosos. Esta bitcora deber
estar disponible en todo momento para revisin del personal de SSPA de la Residencia
de Obra.
5. El Contratista debe dar cumplimiento a las condicionantes establecidas en el Oficio
Resolutivo, como resultado del dictamen que en su momento emita la SEMARNAT y
elaborar un reporte escrito para informar mensualmente a la Residencia de Obra de las
actividades realizadas para el cumplimiento de dichas condicionantes.
24 de 26
Figura 1
IDENTIFICACIN CON FOTOGRAFA
FRENTE
LOGO CIA.
PEMEX REFINACIN
PROYECTO:
NOMBRE:
FOTO
CATEGORA:
DEPTO.:
IMSS:
No. EMP.:
SUPTTE. DE CONSTRUCCIN
RESIDENTE DE OBRA
FIRMA DEL EMPLEADO
REVERSO
VIGENCIA:
EMPRESA O
SUBCONTRATISTA:
TEL:
EN CASO DE ACCIDENTE AVISAR A :
ALERGIAS:
AUTORIZA
DEPTO. DE PERSONAL
TEMA 6.1
INDUCCIN Y POLTICA SSPA:
RESIDENCIA DE OBRA
TEMA 6.2
REQUERIMIENTOS SSPA:
DEPTO. DE CAPACITACIN
Notas:
En el frente de la credencial se deben incluir las autorizaciones del Personal de SSPA del
Contratista y de la Residencia de Obra.
En el reverso se debe incluir la firma del Personal autorizado para impartir la capacitacin
en materia de SSPA.
25 de 26
Tabla 1
Indicadores de Accidentabilidad de Compaas Contratistas
Centro de Trabajo _______________
Compaa
Total de
Trabajadores en
la Instalacin
Mes/ao ___________________
Total de Horas
Hombre
Laboradas
Total Accidentes,
Incapacitantes (con
ms de 24 hrs)
Total de
ndice de
Accidentes
Frecuencia
Fatales
ndice de
Gravedad
ndice de
Actos
Seguros
IAS
TOTAL
Nota.- Los indicadores de Accidentabilidad debern ser integrados diferenciadamente con el personal de la contratista y los datos
de sus subcontratistas en caso de existir estos.
26 de 26
PEMEX REFINACION
INVITATION TO BID
SECTION 2
FABRICATION/INSTALLATION
2013-01-16
1.

Page 1 of 5
970086 R601F-0
Instrumentation
Instrumentation installation and related goods and services shall be provided in
accordance with the following documents:
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
Specifications and data sheets

1.
970086 S601F-0, SpecificationInstrument Installation
2.
970086 S601N-0, SpecificationInstrument Checkout
3.
970086 S601T-0, SpecificationInstrument Tubing Installation
4.
NOM-001-SEDE-2005 Electrical Installations
UOP standard drawings

1.
6-105-7, Standard DrawingThermowells
2.
6-106-6, Standard DrawingThermometer Assemblies
3.
6-107-7, Standard DrawingThermocouple head Assemblies
4.
6-108-6, Standard DrawingThermowell and Skin Thermocouple Installation

Assemblies
5.
6-111-6, Standard DrawingOrifice Plates
6.
6-112-4, Standard DrawingPiping Arrangements at Orifice Plates
UOP installation details:

Refer to Instrumentation Installation detail examples
1.
Pressure gaugesPressure Gauge Installations: 970086-D667-14

No. of pressure gauges to be installed- 4 qty.
2.
Transmittersa.
Transmitter Electrical Hook-Up Details 970086-D669-1

No. of transmitters 26 qty.
3. Flow
a.
Flow Transmitter (Gas Service) Mechanical Installation: 970086-D667-1

No of flow transmitters to be installed 6 qty.
b.
Flow Transmitter - Gas Service w/honed flow section Mechanical Installation:

970086-D667-2
No. of flow transmitters to be installed 2 qty.
c.
Dual Flow Transmitter (Gas Service) installed on one flow element mechanical
installation: 970086-D667-3
No. of transmitters to be installed- 4 qty. (2 pairs)
d.
Coriolis Mass Flow Meter Mechanical Installation- JAC0701-3-7M-312-001-4
2013-01-16

Page 2 of 5
970086 R601F-0
Coriolis Mass Flowmeter Electrical Hookup 970086-D669-5

No. of transmitters to be installed 2 qty.
3.
Differential Pressure
a.
Differential Pressure Transmitter Mechanical Installation: 970086-D667-8

No. of transmitters- 4 qty.
b.
Differential Pressure Transmitter Mechanical Installation: V-00000-90005-0208

No. of transmitters 4 qty.
4.
Temperature
a.
Temperature Element Electrical Hook-up 970086-D669-18

No. of temperature elements - 7 qty.
b.
Regeneration Tower Temperature Element Mechanical Hook-up953469-606 Sketch C

Temperature element mechanical hook-up 953469-606 Sketch D
No. of temperature elements 8 qty.
c.
Two temperature elements in one thermowell mechanical hook-up

953469-606 Sketch E
953469-606 Sketch F
No. of temperature elements 2 pair (4 elements)
d.
Thermocouple with Temperature Transmitter Electrical Hook-up970086-D669-2

No. of thermocouples with temperature transmitters- 19 qty.
e.
Skin Temperature Elements Electrical Hook-up 970086-D669-3

No. of Skin Temperature Elements- 24 qty.
f.
Skin Thermocouple mechanical Hook-upSee UOP Standard Drawing 6-108 detail B.

(Skin Thermocouples on Heaters will be installed by heater manufacturer)
g.
Skin Temperature Elements with Temp Transmitter Electrical Hook-up970086-D669-4
2013-01-16

Page 3 of 5
970086 R601F-0
No. of Skin Temp Elements with Transmitters 4 qty.

h.
Multi-point temperature detection on Regeneration Tower Electrical

Installation970086-D669-8
No. of temperature element points- 36 qty. (4 sets of 9 points each)
Mechanical Installation of Multi-point thermocouple on Regeneration towerSee 953469-305-05
5.
Instrument Supports
a.
Instrument Support Differential pressure transmitter with 2 Rotameters 970086-D670-11

No. of transmitter supports 2 qty.
b.
Instrument Support Differential Pressure transmitter with 1 rotameter V00000-90005-0264

No. of transmitter support 2 qty.
c.
Support Hook-Up Single Transmitter on one support V-00000-00005-0257

No. of transmitters 12 quantity
d.
Support Hook-Up Dual transmitters on one support - 970086-D670-6

No. of transmitters 2 pair (4 transmitters)
e.
Dual Temperature Transmitter Support Hook-Up 970086-D670-9

No. of Instrument Supports needed 10 Qty (16 transmitters)
f.
Single Temperature transmitters support hook-up 970086-D670-2

No. of skin thermocouples with transmitters- 4
6.
Rotameter
a.
Mechanical Installation: 970086-D667-6

No. of rotameters- 8 qty.
b.
support hook-up - V-00000-00005-0267

No. of instrument supports 4 qty.
7.
Hydrocarbon analyzer-
2013-01-16

a.
Electrical Hook-up V-00000-00005-0235
b.
Instrument Support Hook-up V-00000-00005-0270
Page 4 of 5
970086 R601F-0
No. of Hydrocarbon Analyzer 1 qty.

8.
Oxygen Analyzer
a.
Mechanical hook-up- 970086-D667-16
b.
Electrical Hook-up- 970086-D669-7
c.
Instrument Support Hook-Up 970086-D670-15
No. of analyzers 1 qty.

9.
Blowers
a.
Lift Gas Blower Electrical Hook-up 970086-D669-20
b.
Lift Gas Blower Mechanical Hookup 970086-D667-17
c.
Regen Blower Mechanical Hook-up - JAC073-7M-312-001-24
d.
Regen Blower Instrument Support Hook-Up JAC0701-3-7M-312-004-15
10. Oil Mist System

a.
Mechanical Hook-up 970086-D667-18
b.
Electrical Hook-up V-00000-00005-0232
11. Nuclear Level SwitchesElectrical Hook-Up 970086669-6

No. of switches 4 qty.
12. Valvesa.
Pneumatic Installation Details for valves 970086-D668-1

No. of valves- 30 qty.
b.
Electrical Hook-up for control valves 970086-D669-10

No. of valves- 12 qty.
c.
Electrical Hookup for existing valves on Dust Collector 970086-D669-11

No. of valves 2
d.
Electrical Hook-up for Solenoid On/Off Valves 970086-D669-12

No. of valves 15 qty.
13. Dust Collector Blowback System 970086-D699-17

No. of Dust Collectors 1 qty.
2013-01-16

Page 5 of 5
970086 R601F-0
14. Air Dryer Panel Electrical Installation Details V-00000-00005-0231

No. of air dryers 1 qty.
15. Junction Box Details
a.
Electrical Hook-Up 970086-D699-14

Junction Boxes 9 qty.
b.
Single Junction Box support 970086-D670-18

Single junction boxes 7 qty.
c.
Dual Junction Boxes support 970086-D670-19

Dual Junction Boxes 2 qty.
1.4.
Project specifications
Instrument Design Summary 60% Review
Instrument Location Plan 60% Review
2.
Other
Instrument installation and related goods and services shall comply with the most recent
version, except as otherwise noted, of the following documents:
3.
1.
970086 S140A-0, SpecificationLanguage, Units, and Documents
2.
970086 S140C-0, SpecificationDocumentation for Custom-Designed Goods and

Services
3.
970086 S140S-0, SpecificationSupplier Document Index
4.
970086 S150-A, SpecificationExamination, Testing, and Inspection Plan and

Record
5.
970086 S999C-0, SpecificationCross-Discipline Clearance and Accessibility
Conflicting requirements
In case of conflicts among documents outlined in this Technical Requisition, the
following shall apply:
1.
Drawings shall take precedence over Specifications.
2.
601 documents shall take precedence over 701 documents.
3.
701 documents shall take precedence over others.
2013-01-16
1.
Page 1 of 8
970086-S601F-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for instrument installation.
2.
Fabrication
1.
Bolded instruments on Mechanical Flow Diagram (MFD) shall be installed and

supported. Bolded instruments fall into three categoriesa.
New instruments that currently do not exist on the current unit
b.
New instruments that are replacing instruments that exist on the current unit.
c.
Existing instruments that are to be removed from the existing location and
installed (reused) in new location.
Refer to the Preliminary Instrument Design Summary (status column) for which
instruments fall into what category.
3.
2.
All affected instruments (whether being replaced, reused or new) shall be wired to
new junction boxes with new conduit and cable. Demolition of existing conduit and
cable not being used for replaced or reused instruments shall be taken as far back as
per the instrument demolition drawing.
3.
All affected instruments (whether being replaced, new, or reused) shall have new
impulse and/or instrument air tubing installed as per instrument requirements.
4.
All affected instruments (whether being replaced, new, or being reused) shall have
new instrument support stands. Any new support stand in the existing structure shall
be painted and bolted to either the grating or support beam. Any support stand in the
new structure shall be galvanized and bolted either to the grating or support beam.
5.
Brackets to attach the new Nuclear Level Instrument to the existing brackets on the
Reactor, Lock Hopper No. 1 (FA-511) and Lock Hopper No. 2 (FA-516) shall be
fabricated based on UOP supplied drawings.
1.
Electrical Installation shall conform to all the requirements of the governing code
shown below.
General
NEC
IEC
Other: NOM-001SEDE-2005
2.
Instrument except PDT/PDI shall be mounted 2.0 ft (600 mm) - 8.0 ft (2.4 m) from
process connection.
3.
Instrument shall be mounted to avoid high vibration.
4.
Instrument and support shall not be mounted inline with flanges, valve packing, etc.
or in such a manner as to interfere with the future removal or installation of other
equipment item or instrument.
5.
Instrument shall be located so as to maintain clearances required for walkway or

access way, and operation/maintenance of equipment and valve.
6.
Instrument cable and instrument air tubing shall be routed through pipeways and
areas provided for this routing, so as to protect them from damage during plant
operation and maintenance.
Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or produced in any manner
or used for any purpose whatsoever without is written permission.
2013-01-16
Page 2 of 8
970086-S601F-0
7.
Movement of instruments due to thermal expansion shall be taken into consideration

when running conduit and instrument air tubing.
8.
Sufficient flexibility shall be provided to permit instrument to move without

straining cable or tubing.
9.
Unless prohibited for other technical reasons, cable entry shall be from bottom of
instrument.
10. Conduit seals, for explosion proof installations of instrument loops, shall not be
filled unless otherwise directed by UOP.
11. Instruments shall be protected from damage before, during, and after installation.
12. Stainless steel surface shall be protected from iron filing from nearby grinding and
welding.
13. Instrument shall be protected from rain.
14. Cable adjacent to horizontal cable entry shall have a drip loop.
15. All instruments (new or reused) are to be kept in a clean, dry, indoor environment
before installation.
16. Supply and installation of instrument material shall be accordance with NEC
classification: Class I, Division 1, Groups B,C,and D except where noted.
17. Electrical Certification for instruments shall be UL and/or FM.
4.
Instrument installation
4.1.
Scope of supply
1.
2.
UOP
a.
Tagged instrument shall be obtained from UOP.
b.
Transmitter manifold, where required, shall be supplied assembled to the

transmitter.
c.
Nuclear Level bracket drawings for new nuclear level detector and source being
replaced on existing equipment- Reactor, Lock Hopper No. 1 (FA-511), and
Lock Hopper No. 2 (FA-516)
Fabricator to supply
a.
Junction Box
b.
Cable (non-armored acceptable)
c.
PVC coated Galvanized Steel Conduit
d.
PVC coated Conduit seals and fittings
e.
Flexible conduit (needs to be Explosion proof/Flameproof)
f.
Cable label and wire tag
g.
Stainless steel tubing and fitting
h.
Instrument air tubing and impulse tubing
i.
Conduit piping support
j.
Instrument and junction box stand
k.
Instrument stand and junction box stand name plates
2013-01-16
l.
Page 3 of 8
970086-S601F-0
Supporting steel
m. Accessories
4.2.
n.
Hardware and consumable items required to complete instrument installation.
o.
Fabricated nuclear level brackets to attach new instrument on existing brackets

on the Reactor, Lock Hopper No. 1 (FA-511) and Lock Hopper No. 2 (FA-516)
General Installation
Tagged instruments shall be installed as per applicable instrument mechanical installation
detail, instrument electrical installation detail, instrument tracing detail, instrumentation
support installation detail and conduit routing plan.
4.3.
Tubing
1.
2.
4.4.
Pocket (low point) shall be avoided.

a.
Impulse tubing shall slope continuously down to process connection in gas

service and continuously down to the instrument in liquid service.
b.
Minimum slope is 1 per 1 (25 mm per 300 mm).
Instrument piping shall be supported from prefabricated pipe supports, and any other
permanent vibration free structure, except as follows:
a.
Instrument piping and tubing shall not be supported from process piping.
b.
Sufficient supports shall be installed to maintain instrument piping in a neat

manner.
c.
Tubing shall have support every 3 (1m).
Instrument wiring
1.
24 VDC wiring, thermocouple wiring, and AC power wiring shall be kept separate
from each of the other type.
2.
No splices are permitted in any wire from the junction box to the instrument.
3.
Individual wire insulation shall be stripped back about 1 (25 mm) or only as long as
required to make a reliable connection.
4.
Shields / drain wires shall be landed to terminal provided at the junction box. Shields
/ drain wires are not to be terminated at the instrument. They should be taped back at
the instrument.
5.
For grounding details refer to electrical drawing package.
6.
Wire Labels
a.
Thermocouple and analog-instrument conductor shall be labeled at instrument

and junction box. Label shall include instrument tag number and polarity [e.g.,
FT-4430 (+), FT-4430(-)].
b.
Discrete-instrument conductor shall be labeled at instrument and junction box.

Label shall include de-energized contact state and instrument tag number [e.g.,
LSL-4421(NO), LSL-4421(C)]
c.
Label for individual wires shall be the tubular heat shrink type.
d.
Label on individual wires shall be completely on the insulated portion of the

wire
2013-01-16
4.5.
4.7.
4.8.
4.9.
e.
Label font shall be type written, permanent, black, size of at least ten point, and
on white background.
f.
Hand written labels are not permitted.
g.
Label shall be suitable for harsh applications.
Instrument air piping

1.
4.6.
Page 4 of 8
970086-S601F-0
For portions of the instrument air header that may be field fit the following
guidelines apply.
a.
Take-offs from the sub head (to the air user) should be taken from the top side of
the sub-header.
b.
The end of each sub-header shall be fitted with a valve and threaded plug to
allow condensation to be drained from the sub-header.
c.
Low point pockets shall be avoided. End users should be above the sub-header
in order to avoid low point pockets.
d.
Each end user (air consumer) shall have a shut off valve within reach
(approximately 1 meter). The final shut off valve for each air user should
generally be below the end user so that the final tubing to the end user will not
have a low point pocket.
Pressure gauge
1.
Refer to piping plan for location of pressure gauge.
2.
Pressure gauge shall be installed so that indicator is visible from grade or grating.
Pressure transmitter
1.
Refer to instrument location plan for location of pressure transmitters.
2.
LCD indicator shall be oriented so that indicator is in correct orientation with respect
to grade or grating, and will be visible to operations/maintenance workers.
Differential pressure transmitter (flow and differential pressure

service)
1.
Refer to instrument location plan for location of differential pressure transmitters.
2.
Remote indicators
1.
Refer to instrument location plan for location of remote indicators.
2.
Remote LCD indicators shall be oriented so that LCD indicators are in a correct
orientation relative to grade or grating.
4.10. Orifice plates and orifice flanges

4.10.1.Orifice plates
1.
Install plate with side marked inlet facing toward direction of flow.
4.10.2.Orifice flanges
1.
Refer to piping plan for location of orifice flanges
2013-01-16
Page 5 of 8
970086-S601F-0
4.10.3.Honed flow sections

1.
Refer to piping plan and instrument plan for location of honed flow sections.
2.
Honed flow sections shall be installed with the longer section of meter run at the
upstream side of the process flange. The shorter section of meter run shall be
installed at the downstream side of the process flange.
3.
For gas services honed flow sections and shall be installed such that all taping
locations are off the top side of the pipeline. For liquid services honed flow section
shall be installed so that all taping locations are on the side of the pipe.
4.
For honed flows, fabricator to install 10 mm spacer between orifice flanges, orifice
plate and gaskets to be shipped loose.
4.11. Thermocouples, thermometer and thermowells

1.
Refer to piping plan for location of thermocouples and thermowells.
2.
Fabricator to note length of themowell and thermowell nozzle when installing all
thermowells. For installation on the same level or at an angle of 45 to the line wall,
the wet length immersion of the themowells should be a minimum of 2. Fabricator
to alert UOP in writing if thermowell(s) do not meet this requirement.
4.12. Temperature transmitters

1.
Refer to instrument location plan for location of transmitters
2.
4.13. Nuclear level instruments

1.
Refer to instrument location plan for location of nuclear level detectors and switches
2.
Nuclear sources ship direct to refiners site from manufacturer and will need to be
installed on the appropriate vessels.
3.
Brackets to attach to the new Nuclear Level Instrument (detector and source) to the
existing brackets on the Reactor, Lock Hopper No. 1 (FA-511) and Lock Hopper No.
2 (FA-516) will be fabricated and installed by the on-site fabricator based on UOP
supplied drawings.
4.14. Control valves

4.14.1. General
1.
Refer to piping plan for location of control valves
2.
All control valves are supplied with accessories mounted and tubed except as noted.
3.
Valves shall be installed so that the flow arrow on the body is in direction of flow in
piping.
4.
If a valve is installed with its flow arrow in the correct direction and the valve
accessories are facing so that access to the accessories is, obstructed, or less than
optimal, the fabricator shall notify UOP in writing in a timely manner.
5.
No valve should ever be installed with the top of the actuator pointed toward the
grating.
2013-01-16
Page 6 of 8
970086-S601F-0
4.14.2.Automated and Manual Ball valves

1.
Refer to piping plan for location of ball valves.
2.
Prior to installing any ball valve, manual or automated, the alignment of the piping
shall be confirmed. The intent is to assure that the two piece valve is not subjected to
stresses from misaligned inlet and outlet flanges. UOP resident shall witness the
confirmation of the alignment of inlet and outlet piping flanges.
3.
The alignment shall be to within the dimension defined by the flange bolt hole radius
less the radius of the bolt. The intent is to assure that the two piece valve is not
subjected to stresses from misaligned inlet and outlet flanges.
4.
Prior to installing any ball valve in the catalyst path, UOP resident shall witness the
proper taper bore has been established.
5.
Valves shall be installed so that the flow arrow on the body is in direction of flow in
piping.
6.
If a valve is installed with its flow arrow in the correct direction and the valve
accessories are facing so that access to the accessories is, obstructed, or less than
optimal, the fabricator shall notify UOP in writing in a timely manner.
7.
Metal seated ball valves shall not be stroke tested unless agreed to and witnessed by
UOP.
4.15. Oxygen analyzer

1.
Refer to instrument location plan for location.
2.
Class I Div 2 area classification has been approved for the oxygen analyzer.
3.
The manufactures supplied gasket shall be used.
4.
UOP resident shall witness and photograph the installation to ensure that the
analyzer probe is orientated correctly.
5.
Do not use Teflon on the threaded portion of the analyzer probe. The probe shall be
dry threaded.
4.16. Rotameters
1.
Refer to instrument location and or piping plan for location
4.17. Manual control station

1.
Refer to instrument location plan for location
4.18. H2/HC analyzer

1.
Refer to instrument location plan for location.
4.19. Restriction orifices

1.
Refer to piping plan for location of restriction orifices.
2.
Install plate with side marked inlet facing toward direction of flow.
4.20. Instrument junction boxes

1.
Refer to conduit routing plan for location of instrument junction boxes.
2.
Fabricator to build junction box per UOP junction box assembly drawing.
3.
Refer to UOP junction box support details for support.
2013-01-16
Page 7 of 8
970086-S601F-0
4.21. Conduit
1.
5.
Refer to electrical installation specifications (S713F or S712F)
Demolition of existing instrumentation

5.1.
Affected instrumentation being removed and reused

5.1.1. Valves
1.
Care should be taken when removing electrical connection and tubing connections at
instrument air header isolation valve.
2.
Care should be taken that valve flange face is not damaged during removal.
Fabricator to inform UOP in writing of damage to valve flanges and seat that will
affect operation of valve.
3.
Remove and discard old flange gaskets and bolts. Replace with new gaskets and
bolts.
4.
Store valve in a clean, dry, indoor environment while awaiting installation.
5.
Contractor to contact UOP if valve being reused does not have legible flow arrow.
5.1.2. Rotameters
1.
Care should be taken when removing process connections and removing from
instrument stand. Contractor shall inform UOP in writing of irreparable damage
that would prevent reuse of rotameters.
2.
Store in a clean, dry, indoor environment while awaiting installation
5.1.3. Flow transmitter

1.
Care should be taken when removing electrical connection and tubing connections at
process isolation valve. Contractor shall inform UOP in writing of irreparable
damage that would prevent reuse of flow transmitter.
2.
Care should be taken when removing from instrument stand. Manifold brackets
should be retained for reinstallation on new stand.
3.
Manifold may remain connected to transmitter.
4.
Store transmitter and bracket together in a clean, dry, indoor environment while
awaiting installation
5.1.4. Thermocouples/Thermowells
1.
Thermocouple shall be disconnected from electrical and not removed from

thermowell before removing thermowell. Care should be taken when disconnecting
electrical that the thermocouple wires are not bent or broken.
Thermocouple/thermowell shall be removed as an assembly.
2.
Care should be taken to preserve thernowell flanges when removing from piping.
3.
Thermocouple/thermowell assembly shall be stored in a clean, dry, indoor

environment while awaiting installation.
2013-01-16
5.2.
Page 8 of 8
970086-S601F-0
Affected instrumentation being removed

5.2.1. Instrumentation being removed and replaced in existing piping
1.
Care should be taken to preserve pipe flange faces. Contractor to inform UOP in
writing of damage to piping flanges that would affect installation and operation of
new instrumentation.
2.
Remove and discard old flange gaskets and bolts. Replace with new gaskets and
bolts.
3.
Instrumentation shall be transported to a designated location within the Pemex

Minatitlan refinery with the exception of the nuclear level sources (see item 4).
Pemex will be responsible for disposal of all items stored in this designated location.
4.
Written notification of when nuclear level sources will be removed shall be given to
Pemex prior to removal. Pemex to inform contractor of disposal requirements. The
appropriate Pemex official(s) need to be present when nuclear sources are removed.
5.2.2. Instruments being removed and discarded (location of

instrument has changed)
1.
Removed Instrumentation shall be transported to a designated location within the

Pemex Minatitlan refinery. Pemex will be responsible for disposal of all items stored
in this designated location
5.2.3. Instrument Stands

1.
Instrument stands on instrumentation shall be replaced with new instrument stands.

Instrument stands on the existing structure shall be painted and bolted to either the
grating or support beam.
2.
Instrument stands removed shall be be transported to a designated location within

the Pemex Minatitlan refinery. Pemex will be responsible for disposal of all items
stored in this designated location.
5.2.4. Tubing
1.
Remove existing tubing from valves and flow transmitters back to its isolation valve
or as far back as possible without interfering with existing instruments.
5.2.5. Instrument Wiring

1.
6.
Demolition of existing conduit for instruments that are not being replaced in their
current location shall be taken as far back as possible without interfering with
existing instruments. Refer to demolition drawings.
Inspection and testing

1.
Refer to S601N
2013-01-16
1.
UOP Specification
Instrument Checkout
Page 1 of 3
970086 S601N-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for instrument wiring-continuity test,
functional check, and tube-fitting check.
2.
Functional check
Instrument, except pressure gauge and thermometer, shall be functionally checked.
2.1.
Test equipment and pneumatic supply

1.
Microprocessor-based smart instrument shall be tested using a portable

communicator.
2.
Electronic test equipment shall have resolution values less than or equal to the
following:
3.
4.
2.2.
a.
mA DC 0.01 mA
b.
mV DC 0.01 mV
c.
V DC
1.00 mV
d.
V AC
1.00 mV
e.
Resistance
0.06% of full scale
f.
Frequency
0.10 Hz
Pneumatic test equipment shall have uncertainties less than or equal to the following
values:
a.
0.0 - 25.0 in. H2O (635 mm)
0.30 % of full span
b.
0.10 % of full span
0.0 - 15.0 psig (1.05 kgf/cm )
c.
0.0 - 100.0 psig (7.0 kgf/cm )
0.05 % of full span
d.
0.0 - 1000.0 psig (70.0 kgf/cm2)
0.05 % of full span
Pneumatic supply shall have the following characteristics:

a.
Pressure of at least 70 psig (5.0 kgf/cm2)
b.
Filtered to less than 10 microns
c.
Dew point temperature less than -20F (-29C)
Wiring
Installed wiring shall be checked for the following:
1.
Continuity between terminations

a.
2-wire Pressure, Differential pressure and temperature transmitter continuity

shall be checked with smart communicator from junction box. Successful test
will have soft tag verified and visual confirmation that integral indicator
illuminated
b.
Circuit continuity for solenoids and limit switches shall be checked during valve
stroke test from junction box. Ohmmeter or limit switch tester shall be used
depending on type of limit switch output. Limit switches shall be adjusted so
that ZSC (open limit switch) has closed contacts at 100% valve stroke and ZSO
(closed limit switch) has closed contacts at 100% valve stroke.
2013-01-16
UOP Specification
Instrument Checkout
2.
c.
Positioner continuity shall be checked with smart communicator and with valve
stroke test with 4-20 mA signal from junction box. Software tag shall be
verified
d.
Circuit continuity for other instruments (4 wire instruments,analyzer alarms,

pressure switches etc.) shall be checked by shorting the wires at the instrument
end and verifying the result at junction box terminal strip.
Isolation from other conductors, including shielding

a.
2.3.
2.
3.
4.
Metal-seated ball valve shall not be stroked.
Control valve, except metal-seated ball valve

1.
2.5.
Each wire shall be checked using ohmmeter to verify isolation from all other
conductors within junction box including shield drain wires.
Metal-seated ball valve

1.
2.4.
Page 2 of 3
970086 S601N-0
On/off-control-valve action shall be confirmed using the following procedure:

a.
Verify valve position against P&ID with solenoid deenergized.
b.
Energize solenoid and verify valve position against data sheet.
Throttling-control-valve action shall be confirmed using the following procedure:

a.
Verify valve position against P&ID with no input signal present . [Solenoid
shall be deenergized if supplied] solenoid
b.
Using 50% and 100% input, verify valve stem moves over range. [Solenoid
shall be energized if supplied]
Errors
1.
Incorrect smart-instrument span setting shall be corrected.
2.
Other errors shall be reported within five working days.
Tube-fitting check
1.
Tube-fitting insertion depth shall be checked in accordance with manufacturers

instructions.
2.
Tube fitting shall be tested using tube-fitting manufacturers gap inspection or

go/no-go gauge in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
3.
Fitting not in compliance shall be replaced.
Instrumentation Check List Documentation:

The fabricator will advise UOP of checkout schedule
Fabricator shall record instrument checkout results on fabricator supplied checklist
The fabricator instrument check will include but not be limited to, following:
1.
Updating common master set of instrument fabrication drawings with as built

information
2.
Verification that instrument bulk material is in compliance to UOP specifications

and quantity.
2013-01-16
UOP Specification
Instrument Checkout
Page 3 of 3
970086 S601N-0
3.
Verfication that position of instrument installation is clear of accessways and does

not infringe on operator access.
4.
Verfication that filter is installed on upstream side of Coriolis mass flow meter.
5.
Verification that local indicators are visible from associated manual valves wherever
indicated on the P&IDs.
6.
O2 Analyzer:
7.
a.
Photos to be taken of Oxygen analyzer installation. Photos to verify sample

tube and sample exhaust tube are installed and properly oriented.
b.
Verification that instrument air purge connection for Oxygen sensor installed
c.
Verification that nitrogen connection for aspiration of sample installed
d.
Verification that Oxygen sensor sample probe and exhaust probee was dry
threaded to sample flange,i.e. threads were not prepared with lubricant or tape.
e.
Verification that manufacturer supplied sensor gasket was installed.
H2/HC analyzer:
a.
8.
9.
Verification that sampling line from dust removal header and from nitrogen
header are within maximum distances specified on the P&IDs
Following to be verified on control valves

a.
Direction of flow arrow on control valve bodies same as process flow
b.
Visibility of air supply and output gauges
c.
Instrument air supply shutoff valve shall be piped within 3 feet of valve air filter
regulator and be clear of accessways
d.
Bug screens for all solenoids vents provided.
Following to be verified for impulse tubing of transmitters

a.
Slope requirement for all the transmitter impulse lines is per the installation
drawings
b.
Primary isolatation valve installed is same size and valve type (e.g. globe, gate,
ball) as the P&ID.
c.
High & low taps connections are correct
10. Verify color code and proper tagging for cables and conductors
11. Measure length of all thermowell nozzles and highlight where thermowell does not
extend into piping or vessel
12. Verification grounding of instrument, junction boxes and cable trays complies with
installation drawingss.
13. Verification electric power installed from instrument power pan to four wire
instruments
5.
Documentation
Fabricator Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) shall be completed and provided.
2013-16-01
1.
UOP Specification
Instrument Tubing Installation
Page 1 of 1
970086 S601T-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for installation of instrument tubing.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Tubing end
1.
Tubing shall be cut square and deburred.
2.
Length inserted into compression fitting shall be clean, round, and free of scratches.
1.
Bend shall be made using a tubing bender.
2.
Bend radius shall be at least three times tube outside diameter.
3.
Distance from bend or fitting to bend or fitting shall be at least 4 inches (100 mm).
Tubing bend
Tubing union
1.
Union elbow fitting is prohibited.
2.
Tubing run less than 1 m long shall have no union.
Tubing fitting-manufacturers instructions

1.
Fitting-manufacturers installation instructions shall be furnished two weeks prior to

beginning work.
2.
Fitting-manufacturers installation instructions shall be available on demand at

fabrication facility.
3.
Fitting installation shall comply with the tubing-fitting-manufacturers installation

instructions.
Tubing support
1.
Support spacing shall be less than or equal to 1 m.
2.
Support shall not be connected to process piping.
3.
Tubing shall be supported as follows:

a.
Tubing shall be supported from structural steel or grating.
b.
Sufficient supports shall be installed to maintain instrument piping in a neat

manner.
c.
Tubing span over 6 ft (2 m) shall be continuously supported in tubing tray.
in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.
2013-01-17
1.

Page 1 of 2
970086 R701F-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirement for electrical installation.
2.
Electrical installation
Electrical installation and related goods and services shall be provided in accordance with
2.1.
2.2.
Standards, specifications, and data sheets

1.
Official Mexican Standard, NOM-001-SEDE-2005, Electrical Installations (Use)
2.
970086 S701F-0, SpecificationElectrical System Installation
3.
970086 S701SS-0, SpecificationSubstation No.3 Modification
4.
970086 S712F-0, SpecificationConduit and Conduit Installation
5.
970086 T701F-0, Technical Data SheetElectrical Installation
6.
970086 U701F-0, Inspection Data SheetElectrical Systems
Electrical Installation Details

The following Electrical Installation Details will be provided when the electrical detail
design is complete:
1. Welding Receptacles-socket outlet mounting on grade and on deck
2.3.
2.
Convenience Receptacles-socket outlet mounting on grade and on deck
3.
Power system conduit feed
4.
Electrical Heater connections
5.
Grounding System
6.
Control stations and switches
7.
Lighting system mounting details
8.
Conduit Supports
Electrical Detail Design Drawings

The following Electrical Detail Design Drawings will be provided when the electrical
detail design is complete:
1. Power, Control and Grounding Plan
2.
Low Voltage Distribution Plan (Lighting and convenience receptacles)
3.
Conduit routing, sections and elevation drawings
4.
Electrical Homerun conduit Routing Plan
5.
Electrical Homerun Cable Schedule
6.
Substation 3 Electrical plan and elevation drawing
7.
Electrical Panel board schedule
9.
Motor Control Schematics
2013-01-17
2.4.

Page 2 of 2
970086 R701F-0
Electrical Demolition Drawings

The following Electrical Demolition Drawings will be provided when the electrical detail
design is complete:
10. Demolition Single Line Diagram
11. Demolition Electrical Homerun Cable Schedule
12. Demolition Motor Control Schematics
13. Demolition Motor Drawings
14. Demolition Air and Regeneration Heater Drawings
3.
Other
Electrical installation and related goods and services shall comply with the most recent
4.
1.
970086 S059F, SpecificationPreparation of Opening for Overland Shipment
2.
970086 S065, SpecificationModule Preparation for Shipment
3.
970086 S140A, SpecificationLanguage, Units, and Certification
4.
970086 S140C, SpecificationDocumentation for Custom-Designed Goods and

Services
5.
970086 S140S, SpecificationSupplier Document Index
6.
970086 S150, SpecificationExamination, Testing, and Inspection Planning
7.
970086 S999C, SpecificationCross-Discipline Clearance and Accessibility
Conflicts
In case of conflicts among the documents in this Requisition, the following shall apply:
1.
Drawings shall take precedence over Specifications.
2.
701 documents shall take precedence over others.
2013-01-17
1.
UOP Specification
Electrical System Installation
Page 1 of 4
970086 S701F-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for electrical supply and installation.
2.
Modification / Installation
1.
Supply and installation of electrical materials shall be in accordance with area

classification: Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D.
2.
All previously used underground raceway/manholes will not be used for the new
CCR electrical installation and should be capped. All associated existing
raceway and cabling for CCM-1 located within Substation 3 shall be
disconnected and existing underground cable from Substation 3 to existing CCR
module should be abandoned.
Conduit entering underground ductbank from demolished heaters and
demolished motors shall be cut and capped.
Contractor shall transport all removed/demolished electrical materials and store
them at a designated location within Pemex Minatitlan Refinery. Pemex will be
responsible for disposal of materials.
New overhead conduit using rigid, hot dipped galvanized steel conduit with PVC
coating shall be furnished and installed by Contractor from Substation 3 to new
and modified CCR electrical installations. Overhead conduit shall be installed
per conduit routing plan from detail design package.
Electrical homerun cable should be furnished by Contractor and installed as
referenced in 970086 S701SS-0. The conduit and wiring shall be installed from
Substation 3 to new and modified CCR electrical installations. This includes
furnishing, installing and connecting all associated raceway, cabling and
miscellaneous materials required to make a complete installation.
The Contractor shall adequately protect all electrical items and material from the
adverse effects of the environment and activities of his own and subcontractors.
Electrical equipment and materials are installed by the Contractor except as
noted on drawings.
Electrical panel boards shall be provided by UOP, installed by module
Contractor for Normal Lighting, Emergency Lighting, Receptacle Power, and
Instrument power circuits; power feeders to these panel boards shall be provided
and installed by Contractor on site.
Mounting supports and accessories for electrical equipment installations are
supplied, fabricated and installed by Contractor.
PVC coated junction boxes, lighting fixtures, receptacles and associated
electrical materials and supports shall be furnished and installed by the
Contractor.
The PVC coated galvanized rigid conduit must be UL Listed. Hazardous
location fittings, prior to plastic coating must be UL listed. All conduit and
fittings must be new, unused material.
Installation of the PVC Coated Conduit System shall be performed in accordance
with the Manufacturer's Installation Manual. All clamping, cutting, threading,
bending, and assembly instructions listed in the manufacturer's installation guide
should be vigorously followed.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
2013-01-17
UOP Specification
Page 2 of 4
970086 S701F-0
14. Feraloy iron alloy conduit outlet fittings with PVC coating shall be furnished and
installed Contractor to install on modules as per the installation detail drawings.
Drain fittings shall be installed in all low points of the conduit system including
the bottom of pull, termination and junction boxes.
15. Conduits shall be supported at 8 ft. (2.5) intervals maximum and clamped
together at 4 ft. (1.25) intervals using hot dipped galvanized unistrut system.
Conduit must be supported within 3 ft. (900) of each box or fitting.
16. Mounting height for electrical equipment shall be as follows, measured from
finished surface or grating:
Receptacle:
36 in. (900 mm)
Panel:
48 in. (1220 mm)
Lighting fixture (pendant or stanchion):

guard
Switch / control station:
3.
4.
6.
3 ft 6 in. (1067 mm)
Lighting
1.
Conduit and wiring for lighting fixtures shall be provided from distribution panel or
interface junction box to each fixture.
2.
Lighting fixture lamp shall be installed.
3.
Lighting fixture and receptacle shall be installed within three feet (914.4 mm) of
location shown on plan drawing.
4.
Ship-loose fixture shall be assembled and strapped to the platform it serves.
5.
Pendant-mounted light fixture shall be properly supported while hanging to the side
during fabrication and shipping.
Electrical certification
1.
5.
90 in. (2286 mm) bottom of lamp
Electrical equipment that is not specified in the design or listed in the bill of materials
shall bear Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or Factory Mutual (FM) approval label.
Electrical testing
1.
A megger test shall be performed for each cable spool.
2.
A functional illumination test shall be performed for the lighting system.
3.
All circuits shall be checked for continuity and compliance using a volt-ohm meter.
4.
Electrical wiring shall be checked for insulation resistance before connections to light
fixtures, switches etc.
1.
Ground wire penetrating platform shall be provided with rigid galvanized steel or
aluminum conduit sleeve with bushings.
2.
Main ground cable shall be installed from grounding station on lower deck of module
to grounding stations on upper decks of the same module.
Grounding
2013-01-17
7.
UOP Specification
Page 3 of 4
970086 S701F-0
3.
Sufficient length of main ground cable shall be connected to upper deck grounding
station to allow for final field connection to lower grounding station on the module
above it.
4.
Support steel for PVC pipe shall be welded to structural steel.
5.
Branch ground cable serving equipment on platforms shall be installed below module
platform.
6.
Branch ground cable serving equipment at grade shall be routed in order of

preference:
a.
Below under intermediate steel beams if PVC conduit is at a higher elevation

than outside steel beams
b.
On top of steel in PVC pipe and then ascending to service
c.
Above service in PVC pipe or in cable tray and then descending to service
7.
Connection between grounding cables shall be compression type connection.
8.
Bolted connection shall be protected against corrosion by wrapping with grease

impregnated tape.
9.
Ground lug or clip shall be as follows:

a.
Welded to equipment or structural steel
b.
Of the same metallurgy as the equipment
Electrical equipment labeling

1.
Electrical nameplate shall be as follows:

a.
Provided for electrical interface junction box and local control station
b.
Three layer laminated plastic construction

1.
Danger labels shall have white characters on a red background.
2.
Other labels shall have black characters on a white background.
c.
Engraved with straight, 6.0 mm, vertical letters.
d.
4 in. (100 mm) by 2 in. (50 mm) by 0.125 in. (3 mm) thick
2.
Nameplate attachment hardware shall be brass or type 300 series stainless steel.
3.
Nameplate attachment hardware shall not void enclosure certification.
4.
Nameplate for junction box shall designate junction box tag number, panel and circuit
number of wiring
5.
Nameplate for control stations shall denote tag number and service of equipment
controlled
6.
Danger labels shall be as follows:

a.
b.
Be provided for the following:

1.
Welding receptacle junction box
2.
Heater interface box
State DANGER LIVE TERMINALS. ISOLATE ELSEWHERE BEFORE

OPENING
2013-01-17
8.
9.
UOP Specification
Page 4 of 4
970086 S701F-0
Clearance
1.
Electrical equipment and raceways shall have a minimum clearance of 12 in

(300 mm) from hot surfaces.
2.
Lighting fixture shall have adequate clearance from trolleys, cranes, and monorails
such that removal of process equipment will not require removal of fixture or
electrical raceway.
3.
Conduit and tray risers shall have a minimum clearance of 4 inches (100 mm) from
column steel, ladders, piping, and insulated services.
4.
Clearance between conduit and piping, as well as between conduit and equipment,
shall be at least 6 inches (150 mm).
5.
Electrical equipment including lighting fixtures and conduit riser shall be located and
oriented, so removal of process equipment does not require removal of fixture or
electrical raceway.
Support
Electrical raceway shall not be supported from ladder, ladder cage, or ladder support clip.
2013-01-16
1.
UOP Specification
Electrical Substation No.3 Modification
Page 1 of 2
970086 S701SS-0
Scope
This document defines the technical requirements for the modification of existing
electrical Substation No.3
2.
Modification / Installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Disconnect and remove existing motor control center CCM-1 (transport to a

designated location within the Pemex Minatitlan Refinery. Pemex will be
responsible for disposal of all items stored at this designated location) and all
associated existing raceway and cabling located within the substation. Coordinate
this effort with the field effort. This includes capping previously used underground
raceway which will not be used for the new CCR electrical installation.
Receive, handle, store, install and connect new motor control center CCM-1 and
furnish, install and connect all associated raceway, cabling and miscellaneous
materials required to make a complete installation for the equipment located within
the substation
Disconnect and remove existing heater controller panels for BH-500 and BH-502
(transport to a designated location within the Pemex Minatitlan Refinery. Pemex
will be responsible for disposal of all items stored at this designated location) and
all associated existing raceway and cabling located within the substation.
Coordinate this effort with the field effort.
Receive, handle, store, install and connect new heater controller panels BH-500 and
BH-502. This includes furnishing, installing and connecting all associated raceway,
cabling and miscellaneous materials required to make a complete installation within
the substation.
Receive, handle, store, Install and connect new VFD for Regeneration Blower GB505 (125 HP). This includes furnishing, installing and connecting all associated
raceway, cabling and miscellaneous materials required to make a complete
installation within the substation.
Receive, handle, store, Install and connect new 5KV motor starters in existing 5KV
MCC for new air compressors GB-507A (300 HP) and GB-507B (300 HP). This
includes furnishing, installing and connecting all associated raceway, cabling and
miscellaneous materials required to make a complete installation within the
substation.
Disconnect and remove cable from existing 45 kVA transformer (480V-220/127 V)
located in CCM-1 to existing CCM-1A. Furnish, install and connect new cable from
new 45kVA transformer located in new CCM-1.
Furnish, install and connect new circuit breakers in existing CCM-1A to supply new
lighting panel LP-1 and new receptacle panel RP-1 located at the new CCR unit.
This includes furnishing, installing and connecting all associated raceway, cabling
and miscellaneous materials required to make a complete installation within the
substation.
Installation of raceway and cable from all associated field equipment up to the
substation equipment is not part of this contract. The termination of the associated
field wiring at the substation equipment is a part of this contract.
2013-01-16
3.
UOP Specification
Electrical Substation No.3 Modification
Page 1 of 2
970086 S701SS-0
Reference Drawings
The following Electrical Detail Design Drawings will be provided when the electrical
detail design is complete:
1. Demolition Substation 3 Electrical Plan
2.
Demolition Single Line Diagram
3.
Substation 3 Electrical Plan
4.
Motor Control Center CCM-1 Plan & Elevation
5.
Heater Controllers Plan & Elevation
6.
Heater Controllers Vendor Schematics & Wiring Diagrams
7.
GB-505 VFD Plan & Elevation
8.
GB-505 VFD Vendor Schematic & Wiring Diagram
9.
Existing 5 kV MCC Elevation
10. CCM-1A Circuit Schedule
2013-01-17
1.
UOP Specification
Conduit Supply and Installation
Page 1 of 3
970086 S712F-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for supply and installation of conduit.
2.
3.
Conduit and conduit fitting

1.
Rigid conduit, coupling, elbow, bend, and nipple shall comply with ANSI C80.1,
American National Standard for Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc Coated (GRC).
2.
Conduit and conduit fittings shall be coated with external 1 mm thick PVC, and
internal .5 mm thick Urethane). ESPP-6940 and NMX-J534-ANCE.
3.
Rigid conduit system shall be certified by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
4.
Supply and installation of electrical materials is in accordance with area

classification: Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D
Separation of instrument and power conduits

Separation between parallel runs of conduit used for instrument wiring or cable and
conduit used for power wiring or cable shall comply with this section.
3.1.
3.2.
Definitions
1.
110-to-240-volt instrument circuit for alarm and solenoid shall be considered a type
of Power Wiring or Cable in this section.
2.
Wire or cable type shall be as defined in the following table:

Type
Description
II
Single, unshielded twisted wire pair
III
Single, shielded twisted wire pair
IV
Multipair cable of Type II wire
Multipair, overall shielded cable of Type II wire
VI
Multipair, overall shielded cable of Type III wire
Separation
1.
If instrument wiring is Type III or if instrument cable is Type VI, separation shall be
at least as great as shown in the following table:
Power Wiring or Cable
2.
Millivolts
4-20 or 10-50 maDC
Less than 125V @ 20A
4 in. (100 mm)
None required
125V to 500V @ 200A
12 in. (300 mm)
6 in. (150 mm)
Over 500V
36 in. (900 mm)
18 in. (450 mm)
If instrument wiring is Type II or if instrument cable is Type IV or V, separation shall

be at least as great as shown in the following table:
2013-01-17
UOP Specification
Power Wiring or Cable
4.
Millivolts
8 in. (200 mm)
4 in. (100 mm)
125V to 500V @ 200A
15 in. (375 mm)
8 in. (200 mm)
Greater than 500V
48 in. (1200 mm)
24 in. (600 mm)
Routing
1.
Conduit shall be installed parallel with or at right angles to main columns and beams.
2.
Clearance between conduit and piping, as well as between conduit and equipment,
shall be at least 2 in.
3.
Clearance from conduit to surface and from conduit to location shall be at least as
great as shown in the following table:
113F to 149F (45C to 65C)

Greater than 149F (65C)
Clearance
6 in. (152 mm)
12 in. (305 mm)
Support
1.
Box for the following shall be supported independently from conduit system:
2.
6.
4-20 or 10-50 maDC
Less than 125V @ 20A
Surface or Location Temperature
5.
Page 2 of 3
970086 S712F-0
a.
Selector switch
b.
Indicator light
c.
Push-button station
d.
Receptacle
Conduit shall not be supported from piping, ladder, ladder cage, or ladder support.
3.
On fireproofed beams, the design shall permit conduit supports to be installed prior
to fireproofing and in such a manner that the conduit does not become imbedded in
the fireproofing. Conduit shall be four inches from fireproofing.
4.
Unless otherwise approved, spacing between conduit supports shall not exceed 7
feet (2.14 meters).
5.
Supports are required at bends, fittings and fixtures to make conduit system rigid
and free from vibrations. Supports shall be adequate for the load impose.
6.
Fasteners used for support of conduit shall be 316 stainless steel.
7.
Framing channel supports shall be installed in such a manner that the conduits are
supported on top of the framing channel, wherever possible.
Drain and breather

1.
Conduit run shall have drain at each low point.
2.
Closed vertical conduit run of length more than 20 ft (6 m) shall have breather at high
point.
3.
Conduit drain and breather material shall be 300-series stainless steel.
2013-01-17
7.
UOP Specification
Page 3 of 3
970086 S712F-0
Installation requirements
1.
The requirements for conduit installation as defined by NFPA 70 (NEC) for

hazardous locations shall be adhered to.
2.
Conduit expansion fittings are required at as shown on conduit riser diagram.
3.
Conduit and fitting thread shall be lubricated with a lithium based anti-seize
compound such as Crouse Hinds STL8 lubricant (or approve equal), and made up
tight with wrench work or Spin It tool.
4.
Plugs are required in all unused conduit entries.
5.
A conduit fitting or pull box is required for every 180 degrees of bends.
6.
Explosion proof flexible conduit coupling shall be installed from the conduit
system to instrument, electric heaters and motors as per the installation details.
7.
Conduit entry into enclosures is bottom and side only.
8.
Cutting structural members to provide passage for conduit is prohibited.
9.
Field bends shall be made with approved bending tools; Bends shall be of uniform
radius and free from cracks, crimps or other damage to the pipe including
flattening of the pipe cross section.
10. Conduit cuts shall be square, perpendicular to the axis of the conduit. Conduit must
be reamed, and free of internal burrs and rough edges.
11. Conduit fittings are to be installed accessible from grade, platform or with the use
of a portable ladder.
12. As a minimum, 6 full threads engagements shall be provided on each conduit
connection.
13. PVC coated junction boxes, lighting fixtures, receptacles and associated electrical
materials and supports shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.
14. The PVC coated galvanized rigid conduit must be UL Listed. Hazardous location
fittings, prior to plastic coating must be UL listed. All conduit and fittings must be
new, unused material.
15. Installation of the PVC Coated Conduit System shall be performed in accordance
with the Manufacturer's Installation Manual. All clamping, cutting, threading,
bending, and assembly instructions listed in the manufacturer's installation guide
should be vigorously followed.
2013-01-17
UOP Technical Data Sheet

Page 1 of 1
970086 T701F-0
Conduit
Type: Rigid Galvanized Conduit with PVC coating
Fittings: Crouse Hinds Type EABL, EABX, EAJT or EAJL, series; Felaloy iron body and cover, PVC coated
Service: Power, lighting, control, field instrumentation
Electrical Connection
Thread specification:
PG
Metric
NPT
BSP Parallel, PF, G
Other:
Junction Box
Manufacturer:
Hoffman stainless steel with hinged
ABB CEAG
cover, NEMA 4X
Crouse-Hinds as per the Design &
MTO
10
Other: Per the design and MTO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
12
13 Type:
XHHW-2, 600 V insulation for #12

to #10 AWG, stranded.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Wire in Conduit
THHN/THWN, 90 C, 600V rated,
Insulation, stranded
RHH/Hypolon for #8 up to 500

KCMIL, 90 C, 600V Insulation,
stranded
Other: SF-1, 2 fixture wire
Branch-Circuit Conductor Color

Hot: Black (A), Blue (C), Red (B)
Neutral: White
Ground: Green
1
Remarks
For wiring connections inside junction boxes, terminal strips are required. Wire nuts are not acceptable;
Grounding conductor for electrical equipments shall be green color PVC, stranded copper conductor.
Phase conductors
Neutral Conductor
Grounding Conductor
Note: Th information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner
2013-01-17
UOP Inspection Data Sheet

UOP
Examination or Testing
1.
Motor megger test
2.
Insulation resistance
test on all module
installed wiring
3.
Instrument wiring
continuity test
4.
Lighting energization
and foot-candle
measurement of each
deck
5.
Receptacle circuit
testing
Page 1 of 1
970086 U701F-0
PEMEX
UOP
WIT OBS WIT OBS Other Activities

1. Kickoff meeting with
Module shop Electrical
fabricator
PEMEX
WIT OBS WIT OBS
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
If WIT (witnessed) column is selected and if the examination, test, or other activity is performed:
a.
A hold point shall be applied to the production schedule.
b.
Examination, test, or other activity shall be performed with the indicated party or parties in attendance.
c.
For mechanical running or performance tests, written notification of a successful preliminary test shall be
provided.
If OBS (observed) column is selected and if the examination, test, or other activity is performed:
a.
Indicated party or parties shall be notified of the timing of examination, test, or activity.
b.
Examination, test, or other activity may be performed as scheduled if indicated party or parties are not
present.
Written and verbal notice shall be provided for witnessed or observed examination, test, or other activity.
a.
Written notice shall arrive at UOP ten workdays prior to examination, test, or other activity.
b.
Verbal notice shall be provided two workdays prior to examination, test, or other activity.
Inspection forecast shall comply with both of the following:

a.
Forecast shall include projected dates for witnessed or observed examination, tests, and other activities.
b.
Forecast shall be updated and resubmitted:
Weekly
Biweekly
Monthly
OMM Finalb
Note 3
UOP Documentation Data Sheet

MRB Finalb
Note 3
Reviewb
Note 2
Proposala
Note 1
2013-01-17
Page 1 of 1
970086 V701F-0
DESCRIPTION
General
1.
6F
Inspection / Test Reports
0S
2.
0S
3.
Motor Megger Test

Instrument Wiring Continuity Test
4.
Cable Spool Megger Test
0S
5.
0S
6.
Photographs of inside of junction boxes, power distribution panels, and control panels
Lighting Energization
0S
7.
Electrical apparatus vendor data/catalog cut sheets (lighting fixture, receptacle outlets, pushbutton
station, selector switches, cable tray)
Nomenclature:
S - number of weeks prior to shipment.
F - number of weeks after firm order.
D - number of weeks after receipt of approved drawings.
X to be provided
(X if no due date is established)
Notes:
1.
For documents indicated in the Proposal column, provide an electronic copy or one hard copy.
2.
For documents indicated in the Review column, provide an electronic copy or one hard copy.
3.
For documents indicated in the Final columns provide an electronic copy and three hard
copies.
a Proposal drawings and data do not have to be certified or as built. Typical data shall be clearly identified as such.
b Purchaser will indicate in this column the time frame for submission of materials using the nomenclature given at the end of this form.
2013-01-16
1.

Piping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and Examination
Page 1 of 3
970086 R801F-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for the fabrication, assembly, erection, and
examination of piping.
2.
Piping
Piping and related goods and services shall be provided in accordance with the most
recent version, unless otherwise indicated, of the following documents:
2.1.
Specifications and data sheets

1.
970086 S801F-, SpecificationPiping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and

Examination
2.
970086 U801F-0, Inspection Data SheetPiping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection,

and Examination
3.
970086 V801F-0, Documentation Data SheetPiping Fabrication, Assembly,

Erection, and Examination
4.
970086 S801L-0, SpecificationLeak Testing of Piping
5.
970086 T801EL-3, Technical Data SheetPiping Line Index
6.
970086 S801FW-0, SpecificationPiping Welding
7.
970086 S890-0, SpecificationPiping Specialty Items
8.
970086 S801P-0, UOP SpecificationPipe Bending
9.
970086 V801P-0, UOP Documentation Data SheetPipe Bending
2.1.1. References (not attached to document)
2.2.
1.
ASME B31.3, Code for Pressure Piping, Process Piping
2.
PFI ES-3, Piping Fabrication InstituteFabricating Tolerances
3.
PFI ES-7, Piping Fabrication InstituteMinimum Length and Spacing for Welded
Nozzles
4.
PFI ES-24, Piping Fabrication Institute Pipe Bending Methods, Tolerances,

Process and Material Requirements.
5.
TPA-CBS-98, Cold Bending of Pipe & Tube
6.
TPA-IBS-98, Induction Bending of Pipe & Tube
Piping material line classes

1.
970086 S8 Branch-0, UOP Specification Branch Connection Table
2.
970086 S8B1A1-2, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B1A1
3.
4.
5.
970086 S8M1A1-1, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class M1A1
6.
970086 S8MS1-2, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS1
7.
8.
2013-01-16

9.
Page 2 of 3
970086 R801F-0
10. 970086 S8MS12-2, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS12
11. 970086 S8PR1-2, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR1
21. 8-1303-0, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR22
23. 970086 S8PR36-1 , UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR36
2.3.
UOP valve code index

1.
970086 S8V003 0, UOP Specification Carbon Steel Gate Valves
2.
970086 S8V004 0, UOP Specification Carbon Steel Globe Valves
3.
970086 S8V005 0, UOP Specification Carbon Steel Check Valves
4.
970086 S8V006 0, UOP Specification Carbon Steel Ball Valves
5.
970086 S8V013 0, UOP Specification Alloy Steel Gate Valves
6.
970086 S8V023 0, UOP Specification Stainless Steel Gate Valves
7.
970086 S8V024 0, UOP Specification Stainless Steel Globe Valves
8.
970086 S8V025 0, UOP Specification Stainless Steel Check Valves
9.
970086 S8V026 0, UOP Specification Stainless Steel Check Valves
10. 970086 S8V029 0, UOP Specification Stainless Steel Needle Valves

11. 970086 S8V033 0, UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Gate Valves
12. 970086 S8V034 0, UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Globe Valves
13. 970086 S8V035 0, UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Check Valves
14. 970086 S8V036 0, UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Ball Valves
15. 970086 S8V037 0, UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Butterfly Valves
16. 970086 S8V053 0, UOP Specification Nickel and Nickel Alloy Gate Valves
17. 970086 S8V054 0, UOP Specification Nickel and Nickel Alloy Globe Valves
18. 970086 S8V055 0, UOP Specification Nickel and Nickel Alloy Check Valve
2.4.
Design drawings
1.
Piping Plan (Later)
2013-01-16
3.

Page 3 of 3
970086 R801F-0
Painting
Painting of piping shall be provided in accordance with the most recent version, unless
otherwise specified, of the following documents:
1.
4.
See Reference document: 970086 R905F-0 Complete, Paint Specifications and

Applications.
Other
Piping fabrication, assembly, erection, examination, and related goods and services shall
comply with the most recent version, except as otherwise indicated, of the following
documents:
5.
1.
970086 S140A, SpecificationLanguage, Units, and Documents
2.
970086 S140C, SpecificationDocuments for Custom-Designed Goods and

Services
3.
970086 S140S, SpecificationSupplier Document Index
4.
970086 S150, SpecificationExamination, Testing, and Inspection Plan and Record
5.
970086 S999C, SpecificationCross-Discipline Clearance
6.
970086 S159, SpecificationPositive Material Identification for UOP Modular

Plants CCR Unit
Conflicting requirements
In case of conflicts among documents outlined in the Technical Requisition, the
following shall apply:
1.
Drawings shall take precedence over Specifications and standards.
2.
UOP-generated documents shall take precedence over Piping Fabrication Institute

Engineering Standards and Technical Bulletins.
2013-01-17
1.
UOP Specification
Page 1 of 6
970086 S801F-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for fabrication, assembly, erection, and
examination of piping.
2.
3.
Special Project Requirements

1.
All bolting shall be provided with Certified Material Test Reports (CMTR)
2.
Prior to any welding of existing piping; pipe wall thickness must be confirmed to
meet the minimum wall thickness.
3.
If any existing flanged connection is disassembled the flange face must be inspected.
If the surface finish does not conform to section 6.4 of ASME B16.5 then it must be
machined to acceptable conditions or replaced.
4.
If flanged connections are disassembled a new gasket and bolts must be used for
reassembly.
5.
For new piping or piping components being welded to existing painted piping; paint
requirements shall be applied up to and 6 inches beyond the weld affected area.
6.
Where new piping connects to existing piping, pipe supports of the existing pipe
system shall be visually inspected for mechanical integrity.
7.
Welds on existing piping shall not be hydro tested. Examination of welds shall be
100% radiographed or 100% ultrasonically examined per 345.9.1 of B31.3.
Fabrication
3.1.
Pipe support attachment

The pipeline installation is allowed only after installation and fastening of the support
constructions and hangers in compliance with the project requirements. The assembly
units and the assemblies of the pipelines shall be arranged at least on two supports (or
fixed on two hangers) with their security against tilting and turning.
3.1.1. Pipe support welded attachment (excluding trunnions)

1.
For carbon steel and ferrous pipe materials through 9% chrome operating between 20F (-29 C) and 500F (260 C), pipe support attachment material shall be carbon
steel.
2.
For carbon steel and ferrous pipe material through 9% chrome operating above
501F (261C), pipe support attachment material shall be the same as the supported
pipe.
3.
For other pipe material pipe support attachment material shall be the same as the
supported pipe.
2013-01-17
UOP Specification
Page 2 of 6
970086 S801F-0
3.1.2. Pipe support clamped attachment

1.
Clamp material shall be in accordance with the following table:
Temperature
---------------------------------Pipe Material--------------------------------Carbon Steel (CS)/

Chrome-Moly
Stainless Steel (SS)
Other Alloys
-20 F to 500 F
(-29 C to 260 C)
Galvanized CS
Galvanized or
Coated CS
Galvanized or
Coated CS
501F to 750 F
(261C to 399 C)
Galvanized or
Coated CS
SS or Coated CS
with Shield
Coated CS
>750 F
(> 399 C)
Compatible Material
Suitable for Temp.
SS
Compatible Material
Suitable for Temp.
3.1.3. Pipe support welded trunnion

1.
Materials for trunnion, reinforcing pad, and gusset shall be the same nominal
composition as supported pipe.
2.
Reinforcing pads shall not be used at elbow.
3.
Adjustable base trunnion shall be used to accommodate differences in elevation or

field tolerances.
3.1.4. Reinforcing pad and wear pad for pipe support

1.
2.
4.
Reinforcing pad and wear pad shall be as follows:

a.
Attached using continuous fillet weld to avoid crevice type corrosion
b.
Provided with a 1/4 (6mm) diameter vent hole.
Wear pads shall be as follows:

a.
Length shall be at least 16 inch (406 mm).
b.
For NPS 24 and smaller, thickness shall be at least 1/4 inch (6 mm).
c.
For NPS larger than 24, thickness shall be at least 3/8 inch (10 mm).
d.
Circumference shall cover at least 1/4 of pipe circumference.
Seal Welding
4.1.
Contaminants
Seal-welded threaded joints shall be free of the following substances:
4.2.
1.
Sealing compound
2.
PTFE tape
3.
Cutting oil
Seal-welded services
Threaded connections to piping, except for connection at instrument, shall be seal welded
if any of the following is contained:
1.
Hydrogen
2.
Caustic
2013-01-17
UOP Specification
3.
4.3.
Page 3 of 6
970086 S801F-0
Steam if flange rating is ASME Class 300 or higher.
Drain and vent valve

Threaded connection on non-instrument-piping drain and vent valve shall not be seal
welded.
4.4.
Auxiliary piping for equipment

Threaded connections of auxiliary piping associated with equipment shall be seal welded
in the following services:
4.5.
1.
Pressurized lube oil piping
2.
Pressurized seal oil piping except at the connection to mechanical seal end plates
Piping for instruments

Threaded instrument-piping fittings shall be seal welded except for the following
connections:
5.
1.
Connections to instruments
2.
Vent plug, drain plug, fill plug, and rod-out plug
3.
Variable area flow meters and check valves in purge piping
4.
Union nut rings
5.
Connections to pre-fabricated instrument manifold blocks
6.
Instrument tube fittings
7.
Miscellaneous connections approved by UOP
8.
Thermowells
Assembly and Erection

5.1.
5.2.
Piping
1.
If the pipe in the process of installation is cut into several parts then it is necessary to
apply the stamp corresponding to that of the initial pipe on each new formed part.
2.
Steam, instrument-air, and fuel-gas connection shall be from top of supply header.
3.
Condensate connection into condensate return header shall be to top of header.
Spacing
5.2.1. Minimum Spacing
1.
The distance from the valves flange or the compensator flange to the support,
hanger, wall, partition or the ceiling shall be at least 400 mm.
2.
Welded joints of pipelines with a diameter up to 50 mm shall be located at least 50

mm from supports and hangers, those of pipelines with a diameter over 50 mm shall
be located at least 200 mm from supports and hangers.
3.
The distance from a nozzle to transverse seam or to the beginning of rounded bend
shall be at least equal to the pipe OD, but no less 100 mm.
2013-01-17
UOP Specification
Page 4 of 6
970086 S801F-0
4.
The length of straight section between welded joints of two adjacent bends shall be
at least 100 mm for nominal sizes below 150 mm, and 200 mm for nominal sizes of
150 mm and over.
5.
The distance between circumferential seams connecting inserts to a pipeline shall be

at least 100 mm.
5.2.2. Girth butt welds

Distance between centerlines of adjacent girth butt welds shall be both of the following:
1.
At least four times the pipe wall thickness
2.
At least 1 inch (25 mm)
5.2.3. Branch connections

Clear distance between attachment welds for adjacent branch connection fittings shall be
all of the following:
5.3.
1.
At least four times the thickness of the run wall
2.
At least 1 inch (25 mm)
3.
At least the dimensions shown in PFI Standard ES-7
4.
At least the dimensions required by ASME B31.3, Para 304.3.3
Flanged joints
Flange bolt holes shall straddle established centerlines.
5.4.
Threaded joints
Pipe threads shall be taper pipe threads (NPT) and shall comply with ASME B1.20.1.
5.5.
5.6.
5.7.
Cleaning of piping
1.
After fabrication and heat treatment, foreign material such as sand, scale, weld
splatter, and cutting chips shall be removed from inside and outside of pipe spools.
2.
Stainless-steel weld shall be wire buffed or cleaned to remove discoloration after

welding.
3.
Approval shall be obtained from UOP for chemical-cleaning, acid-cleaning,

pickling, or passivation procedure and application prior to use.
Valves
1.
Soft-sealed ball and plug valves with butt-welding ends, socket-welding ends, or
threaded ends requiring seal welds shall not be welded into the line with any softseal material in place.
2.
Threaded bronze valves shall not be seal welded.
Use of pipe unions

Pipe unions between process vessels, piping, or equipment and the first block valve are
prohibited.
5.8.
Bolt coating
Alloy steel bolts and nuts shall be coated with Fluorokote #1.
2013-01-17
6.
UOP Specification
Page 5 of 6
970086 S801F-0
Examination
6.1.
Supplementary examination
6.1.1. Normal fluid service
1.
2.
Random radiography shall include the following:

a.
100 percent radiography of selected welds
b.
The work of each welder or welding operator including representative samples

from each of the following:
1.
Material group
2.
Welding process
3.
Pipe diameter
4.
Welding position
100 percent ultrasonic testing (UT) examination may be performed instead of

radiography.
6.1.2. Category D fluid service

Category D Fluid Service piping shall receive random radiography including the
following:
6.2.
1.
At least 5 percent of circumferential butt and miter-groove welds
2.
100 percent radiography of selected welds
3.
The work of each welder or welding operator including representative samples from
each of the following:
a.
Material group
b.
Welding process
c.
Pipe diameter
d.
Welding position
Application of required examination

1.
If post weld heat treatment (PWHT) is performed, non-destructive examination

(NDE) for final acceptance shall be performed after PWHT.
2.
Personnel qualified in accordance with ASNT Recommended Practice SNT-TC-1A

shall perform NDE.
3.
Certification of personnel shall be made available upon request.
4.
NDE shall be performed in accordance with written procedures that conform to

ASME Section V.
5.
No examination shall be performed without a written procedure.
6.
Results of NDE shall be reported on written forms and provided in the final
documentation package.
7.
NDE to be performed shall be noted on approved fabrication drawings.
8.
NDE performed shall be recorded on a fabrication drawing mark up to allow

traceability of test records, e.g., radiographs, to the actual weld at any time.
2013-01-17
UOP Specification
9.
6.3.
Page 6 of 6
970086 S801F-0
Work of each welder shall be recorded in a log to allow tracebility of each weld and
welder who performed corresponding weld.
Weld smoothness and flushness

Internal surface of weld in following locations shall be ground smooth and flush with
inside bore of adjacent pipe:
6.4.
1.
Catalyst lines
2.
Orifice flanges
Dimensional examination
Dimensional examination shall be performed on both of the following:
7.
1.
Taper flange bore
2.
Piping to off-module connections
3.
The pipeline deviation from the vertical (if no instructions are given in the project)
shall not exceed 2 mm per 1 m of the pipeline length.
4.
The deviation of the flange sealing surface from the perpendicularity to the pipe or
the part axis shall not exceed the values given in Table below.
Pipe (Part) Diameter

(mm)
Deviation
(mm)
25-60
60-160
160-400
400-775
Above 750
0, 15
0, 25
0, 35
0, 5
0, 6
References
The most recent edition and addenda, except as otherwise specified, of the following
documents are cited in this document.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
ASME B1.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)
ASME B31.3, Code for Pressure Piping Process Piping
ASME Section V, Nondestructive Examination
American Society for Nondestructive Testing
Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A 2001
Piping Fabrication Institute (PFI)
PFI Standard ES-3, Fabricating Tolerances (Reaffirmed 1994)
PFI Standard ES-7, Minimum Length and Spacing for Welded Nozzles
2012-12-10
UOP Inspection Data Sheet

UOP
Examination or Testing
1.
PEMEX
UOP
WIT OBS WIT OBS Other Activities
Leak test
Page 1 of 1
970086 U801F-0
1.
WPS and PQR

approval
2.
2.
Pneumatic testing
procedure approval
3.
3.
Release for shipment
4.
5.
4.
5.
Release for leak test

Kickoff meeting
6.
6.
PEMEX
WIT OBS WIT OBS
Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
If WIT (witnessed) column is selected and if the examination, test, or other

activity is performed:
a.
A hold point shall be applied to the production schedule.
b.
Examination, test, or other activity shall be performed with the indicated party
or parties in attendance.
c.
For mechanical running or performance tests, written notification of a successful

preliminary test shall be provided.
If OBS (observed) column is selected and if the examination, test, or other activity
is performed:
a.
Indicated party or parties shall be notified of the timing of examination, test, or

activity.
b.
Examination, test, or other activity may be performed as scheduled if indicated

party or parties are not present.
Written and verbal notice shall be provided for witnessed or observed examination,
test, or other activity.
a.
Written notice shall arrive at UOP ten workdays prior to examination, test, or
other activity.
b.
Verbal notice shall be provided two workdays prior to examination, test, or

other activity.
Inspection forecast shall comply with both of the following:

a.
Forecast shall include projected dates for witnessed or observed examination,

tests, and other activities.
b.
Forecast shall be updated and resubmitted:

Monthly
Bimonthly
Weekly
Biweekly
Final
Note 3

Review
Note 2
Proposal
Note 1
2013-01-16
Page 1 of 2
970086 V801F-0
DESCRIPTION
General
M
1.
Progress Report including Production Schedule
2.
Quality Control Manual
3.
Inspection and Test Plan
4.
Paint Manufacturers Product Data Sheets.
2S
5.
Two years Spare Parts List, if applicable
2S
6.
Approved Deviations
0S
7.
Procedures
8.
Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQR)
9.
Welding Plan
0S
10.
Welder/Welding Operator Qualifications
0S
11.
NDT Procedure
0S
12.
NDT Personnel Qualification Certificates
0S
13.
Material Control and Traceability Procedure
14.
Visual and Dimensional Inspection Procedure

Hydrostatic and Pneumatic testing Procedures
X
X
0S
15.
0S
16.
PMI Procedure, if applicable
0S
17.
Heat Treatment Procedures, if any (including PWHT, Normalizing and Forming)
18.
Hardness Testing Procedure
X
X
0S
Surface Preparation & Painting Procedure
20.
Test Records
0S
21.
Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs) for all piping components.
0S
22.
NDT Records & Certificates.
23.
Material Traceability Records
0S
24.
Chloride Analysis Certificate of Hydrotest water.
0S
25.
Hydrostatic and pneumatic pressure test records including charts & logs.
0S
26.
PMI Reports, if applicable.
0S
27.
Detailed records of Heat treatment, if any (including PWHT, Normalizing and Forming).
0S
28.
Welding Logs
0S
29.
Air and Soap Bubble test records for pads.
30.
Repair Records
31.
Details of repairs including description, sketches, photos or drawings indicating location and size of
repaired areas
0S
32.
Inspection Reports
0S
33.
Visual and Dimensional Inspection reports
0S
34.
Weld ground smooth reports
0S
35.
Hardness inspection reports, where applicable.
0S
36.
Inspection and Test Plan Record
0S
37.
Completed Paint Application & Inspection Log.
0S
19.
38.
Soluble Salt Measurement test report.
39.
Valves
0S
40.
Receiving Inspection.
0S
41.
Sectional assembly drawing(s).
0S
42.
Material Test Reports (MTRs) and Certificates of Compliance for all valves pressure containing
components.
0S
43.
Test certificates and inspection reports (including NDT records, pressure test reports, tightness, and
leak test reports).
0S
44.
Leak testing report.
0S
45.
Hydrostatic test report.
0S
46.
Heat Treatment records if any.
0S
47.
PMI reports if required.
0S
48.
API-598 Certificates.
Final
Note 3

Review
Note 2
Proposal
Note 1
2013-01-16
0S
Page 2 of 2
970086 V801F-0
DESCRIPTION
49.
API-607 Certificates if applicable.
Nomenclature:
A
M
W
X

Available for review at manufacturers facility upon request
Provide Monthly
Provide Weekly
Per the Purchase Order
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
For documents indicated in the Proposal column, provide an electronic copy or one hard copy.
For documents indicated in the Final columns provide an electronic copy and three hard copies.
2013-01-16
UOP Specification
Leak Testing of Piping
Page 1 of 9
970086 S801L-0
Contents
1. Scope ........................................................... 1
8. test procedures ............................................ 4
2. Definitions .................................................... 1
8.1. Test Conditions ..................................... 4
3. Testing Selection Basis ............................... 1
8.2. General Requirements .......................... 5
4. Leak Test Methods ...................................... 2
8.3. Test Symbol H .................................... 5
4.2. Hydrostatic Test - Symbol H ............... 2
8.4. Test Symbol P .................................... 5
4.3. Pneumatic Test - Symbol P ................ 2
8.5. Test Symbol F .................................... 6
4.4. Initial Service Leak Test - Symbol F ... 3
8.6. Test Symbol B .................................... 6
4.5. Sensitive Leak Test - Symbol B .......... 3
9. Preparation For Test ................................... 7
4.6. Alternative Test - Symbol A ................ 3
9.1. Define Test Loops ................................. 7
5. Test Pressure .............................................. 3
9.2. Painting and Insulation .......................... 7
6. General Requirements................................. 3
9.3. Pneumatic Testing ................................ 7
6.1. Prior Work ............................................. 3
9.4. Other Preparation ................................. 7
6.2. The Field Representative ...................... 4
10. Status of Instruments During Pressure Test 8
6.3. Acceptance Criteria ............................... 4
10.1. Table 1 .................................................. 8
6.4. Report.................................................... 4
10.2. Table 1 Notes ........................................ 9
6.5. Repairs or Additions After Leak Testing 4
11. References .................................................. 9
7. Shop Leak Test............................................ 4
1.
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for leak testing of piping systems, in
accordance with the Code, and describes requirements that are in addition to those of the
Code.
2.
Definitions
For the purposes of this Specification, the following definitions apply:
Code, ASME B31.3, Process Piping
Field Representative, The authorized individual representing UOP at the construction
site
Symbol H, Hydrostatic Test, see Section 4.1
Symbol P, Pneumatic Test, see Section 4.2
Symbol F, Service Test, see Section 4.3
Symbol B, Sensitive Leak Test, see Section 4.4
Symbol A, Alternative Leak Test, see Section 4.5
Supplier, The firm hired to do the leak testing
3.
Testing selection basis

1.
The leak tests required by the Code are shown in the following table.
2013-01-16
UOP Specification
2.
3.
4.
Page 2 of 9
970086 S801L-0
Fluid Service
Required Tests
Category D
t
Normal
Hydrostatic, Pneumatic, or Alternative
For process system:
a.
A hydrostatic test is generally preferred over a pneumatic test.
b.
Use the pneumatic test only when performing the hydrostatic test is impractical.
The hydrostatic test may be considered impractical when piping cannot sustain
the weight of water or other test liquid, or piping is to contain fluid incompatible
with any test liquid.
A sensitive leak test may be used following a primary leak test to meet Code or
process requirements.
Leak test methods
4.2.
4.3.
1.
Test methods described here are related to a Test Symbol.
2.
The test conditions, the procedures to be used, and post test requirements for each
Test Symbol are described Section 8.
Hydrostatic test - symbol H

1.
Where a large test volume is involved, consider how to dispose of the contents of the
system after the test. This fluid may be useable for hydrotesting other systems.
2.
The piping must be water-free after the test. System shall be dried by one of the
following methods:
a.
Compressed air shall be dry (-40 C dew point) and free of oil, dirt, and other
foreign matter. Other nonflammable gases (e.g., dry nitrogen) may be used with
the Field Representative's approval.
b.
Heating with vacuum drying.
Pneumatic test - symbol P

1.
Pneumatic Test involves the hazard of disruptive release of energy stored in the
compressed gas. Pneumatic testing should be used only after reasonable alternates to
test with a liquid have been exhausted.
2.
Conditions for pneumatic testing are:

a.
Pneumatic testing should be prohibited for piping of brittle material (e.g., cast
iron) and all plastics not specified for compressed gas service.
b.
Pneumatic testing should not be used at an ambient temperature below the design
minimum temperature for carbon and low-alloy steel piping. (See Code, Para.
323.2.2.)
c.
Prepare the system properly for the test. See Section 8.4
d.
The area must be vacated during the test until the pressure is lowered for close
inspection.
e.
Pneumatic testing may limit Code allowed pressure and temperature excursions.
See the Code, Para. 302.2.4.
2013-01-16
4.4.
UOP Specification
Page 3 of 9
970086 S801L-0
Initial service leak test - symbol F

Initial Service Leak Test, the preferred test method for Category D Fluid Service piping,
can be accomplished when the service fluid is first introduced to the piping system. If
Initial Service Leak Test must be completed as part of a contract, use of water or air
instead of the service fluid may be preferable. Pressurize the system to as high as the
operating pressure but not more than 150 psig (1035 kPa). Further requirements can be
found in the Code, Para. 345.7.
4.5.
4.6.
Sensitive leak test - symbol B

1.
Sensitive Leak Test is the preferred gas and bubble test when a sensitive leak test is
required (in addition to test H or P) for Code compliance or to minimize fugitive
emissions. Usually two Test Symbols have to be specified e.g., H, B. Air should
be of the same quality as for a pneumatic test.
2.
Sequence of Tests: If test B is required, it will ordinarily follow the primary test
(H or P). The piping must be dry for test B to be effective. Rather than
reverse the preferred order of testing, circulate warm air or apply vacuum to
thoroughly remove the residual water after hydrostatic testing.
Alternative test - symbol A

Alternative Test is based on a Code provision for a situation where neither the hydrostatic
nor pneumatic test can be applied, such as at a tie-in. Requirements for Alternative
Testing are:
5.
1.
Formal flexibility analysis of the piping system shall be made.
2.
Radiography of 100 percent of circumferential, longitudinal, and spiral groove welds

that will not otherwise be leak tested shall be completed.
3.
Examination of 100 percent of all other welds, including structural attachment welds,
by the liquid penetrant method shall have been performed.
4.
A bubble test, Symbol B, shall be performed.
Test pressure
The recommended test pressure for various tests is as follows:
Symbol
H
6.
Test Pressure
150% of design pressure corrected for temperature (min.)
110% of design pressure
Maximum operating pressure, not over 150 psig (1035 kPa)
The lesser of 15 psig (103 kPa) recommended maximum or

25% of the design pressure
See Symbol B
General requirements
6.1.
Prior work
Fabrication and/or installation, examination, and any required cleaning, except chemical
cleaning, shall be complete and in accordance with the applicable specification.
2013-01-16
6.2.
UOP Specification
Page 4 of 9
970086 S801L-0
The field representative

The Field Representative shall approve preparations for and witness all leak tests.
6.3.
Acceptance criteria
Piping which is free of leakage for the duration of specified tests shall be accepted.
6.4.
Report
The Supplier shall provide the Field Representative with a report in accordance with the
Code, Paragraph (Para.) 345.2.7.
6.5.
Repairs or additions after leak testing

Repairs or additions made following the leak test shall be tested in accordance with Para.
345.2.6 of the Code.
7.
Shop leak test

A shop may be either a commercial shop or a shop set up in the field near a work site.
Leak testing of shop-fabricated piping shall be performed before shipment.
8.
1.
Hydrostatic testing shall be done at the test pressure specified on UOP Piping Line
Index T801EL.
2.
A pneumatic test (P), may be made only with UOPs specific agreement, and if P
is identified as the test. Test assemblies at the pressure stated using air unless
otherwise directed. Protect personnel and property from possible harm of disruptive
pressure release.
3.
Where a sensitive leak test (B) is required, the test shall be performed prior to
priming and painting.
Test procedures
Leak testing of piping shall be performed after examination and repair are complete, and
before start-up.
8.1.
Test conditions
Before conducting any leak test, the conditions listed below shall be met:
1.
Plant safety rules and personnel precautions shall be observed.
2.
Temporary supports, blinds, spool pieces, and other preparatory items shall be in
place. All joints not previously tested under this specification shall be left
uninsulated. For a sensitive leak test, all joints and components other than seamless
pipe, seamless butt welding fittings, and forged fittings and valves not previously
tested under this specification shall be left uninsulated and unpainted.
3.
Items to be excluded from test shall be removed or blanked.
4.
Hydrotest stops in spring hangers and supports shall remain in place during the
hydrotest.
5.
If ambient temperature is not above 40 F (4 C), the Field Representative must

specifically approve the test procedure of hydrostatic (H), pneumatic (P), or
service (F) tests, considering the need to drain the piping before it freezes. Testing
shall not be performed at an ambient temperature below the design minimum
2013-01-16
UOP Specification
Page 5 of 9
970086 S801L-0
temperature for carbon and low alloy steel piping. See Code, Para. 301.3.1 and Para.
323.
8.2.
General requirements
The Test Symbols listed in the following paragraphs are used to indicate the type of leak
test(s) required for each pipeline and/or test loop:
8.2.1. Preliminary test preparation

The following requirements apply to all leak tests.
8.3.
1.
A pressure gauge shall be provided at the low point of the test loop. The gauge shall
have a dial scale 4-1/2 in. (110 mm) diameter, a range such that the test pressure is
within 40-80 percent of full scale, and accompanied by documentation showing it is
calibrated within 2 percent at full scale reading.
2.
Piping designed for vapor or gas operation shall have temporary supports, if
designated by the Field Representative, to support the weight of the test liquid.
3.
Expansion joints shall be tested in accordance with the Code, or as described by the
Field Representative.
4.
The Field Representative shall describe the limits of the piping to be tested.
5.
If at any time the person(s) conducting the test is not in attendance, the pressure shall
be reduced below design pressure.
6.
Each joint (weld, flange, packing gland, threaded or other joints) not previously
examined for leaks according to this specification, shall be examined. Repairs shall
be in accordance with Para. 345.2.6 of the Code.
Test symbol H
A Hydrostatic Test requires that:
8.4.
1.
Water from a source approved by the Field Representative as test liquid. See also
Section 9.4.2.
2.
Fill piping with vents open; close the vents after piping is air-free.
3.
Drain the system after the test, with vents open, through lines or hoses leading to a
discharge or recovery point acceptable to the Field Representative.
4.
Stainless steel systems may require special flush or drying procedures to avoid
chloride concentration.
5.
Water used for hydrotesting testing shall be free of suspended solids and biologically
inert. Chlorination at a level of 0.2 to 1.0 ppm is recommended to prevent biological
attack.
6.
Water used for hydrostatic testing in stainless steel piping shall have a chloride
content less than 50 ppm. If the chloride content is greater than 50 ppm and less than
250 ppm, a sufficient quantity of sodium nitrate shall be added to provide a 0.5% by
weight sodium nitrate solution. Water with a chloride content greater than 250 ppm
shall not be used for hydrostatic testing in stainless steel piping.
7.
Water temperature shall not be less than 40F (4C) nor greater than 140F (60C).
The preferred water temperature range is between 60F (16C) and 100F (38C).
Test symbol P
A Pneumatic Test requires:
2013-01-16
UOP Specification
1.
8.5.
Page 6 of 9
970086 S801L-0
A written procedure shall be prepared for each test loop, approved by the Field
Representative including:
a.
Minimum piping temperature during the test
b.
Method of limiting access to the area in which the piping is being tested
c.
Stored energy in the system when at the maximum test pressure
2.
Compressed air shall be dry (-40 C dew point) and free of oil, dirt, and other foreign
matter. Other nonflammable gases (e.g., dry nitrogen) may be used with the Field
Representative's approval.
3.
Precautions shall be taken against asphyxiation if gas could be released in a confined

area.
4.
Drain water and condensate before testing; pressurize with vents and drains closed.
5.
A pressure relief valve shall be provided in the test loop. The set pressure shall be
test pressure + 50 psig (345 kPa) or test pressure + 10 percent of test pressure,
whichever is the lower.
6.
Initially pressurize the pipe to 25 psig (170 kPa) or one half the test pressure,
whichever is less, make a preliminary check for leaks and repair all that are found.
7.
Gradually increase pressure in steps to the test pressure. Hold at steps so that piping
strains are equalized. Reduce pressure from 110 percent of design to design pressure,
check for leaks, repair any that are found.
8.
Regulated release of pressure after the test.
Test symbol F
A Service test requires:
8.6.
1.
Fill piping with the service fluid (water or air may be substituted for liquid or gas if
necessary), as specified by the Field Representative. Vents shall be open for liquid
filling.
2.
Closing the vents and pressurizing the piping using the source of pressure normal for
the service (or the same pressure using water or air).
3.
Releasing any excess liquid or gas to an acceptable discharge point.
4.
Test pressure shall be increased, and a preliminary check made, in steps in

accordance with the Code, Para. 345.7.2.
Test symbol B
A Sensitive Leak Test requires:
1.
The Field Representative shall specify the sequence of tests and any required
additional cleaning or drying for each pipeline.
2.
The test pressure shall be as specified by the Field Representative.
3.
The Supplier shall provide, and the Field Representative shall approve a written,
qualified procedure, and evidence of operator qualifications for each type of leak test,
in accordance with BPV Code, Section V, Articles 1 and 10.
4.
An acceptable bubble formation solution, that produces an adherent and persistent

film shall be used.
2013-01-16
9.
UOP Specification
Page 7 of 9
970086 S801L-0
5.
The piping to be tested shall be fully in place, ready for operation. Painting,
insulation, removal of temporary supports, etc. shall be completed after the sensitive
leak test has been successfully completed.
6.
Initially pressurize to 25 psig (170 kPa) or half the test pressure, whichever is less,
make a preliminary check for leaks and repair any that are found.
7.
Raise the pressure in steps of 25 percent of test pressure or 25 psig (170 kPa),
whichever is greater, holding for one minute at each step. Repeat the check for leaks,
repairing any found, until test pressure is reached, at which time a final check of all
joints shall be made.
8.
Application of bubble solution to welds and to threaded, flanged, and other joints by
a technique which minimizes initial bubbles in the solution shall be made.
Application of tape to the perimeter of the flanges and checking leaks through a
punched hole is one method to check flanges.
Preparation for test

9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
Define test loops

1.
In most instances a single pipeline will be the test loop. In some cases, several
pipelines (and possibly equipment items, see Code, Para. 345.4.3) can be tested as a
unit. If there are in-line items (valves, sensors, relief valves, etc.) that cannot stand
the test pressure, decide whether to blind off (if flanged ends) and test each piping
segment separately, or replace items with a spool and test the whole pipeline.
2.
Gate, globe and check valve closures are generally capable of being tested at a
differential pressure of 110 percent of the valve body rating. Quarter turn valve
closures are frequently rated at still lower pressures. If the test pressure exceeds the
valve closure rating, the valve must be tested in the open position.
Painting and insulation

1.
For hydrostatic and pneumatic tests it is necessary to be able to examine every

threaded, bolted, and welded joint (excluding welds made by a piping component
manufacturer and any welds previously tested to this specification by a manufacturer)
for leakage. The insulation must be left off. Joints may be painted except where a
sensitive leak test is specified by the Owner.
2.
For a sensitive leak test, castings and factory welds (excluding 100 percent
radiographed welds) must be accessible for examination. Except for welds prevously
tested to this specification, both insulation and paint must be left off.
Pneumatic testing
Because of the high amount of stored energy, all joints must be checked for tightness
before commencing the test.
9.4.
Other preparation
9.4.1. Supports and restraints
Expansion joints must be fitted with restraints designed for operation. Piping for gas or
vapor not designed to bear the weight of hydrostatic test liquid shall be provided with
added support. If additional support is not practical, a pneumatic test may be used with
the Field Representatives consent.
2013-01-16
UOP Specification
Page 8 of 9
970086 S801L-0
9.4.2. Test fluid supply
10.
1.
Verify that water of adequate purity will be available in the quantities needed for
hydrostatic tests. Potable water may be acceptable even for tests on stainless steel
piping, but the chloride content shall not be greater than 50 ppm.
2.
Any selected test liquid should be nontoxic and nonflammable, and an acceptable
means of recovery or disposal must be determined. A combustible liquid with flash
point 140 F (60 C) may be used, but the potential losses from burning of the
liquid must be considered. Flammable liquids with a flash point < 140 F (60 C) are
prohibited.
3.
The air supply required for pneumatic test is equivalent to instrument air.
Status of instruments during pressure test

10.1. Table 1
See Note 6
Block
& Vent
Remove
1.
Analyzers
2.
Control Valves - except regulators &

pressure balanced
3.
Control Valves Pressure balances
4.
Flow Instruments - D/P Cell & Bellows

type
5.
Flow Instruments Rotameters
6.
Flow Meters - positive displacement

type
7.
Flow Meters - turbine type
8.
Flow Indicating Switches - bellows type
9.
Flow Switches - vane type
Blankoff
X
1
X
X
X
11. Level Instruments - displacer type
12. Level Instruments - C/P cell & bellows

type
13. Level Switches - float type
14. Orifice Plates - D/P elements
2
X
15. Pressure Gages
16. Pressure Transmitters - all types
17. Pressure Regulators
X
X
19. PSVs - Flanged

20. PSVs, TSVs - Screwed
See
Note
10. Gage Glasses
18. Pressure Switches
Include
in Test
4,5
2013-01-16
UOP Specification
See Note 6
Block
& Vent
Page 9 of 9
970086 S801L-0
Remove
Blankoff
21. Thermowells
Include
in Test
See
Note
22. Rupture disks
23. Flame arrestors
24. Steam traps
25. Filter elements
10.2. Table 1 notes
11.
1.
Caution - Do not force reverse flow.
2.
Caution - Do not over-pressure float or displacer. If in doubt, do not test, block and
drain instead.
3.
Install after hydrotesting and line flushing.
4.
Test gag may be used if one is furnished.
5.
Blinds not required on PSV outlets discharging into system being tested at 15 PSIG
or less.
6.
All instruments shall be protected from damage due to freezing. In preparation for
cold weather and during cold weather testing, all instruments must be drained and
process lead lines blown out with air or nitrogen.
7.
Consult manufacturer for bellows stem sealed valves.
References
ASME B31.3-2002, Process Piping, ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31
2013-01-16
1.
UOP Specification
Piping Welding
Page 1 of 4
970086 S801FW-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for pipe welding.
2.
General
Welding shall comply with the following codes and standards:
2.1.1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

1.
ASME BPVC Section II Part C
2.
ASME BPVC Section IX
3.
ASME B31.3
2.1.2. American Welding Society (AWS)
3.
1.
AWS A2.4
2.
AWS A3.0
Welding qualification
1.
Welder, welding operator, and welding procedure shall be qualified in accordance

with ASME Section IX.
2.
Approval of WPSs and PQRs shall be obtained from UOP prior to fabrication.
3.
The location where each WPS will be used shall be provided in either one of the
following forms as part of welding procedure approval:
4.
4.
a.
Reference to UOP Piping Classification Number, joint type, and location of

weld
b.
Weld map
Welder performance qualification records (WPQs) shall be made available upon

demand.
Welding processes
Welding processes shall be one of the following:
1.
Gas Tungsten-Arc Welding (GTAW)
2.
Shielded Metal-Arc Welding (SMAW), with the following restriction:

a.
3.
4.
SMAW shall not be used for root pass of single-sided joint.
Flux-Cored Arc Welding (FCAW), with the following restrictions:

a.
External shielding gas shall be used.
b.
Welding process for root pass of single-sided joint shall not be FCAW.
c.
Welding process used for field fabrication shall not be FCAW.
Gas Metal-Arc Welding (GMAW), with the following restrictions:

a.
Mode shall not be short-circuiting.
b.
Welding process for root pass of single-sided joint shall not be GMAW.
c.
Welding process for field fabrication shall not be GMAW.
2013-01-16
UOP Specification
Piping Welding
5.
Submerged-Arc Welding (SAW), with the following restrictions:

a.
5.
6.
Page 2 of 4
970086 S801FW-0
Using neutral flux.
Filler metal
1.
Filler metal shall comply with ASME Section II, Part C.
2.
Electrode for welding carbon and low-alloy steels shall be low hydrogen.
3.
Filler metal for joining like base materials shall comply with UOP Standard
Specification 8-12-4.
4.
Approval of filler metal for joining dissimilar base materials shall be obtained from
UOP.
5.
If welding P-8 to P-8 material with at least 0.04% carbon, the following shall apply:
a.
Filler metal shall have at least 0.04% carbon.
b.
Electrode manufacturer certificates shall be provided.
6.
Electrode-material-control procedure shall meet electrode manufacturer

recommendations for storage and handling.
7.
Electrode-material-control procedure shall be made available upon request.
8.
Electrode manufacturers certificates shall be made available upon request.
Joint preparation
1.
Weld backing bars or back-up rings shall be as follows:

a.
The same metallurgy as the base metals
b.
The same as the higher metallurgy when joining dissimilar metals
c.
Removed after use
2.
Consumable inserts shall not be used.
3.
Double-welded groove joints shall have root passes back gouged to sound metal
before welding the backside.
4.
If material is stainless steel, the following shall apply:
5.
a.
Grinding wheel and wire brush shall not have been previously used.
b.
Grinding wheel material shall be aluminum oxide or silicon carbide.
c.
Wire brush material shall be stainless steel.
d.
Marking material shall not contain chloride, sulfur, lead, zinc, aluminum,
antimony, bismuth, cadmium, gallium, magnesium, tin, or any harmful
compounds thereof.
Tack weld shall be;

a.
Used for alignment or to maintain root spacing only.
b.
Made using the same electrode used for the root pass.
c.
Made such that it can be incorporated with the root pass.
d.
Ground out and thoroughly cleaned, if cracked or broken, prior to being fused in
with the final weld.
e.
Made by welder qualified to ASME Section IX.
2013-01-16
7.
UOP Specification
Piping Welding
6.
Single-sided groove joint containing over 2% chromium shall be welded using

GTAW with argon back purge maintained for at least two passes.
7.
Weld process for root pass of piping requiring mechanical or chemical internal
cleaning shall be GTAW.
Preheat and interpass temperatures

1.
2.
8.
The interpass temperatures shall be as follows:

a.
175C (350F) for regular grades of 300 series stainless steel
b.
Less than or equal to 250C (500F) for low carbon and stabilized grades of 300
series stainless steel.
Material requiring preheat for welding shall receive preheat for thermal cutting,
gouging, and tacking.
Postweld heat treatment

1.
9.
Page 3 of 4
970086 S801FW-0
If postweld heat treatment (PWHT) is required, one of the following shall be done:
a.
Weld shall be heat treated before cooling below 150C (300F) after welding.
b.
Weld and adjacent pipe shall be heated to 315C (600F), wrapped with
insulation, allowed to cool, and heat-treated later.
2.
Pressure-retaining P-4 materials shall be post weld heat treated.
3.
The tensile test results of any PQR for P-4 material shall not exceed 100,000 psi
(7,000 kg/cm2) at room temperature.
4.
Local postweld heat treatment shall be performed by induction heating or resistance

heating.
a.
Top and bottom thermocouples shall be installed on nominal pipe size greater
than or equal to 6
b.
One thermocouple shall be installed on nominal pipe size less than 6.
5.
The use of exothermic kits is not allowed.
6.
At least two thermocouples shall be in contact with the materials in each furnace
load to monitor the PWHT temperature.
7.
For batch treatment, thermocouples shall be in contact with the components located
in both the top and bottom layers or in the hottest and coldest zones of the furnace
charge.
8.
A continuous record of the temperature indicated by all thermocouples shall be made

on chart recorders.
9.
Chart records shall be included in final document package provided.
1.
Peening shall not be permitted.
2.
After fabrication and heat treatment, loose foreign material such as sand, dirt, wood,
tools, rags, scale, weld spatter, and cutting chips shall be removed from the inside
and outside of the pipe spools.
3.
Discoloration shall be removed from stainless-steel welds after welding.
Cleaning
2013-01-16
UOP Specification
Piping Welding
4.
10.
11.
Page 4 of 4
970086 S801FW-0
Weld flux shall be removed from all welds, including refractory anchor and hexmesh attachment welds.
Weld hardness testing

1.
Hardness testing shall be performed after PWHT.
2.
Hardness testing shall be performed in accordance with an approved written

procedure.
3.
Minimum of one hardness reading shall be taken in the center of each weld pass that
is subject to hardness test.
4.
Hardness testing results shall be recorded on a written form.

a.
Hardness testing results shall be traceable to the area taken by means of a

marked-up drawing.
b.
Hardness testing results and traceability markup shall be included in the final
data package.
References
The most recent edition and addenda, except as otherwise specified, of the following
documents are cited in this document.
ASME B31.3, ASME Code For Pressure Piping, Process Piping
ASME BPVC Section II Part C, Welding Rods, Electrodes, and Filler Metals
ASME BPVC Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications
ASME BPVC Section V, Nondestructive Examination
American Welding Society (AWS)
AWS A2.4, Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination
AWS A3.0, Standard Welding Terms and Definitions
2013-01-16
1.
UOP Specification
Pipe Bending
Page 1 of 2
970086 S801P-0
SCOPE
This document defines technical requirements for pipe bending.
2.
INTRODUCTION
Pipe bending shall comply with PFI Standard ES-24, revised September 2003, as
modified herein. Numbering of the following sections and paragraphs corresponds to
section and paragraph numbering of PFI Standard ES-24 and defines additions, deletions,
and revisions to PFI Standard ES-24. Requirements of PFI Standard ES-24 that are not
revised remain applicable.
3.
BENDING METHODS
3.1.
Hot bending Methods

3.1.1. Induction Bending
Induction pipe bending shall follow the requirements of TPA-IBS-98, Recommended
Standards for Induction Bending of Pipe and Tube.
3.2.
Cold Bending Methods

Cold pipe bending shall follow the requirements of TPA-CBS-98, Recommended
Standards for Cold Bending of Pipe and Tube.
3.3.
Bending Procedure
Prior to bending of pipe, approval of a written bending procedure shall be obtained from
UOP.
4.
WELDS IN BENDS
1.
5.
LINEAR AND ANGULAR TOLERANCES

5.1.
6.
Circumferential butt welds in the arc of a pipe bend are not allowed.
Post bend dimensions shall be within the following tolerances:

1.
Induction bend Paragraph 9.1, of TPA-IBS-98
2.
Cold bend - Paragraph 9.2, of TPA-CBS-98
FORM TOLERANCES
6.1.
Bend shall be measured for ovality. The acceptance criteria for

maximum ovality shall be as follows:
1.
Induction bends - Table 1-2, of TPA-IBS-98
2.
Cold Bends - Shall not exceed 8%
2013-01-16
7.
Bend shall be subject to measurement of post-bend wall thickness

by ultrasonic examination. The acceptance criteria shall be as
follows:
1.
Induction bends Paragraph 9.2 and Table 1-1, of TPA-IBS-98
2.
Cold Bends - Paragraph 9.5 and Figure 5, of TPA-CBS-98
CLEANING
8.1.
8.2.
9.
Page 2 of 2
970086 S801P-0
MATERIAL ALLOWANCES
7.1.
8.
UOP Specification
Pipe Bending
Stainless Steel Pipe

1.
Mechanical cleaning tools shall be clean and shall not have been used on low
melting point materials such as aluminum, copper, lead or materials containing
lead compounds.
2.
The set of tools to be used on stainless-steel materials shall be clearly marked

for stainless steel use only.
3.
Tools to be used on stainless steel materials shall not have been previously used
on carbon or low alloy steel materials.
4.
Grinding tools for stainless steels shall be either:

a.
resin-bonded aluminum-oxide, or
b.
silicon-carbide.
5.
Brushing shall be performed with clean, austenitic stainless-steel brushes.
6.
All dirt, sand, lubricant and other foreign matter shall be completely removed.
Carbon Steel Pipe

1.
Where lubricant is used for internal mandrel, pipe I.D. shall be free of residue before
material is shipped.
2.
Where lubricant is used for external tool lubrication, surface of pipe shall be cleaned
of residue before surface finishes are applied.
INDUSTRY CODES AND STANDARDS
Pipe Fabrication Institute (PFI)

--Standard ES-24, Pipe Bending Methods, Tolerances, Process and Material
Requirements
Tube and Pipe Association International (TPA)

--Standard TPA-CBS-98, Recommended Standards for Cold Bending of Pipe and
Tube
--Standard TPA-IBS-98, Recommended Standards for Induction Bending of Pipe and
Tube
2013-01-16

Pipe Bending
Proposala
One copies of data and documents indicated shall be provided.

b
Review
One copies of data and documents indicated shall be provided.
Finalb
Two copies of data and documents indicated shall be provided.
Final-Received from Vendor

Final-Due from Vendorc
Review-Returned to Vendor
Review-Received from Vendor
Review-Due from Vendorc
DISTRIBUTION
RECORD
DOCUMENT CATEGORY and DESCRIPTION

X
1.
Schedule of Work
2.
Pipe Bending Procedure
3.
TEST PROCEDURES
4.
NDE Procedures
5.
CERTIFICATION
6.
CMTRs
7.
Conformity Declaration
8.
Test Result (NDE, visual, thickness)
9.
Inspection Release Note
10.
FINAL DOCUMENTATION:
11.
As-Built Dimensions
12.
Nomenclature:
c Vendor shall complete these two columns to reflect his actual distribution schedule and include this form with his proposal.
Page 1 of 1
970086 V801P-0
2013-01-04
UOP Specification
Branch Connection Table
Page 1 of 1
970086 S8 Branch-0
BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE

The minimum pipe size shall be NPS 3/4, except for instrument lead lines which may be NPS 1/2.
Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table:
RUN
SIZE
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
BRANCH SIZE
3/4 1
11/2
T
RT T
RT RT T
BS RT RT
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
T
RT
RT
RT
T
RT
RT
T
RT
BRANCH CODES:
T
=STRAIGHT TEE
RT
=REDUCING TEE (For Reducing Tees, socket weld reducer inserts fabricated in accordance with MSS SP-79
are permitted)
BS
=SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET), Full couplings are permitted, Half Couplings are NOT Permitted.
BW
=WELDOLET
Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any
purpose whatsoever without its written permission.
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011
Process Industry Practices

Structural
PIP STS05120
Structural and Miscellaneous
Steel Fabrication Specification
PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES

In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities, this Practice has
been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major
industrial users, contractors, or standards organizations. By harmonizing these technical
requirements into a single set of Practices, administrative, application, and engineering
costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. While this Practice
is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users, individual
applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence
over this Practice. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters
or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not
be made solely on information contained in these materials. The use of trade names
from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather
recognized as normal usage in the trade. Other brands having the same specifications
are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. All Practices or guidelines
are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA
requirements. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or
other applicable laws or regulations, such laws or regulations must be followed.
Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material
contained in or suggested by the Practice.
This Practice is subject to revision at any time.
Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of

Texas at Austin, 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500), Austin, Texas 78759. PIP Member
Companies and Subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Changes or
modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express
written authorization of PIP. Authorized Users may attach addenda or overlays to clearly
indicate modifications or exceptions to specific sections of PIP Practices. Authorized
Users may provide their clients, suppliers and contractors with copies of the Practice
solely for Authorized Users purposes. These purposes include but are not limited to the
procurement process (e.g., as attachments to requests for quotation/ purchase orders or
requests for proposals/contracts) and preparation and issue of design engineering
deliverables for use on a specific project by Authorized Users client. PIPs copyright
notices must be clearly indicated and unequivocally incorporated in documents where an
Authorized User desires to provide any third party with copies of the Practice.
PRINTING HISTORY
November 1994
Issued
January 1999
Revision
January 2000
Technical Correction
February 2011
Complete Revision
Not printed with State funds
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

Structural
PIP STS05120
Steel Fabrication Specification
Table of Contents
1. Introduction................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................ 2

1.2 Scope ............................................... 2
2. References .................................. 2
2.1 Process Industry Practices .............. 2

2.2 Industry Codes and Standards ........ 2
2.3 Government Regulations ................. 4
3. Definitions ................................... 5
4. Requirements.............................. 5
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
Quality Control ................................. 5

Submittals ........................................ 7
Performance .................................... 8
Products and Materials .................... 8
Connections ..................................... 9
Fabrication ..................................... 14
Galvanizing .................................... 15
Handling, Shipping, and Delivery ... 17
Page 1 of 18
PIP STS05120
Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification
1.
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This Practice provides requirements for the fabrication of structural and
miscellaneous steel.
1.2
Scope
This Practice describes the requirements for material, connections, detailing,
fabricating, galvanizing, and delivery of structural and miscellaneous steel.
Structural and miscellaneous steel are as defined in AISC Code of Standard Practice.
This Practice does not include requirements that may be applicable for structures that
require special seismic detailing.
2.
References
Applicable parts of the following Practices and references shall be considered an integral part
of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used, except as
otherwise noted. Short titles are used herein where appropriate.
2.1
Process Industry Practices (PIP)

PIP STS05130 - Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification
2.2
Industry Codes and Standards

American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
ANSI/AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
AISC Steel Construction Manual
AISC Detailing for Steel Construction
ASTM International (ASTM)
ASTM A1 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Tee Rails
ASTM A6/A6M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for
Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and HotDipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
ASTM A106/A106M - Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel
Pipe for High-Temperature Service
ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, ColdFinished
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
Page 2 of 18
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011
PIP STS05120
ASTM A143/A143M - Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against

Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and
Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement
ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,
60,000 psi Tensile Strength
ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat
Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength (AASHTO No. M164)
ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat
Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric)
ASTM A384/A384M - Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage
and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies
ASTM A385/A385M - Standard Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc
Coatings (Hot-Dip)
ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat
Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength (AASHTO No. M253)
ASTM A490M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts,
Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural Steel Joints (Metric)
ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
(Metric)
ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel
ASTM A759 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Crane Rails
ASTM A780/A780M - Standard Specification for Repair of Damaged and
Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings
ASTM A786/A786M - Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, LowAlloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates
ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes
ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,
Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength
Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength
ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically
Deposited on Iron and Steel
ASTM E376 - Standard Practice for Measuring Coating Thickness by
Magnetic-Field or Eddy-Current (Electromagnetic) Examination Methods
ASTM F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
ASTM F436M - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers (Metric)
Page 3 of 18
PIP STS05120
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011
ASTM F606 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Mechanical

Properties of Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners, Washers, Direct
Tension Indicators, and Rivets
ASTM F606M - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Mechanical
Properties of Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners, Washers, and
Rivets (Metric)
ASTM F959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct
Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners
ASTM F959M - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type
Direct Tension Indicators for Use With Structural Fasteners (Metric)
ASTM F1852 - Standard Specification for Twist Off Type Tension Control
Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength
ASTM F2280 - Standard Specification for Twist Off Type Tension Control
Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum
Tensile Strength
ASTM F2329 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip,
Requirements for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws,
Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel
AWS D1.3/D1.3M - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel
AWSD14.1/D14.1M - Specification for Welding of Industrial and Mill Cranes
and Other Material Handling Equipment
AWS QC1 - Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors
National Association of Architectural Metals Manufacturers (NAAMM)
NAAMM MBG 531 - Metal Bar Grating Manual
Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC)
RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts
Steel Deck Institute (SDI)
SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks
Steel Joist Institute (SJI)
SJI Standard Specifications and Load Tables
2.3
Government Regulations
Requirements by state or local agencies that have jurisdiction where the structural
steel is to be erected, shall apply.
US Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA)
OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910
Page 4 of 18
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STS05120
February 2011
3.
Definitions
contract documents: Any and all documents, including codes, studies, design drawings,
specifications, sketches, practices, and data sheets, that the purchaser or engineer of record
has transmitted or otherwise communicated, either by incorporation or reference, and made
part of the legal contract agreement or purchase order between the purchaser and the
fabricator.
engineer of record: Purchasers authorized representative with overall authority and
responsibility for the engineering design, quality, and performance of the civil works,
structure, foundations, materials, and appurtenances described in the contract documents.
The engineer of record shall be licensed as defined by the laws of the locality in which the
work is to be constructed, and be qualified to practice in the specialty discipline required for
the work described in the contract documents. Also known as structural engineer of record in
AISC Code of Standard Practice.
engineer-designed connections: Structural steel connections which are designed by the
engineer of record and detailed in the contract documents.
fabricator: The party responsible for providing fabricated structural and miscellaneous steel
in accordance with the contract documents. The term fabricator shall apply also to the
fabricators subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s).
inspector: The party responsible for verifying the quality of all materials, installations, and
workmanship furnished by the fabricator. The inspector shall be qualified by training and
experience and hold certifications or documentation of their qualifications. Unless otherwise
specified in the contract documents, the inspector shall be retained by the fabricator.
manufacturer: The party who produces and warrants the performance of the products,
materials, and/or items provided in accordance with the contract documents. The products,
materials, and/or items are manufactured in a controlled process using standard codes,
specifications, tests and possibly include shop drawings to assist in proper application,
installation and/or use. The term manufacturer shall apply also to the manufacturers
subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s).
owner: The party who owns the facility wherein the structural steel will be used.
professional engineer: An engineer, other than the engineer of record licensed as defined by
the laws of the locality in which the steel is to be erected, and qualified to practice in the
specialty discipline required for the work described in the contract documents.
purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the fabricator. The purchaser may be the
owner or the owners authorized agent.
4.
Requirements
4.1
Quality Control
4.1.1
Unless approved by the engineer of record, fabricator shall participate in the

AISC Certification Program and be designated an AISC Certified Plant,
Category STD.
Page 5 of 18
PIP STS05120
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011
4.1.2
The fabricator shall be solely responsible for quality control of all materials
and workmanship.
4.1.3
Each piece of mill material shall be legibly marked with the heat number,
size of section, length and mill identification marks in accordance with
ASTM A6/A6M, plus fabrication mill order number. Alternate material
tracking procedures may be used if approved by the purchaser.
4.1.4
For material other than ASTM A36/A36M, the appropriate specification

number, grade, heat number and fabrication mill order number shall be
transferred to the remnant. Alternate material tracking procedures may be
used if approved by the purchaser.
4.1.5
Mill material with specified minimum yield strength higher than 36 ksi
(250 MPa) shall be marked with the color designated in ASTM A6/A6M.
Alternate material tracking procedures may be used if approved by the
purchaser.
4.1.6
A written Material Handling Procedure, Quality Control Program, and

Inspection Procedures document shall be provided. This document shall
provide details of how compliance with the requirements in this Practice and
the design drawings shall be achieved.
4.1.7
The purchaser has the right to inspect all materials and workmanship and
shall have unrestricted entry to the fabricators shop at all times while work
is being performed.
4.1.8
The purchaser may reject improper, inferior, defective, or unsuitable

materials and workmanship.
4.1.9
All materials and workmanship rejected shall be repaired or replaced as

directed by the purchaser.
4.1.10 Bolted connections shall be inspected in accordance with the RCSC

Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts.
4.1.11 Welding procedures and individual welders shall be qualified in accordance
with the requirements of AWS D1.1 and when applicable AWS D14.1.
4.1.12 Welding procedures previously qualified for the purchaser may be used
without requalification. However, the purchaser reserves the right to require
requalification of any questionable procedure before the start of fabrication.
4.1.13 All welding shall be inspected in accordance with AWS D1.1 and when
applicable AWS D14.1. Inspectors shall be qualified and certified as AWS
Certified Welding Inspectors in accordance with the provisions of AWS D1.1
or AWS QC1 or shall be trained by and working under the supervision of an
AWS Certified Welding Inspector. Welding of rigging and under the hook
lifting devices shall be inspected in accordance with AWS D14.1. Inspectors
shall be qualified and certified as AWS Certified Welding Inspectors in
accordance with the provisions of AWS D14.1 or AWS QC1.
4.1.14 Certified mill test reports for each heat of structural steel and each lot of high
strength bolts shall be available for review by the purchaser.
Page 6 of 18
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STS05120
February 2011
4.1.15 The purchaser may require a quantity of representative samples of bolt

assemblies to be used for testing. Testing in accordance with ASTM
F606/F606M shall be at the purchasers expense.
4.1.16 The purchaser reserves the right to inspect and reject all galvanized steel in
accordance with ASTM A123 and ASTM E376.
4.2
Submittals
4.2.1
The following items shall be submitted to the engineer of record for

approval. Work shall not proceed without approval:
a. Checked erection and shop drawings
b. Checked engineering calculations for each fabricator-designed
connection
c. Quality Control Program and Inspection Procedures
d. Welding Procedure Specification (WPS)
e. Procedure Qualification Records (PQR)
f.
Welder(s) qualification records
4.2.2
Final erection drawings, shop drawings, and field bolt lists shall be sent to
the persons responsible for managing construction at their field office by way
of next day delivery before shipment of steel.
4.2.3
A shipping list (including total weight of release and weight of shipment),

a bolt list, and final erection drawings shall accompany the first shipment of
each release.
4.2.4
As a minimum, the following documents shall be submitted to the purchaser

for record purposes:
a. Final erection and shop drawings
b. Records of Quality Control inspection test reports requested by the
purchaser
c. Final engineering calculations for each fabricator-designed connection
sealed and signed by the responsible Professional Engineer
d. Records of calibration or recalibration performed on the tools or
equipment used during the work, if requested by the purchaser
4.2.5
Erection and Shop Drawings

a. Shop drawings and erection drawings shall be prepared in accordance
with the AISC documents listed in Section 2.2.
b. Erection drawings shall reference the corresponding design drawings;
shop drawings shall reference the corresponding erection drawings.
c. Shop drawings shall clearly show the specification and grade of steel to
be used.
d. Erection and shop drawings shall be grouped in sets and identified
separately for each building, structure, or yard area.
Page 7 of 18
PIP STS05120
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011
e. Erection drawings shall clearly show the mark number and position for
each member. Mark number system shall be agreed upon in advance with
purchaser.
f.
Erection drawings shall clearly identify pretensioned and slip critical

high strength bolted connections.
g. The purchasers purchase order number shall be shown on all erection

and shop drawings.
h. Shop drawings shall state the welding electrode to be used.
i.
Surface preparation and shop applied coatings, including areas to be

masked, shall be noted on the shop drawings.
j.
A bolt list and list of other fasteners showing the number, grade, size,
and length of field bolts and other fasteners for each connection shall be
provided. These lists may be shown on either the shop drawings or
separate sheets.
k. In the event that drawing revisions are necessary, the shop drawings shall
clearly be clouded showing all changes of the latest revisions.
l.
4.3
4.4
Shop drawings and erection drawings shall be prepared using a three

dimensional steel modeling and detailing software system. All
miscellaneous steel such as handrail, stairs, and ladders shall be included
in the same three dimensional model as main structural steel and detailed
using the same system.
Performance
4.3.1
All work shall be in accordance with the AISC Code of Standard Practice for
Structural Steel Buildings and Bridges, AISC Specification for Structural
Steel Buildings, applicable portions of OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 and Part
1926, and any other applicable federal, state or local regulations.
4.3.2
If local specifications, codes, or standards exist for the materials, section

properties, design, and test methods covered by this Practice which yield
equivalent quality and performance, they may be substituted only with prior
written approval by the purchaser.
Products and Materials

4.4.1
Structural wide flange shapes shall be ASTM A992/A992M, unless otherwise

specified in the contract documents.
4.4.2
Structural channels, angles, plates, bars, and other shapes shall be ASTM
A36/A36M, ASTM unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.
4.4.3
Pipe shall be ASTM A53 Type E or S, Grade B or ASTM A106 Grade B.
4.4.4
Structural tubing shall be ASTM A501 or ASTM A500 Grade B.
4.4.5
High strength bolt assemblies shall be as follows:

a. Bolt - ASTM A325/A325M Type 1 or ASTM A490/A490M, if specified on
the design drawings
b. Washer - ASTM F436/F436M
Page 8 of 18
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STS05120
February 2011
c. Direct Tension Indicator (D.T.I.) washers - ASTM F959/F959M,

if specified in Contract Documents
d. Twist-off type bolt assemblies - ASTM F1852 or ASTM F2280,
if specified in Contract Documents.
e. Heavy Hex Nut - ASTM A563/A563M Grade DH
4.4.6
Standard bolt assemblies shall be as follows:

a. Bolt - ASTM A307 Grade A Heavy Hex
b. Washer - ASTM F436/F436M
c. Heavy Hex Nut - ASTM A563/A563M Grade A
4.4.7
Headed studs shall be ASTM A108 Grade 1010 through 1020, AWS D1.1
Section 7, Type B.
4.4.8
Welding filler metal shall be AWS D1.1 Section 3.3 (including Table 3.1),
low hydrogen, with an electrode strength of 58 ksi (400 MPa) minimum yield
strength and 70 ksi (480 MPa) minimum tensile strength. (For example, use
E70XX for SMAW, F7XX-EXXX for SAW, ER70S-X for GMAW, and
E7XT-X for FCAW.)
4.4.9
Crane rails shall be as follows:

a. Rails 60 to 84 lb./yd. - ASTM A1
b. Rails 104 to 175 lb./yd. - ASTM A759
4.4.10 Checkered floor plate shall be ASTM A786/A786M Pattern 4 or 5 and ASTM
A36/A36M.
4.4.11 Welded steel bar grating and grating stair treads shall be ASTM
A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (Type B), galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A123 and NAAMM MBG 531. Top surface of bearing bars shall be
plain, unless serrated is specified. Grating stair treads shall have abrasive or
checkered plate nosing.
4.4.12 Steel deck shall be in accordance with the SDI Design Manual for Composite
Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks and Cellular Deck Floor Systems with
Electrical Distribution.
4.4.13 Steel joists shall be in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications and Load
Tables.
4.5
Connections
4.5.1
General
4.5.1.1
All connections shall be engineer-designed, fabricator-selected,

or fabricator-designed.
4.5.1.2
Unless otherwise noted in the contract documents, all connections

not fully detailed on the design drawings shall be fabricatorselected.
Page 9 of 18
PIP STS05120
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
Page 10 of 18
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011
Engineer-Designed Connections
4.5.2.1
Engineer-designed connections will be fully designed and detailed

on the design drawings provided by purchaser, and shall be
furnished as shown.
4.5.2.2
Engineer-designed connections shall be only those connections

fully detailed on the design drawings provided by purchaser,
showing all fastener sizes, arrangement, dimensions, quantities and
grades, and all connection material and weld types, sizes, and
lengths for each individual member or part to be joined. This
information shall be shown on shop drawings.
4.5.2.3
A request to deviate from the specific details of any engineerdesigned connection shall be in writing, with written approval of
the engineer of record. Approval of this submittal constitutes
acceptance by engineer of record of design responsibility for the
structural adequacy of the changed detail. Such changed details
shall also be clearly shown on shop drawings.
Fabricator-Selected Connections
4.5.3.1
Fabricator-selected connections shall be those for which engineer

of record has authority and responsibility for the design adequacy
and fabricator has authority and responsibility for the detailing.
4.5.3.2
Fabricator-selected connections shall be simple connections (shear

only, or negligible bending moment). These connections shall be
detailed by selecting standard details from the accepted standards
listed in Section 2.2 and shall meet all other requirements in the
contract documents.
4.5.3.3
The approval by engineer of record of shop drawings detailing

fabricator-selected connections constitutes acceptance by engineer
of record of design responsibility for the structural adequacy, but
not the detailing, of the approved fabricator-selected connections.
Fabricator-Designed Connections
4.5.4.1
Fabricator-designed connections shall be designed and detailed to

equal or exceed the required strength shown on the design
drawings or as provided in the contract documents.
4.5.4.2
A professional engineer shall design or supervise the design of all

fabricator-designed connections and be responsible for the
structural adequacy.
4.5.4.3
Fabricator-designed connections shall meet all requirements of the

contract documents.
4.5.4.4
In all cases, the design shall consider the entire joint (including
beams, girders, columns, and bracing) and shall take into account
all applicable limit states, including bolt shear, combined bolt
tension and shear, prying action, local bending, coped beam
capacities, block shear, web buckling, etc.
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STS05120
February 2011
4.5.5
4.5.4.5
Stiffeners for column webs, column flanges, and for elements of

other members involved shall be designed and furnished as
required.
4.5.4.6
Checked engineering calculations for each fabricator-designed

connection shall be sealed and signed by the responsible
professional engineer who designed or supervised the design of the
connections.
4.5.4.7
If required by the contract documents, all shop drawings

containing fabricator-designed connections shall be sealed and
signed by the responsible professional engineer.
4.5.4.8
Review of shop drawings detailing fabricator-designed connections

and engineering calculation sheets by engineer of record does not
relieve the fabricator of responsibility for both the structural
adequacy and detailing of connections designed by the fabricator.
Bolted Connections
4.5.5.1
Design, detailing, and fabrication of bolted connections shall be in

accordance with either AISCs Allowable Strength Design (ASD)
or Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) method, as noted in
the contract documents.
4.5.5.2
Connection design shall be in accordance with the RCSC

Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490
Bolts, AISC Steel Construction Manual, and AISC Detailing for
Steel Construction.
4.5.5.3
The minimum available strength of all bolted, or mixed bolted and

welded, framed beam connections shall be the member end
reaction shown on the design drawings.
4.5.5.4
Unless otherwise noted on the design drawings, 3/4 inch (20 mm)
diameter ASTM A325/A325M high-strength bolts shall be used in
all bolted structural connections.
4.5.5.5
ASTM A325/A325M bolts larger than 3/4-inch (20 mm) diameter

shall not be used without specific written approval of the engineer
of record.
4.5.5.6
ASTM A307 bolts, 5/8-inch (16 mm) or smaller diameter shall be

permitted for ladder, stair tread, purlin, girt, door frame, and
handrail connections.
4.5.5.7
ASTM A307 bolts larger than 5/8-inch (16 mm) shall not be
permitted.
4.5.5.8
The minimum number of bolts in a framed beam connection shall

be two bolts.
4.5.5.9
High-strength bolted connections shall be bearing type A325-N

with threads included in the shear plane.
4.5.5.10 Slip-critical type connections A325-SC shall be used if noted on

Page 11 of 18
PIP STS05120
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011
4.5.5.11 Unless otherwise specified on the design drawings or permitted by

the following paragraphs, all bolt holes shall be standard holes as
defined by AISC 360.
4.5.5.12 For framed beam bearing connections, horizontal short slotted
holes as defined by AISC 360 may be used in the outstanding leg
of clip angles if approved by engineer of record.
4.5.5.13 For framed beam slip-critical connections, oversized or horizontal
short slotted as defined by AISC 360 holes may be used in the
outstanding leg of clip angles if approved by engineer of record.
4.5.5.14 Unless otherwise approved by engineer of record, the long
direction of the slot shall be perpendicular to the load direction.
4.5.5.15 Slotted or oversized hole dimensions shall be in accordance with
Table J3.3 of the AISC 360.
4.5.5.16 Hardened washers shall be provided under all bolt heads and/or
nuts adjacent to any ply with oversized or slotted holes.
4.5.5.17 For standard holes, a minimum of one hardened washer shall be
supplied with each bolt.
4.5.5.18 If used, direct tension indicator washers shall be in accordance
with ASTM F959/F959M and shall be installed according to the
washer manufacturers published specifications.
4.5.5.19 All bolt lengths shall be determined in accordance with the
Commentary on Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM
A325 and A490 Bolts, Table C2.
4.5.5.20 A minimum of 5% extra quantities of each bolt size and length,
including nuts and washers, shall be provided for field erection.
4.5.5.21 Mechanically galvanized bolts or nuts shall not be interchanged
with hot dipped galvanized nuts or bolts, respectively.
4.5.5.22 All column splices shall be field bolted and shall be in accordance
with AISC Detailing for Steel Construction, Appendix C.
4.5.5.23 All nuts for high-strength bolts shall be wax-dipped to reduce
torque during installation.
4.5.5.24 Each bolt component shall be clearly marked with the component
manufacturers identification.
4.5.6
Page 12 of 18
Welded Connections
4.5.6.1
Design, detailing, and fabrication of welded connections shall be in

accordance with either AISCs Allowable Strength Design (ASD)
or Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) method, as noted in
4.5.6.2
Welded connection design shall be in accordance with AISC 360,

AISC Steel Construction Manual, and AISC Detailing for Steel
Construction. Welding for monorails, lifting lugs and other below
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STS05120
February 2011
the hook devices required for lifting or rigging shall conform to

AWS D14.1.
4.5.7
4.5.8
4.5.6.3
The minimum available strength of all welded framed beam

connections shall be the member end reaction shown on the design
drawings.
4.5.6.4
Minimum fillet weld size shall be AISC minimum or 3/16 inch

(5 mm), whichever is larger, for structural welds.
4.5.6.5
Seal welds shall be 1/8 inch (3 mm) minimum fillet weld.
4.5.6.6
Welds shall be continuous, unless otherwise indicated on design

drawings or approved by engineer of record.
4.5.6.7
Erection clips for field welded connections shall be provided.
4.5.6.8
All run-off bars and extension tabs shall be removed unless

otherwise noted.
Shop and Field Connections

4.5.7.1
Unless otherwise shown on the design drawings, all field

connections shall be bolted and all shop connections shall be either
bolted or welded.
4.5.7.2
To ensure electrical continuity if shop applying

non-conductive coatings (i.e., epoxies), all contact surfaces shall be
masked unless otherwise noted in the contract documents.
4.5.7.3
All locations of no-paint or areas requiring full masking or strip

masking shall be noted on the shop drawings.
4.5.7.4
Provide additional bolts or connection devices where required to

comply with OSHA 29 CFR Part 1926, Subpart R Steel Erection.
Bracing Connections
4.5.8.1
Unless otherwise noted on the design drawings, connections for

pre-assembled bracing and truss members shall be designed for the
required strength shown on the design drawings, but not less than
50% of the available tensile strength of the member.
4.5.8.2
The available tensile strength of the member shall be calculated

using the gross cross section of the member.
4.5.8.3
A minimum of two bolts per connection shall be provided.
4.5.8.4
All cross bracing shall be bolted at intersections with one bolt

minimum for angles and two bolts minimum for tees.
4.5.8.5
All bracing connections, including gusset plates, shall be designed

in accordance with the AISC 360 and AISC Steel Construction
Manual.
4.5.8.6
All gusset and stiffener plates shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm) minimum
thickness.
Page 13 of 18
PIP STS05120
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011
4.5.8.7
Unless otherwise noted on the design drawings, all vertical bracing

and knee bracing shall have gusset plates on column centerlines.
4.5.8.8
Unless otherwise noted on the design drawings, the following

working points shall be used:
a. For vertical bracing at the intersection of a column, beam, and
brace, the gusset plate shall be connected to both beam and
column. The work point shall be the point at which the beam
and column centerlines intersect.
b. For the connection of V-braces to nominal beams 10 inches
(250 mm) or smaller, the working point shall be the
intersection of the horizontal centerline of the beam and the
centerline of the bay.
c. For the connection of V-braces to nominal beams 12 inches
(300 mm) or larger, the working point shall be the intersection
of a horizontal line 5 inches (125 mm) below the top flange if
the brace is above the beam, or 5 inches above the bottom
flange if the brace is below the beam, and the centerline of the
bay.
4.5.9
4.6
Page 14 of 18
Connections for Concrete Fireproofed Members

4.5.9.1
Connections for members fireproofed with concrete shall be

detailed to minimize blockouts in shop applied fireproofing.
4.5.9.2
Gusset plates for vertical or horizontal bracing members and

single-plate shear connections for beams shall extend outside
fireproofing a sufficient length to make the connection with the
fireproofing in place.
4.5.9.3
Handrails shall not be connected to fireproofed columns.
Fabrication
4.6.1
All fabrication shall be in accordance with the AISC Code of Standard

Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges and the AISC Specification for
Structural Steel Buildings, unless otherwise specified in the contract
documents, state or local laws, or building codes.
4.6.2
All welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1.
4.6.3
Shop splices, substitutions of member sizes, or changes in details or

dimensions shall not be permitted without written authorization from
engineer of record.
4.6.4
All beams, except cantilevers, shall be fabricated with natural mill camber in
the up position.
4.6.5
All re-entrant corners shall be shaped, notched-free, to a radius.
4.6.6
If performing shop assembly work, the tolerances shall not exceed those
specified in AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges.
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STS05120
February 2011
4.6.7
All pieces shall be clearly marked with a permanent identifying erection

mark number. Method and location of marking shall be approved by
purchaser.
4.6.8
Before surface preparation, all sharp corners, burrs (including bolt hole
burrs), weld spatter, slag, weld flux, loose mill scale and other foreign matter
shall be removed.
4.6.9
Platforms, stairways, and handrails shall be shop assembled in the largest

units suitable for handling and shipping. Ladder cages shall be shop
assembled on ladders.
4.6.10 The method for fastening grating shall be as specified on the design
drawings. A minimum of two fasteners per panel shall be used at each
support, with a minimum of four per panel. The fasteners shall be supplied
with 5% extra to cover losses.
4.6.11 Grating/checkered plate openings dimensioned on the design drawings shall
be cut and banded in the shop as shown on the design drawings.
4.6.12 Undimensioned grating/checkered plate openings shall be cut in the field by
others.
4.6.13 Joints perpendicular to the span of grating and checkered plate flooring shall
be permitted only over support members.
4.6.14 Checkered plate shall have 1/2 inch (12 mm) diameter drain holes provided
for each 20 square feet (2 square meters) of area, with a minimum of one
hole per panel.
4.7
Galvanizing
4.7.1
General
4.7.1.1
Unless otherwise noted in the contract documents, all materials,

except ASTM A490 bolts, ASTM A490M bolts, and crane rails,
shall be galvanized.
4.7.1.2
Galvanizing of steel shapes, plates, and hardware shall be in

accordance with the following ASTM specifications:
a. Steel shapes and plates - ASTM A123
b. ASTM A325/A325M bolts and corresponding nuts and washers
- ASTM B695 or ASTM F2329
c. ASTM A36/A36M threaded bar or ASTM A307 bolts and
corresponding nuts and washers - ASTM F2329 or
ASTM B695
4.7.2
Fabrication
4.7.2.1
It shall be the fabricators responsibility to safeguard against

embrittlement and warpage in accordance with ASTM A143 and
ASTM A384.
4.7.2.2
Fabrication details shall be in accordance with ASTM A385 to

allow for the creation of high quality zinc coatings.
Page 15 of 18
PIP STS05120
4.7.3
4.7.4
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011
4.7.2.3
If practical, cutting, drilling and welding shall be performed before

galvanizing.
4.7.2.4
Weld slag shall be removed before galvanizing.
4.7.2.5
The edges of tightly contacting surfaces shall be completely seal

welded.
4.7.2.6
Vent holes shall be provided for piping or tubular assemblies as

required by ASTM A385.
4.7.2.7
Potential problems that require a modification in design shall be

brought to the attention of the purchaser before proceeding.
Galvanizing of Steel Hardware

4.7.3.1
Nuts shall be tapped oversize in accordance with

ASTM A563/A563M.
4.7.3.2
Nut threads shall be retapped after hot-dip galvanizing to provide

proper fit.
4.7.3.3
Direct tension indicators, if used, shall be mechanically galvanized

by the indicator manufacturer in accordance with Class 50 of
ASTM B695.
Repair
4.7.4.1
Any damage to galvanizing shall be repaired in accordance with

ASTM A780.
4.7.4.2
Before repair of damaged galvanized coating, exposed substrate

metal shall be cleaned to bright metal and free of all visual rust,
oil, or grease. Any nonadhering galvanizing shall be removed to
the extent that the surrounding galvanizing is integral and adherent.
4.7.4.3
If surface defects exceed 2% of a members area, the defects shall

be repaired by redipping the member in the zinc bath.
4.7.4.4
Cold repair using an organic zinc rich coating shall be permitted if

the following conditions exist:
a. Total damaged area is less than 1% of the total coated area of
the member being repaired
b. No single repair is greater than 2 square inches (1300 mm2)
c. No single repair is greater than 12 inches (300 mm) long.
4.7.4.5
Page 16 of 18
For coating applied for a cold repair, the dry film thickness shall be
2 to 3 mils (0.05 mm to 0.08 mm) and contain a minimum of 65%
zinc dust by weight.
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STS05120
February 2011
4.7.4.6
Hot repairs shall be made in the shop if any of the following

conditions exist:
a. Total damaged area is greater than 1% but less than 2% of the
total coated area of the member being repaired
b. Any single repair is at least 2 square inches (1300 mm2) in area
c. Any single repair is 12 inches (300 mm) long or more
4.7.4.7
Hot repair shall be made using zinc alloy rod or powder

manufactured for the repair of galvanized steel.
4.7.4.8
Flux, heavy ash, or heavy dross inclusions shall be removed by

brushing, grinding, or filing as required.
4.7.4.9
Galvanized steel which has been rejected shall be stripped,

regalvanized, and submitted again for inspection.
4.7.4.10 Correction of excessive warpage that exceeds ASTM A6/A6M

criteria shall be performed by press straightening if possible.
4.7.4.11 The application of localized heating to straighten shall be approved
by engineer of record.
4.7.4.12 If galvanized tension control bolts are used, all bare steel surfaces
(i.e., bolt ends) shall be repair galvanized in accordance with this
section.
4.8
Handling, Shipping, and Delivery

4.8.1
Delivery of steel shall be in the order needed for erection. The delivery
sequence for the fabricated steel, unless otherwise noted in the contract
documents or arranged by the purchaser, shall be as follows:
a. Loose base plates
b. Steel embedded in concrete
c. Erection bolts
d. First tier columns and framing for all its levels (including stairs, grating,
and handrail)
e. Second tier columns and its framing, etc.
4.8.2
All bolts, washers, and nuts shall be packaged and delivered in rigid (not
cardboard), weatherproof containers.
4.8.3
Railcars and/or trucks shall be loaded and cribbed so they can be readily
unloaded by others.
4.8.4
Railcars and/or trucks shall be loaded in such a manner that continuous

drainage is assured.
4.8.5
All steel and its coatings shall be protected from any damage caused by
handling, storage, or shipping before receipt by the purchaser.
4.8.6
Adequate protection shall be provided for threads on sag rods and any other
threaded components to prevent damage during shipping and handling.
Page 17 of 18
PIP STS05120
Page 18 of 18
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011
4.8.7
All materials and documentation shall be delivered to the job site in good
condition.
4.8.8
All materials and documentation will be inspected by the purchaser

immediately upon receipt to determine that all items included in the bill of
materials have been supplied, to assure that all documentation has been
received, and to check for any damage.
4.8.9
The purchaser reserves the right to reject all damaged or below quality
material or documentation.
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

Structural
PIP STS05130
Steel Erection Specification


PRINTING HISTORY
November 1994
Issued
December 1998
Revision
February 2002
February 2011
Complete Revision
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

Structural
PIP STS05130
Steel Erection Specification
Table of Contents
1. Introduction................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................ 2

1.2 Scope ............................................... 2
2. References .................................. 2

2.3 Government Regulations ................. 3
3. Definitions ................................... 3
4. Requirements.............................. 4
4.1 General ............................................ 4

4.2 Products and Materials .................... 6
4.3 Execution ......................................... 6
Drawing
STS05130-01 Field Located and

Field Fabricated Grating Openings
Page 1 of 10
PIP STS05130
Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification
1.
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This Practice provides the requirements for structural and miscellaneous steel
erection.
1.2
Scope
This Practice describes the requirements for the receipt, handling, erection, assembly,
and field inspection of structural and miscellaneous steel. Structural and
miscellaneous steel are as defined in AISC Code of Standard Practice.
2.
References
Applicable parts of the following Practices, industry codes and standards, and references shall
be considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract
award shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles are used herein where appropriate.
2.1

PIP STS03600 - Cementitious Grout Specification
PIP STS03601 - Epoxy Grout Specification
PIP STS05120 - Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification
2.2

AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
ANSI/AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
AISC Steel Construction Manual
American Society of Safety Engineers (ASSE)
ASSE A10.13 - Safety Requirements for Steel Erection American National
Standard for Construction and Demolition Operations
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code Steel
60,000 psi Tensile Strength
ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength (AASHTO No. M164)
ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat
Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric)
ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat
Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength (AASHTO No. M253)
ASTM A490M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes
10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural Steel Joints (Metric)
Page 2 of 10
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011
PIP STS05130
Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC)

RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts
Steel Deck Institute (SDI)
SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks
Steel Joist Institute (SJI)
SJI Standard Specifications and Load Tables
2.3
Requirements by state or local agencies that have jurisdiction where the structural
steel is to be erected, shall apply.
U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA)
3.
Definitions
part of the legal contract agreement or purchase order between the purchaser and the erector.
The engineer of record shall be licensed as defined by the laws of the locality in which the
work is to be constructed, and be qualified to practice in the specialty discipline required for
the work described in the contract documents. Also known as structural engineer of record in
AISC Code of Standard Practice.
erector: The party responsible for erecting structural and miscellaneous steel in accordance
with the contract documents. The term erector shall apply also to the fabricators
inspector: The party responsible for verifying the quality of all materials, installations,
and workmanship furnished by the erector. The inspector shall be qualified by training and
experience and hold certifications or documentation of their qualifications. Unless otherwise
specified in the contract documents, the inspector shall be retained by the erector.
manufacturer: The party who produces and warrants the performance of the products,
materials, and/or items provided in accordance with the contract documents. The products,
materials, and/or items are manufactured in a controlled process using standard codes,
specifications, tests and possibly include shop drawings to assist in proper application,
installation and/or use. The term manufacturer shall apply also to the manufacturers
owner: The party who owns the facility wherein the structural steel will be used.
Page 3 of 10
PIP STS05130
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011
professional engineer: An engineer, other than the engineer of record licensed as defined by
the laws of the locality in which the steel is to be erected, and qualified to practice in the
specialty discipline required for the work described in the contract documents.
purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the erector. The purchaser may be the owner
or the owners authorized agent.
4.
Requirements
4.1
General
4.1.1
Quality Control
4.1.1.1
Unless approved by the engineer of record, erector shall participate

in the AISC Certification Program and be designated an AISC
Certified Erector, Category ACSE.
4.1.1.2
The erector shall be solely responsible for the quality control of all
the erector-supplied materials, installations, and workmanship.
4.1.1.3
A written Quality Control Program and Inspection Procedures

document that shall provide details of how compliance with the
requirements of this Practice and the shop and erection drawings
shall be achieved, shall be provided.
4.1.1.4
A complete up-to-date set of erection drawings at the jobsite shall

be maintained.
4.1.1.5
Bolted connections shall be installed and inspected in accordance

with the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM
A325 and A490 Bolts.
4.1.1.6
Welding procedures and individual welders shall be qualified in

accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1.
4.1.1.7
All welding shall be inspected in accordance with AWS D1.1.

Inspectors shall be qualified and certified as AWS Certified
Welding Inspectors in accordance with the provisions of AWS D1.1
or AWS QC1 or shall be trained by and working under the
supervision of an AWS Certified Welding Inspector.
4.1.1.8
The inspector shall inspect all materials, installations, and

workmanship to ensure conformance with all requirements of this
Practice and the contract documents.
4.1.1.9
The purchaser shall have the right to inspect all materials,

installations, and workmanship and shall have an unrestricted right
of access to the work areas.
4.1.1.10 The purchaser may reject any improper, inferior, defective, or

unsuitable materials, installations, and workmanship.
4.1.1.11 Rejected materials, installations, and workmanship shall be
repaired or replaced in accordance with the purchasers
instructions at no cost to the purchaser.
Page 4 of 10
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STS05130
February 2011
4.1.1.12 Inspection tools and tool calibration records for tools used shall be
maintained and available for examination by the purchaser.
4.1.2
Submittals
4.1.2.1
The following items shall be submitted to the engineer of record

for approval. Work shall not proceed without approval.
a. Safety program
b. Quality control program and inspection procedures
c. Welding Procedure Specification (WPS)
d. Procedure Qualification Records (PQR)
e. Welder(s) qualification records
f.
4.1.2.2
Assembly lift plan(s) as required by the purchaser or OSHA 29

CFR Part 1926 Subpart R
If requested, the following documents shall be submitted to the

purchaser for recording purposes:
a. Quality control inspections and test results
b. Calibration or recalibration performed on the tools or
equipment used during the work
4.1.3
Performance Requirements
4.1.3.1
Safety
1. A written safety program shall be provided that addresses the

safety measures that shall be used during steel erection work.
2. The safety program shall be in accordance with the
requirements of:
a. The contract documents
b. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Structural Steel
Buildings and Bridges (AISC 303)
c. Applicable portions of OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 and Part
1926
d. Any other applicable federal, state, or local requirements
4.1.3.2
Assembly Lift Plan
The erector shall be responsible for assuring that all preassemblies

that are not specifically shown or noted on the design drawings to
be preassembled before lifting shall maintain structural integrity
during lifting.
1. A written assembly lift plan, prepared by a professional
engineer, shall be provided for assemblies larger than 50 feet
(15 meters) in one direction, larger than 2,000 square feet (186
square meters) in the plan area, greater than 50 tons (45 metric
tons), or if required by the contract documents.
Page 5 of 10
PIP STS05130
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011
2. The assembly lift plan shall demonstrate that the proposed lift
shall be performed safely and that the assemblies being lifted
shall remain free from distortion or undue bending, and
maintain structural integrity during the lift.
3. The assembly lift plan shall contain detailed data on the extent
of the lifted assembly, its weights, the structural calculations
that prove structural stability of the assembled components
during lifting operations, verification of the capacity
capabilities for any cranes utilized in the lift, location and
positioning of the cranes, and a description of the rigging to be
utilized.
4. Review of the assembly lift plan by the purchaser does not
relieve the erectors responsibility for the safe erection and/or
lifting of any component, structural assembly, or any other
item.
4.2
Products and Materials

Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be in accordance with PIP STS05120.
4.3
Execution
4.3.1
4.3.2
Receiving, Inspection, and Storage

4.3.1.1
All materials shall be received, unloaded, stored, and otherwise

handled in a manner that prevents distortion, deterioration,
damage, or staining.
4.3.1.2
Materials shall be kept free of dirt, grease, and other foreign

matter.
4.3.1.3
Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be inspected

immediately after receipt to ensure that the materials are not
damaged, that all items on the packing list have been supplied, and
that all documentation has been received.
4.3.1.4
If any damage is discovered, or any parts, components, or

documentation are missing or otherwise defective, the occurrence
shall be immediately reported to the purchaser in writing.
Erection
4.3.2.1
Erection of structural steel shall be in accordance with:

a. The drawings and other contract documents
b. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Structural Steel Buildings
and Bridges (AISC 303)
c. OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 and Part 1926
d. Applicable state, municipal, or local regulations or codes
4.3.2.2
Page 6 of 10
Any circumstances discovered that affect progression,

performance, or completion of the work activities shall be
immediately reported to the purchaser in writing. These may
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STS05130
February 2011
include, but are not limited to, discrepancies between the

erection/shop drawings and the delivered steel members,
incorrectly fabricated steel members, or incomplete or
unacceptable work of other contractors affecting the work.
4.3.2.3
Any damage caused during erection shall be reported to the

purchaser in writing. Corrective measures shall be completed as
directed by the purchaser at no cost to the purchaser.
4.3.2.4
Erection of steel joists shall be in accordance with:

a. The requirements of the Steel Joist Institute (SJI)
b. The joist manufacturer
c. OSHA 29 CFR 1926 Subpart R
4.3.2.5
Temporary erection loads or permanent loads shall not be placed

on any incomplete portions of the structure being erected unless it
can be demonstrated by analysis that the contemplated action is
safe.
4.3.2.6
Loose timbers, metal sheeting, bolt buckles, tools, debris, and

temporary scaffolding shall be kept restrained or removed from
work areas.
4.3.2.7
Lifting of painted or galvanized structural members shall be

performed with a nonabrasive choker.
4.3.2.8
A daily record, by piece number, of all material erected shall be

maintained.
4.3.2.9
Before commencing work, the foundations and other connection

points shall be checked to confirm their location, orientation,
elevation, and condition.
4.3.2.10 Erection of steel deck shall be in accordance with:

a. The requirements of the Steel Deck Institute (SDI)
b. The deck manufacturer
c. OSHA 29 CFR 1926 Subpart R
4.3.2.11 Where connecting to existing structures, protect existing structure
from weather.
4.3.3
Structural Stability
4.3.3.1
During construction, the erector shall be responsible for

maintaining the structure in a stable condition; ensuring that no
part shall be overstressed during construction activities. It shall be
the erectors responsibility to specify, install and locate all
temporary bracing and/or guy cables to maintain the partassembled structure in a stable condition under a combination of
construction and wind loads. This responsibility shall also extend
to temporary bracing required to ensure safe and stable conditions
of partially completed structural assemblies.
Page 7 of 10
PIP STS05130
4.3.3.2
4.3.4
4.3.5
Page 8 of 10
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011
The structure shall be plumbed, leveled, and braced before any

final bolted or welded connections are made and before grouting of
base plates.
Setting Base Plates

4.3.4.1
The top of bearing surfaces and the bottom of base plates shall be
cleaned.
4.3.4.2
The column base plates shall be set and shimmed to correct

positions, elevations, and locations as shown on the erection
drawings.
4.3.4.3
Shims or wedges shall be provided where required.
4.3.4.4
If setting nuts are used, they shall be loosened before grouting.
4.3.4.5
Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, base plates

shall be grouted in accordance with PIP STS03600 or
PIP STS03601. Grout shall fill any anchor bolt sleeves and/or
shear key openings. Cut off exposed edges of grout at 45 degrees
along the edges of base plates after grout has acquired its initial
set.
4.3.4.6
If required in the contract documents, anchor bolts shall be

tightened to the specified tension.
4.3.4.7
Anchor bolts shall be fully tightened to the specified tension only

after the base plates have been grouted and the grout has
sufficiently set in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations.
Bolted Connections
4.3.5.1
If structural joints are made using high-strength bolt assemblies,

the materials, methods of installation, tension control, types of
wrenches to be used, and inspection methods shall be in
accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts and the contract documents.
4.3.5.2
If used, direct tension indicator (DTI) washers shall be installed

according to the washer manufacturers published specifications.
4.3.5.3
All bolts shall be as noted on the shop drawings, erection

drawings, or other contract documents.
4.3.5.4
Mechanically galvanized bolts and nuts shall not be intermixed

with hot-dip galvanized nuts and bolts.
4.3.5.5
If ASTM A307 bolt assemblies are used for connecting

appurtenances (i.e., handrail assemblies, pipe supports, gates, etc.)
to structural steel members, the bolts shall be tightened to a snugtight condition.
4.3.5.6
ASTM A490/A490M bolts and galvanized ASTM A325/A325M

bolts shall not be reused.
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STS05130
February 2011
4.3.5.7
4.3.6
4.3.7
4.3.8
Bolts that have been pretensioned shall be color coded, die

punched, or otherwise marked on the ends indicating that the bolts
have been properly tensioned and are ready for inspection.
Welded Connections
4.3.6.1
All welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1.
4.3.6.2
Unless approved otherwise by the purchaser, all welds shall be

continuous.
4.3.6.3
Minimum fillet weld size shall be AISC minimum 3/16 inch (5

mm), whichever is larger, for structural welds.
4.3.6.4
Seal welds shall be 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum fillet weld.
4.3.6.5
Welds to connection plates embedded in concrete shall be

deposited in a sequence that minimizes distortion of the
embedment to plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) of flat or true.
4.3.6.6
If the contract documents require welding to existing facilities that

were constructed before 1963 and/or using steel other than ASTM
A36, erector shall follow the welding procedure provided by the
engineer of record.
Correction of Errors
4.3.7.1
Fit-up bolts and drift pins shall not be used to bring improperly
fabricated members and parts into place (springing).
4.3.7.2
Drift pins shall not be driven with such a force as to damage

adjacent metal areas.
4.3.7.3
Holes in connections that misfit by more than 1/16 inch (1 mm)

shall be corrected as directed by the engineer of record.
4.3.7.4
Enlargement of holes shall be made only when approved by the

engineer of record, and made by reaming or drilling only. Flame
cutting, burning, gouging, chipping, or drift punching shall not be
permitted.
4.3.7.5
Unless approved by the engineer of record, packing, shimming,

filling, or wedging shall not be permitted to correct faulty work.
4.3.7.6
One filler plate up to 1/8-inch (3-mm) thickness may be used in

spaces between members to be bolted. The engineer of records
approval shall be required for filler plate requirements greater than
1/8 inch (3 mm).
Steel Joists
4.3.8.1
Field welding or bolting joists to supporting steel framework shall

be in accordance with the SJI specifications for the type of joists
used, the erection/shop drawings, and other contract documents.
4.3.8.2
Modifications or repairs to steel joists shall not be performed

without prior written approval of the engineer of record.
Page 9 of 10
PIP STS05130
4.3.8.3
4.3.9
COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011
Use of power-driven or powder-actuated fasteners in the diagonal

and bottom chord members of the joists shall not be permitted.
Floor Plate and Grating

4.3.9.1
All field-cut floor plate or grating openings requiring toe plate

protection or banding shall be installed in accordance with detail
STS05130-01.
4.3.9.2
The grating and floor plate shall be fastened in accordance with the
design drawings. A minimum of four fasteners per panel shall be
used.
4.3.10 Metal Decking for Floors and Roofs

4.3.10.1 Floor and roof deck sheets shall be installed in accordance with the
deck manufacturers installation instructions and the contract
documents.
4.3.10.2 All sags, deformations, holes, and other irregularities shall be
repaired.
4.3.10.3 If damage has occurred to shop-applied coatings on metal decking,
field touch-up shall be in accordance with the decking
manufacturers recommendations.
4.3.11 Shear Connectors
4.3.11.1 All shear stud attachments shall be welded in strict accordance
with the stud manufacturers recommendations for welding
procedure and welding equipment.
4.3.11.2 If two or more stud welding guns are operated from the same
power source, the guns shall be interlocked so that only one gun
can be operated at a time to ensure that the power source has fully
recovered from making one weld before another weld is started.
4.3.11.3 All ceramic insulators shall be removed from the base of the studs
after welding.
4.3.12 Coating Repairs
4.3.12.1 All erection damage to hot-dip galvanized coatings shall be
repaired in accordance with PIP STS05120.
4.3.12.2 All erection damage to shop-applied paint coatings shall be
repaired in accordance with the purchasers coating specification.
4.3.12.3 All galvanized bolt assemblies tightened against shop-applied paint
shall be painted.
4.3.12.4 Where twist-off bolt assemblies are used, ends of bolts shall be
coated to match the steel coating system.
Page 10 of 10
PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES
STS05130-01
FABRICATION/INSTALLATION DETAILS
JAN 2011
PAGE1
FIELD LOCATED AND FIELD
OF
FABRICATED GRATING OPENINGS
NON BANDED OPENING,

OPENING SHALL BE BANDED IF
MORE THAN THREE BEARING
BARS OR 10% OF PANEL WIDTH
WHERE OPENINGS ARE NOT
ARE CUT. SEE BANDED
BANDED, BEARING BARS SHALL
OPENING DETAIL BELOW.
BE CUT TO PRESENT A NEAT,

FINISHED APPEARANCE.
PIPE &
OPENING
OPENING DIA.= PIPE,

INSULATION, OR CONDUIT
O.D.+ 1 (25)
PIPE &
GRATING
OPENING
OPENING DIA.= PIPE,

INSULATION, OR CONDUIT
O.D.+ 4 (100)
1/4" x 5" (6x125)TOE PL
BANDED OPENING
PIPE &
OPENING
PLAN
1/8 (3)
1/4" x 5" PL OR CARBON STEEL
1/8 (3)
EACH
BEARING BAR
1/8
GRATING
(3)
(100)
PIPE w/ 1/4" MINIMUM WALL THICK
SECTION A-A
FIELD LOCATED AND FIELD FABRICATED OPENINGS

(FOR FIELD LOCATED OPENINGS > 12 (300) DIA. OR RECTANGUALR OPENINGS, CONTACT DESIGN ENGINEER)
DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN FEET AND/OR INCHES. METRIC DIMENSIONS

IN PARENTHESES ARE IN MILLIMETERS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
April 2002

Structural
PIP STF05511
Fixed Industrial Stairs

industrial users, contractors, or standards organizations. By harmonizing these
technical requirements into a single set of Practices, administrative, application, and
engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. While
this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users,
individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take
precedence over this Practice. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and
particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering
situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. The
use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of
preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. Other brands having the
same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. All
Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and
regulations including OSHA requirements. To the extent these Practices or guidelines
should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations, such laws or
regulations must be followed. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or
acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice.
This Practice is subject to revision at any time by the responsible Function Team and
will be reviewed every 5 years. This Practice will be revised, reaffirmed, or withdrawn.
Information on whether this Practice has been revised may be found at www.pip.org.
Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The
University of Texas at Austin, 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500), Austin,
Texas 78759. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice
for their internal use. Changes, overlays, addenda, or modifications of any
kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written
authorization of PIP.
PIP will not consider requests for interpretations (inquiries) for this Practice.
April 2002

Structural
PIP STF05511
Table of Contents
1. Introduction .................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................. 2

1.2 Scope................................................. 2
2. References ................................... 2
2.1 Process Industry Practices ................ 2

2.2 Industry Codes and Standards .......... 2
2.3 Government Regulations ................... 3
3. Design ......................................... 3
List of Details
Plan at Landing .......................................... 5

Section A-A ................................................ 6
Section B-B ................................................ 6
Section C-C................................................ 7
Detail 1....................................................... 8
Detail 2....................................................... 8
Detail 3....................................................... 9
Detail 4....................................................... 9
Section D-D.............................................. 10
Section E-E .............................................. 10
Detail 5..................................................... 11
Detail 6..................................................... 11
Page 1 of 11
PIP STF05511
1.
April 2002
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This Practice provides the fabricator and erector with a standard fixed industrial stair
design to be used in process industry facilities. This Practice also provides process
industry companies with design guide information to be used in specifying and
designing fixed industrial stairs.
1.2
Scope
This Practice contains the design details for fabrication and installation of typical
OSHA-regulated stairs for open structures and miscellaneous platforms for regular
operational access/egress. Details comply with NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code for
Industrial Occupancies.
These details are to be issued to fabricators supplying these stairs and to the erectors
for use in installation.
Any conflicts or inconsistencies between this Practice and the design drawings or
other contract documents shall be brought to the attention of the buyer for resolution.
2.
References
Applicable requirements in the following PIP Practices, codes, and standards shall be
considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract
award shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles will be used herein when
appropriate.
2.1

PIP STS05120 - Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel
Specification
PIP STS05130 - Erection of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification
PIP STF05520 - Pipe Railing for Walking and Working Surface Details
PIP STF05521 - Angle Railing for Walking and Working Surface Details
2.2

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Safety
Engineers (ASSE)
ANSI A1264.1 - Safety Requirements for Workplace Floor and Wall
Openings, Stairs, and Railing Systems
American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded
Standard Fasteners
Page 2 of 11
PIP STF05511
April 2002
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
2.3
Federal standards and instructions of the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration and any additional requirements by state or local agencies that have
jurisdiction where the stairs are to be installed shall apply. The user should
determine whether local codes exist that should be applied to this Practice.
(OSHA)
OSHA 29 CFR 1910, Subpart D - Walking-Working Surfaces
3.
Design
3.1
The project design drawings and data sheets specify the location, orientation, and
arrangement of stairs for regular operational use, special fabrication details, and any
changes to the requirements of this Practice.
3.2
All structural material shall be steel and shall comply with PIP STS05120 unless
noted otherwise.
3.3
All welds shall be smooth, continuous, and sealed. Fabrication shall comply with
PIP STS05120.
3.4
Stair design is based on a moving 1000-lbs (4.5-kN) concentrated live load applied to
the stair stringers or a uniform load of 100 psf (4.8 kPa) applied to the stair
assembly. Stair treads shall resist a 300-lbs (1.33-kN) concentrated load applied at
mid span.
3.5
Maximum height between landings shall not exceed 12.0 feet (3.7 m).
3.6
Stair width shall be 30 inches (75 cm) unless noted otherwise. The engineer shall
check the stair width against NFPA 101 requirements according to total occupant
load served by the stairway. NFPA 101 has the following requirements:
3.7
For 20 people or fewer, the minimum width shall be 22 inches (56 cm).
For 21 to 49 people, the minimum width shall be 36 inches (91 cm).
For 50 or more people, the minimum width shall be 44 inches (112 cm).
Stairs shall be installed at angles to the horizontal plane of between 30 deg. and
42 deg.
Page 3 of 11
PIP STF05511
3.8
April 2002
Minimum tread depth shall be 10 inches (25.4 cm). Maximum riser height shall be
9 inches (22.9 cm). Some rise/tread combinations within the permissible range are as
follows:
Angle to
Horizontal (deg.)
30.6
32.5*
35.5
38.7
40.4
42
Rise
(inches [cm])
6.5 (16.5)
7
(17.8)
7.5 (19.1)
8
(20.3)
8.5 (21.6)
9
(22.9)
Tread Depth
(inches [cm])
11
(27.9)
11
(27.9)
10.5 (26.7)
10
(25.4)
10
(25.4)
10
(25.4)
Nominal
Tread Width
(inches [cm])
12 (30.5)
12 (30.5)
12 (30.5)
11 (27.9)
11 (27.9)
11 (27.9)
*A minimum tread depth of 11 inches (27.9 cm) and a maximum rise height of 7 inches
(17.8 cm) shall be used where stairs service areas other than industrial equipment access or
where more than 20 people will use the stairs as a means of egress.
3.9
Stair railing shall comply with the requirements of PIP STF05520 or PIP STF05521.
3.10
Stair assemblies shall be coated after fabrication in accordance with the design
drawings and the specifications governing the project. Galvanizing (when required)
shall be done after fabrication and in accordance with PIP STS05120.
3.11
Erection of stairs shall comply with PIP STS05130.
Page 4 of 11
COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

Civil
PIP CVS02100
Site Preparation, Excavation,
and Backfill Specification


PRINTING HISTORY
March 1996
Issued
May 2001
Complete Revision
April 2007
Complete Revision
COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

Civil
PIP CVS02100
Site Preparation, Excavation,
and Backfill Specification
Table of Contents
1. Introduction................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................. 2
1.2 Scope................................................. 2
2. References .................................. 2
2.3 Government Regulations................... 3
3. Definitions ................................... 3
4. Requirements.............................. 4
4.1 General .............................................. 4
4.2 Materials Fill and Backfill ................ 9
4.3. Construction..................................... 10
Page 1 of 17
PIP CVS02100
Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification
1.
COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This Practice provides the requirements for site preparation, excavation, and backfill.
1.2
Scope
This Practice describes the requirements for excavation, placement, inspection, and
management of earthen and organic materials during the site preparation, excavation, and
backfill phase of a construction project.
This document is a complete revision of PIP CVS02100, and therefore revision markings
are not provided.
2.
References
Applicable parts of the following Practices, industry codes and standards, and references shall be
considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract award
shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles are used herein where appropriate.
2.1

PIP CVS02700 - Underground Gravity Sewers Specification
2.2

American Concrete Institute (ACI)
ACI 229R - Controlled Low-Strength Materials
ASTM International
ASTM C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates
ASTM D422 - Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils
ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics
of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3))
ASTM D1140 - Standard Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils Finer Than
the No. 200 (75-m) Sieve
ASTM D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place
by the Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2700 kN-m/m3))
ASTM D2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place
by the Rubber Balloon Method
ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in
Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
ASTM D2937 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the DriveCylinder Method
Page 2 of 17
COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007
PIP CVS02100
ASTM D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies

Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering
Design and Construction
ASTM D4253 - Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit
Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table
ASTM D4254 - Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit
Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density
ASTM D4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and
Plasticity Index of Soils
2.3
U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
OSHA 29 CFR 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA)
National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit (or a permit
issued by a state agency approved by the EPA as a substitute for the NPDES
permit)
National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) General Permit for
Construction Activity
Storm Water Management for Construction Activities
3.
Definitions
responsibility for the engineering design, quality, and performance of the civil works, structure,
foundations, materials, and appurtenances described in the contract documents. The engineer of
record shall be licensed as defined by the laws of the locality in which the work is to be
constructed, and be qualified to practice in the specialty discipline required for the work
described in the contract documents.
contract documents: Any and all documents, including design drawings, that purchaser or
engineer of record has transmitted or otherwise communicated, either by incorporation or by
reference, and made part of the legal contract agreement or purchase order between the purchaser
and the constructor
owner: The party who has authority through ownership, lease, or other legal agreement over the
project site
purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the constructor. The purchaser may be the
constructor: The party responsible for supplying the materials, equipment, tools, supervision, and
labor for performing site preparation, excavation, fill, and backfill in accordance with the contract
documents. Unless otherwise noted, the term constructor shall apply also to the constructors
subcontractor(s) and vendor(s).
Page 3 of 17
PIP CVS02100
4.
COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007
Requirements
4.1
General
4.1.1
Quality Control
4.1.1.1 General
1. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, a quality

control (QC) program shall be instituted that will verify or ensure
that the work performed under the contract meets the requirements of
this Practice and the contract documents.
2. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, as part of the
QC program, a qualified independent inspection/testing firm in
accordance with the criteria of ASTM D3740 shall be retained to
perform the work identified in Sections 4.1.1.3 and 4.1.1.4 of this
Practice. The name and qualifications of the proposed
inspection/testing firm(s) shall be submitted along with the
constructors proposal for purchasers approval.
3. During construction, the purchaser shall have access to all the
constructors facilities and records for the purpose of conducting
performance inspection/audits.
4. During an audit by the purchaser, any inspection and test reports,
and/or engineering analyses and calculations associated with the
scope of work shall be provided upon request.
4.1.1.2 Surveying
1. After starting from horizontal and vertical control furnished by the

purchaser, all lines and grades shall be provided by the constructor
for constructors operations.
2. The constructor shall be solely responsible for the accuracy of survey
work performed.
4.1.1.3 Inspection
1. The inspection/testing firm required in Section 4.1.1.1(2) shall be

responsible for QC inspection and testing to ensure that the work
meets the requirements of this Practice and the contract documents.
2. The inspection/testing firm shall perform tests as outlined in Section
4.1.1.4 or as otherwise specified in the contract documents.
3. If the purchaser furnishes the testing and inspection, the constructor
shall not be relieved of the responsibility to meet all requirements of
this Practice and the contract documents.
4. If completed work is not in accordance with this Practice, the
constructor shall be responsible for repairing or reconstructing the
deficiencies to meet this Practice and the other contract documents.
Page 4 of 17
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP CVS02100
April 2007
4.1.1.4 Testing
1. Tests of gradation, plasticity, density, and moisture content shall be

performed for each type of fill material. These tests shall include the
following:
a. One standard sieve analysis in accordance with ASTM C136,
ASTM D422, or ASTM D1140
b. One liquid and plastic limit determination in accordance with
ASTM D4318
c. One Modified Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D1557 or
one Standard Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D698
2. For granular soils that do not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density
relationship, index density, unit weight, and relative density shall be
determined in accordance with ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254.
3. If the type or the source of fill material changes, the control tests
shall be performed again with the new material.
4. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the following
in-place dry density and moisture content testing (i.e., field density
testing) on compacted fill shall be performed using one of the
following methods:
a. Sand-cone method in accordance with ASTM D1556
b. Nuclear method in accordance with ASTM D2922
c. Rubber balloon method in accordance with ASTM D2167
d. Drive-cylinder method in accordance with ASTM D2937
5. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the field
density testing shall be performed at the following frequencies:
a. Structural fill under foundations and building slabs one test
every 1000 square feet (90 square m) of each lift
b. Structural fill under roadways, railroads, area pavement and
parking areas one test every 2000 square feet (180 square m) of
each lift
c. Road base and sub-base one test every 2000 square feet
(180 square m) of each lift
d. Backfill of trenches (for utility lines or foundations) one test
for every 50 linear feet (15 m) of each lift
e. General fill one test every 5000 square feet (460 square m) of
each lift
6. As a minimum, one in-place moisture content and one density test
shall be performed on every lift of fill.
7. Until the required dry density has been achieved, further placement
of fill shall not be permitted.
Page 5 of 17
PIP CVS02100
COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007
8. The number of field density tests shall be increased if a visual

inspection determines that the moisture content is not uniform or if
the compacting effort is variable and not considered sufficient to
attain the specified dry density.
9. The engineer of record may approve a decrease in the number of
tests once a compaction procedure has met project requirements.
4.1.1.5 Protection
1. Temporary fences, guardrails, barricades, lights, and other protective

measures required for the safety of personnel and the premises shall
be installed and maintained in good condition.
2. All reference points (e.g., property markers, benchmarks, etc.) shall
be carefully maintained during excavation, backfilling, compaction,
and earthwork.
3. If a reference point is damaged during performance of the work, the
reference point shall be repaired or replaced at the constructors
expense in accordance with the requirements of the owner.
4. Unless otherwise specified, before earthwork begins, the purchaser
shall locate and mark all known utilities within the project limits or
note them in the contract documents.
5. If other utility locations become evident as earthwork progresses,
work stoppages may be required until utilities are identified and until
the owner provides specific direction.
6. During earthwork, all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect
and preserve utilities scheduled to remain. If preservation and
protection are impractical, temporary service lines shall be installed
with owners approval.
7. Bracing and shoring shall be used to protect excavations adjacent to
existing underground installations (e.g., foundations, piping
manholes, electrical, and duct banks) and personnel engaged in
excavation activities during construction.
8. Unless otherwise shown in the contract documents, excavation under
foundations shall not be permitted.
9. The constructor shall be responsible for avoiding damage to and
preserving trees, shrubs, and all other vegetation in the areas beyond
the designated excavation area.
10. Any damage to structure, utility lines, or graded areas caused by
erosion shall be repaired to the original condition at no cost to the
purchaser. This includes areas that are seeded until such time that the
vegetation prevents erosion.
11. During the performance of the work, the constructor shall take
proper and efficient measures to reduce dust and to prevent dust from
harming individuals and damaging adjacent properties and
equipment.
Page 6 of 17
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP CVS02100
April 2007
4.1.2
Submittals
4.1.2.1 The testing/inspection firm shall provide the following submittals to the
purchaser and constructor:
a. A statement attesting that the constructors work is in accordance
with the requirements of this Practice and the contract documents
b. Informal daily pass or fail reports
c. Formal weekly reports including all test logs and comments. These
formal reports shall include density and moisture content test logs,
indicating location of tests by coordinates and elevation and any
appropriate comments.
d. At earthwork completion, all density and moisture content test logs
and comments compiled and submitted for permanent project records
e. Sources and test results of all borrow materials used for fill
4.1.2.2 The constructor shall provide the following submittals to the purchaser.
Data shall include horizontal dimensions, elevations, size, and slope
gradients, as appropriate for the utility and as required by the purchaser:
a. Accurately recorded as-built locations of project-installed
underground utilities
b. Tie-in points/interferences encountered during project construction
4.1.2.3 The constructor shall notify the purchaser, in writing, not less than five
(5) days in advance of any blasting operation. Written approval shall be
furnished by the purchaser before proceeding with intended blasting
operations.
4.1.2.4 If excavation bracing (i.e., shoring and sheeting) is required, the
constructor shall provide the following submittals to the purchaser:
a. Plans, sketches, and/or details
b. Supporting calculations prepared by a registered professional
engineer
c. Description of the materials and shoring system to be used
d. Indication of whether any components will remain after filling or
backfilling
e. Indication of the sequence and method of installation
4.1.2.5 If dewatering of an excavation is required, the constructor shall submit
proposed methods and details to the purchaser for review before
beginning excavation.
4.1.2.6 If required by an authority having jurisdiction, the constructor shall
provide a soil erosion control plan and/or a storm water runoff pollution
prevention plan. The plans shall be provided to the purchaser and the
appropriate authority.
Page 7 of 17
PIP CVS02100
4.1.3
COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007
Environmental
4.1.3.1 Contaminated Soils
1. Known contaminated soils within the construction limits shall be

managed in accordance with a contaminated soil management plan
provided by the owner before the start of excavation.
2. If unexpected soil contamination is encountered during the work, the
work shall be stopped and the owner shall be notified immediately.
4.1.3.2 Erosion/Sediment Control
1. All procedures and work shall be in accordance with local, state, and
federal regulations (e.g., terms of the NPDES General Permit for
Construction Activity, other USEPA documents such as Storm Water
Management for Construction Activities, or specific project permit).
2. All areas shall be maintained using temporary erosion and sediment
control measures during construction until the constructor is relieved
by the purchaser or until permanent measures are completed and
functioning in a satisfactory manner.
4.1.4
Safety
4.1.4.1 General
1. All work shall be in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926 and any
other applicable federal, state, and local codes and with any safety
requirements of the owner.
2. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, a work permit
shall be obtained from the owner before performing any earthwork.
4.1.4.2 Rock Blasting
1. If rock blasting is required, a written rock-blasting safety plan shall

be submitted for owners approval.
2. Permits for blasting shall be obtained from authorities having
jurisdiction. Permits shall be provided at no additional cost to the
purchaser.
3. The constructor shall submit copies of blasting permits to the
purchaser and shall obtain written permission from the owner before
explosives are brought to the site or before drilling is started.
4. Explosives shall be stored, handled, and used in accordance with
local regulations and with the owners safety practices. These criteria
shall be addressed in the rock-blasting safety plan.
5. The constructor shall be responsible for all blasting operations.
4.1.5
Clean Up
4.1.5.1 Soil that is spilled or washed onto paved areas or streets shall be
removed daily from the surface.
Page 8 of 17
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP CVS02100
April 2007
4.1.5.2 Soil that is spilled or washed into drains, pipes, gutters, or ditches or onto
adjacent property shall be removed daily. Constructor shall provide
measures to prevent recurrence.
4.2
Materials Fill and Backfill

4.2.1
Basic Requirements
4.2.1.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, fill and backfill
materials shall be from either on-site excavation, designated borrow
areas, or off-site sources in accordance with the requirements of Sections
4.2.1.3, 4.2.2, and 4.2.3.
4.2.1.2 All borrow material and all supply sources shall be approved by the
owner.
4.2.1.3 Fill and backfill shall contain no rocks or stones larger than 3 inches
(75 mm) and shall be free of frozen lumps, organic matter, trash, chunks
of highly plastic clay, snow, ice, contamination, or other unsatisfactory
material.
4.2.1.4 Liquid limit and plastic limit shall be determined in accordance with
ASTM D4318.
4.2.2
General Fill Material

Fill and backfill to be used as general fill shall be material capable of being
compacted to the requirements of 4.3.7.7 (2).
4.2.3
Structural Fill Material

4.2.3.1 Fill and backfill to be used as structural fill shall be gravel, sand, clay,
or silt, or a mixture of these constituents.
4.2.3.2 Except for sands or gravels that exhibit no plasticity characteristics,
the structural fill material shall be in accordance with the following
requirements:
a. Liquid limit 40 maximum
b. Plasticity index 6 through 20
4.2.4
Controlled Low-Strength Material (CLSM)

4.2.4.1 CLSM or flowable fill may be substituted for either structural fill
material or general fill material, where approved by the engineer of
record.
4.2.4.2 Unless otherwise specified, CLSM shall be in accordance with
ACI 229R.
4.2.4.3 The mix design shall be proportioned to produce a 28-day compressive
strength between 100 and 200 psi (0.69 and 1.38 Mpa), pretested using
the actual raw materials, and approved by the engineer of record before
use on the project.
4.2.4.4 Unless otherwise specified, simple visual inspection only shall be
required for field testing.
Page 9 of 17
PIP CVS02100
4.3.
COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007
Construction
4.3.1
Site Preparation
4.3.1.1 Clearing and Grubbing
1. Clearing and grubbing shall consist of the removal and satisfactory

disposal of trees, stumps, roots, vegetation, logs, rubbish, and other
unsuitable material.
2. Except for trees and shrubs in areas designated in the contract
documents for preservation, areas designated for clearing and
grubbing shall be cleared.
3. During construction operations, trees, shrubs, and other landscape
features specifically designated in the contract documents for
preservation shall be carefully protected from abuse, marring, or
damage.
4. Trees and other vegetation outside the construction area shall not be
damaged in any manner.
5. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, trees, stumps,
and other vegetation in the areas designated for clearing and
grubbing shall be removed to the bottom of their root zone.
6. Depressions made by clearing and grubbing operations shall be filled
with suitable material and compacted to conform to the adjacent
surface of the original ground.
4.3.1.2 Stripping
1. Stripping shall consist of the excavation, removal, and satisfactory

disposal of all topsoil and soil containing organic material. Such
stripped materials shall not be used as structural fill material under
any circumstances.
2. Before any soil is removed, the area shall be cleared of all debris.
3. Unless otherwise directed by the engineer of record, topsoil shall be
removed to full-depth or as specified in the contract documents.
4. Reusable materials shall be stockpiled as necessary for the
constructors operations in areas approved by the purchaser.
4.3.1.3 Rough Grading
1. General area grading shall be completed to within a tolerance of

+0.20 feet (+60 mm) of the elevations shown in the contract
documents, but shall not be uniformly high or low.
2. Roads, parking areas, and building areas shall be excavated or filled
to subgrade elevations shown in the contract documents.
3. Rock encountered through cut sections shall be excavated to 1 foot
(0.3 m) below subgrade elevation and shall be backfilled to the
proper elevation.
Page 10 of 17
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP CVS02100
April 2007
4. If unsatisfactory field conditions caused by rain, inclement weather,

or other circumstances prevent satisfactory performance of the work,
earthwork operations shall be suspended after consultation with the
engineer of record and the purchaser.
5. After completing grading operations and before grassing operations,
the graded areas that are not to be further improved shall be overlaid
with topsoil of a compacted thickness of 4 inches (100 mm)
minimum.
4.3.2
Excavation
4.3.2.1 Structural Excavation
1. Structural excavation shall include excavations for footings, grade

beams, pits, basements, retaining walls, manholes, catch basins, etc.
2. Structural excavation shall be performed in accordance with the
contract documents to the dimensions, grades, and elevations as
noted and as required for formwork.
3. If soft, compressible soil is encountered at footing grades as shown
in the contract documents, the soft soil shall be removed and
replaced with structural fill.
4. Over-excavation at footings may be backfilled with lean concrete or
CLSM in accordance with Section 4.2.4. Lean concrete shall have a
mix design proportioned to achieve a minimum 28-day compressive
strength 1,000 psi (6.9MPa).
4.3.2.2 Earthen Structures
1. Earthen structures include permanent work items such as ponds,

canals, ditches, etc.
2. Excavation for earthen structures shall be made to the lines, grades,
and cross sections in accordance with the contract documents.
3. Side slopes of excavations shall be cut true and straight and shall be
graded to the proper cross section.
4. Unstable soil in the slopes shall be removed, and the slopes properly
prepared.
5. The bottoms of excavations shall be graded to the elevations and
configurations in accordance with the contract documents.
6. Over-excavation shall be backfilled with suitable material and
compacted in accordance with Section 4.3.7.7.
4.3.2.3 Trenching
Trenching for underground pipe, conduits, and duct banks shall be in

accordance with PIP CVS02700.
4.3.2.4 Rock Excavation
1. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, rock

excavation shall consist of excavation of boulders or pieces of
Page 11 of 17
PIP CVS02100
COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007
detached rock measuring 1 cubic yard (0.76 cubic m) in volume or

greater, or rock in ledges, bedded deposits, and conglomerate
deposits so firmly cemented that they present all the characteristics
of solid rock, which cannot be excavated with heavy equipment.
All other excavation shall be earth excavation.
2. If blasting is not permitted, rock shall be excavated with mechanical
rippers, mechanical breakers, or mechanical drills with nonexplosive demolition agents.
3. If blasting is permitted and required, blasting operations shall be
managed in accordance with the rock-blasting plan (see Section
4.1.4.2).
4. If unexpected hard rock is encountered during the work, the work
shall be stopped until a blasting plan is developed or until the owner
provides specific direction.
4.3.2.5 Excavation Safety
It is mandated by federal regulation Volume 54, No. 209 (October 1989),

the United States Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) , Construction Standards for Excavations,
29 CFR, part 1926, Subpart P that excavations, whether they be utility
trenches, basement excavation or footing excavations, be constructed in
accordance with the OSHA guidelines.
The constructor is solely responsible for designing and constructing
stable, temporary excavations and should shore, slope, or bench the sides
of the excavations as required to maintain stability of both the excavation
sides and bottom. The constructors competent representative, as
defined in 29 CFR Part 1926.650 to 652 should evaluate the soil exposed
in the excavations as part of the constructors safety procedures. In no
case should slope height, slope inclination, or excavation depth,
including utility trench excavation depth, exceed those specified in local,
state, and federal safety regulations.
4.3.3
Stockpiling
4.3.3.1 Material shall be stockpiled as specified by the owner.
4.3.3.2 Stockpiles shall be placed, graded, and shaped for proper drainage.
4.3.3.3 Storage or stockpiling of material shall not be permitted on a completed
subgrade.
4.3.3.4 Stockpiling of contaminated soils shall be in accordance with an owner
approved contaminated soils management plan or as specified by the
owner.
4.3.4
Drainage
4.3.4.1 Drainage of cuts, excavations, fills, stockpiles, spoil areas, surcharge
embankments, and borrow areas shall be maintained at all times to
prevent ponding of surface water following rainfall by providing
Page 12 of 17
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP CVS02100
April 2007
temporary ditches, swales, culverts, and/or pumping systems as required

in each respective site area.
4.3.4.2 Temporary drainage facilities shall be removed at the completion of the
project or as specified by the owner.
4.3.4.3 A surface seal (e.g., sealing with a smooth drum roller) shall be
performed as required to prevent saturation during wet weather or
temporary shutdown of operations.
4.3.4.4 Soil that becomes saturated shall be removed completely or as specified
by the engineer of record.
4.3.4.5 Saturated soil shall be disposed of as specified by owner or shall be
reconditioned to be in accordance with this Practice.
4.3.5
Disposal of Excess and Waste Materials

4.3.5.1 If practicable, all suitable materials removed by excavation shall be used
as fill.
4.3.5.2 Excavated material in excess of that required for normal embankment
construction shall be stockpiled within the construction limits or shall be
placed in a designated spoil area beyond the construction limits as
specified by the owner.
4.3.5.3 Material unsuitable for fill and debris removed by clearing, grubbing,
stripping, and excavation shall be removed to a disposal area approved
by the owner.
4.3.5.4 Burning of combustible materials shall be done only with the written
approval of the owner and only if permitted by local authorities.
4.3.6
Preparation of Areas for Fill or Loading

4.3.6.1 Areas to receive fill, foundations, or pavement or areas to be used in the
future to support structural loads as shown on the contract drawings shall
be free of roots, trash, snow, ice, or other foreign material and shall not
be frozen.
4.3.6.2 Areas shall be prepared for fill or loading as follows:
a. Site shall be drained so that it is free of standing water.
b. Proof-rolled crossing the area repeatedly and methodically with a
heavy (10-ton (9 tonne) minimum weight) rubber-tired roller or a
loaded dump truck
Comment:
In enclosed areas or tightly spaced areas, where access

by heavy equipment is limited and where the subgrade
soils have previously been subjected to loads from
existing structures and the structures have performed
satisfactorily, hand operated rollers or plate compactors
may be used instead upon approval by the owner.
c. Soft soils removed and replaced with structural fill

d. Top 6 inches (150 mm) scarified and recompacted
Page 13 of 17
PIP CVS02100
COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007
Comment: The engineer of record may require, in the contract

documents, over-excavation, moisture conditioning,
and recompacting of the upper soils and chemical
stabilization or other methods of improving soil
conditions before the placement of fill or other loading.
4.3.6.3 The density of the top 6 inches (150 mm) in areas for fill and loading
shall not be less than 90% of the maximum Modified Proctor density in
accordance with ASTM D1557, or 95% of the maximum Standard
Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D698.
Comment: The 90% Modified Proctor equivalent to 95% Standard
Proctor is a conservative value as a study of 53 soils
showed an average of 87% Modified Proctor was
equivalent to 95% Standard Proctor.
4.3.6.4 The density of the top 6 inches (150 mm) in areas of fill and loading,
where granular soils exist that do not exhibit well-defined moisturedensity relationship, shall be compacted to at least 80% relative density
in accordance with ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254.
Comment: Clean granular soils with less than 10% fines may exhibit
such behavior. It is important to use both the wet and dry
methods of determining Maximum density. Use of the
equations in the ASTMs is required. In some instances,
geotechnical engineers will use both Relative Density and
Proctor densities methods to choose the highest density for
proper compaction.
4.3.7
Filling and Backfilling

4.3.7.1 Unless otherwise shown in the contract documents, the following areas
shall be filled or backfilled using structural fill:
a. Beneath or immediately surrounding foundations
b. Beneath slabs, roadways, railroads, area pavement, and parking areas
c. Where otherwise indicated on design drawings
4.3.7.2 All other areas not designated above may be filled or backfilled using
general fill.
4.3.7.3 Before placement of fill or backfill, the area to receive the fill shall be
prepared in accordance with Section 4.3.6.
Comment: On sloping sites, the engineer of record may also require,
in the contract documents, the excavation of natural soils
to key the new fill into the underlying soil.
4.3.7.4 Compacting shall begin only after the fill or backfill has been properly
placed and after the material to be compacted is at the proper moisture
content.
4.3.7.5 Unless otherwise noted in the contract documents, material shall be
placed in loose lifts not exceeding the following criteria, provided that
the specified compaction is achieved for the full depth:
Page 14 of 17
COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007
PIP CVS02100
1. Structural fill shall be placed in lifts of 8 inches (200 mm) maximum

in loose depth.
2. General fill shall be placed in lifts of 12 inches (300 mm) maximum
in loose depth.
3. Unless otherwise approved by the purchaser, for hand-operated
compaction equipment, general and structural fill materials shall be
placed in lifts of 4 inches (100 mm) maximum in loose depth.
4.3.7.6 Compaction shall be performed with equipment compatible with soil
type.
4.3.7.7 Unless otherwise noted in the contract documents, fill and backfill layers
shall be uniformly compacted in accordance with the following density
and moisture content requirements:
1. Structural Fill Compaction Densities
a. Structural fill shall be compacted to at least 90% of the
maximum Modified Proctor density in accordance with ASTM
D1557, or 95% of the maximum Standard Proctor density in
accordance with ASTM D698.
b. Granular soil used as structural fill that does not exhibit welldefined moisture-density relationship shall be compacted to at
least 80% relative density in accordance with ASTM D4253 and
ASTM D4254.
2. General Fill Compaction Densities
a. General fill shall be compacted to at least 85% of the maximum
Modified Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D1557, or
90% of the maximum Standard Proctor density in accordance
with ASTM D698.
b. Granular soil used as general fill that does not exhibit well-defined
moisture-density relationship shall be compacted to 70% to 75%
relative density in accordance with ASTM D4253 and ASTM
D4254.
3. The moisture content of the material being compacted shall be within
+3% of the optimum moisture content in accordance with the
applicable ASTM D1557 or ASTM D698. Fill materials shall be
conditioned as necessary to achieve the required moisture content,
without additional cost to the purchaser.
4. If approved by the engineer of record in writing, chemical
stabilization may be used if modification of liquid limit and plasticity
index are necessary to obtain satisfactory compaction.
4.3.7.8 Compaction by water jetting or flooding shall not be permitted.
4.3.7.9 Fill and backfill adjacent to structures such as retaining walls, pits, and
basements shall not be compacted with heavy equipment, but with handoperated equipment to a distance of 4 feet (1.2 m) or greater beyond the
sides of the structures.
Page 15 of 17
PIP CVS02100
COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007
4.3.7.10 To prevent unnecessary eccentric loading on a structure or foundation,

every effort shall be made to place backfill materials symmetrically and
in uniform layers.
4.3.7.11 Unless otherwise permitted in writing by the purchaser, backfill around
or over cast-in-place concrete shall not be permitted until the concrete
has attained 75% of its specified strength.
4.3.7.12 Compacted surfaces of fill and backfill shall be finish-graded to the
cross sections, lines, grades, and elevations as specified in the contract
documents.
4.3.8
Installation of Base Course

4.3.8.1 The base course for roads, parking areas, and other areas to be surfaced
shall be prepared in accordance with this section.
4.3.8.2 The existing ground to the toe of fill slopes shall be cleared, grubbed,
and stripped in accordance with Sections 4.3.1.1 and 4.3.1.2.
4.3.8.3 Excavation of areas in cut shall be in accordance with Section 4.3.2.
4.3.8.4 Backfill of base course shall comply with Sections 4.3.6 and 4.3.7, with
the following exception. Compaction shall be to at least 95% of the
maximum Modified Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D1557,
or 100% of the maximum Standard Proctor density in accordance with
ASTM D698. If base course materials are clean granular material and
Relative Density is the standard, compact to 85% of relative density.
4.3.8.5 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, base course
material shall be structural fill material in accordance with Section 4.2.
4.3.8.6 If specified by the contract documents, geosynthetic materials shall be
installed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and/or as
detailed in the contract documents.
4.3.8.7 The compacted base course shall be shaped to a smooth and even
surface, free of voids, and to the required elevation.
4.3.8.8 Any deviation greater than inch (12 mm) in cross section or inch
(12 mm) in length as measured with a 16-foot (5-m) straightedge shall be
corrected by loosening, adding, or removing material and then reshaping
and recompacting by sprinkling and rolling.
4.3.8.9 The base course shall be maintained in a smooth, true-to-grade,
compacted condition until it is covered by other construction.
4.3.9
Dewatering
4.3.9.1 All dewatering methods and disposal of water shall be approved by the
engineer of record.
4.3.9.2 If required for construction, before excavation, an approved dewatering
system shall be installed and operated when necessary to lower the
groundwater.
4.3.9.3 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the design of the
dewatering system shall be the responsibility of the constructor.
Page 16 of 17
COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007
PIP CVS02100
4.3.9.4 Constructor shall be responsible for any effects of dewatering on

adjacent facilities.
4.3.9.5 Surface water shall be prevented from flowing into excavations by
installing ditches, trenches, protective swales, pumps, or other purchaser
approved measures.
4.3.9.6 All diverted and pumped water shall flow to existing drainage.
4.3.9.7 Excavations for foundations and other underground installations shall not
be used as temporary drainage ditches.
4.3.9.8 At all times during construction, ample means with which to remove and
properly dispose of all water from every natural source entering the
excavation shall be provided and maintained.
4.3.9.9 Any water to be discharged that is potentially suspect of quality shall be
tested for water quality to determine whether the water can be disposed
of through the natural waterways or whether it shall be contained for
treatment.
Page 17 of 17
COMPLETE REVISION
November 2004

Civil
PIP CVI02720
Sewer Details

PRINTING HISTORY
April 1999
Issued
November 2004
Complete Revision
COMPLETE REVISION
November 2004

Civil
PIP CVI02720
Sewer Details
Table of Contents
1. Introduction .................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................. 2

1.2 Scope................................................. 2
2. References ................................... 2
3. Requirements ............................... 3
Drawings:
CVI02720-01 - Sanitary, Storm, or Process

Sewer Fabricated HDPE Manhole
CVI02720-02 - Sanitary or Storm Sewer
Concrete Pipe or Precast Manholes
CVI02720-03 - Sanitary Concrete Drop
Manhole
CVI02720-04 - Process Sewer, HighDensity Polyethylene (HDPE) Lined
Manholes
CVI02720-05 - Process Sewer, Concrete
Manholes with Chemical Resistant
Brick Lining

Manholes with Reinforced
Thermosetting Resin (RTP) Liner
Manholes with Chemical Resistant
Coating
CVI02720-08 - Concrete Manhole Tops and
Bases
CVI02720-09 - Manhole Sections and
Details
CVI02720-10 - Typical Manhole Fire and/or
Vapor Seal
CVI02720-11 - Precast or Cast in Place
Rectangular or Square Storm Water
Inlet
CVI02720-12 - Precast Circular Storm
Water Inlet
CVI02720-13 - Catch Basin Option Sewer
Pipe Connection Detail
Page 1 of 16
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP CVI02720
Sewer Details
1.
November 2004
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This Practice provides the installer with standard details for sewer manholes, catch
basins, and storm water inlets for underground gravity sewer systems.
1.2
Scope
This Practice includes details for concrete pipe and high-density polyethylene
(HDPE) manholes. Details for HDPE liners, chemical resistant brick liners,
reinforced thermosetting resin (RTP) liners, and chemical resistant coatings are also
provided. In addition, details for fire and vapor seals, storm water inlets, catch
basins, and sealed slab and equipment drains are provided.
2.
References
Applicable parts of the following Practices and industry codes and standards shall be
award shall be used, except as otherwise specified. Short titles will be used herein where
appropriate.
2.1

PIP CVS02100 - Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill
PIP CVS02700 - Underground Gravity Sewers Specification
PIP STS03001 - Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification
PIP STS03600 - Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification
2.2

ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings
ASTM C76 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm
Drain, and Sewer Pipe
ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer
and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets
ASTM C478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete

Manhole Sections
ASTM C923 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors between
Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
AASHTO - Standard Specification for Highway Bridges
COMPLETE REVISION
November 2004
3.
PIP CVI02720
Sewer Details
Requirements
3.1
The project design drawings shall specify the location, orientation, and type of
manholes and catch basins.
3.2
Unless specified otherwise, all structures shall be designed for an AASHTO HS20
loading in accordance with AASHTO Standard Specification for Highway Bridges.
3.3
Unless specified otherwise, all concrete shall be in accordance with PIP STS03001.
3.4
Unless specified otherwise, all grouting shall be in accordance with PIP STS03600.
3.5
Bedding and backfilling requirements for piping shall be in accordance with

PIP CVS02700 and PIP CVS02100.
Page 3 of 16
COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004

Civil
PIP CVS02700
Underground Gravity Sewers Specification

PRINTING HISTORY
April 1995
August 2000
Issued
Complete Revision
October 2004
Complete Revision
COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004

Civil
PIP CVS02700
Table of Contents
1. Introduction .................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................. 2

1.2 Scope................................................. 2
2. References.................................... 2

2.3 Government Regulations ................... 3
3. Definitions .................................... 3
4. Requirements ............................... 4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
General .............................................. 4
Materials ............................................ 5
Construction....................................... 8
Exfiltration Test ................................ 14
Considerations for
Existing Facilities ............................. 14
Figure A - Bedding Methods for

Trench Conduits ....................... 15
Page 1 of 15
PIP CVS02700
1.
COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This Practice provides requirements for the installation contractor for fabricating and
installing underground gravity sewers.
1.2
Scope
This Practice describes the requirements for materials, installation, and testing of
underground gravity sewers. Requirements for pipe, inlet structures, manholes, and
appurtenances for sanitary, storm, and industrial process sewers are included.
Requirements for pressurized pipe, double-contained, and emission-controlled
industrial process sewers in environmental applications are not included.
2.
References
Applicable parts of the following Practices, industry codes and standards, and references
shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of
contract award shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles will be used herein
where appropriate.
2.1

PIP CVC01015 - Civil Design Criteria
PIP CVS02100 - Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification
PIP CVI02720 - Sewer Details
2.2

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and
Culvert Pipe
ASTM C76 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm
Drain, and Sewer Pipe
ASTM C425 - Standard Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified
Clay Pipe and Fittings
ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer
and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets
ASTM C478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete
Manhole Sections
ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings
Page 2 of 15
COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004
PIP CVS02700
ASTM C700 - Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength,
Standard Strength, and Perforated
ASTM C969 - Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance
Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines
ASTM C1433 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box
Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers
ASTM D422 - Standard Test Method for Particle - Size Analysis of Soils
ASTM D1248 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and
Extrusion Materials
ASTM D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of
Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity Flow Applications
ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120
ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems
ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D3212 - Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic
Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM D3350 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and
Fittings Materials
ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for
Joining Plastic Pipe
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
AASHTO M 36 - Interim Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic
Coated for Sewers and Drains
AASHTO M 294 - Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe,
300- to 1200-mm Diameter (for Storm Sewers and Culverts)
2.3
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
29 CFR 1926 Subpart P - Excavations
3.
Definitions
contract documents: Any and all documents, including design drawings, that purchaser has
transmitted or otherwise communicated, either by incorporation or by reference, and made
part of the legal contract or purchase order agreement between purchaser and supplier
supplier: The party responsible for performing excavation, backfill, and pipe installation,
including work executed through the use of sub-contractors
Page 3 of 15
PIP CVS02700
COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004
owner: The party who owns the facility wherein the underground gravity sewer will be
installed
purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the supplier. The purchaser may be the
flowable fill: An engineered blend of materials (controlled low-strength material) used as
self-leveling and self-compacting backfill and bedding
standard dimension ratio (SDR): The ratio of the pipe outside diameter (inches) to the
minimum wall thickness (inches)
4.
Requirements
4.1
General
4.1.1
Quality Control
4.1.1.1 Sewers shall be fabricated, installed, and tested in accordance with
this Practice; with codes, standards, and procedures specified in this
Practice; and with all applicable codes and regulations of the
controlling federal, state, and local jurisdictions.
4.1.1.2 Purchaser shall have the right to inspect, at purchasers expense, all
materials and workmanship and shall have unrestricted entry to the
fabrication shop at all times work is being performed.
4.1.1.3 Purchaser can reject improper, inferior, or defective materials and
workmanship at any stage of production.
4.1.1.4 All defective materials and workmanship shall be repaired or
replaced at no additional cost to purchaser.
4.1.15 Purchaser inspection shall not replace the suppliers quality control
procedures and responsibility for compliance with all applicable
requirements for the material, fabrication, and installation.
4.1.1.6 Unless directed otherwise by purchaser, if at any time during
installation and testing, weather or any other factor causes the
degradation of the pipe foundation, pipe and/or fitting installation,
bedding, or backfill, all affected materials shall be removed and the
work shall be reinstalled in accordance with this Practice.
4.1.2
Submittals
4.1.2.1 The following documentation shall be submitted to the purchaser
2 weeks before installation:
a. Fabrication drawings and instructions for the installation of
pipe and appurtenances
b. Certification that an OSHA-defined excavation-competent
person (ECP) shall oversee all excavation
Page 4 of 15
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP CVS02700
October 2004
c. Documentation of all trench work requiring an ECP

d. Certification in writing that the materials to be used under the
contract satisfy all the requirements of the project.
4.1.2.2 As-built documentation showing location, line, and grade of newly
installed sewer systems shall be submitted to purchaser within
4 weeks after installation.
4.1.3
Safety
4.1.3.1 Field construction activities on owners property shall conform to
owners safety requirements, including any special rules that may be
in effect at a specific site.
4.1.3.2 Good housekeeping practices shall be maintained in and around the
work site throughout the duration of the work.
4.1.3.3 Hazardous and hot work permits for chemical exposure, open
flames, spark-producing mechanical equipment, potential explosive
mixtures, and any other hazardous conditions shall be required in
areas specified by owner.
4.1.3.4 All excavation and trenching shall be in accordance with OSHA
standards and owners local requirements and guidelines (as
applicable) for the following:
a. Shoring, bracing, and/or sloping wall construction
b. Marking and flagging open excavations
c. Permitting and confined space entry requirements
4.1.4
Environmental
4.1.4.1 All sewer outfalls are required to be permitted by applicable
regulations.
4.1.4.2 Before discharging any liquid into drains, catch basins, or manholes
in connection with trench dewatering activities, testing, or other
activities for which liquids need to be disposed, the owner shall
verify that the applicable permit will allow intermittent non-storm
flows into storm sewers.
4.1.4.3 Excavated material shall be managed in accordance with a soil
management plan.
4.1.4.4 Unless provided by owner, the soil management plan shall be
developed by supplier and approved by owner before the start of
excavation activities.
4.2
Materials
4.2.1
Pipe and Joints

4.2.1.1 Specifications for materials other than those listed in the following
section (such as welded, coated, and wrapped carbon steel) that are
Page 5 of 15
PIP CVS02700
COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004
required for the project shall be as specified in the contract

documents.
4.2.1.2 Concrete Pipe/Reinforced Concrete Pipe (CP/RCP) - Rigid Pipe
1. Concrete sewer pipe 10 inches (250 mm) and smaller shall be

in accordance with ASTM C14 (class as specified in the
contract documents) non-reinforced, bell and spigot, or tongue
and groove sewer pipe.
2. Concrete sewer pipe 12 inches (300 mm) and larger shall be in
accordance with ASTM C76, reinforced sewer pipe (class and
wall as specified in the contract documents).
3. Joints shall be sealed using elastomeric O rings in accordance
with ASTM C443 unless otherwise specified in the contract
documents.
4. Joints may be sealed with cement grout if the service is for
storm sewer lines that are 24 inches (600 mm) in diameter and
larger.
4.2.1.3 Corrugated Steel Pipe (CSP) - Flexible Pipe
1. CSP shall be metallic-coated (galvanized) pipe in accordance

with AASHTO M 36 (sheet metal thickness and corrugation size
as specified in the contract documents).
2. CSP shall be connected with locking corrugated coupling bands
of the design indicated in AASHTO M 36, Coupling Bands
section.
3. Connecting bands shall be coated in accordance with the pipe
coating requirements.
4.2.1.4 Vitrified Clay Pipe (VCP) - Rigid Pipe
1. VCP shall be used only to the extent required to tie into

existing VCP systems. Alternative materials should be selected
for new piping installations.
2. VCP shall be extra strength in accordance with ASTM C700.
3. Joints shall be compression type in accordance with
ASTM C425, unless otherwise specified in the contract
documents.
4.2.1.5 Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic (PVC) Pipe - Flexible Pipe
1. PVC pipe 12 inches (300 mm) or less in diameter shall be

minimum schedule 40 pipe in accordance with ASTM D1785.
2. Joints shall be solvent cemented in accordance with
ASTM D2855, using cement in accordance with ASTM D2564
or shall have elastomeric ring gaskets in accordance with
ASTM D3212.
Page 6 of 15
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP CVS02700
October 2004
4.2.1.6 Cast Ductile Iron Soil Pipe (DISP) - Rigid Pipe
1. Cast DISP and fittings shall be hub and plain end coated service
weight in accordance with ASTM A74.
2. Joints shall be neoprene sleeve gasketed, push-on type in
accordance with ASTM C564.
4.2.1.7 High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe - Flexible Pipe
1. HDPE pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from virgin highdensity polyethylene resin, in accordance with ASTM D3350,
Cell Class PE345434C minimum, with a standard dimension
ratio (SDR) as specified in the contract documents.
2. Joints shall be butt fusion welded, socket fusion welded, or
flanged.
3. Alternate joining method shall consist of arch-band split sleeve
couplings made of carbon steel conforming to ASTM A36 or
stainless steel grade 304L or 316L. The coupling shall be
designed with closure plates and sealing pads for installation
and a leak-proof seal. O-Ring gaskets shall be used and shall
consist of ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM), nitrile,
silicon, or polyisoprene as required for the service intended.
Couplings shall allow for angular deflection, expansion, and
vibration if required. If a restrained joint is required, it shall be
accomplished with restraining rings welded to the exterior of
the pipe and a restraining-type coupling.
4. HDPE mechanical coupling joints are also acceptable if
approved by the purchaser.
5. Wall thickness shall be specified as follows:
NPS
SDR
4 16 inches
18 48 inches
17
32.5
4.2.1.8 Reinforced Concrete Box (RCB) Sections - Rigid Pipe
1. RCB sections shall be in accordance with ASTM C1433 unless

otherwise specified in the contract documents.
2. The appropriate table of section requirements from the listed
ASTM standard shall be used for the design loading specified
in the contract documents.
3. Joints shall be pre-formed plastic gasket-type joint sealant,
unless specified otherwise in the contract documents.
4.2.1.9 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe (CPP) - Flexible Pipe
1. CPP and fittings shall be bell and spigot type, manufactured in

accordance with AASHTO M 294. Bell shall be an integral part
of the pipe.
Page 7 of 15
PIP CVS02700
COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004
2. Pipe shall be Type S with a smooth inner liner unless otherwise

specified in the contract documents.
3. Joints shall be sealed using elastomeric gaskets in accordance
with ASTM F477 unless otherwise specified in the contract
documents.
4.2.2
Manholes, Inlet Structures, Frames, and Covers

4.2.2.1 Manholes and inlet structures (catch basins) shall be precast
(monolithic) with integral bottom. See PIP CVC01015 for manholespacing criteria.
4.2.2.2 Precast concrete manholes shall conform to ASTM C478.
4.2.2.3 HDPE plate used for manholes and inlet structures shall be
manufactured from virgin high-density polyethylene resin in
accordance with ASTM D1248-IIIC5-P34 pipe grade resin.
4.2.2.4 HDPE pipe components used for manholes and inlet structures shall
be as specified in Section 4.2.1.7 (this Practice).
4.2.2.5 Site-built concrete manholes shall be in accordance with the contract
documents.
4.2.3
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Cast-in-place concrete used for sewers shall be constructed in accordance
with PIP STS03001.
4.3
Construction
4.3.1
Receiving and Handling

4.3.1.1 Care shall be taken during handling and storage so as not to damage
or to cause stresses or deformation in pipe materials.
4.3.1.2 Pipe materials shall be inspected before installation. Any damaged
materials that are not acceptable to purchaser shall be rejected and
replaced at no cost to purchaser.
4.3.2
Trench Excavation
4.3.2.1 All excavation and trenching shall be made in accordance with
PIP CVS02100, OSHA standards, and owners local requirements
and guidelines (as applicable) for the following:
a. Shoring, bracing, and/or sloping wall construction
b. Marking and flagging open excavations
c. Permitting and confined space entry requirements
d. Employing excavation-competent person (ECP)
e. Handling and storing excavated materials
4.3.2.2 Proper care and protection shall be provided to prevent damage to all
existing facilities (e.g., foundations, services, pipelines, etc.) on,
Page 8 of 15
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP CVS02700
October 2004
above, or below the surface of the area where excavation and

backfill operations are to be performed.
4.3.2.3 Underground obstructions (e.g., piping, foundations, structures, etc.)
shall not be removed or altered without owners approval.
4.3.2.4 Trench depth shall be based on the specified invert of the pipe plus
the bedding requirements as specified in this Practice and in the
contract documents.
4.3.2.5 Trench width shall be as narrow as possible while still permitting
proper access for bedding and assembly of the pipe. If practical,
maximum trench width from bottom of the trench to 12 inches
(300 mm) above the pipe shall be 4/3 the nominal diameter of the
pipe plus 8 inches (200 mm).
4.3.2.6 If rock or other unyielding material is encountered, the bottom of the
trench shall be over-excavated 1/6 of the pipe diameter but in no
case less than 4 inches (100 mm).
4.3.2.7 If unacceptable soil is encountered, as determined by owner, such
soils shall be removed. The resulting over-excavation shall be
backfilled with suitable material to the specified grade. (See bedding
requirements specified in this Practice.)
4.3.2.8 The bottoms of trenches or bedding material (as applicable) shall be
firm and graded to provide uniform bearing of the pipe.
4.3.2.9 If pipe joint diameter exceeds pipe outside diameter (e.g., bell and
spigot piping), bell holes shall be manually excavated after the
trench bottom has been graded.
4.3.2.10 Erosion control measures shall be incorporated as required by
applicable regulations and by owners requirements.
4.3.2.11 Flexible Conduit
1. Only as much trench shall be opened as can be safely

maintained by available equipment.
2. All trenches shall be backfilled as soon as practicable but not
later than the end or each working day.
3. The space between the conduit and trench wall shall be wider
than the compaction equipment used in the conduit zone;
however, in no case shall it be wider than the conduit diameter
times 1.5 plus 12 inches (300 mm).
Comment: Flexible conduit requires stable trench walls to
assure proper embedment of pipe and
compaction of the bedding materials.
Page 9 of 15
PIP CVS02700
COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004
4.3.2.12 Wall Supports
1. If trench wall supports such as sheeting are required, these

supports must be left in place to preclude loss of support for the
pipe.
2. If sheeting is to be cut off, cuts shall be made a minimum of
1.5 ft (450 mm) above the crown of the pipe.
3. Rangers, whalers, and braces shall be left in place as required
to support cutoff sheeting.
4. If timber sheeting is used, it shall be treated as a permanent
structure and treated against biological degradation.
4.3.2.13 If ledge rock, hard pan, shale, or other unyielding material, cobbles,
rubble, debris, boulders, or stones larger than 1.5 inches (40 mm) are
encountered in the trench bottom, the trench shall be excavated to a
minimum depth of 6 inches (150 mm) below the bottom of pipe
elevation. The excavated materials shall be replaced with proper
embedment material.
4.3.3
Dewatering
4.3.3.1 Equipment necessary to collect and discharge water away from
excavations, such as pumps, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and
all other dewatering system components, shall be provided, installed,
and maintained.
4.3.3.2 All water encountered shall be disposed of in such a manner that
property is not damaged and no nuisance or health menace results.
4.3.3.3 If required by owner, a means of desilting the water before disposal
shall be provided.
4.3.3.4 At any time, the length of open trench shall be limited to that which
can be dewatered with methods and equipment available.
4.3.3.5 Dewatering methods shall be used to minimize softening of the soil
supporting the pipe and changes in soil characteristics that are
detrimental to subgrade stability.
4.3.3.6 Water shall not be allowed to accumulate in excavations. Subsurface
water flowing into excavations shall be removed by pumping or if
possible by gravity drainage.
4.3.3.7 Surface water shall be diverted away from the work area as directed
by owner.
4.3.3.8 The trench shall not be used as a temporary drainage ditch.
4.3.4
Bedding
4.3.4.1 Bedding material shall be granular and well graded. All material
shall pass a 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve and shall be at least 90%
retained on No. 200 (75 microns) sieve as determined in accordance
with ASTM D422.
Page 10 of 15
COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004
PIP CVS02700
4.3.4.2 Bedding material shall be placed under and equally along both sides
of the pipe in uniform layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm) loose
depth to a height of the centerline of the pipe and compacted by
hand, pneumatic tamper, or other owner-approved means.
4.3.4.3 Bedding material shall be compacted to a density approximately that
of the undisturbed site soil materials or as specified in the contract
documents.
4.3.4.4 If compacted, the pipe bed shall provide uniform bearing for the
bottom of the pipe (see trenching requirements specified in this
Practice).
4.3.4.5 Localized loading and differential settlement shall be minimized
where the pipe crosses other utilities or subsurface structures or in
areas having special foundations such as pile caps or sheeting. A
cushion of bedding shall be provided between the pipe and any such
point of localized loading.
4.3.4.6 Bedding shall conform to one of the following classes. Class C
bedding shall be used if no class is specified in the contract
documents. See Figure A for details.
a. Class A - concrete cradle bedding - requires embedment of the
lower part of the pipe in plain or reinforced concrete of suitable
thickness and extending up to the sides of the pipe a distance
not less than 25% of the pipe outside diameter.
b. Class B - first class bedding - requires the pipe to be placed on
the fine granular materials foundation extending up to the
center line of the pipe. The trench shall then be filled to 1 ft
(300 mm) over the top of the pipe with granular material in
6-inch (150-mm) layers and compacted to fill all the space
around the pipe.
c. Class C - ordinary bedding - requires placing the pipe on fine
granular material cradle extending up to the sides of the pipe a
distance not less than 1/6 of the pipe outside diameter. The
trench shall then be filled to 6 inches (150 mm) over the top of
the pipe with granular material placed and compacted to fill all
space around the pipe.
d. Class D - impermissible bedding - allows the pipe to be placed
on the bottom of the trench with no effort to shape the trench to
fit the pipe. Fill shall be placed around the pipe.
4.3.4.7 Bedding for box culverts shall conform to one of the following
classes. Class C bedding shall be used if no class is specified in the
contract documents.
a. Class B bedding shall be obtained by installing the box section
on a minimum thickness of fine granular material of at least
2 inches (50 mm). Compacted granular material shall be placed
Page 11 of 15
PIP CVS02700
COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004
on each side of the box section and up to at least 1 ft (300 mm)

over the top of the box.
b. Class C bedding shall be obtained by placing the box section on
a flat trench bottom. Lightly compacted fill shall be placed on
each side of the box section and up to 6 inches (150 mm) over
the top of the box.
4.3.4.8 Flowable fill (controlled low-strength material, CLSM) may be used
for Class B, C, or D bedding material. CLSM shall be in accordance
with PIP CVS02100.
4.3.5
Pipe Laying and Jointing

4.3.5.1 Pipe shall be laid beginning at the lowest point in trenches.
4.3.5.2 Pipes with spigot or tongue ends shall be laid with spigot ends
pointing in the direction of flow.
4.3.5.3 Pipe types other than those with spigot or tongue ends shall be laid
in accordance with the pipe manufacturers recommendations or
instructions.
4.3.5.4 Pipe shall be laid true to line and grade and kept clean and sound.
4.3.5.5 Pipe laying and joining shall be carried out in a dry trench.
4.3.5.6 Each length of pipe shall be inspected for loose gaskets, cracks, and
other defects before installation.
4.3.5.7 After inspection, each acceptable length of pipe shall be carefully
placed to the line and grade specified and nested in the bedding in
such a manner as to provide uniform support throughout its entire
length.
4.3.5.8 If pipe laying is suspended, the ends of the pipe shall be kept closed
and sealed to keep out soil and foreign materials.
4.3.5.9 After the joints have been made, the pipe shall not be disturbed in
any manner.
4.3.5.10 HDPE pipe shall be welded by experienced, qualified welders. All
welds shall be fusion welds except at manholes, where extrusion
welds are permitted.
4.3.5.11 Manholes, catch basins, dry boxes, etc., shall be constructed in
accordance with PIP CVI02720.
4.3.5.12 Bell and spigot joints shall be clean and dry. A lubricant
recommended by the pipe manufacturer shall be applied to the joint
materials. The spigot shall have full bell penetration.
4.3.6
Backfilling
4.3.6.1 Backfill and compaction material shall be in accordance with
PIP CVS02100 and this Practice and shall be similar to in-situ
material.
Page 12 of 15
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP CVS02700
October 2004
4.3.6.2 The trench shall be backfilled and compacted to a density equal to

that specified on the contract documents or equal to that of the
adjacent in situ material.
4.3.6.3 As soon as possible after pipe joints are made, backfill material shall
be placed along the sides of the pipe with care to prevent movement
of the line or grade.
4.3.6.4 Joints shall be left exposed until completion of leak testing.
4.3.6.5 Backfilling of trenches shall be completed immediately after testing.
4.3.6.6 Backfilling shall be compacted in a manner that avoids displacement
or damage to the pipe.
4.3.6.7 Construction machinery or vehicles shall not be allowed to pass over
the trench until the trench is backfilled and compacted sufficiently to
prevent damage to the pipe.
4.3.6.8 Flowable fill (CLSM) may be used for backfill material if specified
in contract documents.
4.3.7
Embedment of Flexible Conduit

4.3.7.1 Embedment configuration, materials, and compaction requirements
shall be in accordance with the contract documents.
4.3.7.2 If embedment materials are not specified in the contract documents,
Class II or Class III materials shall be in accordance with Table 1 of
ASTM D2321, determined to be compatible with pipe and suitable to
prevent migration of adjacent soils.
4.3.7.3 If embedment installation requirements are not specified in the
contract documents, installation shall be in accordance with the
recommendations given in Table 2 of ASTM D2321.
4.3.7.4 Embedment materials shall be placed into the trench, using methods
that will not disturb or damage the conduit.
4.3.7.5 Material in the area between the bedding and the underside of the
conduit shall be worked in and tamped before placing and
compacting the rest of the embedment.
4.3.7.6 Compaction equipment shall not be allowed to contact the conduit
and damage the conduit wall.
4.3.7.7 Embedment shall not be compacted by running over the materials
with earthmoving equipment.
4.3.7.8 To preclude damage to the installed conduit and disturbance of the
conduit embedment, a minimum depth of at least 24 inches
(600 mm) or 1 pipe diameter of cover, whichever is greater, shall be
maintained over the top of conduit before allowing vehicles to
traverse the conduit trench.
4.3.7.9 To preclude potential floatation of the installed conduit, a minimum
depth of backfill over the top of conduit of at least 24 inches
Page 13 of 15
PIP CVS02700
COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004
(600 mm) or 1 pipe diameter of cover over the pipe, whichever is

greater, shall be maintained.
4.4
Exfiltration Test
4.4.1
Setup
1. Exfiltration shall be measured at a manhole.
2. The section of pipe to be tested shall be plugged at the downstream end
of pipe (e.g., as at a manhole).
3. The lateral pipe in the section being tested shall be plugged with
removable stoppers.
4.4.2
Procedure for Process and Sanitary Sewers

1. Sections of pipe shall be filled, 400-ft (122-m) maximum length at a
time, with water to the top of the manhole but not less than 5 ft (1.5 m)
above the top of the pipe.
2. If required, a standpipe shall be used to bring the water level to 5 ft
(1.5 m) above the top of the pipe.
3. Water shall be allowed to stand for 4 hours.
4. Manhole shall be refilled and the drop shall be measured after 1 hour.
5. Maximum allowable exfiltration shall be as follows:
a. Process sewers - no measurable amount
b. Sanitary sewers - 0.0008 gallons/inch diameter/ft/hour
(0.00039 liters/mm diameter/m/hour)
4.4.3
4.5
Page 14 of 15
Exfiltration testing of storm sewers shall be done in accordance with

ASTM C969.
Considerations for Existing Facilities

4.5.1
If construction of new sewers interferes with existing sewers, satisfactory

temporary bypass facilities shall be provided.
4.5.2
Open ends of existing sewers that are cut or abandoned in place shall be
securely closed with a plug or wall of concrete having a minimum thickness
of 3 pipe diameters.
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP CVS02700
October 2004
Figure A - Bedding Methods for Trench Conduits
CLASS "A"
CLASS "B"
Reinforced A s = 1.0% L f = 4.8

Reinforced A s = 0.4% Lf = 3.4
Plain
Lf = 2.8
4/3 Bc+ 8 inches (200 mm) min.
Lf = 1.9
Densely
compacted
backfill
1 1/4 Bc
12 inch
(300 mm) min.
12 inch
(300 mm) min.
Compacted
granular
material
Bc
Bc
1/4 Bc
1/4 D max.
CONCRETE CRADLE
CLASS "C"
Lf = 1.5
Concrete
GRANULAR FOUNDATION
CLASS "D"
Lightly
compacted backfill
L f = 1.1
H 6 inch
(150 mm) min.
Bc
H 6 inch
(150 mm) min.
Compacted
granular material
Bc
1/6 B c
d
GRANULAR FOUNDATION
Legend
Bc = outside diameter
H = backfill cover above top of pipe
D = inside diameter
d = depth of bedding material below pipe
As = area of transverse steel in the
cradle or arch expressed as a
percent of area of concrete at invert
or crown.
L f = bedding factor
Loose backfill
FLAT SUBGRADE
Depth of bedding
material below pipe
D
d (min.)
27 inches (690 mm) 3 inches (75 mm)

& smaller
30 inches (760 mm 4 inches (100 mm)
to 60 inch (1.53 m)
66 inches (1.68 m) 6 inches (150 mm)
& larger
Page 15 of 15
COMPLETE REVISION
October 2011

Civil
PIP CVI02350
Roadway and Area Paving General Notes and
Typical Details


PUBLISHING HISTORY
July 2006
Issued as CVI02000
October 2011
Complete Revision and Renumbering
COMPLETE REVISION
October 2011

Civil
PIP CVI02350
Roadway and Area Paving General Notes and
Typical Details
Table of Contents
1. Introduction................................. 3
1.1
1.2
Purpose ....................................... 3
Scope .......................................... 3
2. References .................................. 3
2.1
2.2
Process Industry Practices ......... 3

Industry Codes and Standards ... 3
3. Abbreviations.............................. 4
Drawings
CVI02350-00 - General Notes
CVI02350 01 - Roadway Details Contraction Joint
CVI02350-02 - Roadway Details Doweled Expansion Joint
CVI02350-03 - Roadway Details Doweled Construction Joint
CVI02350-04 - Roadway Details Doweled/Keyed Joint
CVI02350-05 - 09 Reserved
CVI02350-10 - Area Paving Details Expansion Joints
CVI02350-11 - Area Paving Details Isolation Joint
CVI02350-12 - Area Paving Details Saw Cut Contraction Joints
CVI02350-13 - Area Paving Details Construction Joint

CVI02350-14 - Area Paving Details Transition
CVI02350-15 - Area Paving Details Free Edge
CVI02350-16 - Area Paving Details Free Edge with Curb
CVI02350-17 - 19 Reserved
CVI02350-20 - Miscellanous Details Guardrail Assembly
CVI02350-20M - Miscellanous Details Guardrail Assembly (Metric)
CVI02350-21 - Miscellanous Details Guardrail Details
CVI02350-21M - Miscellanous Details Guardrail Details (Metric)
CVI02350-22 - Miscellanous Details Guard Posts
CVI02350-23 - Miscellanous Details Headwall for One Culvert
CVI02350-23M - Miscellanous Details Headwall for One Culvert (Metric)
CVI02350-24 - Miscellanous Details Headwall with Wings for One
Culverts
CVI02350-24M - Miscellanous Details Headwall with Wings for One
Culvert (Metric)
CVI02350-25 - Miscellaneous Details Headwall for Two Culverts
Page 1 of 4
COMPLETE REVISION
October 2011
CVI02350-25M - Miscellaneous Details Headwall for Two Culverts

(Metric)
CVI02350-26 - Miscellaneous Details Headwall with Wings for Two
Culverts
CVI02350-26M - Miscellaneous Details Headwall with Wings for Two
Culverts (Metric)
Page 2 of 4
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP CVI02350
Roadway and Area Paving General Notes and Typical Details
1.
October 2011
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This Practice provides typical details for construction of roadways and area paving
for use in conjunction with design drawings and project specifications.
1.2
Scope
This Practice provides typical details for roadway paving, area paving, guard posts,
guard rails and headwalls. General notes are provided to supplement the requirements
shown on design drawings and project specifications. Area paving details are for
4- and 6-inch concrete paving intended for pedestrian and light vehicular traffic.
Abbreviations commonly used on design drawings are also listed in this Practice.
2.
References
Applicable parts of the following Practices shall be considered an integral part of this
Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used, except as otherwise
noted. Short titles are used herein where appropriate.
2.1

PIP CVS02350 - Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification
PIP STI03310 - Concrete Typical Details (STI03310 -00 General Notes)
2.2

ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and HotDipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on
Iron and Steel Hardware
60 000 PSI Tensile Strength
ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes
Page 3 of 4
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP CVI02350
Roadway and Area Paving General Notes and Typical Details
3.
October 2011
Abbreviations
AB = ANCHOR BOLT
FTG = FOOTING
QTY = QUANTITY
B = BOTTOM
GA = GAUGE OR GAGE
R = RADIUS
BC = BOLT CIRCLE
GALV = GALVANIZED
RAD = RADIUS
BM = BENCH MARK
HORIZ = HORIZONTAL
PCP = REINFORCED CONCRETE

PIPE
BO = BOTTOM OF
HP = HIGH POINT
REF = REFERENCE
BOC = BOTTOM OF CONCRETE
HPFS = HIGH POINT FINISH

SURFACE
REINF = REINFORCING
BOT = BOTTOM
HW = HEADWALL
REQD = REQUIRED
C/C = CENTER TO CENTER
ID = INSIDE DIAMETER
ROW = RIGHT-OF-WAY
CB = CATCH BASIN
IE = INVERT ELEVATION
RR = RAILROAD
CJ = CONTRACTION JOINT
INV = INVERT ELEVATION
SCH = SCHEDULE
CL = CENTERLINE
L = LENGTH
SIM = SIMILAR
CLR = CLEAR OR CLEARANCE
LF = LINEAR FEET
SPA = SPACE OR SPACES
CMP = CORRUGATED METAL PIPE
LG = LONG
SPCD = SPACED
COL = COLUMN
LOC = LOCATION
SPCG = SPACING
CONC = CONCRETE
LP = LOW POINT
SPEC = SPECIFICATION
CONST = CONSTRUCTION
LPFS = LOW POINT FINISH

SURFACE
SQ = SQUARE
CONT = CONTINUOUS
MAX = MAXIMUM
STA = STATION
COORD = COORDINATE
MES = MISCELLANEOUS
ELECTRICAL SUPPORT
STD = STANDARD
CTRD = CENTERED
MH = MANHOLE
SUCT = SUCTION
DB = DRY BOX
MIN = MINIMUM
SUPT = SUPPORT
DET = DETAIL
MISC = MISCELLANEOUS
SYMM = SYMMETRICAL
DIA = DIAMETER
MPS = MISC PIPE SUPPORT
UON = UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
DISCH = DISCHARGE
MS = MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORT
T = TOP
DWG = DRAWING
N = NUMBER
THD = THREAD
DWL = DOWEL
NF = NEAR FACE
THK = THICK
EA = EACH
NO. = NUMBER
TO. = TOP OF
EF = EACH FACE
NS = NEAR SIDE
TOC = TOP OF CONCRETE
EJ = EXPANSION JOINT
NTD = NOTED
TOG = TOP OF GROUT OR TOP OF

GROUND
EL = ELEVATION (HEIGHT)
NTS = NOT TO SCALE
TYP = TYPICAL
ELEV = ELEVATION VIEW
OC = ON CENTER
VERT = VERTICAL
EQ = EQUAL OR EQUALLY
OD = OUTSIDE DIAMETER
W/ = WITH
EW = EACH WAY
OPNG = OPENING
W/O = WITHOUT
EXIST = EXISTING
OPP = OPPOSITE
WP = WORK POINT
FDN = FOUNDATION
P = PROJECTION
WWR = WELDED WIRE

REINFORCEMENT
FF = FAR FACE
PC = POINT OF CURVATURE
@ = AT
FG = FINISH GRADE
PI = POINT OF INTERSECTION
FIN = FINISH
PROJ = PROJECTION
FL = FLOW LINE
PT = POINT OF TANGENCY
FS = FAR SIDE
PVI = POINT OF VERTICAL

INTERSECTION
= CENTERLINE
= DEGREE OF CURVATURE
= INFLECTION ANGLE
O = DIAMETER
Page 4 of 4
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012

Civil
PIP CVS02350
Roadway and Area Paving
Construction Specification

been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial
users, contractors, or standards organizations. By harmonizing these technical requirements
into a single set of Practices, administrative, application, and engineering costs to both the
purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. While this Practice is expected to
incorporate the majority of requirements of most users, individual applications may involve
requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice.
Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the
Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on
information contained in these materials. The use of trade names from time to time should
not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the
trade. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be
substituted for those named. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with
applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. To the extent these
Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations,
such laws or regulations must be followed. Consult an appropriate professional before
applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice.
Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of Texas
at Austin, 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500), Austin, Texas 78759. PIP Member Companies
and Subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Changes or modifications of any
kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of
PIP. Authorized Users may attach addenda or overlays to clearly indicate modifications or
exceptions to specific sections of PIP Practices. Authorized Users may provide their clients,
suppliers and contractors with copies of the Practice solely for Authorized Users purposes.
These purposes include but are not limited to the procurement process (e.g., as attachments to
requests for quotation/ purchase orders or requests for proposals/contracts) and preparation
and issue of design engineering deliverables for use on a specific project by Authorized
Users client. PIPs copyright notices must be clearly indicated and unequivocally
incorporated in documents where an Authorized User desires to provide any third party with
copies of the Practice.
PRINTING HISTORY
April 2002
Issued
July 2012
Complete Revision
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012

Civil
PIP CVS02350
Roadway and Area Paving
Construction Specification
Table of Contents
1. Introduction................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................ 2

1.2 Scope ............................................... 2
2. References .................................. 2

4. Requirements ............................. 4
4.1 Quality Control/Assurance ............... 4

4.2 Materials .......................................... 4
4.3 Subgrade Preparation, Subbase,
and Base Course ............................. 6
4.4 Surfacing .......................................... 8
3. Definitions ................................... 3
Page 1 of 15
PIP CVS02350
Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification
1.
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This Practice provides requirements for construction of roadways and area paving within
plant boundaries and for access roadways from public roadways to plant facilities.
1.2
Scope
This Practice describes minimum requirements for material, construction, and quality
control/assurance of roadways and area paving within plant boundaries and for access
roadways from public roadways to plant facilities.
2.
References
Applicable parts of the following Practices and industry codes and standards shall be considered
an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used,
except as otherwise noted. Short titles will be used herein where appropriate.
2.1

PIP CVI02350 - Roadway and Area Paving General Notes and Typical Details
2.2

ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C131 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of SmallSize Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
ASTM C989/C989M Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in
Concrete and Mortars
ASTM D977 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt
ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)
ASTM D1883 - Standard Test Method for CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of
Laboratory Compacted Soils
ASTM D2026/D2026M - Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (SlowCuring Type)
ASTM D2027/D2027M - Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (MediumCuring Type)
ASTM D2028/D2028M - Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (RapidCuring Type)
Page 2 of 15
PIP CVS02350
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012
ASTM D2041/D2041M - Standard Test Method for Theoretical Maximum

Specific Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering
Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)
ASTM D2726 - Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of
Non-Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
ASTM D2940/D2940M - Standard Specification for Graded Aggregate Material
for Bases or Subbases for Highways or Airports
ASTM D2950/D2950M - Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous
Concrete in Place by Nuclear Methods
ASTM D3282 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate
Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes
ASTM D3381 - Standard Specification for Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement for
Use in Pavement Construction
ASTM D3628 - Standard Practice for Selection and Use of Emulsified Asphalts
ASTM D5249 - Standard Specification for Backer Material for Use with Coldand Hot-Applied Joint Sealants in Portland-Cement Concrete and Asphalt Joints
ASTM D6084 - Standard Test Method for Elastic Recovery of Bituminous
Materials by Ductilometer
ASTM D6373 - Standard Specification for Performance Graded Asphalt Binder
ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of
Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
ASTM D7113/D7113M - Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous
Paving Mixtures in Place by the Electromagnetic Surface Contact Method
3.
Definitions
constructor: The party responsible for supplying the materials, equipment, tools, supervision, and
labor for the installation of the roadway and area paving work in accordance with the contract
documents. The term constructor shall apply also to the constructors subcontractor(s) and vendor(s).
contract documents: Any and all documents including codes, studies, design drawings,
specifications, sketches, practices, and data sheets that the purchaser has transmitted or otherwise
communicated, either by incorporation or reference, and made part of the legal contract
agreement or purchase order between the purchaser and the constructor
inspector: The party responsible for verifying the quality of all materials, installations, and
workmanship furnished by the constructor. The inspector shall be qualified by training and experience
Page 3 of 15
PIP CVS02350
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012
and hold certifications or documentation of their qualifications. Unless otherwise specified in the
contract documents, the inspector shall be an independent party retained by the purchaser.
site wherein the roadway and area paving will be used
4.
Requirements
4.1
Quality Control/Assurance
4.1.1
Quality Control and Submittals

4.1.1.1 A written Quality Control Program document that provides details of
how compliance with the requirements of this specification and contract
documents will be achieved shall be submitted to the purchaser for
approval at least 15 days before start of construction.
4.1.1.2 Certified laboratory test data for the materials and products to be used in
the work shall be submitted to the purchaser for approval at least 15 days
prior to shipping of materials and products.
4.1.1.3 Results of the quality control tests required during the performance of the
work shall be submitted to the purchaser within 48 hours of completion.
4.1.2
Quality Assurance
4.1.2.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, an inspection and
testing agency will be retained by the purchaser to perform field and
laboratory testing and/or evaluations to verify compliance of the work
with the requirements of this Practice and to ensure the achievement of
the intents and purposes of the work.
4.1.2.2 The performance or lack of performance of the tests and inspections by
purchasers inspector shall not be construed as granting relief from the
requirements of this Practice or the other contract documents.
4.2
Materials
4.2.1
General
General requirements for soil and aggregate classification shall be in accordance
with ASTM D2487, ASTM D2940/D2940M, and ASTM D3282.
4.2.2
Water
4.2.2.1 Unless approved by the engineer of record, water used in construction
shall be free of salts, oils, acids, alkalis, organic matter, or other deleterious
substances. Water shall be fresh and not brackish or from the ocean.
4.2.2.2 Source for locally available water suitable for construction shall be
obtained from the owner.
Page 4 of 15
PIP CVS02350
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012
4.2.2.3 Water used for concrete construction shall be in accordance with

PIP STS03001.
4.2.3
Asphalt
4.2.3.1 Asphaltic concrete paving shall be in accordance with the Superpave
system, unless otherwise approved by the engineer of record.
Performance graded (PG) binder shall meet the requirements of
ASTM D6373. The performance grade provided shall be as specified in
the contract documents. If no performance grade is specified, the
Performance Grade provided shall be PG 64-22.
4.2.3.2 If the temperature spread for the performance grade specified is 92C or
greater, an elastic recovery test in accordance with ASTM D6084 shall be
provided and the binder shall be polymer modified. If the temperature
range is less than 92C, the asphalt binder shall not be polymer modified
unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.
4.2.3.3 A dense-graded mix-type shall be provided unless otherwise specified in
4.2.3.4 Cutback asphalt shall be in accordance with ASTM D2026/D2026M,
ASTM D2027/D2027M, or ASTM D2028/D2028M.
4.2.3.5 Emulsified asphalt shall be in accordance with ASTM D977 and
ASTM D3628.
4.2.3.6 Liquid asphalt for prime coat shall be grade MC-70 or grade MC-250 in
accordance with ASTM D2027/D2027M; or grade RC-70 or grade
RC-250 in accordance with ASTM D2028/D2028M.
4.2.3.7 Asphalt cement for tack coat shall be viscosity grade AC-20 in
accordance with ASTM D3381.
4.2.4
Aggregate for Subbase, Base and Untreated Gravel Surfaces

4.2.4.1 Materials for aggregate pavement base and subbase (if required) shall
consist of durable and sound crushed gravel, crushed stone, or slag.
4.2.4.2 The aggregate materials shall be free from organic matter, lumps of clay,
clay coatings, or other objectionable matter; and shall be in accordance
with ASTM D2940/D2940M.
4.2.4.3 The aggregate shall have a soaked California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of
80% minimum when tested in accordance with ASTM D1883, and a
percentage of wear not greater than 45% when tested in accordance with
ASTM C131.
4.2.4.4 Aggregate gradation for untreated gravel surfaces shall conform to base
requirements of ASTM D2940 except that a minimum of 8% shall pass
75 m (No. 200) sieve.
4.2.5
Aggregate for Asphaltic Concrete Paving

4.2.5.1 Aggregate for asphaltic concrete paving shall be determined by the
Superpave mix design process unless otherwise approved by purchaser.
4.2.5.2 A dense graded mix-type shall be provided.
Page 5 of 15
PIP CVS02350
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012
4.2.5.3 The nominal maximum aggregate size shall be 1/2 in (12.5 mm) for the
surface layer and 1 in (25 mm) for the intermediate/binder and base
courses unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.
4.2.6
Concrete
4.2.6.1 Materials for concrete construction shall be in accordance with
PIP STS03001.
4.2.6.2 Concrete mix design in accordance with PIP STS03001 shall be used for
concrete pavement with the following modifications:
a. Pozzolans and ground granular blast slag (GGBS) are allowed as
replacement for cementitious material or a portion of the fine
aggregate in accordance with ASTM C618 and ASTM C989
respectively.
b. Portland cement replacement shall be at a ratio of 1:1 with fly
ash or GGBS up to a maximum of 20%.
c. Alkali reactive aggregates are not permitted.
d. Air entrainment of approximately 5% to reduce concrete
cracking/deterioration shall be included in the mix design if
specified in the contract documents for projects where
freeze/thaw is a concern.
4.2.6.3 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the mixture shall
attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4,000 psi (28 MPa).
4.2.6.4 Coarse aggregate grading shall be as shown in ASTM C33/C33M,
Size 67. Deviations shall be approved by the engineer of record.
4.2.6.5 Hot applied joint sealant shall be in accordance with design drawings.
4.2.6.6 Cold applied joint sealant shall be in accordance with design drawings.
4.2.6.7 Burlap shall weigh 9 oz/yd2 (305 g/m2) minimum and be clean and free
of substances that can be harmful to freshly placed concrete.
4.2.6.8 Backer rod material shall be in accordance with ASTM D5249, Type I or
Type III.
4.2.6.9 The constructor shall select the final mixture proportions that best meets
the construction methods and performance criteria.
4.3
Subgrade Preparation, Subbase, and Base Course

4.3.1
Subgrade Preparation and Subbase

4.3.1.1 Clearing, grubbing, stripping, removal of waste, source of borrow, and
construction drainage shall be in accordance with PIP CVS02100.
4.3.1.2 Fill material, compaction, and testing shall be in accordance with
PIP CVS02100.
4.3.1.3 Subgrade preparation for base and subbase course placement shall be in
accordance with PIP CVS02100.
Page 6 of 15
PIP CVS02350
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012
4.3.1.4 Unless otherwise specified, the thickness of the subbase (if required)
shall be 4 in (100 mm).
4.3.1.5 If a subbase layer is specified in the contract documents, the layer shall
be carried 1 ft (300 mm) minimum beyond the width of the base course,
unless otherwise shown on the design drawings.
4.3.1.6 Where shown in the contract documents, the upper surface of in situ
subgrade soils shall be stabilized after stripping is complete in
accordance with requirements specified in the contract documents.
4.3.1.7 Where shown and specified in the contract documents, geotextile and/or
geogrid shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
4.3.1.8 Proof roll the compacted subgrade with a 25-T (222 kN) pneumatic tire
roller or a fully loaded dump truck. The moisture content of the subgrade
should be near optimum. Proof roll at least two complete passes, each
trip offset by at most one tire width of the roller. Operate the roller at a
speed between 2 and 6 mph (3 and 10 kph). Observe for visible
deformations such as rutting, cracking, rolling or elastic rebound
(springing).
4.3.1.9 Rutting or springing movement greater than 1 in (25 mm) shall be
considered as unacceptable. Substantial cracking or lateral movement
shall be considered unacceptable.
4.3.1.10 Unacceptable material shall be removed and replaced in accordance with
PIP CVS02100.
4.3.2
Base Course
4.3.2.1 New Construction
1. Aggregate base course shall not be constructed when atmospheric

temperature is below 35F (2C), or if other weather conditions may
detrimentally affect the quality of the base course.
2. Base course shall be placed in accordance with PIP CVS02100.
4.3.2.2 Thickness Requirements
1. The thickness of the base course should be measured at intervals of

500 yd2 (420 m2) maximum of completed base course.
2. Thickness measurements shall be taken by making test holes, 3 in
(75 mm) in diameter minimum, through the base course.
3. No single base course thickness measurement shall have a deficiency
greater than 1/2 in (13 mm).
4. The average thickness of the base course, determined by computing
the average of the depth measurements, shall not under run the
specified thickness by greater than 1/4 in (6 mm).
5. If the measured thickness is greater than 1/2 in (13 mm) thicker than
specified, the measured thickness shall be considered to be equal to the
specified thickness plus 1/2 in (13 mm) for determining the average.
Page 7 of 15
PIP CVS02350
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012
6. Correct thickness deficiencies by scarifying, adding mixture of

proper gradation, reblading, and recompacting affected areas.
4.3.2.3 Density Test
Test base course to the density specified in PIP CVS02100 in accordance

with ASTM D6938. Test every 2000 ft2 (180 m2) of each lift and a
minimum of one test each day base material is placed.
4.3.2.4 Maintenance
1. All debris, rubbish, and excess material shall be removed from the
jobsite after completion of base course.
2. After construction has been completed, the base course shall be
protected until final acceptance. Protection shall include drainage,
rolling, shaping, and watering as necessary to maintain the base
course in proper condition.
3. Areas of base course damaged by freezing, rainfall, or other weather
conditions shall be corrected in accordance with the specified
requirements.
4.4
Surfacing
4.4.1
General
4.4.1.1 Paving surfaces shall be gravel, asphalt, or concrete as shown on the
design drawings.
4.4.1.2 Pavement shall be constructed on a previously completed and approved
subgrade, subgrade and base, or existing pavement as shown on the
design drawings.
4.4.1.3 The surface of the area to be paved shall be clean and kept from
accumulating materials that would contaminate the mixture, prevent
bonding, or interfere with placement operations.
4.4.1.4 Surfaces shall be finished such that positive drainage is provided.
4.4.2
Gravel Pavement
4.4.2.1 Compaction shall be continued until 95% of maximum dry density is
achieved in accordance with ASTM D1557 and verified in the field using
nuclear density testing in accordance with ASTM D6938, or other
appropriate density test method approved by the engineer of record.
4.4.2.2 Sampling of compacted mixes from the roadway shall be in accordance
with ASTM D3282.
4.4.3
Asphaltic Concrete Pavement

4.4.3.1 General
1. Air temperature shall be above 40F (4C) for duration of the

application of prime coat, tack coat, and asphalt surface courses.
2. Air temperature readings shall be taken in the shade and away from
artificial heat.
Page 8 of 15
PIP CVS02350
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012
3. Prime coat, tack coat, and asphalt surface courses shall not be
applied in unsuitable weather conditions. Unsuitable weather shall
include the following conditions:
a. Dense fog
b. Rain
c. Wind that is blowing at such a rate that proper compaction
cannot be attained because of cooling of the mixture
d. Wind that is blowing at such a rate that proper bonding cannot be
achieved because sand, dust, or other debris is being deposited
on the underlying surface
4. Asphalt that is discolored, indicating the bitumen has been
overheated, shall not be used.
5. The surfaces of curbs, gutters, manholes, and other structures where
asphaltic concrete paving is to be placed against shall be covered
with a thin, uniform coat of liquid asphalt.
6. Where asphaltic concrete paving is to be placed against the vertical
face of an existing pavement, the vertical face shall be cleaned to
remove foreign substances and coated with liquid asphalt at a rate of
approximately 0.25 gal/yd2 (1.14 L/m2).
4.4.3.2 Prime Coat
1. After the subgrade or base has been prepared and compacted, the
prime coat shall be applied and permitted to cure 24 hours minimum
before new asphaltic concrete paving is placed.
2. Asphalt for the prime coat shall be of medium curing type cutback
asphalt.
3. Apply prime coat at a rate not less than 0.15 gal and not more than
0.33 gal/yd2 (0.7 to 1.5 L/m2) of surface.
4. If the asphalt is not entirely absorbed by the base course within
24 hours, excess asphalt shall be blotted with light, dry sand.
5. Damaged prime coat shall be repaired immediately.
4.4.3.3 Tack Coat
1. The tack coat shall be applied in advance of the asphaltic concrete

paving operation under the following conditions:
a. Placing asphaltic concrete over existing pavements
b. Between asphaltic concrete courses if more than one asphaltic
concrete course is used
2. Holes, ruts, and depressions in the existing asphaltic concrete course
shall be cleaned out down to the hard surface and dried, and the
asphaltic concrete surface shall be thoroughly swept clean.
Page 9 of 15
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP CVS02350
July 2012
3. Broken surfaces in the existing asphaltic concrete course shall be

repaired as follows:
a. Lightly coated with rapid curing type cutback asphalt
b. Filled with surface asphaltic concrete
c. Compacted to form an even surface
4. Asphalt for the tack coat shall be rapid curing cutback.
5. Apply tack coat at a rate not less than 0.05 gal/yd2 (0.2 L/m2) of
surface.
6. The tack coat shall be applied sufficiently in advance of the
placement operation of the asphalt mixture to permit volatiles to
evaporate from the asphalt cement, but not so far in advance that the
tack coat becomes covered with dust or other foreign substances.
4.4.3.4 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete (HMAC)
1. Debris shall be removed from the tack coat before HMAC is applied.
2. In no case shall the maximum production temperature be more than
350F (177C). The HMAC temperatures shall be within the
following requirements from production to finish rolling.
a. Maximum production temperature: 350F (177C)
b. Breakdown rolling: 320-275F (165-135C)
c. Intermediate rolling: 275-200F (135-93C)
d. Finish rolling: 200-150F (93-66C)
3. The minimum roadway surface temperatures are shown in Table 1.
Table 1. Minimum Roadway Surface Temperatures
Minimum Roadway Surface Temperatures
High Temperature
Binder Grade
Subsurface Layers or
Night Paving Operations
Surface Layers Placed

in Daylight Operations
PG 64
45F (7C)
50F (10C)
PG 70
55F (13C)
60F (16C)
PG 76
60F (16C)
60F (16C)
4. HMAC shall be placed to the required width and thickness; true to

line, grade, and cross section.
5. The paver shall also be capable of providing a smoothly struck finish
with uniform density and texture.
6. If the specified thickness of finished paving is greater than 3 in
(75 mm), equal lifts consisting of a leveling-up course and a surface
course shall be placed.
Page 10 of 15
PIP CVS02350
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012
7. If the specified thickness of paving is 3 in (75 mm) or less, finished

paving shall be placed in one layer.
8. A sufficient amount of material shall be placed to assure the
specified pavement thickness after compaction. The average
thickness of the course or of combined courses shall be within 1/4 in
(6 mm) of the specified thickness.
9. Compaction shall be continued until further compaction cannot be
obtained and all compactor marks are eliminated. Paving shall be
discontinued if unable to achieve the specified density prior to the
mixture cooling to 175F (79C).
10. Actual bulk density for full depth of compacted HMAC in
accordance with ASTM D2726 shall range between 92% and 97% of
theoretical maximum density in accordance with
ASTM D2041/D2041M.
a. Surface density of pavement shall be tested using
electromagnetic surface contact methods in accordance with
ASTM D7113/D7113M or with nuclear density methods in
accordance with ASTM D2950/D2950M.
b. Compaction tests results shall average between 92% to 97% with
no test result below 91%. Each test shall consist of an average of
four readings at each test location.
c. Tests shall be performed on each lane of paving at a minimum of
250 ft (75 m) intervals.
4.4.3.5 Joint Construction
1. Each HMAC layer shall be placed as continuously as possible to

minimize joints.
2. Joints shall be made in such a manner as to create a continuous bond
between the old and new pavement construction courses.
3. If the pavement construction involves two or more courses,
longitudinal joints in successive courses shall be offset by 6 in
(150 mm) minimum.
4. If the placing of material is discontinued or if material in place cools to
less than 140 F (60 C), a joint running perpendicular to the direction
traveled by the paver shall be made. Before placement continues, the
edge of the previously placed pavement shall be trimmed to a straight
line perpendicular to the paver and cut back to expose an even vertical
surface for the full thickness of the course. When placement continues,
the paver shall be positioned on the transverse joint so that sufficient
hot mixture can be placed to create a joint after compaction that is in
accordance with the required smoothness.
5. Joints that are not completed before the previously laid mixture has
cooled to a temperature of 140 F (60 C) shall be coated with liquid
or emulsified asphalt just before paving is continued.
Page 11 of 15
PIP CVS02350
4.4.4
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012
Concrete Pavement
4.4.4.1 Equipment
1. Mixing plant capacity shall be based on the size of the job and
paving capacity to avoid shutdowns and minimize cold joints.
2. Fixed-form paving shall use screeds designed for striking off manual
fixed-form concrete pavement conforming to the proper cross section.
3. Slip-form pavers shall be designed to spread, strike off, consolidate,
screed, and float finish the freshly placed concrete in one complete
pass of the machine to produce a dense and homogeneous pavement
requiring minimal hand finishing. The slip form paving machine
shall be equipped with the following:
a. Automatic controls to control line and grade from either or both
sides of the machine.
b. Vibrators to consolidate the concrete for the full width and depth
of the course placed in a single pass, and designed and
constructed so no spreading or appreciable slumping of the
concrete occurs.
c. A positive interlock system to stop all vibration and tamping
elements when forward motion of the machine stops.
4. Internal paving vibrators on paving machines shall vibrate at 5,000 to
8,000 impulses per minute. Surface pan type vibrators shall operate
at a minimum of 4,000 impulses per minute. Single spud vibrators
shall vibrate at a minimum of 7,000 impulses per minute.
5. Paving saws shall be capable of sawing fresh concrete. Saws shall be
equipped with blade guards and guides to control alignment and depth.
4.4.4.2 Forms and Form Setting
1. Forms shall have a depth equivalent to the edge thickness of the

pavement and shall be straight and free from warp.
2. The minimum length of a section of forms used on tangents shall be
10 ft (3 m).
3. Size, strength, and stability of forms shall be sufficient to resist
movement when subjected to the pressure of concrete placement,
including the impact and vibration of the finishing machine.
4. Flexible forms or wooden forms that bend to the required arc may be
used on curves with a radius of 150 ft (45 m) or less.
5. Forms shall be set on firm, solid sub grade that is in accordance with
required grade and alignment specifications, and joined together
neatly and tightly.
6. At least three flange to vertical face braces, pin pockets with pin
anchoring keys, and pins shall be used for each 10-ft form section.
7. Forms that show a deviation greater than 1/4 in (6 mm) in line or
1/8 in (3 mm) in grade shall be reset or replaced.
Page 12 of 15
PIP CVS02350
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012
8. Forms shall be marked at locations where reinforcing is discontinued

and saw cutting is required for contraction joints.
4.4.4.3 Execution
1. Pavement placement shall use either slip-form paving or fixed-form

paving methods.
2. Pavement placement shall comply with the provisions of
PIP STS03001 where applicable.
3. In addition to the provisions of PIP STS03001 for hot weather
placement, when the maximum daily air temperature is likely to
exceed 85F (29C), the following precaution shall be taken:
The concrete shall be placed at the coolest temperature
practicable, and the temperature of the concrete when placed
shall not exceed 90F (32C).
4. Test entire surface before initial set and correct irregularities or
undulations before finishing. Surface shall not have irregularities
greater than 1/8 in (3 mm) when checked with a 10-ft (3-meter)
straight edge held parallel to the centerline of the pavement.
5. Finish pavement with broom or artificial turf drag. Broom finish walks
and small areas. Finishing tools shall be kept in good condition.
6. If paving operations are discontinued for more than 30 minutes, a
construction joint shall be installed in accordance with the details
shown in PIP CVI02350 at the location of the nearest contraction or
expansion joint. Excess concrete beyond the location of the
construction joint shall be removed.
7. Pavement shall be closed to vehicular traffic until the concrete is at
least four days old and has reached a minimum compressive strength
of 3000 psi (21 MPa) or 75% of the specified minimum 28-day
compressive strength, whichever is greater.
8. After the concrete is at least 4 days old and has reached a minimum
compressive strength of 3000 psi (21 MPa) or 75% of the specified
minimum 28-day compressive strength, whichever is greater, the
pavement may be opened to limited traffic with wheel loads not to
exceed 5,000 lb (2,300 kg).
9. After the concrete has reached the specified minimum 28-day
compressive strength as verified by the tests, equipment with wheel
loads exceeding 5,000 lb (2,300 kg) may be permitted on the pavement.
4.4.4.4 Curing
1. Curing concrete pavement shall comply with the provisions of

PIP STS03001.
2. Concrete surfaces subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the
curing compound has been applied shall be re-sprayed unless
protected by sheeting.
Page 13 of 15
PIP CVS02350
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012
3. Areas where the curing compound is damaged by subsequent

construction operations within the curing period shall be
immediately re-sprayed.
4.4.4.5 Quality Control/Quality Assurance
1. Quality Control/Quality Assurance shall be in accordance with

PIP STS03001.
2. Locations and results of cylinder strength testing shall be recorded.
Strengths shall be as specified in the mix design section of this
specification.
3. Pavement sections which have more than 10% of cylinder tests that
fall below the specified minimum 28-day compressive strength shall
be removed and replaced. If purchaser agrees, additional strength
tests may be performed at constructors expense to determine if there
is an alternative to pavement removal.
4. Maintain a uniform consistency in consecutive batches of concrete.
5. Use following slumps for the placement method used:
SLIP-FORMED - 2.5 in (65 mm) or less
FIXED-FORMED - 4 in (100 mm) or less
4.4.4.6 Joint Construction
1. Joints shall be located as shown on the contract documents and

constructed as specified in PIP STS03001.
2. Joints shall align with existing or adjacent joints where possible.
3. Before sawing a joint, the concrete shall be examined closely for
cracks, and the joint shall not be sawed if a crack has occurred within
10 ft (3 m) from the planned joint location. Sawing shall be
discontinued when a crack develops ahead of the saw cut.
4. Joint cuts shall be a minimum of one-fourth pavement thickness.
Joints in pavements placed on lime-treated, soil-cement, or lean
concrete bases shall be a minimum of one-third pavement thickness.
5. Sealant materials for joints shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturers instructions.
6. Protect joint construction while placing concrete to avoid
interference with the function of the joint.
4.4.4.7 Jointed Reinforced Concrete Pavement (JRCP)
1. Reinforcement, ties, and dowels shall be placed as shown in the

contract documents.
2. Reinforcement installation shall be in accordance with PIP STS03001.
3. Unless otherwise specified in contract documents, see PIP CVI02350
for detail for reinforcing re-entrant corners to reduce cracking.
Re-entrant corners commonly occur at footings or inlets.
Page 14 of 15
PIP CVS02350
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012
4. Dowels shall be aligned perpendicular to the joint, parallel to each

other and parallel with the bottom and top surfaces of the pavement.
Dowels shall be securely supported on chairs.
5. Place the bar steel reinforcement after properly preparing the sub
grade. Place the longitudinal bars on top of the transverse bars and
firmly tie or fasten together at each intersection. Support the
assembled bars on bar chairs at a depth shown in the contract
documents. Bar chairs shall be sufficient in strength and number to
hold the steel reinforcement in position during construction.
6. Arrangement of splices and splice lap lengths shall be as shown in
7. Install dowels or tie bars at joints as shown in the contract documents.
8. Protect all bar steel reinforcement left protruding from the slab for
any extended period from deterioration caused by exposure.
9. Do not bend bar steel reinforcement or subject to loading or forces
that distort the steel or weaken the bond to the concrete.
10. Tie coated bars using procedures, equipment, and materials that do
not damage or cut the coating. Use one or more of the following
materials to tie coated bars:
a. Purchaser-approved plastic or nonmetallic material
b. Stainless steel wire
c. Nylon, epoxy, or plastic-coated wire
4.4.4.8 Jointed Plain Concrete Pavement (JPCP)
1. Reinforcing bars or welded wire reinforcing shall not be used in

JPCP except at re-entrant corners.
2. Dowels or tie bars shall only be used in JPCP if shown in the
contract documents.
3. Transverse contraction joints in roadway paving shall be sawed on a
skew of one unit longitudinal to six units transverse. Skew may be
varied to fit area geometry.
Page 15 of 15
COMPLETE REVISION
October 2012

Structural
PIP STF05501
Fixed Ladders and Cages Fabrication Details

In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities, this Practice
has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major
engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced.
While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most
users, individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and
take precedence over this Practice. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and
preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. Other brands having
the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named.
All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and
written authorization of PIP. Authorized Users may attach addenda or overlays to
clearly indicate modifications or exceptions to specific sections of PIP Practices.
Authorized Users may provide their clients, suppliers and contractors with copies of the
Practice solely for Authorized Users purposes. These purposes include but are not
limited to the procurement process (e.g., as attachments to requests for quotation/
purchase orders or requests for proposals/contracts) and preparation and issue of design
engineering deliverables for use on a specific project by Authorized Users client. PIPs
copyright notices must be clearly indicated and unequivocally incorporated in
documents where an Authorized User desires to provide any third party with copies of
the Practice.
PUBLISHING HISTORY
November 1994
Issued
December 1999
Revision
August 2000
February 2002
October 2012
Complete Revision
COMPLETE REVISION
October 2012

Structural
PIP STF05501
Table of Contents
1. Introduction .................................2
1.1 Purpose ............................................2

1.2 Scope ...............................................2
2. References ..................................2
2.1 Process Industry Practices ...............2

2.2 Industry Codes and Standards .........2
2.3 Government Regulations ..................2
3. Definitions ...................................2
4. Requirements ..............................3
Drawings
STF05501-01 Ladder Side Elevation Detail

STF05501-02 Ladder Rung and Base Details
STF05501-03 Ladder Base Details at Vertical Vessel
STF05501-04 Cage Hoop Details
STF05501-05 Step Thru Ladder Details
STF05501-06 Side Step Ladder Support Connection Details to Vertical Vessel
STF05501-07 Side Step Ladder Support Connection Details to Structure/Platform
STF05501-08 Step Thru Ladder Support Connection Details to Structure/Platform
STF05501-09 Ladder Guide Connection Details to Vertical Vessel
STF05501-10 Ladder Guide Connection Details to Structure/Platform
STF05501-11 Ladder Cage Details at Elevated Platform
Page 1 of 4
PIP STF05501
1.
COMPLETE REVISION
October 2012
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This Practice provides fabrication details for fixed ladders and cages.
1.2
Scope
This Practice describes requirements for fabricating typical OSHA-regulated fixed
ladders and cages for open structures, miscellaneous platforms, and vessels for regular
operational access and egress.
2.
References
Applicable parts of the following Practices, industry codes and standards, and government
regulations shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of
contract award shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles are used herein where
appropriate.
2.1

PIP STI03310 - Concrete Typical Details
2.2

ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi
Tensile Strength
2.3
The following government document has been used as a reference in the development of
this Practice.
U.S. Department of Labor (DOL) - Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA)
Regulations 29 CFR 1910 Subpart D (Walking-Working Surfaces)
3.
Definitions
specifications, sketches, practices, and data sheets, that the purchaser or engineer of record has
transmitted or otherwise communicated, either by incorporation or reference, and made part of
the legal contract agreement or purchase order between the purchaser and the structure/platform
fabricator, ladder fabricator and/or vessel manufacturer.
design drawings: Drawings produced by the structure/platform engineer and/or the vessel
engineer that show the structure, vessel, platform, and ladder and cage arrangements and details
Page 2 of 4
PIP STF05501
COMPLETE REVISION
October 2012
ladder fabricator: The party responsible for providing fabricated ladders and cages in accordance
with the contract documents. Unless otherwise noted, the term ladder fabricator shall apply also
to the ladder fabricators subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s).
site, facility, structure, platform, vessel or project wherein the ladders and cages will be used.
purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the structure/platform fabricator, ladder
fabricator and/or vessel manufacturer. The purchaser may be the owner or the owners authorized
agent.
structure/platform engineer: The engineer that performs the design of the structures/platforms,
including the ladders and cages that connect to the structures/platforms. The structure/platform
engineer may also perform the design of the ladders and cages that connect to vessels if the
design of the ladder support and guide connections is validated by a vessel engineer.
structure/platform fabricator: The party responsible for providing fabricated structural and
miscellaneous steel in accordance with the contract documents. Unless otherwise noted, the term
structure/platform fabricator shall apply also to the structure/platform fabricators
vessel engineer: The engineer that performs the design of the vessels, including the ladders and
cages that connect to the vessels. Alternatively, the vessel engineer may validate the design of the
ladder support and guide connections to vessels for ladders and cages that are designed by a
structure/platform engineer.
vessel manufacturer: The party responsible for providing manufactured vessels in accordance
with the contract documents. Unless otherwise noted, the term vessel manufacturer shall apply
also to the vessel manufacturers subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s).
4.
Requirements
4.1
Fixed ladders and cages shall be fabricated in accordance with PIP STS05120, this
Practice and fabrication detail drawings PIP STF05501-01 through PIP STF05501-11.
4.2
The project design drawings and other contract documents specify the following
information:
a.
Location and orientation of ladder and cage including the centerline of rungs in the
plane of the ladder and the centerline of the ladder and cage perpendicular to the plane
of the ladder
b.
Location of safety gate hinges relative to the orientation of ladder
c.
Selection of Type 1 ladder base (no connection at base) or Type 2 ladder base (with
connection at base) for ladders at vertical vessels. See ladder base details on drawing
PIP STF05501-03.
Page 3 of 4
PIP STF05501
COMPLETE REVISION
October 2012
d.
Top of bottom rung elevation for ladders at vertical vessels with Type 1 ladder base.
See ladder base details on drawing PIP STF05501-03.
e.
Bottom of ladder elevation for ladders at structures/platforms and horizontal vessels,

and ladders at vertical vessels with Type 2 ladder base. See ladder base details on
drawings PIP STF05501-02 and PIP STF05501-03.
f.
Top of platform elevations (walking surface) for platforms serviced by ladder
g.
Locations and details for ladder support members and support connectors to
structures/platforms or vessels
h.
Locations and details for ladder guide connectors to structures/platforms or vessels
i.
Whether a cage is required for the ladder
j.
Bottom of cage elevation if a cage is required
k.
Special fabrication details
l.
Any modifications to the requirements of this Practice
4.3
Unless otherwise specified, all material for ladders and cages shall be ASTM A36/A36M
steel. Metric equivalents for plates, bars and structural shapes shall be as specified in
contract documents as applicable.
4.4
Selection of ladder rails shall be based on guide locations shown on design drawings and
the unguided length criteria shown on drawing PIP STF05501-01, unless otherwise
specified in contract documents.
4.5
Entire ladder and cage assembly shall be welded construction. All welds shall be smooth,
continuous, and sealed. Weld spatter on rungs and rails shall be removed.
4.6
Unless otherwise specified, ladder and cage assemblies shall be galvanized after
fabrication in accordance with PIP STS05120.
4.7
Alternative or additional coatings for ladder and cage assemblies (e.g., safety yellow
paint), shall be in accordance with contract documents.
4.8
A self-closing double-bar safety gate, in accordance with OSHA Regulations 29 CFR

1910 Subpart D and any other requirements specified in the contract documents, shall be
provided at the opening in the platform railing for all platforms serviced by the ladder.
Safety gates shall be trial fitted in the shop and shipped loose. Unless otherwise specified,
swing gates shall have a minimum required swing angle of 90 degrees.
4.9
Unless otherwise specified, all bolts required for ladder and cage assembly erection shall
be provided by ladder fabricator. Bolts shall be 5/8-inch (16-mm) ASTM A307 bolts
galvanized in accordance with PIP STS05120.
Page 4 of 4
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2008

Structural
PIP STS03600
Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification


PRINTING HISTORY
November 1996 Issued
June 2002
Complete Revision
July 2008
Complete Revision
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2008

Structural
PIP STS03600
Table of Contents
1. Introduction................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................. 2
1.2 Scope................................................. 2
2. References .................................. 2
3. Definitions ................................... 2
4. Requirements.............................. 3
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
General .............................................. 3
Field Quality Control of Grout ............ 3
Testing ............................................... 3
Submittals .......................................... 4
Safety................................................. 4
Materials ............................................ 5
Preparation for Grouting .................... 5
Installation of Grout ........................... 6
Curing ................................................ 7
Page 1 of 6
PIP STS03600
1.
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2008
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This Practice provides the requirements for non-shrink cementitious grout
materials and installation.
1.2
Scope
This Practice describes the requirements for supplying, testing, and installing nonshrink cementitious grout materials.
2.
References
award shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles will be used herein where
appropriate.
2.1

ASTM C109/C109M- Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Hydraulic-Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. [ 50-mm] Cube Specimens)
ASTM C827 Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of
Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures
ASTM C1090 Standard Test Method for Measuring Changes in Height of
Cylindrical Specimens of Hydraulic-Cement Grout
ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic
Cement Grout (Nonshrink)
2.2
Federal standards and instructions of the U. S. Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA), including any additional requirements by state or local
agencies that have jurisdiction where the grout is to be installed, shall apply,
including the following:
Code of Federal Regulations, OSHA Part 1910
3.
Definitions
constructor: The party responsible for supplying the materials, equipment, tools, supervision,
and labor for the installation of the grout in accordance with the contract documents. Unless
otherwise noted, the term constructor shall apply also to the constructors subcontractor(s)
and vendor(s).
Page 2 of 8
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STS03600
July 2008
constructor
grout manufacturer: The party who produces and warrants the performance of the grout
provided in accordance with the contract documents. The grout is manufactured in a
controlled process using standard codes, specifications, tests and possibly includes shop
drawings to assist in proper application, installation and/or use. Unless otherwise noted, the
term grout manufacturer shall apply also to the grout manufacturers subcontractor(s) and/or
vendor(s).
owner: The party who has authority through ownership, lease, or other legal agreement over
the site wherein the grout will be used
4.
Requirements
4.1
4.2
4.3
General
4.1.1
The constructor shall furnish all equipment, materials, labor, and supervision
and shall perform all operations necessary for the formwork, proper mixing,
placing, finishing, and curing of nonshrink cementitious grout, hereafter
referred to as grout, where indicated by the contract documents.
4.1.2
Any conflicts or inconsistencies between this Practice, the design drawings,

the grout manufacturers specifications and recommendations, and other
contract documents shall be brought to the attention of the purchaser for
resolution before the work begins.
Field Quality Control of Grout

4.2.1
The constructor shall be solely responsible for the quality control of all
constructor-provided materials, installations, and workmanship, including
those items or installations provided by any of the constructors subcontractors
or vendors.
4.2.2
Notwithstanding the constructors responsibility for quality, the grout

manufacturer shall provide a technical representative who shall be on-site to
review the grouting set-up procedures and the grouting manufacturers
instructions with those who will actually be doing the grouting. The technical
representative shall remain at the grouting site as long and as often as
required to ensure that the grout manufacturers installation instructions are
being followed. This requirement may be waived by the purchaser or as
otherwise specified in the contract documents.
4.2.3
The purchaser reserves the right to make inspections at any time during
mixing of the materials and during execution of all grout work.
Testing
4.3.1
After initial prequalification, grout shall be sampled and tested if required by

Page 3 of 8
PIP STS03600
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2008
4.3.2
Three sets of three test cubes shall be made in the field each day that grout is
mixed and placed.
4.3.3
Test cubes shall be in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M.
4.3.4
One set of test cubes shall be transported to the testing laboratory after the
initial set and tested at 24 hours.
4.3.5
Cubes that remain at the site shall be tested as follows:

a. The remaining cubes shall be cured in the field for 3 days in the same
way as the placed grout is cured.
b. At the end of 3 days, the cubes shall be transported to the testing
laboratory for compressive strength testing.
c. One cube set shall be tested at 7 days and the other cube set at 28 days.
4.3.6
4.4
4.5
Page 4 of 8
Compressive strength of cubes shall be tested in accordance with

ASTM C109/C109M and shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1107/
C1107M.
Submittals
4.4.1
Unless noted otherwise in the contract documents, the grout manufacturers

literature, material safety data sheets, and certified test data for the grout
shall be submitted to the purchaser. The literature and certified test data shall
include the products compressive strength, adhesive properties, dimensional
stability, flowability, consistency, and other requirements in accordance with
this Practice.
4.4.2
A minimum of fifteen days before installation, a written quality control

program, describing in detail how compliance with this Practice shall be
ensured, shall be submitted to the purchaser for review and approval. The
program shall include procedures for all forming, handling, mixing, placement,
locating joints, including joint details, curing, testing, and inspection.
4.4.3
If testing is required by the contract documents, the constructor shall submit

to the purchaser copies of all inspection and test reports. Reports shall
contain the date of grout placement, grout type, identification of foundation
of grout placement, design compressive strength, air temperature at time of
grout placement, foundation temperature at time of grout placement, and
compressive break strengths.
Safety
4.5.1
The constructor shall be responsible for compliance with the safety

requirements specified in the contract documents and by the grout
manufacturer.
4.5.2
Grout Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) shall be available, and

associated hazards shall be reviewed with all grouting personnel.
4.5.3
Goggles or face shields, protective gloves, and aprons shall be worn by those
personnel mixing and placing the grout.
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STS03600
July 2008
4.6
4.5.4
Dust masks or respirators (in accordance with MSDS requirements) shall be

worn by those personnel exposed to the grout or aggregate prior to mixing.
4.5.5
Soap and water shall be available for periodic hand cleaning, should the need arise.
Materials
4.6.1
All materials shall be provided in accordance with the contract documents

and this Practice.
4.6.2
Grout Materials
4.6.2.1 All grout materials shall be proportioned products, in accordance
with ASTM C1107/C1107M.
4.6.2.2 Grout materials shall be packaged in accordance with ASTM
C1107/C1107M.
4.6.2.3 Grout materials shall require only the addition of potable water, and
shall not contain metallic substances, aluminum powder, measurable
amounts of water soluble chlorides, or other substances that may be
potentially harmful to concrete or steel reinforcement.
4.6.2.4 Compressive strength shall be in accordance with ASTM
C1107/C1107M (minimum 28-day compressive strength, 5000 psi
(34 Mpa)).
4.6.2.5 Cementitious grouts shall not shrink and shall expand no more than
4.0 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C827 (before set)
and no more than 0.3 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM
C1090 (after set).
4.6.2.6 All manufactured grout materials shall be delivered to the job site in
original unopened packages and shall be stored in accordance with
the grout manufacturers recommendations.
4.6.2.7 All materials and tools shall be stored in a clean, dry, and organized
manner.
4.6.2.8 Unless specified in the contract documents, admixtures shall not be
added to the grout without approval of the purchaser and the grout
manufacturer.
4.6.3
Mixing Water
Mixing water shall be potable and free of oils, acids, alkalines, organics, and
other deleterious materials.
4.7
Preparation for Grouting

4.7.1
Foundation preparation shall be in accordance with the grout manufacturers

written instructions and the following. If there is a conflict between the
manufacturers instructions and the following, the manufacturers
instructions shall take precedence.
a. New concrete foundations shall be cured for 7 days minimum before
surface preparation unless otherwise approved by purchaser.
Page 5 of 8
PIP STS03600
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2008
b. In the areas that will be covered by grout, the foundation shall be

prepared by chipping away all laitance (poor quality concrete) and oilsoaked or damaged concrete down to exposed fractured coarse
aggregate. Concrete must be removed in this chipping process down to
a depth to permit 1 inch (25 mm) minimum grout (or the grout thickness
specified in contract documents) between the concrete and the bottom
of of the base or sole plate. Scarifying the surface with a needle gun or
bushing tool or sandblasting to remove laitance from the foundation is
unacceptable. Concrete chipping and removal shall not be performed
with heavy tools, such as jackhammers, as they could damage the
structural integrity of the foundation. A chipping hammer with a chisel
bit is the preferred tool for this purpose.
c. When the surface chipping is complete, the foundation shall be thoroughly
swept and air-blown free of all dust with clean, dry, oil-free air.
d. The foundation must be kept free of contamination by oil, dirt,
water, etc., after it has been prepared for grouting. Protective sheeting
(such as sheets of clean polyethylene) shall be used to cover the
prepared surfaces when work is not in progress.
4.7.2
Grout Forms
a. Grout forms shall be built of materials of adequate strength and securely
anchored and sealed to withstand the liquid head and forces developed
by the grout during placement.
b. Forms shall not be attached to the foundation using power nailing.
c. Grout forms shall be sealed to prevent grout leakage. Bitumastic or
room temperature vulcanizable (RTV) silicone rubber can be used for
this purpose.
d. Unless otherwise shown in the contract documents, grout forms shall
have minimum 3/4-inch (19 mm), 45 chamfer strips at all exposed
grout corners.
4.8
4.7.3
All metal surfaces of base plates and equipment bases which are to be in direct
contact with the grout shall be free of oil, grease, and other foreign substances.
4.7.4
A bond breaker in accordance with the grout manufacturers recommendations

shall be applied to the surface of the formwork in contact with the grout.
4.7.5
Joints in grout shall be located in accordance with the contract documents or

as recommended by the grout manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown in the
contract documents, expansion joints shall be made from 1-inch (25 mm)
thick closed-cell neoprene foam rubber (polystyrene may also be used).
These shall be glued in position prior to the grout placement with silicone
rubber (RTV) or elastic epoxy seam sealant (liquid rubber).
Installation of Grout
4.8.1
Page 6 of 8
Grout shall be stored, mixed, placed, and cured in accordance with the grout
manufacturers written requirements and at temperature ranges that are
consistent with the grout manufacturers recommendations. The constructor
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STS03600
July 2008
shall be responsible for reading, understanding, and complying with the grout
manufacturers instructions.
4.8.2
Grout shall be dry packed, flowed, or pumped into place in accordance with
the grout manufacturers written instructions for the specific grout being
installed. Dry packing shall be used only where there is adequate accessibility.
Comment:
For some grouts, particular installation methods are

restricted or prohibited by the grout manufacturer. Therefore,
manufacturers written instructions shall be strictly followed.
4.8.3
Grouting shall be performed with ambient temperatures and mix

temperatures between 40F (4C) and 90F (32C) unless otherwise
permitted by the grout manufacturer. Comply with the manufacturers
special requirements for grouting done outside of this temperature range.
4.8.4
Concrete surfaces in contact with the grout shall be saturated surface dry
(saturated with clean water before grout placement with the surface of the
concrete damp but free from standing water).
4.8.5
All grout shall be placed in only one direction to prevent trapping air.
4.8.6
Grout shall be applied in the thickness specified in the contract documents.
4.8.7
Grouting shall be quick and continuous to avoid segregation, bleeding, or

premature initial set.
4.8.8
Retempering of grout by adding water after stiffening is not permitted.
4.8.9
Where forms are not used, the grout shall be cut back to the lower edge of the
baseplate after it has reached its initial set. The cutback shall be at a 45
angle, unless otherwise indicated in the contract documents.
4.8.10 If grout is placed through grout holes, the grout shall be placed into one hole
continuously until the grout has passed a second hole. A liquid head pressure
shall be maintained at the first access hole until a head pressure has been
established at the next hole. Grout placement shall continue from the next
hole in a similar fashion.
4.8.11 All voids in anchor bolt sleeves (except for rotating equipment) shall be
cleared of all foreign material and completely filled with grout, unless shown
otherwise on the drawings. Anchor bolt sleeves for rotating equipment, or
other equipment shown on drawings, shall be filled with a non-bonding
moldable material prior to grout placement.
4.8.12 If grouting around sliding surfaces, (e.g. reactor skirts, exchanger supports,
etc.), grout shall be placed in such a manner that does not inhibit movement
between sliding surfaces.
4.8.13 All voids that remain after removal of temporary shims shall be filled with
the same grout material.
4.9
Curing
The following shall be adhered to unless the grout manufacturer specifies otherwise:
Page 7 of 8
PIP STS03600
Page 8 of 8
COMPLETE REVISION
July 2008
4.9.1
Forms shall remain in place for 24 hours minimum after completion of

grouting.
4.9.2
Moisture loss must be prevented by keeping the exposed surfaces wet for 7
days minimum or by application of a curing compound.
4.9.3
Moist curing can be achieved by applying wet rags or burlap to the exposed
surfaces. The wet rags or burlap shall be covered with plastic to prevent
excessive evaporation. The wet rags or burlap shall be rewetted as necessary
to maintain moistness.
4.9.3
Temperature of the grouted base and concrete foundation shall be maintained

between 40F (4C) and 90F (32C) for 3 days minimum after the initial set.
4.9.4
Equipment shall not be placed in service before the grout has attained
80 percent of the specified 28-day design compressive strength.
COMPLETE REVISION
November 2006

Structural
PIP STF05530
Grating Fabrication Details


PRINTING HISTORY
March 2001
Issued
November 2006
Complete Revision
COMPLETE REVISION
November 2006

Structural
PIP STF05530
Table of Contents
1. Introduction .................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................... 2
1.2 Scope .................................................. 2
2. References ................................... 2
2.1 Process Industry Practices.................. 2
2.2 Industry Codes and Standards............ 2
3. Definitions .................................... 2
4. Requirements ............................... 3
4.1 General................................................ 3
4.2 Materials.............................................. 3
4.3 Fabrication........................................... 3
Drawings
Detail 1. Grating Opening at Interior
Column
Detail 2. Grating Opening at Base Plate
Detail 3. Grating Opening at Corner
Column
Detail 4. Circular Openings
Detail 5. Toe Plate Banding at Opening for
Pipe Support
Detail 6. Toe Plate Banding at Openings for
Equipment
Detail 7. Typical Grating Panel Layout
Detail 8. Typical Grating Panel Fastener
Arrangement
Detail 9. Typical Clearances at Perimeter of
Floors
Detail 10. Typical Clearances at Railing
Page 1 of 9
PIP STF05530
1.
COMPLETE REVISION
November 2006
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This Practice provides structural steel fabricators with standard grating details for the
fabrication of grating in process industry facilities.
1.2
Scope
This Practice describes the requirements for fabrication of grating for typical
platforms and is intended to be issued to fabricators supplying grating. Details are
provided that show the configurations for openings in the grating and typical details
for grating arrangement and clearances.
2.
References
shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles are used herein where appropriate.
2.1

PIP STF05520 - Pipe Railing for Walking and Working Surfaces Fabrication
Details
PIP STF05521 - Angle Railing for Walking and Working Surfaces Fabrication
Details
2.2

ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,
Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength
Low-Alloy with Improved Formability
3.
Definitions
fabricator.
structure, foundations, materials, and appurtenances of the project. The engineer of record
shall be a professional engineer as defined by these practices.
Page 2 of 9
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STF05530
November 2006
fabricator: The party responsible for furnishing fabricated structural and miscellaneous steel
purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the fabricator. The purchaser may be the
4.
Requirements
4.1
4.2.
4.3
General
4.1.1
All equipment, materials, labor, and supervision shall be provided and all
operations necessary for the fabrication of grating platforms shall be
performed in accordance with the contract documents.
4.1.2
Fabricator shall comply with all safety requirements specified in the contract
documents.
4.1.3
Fabricator shall be solely responsible for quality control of all materials and
workmanship.
4.1.4
Grating shall be fabricated in accordance with Federal Standards and

Instructions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA),
including any additional requirements by state or local agencies that have
jurisdiction where the grating platform is to be erected.
Materials
4.2.1
Unless otherwise specified, the materials for grating shall be in accordance

with PIP STS05120.
4.2.2
Unless otherwise specified, steel grating shall be rectangular welded type,

with plain 3/16-inch x 1-1/4-inch bearing bars on 1-3/16-inch spacing
center-to-center with cross bars on 4-inch spacing center-to-center. The
metric equivalent for grating shall be as specified in the contract documents
as applicable.
4.2.3
Banding and toe plate banding shall be steel in accordance with ASTM
A36/A36M or ASTM A1011/A1011M. The metric equivalents for bars and
plates used for banding and toe plate banding shall be as specified in contract
documents as applicable.
4.2.4
Fastener assemblies shall be as specified in the contract documents. The

fabricator shall provide a minimum of two fastener assemblies per support
beam per panel, with a minimum of four fastener assemblies per panel. In
addition, the fabricator shall provide a minimum of 5% extra quantity of
fastener assemblies.
Fabrication
4.3.1
All grating shall be fabricated in accordance with PIP STS05120 and

Details 1 through 10 of this Practice.
4.3.2
The location and limits of grating and the direction of the span of grating
bearing bars shall be in accordance with the contract documents.
Page 3 of 9
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STF05530
Page 4 of 9
November 2006
4.3.3
At joints in the grating floor system, cross sections of bearing bars for grating
panels shall be aligned with cross sections of abutting panels to maintain
spacing symmetry. Grating joints shall be permitted only at supports.
4.3.4
Clearance allowances shall be provided for fitting grating panels together, for
penetrations, for toe plates, etc., and shall be in accordance with Details in
this practice and the contract documents.
4.3.5
Grating shall have 1-inch (25-mm) minimum bearing on supporting steel.
4.3.6
If grating areas are shown as removable in the contract documents, the

weight of each removable fabricated grating section shall not exceed
350 pounds (160 kgf).
4.3.7
Edges of removable grating panels shall be banded.
4.3.8
Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, edges of grating panels

other than removable panels need not be banded. Where butting grating panel
ends occur, stops shall be provided at each side of the panel ends as shown in
Detail 7.
4.3.9
Openings and cutouts in grating panels for piping, conduit, structural

members, and equipment shall be banded as indicated on the following
details and the contract documents.
Drawings
Detail 1 - Grating Opening at Interior Column
Detail 2 - Grating Opening at Base Plate
Detail 3 - Grating Opening at Corner Column
Detail 4 - Circular Openings
Detail 5 - Toe Plate Banding at Opening for Pipe Support
Detail 6 - Toe Plate Banding at Openings for Equipment
Detail 7 - Typical Grating Panel Layout
Detail 8 - Typical Grating Panel Fastener Arrangement
Detail 9 - Typical Clearances at Perimeter of Floors
Detail 10 - Typical Clearances at Railing
This page is intentionally left blank.
COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007

Structural
PIP STS03001
Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification


PRINTING HISTORY
December 1995
July 2001
May 2007
Issued
Complete Revision
Complete Revision
COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007

Structural
PIP STS03001
Table of Contents
1. Introduction................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................. 2
1.2 Scope................................................. 2
2. References .................................. 2
3. Definitions ................................... 3
4. Requirements.............................. 4
4.1 General .............................................. 4
4.2. Materials ............................................ 7
4.3. Execution ........................................... 8
4.4 Loading of Self-Supporting
Members.......................................... 14
Tables
Table 1 - Tolerances for Embedments
Table 2 - Maximum Sizes of Aggregate
Table 3 - Supplier Data Requirements
Page 1 of 15
PIP STS03001
1.
COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This Practice provides requirements for cast-in-place concrete construction.
1.2
Scope
This Practice describes the technical requirements for furnishing and installing
materials and for proportioning, mixing, placing, testing, and curing of plain and
reinforced concrete.
This Practice supplements ACI 301-05, Specifications for Structural Concrete.
2.
References
appropriate.
2.1

American Concrete Institute (ACI)
ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete
Construction and Materials
ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete
ACI 211.2 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural
Lightweight Concrete
ACI 301-05 - Specifications for Structural Concrete
ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing
Concrete
ACI 304.2R - Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods
ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 306.1 - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete
ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete
ACI 504R - Guide to Sealing Joints in Concrete Structures
ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual
Page 2 of 15
COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007
PIP STS03001

ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete
ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain
Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or
Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
ASTM C1012 - Standard Test Method for Length Change of HydraulicCement Mortars Exposed to Sulfate Solution
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA)
Quality Control Manual - Section 3, Certification of Ready Mixed
Concrete Production Facilities Plant Certification Check List
2.2
(OSHA)
OSHA 29 CFR 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction
3.
Definitions
constructor: The party responsible for supplying the materials, equipment, tools,
supervision, and labor for the installation of the concrete in accordance with the contract
documents. Unless otherwise noted, the term constructor shall apply also to the
constructors subcontractor(s) and vendor(s).
specifications, sketches, practices, and data sheets, that the purchaser or engineer of
record has transmitted or otherwise communicated, either by incorporation or reference,
and made part of the legal contract agreement or purchase order between the purchaser
and the constructor.
The engineer of record shall be licensed as defined by the laws of the locality in which
the work is to be constructed, and be qualified to practice in the specialty discipline
required for the work described in the contract documents.
Page 3 of 15
PIP STS03001
COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007
manufacturer: The party who produces and warrants the performance of the (products,
materials and/or items) provided in accordance with the contract documents. The
(products, materials and/or items) shall:
a. Be manufactured in a controlled process
b. Have standard codes, specifications, tests
c. Possibly include shop drawings to assist in proper application, installation and/or
use
Unless otherwise noted, the term manufacturer shall apply also to the manufacturers
owner: The party who has authority through ownership, lease, or other legal agreement
over the (site, facility, structure or project) wherein (what is to be provided or installed)
will be used.
purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the constructor. The purchaser may be
the owner or the owners authorized agent.
supplier: The party responsible for supplying concrete materials in accordance with the
contract documents.
4.
Requirements
4.1
General
4.1.1
Concrete supply and construction shall be in accordance with all

requirements of ACI 301-05, except as modified or supplemented in this
Practice or by the contract documents.
4.1.2
The following ACI documents are acceptable practices and may be

helpful in meeting requirements of this Practice and ACI 301:
a. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete
b. ACI 211.2 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for
Structural Lightweight Concrete
c. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
d. ACI 304.2R - Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods
e. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting
f.
ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete
g. ACI 347R- Guide to Formwork for Concrete

h. ACI 504R - Guide to Sealing Joints in Concrete Structures
Page 4 of 15
4.1.3
Requirements of state or local agencies that have jurisdiction where the

concrete is to be placed shall apply.
4.1.4
Any conflicts or inconsistencies between this Practice, the design

drawings, or other contract documents shall be brought to the attention of
the purchaser for resolution.
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STS03001
May 2007
4.1.5
Quality Control
4.1.5.1 A written quality control program and inspection procedures
document shall be submitted to the purchaser for approval. These
documents shall provide details of how compliance with the
requirements of this Practice and contract documents shall be
achieved.
4.1.5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the
purchaser shall be responsible for furnishing a testing agency to
act as the owners testing agency as defined by ACI 301.
4.1.5.3 The purchaser shall have the right to make inspections at any
time at the source of supply of materials, at the place of
preparation of materials, at the mixing plant if ready mixed
concrete is used, and during execution of all concrete work.
4.1.5.4 Samples for testing shall be obtained in accordance with ACI
301. The rate of sampling shall be in accordance with ACI 301
and the following:
a. For structures and foundations, samples shall be obtained in
accordance with the following requirements:
(1) One sample minimum per 100 cubic yards (76 cubic
meters) of concrete
(2) One sample minimum for each structure or foundation,
except if placing a number of items each smaller than
15 cubic yards (11 cubic meters)
(3) One sample minimum per 15 cubic yards (11 cubic
meters) if placing a number of items each smaller than
15 cubic yards (11 cubic meters)
b. For paving and slabs on grade, obtain one sample per
50 cubic yards (38 cubic meters) of concrete.
c. For underground pipe or electrical encasements and
fireproofing, obtain one sample at the beginning of each day
of concreting work.
d. For all other concrete, obtain samples in accordance with
Section 4.1.5.4.a.
e. Additional samples shall be obtained if observations of
tests for slump, temperature, or air content indicate
nonconformance with the contract documents.
4.1.5.5 For each concrete sample obtained, the following tests shall be
conducted in accordance with ACI 301:
a. Strength tests
b. Slump
Page 5 of 15
PIP STS03001
COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007
c. Temperature
d. Air content
4.1.5.6 Test cylinder sets shall be dated and numbered consecutively.
4.1.5.7 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, concrete
quality assurance test reports shall be provided to the purchaser
weekly. Data in the test report shall include, but not be limited
to, the following:
a. Location of concrete on the job and associated drawing
numbers and structure/foundation identification
b. Specified strength (f c)
c. Date poured
d. Proportions of concrete mix or mix identification
e. 7- and 28-day compressive strength
f.
Slump, air and concrete temperatures at time of pour, time of

day concrete was batched, and time of day concrete was
poured
g. Air content
h. Name of inspector making cylinders and cylinder number
4.1.5.8 Where concrete is to be placed in the United States of America,
ready mixed concrete suppliers shall be certified in accordance
with one of the following:
a. Certification by holding a current NRMCA Certificate of
Conformance for Concrete Production Facilities
b. Certification from an independent testing agency stating
conformance with NRMCA Certification of Ready Mixed
Concrete Production Facilities
c. Certification from the State Department of Transportation
from the state of the project site location
The certifications shall be current for the duration of the concrete
supply.
4.1.6
Submittals
4.1.6.1 Before the start of work, documentation in accordance with the
requirements of ACI 301 which is listed in Table 3, as a
minimum, shall be submitted to the purchaser for review and
approval.
4.1.6.2 If required by the contract documents, additional documentation
in accordance with the requirements of ACI 301 which is not
listed in Table 3 shall be submitted to the purchaser for review
and approval.
Page 6 of 15
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STS03001
May 2007
4.1.7
Safety
The work shall be in accordance with all applicable national, state, or
local safety requirements, site specific requirements of the purchaser, and
all safety requirements specified in the contract documents.
4.2.
Materials
4.2.1
General
4.2.1.1 Unless authorized in writing by the purchaser, materials that are
not in accordance with this Practice or the contract documents
shall not be permitted.
4.2.1.2 Materials shall be in accordance with applicable local volatile
organic compound regulations.
4.2.2
Cementitious Materials
4.2.2.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, Portland
cement shall be in accordance with ASTM C150, Type I or
Type II.
4.2.2.2 Only one brand of cement shall be used.
4.2.2.3 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, fly ash
may be used in accordance with ACI 301 and shall conform to
ASTM C618, Class C or Class F. If Class C fly ash is used in a
moderately to extremely aggressive sulfate environment, the mix
design shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C1012 to verify
sulfate resistance. (Note: Class C fly ash, which contains
relatively high levels of amorphous calcium aluminate, may
make more calcium hydroxide available for reaction with
sulfates, thus contributing to concrete deterioration.)
4.2.3
Admixtures
4.2.3.1 All admixtures, except air entrainment admixtures, shall require
the engineer of records authorization for use.
4.2.3.2 Only one manufacturer for each admixture shall be used.
4.2.3.3 Calcium chloride and admixtures containing soluble chlorides
4.2.4
Aggregate
4.2.4.1 Aggregate shall be in accordance with ASTM C33.
4.2.4.2 Aggregate shall be obtained from a single source.
4.2.5
Reinforcement
4.2.5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents,
reinforcing bars shall be deformed billet steel in accordance with
ASTM A615/A615M, grade 60.
4.2.5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, all
reinforcing shall be uncoated.
Page 7 of 15
PIP STS03001
COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007
4.2.5.3 Welded wire fabric shall be plain wire fabric and in accordance
with ASTM A185/A185M.
4.2.5.4 Tie wire shall be black annealed wire, 16 gage minimum.
4.2.6
Water
4.2.6.1 Water used for mixing water, ice, curing, or any other function
relating to placement of concrete shall be potable.
4.2.6.2 Other water may be used if tested for suitability in accordance
with ASTM C94/C94M.
4.2.6.3 Wash water from mixer washout operations shall not be used as
mixing water.
4.2.7
Accessories
All accessories shall be provided in accordance with the contract
documents.
4.3
Execution
4.3.1
General
Storage, handling, measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing of
concrete materials shall follow the methods and means outlined in ACI
304R and comply with manufacturers recommendation for handling,
storage, and protection.
4.3.2
Formwork
4.3.2.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, 3/4-inch
(20-millimeter) chamfer strips shall be provided at all corners on
permanently exposed surfaces.
4.3.2.2 Form-release agents shall not be applied if concrete surfaces
shall receive special finishes or where the agent may affect
applied coverings. Alternately, inside surfaces of untreated
formwork shall be soaked with clean water and kept moist before
placing concrete.
4.3.2.3 Form removal shall be in accordance with ACI 301 and the
following:
a. For structures for which the forms do not provide vertical
support (e.g., footings, piers, columns, walls, or sides of
beams), the forms may be removed 48 hours after
completion of placement if the concrete is sufficiently hard
to prevent damage by form removal, and if curing starts
immediately.
b. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, forms
for self-supporting members may be removed if the concrete
strength is at least 80 percent of the specified 28-day
strength. Refer to ACI 301-05, Section 2.3.4, for determining
strength of concrete for removal of formwork.
Page 8 of 15
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STS03001
May 2007
c. Unless otherwise approved by the purchaser, forms shall not

be left permanently in place.
4.3.2.4 Form accessories that remain embedded in the concrete (e.g., ties
and hangers) shall be a commercially manufactured type.
4.3.2.5 Unless specified otherwise in the contract documents, formed
concrete surfaces shall be constructed in accordance with the
tolerances shown in ACI 117. Tolerances for concrete surfaces
not specifically mentioned in ACI 117 shall be in accordance
with ACI 117, Section 4.
4.3.2.6 Formwork for column and wall shall be provided with adequate
cleanout openings to permit inspection and easy cleaning after
reinforcement has been placed.
4.3.2.7 All side and bottom surfaces of structures that will be exposed
shall be formed. Unless otherwise approved by the engineer of
record, vertical surfaces of subgrade structures and pavements
shall be formed at least to a depth of 300 mm (12 inches) below
grade. The structure below this level may be placed against
earth.
4.3.3
Joints
4.3.3.1 All joints shall be located and constructed in accordance with the
contract documents. Any variation from the location specified
shall be approved by the purchaser.
4.3.3.2 Control joints to be cut with a saw shall be cut as soon as the
concrete is hard enough to prevent surface raveling and
aggregate dislodging, and within 12 hours after concrete
placement.
a. Control joints shall be cut in accordance with the saw
manufacturers written recommendations.
b. Sawing sequence shall be based on pour time and size of
slab.
4.3.3.3 Control joints in slab toppings shall be located directly above
and in line with the control joints in the underlying concrete slab.
4.3.3.4 Isolation joints shall be placed where the pavement adjoins
vertical surfaces (e.g., walls, columns, catch basins, manholes,
and equipment foundations). Isolation joints shall be located in
accordance with the contract documents.
4.3.3.5 Dowels at expansion joints shall be properly aligned to prevent
any restraint on expansion movement at the joint.
4.3.3.6 The surface of joints shall be cleaned of scale and laitance and
thoroughly wetted, but free of standing water, before placing
adjoining concrete.
Page 9 of 15
PIP STS03001
4.3.4
COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007
Waterstops
Waterstops shall be installed in accordance with the contract documents
and the manufacturers recommendations.
4.3.5
Reinforcing and Embedments

4.3.5.1 Detailing and Fabrication
1. Reinforcement placing drawings and bending schedules shall

be prepared in accordance with ACI SP-66. Drawings and
schedules shall show number, grade, size, length, mark,
location, and bending diagrams for reinforcing bars.
2. Splices in reinforcement shall be detailed, fabricated, and
located as shown on the drawings only.
3. Fabrication drawings shall indicate the related PO number,
release number, and design drawing number.
4. Reinforcement shall be tagged with weather-resistant metal
tags.
5. Each bundle of fabricated bars shall be tagged. The tags shall
indicate drawing number, release number, mark number,
grade, bar quantity, and bar size.
6. Each bundle of stock-length straight bars shall be tagged to
indicate bar quantity, grade, bar size, and bar length.
7. Fabrication tolerances shall comply with the requirements of
ACI 117.
4.3.5.2 Installation
1. Embedded aluminum items shall not be permitted.

2. Anchor bolts, anchors, inserts, sleeves, drains, curb and seat
angles, nosing, and other embedded items shall be installed
before placing concrete. Welding of these items to the
reinforcing bars shall not be permitted.
3. Anchor bolt threads shall be protected from damage and kept
free of concrete.
4. Anchor bolt sleeves shall be capped or plugged to keep out
water, concrete, and debris.
5. Reinforcing bars shall be spliced in accordance with the
design drawings only. Unless otherwise approved by the
engineer of record, welded or mechanical splices shall not be
permitted.
4.3.5.3 Tolerances
Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents,

embedments shall be installed in accordance with the tolerances
shown in Table 1. The term bolt group used in Table 1 is
defined as the set of anchor bolts for a single fabricated steel
shipping piece, or a single piece of equipment or skid.
Page 10 of 15
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STS03001
May 2007
Table 1 Tolerances for Embedments

Measurement
4.3.6
Tolerance
Anchor bolt projection
+ 1/4 inch (6 mm), 0.00 inch (0 mm)
Center of bolt group
+ or 1/4 inch (6 mm)
Center to center of any two anchor

bolts within a bolt group
Center to center between bolt groups
Anchor bolt plumbness
1/8 inch in 3 feet (4 mm in 1 meter)
Plate insert horizontal and vertical

location
+ or 1/4 inch (6 mm) horizontal and

+ or 1/32 inch (1 mm) vertical
Proportioning and Mixing

4.3.6.1 The minimum 28-day compressive strength, f c, shall be in
accordance with the contract documents.
4.3.6.2 If high early-strength concrete is specified, compressive strength
shall be 7-day strength.
maximum size of coarse aggregate in concrete shall be in
accordance with ACI 301 and shall not be greater than the sizes
shown in Table 2.
Table 2 Maximum Sizes of Aggregate
Type of Construction
Maximum Size
Slabs and walls less than 8 inches thick
3/4 inch (20 mm)
Lightweight concrete
3/4 inch (20mm)
Liquid retaining structures
3/4 inch (20 mm)
Underground pipe or electrical encasements
3/4 inch (20 mm)
Structures (beam and column construction)
3/4 inch (20 mm)
Fireproofing or structural steel encasements
3/8 inch (10 mm)
All other items
1-1/2 inch (40 mm)
4.3.6.4 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, maximum

water-soluble chloride ion concentrations in hardened concrete
shall be 0.30% by weight of cement, in accordance with
ACI 301-05, Table 4.2.2.6, for Other reinforced concrete
construction.
4.3.6.5 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, air content
at the point of delivery shall be in accordance with ACI 301-05,
Table 4.2.2.4, for moderate exposure.
maximum water-cementitious materials ratio shall be 0.4 for
liquid-retaining (hydraulic) structures and 0.5 for all other
concrete.
4.3.6.7 Unless otherwise directed by the engineer of record, all
admixtures shall be added at the batch plant.
Page 11 of 15
PIP STS03001
COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007
4.3.6.8 Concrete envelopes for underground electrical ducts and cover

slabs for direct-buried cables shall have a specified 28 day
compressive strength of 2,000 psi (14 MPa) and be colored red
by adding 10 pounds of red oxide powder per cubic yard
(6 kilograms per cubic meter) of concrete unless otherwise noted
in the contract documents.
4.3.6.9 Concrete envelopes for underground instrument air-line ducts
shall have a specified 28 day compressive strength of 2,000 psi
(14 MPa) and be colored yellow by adding 10 pounds of yellow
oxide powder per cubic yard (6 kilograms per cubic meter) of
concrete unless otherwise noted in the contract documents.
4.3.6.10 Unless otherwise approved by the purchaser, job-mixed
concrete shall not be permitted.
4.3.7
Placing Concrete
4.3.7.1 Inspection and authorization shall be obtained from the
purchaser before placing concrete.
4.3.7.2 Concrete delivery tickets shall be maintained as a record for
ready mixed concrete.
4.3.7.3 Concrete that has achieved initial set or has been contaminated
by foreign matter shall not be deposited in the structure.
4.3.7.4 Retempering or addition of water after concrete is first mixed
4.3.7.5 The addition of ice at the construction site shall be permitted
only if it has been considered in the mix design. The concrete
manufacturer shall provide written instructions on the required
amount of ice and the mixing procedure.
4.3.7.6 Materials and equipment for protection and curing shall be
operational at the placement site before placement begins.
4.3.7.7 Slabs shall be placed in alternating strips.
4.3.7.8 The interval between concrete deliveries shall be such that no
more than 20 minutes interruption elapse during placement of a
single foundation or slab, unless approved by the engineer of
record.
4.3.7.9 Discharge of the concrete shall be completed within 45 minutes
after the introduction of the mixing water to the cement and
aggregates or the introduction of the cement to the aggregates.
This time may be extended up to 90 minutes with approval of the
engineer of record.
4.3.8
Curing and Protection

4.3.8.1 Unless otherwise specified in this Practice or in the contract
documents, concrete shall be cured and protected in accordance
with ACI 301-05, Section 5.3.6.
Page 12 of 15
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STS03001
May 2007
4.3.8.2 Concrete not in contact with forms may utilize any of the
methods indicated in ACI 301-05, Section 5.3.6.4, for the
preservation of moisture. However, for interior concrete slabs,
ponding, sprayed water, or wet sand shall not be permitted.
4.3.8.3 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, liquid
membrane curing compounds shall not be used on surfaces that
shall receive bonded treatments, tiles, paint or other adhered
finishes, epoxy toppings, or additional concrete.
4.3.8.4 Hydraulic (Liquid-Tight) Structures
Any structure designated as a hydraulic structure in the contract

documents shall comply with the following:
1. Hydraulic structures shall be cured by a wet-cure procedure
only (e.g., use of ponding, sprinkling, or a moisture-retaining
fabric).
2. Moist wood forms in contact with concrete shall not be
considered as curing for hydraulic structures.
3. Curing shall occur for a minimum of 14 days.
4. Wall forms shall be loosened and water continually
sprinkled between the wall and forms.
4.3.9
Surface Finishing and Tolerances

4.3.9.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the surface
finish and correlating tolerance requirements shall be in
accordance with ACI 301.
4.3.9.2 Equipment bases shall be finished with a floated finish. Stairs,
steps, ramps, and walks shall be finished with a broom finish.
4.3.9.3 Interior floor slabs shall be finished with a trowel finish in
accordance with the conventional flat tolerance requirements of
ACI 117.
4.3.9.4 Roads, area paving, and exterior slabs shall be finished with a
broom or belt finish in accordance with the conventional
straightedged tolerance requirements of ACI 117.
4.3.10 Repair of Surface Defects

4.3.10.1 Unless otherwise specified or permitted by the engineer of
record, tie holes, honeycombs, and other concrete surface
defects shall be repaired promptly after form removal at a time
and in a manner that shall not delay, interfere with, or impair
the proper curing of the fresh concrete.
4.3.10.2 The engineer of record shall be notified before proceeding with
repair if the defect is either of the following sizes:
a. Depth is greater than 3 inches (75 mm) at the maximum
point and surface area is greater than 150 square inches
(100,000 square mm).
Page 13 of 15
PIP STS03001
COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007
b. Depth is greater than 1/4 the thickness of the member and

greater than 6 inches (150 mm) in any other direction.
4.3.10.3 Prepackaged grouts and patching compounds or a patching
mortar similar to the concrete mix without coarse aggregate
may be used with approval from the engineer of record. The
color shall match the surrounding area.
4.3.10.4 Out-of-tolerance slabs shall be repaired by grinding down high
points and/or raising low points by using a specified
underlayment compound or repair topping if the areas are
exposed.
4.3.10.5 Critical slab areas, identified in the contract documents shall be
replaced if out-of-tolerance. A demolition and replacement plan
for the slab areas shall be submitted to the engineer of record
for review and approval before proceeding.
4.3.11 Hot and Cold Weather Concreting
4.3.11.1 If the combination of temperature, humidity, and wind velocity
as shown in ACI 305R, Figure 2.1.5, is expected to cause a rate
of evaporation equal to or greater than 0.2 pounds per square
foot per hour (9.6 newtons per square meter per hour), the
recommendations of ACI 305R shall be followed for concrete
supply and construction.
4.3.11.2 If the minimum temperature criteria of ACI 301-05,
Section 4.2.2.8, applies, the requirements of ACI 306.1 shall be
followed for concrete supply and construction.
4.3.12 Architectural and Prestressed Concrete
Architectural and prestressed concrete requirements that are in addition
to ACI 301 and this Practice shall be in accordance with the contract
documents.
4.4
Loading of Self-Supporting Members

Unless otherwise approved by the engineer of record, no superimposed load shall
be applied to self-supporting members before the 28-day verification of the
specified strength, unless the specified 28-day strength has been verified by fieldcured cylinders.
Page 14 of 15
COMPLETE REVISION
PIP STS03001
May 2007
Table 3 Supplier Data Requirements

Type of Submittal
For
Approval
Supplier's QA Program
For
Record
When Required
Weekly
Batch Plant and Truck

Mixer Certification
Remarks
After
Before
With RFQ
Notice to Fabrication Submittal
Proceed
X
Mix Designs
Trial Batch Qualification

Test Results
Cement Certifications
Mineral Additive
Certifications
Fine and Coarse

Aggregate Certifications
Admixture Certifications
Material Suppliers,
Sources, and
Certifications
Manufacturer Spec's,
Certifications and
Installation Instructions
Proposed Curing Methods
Reinforcing Bending
Schedule and Placing
Drawings
Certified Mill Test Reports

for each bar size and heat
number
Epoxy Coating Inspection

Reports
Delivery Ticket
Compression Test
Reports
Compression Breaks
500 psi (3500 KPa) or
more below required
Water Testing Reports
If applicable
7 days
7 days
If requested
If applicable
With delivery
X
Same day
submittal
10 days
If applicable
Page 15 of 15
TECHNICAL CORRECTION
June 2004

Structural
PIP STF05521
Details for
Angle Railings for
Walking and Working Surfaces

This Practice is subject to revision at any time by the responsible Function Team and will
be reviewed every 5 years. This Practice will be revised, reaffirmed, or withdrawn.

PRINTING HISTORY
April 1999
Issued
May 2001
October 2003
June 2004
Complete Revision
May 2004

Structural
PIP STF05521
Details for
Angle Railings for
Walking and Working Surfaces
Table of Contents
1. Introduction................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................. 2
1.2 Scope................................................. 2
2. References .................................. 2
2.1 Process Industry Practices................ 2
2.2 Industry Codes and Standards.......... 2
3. Definitions ................................... 3
4. Requirements.............................. 3
List of Details
Plan - Typical Post Location ...................... 4
Elevation - Typical Railing ......................... 4
Elevation A-A ............................................. 5
Section B-B................................................ 5
Section C-C ............................................... 6
Section D-D ............................................... 6
Elevation E-E ............................................. 6
Elevation F-F ............................................. 6
Top Rail Splice Detail ................................ 7
Intermediate Rail Splice Detail .................. 7
Toe Plate Splice Detail .............................. 7
Detail 1....................................................... 7
Post Connections to Structural Steel......... 8
Section G-G .............................................. 8
Detail 2....................................................... 8
Section H-H ............................................... 8
Section J-J ................................................. 8
Railing Termination at Columns ................ 9
Section G-G (Alternate) ............................. 9
Section H-H (Alternate) ............................. 9
Elevation - Removable Railing Type I ..... 10
Elevation Removable Railing Type II....... 11
Detail 3..................................................... 11
Detail 4..................................................... 11
Post Connections to Concrete................. 12
Detail 5..................................................... 12
Detail 6..................................................... 12
Pipe Handrail Attachment to Wall Details 13
Wall-Mounted Handrail ............................ 13
Step Through Ladder Details................... 14
Page 1 of 14
PIP STF05521
Details for Angle Railings for Walking and Working Surfaces
1.
June 2004
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This Practice provides requirements for designers, fabricators, and installers of angle
railing.
1.2
Scope
This Practice provides fabrication and installation details for standard angle railing
for walking and working surfaces and for stair railing or handrail for egress stairs.
Although the details in this Practice are intended to meet U.S. Occupational Safety
and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for process facilities, they may not
meet the requirements of local or national building codes.
2.
References
Applicable requirements in the following PIP Practices, codes and standards, and government
regulations shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the
date of contract award shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles will be used
herein when appropriate.
2.1

PIP STF05501 - Fixed Ladders and Cages Details
PIP STS05120 - Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel
Specification
PIP STS05130 - Erection of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification
2.2

Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings
Metric Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Specification for
Structural Steel Buildings
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, Allowable Stress Design (ASD)
and Plastic Design
ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
60000 PSI Tensile Strength
ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
Page 2 of 14
June 2004
3.
PIP STF05521
Details for Angle Railings for Walking and Working Surfaces
Definitions
The following definitions from OSHA 1910, Subpart D, shall apply to this Practice:
handrail: A single bar or pipe supported on brackets from a wall or partition to provide a
continuous handhold for persons using a stair. Refer to page 14 of this Practice.
stair railing: A vertical barrier erected along exposed sides of a stairway to prevent falls of
persons
standard railing: A vertical barrier erected along exposed edges of a floor opening, wall
opening, ramp, platform, or runway to prevent falls of persons
4.
Requirements
4.1
Refer to project design documents for the location, orientation, and arrangement of
railing for regular operational use, special fabrication details, and any changes to the
requirements of this Practice.
4.2
Railing that meets the requirements of this Practice is designed to withstand a

concentrated load of 200 pounds (890 N) applied in any direction at any point along
the top rail, in accordance with OSHA requirements.
4.3
Wall-mounted handrail shall be carbon steel, round structural tubing, or pipe

conforming to ASTM A500 Grade B or ASTM A53 Grade B, standard weight,
1.9-inches (48-mm) O.D. (1.5 inches [38 mm] nominal diameter).
4.4
All structural steel shall be ASTM A36 unless otherwise noted.
4.5
All bolts for railing connections shall be 5/8-inch (16-mm) diameter and in
accordance with ASTM A307 unless otherwise noted.
4.6
Railing shall be welded construction except as shown in design drawings and/or in

the attached details. All joints and welds in the top rail shall be finished smooth.
Railing systems shall be surfaced in a manner to prevent injury from punctures or
lacerations and clothing snags.
4.7
Railing assemblies shall be coated after fabrication in accordance with the design
drawings and specifications governing the project. Galvanizing shall be done after
fabrication and in accordance with PIP STS05120. Field damage to coating shall be
repaired with materials equivalent to original coating according to PIP STS05130.
4.8
The minimum clearance between handrail or the top rail of stair railing/standard
railing and any obstruction shall be 3 inches (75 mm).
4.9
If the size of fillet weld is not shown on the drawings, provide the minimum fillet as
shown in Table J2.4 of the AISC LRFD, Metric LRFD, or ASD Specification for
Structural Steel Buildings.
Page 3 of 14
October 2006

Structural
PIP STF05121
Fabrication and Installation of
Anchor Bolts


PRINTING HISTORY
August 2003
Issued
October 2006
October 2006

Structural
PIP STF05121
Fabrication and Installation of
Anchor Bolts
Table of Contents
1. Introduction................................. 2
0
1.1 Purpose............................................ 2
1.2 Scope ............................................... 2
1H
2H
2. References .................................. 2
3H
2.1 Process Industry Practices............... 2

2.2 Industry Codes and Standards......... 2
4H
5H
3. Requirements.............................. 2
6H
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
General ............................................ 2
Materials........................................... 3
Bolt Callout....................................... 3
Fabrication ....................................... 3
Assemblies....................................... 4
Installation ........................................ 4
7H
8H
9H
10H
1H
12H
Appendix........................................... 5
13H
Anchor Bolt Data Table

Anchor Bolt Details
Page 1 of 6
PIP STF05121
Fabrication and Installation of Anchor Bolts
1.
October 2006
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This Practice provides details and requirements for anchor bolt fabricators and
installers. This Practice also provides information for the design engineer to
standardize bolt lengths. The intent of this Practice is to minimize the use of nonstandard bolt lengths.
1.2
Scope
This Practice provides the details and requirements for anchor bolt fabrication and
installation. Two standard lengths are shown for each diameter anchor bolt. This
Practice also provides requirements for non-standard bolt lengths.
2.
References
Applicable requirements in the following Practices and industry codes and standards shall be
appropriate.
2.1

2.2

ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on
Iron and Steel Hardware
ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
ASTM F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and
105-ksi Yield Strength
ASME B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws
3.
Requirements
3.1
Page 2 of 6
General
3.1.1
Unless a non-standard bolt length is required, the design engineer shall

specify one of the two standard length anchor bolts shown for each anchor
bolt diameter in the Anchor Bolt Data Table.
3.1.2
Non-standard bolt lengths may be required for the following reasons:
PIP STF05121
October 2006
a. A longer than necessary bolt length may cause the foundation to be

deeper than practical.
b. A longer than necessary bolt length may cause the anchor bolt to project
into the foundation (mat), which would increase construction costs.
c. To properly transfer load to the reinforcing steel, the anchor bolt may
need to be longer than the standard bolt.
3.1.3
3.2
3.3
If a non-standard bolt length is required, it should be an even dimension (an

even number of inches) and should be significantly different in length than
the standard length bolt (at least 6 inches shorter or longer than the closest
standard length bolt).
Materials
3.2.1
Bolts shall conform to ASTM F1554, Grade 36, with UNC-2A threads except
as otherwise specified on the design drawing.
3.2.2
Nuts shall conform to ASTM A563, Grade A, heavy hex with UNC-2B
threads. Washers shall be ASTM F436.
3.2.3
Headed bolts (conforming to Section 3.2.1) of at least the same length above
the bottom nut (see Anchor Bolt Details) are an acceptable substitution.
Bolt head style shall be heavy hex in accordance with ASME B18.2.1.
Bolt Callout
Anchor bolts shall be identified on design drawings as follows:
8 ~
1 - 1/4"
NSL
P = 3 - 3/4"
W/2 Nuts
L = 3' - 8"
Quantity
Diameter
Type
Projection from top of concrete
(called out only if not shown on foundation section)
Nut quantity at top
(shown only if two nuts are required)
Bolt length (shown only if non-standard or if required per note below)
Comment: For record purposes, lengths of standard length anchor bolts shall be
noted either in the call-out or in notes on the drawings. The engineer
may duplicate the Anchor Bolt Data Table (this Practice) on the
design drawing.
3.4
Fabrication
3.4.1
Unless otherwise specified, all bolts (total bolt length), nuts, and washers
shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A153,
Class C.
3.4.2
Excess galvanizing material shall be removed from the threaded portions of

the bolts by the use of a centrifuge or by mechanical chasing of the threads.
Page 3 of 6
PIP STF05121
3.4.3
3.5
3.6
Page 4 of 6
October 2006
The fit of nuts on threads of anchor bolts shall be verified before shipment.
Assemblies
3.5.1
Type A, B, and N bolt assemblies shall consist of anchor bolt with

tack-welded nut at bottom and nut(s) and washer at top. Refer to Anchor
Bolt Details.
3.5.2
Type ASL, BSL, and NSL bolt assemblies shall consist of anchor bolt
with tack-welded nut at bottom and sleeve, nut(s), and washer at top. Refer
to Anchor Bolt Details.
Installation
3.6.1
Unless noted otherwise on the design drawings, tolerances shall be as

specified in PIP STS03001.
3.6.2
Unless noted otherwise on design drawings, anchor bolt sleeves for

stationary equipment and structural base plates shall be filled with grout
after the column or equipment is in place and the anchor bolts are aligned.
Water or other loose particles shall not be allowed to collect in the sleeve
before the sleeve is grouted.
3.6.3
Unless noted otherwise on the design drawings, anchor bolt sleeves for
machinery shall be filled with nonbonding moldable material before
grouting.
3.6.4
Anchor bolt threads shall be covered with duct tape or other suitable means
to keep them clean and to prevent any damage that might occur during the
preparation of the foundation for grouting and the actual grouting of the
foundation.
3.6.5
Unless specified otherwise on design drawings, anchor bolts shall be

tightened to a snug-tight condition, defined as the tightness that is attained
with a few impacts of an impact wrench or with the full effort of a man using
an ordinary spud wrench.
3.6.6
At slide plate locations, two top nuts are required. The lower nut shall be
hand tightened and then backed off a half turn leaving approximately
1/16-inch clearance between lower nut and base plate. The upper nut shall be
installed and jammed against the first nut.
PIP STF05121
October 2006
Appendix
Anchor Bolt Data Table
Types A, B, N,** ASL, BSL, and NSL** Bolts
(See Anchor Bolt Details for locations of dimensions.)
Bolt
Diameter
do
Allowance for Nuts
Thread
Length
at Top
A &
ASL
Bolts*
B &
BSL
Bolts*
Shell Size
Std. Length
L
Std. Length
L
Sleeve
Bolt
Diameter
do
N1
N2
P1 &
Thread
Length
at
Bottom
1/2
1 1/2
2 1/4
2 x 5
1-0
2-4
1/2
5/8
1 1/4
2 3/4
2 x 7
1-3
2-5
5/8
3/4
1 1/2
2 1/4
1 1/4
2 x 7
1-4
2-6
3/4
7/8
1 1/2
2 1/2
1 1/4
3 1/4
2 x 7
1-5
2-7
7/8
1 3/4
2 3/4
1 1/2
3 1/2
3 x 10
1-10
2-11
1 1/4
2 1/4
3 1/2
1 3/4
4 1/4
3 x 10
2-0
3-6
1 1/4
1 1/2
2 1/2
4 3/4
4 x 15
2-8
4-5
1 1/2
1 3/4
4 3/4
2 1/4
5 1/2
4 x 15
2-10
5-0
1 3/4
3 1/4
5 1/4
2 1/2
4 x 18
3-4
5-2
2 1/4"
3 3/4
2 3/4
6 3/4
4 x 18
3-6
5-5
2 1/4
2 1/2
6 1/2
7 1/4
6 x 24
4-2
5-7
2 1/2
2 3/4
4 1/2
7 1/4
3 1/4
6 X 24
4-4
5-8
2 3/4
4 3/4
7 3/4
3 1/2
8 1/2
6" x 24
4-6
6'-0
*Note to designer:
It is intended that the "A" and "ASL" bolts be used unless a longer length is required. If a
longer length is required, use the "B" and "BSL" bolts. If neither is suitable, designate the
bolt as type N (no sleeves required) or as type NSL (sleeves required), and specify
the required length on the design drawing.
**Note to fabricator: Type N and NSL bolts have no standard length. See the design drawings for anchor
bolt length.
Page 5 of 6
2012-11-05
1.

Painting
Page 1 of 1
970086 R905F-0
Painting selection
Painting selection and related goods and services shall be provided in accordance with
1.
NRF-053-PEMEX-2006, Surface Facilities Coating Base Anti Corrosive Protection

System
2.
NRF-009-PEMEX-2004, Product Identification Transported Though Pipe or

Contained in Storage Tanks
3.
NOM-026-STPS-2008, Mexican Official Standard, HSE Colors and Signs of Pipe

Transporting Fluids Risk Identification
4.
P.3.0403.01:2007 CN, PEMEX, Colours and Labels for Facilities and Transport
Vehicles Identification
5.
Modified PIP CTSE1000, Application of External Coatings, June 2007
6.
Modified PIP STS05120, Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel

Specification, June 2002
7.
970086 S905F-0, UOP Specification - Paint Application
8.
970086 T905E-02-0, Technical Data Sheet - Paint System 02
9.
970086 T905E-03-0, Technical Data Sheet - Paint System 03
10. 970086 T905E-15-0, Technical Data Sheet - Paint System 15

11. 970086 T905E-17-0, Technical Data Sheet - Paint System 17
12. 970086 T905FS-0, Technical Data Sheet Structural Steel Painting and Galvanizing
13. 970086 V905F-0, Documentation Data SheetPainting Application
2.
Other
Painting selection and related goods and services shall comply with the most recent
3.
1.
970086 S140A-0, UOP SpecificationLanguage, Units, and Documents
2.
970086 S140C-0, UOP SpecificationDocuments for Custom-Designed Goods and

Services
3.
970086 S140V-0, UOP SpecificationElectronic Documentation Submittal
Conflicts
In case of conflicts among the documents above, PEMEX documents shall take
precedence over PIP document.
EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

Coatings
PIP CTSE1000
Application of External Coatings

This Practice is subject to revision at any time by the responsible Function Team and will
be reviewed every 5 years. This Practice will be revised, reaffirmed, or withdrawn.

PRINTING HISTORY
April 1999
Issued
February 2005 Complete Revision
July 2005
February 2006 Editorial Revision
June 2007
Editorial Revision
EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

Coatings
PIP CTSE1000
Table of Contents
1. Introduction............................. 3
1.1 Purpose ........................................ 3
1.2 Scope............................................ 3
2. References .............................. 3
2.1 Industry Codes and Standards ..... 3
2.2 Other References ......................... 4
3. Definitions ............................... 4
4. Requirements.......................... 5
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
General ......................................... 5
Procedures ................................... 6
Surface Preparation...................... 7
Application .................................... 9
Inspection ................................... 12
Shipping, Handling, and Storage 16
Data Forms
CTSE1000-D1 Documentation
Requirements Sheet
The following data forms shall be part of this
Practice only if indicated on the purchasers
completed Documentation Requirements Sheet.
CTSE1000-D2 Color Selection Sheet
CTSE1000-D101 - External Coating
Systems, Coating System No. 1,
Inorganic Zinc IZ

Inorganic Zinc/Epoxy Polyamide IZ/EC
Systems, Coating System No. 3, Epoxy
Polyamide (3 Coats) EC/EC/EC
CTSE1000-D104 External Coating
Phenolic EP
Phenolic (3 Coats) EP/EP/EP
Polyamide/Urethane EC/UR
Systems, Coating System No. 7, Coal
Tar Epoxy (2 Coats) TE/TE
Inorganic Zinc/Water-Borne Acrylic
IZ/WA
Systems, Coating System No. 9, Alkyd
(3 Coats) OA/OA/OA
Inorganic Zinc/Silicone Acrylic (2 Coats)
IZ/SA/SA
Page 1 of 16
EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

Silicone for Stainless Steel (2 Coats)
SS/SS
Systems, Coating System No. 12, HeatCured Silicone (2 Coats) HS/HS
Epoxy Mastic for Manufacturers
Standard EM
Inorganic Zinc/Heat-Cured Silicone (2
Coats) IZ/HS/HS
Inorganic Zinc/Epoxy Mastic/Urethane
IZ/EM/UR
Systems, Coating System No. 16, Low
Temperature Curing Epoxy (2 Coats)
EL/EL
Polysiloxane (2 Coats) PX/PX
Epoxy Mastic (2 Coats)/Urethane
EM/EM/UR
Page 2 of 16

Epoxy Novalac (2 Coats) EN/EN
Epoxy Phenolic (2 Coats) EP/EP
Organic Zinc/Urethane OZ/UR
Epoxy Mastic/Water-Borne Acrylic
EM/WA
Epoxy Mastic/Epoxy Polyamide EM/EC
Epoxy Mastic/Urethane (2 Coats)
EM/UR/UR
Systems, Coating System No. 25, High
Build Epoxy (2 Coats)/Urethane
EH/EH/UR
Systems, Coating System No. 26, Coal
Tar Epoxy (1 Coat) TE
Thermal Spray Aluminum TSA
CTSE1000-D128 User-Defined Coating
Systems
CTSE1000-F Daily Inspection Report
EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007
1.
PIP CTSE1000
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This Practice provides requirements for the application of industrial external
coatings.
1.2
Scope
This Practice describes the general requirements for surface preparation, application,
and inspection of protective coatings.
2.
References
Applicable parts of the following Practice, industry codes and standards, and references shall
appropriate.
2.1

ASTM D3359 Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test
ASTM D4285 Standard Test Methods for Indicating Oil or Water in
Compressed Air
ASTM D4417 Standard Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface
Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel
ASTM D4541 Standard Test Methods for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings
Using Portable Adhesion Testers
ASTM E337 Standard Test Method for Measuring Humidity with a
Psychrometer (the Measurement of Wet- and Dry-Bulb Temperatures)
Society of Protective Coatings (SSPC)
SSPC-AB 1 Mineral and Slag Abrasives
SSPC-PA 1 Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting
SSPC-PA 2 Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages
SSPC-PA Guide 3 Guide to Safety in Paint Application
SSPC-SP 1 Solvent Cleaning
SSPC-SP 2 Hand Tool Cleaning
SSPC-SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning
SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning
SSPC-SP 11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal
SSPC-VIS 1-89 Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel (Standard
Reference Photographs)
Page 3 of 16
PIP CTSE1000
EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)

ISO 2178: Non-magnetic coatings on magnetic substrates - Measurement of
coating thickness - Magnetic method
ISO 2360: Non-conductive coatings on non-magnetic electrically conductive
basis materials - Measurement of coating thickness - Amplitude-sensitive eddy
current method
ISO 2409: Paints and varnishes - Cross-cut test
ISO 4624: Paints and varnishes Pull-off test for adhesion
ISO 4677-2: Atmospheres for conditioning and testing - Determination of
relative humidity - Part 2: Whirling psychrometer method
ISO 8501-1: Preparation of Steel Substrates Before Application of Paints and
Related Products - Visual Assessment of Surface Cleanliness - Part 1: Rust
Grades and Preparation Grades of Uncoated Steel Substrates and of Steel
Substrates After Overall Removal of Previous Coatings
ISO 8503-5: Preparation of Steel Substrates Before Application of Paints and
Related Products - Surface Roughness Characteristics of Blast-Cleaned Steel
Substrates - Part 5: Replica tape method for the determination of the surface
profile
ISO 8504-2: Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and
related products - Surface preparation methods - Part 2: Abrasive blastcleaning
ISO 8504-3: Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and
related products - Surface preparation methods - Part 3: Hand- and powertool cleaning
ISO 8573: Compressed air
ISO 11126: Preparation of Steel Substrates Before Application of Paints and
Related Products - Surface Preparation Methods (10 Parts)
ISO 12944-4: Paints and Varnishes - Corrosion Protection of Steel Structures
by Protective Paint Systems - Part 4: Types of Surface and Surface
Preparation
ISO 12944-7: Paints and Varnishes - Corrosion Protection of Steel Structures
by Protective Paint Systems - Part 7: Execution and Supervision of Paintwork
2.2
Other References
National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)

NIOSH Publication No. 92-102 NIOSH Alert: Request for Assistance in
Preventing Silicosis and Deaths from Sandblasting
3.
Definitions
CS: Carbon and low-alloy steel
DFT: Dry film thickness
SS: Austenitic stainless steel
Page 4 of 16
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP CTSE1000
June 2007
nonferrous: Copper, aluminum

owner: Party who owns the facility wherein the coating system will be used
purchaser: Party who awards the contract to the supplier. The purchaser may be the owner or
the owners authorized agent.
supplier: Party responsible for furnishing and/or installing the coating system
4.
Requirements
4.1
General
4.1.1
Project Scope
4.1.1.1 Documents required to define the scope of work are listed on
purchasers data sheet CTSE1000-D1.
4.1.1.2 If selected on purchasers documentation requirements sheet PIP
CTSE1000-D1, data sheets PIP CTSE1000-D101 through
CTSE1000-D127 shall be used to define specific requirements for
each coating system.
4.1.1.3 Surface preparation, application, and materials shall be in accordance
with the purchasers external coating system data sheets.
4.1.1.4 Coating materials used in the same system shall be supplied by the
same manufacturer, unless otherwise approved by the purchaser.
4.1.1.5 Finish color requirements shall be in accordance with purchasers
data sheet CTSE1000-D2.
4.1.2
Conflicts, Exceptions, Deviations, and Substitutions

4.1.2.1 All conflicts between the referenced documents and this Practice
shall be submitted in writing to purchaser for clarification and
resolution before proceeding with the coating application.
4.1.2.2 All exceptions, deviations, and substitutions to the requirements
specified herein and in referenced documents shall be approved by
the purchaser.
4.1.3
Regulations and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)

4.1.3.1 Protective coating applications shall comply with all applicable
federal, state, and local codes and regulations on surface preparation,
coating application, storage, handling, safety, and environmental
requirements, including the recommendations of SSPC-PA Guide 3.
4.1.3.2 The latest issue of the coating manufacturers product data sheets,
application instructions, and MSDS shall be available at the painting
site and complied with during painting operations.
Page 5 of 16
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP CTSE1000
4.2
June 2007
Procedures
4.2.1
Surfaces not to be Coated

4.2.1.1 Unless specified otherwise, the following surfaces shall not be
coated:
a. Interior surfaces of piping and equipment
b. Nonferrous metals
c. Galvanized or metallized surfaces
d. Insulation jacketing
e. Nonmetallic materials such as wood, tile, brick, concrete, and
thermoplastics
f. Cast iron products such as manhole covers and grating
4.2.1.2 The following surfaces shall not be coated and shall be protected
from surface preparation and painting activity in the area:
a. Valve stems, flange faces, and other machined contact surfaces
b. Internal surfaces of valves
c. Electrical contact points
d. Nameplates and identification tags
e. Glass surfaces of gage glasses and sight glasses
f. Resilient seal materials
g. Gasket contact surfaces
h. Equipment identification
i. Inspection point identification markers
4.2.2
Precautions for Stainless Steel and Nonferrous Metals

4.2.2.1 All SS and nonferrous metals shall be protected from blasting,
overspray, and coatings intended for CS, especially coatings
containing zinc.
4.2.2.2 Abrasives for use on SS shall be in accordance with SSPC-AB 1 (ISO
11126, natural abrasives (except silica sand) as well as coal furnace
slag and fused aluminum oxide) and shall be free of metals.
4.2.2.3 If hand or power tool cleaning is required on SS and nonferrous
metals, only SS wire brushes that have not been previously used on
CS surfaces shall be used.
4.2.2.4 Coatings and solvents for use on SS and nonferrous metals shall be
free of substances such as chlorides, sulfur, halogens, or metallic
pigments that can harmfully affect SS or nonferrous metals.
4.2.2.5 For items having dual materials of construction, coatings containing
zinc shall not overlap onto SS or nonferrous metals, including the SS
to CS weld. Examples of such applications include:
Page 6 of 16
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP CTSE1000
June 2007
a. CS saddles and skirts on SS equipment

b. SS piping within CS skirts
c. SS nozzles, flanges, and piping on clad equipment
d. Miscellaneous CS clips and brackets on SS equipment
e. SS components in CS piping systems
f. CS trunnions on SS piping and equipment
g. CS flange rings on SS lap joint flanges
4.2.2.6 CS lap joint flanges shall be coated before assembly.
4.2.2.7 Color-coding and fabrication markings applied directly onto SS and
nonferrous metals shall be applied with low-chloride markers.
4.3
Surface Preparation
4.3.1
Preparation for Blasting

4.3.1.1 All welds shall be relatively smooth, without sharp edges, and free of
weld slag and weld spatter before blasting. Purchaser shall be
notified of such defects for corrective action before proceeding with
work.
4.3.1.2 Unless approved in writing by purchaser, neither welding nor
grinding, including cosmetic grinding, shall be permitted on the
pressure-resisting components and welds of pressure vessels and
piping after hydrostatic testing.
4.3.1.3 Before blasting, all visible deposits of oil and grease shall be
removed using the methods defined in SSPC-SP 1 (ISO 12944-4).
4.3.1.4 High-pressure water jetting or steam cleaning may be used to remove
oil, grease, and other surface contaminants. Cleaning with solvents
shall only be permitted if cleaning by other methods defined in
SSPC-SP 1 (ISO 12944-4) is not practical.
4.3.1.5 Presence of oil shall be checked either by rubbing a clean white cloth
on the steel surface or by sprinkling water on the steel surface.
Comment: If oil or grease is present, the water will not spread
out but will form beads.
4.3.2
Abrasive Blasting
4.3.2.1 Abrasive blast cleaning shall be performed with a clean, sharp grade
of abrasive.
4.3.2.2 Grain size shall be suitable for producing the specified anchor
profile.
4.3.2.3 All abrasives shall be free of dust, dirt, and other foreign matter and
shall be kept dry at all times.
Page 7 of 16
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP CTSE1000
June 2007
4.3.2.4 Silica or other abrasive substances containing more than 1 percent

crystalline silica shall not be used as an abrasive blasting material.
Refer to NIOSH Publication No. 92-102.
4.3.2.5 Only designed ventilation and containment shall be used to protect
personnel.
4.3.2.6 If automatic blasting equipment is used, the abrasive mix shall be
maintained so that a consistently sharp profile is produced.
4.3.2.7 Air supply compressors shall be equipped with adequately sized and
properly maintained oil and water separators.
4.3.2.8 Air compressors shall be capable of maintaining 690 kPa (100 psig)
minimum at the nozzle.
4.3.2.9 Air compressors shall be equipped with either dryers or aftercoolers
to remove entrained moisture from the compressed air.
4.3.2.10 Abrasive blast cleaning shall not be performed if the ambient or
substrate temperature is less than 3C (5F) above the dew point
temperature.
4.3.2.11 Dew point temperature shall be determined by sling psychrometer in
accordance with ASTM E337 or ISO 4677-2, at the location where
work is being performed.
4.3.2.12 Substrate temperature shall be determined with a surface
thermometer.
4.3.2.13 Blast-cleaned surfaces that show evidence of rust bloom or that have
been left uncoated overnight shall be recleaned to the specified
degree of cleanliness before coating.
4.3.2.14 All visible burrs, laminations, slivers, and scabs shall be removed or
repaired after blasting.
4.3.2.15 After blasting and immediately before spraying, dust and loose
residues shall be removed by brushing, blowing off with clean dry
air, or vacuum cleaning.
4.3.2.16 Inhibitive washes intended to prevent rusting after blasting shall not
be permitted.
4.3.2.17 Alternative forms of surface preparation shall not be used without
written approval from the purchaser.
4.3.3
Page 8 of 16
Degree of Cleanliness and Anchor Profile

4.3.3.1
Degree of cleanliness and anchor profile shall be as required for

the specified coating system.
4.3.3.2
All blast-cleaned surfaces shall be inspected for proper cleaning

before painting. SSPC-VIS 1 (ISO 8501-1) shall be used as a visual
standard for confirming the degree of surface cleanliness.
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP CTSE1000
June 2007
4.3.3.3
4.3.4
Anchor profile shall be verified in accordance with ASTM D4417,

Method C. Anchor profile may also be verified in accordance with
ISO 8503, when approved by purchaser.
Hand or Power Tool Cleaning

If specified, hand tool or power tool cleaning shall be in accordance with
SSPC-SP 2 (ISO St 2), SSPC-SP 3 (ISO St 3), and SSPC-SP 11.
4.4
Application
4.4.1
General
4.4.1.1 Application shall be in accordance with SSPC-PA 1(ISO 12944-7),
the coating manufacturers published application instructions,
MSDS, and the requirements specified herein.
4.4.1.2 All application equipment shall be provided as recommended by the
coating manufacturer, shall be clean and in good condition, and shall
be suitable for applying the coating as specified.
4.4.2
Temperature, Humidity, and Weather Conditions

4.4.2.1 Paint shall not be applied while any of the following conditions are
present or expected before the paint dries:
a. Temperature: Ambient, substrate, or coating material
temperatures are above 49C (120F), below 10C (50F), or
outside the range recommended by the coating manufacturer.
b. Humidity: The ambient or substrate temperature is less than 3C
(5F) above the dew point or outside the range recommended by
the coating manufacturer. Dew point temperature shall be
determined by sling psychrometer in accordance with ASTM
E337, ISO 4677-2, or equivalent electronic device at the location
where work is being performed.
c. Wind: During strong or gusty wind conditions, particularly for
spray application.
d. Weather: During rain, snow, or fog or on damp surfaces or
surfaces that may have frost.
4.4.3
Materials
4.4.3.1 Coating materials shall be in accordance with purchasers external
coating system data sheets.
4.4.3.2 All solvents used for thinning shall be in accordance with the coating
manufacturers recommendations.
4.4.3.3 Coating materials shall be furnished in the coating manufacturers
unopened containers, clearly marked, and kept covered, clean, and
protected.
4.4.3.4 All materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with the
coating manufacturers latest published instructions and SSPC-PA 1
(ISO 12944-7).
Page 9 of 16
PIP CTSE1000
EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007
4.4.3.5 Equipment fabricators shall indicate on their drawings the coating

manufacturer and coating product numbers used.
4.4.4
Mixing and Thinning

4.4.4.1 Materials shall be mixed and thinned in accordance with the coating
manufacturers written instructions.
4.4.4.2 All mixing shall be done in clean containers that are free from
grease, paints, and other contaminants. Containers shall be kept
covered to prevent contamination by dust, dirt, or rain.
4.4.4.3 Mixing of partial kits shall not be permitted.
4.4.4.4 Inorganic zinc primers and all pigmented coatings shall be strained
before application in accordance with the coating manufacturers
written instructions.
4.4.4.5 Thinning shall not exceed the maximum allowable volatile organic
compound (VOC) level for the coating involved.
4.4.5
Shelf and Pot Life

4.4.5.1 Materials that have exceeded the coating manufacturers
recommended shelf life shall not be used.
4.4.5.2 Coating manufacturers recommended pot life shall not be exceeded.
If this limit is reached, the spray pot shall be emptied and cleaned,
and new material shall be mixed.
4.4.6
Priming
4.4.6.1 Primers shall be applied before flash rusting or other contamination
occurs.
4.4.6.2 Previously coated surfaces shall be protected from contamination
and overspray.
4.4.6.3 Primer shall have a uniform thickness over welds, edges, and corners
and shall be free of mud cracking.
4.4.6.4 Primer shall not be applied within 100 mm (4 inches) of unblasted
surfaces or 50 mm (2 inches) from the edges to be field welded.
4.4.6.5 Inorganic zinc primer shall be applied using an agitated pot.
4.4.7
Topcoating
4.4.7.1 Each coat of paint shall be of a contrasting color to indicate the
extent of coverage.
4.4.7.2 Each coat of multiple-coat systems shall be allowed to cure
sufficiently in accordance with the coating manufacturers directions
before topcoating.
4.4.7.3 Minimum drying time between coats shall be in compliance with the
coating manufacturers instructions.
Page 10 of 16
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP CTSE1000
June 2007
4.4.7.4 If the maximum recoat time has been exceeded, previously applied
coatings shall be roughened before topcoating or treated in
accordance with the coating manufacturers directions.
4.4.7.5 Before topcoating over an inorganic zinc primer, the cure of the
primer shall be verified.
4.4.7.6 Inorganic zinc primers shall have all overspray removed with a stiff
bristle brush or wire screen and shall be clean and thoroughly cured
before topcoating.
4.4.7.7 If spray applying over inorganic zinc primers, a mist coat shall be
used to avoid bubbling. The mist coat may be a thinned coat or
applied by a quick pass of the spray gun before applying the full
coat, but sufficient time shall be allowed for solvent evaporation.
4.4.8
Film Thickness
4.4.8.1 Wet film thickness shall be checked during the application of each
coat to assure the specified dry film thickness (DFT) is met.
Comment: Wet film thickness measurements are not suitable for
some materials such as inorganic zinc primers, flake
filled epoxies, etc.
4.4.8.2 The DFT of each coat on CS shall be checked in accordance with the
procedures defined by SSPC-PA 2 using a magnetic gage that has
been properly calibrated.
4.4.8.3 Coating thickness on nonmagnetic substrates shall be checked using
a Type 2 gage suitable for use on nonferrous substrates.
4.4.8.4 Coating thickness may also be measured using ISO 2178 for nonmagnetic coatings on magnetic substrates or ISO 2360 for coatings
on non-magnetic substrates. However, sampling procedures shall
follow SSPC-PA 2.
4.4.8.4 Measurements shall be taken after removal of dry spray and
overspray.
4.4.8.5 All gages shall be adjusted to compensate for the substrate effect
before application of any coating.
4.4.9
Defects
4.4.9.1 Each coat of paint shall be of a uniform film, free of defects
(e.g., pinholes, voids, bubbles, skips, runs, sags, blisters, wrinkles,
and mud cracking), and of a uniform thickness and appearance.
4.4.9.2 Care shall be exercised to prevent overspray, spillage, or application
of coatings to surfaces for which they are not intended. Dry spray
and overspray shall be removed.
4.4.9.3 DFT of each coat shall not be outside the specified range.
Page 11 of 16
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP CTSE1000
June 2007
4.4.10 Touch-Up
4.4.10.1 Before application of any coat, all defects and damage to the
previous coat(s) shall be repaired. Damage to finished work shall be
thoroughly cleaned and recoated.
4.4.10.2 Damaged areas shall be spot-blast cleaned, power tool cleaned, or
hand tool cleaned as necessary to restore any exposed steel to an
original degree of cleanliness. All loose, cracked, and damaged
coating shall be removed and the adjacent sound coating feathered
back approximately 50 mm (2 inches) to form a uniform and smooth
surface. Feathering shall be done by hand or power sanding with a
grit wheel or sandpaper. The prepared surface shall be free of loose,
burnt, or blistered coating.
4.4.10.3 Unless specified otherwise, the coating used for repair shall be the
same as the original and shall have the same DFT.
4.4.11 Job Stencil
4.4.11.1 After the coating system has been applied in the shop or field, if
specified by the purchaser, a job stencil shall be applied in a
prominent location to identify the coating system used.
4.4.11.2 Stencil shall be of 25 mm (1 inch) high letters of a color contrasting
with the finished paint.
4.4.11.3 Stencil shall provide the following information:
a. Top line shall be used for the PIP External Coatings Systems
Document Number.
b. Second line shall be used for SSPC surface preparation.
c. Next line(s) shall be used for each coat of paint, followed by the
date of application (month and year).
d. Last line shall be the name of the shop or field coating contractor.
4.4.11.4 If there are a large number of structural shapes, a job stencil shall be
applied to about 10 percent of the pieces.
4.4.11.5 Small pieces such as lap flanges, hangers, etc. shall not be stenciled.
4.5
Inspection
4.5.1
General
4.5.1.1 All inspections and tests shall be performed that are necessary to
ensure that surface preparation and coating application comply with
the requirements of this Practice.
4.5.1.2 Purchasers inspector(s) shall be given adequate notice before the
start of surface preparation and coating application to witness the
work.
4.5.1.3 Purchasers inspector(s) shall have the option to witness or repeat
any of these functions as necessary.
Page 12 of 16
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP CTSE1000
June 2007
4.5.1.4 All materials, equipment, and work shall be available to purchasers

inspector(s) at all times.
4.5.1.5 Purchasers inspector(s) shall have access to the work site during the
progress of the work and the right to conduct any inspection or
testing deemed necessary to ensure that the coatings are properly
applied.
4.5.1.6 All instruments used in inspection activities (e.g., thermometer,
pyrometers, hygrometers, thickness gauges, profile gauges, and
holiday detectors) shall be furnished in proper working order and
calibrated before use.
4.5.1.7 Dew point, relative humidity, and surface temperature shall be
determined before surface preparation. Readings are required at
4-hour intervals or at other time intervals approved by the purchaser.
4.5.1.8 Alternatively, continuous monitoring of dew point and relative
humidity may be performed using systems established or accepted by
the purchaser.
4.5.1.9 Substrate temperature shall be 3C (5F) minimum above the dew
point.
4.5.1.10 Work shall not proceed if the ambient temperature or relative
humidity is not in accordance with Section 4.4.2.
4.5.1.11 Air supply for blast cleaning, pneumatic tools, and spray equipment
shall be tested for oil and water contamination in accordance with
ASTM D4285 or applicable parts of ISO 8573, and as follows:
a. All lines shall be tested separately.
b. Testing shall be performed at the beginning and end of each work
shift and at not less than 4-hour intervals.
4.5.1.12 If contamination is discovered:
a. All necessary corrective actions shall be made and the air supply
retested.
b. Surfaces determined to have been blasted with contaminated air
shall be cleaned with solvent and reblasted with clean air and
abrasive.
c. Coatings determined to have been applied using contaminated air
shall be removed and reapplied using clean air.
4.5.1.13 Recirculated shot and grit used for abrasive cleaning shall be tested
for the presence of oil by immersing in water and checking for oil
flotation. Tests shall be made at the start of blasting, at 4-hour
intervals thereafter, and at the end of blasting.
4.5.1.14 If oil contamination in the abrasive is evident:
a. Contaminated abrasive shall be replaced with clean abrasive and
retested before proceeding.
Page 13 of 16
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP CTSE1000
June 2007
b. All steel blasted since the last satisfactory test shall be reblasted.
4.5.1.15 Abrasive-cleaned surfaces shall be inspected for proper surface
cleanliness and anchor profile using SSPC (ISO 8501-1) visual
comparators.
4.5.1.16 Surface preparation anchor profile shall be verified using either
coarse or extra-coarse replica tape (as required by profile depth) and
a spring-loaded micrometer in accordance with ASTM D4417,
Method C. Anchor profile may also be verified in accordance with
ISO 8503-5, when approved by purchaser.
4.5.1.17 SSPC-VIS 1 (ISO 8501-1) visual standards shall be used for
confirming the degree of surface cleanliness if adequacy of cleaning
is in question.
4.5.1.18 If coating adhesion or intercoat adhesion are of suspect quality, the
adhesion shall be checked periodically.
4.5.1.19 Adhesion may be assessed by means of portable pull-off adhesion
tester in accordance with ASTM D4541 (ISO 4624) or one of the
appropriate tape tests in accordance with ASTM D3359 (ISO 2409).
4.5.1.20 Adhesion test method shall be approved by the purchaser.
4.5.1.21 Acceptable adhesion classifications or pull-off strengths shall be in
accordance with coating material manufacturers recommendations
and approved by the purchaser.
4.5.1.22 Completed paint job shall pass inspection by the purchasers
inspector(s).
4.5.1.23 Any work found not to be in accordance with the requirements
specified herein shall be corrected.
4.5.2
Inspection Checklist
4.5.2.1 Prepainting Inspection
1. Verify that coating, thinning, and blasting materials are as

specified.
2. Verify that storage conditions for all materials are adequate and
properly maintained.
3. Verify that surfaces not to be coated are masked off or otherwise
protected before surface preparation and coating application of
adjacent surfaces.
4.5.2.2 Presurface Preparation
1. Verify that oil and grease are removed before surface

preparation.
2. Verify that welds and sharp edges have been suitably prepared.
4.5.2.3 Surface Preparation
1. Verify that the air supply is clean and free of oil and moisture.
Page 14 of 16
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP CTSE1000
June 2007
2. Verify the cleanliness and dryness of abrasives.

3. Verify the adequacy of cleaning and blasting equipment, hoses,
etc.
4. Verify that ambient, substrate, and dew point temperatures are
appropriate for proper surface preparation.
5. Verify that visible burrs, slivers, scabs, and weld spatter have
been removed after blasting.
6. Verify the degree of surface cleanliness and that contaminants
have been removed.
7. Verify, using appropriate instruments, that the anchor profile is
as specified.
4.5.2.4 Coating Application
1. Verify that materials are as specified, that materials are properly

labeled, and that the shelf life has not been exceeded.
2. Verify that mixing, thinning, and induction times are in
accordance with the coating manufacturers instructions.
3. Verify that the proper application equipment is being utilized.
4. Verify that the air supply is clean and free of oil and moisture.
5. Verify that the ambient, substrate, and dewpoint temperatures are
appropriate.
6. Verify that the applicator is checking wet film thickness during
application.
7. Verify that coating manufacturers requirements regarding recoat
time are observed.
8. Verify that the previous coat is sufficiently cured before
application of topcoats.
9. Visually inspect each coat for defects and uniform appearance.
10. Verify, by following the procedures of SSPC-PA 2, that the DFT
is within the specified range after each coat.
4.5.2.5 Final Acceptance
1. Visually inspect the coated surface for defects and uniform

appearance.
2. Verify, by following the procedures of SSPC-PA 2, that the total
DFT is within the specified range.
3. Verify that all identified repairs have been properly made.
4. Verify that the coating system is cured.
Page 15 of 16
PIP CTSE1000
4.5.3
EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007
Records
4.5.3.1 A Daily Inspection Report, PIP CTSE1000-F, for documenting that
specified requirements have been met shall be completed for each
work shift.
4.5.3.2 Suppliers forms may be used with prior approval by purchaser.
4.5.3.3 A log shall be maintained of all reports, inspections, and tests
(including date, time, and results of instrument calibrations).
4.6
Page 16 of 16
Shipping, Handling, and Storage

4.6.1
Coated items shall not be handled or moved until all coatings have been
properly dried or cured in accordance with the coating manufacturers
instructions.
4.6.2
Coated items shall be handled with equipment such as wide belt slings, web
belts, and wide padded skids selected to prevent damage to the coating.
4.6.3
Handling equipment likely to cause damage to the coating shall not be used.
Items such as chains, cables, hooks, tongs, metal bars, and narrow skids shall
not be permitted to come in contact with the coating.
4.6.4
Dragging or skidding coated pipe shall not be permitted.
4.6.5
Coated items shall be loaded, padded, and secured for transport in a manner
such that the coating will not be damaged in transit.
4.6.6
Coated items shall be separated so that the items do not bear against each
other.
4.6.7
Coated items shall be stacked off the ground using suitable means
(e.g., parallel height ridges of rock-free sand, wooden timbers placed under
the uncoated pipe ends, etc.) to avoid damage to the coating.
ASSOC. PIP:
CTSE1000
DAILY INSPECTION REPORT
CTSE1000-F
PAGE 1 OF 1
APPLICATION OF EXTERNAL COATINGS
JUNE 2007
Facility Name/Location:
Item Name:
Purchaser/Location:
Item Tag
Job No:
No.:
Service:
Purchaser Order No.:
Unit:
Supplier/Location:
P&ID No.:
Supplier Order/Serial Nos.:
Instructions:
This form shall be completed for each work shift to verify compliance with PIP CTSE1000.
Record unsatisfactory work, conditions causing unsatisfactory work, and corrective action.
Attach copies of all replica tape readings taken.
Attach additional sheets, notes of meetings, or reports as necessary for backup.
Submit a copy of all forms and back-up documents to the purchasers inspector(s).
Report Date:
/
Start of
Blasting
Condition
Time
Ambient Temperature
Relative Humidity (%)
Dew Temperature
Substrate Temperature
Weather Conditions
C
C
F
F
Start of
painting
Midpoint of
painting
End of
painting
Surface Preparation:
Condition of Surface Before Blasting:
Method of Removing Contamination Before Blasting:
Method of Blasting:
Abrasive Type:
Grade:
Degree of Cleanliness Obtained:
m
mils
Method of Measuring Anchor Profile:
Anchor Profile:
Application Information:
Method of Spraying:
DFT Gage Type and Model:
Linings
Lining
Applied
Date Calibrated:
Batch No.
Lining
Color
Coat 1
Coat 2
Coat 3
Comments:
Suppliers Signature:
Inspectors Signature:
Thinner
No./Type
Used
DFT
Specified
m
mils
DFT
Obtained
m
mils
Actual Overcoat
Interval (hrs)
January 2002

Structural
PIP STS05120
Fabrication of Structural and
Miscellaneous Steel Specification

This Practice is subject to revision at any time by the responsible Function Team
and will be reviewed every 5 years. This Practice will be revised, reaffirmed, or
withdrawn. Information on whether this Practice has been revised may be found at
www.pip.org.

PRINTING HISTORY
November 1994
January 1999
Issued
Revision
January 2000
January 2002
January 2002
PIP STS05120
Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification
6.3.13 Checkered plate shall have 1/2-inch (12-mm) diameter drain holes provided
for each 20 square feet (2 square meters) of area, with a minimum of one
hole per panel.
6.4
Galvanizing
6.4.1
All materials, except ASTM A490 bolts, ASTM A490M bolts, and crane rails,
shall be galvanized, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents.
6.4.2
Galvanizing of steel shapes, plates, and hardware shall be in accordance with

the following ASTM specifications:
a. Steel shapes and plates - ASTM A123
b. ASTM A325/A325M bolts and corresponding nuts and washers
ASTM B695 (or ASTM A153/A153M, when approved by the buyer)
c. ASTM A36/A36M threaded bar or ASTM A307 bolts and corresponding
nuts and washers - ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM B695
6.4.3
General Fabrication
6.4.3.1 It shall be the fabricators responsibility to safeguard against
embrittlement and warpage per ASTM A143 and ASTM A384.
Fabrication details shall meet the requirements of ASTM A385 to
allow for the creation of high-quality zinc coatings.
6.4.3.2 Whenever practical, cutting, drilling, and welding shall be performed
before galvanizing. The fabricator shall remove weld slag before
galvanizing.
6.4.3.3 The edges of tightly contacting surfaces shall be completely seal
welded.
6.4.3.4 Vent holes shall be provided for piping or tubular assemblies as
required by ASTM A385.
6.4.3.5 Potential problems that require a modification in design shall be
brought to the attention of the buyer by the fabricator before
proceeding.
6.4.4
Galvanizing of Steel Hardware

6.4.4.1 Nuts shall be tapped oversize in accordance with
ASTM A563/A563M.
6.4.4.2 Nut threads shall be retapped after hot-dip galvanizing to provide a
proper fit.
6.4.4.3 Direct tension indicators, if used, shall be mechanically galvanized
by the manufacturer according to the requirements of Class 50 of
ASTM B695.
6.4.5
Inspection of Galvanized Steel

The buyer reserves the right to inspect and reject all galvanized steel in
accordance with ASTM A123 and ASTM E376.
Page 15 of 17
PIP STS05120
6.4.6
January 2002
Repair of Galvanized Steel

6.4.6.1 Any damage to galvanizing shall be repaired in accordance with
ASTM A780.
6.4.6.2 Before repair of damaged galvanized coating, the exposed substrate
metal shall be cleaned to bright metal and free of all visual rust, oil,
or grease. Any nonadhering galvanizing shall be removed to the
extent that the surrounding galvanizing is integral and adherent.
6.4.6.3 When surface defects exceed 2% of a members area, the defects
shall be repaired by redipping the member in the zinc bath.
6.4.6.4 Cold repair using an organic zinc-rich coating is allowed if the total
damaged area is less than 1% of the total coated area of the member
being repaired and no single repair is greater than 2 square inches
(1,300 mm2) or 12inches (300mm) long. The dry film thickness
shall be 2 mils to 3 mils (0.05 mm to 0.08 mm) and contain a
minimum of 65% zinc dust by weight.
6.4.6.5 Hot repairs shall be made in the shop if any of the following
conditions exist:
a. Total damaged area is greater than 1%, but less than 2%, of the
total coated area of the member being repaired
b. Any single repair is at least 2 square inches (1,300 mm2) in area
c. Any single repair is 12inches (300mm) long or more
6.4.6.6 Hot repairs shall be made using zinc alloy rod or powder
manufactured for the repair of galvanized steel.
6.4.6.7 Flux, heavy ash, or heavy dross inclusions shall be removed by
brushing, grinding, or filing as required.
6.4.6.8 Galvanized steel that has been rejected shall be stripped,
regalvanized, and submitted again for inspection.
6.4.6.9 Correction of excessive warpage (that exceeds ASTM A6/A6M
criteria) shall be by press straightening when possible. The
application of localized heating to straighten must be approved by
the engineer of record.
6.4.6.10 If galvanized tension control bolts are used, all bare steel surfaces
(i.e., bolt ends) shall be repair galvanized per this section.
6.5
Handling, Shipping, and Delivery

6.5.1
Handling and Shipping

6.5.1.1 Delivery of steel shall be made in the order needed for erection. The
delivery sequence for the fabricated steel, unless otherwise noted in
the contract documents or arranged by the buyer, shall be as follows:
loose base plates, steel embedded in concrete, erection bolts, first-tier
columns and framing for all its levels (including stairs and handrail),
second-tier columns and its framing, etc.
Page 16 of 17
January 2002
PIP STS05120
6.5.1.2 All bolts, washers, and nuts shall be packaged and delivered in rigid
(not cardboard), weatherproof containers.
6.5.1.3 Railcars and/or trucks shall be loaded and cribbed so that others can
readily unload them. Load in such a manner that continuous drainage
will occur.
6.5.1.4 The fabricator shall ensure that all steel and its coatings are protected
from any damage caused by handling, storage, or shipping before
receipt by the buyer.
6.5.1.5 The fabricator shall ensure that adequate protection is provided for
threads on sag rods and any other threaded components to prevent
damage during shipping and handling.
6.5.2
Delivery
6.5.2.1 The fabricator is responsible for delivering all materials and
documentation to the job site in good condition. All materials and
documentation will be inspected immediately upon receipt by the
buyer to determine that all items included in the Bill of Materials
have been supplied, to assure that all documentation has been
received, and to check for any damage.
6.5.2.2 The buyer reserves the right to reject all damaged or below-quality
material or documentation.
Page 17 of 17
2012-11-02
1.
UOP Specification
Paint Application
Page 1 of 4
970086 S905F-0
Scope
This document defines additional technical requirements for surface preparation prior to
painting, the application of paint, and the testing and recording of the test results.
2.
General
The process of paint application should follow the manufacturers recommended
specifications unless noted in this document. It is the responsibility of the Supplier to
assure requirements of this specification are available at the location of surface
preparation and painting for reference. These requirements must be available in both
English and the native language of the country where work is conducted.
3.
Surface preparation
1.
2.
Prior to paint application, the following shall be true:

a.
Surface shall comply with paint manufacturers product data sheet referenced for
each coating system.
b.
Surface shall be free of sharp edges, such as those normally occurring on rolled
structural members or plates, as well as those resulting from flame cutting,
welding, grinding, and shearing.
If noted in manufacturers data sheet or T905 document, surface shall be tested for
salt contamination.
a.
Each item shall be tested.
b.
Salt test shall be performed after surface cleaning is completed.
c.
Salt contamination level shall be less than or equal to 5 g/cm2.
d.
Testing shall comply with SSPC Guide 15, Field Methods for Retrieval and
Analysis of Soluble Salts on Steel and Other Non-Porous Substrates.
3.
Once steel is power cleaned and dust and loose residues have been removed, visual
examination shall be performed in accordance with SSPC-Vis 3. Surfaces not meant
to be painted shall be masked off before surface preparation and coating application
of adjacent surface.
4.
Surfaces that need protection from damage during surface preparation, such as
machined surfaces, name plates and flange faces, must be guarded sufficiently to
withstand inadvertent direct abrasive blasting. Condition of all guards shall be
checked after abrasive blasting to assure integrity. Any flange surfaces damaged for
any reason shall be machine to proper condition.
5.
Austenitic stainless steel within 100 ft (30 m) of application point of zinc-bearing

paint shall be isolated from application point with a waterproof barrier.
6.
Abrasives for use on stainless steel shall be free from of metals contaminants
7.
If hand tools are used to clean stainless steel only dedicated (not used for carbon
steel) stainless steel brushes shall be used
8.
Surface preparation or painting shall cease if environmental conditions are not per
manufacturers recommendation.
9.
Compressed air for abrasive blasting and painting must not contain moisture and oil.
manner or used for any purpose without its written permission.
2012-11-02
4.
5.
UOP Specification
Paint Application
Coating applications
1.
Coating application shall be as per applicable T905E document.
2.
Surface shall be primed the same day that blast cleaning is performed.
3.
If more than one coat is specified, a contrasting color shall be used to distinguish
between coats.
4.
The paint shall meet the minimum thickness specified by the T905E documents.
More coats will be applied until this minimum is reached.
5.
All coats should be a uniform film thickness.
6.
Masking and lubricant shall be removed after coating application, except for flange
surfaces which can remain covered until installation.
Daily Inspection Report and Final inspection report for paint

1.
6.
Page 2 of 4
970086 S905F-0
Daily Inspection Report shall include the following examination results and kept
current and ready for review. The accumulation of these reports will eventually
become the Final inspection report for paint. PIP Daily Inspection Report CTSE
1000F is an example of the minimum requirements of the report. Specific content
must include the following:
a.
Salt contamination level and location of measurement if required in T905 or

Manufacturers data sheet
b.
Surface profile measurement
c.
Visual inspection results of surface preparation cleaning quality
d.
Dry film thickness (DFT)
e.
Surface defects
f.
Coating Adhesion
g.
Environmental conditions
1.
Dew point measurement
2.
Temperature
h.
Paint Batch number
i.
Cure time between coats
Test method and technique

1.
Salt contamination level and Location of salt contamination test

a.
2.
SSPC Guide 15
Surface profile
a.
ASTM D 4417 (Method C)

1.
3.
Surface preparation cleaning quality

a.
SSPC-VIS-1
1.
4.
Replica Tape
Before application of prime coat
Dry film thickness (DFT)
2012-11-02
UOP Specification
Paint Application
a.
SSPC-PA 2 and MP EW-020-206, Section 4.6

1.
5.
6.
a.
Correct all pin holes, blisters, runs, sags,
b.
Check for uniformity and proper curing.
Coating Adhesion
ASTM D 3359 Method A
1.
8.
Spot measurements arithmetic mean of 3 gage readings, taken with 12

mm of each other. Tolerance +/- 20% of specified thickness
Surface defects
a.
7.
Page 3 of 4
970086 S905F-0
Locations selected by contractor
Container
1.
Paint shall be from original container bearing manufacturers name, product

designation, batch number, and manufacture date.
2.
Container of paint shall not be opened prior to use except for spot inspection.
3.
Container of paint shall be resealed after inspection.
4.
Paint shall be thoroughly mixed before and during use to keep the paint in
suspension.
5.
Skin that has formed on top of the paint should be cut loose from the container and
discarded before mixing. If the skin is too thick and compromises the paint, the paint
should not be used.
Miscellaneous
1.
Areas damaged by weather must be repaired.
2.
The following shall be free of coating material:

a.
Instrument display
b.
Gasket
c.
Gasket seating surfaces
d.
Threaded connection, except bolt threads
e.
Stainless-steel component
f.
Nickel-based alloy component
g.
Copper tubing
3.
Purchasers inspectors shall be given adequate notice before start of surface

preparation and coating application to witness work.
4.
Purchasers inspector shall have the option to witness or repeat any of these functions
as necessary
5.
An Examination and Test Plan will be developed by the supplier to cover all aspects
of surface preparation, coating application, shipping-storage-and handling, testing
and record keeping as described in this specification. It shall include all details as
defined in the S150 and U905F documents.
6.
An Examination and Test Record shall be completed as described in the S150

document.
2012-11-02
UOP Specification
Paint Application
7.
9.
10.
Page 4 of 4
970086 S905F-0
Proprietary items such as motors, pumps, instrumentation and electrical components

may use Manufacturers standard paint system for a High humidity / Moderate
corrosive environment.
Shipping Handling and Storage

1.
Coated items shall not be handled or moved until all items have been properly cured
per manufacturers data sheet guideline.
2.
Handling and lifting equipment must not cause damage to the finish. Wide belt sling
web belts and padded skids are recommended. Chains, cables, hooks and other
mechanisms that will cause surface damage are prohibited.
3.
Dragging or skidding finished coated pipe is prohibited.
4.
Coated items shall be loaded using padding between pieces and secured for transport
in a way to avoid damage to the coating.
5.
Coated items shall be stacked off the ground using suitable means to avoid damaging
the coating.
References
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) applicable
ASTM D 4417 Method C, Test Method for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast
Cleaned Steel.
National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE)
NACE Standard RP0287, Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Abrasive Blast
Cleaned Steel Surfaces using Replica Tape.
PIP CTSE1000, Application of External Coatings
Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
Guide 15, Field Methods for Retrieval and Analysis of Soluble Salts on Steel and Other
Non-Porous Substrates
SSPC PA-2, Measurements of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges.
SSPC Vis 1-89, Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel
SSPC Vis 3, Visual Standard for Power and Hand Tool Cleaned Steel
MP EW-020-206, NZRC-Protective Coatings of Steel Structures, Equipment and Piping
2012-11-05

Paint System 02
Page 1 of 1
970086 T905E-02-0
1.
Paint System for Insulated(1) and Non-Insulated Piping Systems, Structural Steel, Ferritic Steel
Equipment and Machinery (Temp 100 C)
2.
Surface
Preparation
3.
Coat No.
4.
5.
6.
3(1)
ISO 8501-1, Sa 3 (SSPC SP-5)

micron
Surface Profile
All dirt, oil, grease, salts, moisture, chemicals, and other
mil
38-63
contamination shall be removed prior to abrasive blasting.
Application
Minimum Dry Film
Maximum Dry Film
Generic Material Type
Method
Thickness (DFT)
Thickness (DFT)
2 Component Polyamide
micron
micron
Spray
100
150
Epoxy Primer (70% solids)
mil
mil
micron
micron
Spray
100
150
mil
mil
2 Component Aliphatic
micron
micron
Acrylic Polyurethane (65%
Spray
75
100
mil
mil
solids)
7.
Top Coat Color
The topcoat color is per NRF-009-PEMEX-2004 (Section 8.13: Identification of Pipes) and P.3.0403.01:2007 CN
8.
(Section 8.6: Identification of Facilities). Final pipeline top coat colors shall be based upon line list..
9.
Mixing and Thinning
Materials shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Only manufacturers recommended
10 thinners shall be used. Amount of thinner used shall be measured, not estimated, to ensure consistency during
coating application.
11
Application
Coating shall be applied in accordance with manufacturers instructions, NRF-053-PEMEX-2006, PIP
12
CTSE1000, and 970086 S905F documents.
13
Touch-up Paint System
Surface Profile
micron
SSPC-SP1 and SSPC-SP3 (St 3)
Surface
14
Preparation
mil
38-63
Application
Minimum Dry Film
Maximum Dry Film
15
Coat No.
Method
Thickness (DFT)
Thickness (DFT)
micron
micron
16
1
Spray
100
150
mil
mil
micron
micron
17
2
Spray
100
150
mil
mil
micron
micron
18
3(1)
Spray
75
100
mil
mil
solids)
19
Paint Materials
20 Material
Manufacturer
Product Designation
21 Polyamide Epoxy Primer
International Paint
Intergard 345
22 Polyamide Epoxy Primer
International Paint
Intergard 345
Aliphatic Acrylic
23
Polyurethane
International Paint
Interthane 990HS
Remarks
Must meet local VOC

requirements
24
25
Notes
Any deviation to this paint system including, but not limited to, manufacturer and product designations shall
require written approval from UOP before proceeding. This paint system is appropriate up to 100oC. Paint
System provides very good resistance to environments dry and wet saline chemicals, acids and alkalis, the first
coat contains primary corrosion inhibitors, the second coat provides intermediate greater resistance and third
26 coat (finish) gives excellent appearance. Suitable for surfaces at petrochemical refinery facilities, equipment, and
process pipelines.
(1)
This system, when used under insulation, should not include the Polyurethane Finish (coat #3).
Intergard 345
Epoxy
PRODUCT
DESCRIPTION
A two component, low VOC, high solids, fast curing epoxy primer/finish containing zinc phosphate anti-corrosive
pigmentation.
INTENDED USES
Suitable for use as a one or two coat primer/finish coating or as an intermediate over recommended anti-corrosive
primers.
Intergard 345 provides a combination of anti-corrosive barrier protection, chemical fume and spillage resistance,
along with good abrasion resistance. Ideal for use in moderately corrosive environments and where fast drying/rapid
recoating is desired.
PRACTICAL
INFORMATION FOR
INTERGARD 345
Color
Wide range via the Chromascan system
Gloss Level
Semi Gloss
Volume Solids
70%
Typical Thickness
4-6 mils (100-150 microns) dry equivalent to 5.7-8.6 mils (143-214 microns) wet
Theoretical Coverage
225 sq.ft/US gallon at 5 mils d.f.t and stated volume solids

5.60 m/liter at 125 microns d.f.t and stated volume solids
Practical Coverage
Allow appropriate loss factors
Method of Application
Airless Spray, Air Spray, Brush, Roller
Drying Time
Overcoating Interval with
recommended topcoats
Temperature
Touch Dry
Hard Dry
Minimum
Maximum
50F (10C)
90 minutes
7 hours
7 hours
Extended
59F (15C)
75 minutes
5 hours
5 hours
Extended
77F (25C)
60 minutes
2.5 hours
2.5 hours
Extended
104F (40C)
30 minutes
1 hour
1 hour
Extended
See Product Characteristics section for further details

See International Protective Coatings Definitions & Abbreviations
REGULATORY DATA Flash Point

Product Weight
Part A 91F (33C); Part B 109F (43C); Mixed 93F (34C)

12.1 Ib/gal (1.45 kg/l)
EPA Method 24
EU Solvent Emissions Directive
(Council Directive 1999/13/EC)
VOC
Protective Coatings
Page 1 of 4
Issue Date:12/1/2011
Ref:2129
2.67 lb/gal (320 g/lt)

235 g/kg
Worldwide Product
Intergard 345
Epoxy
SURFACE
PREPARATION
All surfaces to be coated should be clean, dry and free from contamination. Prior to paint application, all surfaces
should be assessed and treated in accordance with ISO 8504:2000.
Oil or grease should be removed in accordance with SSPC-SP1 solvent cleaning.
Abrasive Blast Cleaning
Abrasive blast clean to SSPC SP6 or Sa2 (ISO 8501-1:2007). If oxidation has occurred between blasting and
application of Intergard 345 the surface should be reblasted to the specified visual standard.
Surface defects revealed by the blast cleaning process should be ground, filled, or treated in the appropriate manner.
Intergard 345 is suitable for application to blast cleaned surfaces which were initially to the above standard but have
been allowed to deteriorate under good shop conditions for up to 7-10 days. The surface may deteriorate to Sa2
standard but must be free from loose powdery deposits.
Primed Surfaces
Weld seams and damaged areas should be blast cleaned to SSPC SP6 or Sa2 (ISO 8501-1:2007).
If the shop primer shows extensive or widely scattered breakdown overall sweep blasting maybe necessary.
Concrete, Pre-cast Blockwork, etc
Intergard 345 is suitable for application to concrete. For the first coat it is recommended that Intergard 345 is thinned
10-15% by International Thinners in order to provide good penetration with the concrete substrate and act as a
primer/sealer coat.
Concrete should be cured for a minimum of 28 days prior to coating. The moisture content of the concrete should be
below 6%. All surfaces should be clean, dry and free from curing compounds, release agents, trowelling compounds,
surface hardeners, efflorescence, grease, oil, dirt, old coatings and loose or disintegrating concrete. All poured and
precast concrete must also be sweep blasted (preferred) or acid etched to remove laitence.
APPLICATION
Mixing
Material is supplied in two containers as a unit. Always mix a complete unit in the
proportions supplied. Once the unit has been mixed, it must be used within the working
pot life specified.
(1)
Agitate Base (Part A) with a power agitator.
(2)
Combine entire contents of Curing Agent (Part B) with Base
(Part A) and mix thoroughly with power agitator.
Mix Ratio
4 part(s) : 1 part(s) by volume
Working Pot Life
50F (10C)
3 hours
Airless Spray
Recommended
Tip Range 17-21 thou (0.43-0.53 mm)

Total output fluid pressure at spray tip not less than 2503 psi
(176 kg/cm)
Air Spray
(Pressure Pot)
Recommended
Gun
Air Cap
Fluid Tip
Brush
Suitable - Small areas only Typically 3.0-4.0 mils (75-100 microns) can be achieved
Roller
Thinner
International GTA220
(International GTA415)
Cleaner
International GTA220 or International GTA415
Work Stoppages
Do not allow material to remain in hoses, gun or spray equipment. Thoroughly flush all
equipment with International GTA415. Once units of paint have been mixed they should
not be resealed and it is advised that after prolonged stoppages work recommences with
freshly mixed units.
Clean Up
Clean all equipment immediately after use with International GTA415. It is good working
practice to periodically flush out spray equipment during the course of the working day.
Frequency of cleaning will depend upon amount sprayed, temperature and elapsed time,
including any delays.
All surplus materials and empty containers should be disposed of in accordance with
appropriate regional regulations/legislation.
Page 2 of 4
59F (15C)
2 hours
77F (25C)
60 minutes
104F (40C)
45 minutes
DeVilbiss MBC or JGA

704 or 765
E
Do not thin more than allowed by local environmental

legislation
Intergard 345
Epoxy
PRODUCT
CHARACTERISTICS
Maximum film build in one coat is best attained by airless spray. When applying by methods other than airless spray,
the required film build is unlikely to be achieved. Application by air spray may require a multiple cross spray pattern
to attain maximum film build. Lower or high temperatures may require specific application techniques to achieve
maximum film build.
When applying Intergard 345 by brush or roller, it may be necessary to apply multiple coats to achieve the total
specified system dry film thickness.
This product will not cure adequately below 41F (5C). For maximum performance ambient curing temperatures
should be above 50F (10C).
Surface temperature must always be a minimum of 5F (3C) above dew point.
When applying Intergard 345 in confined spaces, ensure adequate ventilation.
In moderately corrosive environments, it is recommended that a minimum of 4 mils (100 microns) dry film thickness
should be specified to ensure adequate anti-corrosive performance. However, in non-aggressive, low corrosive
environments such as those equating to C2 as per ISO 12944 part 2, it is acceptable to specify Intergard 345 as a
single coat at 3.2 mils (80 microns) dry film thickness.
Condensation occurring during or immediately after application may result in a matte finish and an inferior film.
When utilizing certain colors, particularly the darker shades via the Chromascan system where maximum addition of
colorants is required, it is necessary to allow an increase in the quoted drying and overcoating times. Consult
International Protective Coatings for further details.
Exposure to dew or rain prior to specified hard dry time may cause a deterioration in surface appearance which may
in turn impair overall performance. This phenomena is particularly prominent in darker shades.
In common with all epoxies, Intergard 345 will chalk and discolor on exterior exposure. However, these phenomena
are not detrimental to anti-corrosive performance.
Where a durable cosmetic finish with good gloss and color retention is required, overcoat with recommended
topcoats.
Note: VOC values are typical and are provided for guidance purpose only. These may be subject to variation
depending on factors such as differences in color and normal manufacturing tolerances.
Low molecular weight reactive additives, which will form part of the film during normal ambient cure conditions, will
also effect VOC values determined using EPA Method 24.
SYSTEMS
COMPATIBILITY
Page 3 of 4
Intergard 345 is normally applied directly to blast cleaned steel, however, it can also be applied directly over the
following primers:Intercure 200HS
Intercure 200
Intergard 251
Intergard 269
Intergard 345
Interzinc 52
Interzinc 315
The following topcoats are recommended:Interfine 629HS
Intergard 740
Interthane 870
Interthane 990
For other suitable primers/topcoats, consult International Protective Coatings.
Intergard 345
Epoxy
D ADDITIONAL
et INFORMATION
ai
l
T
o
p
Further information regarding industry standards, terms and abbreviations used in this data sheet can be found in the
following documents available at www.international-pc.com:
Definitions & Abbreviations
Surface Preparation
Paint Application
Theoretical & Practical Coverage
Individual copies of these information sections are available upon request.
SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS
This product is intended for use only by professional applicators in industrial situations in accordance with the advice
given on this sheet, the Material Safety Data Sheet and the container(s), and should not be used without reference to
the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) which International Protective Coatings has provided to its customers.
All work involving the application and use of this product should be performed in compliance with all relevant
national, Health, Safety & Environmental standards and regulations.
In the event welding or flame cutting is performed on metal coated with this product, dust and fumes will be emitted
which will require the use of appropriate personal protective equipment and adequate local exhaust ventilation.
If in doubt regarding the suitability of use of this product, consult International Protective Coatings for further advice.
Rect Top
PACK SIZE
Unit Size
Vol
Part A
Pack
Vol
Part B
Pack
20 liter
16 liter
20 liter
4 liter
5 liter
5 US gal
4 US gal
5 US gal
1 US gal
1 US gal
For availability of other pack sizes contact International Protective Coatings
SHIPPING WEIGHT
STORAGE
Unit Size
Part A
Part B
20 liter
26.8 kg
4.3 kg
5 US gal
50 lb
8.6 lb
Shelf Life
18 months minimum at 77F (25C). Subject to re-inspection thereafter. Store in

dry, shaded conditions away from sources of heat and ignition.
Rect
Bottom
Disclaimer
The information in this data sheet is not intended to be exhaustive; any person using the product for any purpose other than that specifically recommended in this data sheet without first
obtaining written confirmation from us as to the suitability of the product for the intended purpose does so at their own risk. All advice given or statements made about the product (whether in
this data sheet or otherwise) is correct to the best of our knowledge but we have no control over the quality or the condition of the substrate or the many factors affecting the use and application
of the product. Therefore, unless we specifically agree in writing to do so, we do not accept any liability at all for the performance of the product or for (subject to the maximum extent permitted
by law) any loss or damage arising out of the use of the product. We hereby disclaim any warranties or representations, express or implied, by operation of law or otherwise, including, without
limitation, any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. All products supplied and technical advice given are subject to our Conditions of Sale. You should request
a copy of this document and review it carefully. The information contained in this data sheet is liable to modification from time to time in the light of experience and our policy of continuous
development. It is the user's responsibility to check with their local International Paint representative that this data sheet is current prior to using the product.
This Technical Data Sheet is available on our website at www.international-marine.com or www.international-pc.com, and should be the same as this document. Should there be any
discrepancies between this document and the version of the Technical Data Sheet that appears on the website, then the version on the website will take precedence.
Issue date: 12/1/2011
Copyright AkzoNobel, 12/1/2011.
www.international-pc.com
Page 4 of 4
2012-11-05

Paint System 03
Page 1 of 1
970086 T905E-03-0
1.
Paint System for Non-Insulated Piping Systems, Structural Steel, Ferritic Steel Equipment and
Machinery (Temp 120 C)
2.
Surface
Preparation
3.
Coat No.
4.
5.
6.
ISO 8501-1, Sa 3 (SSPC SP-5)

micron
Surface Profile
mil
38-63
Application
Minimum Dry Film
Maximum Dry Film
Method
Thickness (DFT)
Thickness (DFT)
2 Component Zinc Rich
micron
micron
Spray
75
100
mil
mil
2 Component High Solids
micron
micron
Polyamide Epoxy (70%
Spray
125
150
mil
mil
solids)
micron
micron
Spray
50
75
mil
mil
solids)
7.
Top Coat Color
8.
(Section 8.6: Identification of Facilities). Final pipeline top coat colors shall be based upon line list.
9.
Mixing and Thinning
10 thinners shall be used. Amount of thinner used shall be measured, not estimated, to ensure consistency during
11
Application
Coating shall be applied in accordance with manufacturers instructions , NRF-053-PEMEX-2006, PIP
12
13
SSPC-SP6 Preferred
Surface Profile
micron
Surface
14
SSPC-SP3 (St 3) Weld seams and damaged areas.
Preparation
mil
38-63
15
Coat No.
16
17
18

2 Component Zinc Rich
2 Component High Solids
Polyamide Epoxy (70%
solids)
solids)
19
Application
Method
Spray
Minimum Dry Film

Thickness (DFT)
micron
75
mil
Maximum Dry Film

Thickness (DFT)
micron
100
mil
Spray
125
micron
mil
150
micron
mil
Spray
50
micron
mil
75
micron
mil
Paint Materials
20 Material
Manufacturer
Product Designation
Remarks
21 Zinc Rich Epoxy Primer
International Paint
Interzinc 52HS Series
Must meet local VOC

requirements
International Paint
Intergard 475HS
Must be HS type
International Paint
Interthane 990HS Series
Must meet local VOC

requirements
High Solids Polyamide

Epoxy
Aliphatic Acrylic
23
Polyurethane
22
24
25
Notes
require written approval from UOP before proceeding. This paint system is appropriate up to 120oC. Do not use
under insulation or fire proofing. Excellent corrosion protection for most severe environments. The first coat acts
26 as the primary and sacrificial anode. The second coat (intermediate) and the third coat (finish) provide greater
resistance in environments that are humid (with or without salinity) and gases containing sulfur derivatives in a
marine environment. Deviates from the standard PERMEX specification in that organic zinc (Interzinc 52) is
specified in place of an inorganic zinc system due to the field application of this paint system.
Intergard 475HS
Epoxy
PRODUCT
DESCRIPTION
A low VOC, high solids, high build, two component epoxy coating. Available with conventional pigmentation, or
alternatively can be pigmented with micaceous iron oxide to provide enhanced overcoating properties.
INTENDED USES
For use as a high build epoxy coating to improve barrier protection for a range of anti-corrosive coating systems in a
wide range of environments including offshore structures, petrochemical plants, pulp and paper mills and bridges.
Suitable for use in both maintenance and new construction situations as part of an anti-corrosive coating system.
The micaceous iron oxide variant improves long term overcoating properties, better facilitating application in the
fabrication shop, prior to shipping, with final overcoating on site.
PRACTICAL
INFORMATION FOR
INTERGARD 475HS
Color
Light gray MIO and a selected range of colors
Gloss Level
Matte
Volume Solids
80%
Typical Thickness
4-8 mils (100-200 microns) dry equivalent to 5-10 mils (125-250 microns) wet

Practical Coverage
Drying Time
Temperature
Touch Dry
Hard Dry
23F (-5C)
150 minutes
48 hours
48 hours
Extended
41F (5C)
90 minutes
16 hours
16 hours
Extended
59F (15C)
75 minutes
10 hours
10 hours
Extended
77F (25C)
60 minutes
5 hours
5 hours
Extended
Minimum
Maximum
See International Protective Coatings Definitions & Abbreviations

Maximum overcoating intervals are shorter when using polysiloxane topcoats. Consult International Protective Coatings
for further details.
For curing at elevated temperatures an alternative curing agent is available. See Product Characteristics for details.

Product Weight

17.5 Ib/gal (2.10 kg/l)
1.72 lb/gal (207 g/lt) EPA Method 24

92 g/kg
VOC
Protective Coatings
Page 1 of 4
Ref:2153
Worldwide Product
Intergard 475HS
Epoxy
SURFACE
PREPARATION
All surfaces to be coated should be clean, dry and free from contamination. Prior to paint application, all surfaces
Primed Surfaces
Intergard 475HS should always be applied over a recommended anti-corrosive coating scheme. The primer surface
should be dry and free from all contamination, and Intergard 475HS must be applied within the overcoating intervals
specified (consult the relevant product data sheet).
Areas of breakdown, damage etc., should be prepared to the specified standard (e.g. SSPC-SP6 or Sa2 (ISO 8501
-1:2007), Abrasive Blasting, or SSPC-SP11, Power Tool Cleaning) and patch primed prior to the application of
Intergard 475HS.
Zinc Primed Surfaces
Ensure that the surface of the primer is clean, dry and free from contamination and zinc salts before application of
Intergard 475HS. Ensure zinc primers are fully cured before overcoating.
APPLICATION
Mixing
proportions supplied. Once the unit has been mixed, it must be used within the working
pot life specified.
(1)
(2)
Mix Ratio
Working Pot Life
23F (-5C)
3 hours
Airless Spray
Recommended

(190 kg/cm)
Air Spray
(Pressure Pot)
Recommended
Gun
Air Cap
Fluid Tip
Brush
Suitable
Typically 3.0 mils (75 microns) can be achieved
Roller
Suitable
Typically 3.0 mils (75 microns) can be achieved
Thinner

legislation
Cleaner
International GTA822 (or International GTA415)
Work Stoppages
Clean Up
41F (5C)
3 hours
59F (15C)
2.5 hours
77F (25C)
2 hours

704 or 765
E
appropriate regional regulations/legislation
Page 2 of 4
Intergard 475HS
Epoxy
PRODUCT
CHARACTERISTICS
Intergard 475HS is primarily designed for use as a high build barrier coat to impart barrier protection to a coating
system. It is recommended that it should be overcoated with a durable finish from the Interfine or Interthane range
when appearance is important.
to attain maximum film build. Lower or high temperatures may require specific application techniques to achieve
maximum film build.
When applying Intergard 475HS by brush or roller, it may be necessary to apply multiple coats to achieve the total
Surface temperature must always be a minimum of 5F (3C) above dew point. When applying Intergard 475HS in
confined spaces, ensure adequate ventilation. Exposure to unacceptably low temperatures and/or high humidities
during, or immediately after, application may result in incomplete cure and surface contamination that could
jeopardize subsequent intercoat adhesion.
Elevated Temperature Curing
An alternative curing agent is available for applications at temperatures greater than 77F (25C).
Temperature
Touch Dry
Hard Dry

Minimum
Maximum
77F (25C)
104F (40C)
90 minutes
60 minutes
6 hours
2 hours
6 hours
2 hours
Extended *
Extended *
* See International Protective Coatings Definitions and Abbreviations

Interchanging standard and elevated temperature curing agents during application to a specific structure will give rise
to an observable color change due to the difference in the yellowing/discoloration process common to all epoxies on
exposure to UV light. In common with all epoxies, Intergard 475HS will chalk and discolor on exterior exposure.
However, these phenomena are not detrimental to anti-corrosive performance.
Intergard 475HS is not designed for continuous water immersion.
The micaceous iron oxide variant of this product is frequently used as a travel coat prior to final overcoating on site.
To ensure best extended overcoating properties, ensure overapplication does not occur and that the surface is fully
cleaned of any contamination which may be present in the surface texture due to the coarse nature of the micaceous
iron oxide pigmentation.
When applying Intergard 475HS at temperatures less than 59F (15C) or wet film thicknesses of 6 mils (150
microns) or less, addition of around 5% International GTA007 thinners will improve film appearance, sprayability and
aid film thickness control.
SYSTEMS
COMPATIBILITY
Intergard 475HS is designed for use over correctly primed steel. Suitable primers are:
Intercure 200
Intergard 251
Intergard 269
Interzinc 22 (mist coat or tie coat recommended)*

Interzinc 315
Interzinc 52
Suitable topcoats are:

Intergard 740
Interthane 990
Interfine 629HS
Intergard 475HS
For alternative primers and finishes, consult International Protective Coatings.

* See relevant product data sheet for details.
Page 3 of 4
Intergard 475HS
Epoxy
D ADDITIONAL
et INFORMATION
ai
l
T
o
p
Surface Preparation
Paint Application
SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS
Rect Top
PACK SIZE
Unit Size
Vol
Part A
Pack
Vol
Part B
Pack
20 liter
15 liter
20 liter
5 liter
5 liter
5 US gal
3 US gal
5 US gal
1 US gal
1 US gal
For availability of other pack sizes contact International Protective Coatings
SHIPPING WEIGHT
STORAGE
Unit Size
Part A
Part B
20 liter
35.4 kg
9.3 kg
5 US gal
57.1 lb
8.4 lb
Shelf Life
12 months minimum at 77F (25C).

Subject to re-inspection thereafter. Store in dry, shaded conditions away from sources
of heat and ignition.
Rect
Bottom
Disclaimer
Page 4 of 4
2012-11-05

Paint System 15
Page 1 of 1
970086 T905E-15-0
1.
Paint System for Insulated and Non-Insulated Piping Systems, Ferritic Steel Equipment and
Machinery (Temp 400 C)
2.
Surface
Preparation
3.
Coat No.
4.
5.
ISO 8501-1, Sa 3 (SSPC SP-5)

micron
Surface Profile
mil
50-75
Application
Minimum Dry Film
Maximum Dry Film
Method
Thickness (DFT)
Thickness (DFT)
Heat Resistant Cold Spray
Aluminum
micron
micron
Spray
100
Alternate: Single
100
75
mil
mil
Component Polymer Blend
(34% solids)
Aluminum
micron
micron
75
Spray
100
Alternate: Single
100
mil
mil
(34% solids)
6.
Top Coat Color
7. The topcoat color is Metallic Gray (Aluminum).
8.
Mixing and Thinning
9. thinners shall be used. Amount of thinner used shall be measured, not estimated, to ensure consistency during
10
Application
11 Coating shall be applied in accordance with manufacturers instructions and NRF-053-PEMEX-2006.
12
SSPC-SP6;
Surface Profile
micron
Surface
13
SSPC SP-11 for Touch-up and Repair.
Preparation
mil
50-75
14
Coat No.
15
16

Aluminum
Alternate: Single
(34% solids)
Aluminum
Alternate: Single
(34% solids)
17
Minimum Dry Film

Thickness (DFT)
Maximum Dry Film

Thickness (DFT)
Spray
75
100
micron
mil
100
micron
mil
Spray
75
100
micron
mil
100
micron
mil
Paint Materials
18 Material
Heat Resistant Cold
Spray Aluminum
19
Application
Method
Alternate: Single
Component Polymer
Blend
Manufacturer
International Paint
Alternate: Hi Temp
Coatings
Product Designation
Remarks
Intertherm 751CSA
Two (2) Coats Required
Alternate: HT-1027
20
21
Notes
22 require written approval from UOP before proceeding. This paint system is appropriate for temperatures under
400oC for both insulated and non-insulated pipe and equipment.
Hi-Temp 1027
- CUI
- Stainless Steel
- DTR
- Primer
- Cryogenic

Prevents Corrosion Under Insulation

Prevents Stress Corrosion Cracking
Direct to Tight, Adherent Rust Application
High Build, High Solids
Protects Cryogenic Equipment
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
Service Temperature: minus 300F to 1200F [minus 185C to 650C]
Surface Application Temperatures: 50F to 600F [10C to 316C]*
Hi-Temp 1027 is a high-build, single component coating formulated to prevent corrosion under insulation of
carbon and stainless steel.
Hi-Temp 1027 is formulated to help prevent chloride induced stress corrosion cracking of stainless steel and
has been tested by an independent laboratory for low leachable chlorides, sulfides and halides. It helps protect
against chlorides: 1) from the atmosphere, 2) from by-products of process operations, and 3) which may be
incorporated in the insulation, from coming in contact with stainless steel.
Hi-Temp 1027 is a low VOC, high build primer which air dries at ambient temperatures to a UV resistant and
stable film, and provides excellent corrosion resistance at the full range of service temperatures.
Hi-Temp 1027 can be top coated with a full range of Hi-Temp color top coats.
Hi-Temp 1027 can be applied directly to hot substrates having a metal temperature up to 600F [316C]*,
eliminating the need for costly shutdown during maintenance.
Hi-Temp 1027 does not require a heat cure to achieve superior corrosion resistance.
Hi-Temp 1027 is resistant to thermal shock and thermal cycling in intermittent (wet, steam, dry) service.
Hi-Temp 1027 can be applied to tightly adhering rust in maintenance and repair situations.
Hi-Temp 1027 will protect cryogenic equipment in continuous or cyclic operation from minus 300F to 1000F
[minus 185C to 538C].
Hi-Temp 1027 provides a UV-resistant, chalking-free film with no maximum recoat interval, regardless of
operating temperature, as long as the surface to be recoated is clean and free of all contaminants.
TECHNICAL DATA:
Components:
One
Type:
Inert Multipolymeric Matrix
Dry Temperature Resistance:
1200F [650C] Continuous, 1400F [760C] Peak
Cryogenic Service:
Minus 300F to 1000F [Minus 185C to 538C]
Adhesion ASTM 3359:
100%
Impact ASTM G-14 (direct):
30 lbs.
Colors Available:
Black (Dark Gray), Gray, and Light Gray
Minor color change may occur in exposed service, but corrosion protection will not be compromised.
Finish:
Flat
Dry Time @ 50% R.H., 70F [21C]:
To touch 2 hours
(Recoat and dry times are reduced when
To ship 24 hours
applied to hot substrates)
To topcoat 6 hours
Substrate Temperature During Application:
50F [10C] and rising to 600F [316C]*
Thinner/Cleanup:
See Mixing, Thinning, and Cleanup Table
Volume Solids:
65% 2% as applied
2
Coverage @ 1 mil DFT
1042 ft /gal
2
@ 25 microns DFT
[25.5 m /l]
VOC:
3.5 lbs/gal [420 g/l]
Weight:
16 lbs/gallon [1.92 kg/liter]
Packaging:
1 gallon cans; 50 gallon drums
Storage Temperatures:
40F to 120F [4C to 49C]
Shelf Life:
Two years
*
For direct application to hot substrates over 500F and up to 600F [260C to 316C]
consult Hi-Temp Technical Service.
HI-TEMP COATINGS TECHNOLOGY P.O. Box 2347 Acton, MA 01720

Tel: 978-635-1110 Fax: 978-635-1124 hitemp@hitempcoatings.com www.hitempcoatings.com
Rev. 060712
Page 1 of 4
SURFACE PREPARATION:
As with all coatings, the performance and service life of Hi-Temp 1027 are relative to the quality of surface
preparation accomplished.
CARBON STEEL All surfaces to be coated with Hi-Temp 1027 shall be free of all weld splatter, oil, dirt, grease,
and all other contaminants, especially salts. Round off all rough welds and sharp edges.
In maintenance and repair situations, Hi-Temp 1027 can be applied over a surface in which tightly adhering rust is
still present; remove all rust scale and loosely adhering rust until glints of bright metal are visible. The remaining
rust must be tightly adherent and not easily removed by lightly wiping with a cloth.
Hi-Temp 1027 should only be used to overcoat inorganic zinc or itself. When overcoating aged inorganic zinc,
prepare a small test patch and check for adhesion. If previously applied coatings other than inorganic zinc or HiTemp 1027 are not fully removed by the method of surface preparation utilized, feather the edges of any remaining
old coating, and use Hi-Temp 1027 to spot prime only the areas where the substrate is exposed.
Non-insulated surfaces:
Recommended: Dry abrasive blast clean to SSPC-SP 6, Commercial Blast [Sa 2] with a 1.5 to 2.5 mil [38
to 63 micron] profile.
When abrasive blast cleaning is not an option, the following methods are acceptable:
SSPC-SP 15 Commercial Grade Power Tool Cleaning, with a minimum 1.0 mil [25 micron] profile.
SSPC-SP 12, Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Metals by Waterjetting Prior to Recoating to meet the
visual definition of WJ-3, Thorough Cleaning. Use potable water.
SSPC-SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning [St 3] or SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning [St 2].
Insulated surfaces:
Recommended: Dry abrasive blast clean to SSPC-SP 6, Commercial Blast [Sa 2] or better, with a 1.5 to
2.5 mil [38 to 63 micron] profile.
When abrasive blasting is not an option, the following methods are acceptable:
SSPC-SP 15 Commercial Grade Power Tool Cleaning, with a minimum 1.0 mil [25 micron] profile.
SSPC-SP 12, Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Metals by Waterjetting Prior to Recoating to meet the
visual definition of WJ-2 Very thorough or Substantial Cleaning. Use potable water. All existing coating
must be removed except for aged inorganic zinc or existing Hi-Temp 1027.
Power Tool Clean or Hand Tool Clean to remove all existing coating except for aged inorganic zinc or
existing Hi-Temp 1027.
STAINLESS STEEL
All surfaces to be coated with Hi-Temp 1027 shall be free of all weld splatter, oil, dirt,
grease, and all other contaminants, especially salts. Round off all rough welds and sharp edges.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT USE CHLORINATED SOLVENTS ON STAINLESS STEEL SURFACES.
Non-insulated and insulated surfaces:
Small surfaces may be cleaned with a chloride free solvent. Large surfaces may be cleaned utilizing a
high or low pressure wash or steam cleaning with an alkaline detergent, followed by a freshwater rinse.
Water used should be potable grade or better and should be checked to assure minimal salt content. Do
not use any chemical additives in the rinse water.
An anchor profile is not mandatory for adhesion of Hi-Temp 1027 on stainless steel surfaces.
o As an option, following cleaning, a light abrasive sweep blast using an appropriate chloride free
abrasive may be performed. After completion of this mechanical surface preparation, rinse the surface
with potable grade water or better. Always allow rinsed surfaces to dry before coating.
Product: Hi-Temp 1027

Rev. 060712
Page 2 of 4
MIXING, THINNING, AND CLEANUP:

Hi-Temp 1027 is a heavy bodied material; use mechanical agitation for mixing immediately before application and
as needed during application. Be sure any settled solids are incorporated during mixing. If thinning is needed, thin
only with Hi-Temp thinners and in accordance with applicable regulations. Agitate as needed during application.
Application to ambient substrate
Below 150F [66C]
Application to hot substrate 150F to 500F

[66C to 260C]
Flush equipment and thin with Hi-Temp #10 or #11
Flush equipment and thin with Hi-Temp #5
Clean up with Thinners #5, #10, #11
For application to hot substrates over 150F and up to 500F [66C to 260C] thin (if needed) only with HiTemp thinner #5. For application to substrates over 500F and up to 600F [260C to 316C] consult
Hi-Temp Technical Service.
APPLICATION:
For ambient application, surface temperature should be a minimum of 5F [3C] above the dew point. Do not apply
to surfaces with surface temperature below 50F [10C]. Do not exceed recommended maximum dry film
thicknesses for the appropriate service type and temperatures.
APPLICATION TO HOT SURFACES:

IMPORTANT! It is essential to apply multiple thin passes of Hi-Temp 1027 during application to hot steel. This
process, similar to mist coating, prevents blistering and also allows solvent to escape without leaving pinholes. Use
of a solvent other than Hi-Temp #5 thinner could produce a fire hazard, and dry spray and poor film
characteristics may also result. If blisters are observed in Hi-Temp 1027 applied to hot surfaces, immediately brush
out the blisters before they set, using a wood-handled china bristle brush. Note that the higher the substrate
temperature, the shorter the recoat time.
For direct application to hot substrates over 500F and up to 600F [260C to 316C] consult Hi-Temp
Technical Service.
APPLICATION EQUIPMENT:
Spray application is recommended: Use conventional or airless spray and good painting practices. Typical
equipment is as follows:
Product
1027
Air
Pressure
60-80 psi
Conventional Spray
Fluid
Fluid Tip
Pressure
Pressure
<40 psi
1.8 to 2.2 mm 3000 psi
Airless Spray
Minimum Fluid
Line
1/4 to 3/8
Tip size
417 to 521
Brush and Roll: Spray application is recommended but when spray painting is not possible, brush or roll
application may be used. The coating should be applied with a suitable brush or short nap roller. Brushing and
rolling only in one direction may aid in building film thickness. For more specific instructions, refer to the Hi-Temp
Coatings Application Guideline titled Guidelines for Roller and Brush Application of Hi-Temp Coatings Products.
APPLICATION SYSTEMS:
I. INSULATED AND NON-INSULATED SERVICE
Carbon Steel / Stainless Steel Applied direct to hot or ambient steel
Hi-Temp 1027
2 coats @ 5 to 6 mils DFT [125 to 150 microns]; total of 10 to 12 mils DFT [250 to 300 microns]
Optional 3rd coat @ 5 to 6 mils DFT [125 to 150 microns]; total of 15 to 18 mils DFT [375 to 450 microns]
Rev. 060712
Page 3 of 4
II. PRIMER / TOPCOAT SYSTEM NON-INSULATED SERVICE

Carbon Steel / Stainless Steel Applied direct to hot or ambient steel
Primer Coat - Hi-Temp 1027 - 1 coat @ 5 to 6 mils DFT [125 to 150 microns]
Hi-Temp Color Topcoats
a] Ambient apply:
b] Hot apply:
(See appropriate topcoat PDS)

Hi-Temp 500VS or Hi-Temp 1000VS
Hi-Temp 500VHA or Hi-Temp 1000VHA
III. CRYOGENIC INSULATED AND NON-INSULATED SERVICE

Ambient Stainless Steel
Hi-Temp 1027
[1.] For service temperature of minus 100 F to 400 F [minus 73C to 204C]
2 coats @ 5 to 6 mils [125 to 150 microns] DFT per coat; total of 10 to12 mils [250 to 300 microns]
[2.] For service temperature of minus 300 F to 1000 F [minus 185 C to 538C]
1 coat @ 5 to 6 mils [125 to 150 microns] - DO NOT EXCEED 8 mils [200 microns] total DFT
RECOMMENDED APPLICATION PER COAT:

Minimum
Dry Film Thickness
Wet Film Thickness
Coverage
Mils
5
7.7
2
208 ft /gal
Microns
[125]
[192]
2
[5.1 m /l]
Maximum
Mils
Microns
6
[150]
9.2
[230]
2
2
174 ft /gal
[4.3 m /l]
APPROXIMATE DRY SCHEDULE:

Substrate Temperature at
50% RH
Dry to Recoat, Minimum
Dry to Recoat, Maximum
Dry to Ship
Cured
70F [21C]
100F [38C]
302F [150C]
50F [10C]
24 hours
6 hours
5 hours
1/4 hour
No maximum as long as the surface is clean and free of contaminants
24 hours
24 hours
24 hours
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Dry times can vary based on environmental and substrate conditions.

Do not exceed maximum dry film thickness recommendations as this can affect dry times.
PRECAUTIONS:
This product is for use only by professional applicators in accordance with information in this data sheet and the
applicable material safety data sheets (MSDS). Refer to the appropriate MSDS before using this material. All use
and application of this product should be performed in compliance with all relative federal, state and local health,
safety and environmental regulations or in compliance with all pertinent local, regional and national regulations as
well as good safety practices for painting, and in conformance with recommendations in SSPC-PA 1, Shop, Field
and Maintenance Painting of Steel.
WARRANTY:
Hi-Temp Coatings Technology, Inc. (Hi-Temp) warrants that its products are free from defects in material and
workmanship. Hi-Temps sole obligation and buyers exclusive remedy shall be limited to replacement of products
not conforming to this warranty. Any claim for replacement product must be made within one year from the delivery
date. Hi-Temp makes no other warranties, expressed or implied, such as warranties of merchantability or fitness for
a particular purpose. Hi-Temp products are intended for buyers with the knowledge and skills to evaluate the
suitability of Hi-Temps products for buyers intended use. In no event shall Hi-Temp be liable for consequential or
incidental damage.

Rev. 060712
Page 4 of 4
2012-11-02

Paint System 17
Page 1 of 1
970086 T905E-17-0
1.
Paint System for Insulated Piping Systems, Ferritic Steel Equipment and Machinery (Temp
205 C)
2.
Surface
Preparation
3.
Coat No.
4.
5.
ISO 8501-1, Sa 3 (SSPC SP-5)

micron
Surface Profile
mil
38-63
Application
Minimum Dry Film
Maximum Dry Film
Method
Thickness (DFT)
Thickness (DFT)
2 Component Epoxy
micron
micron
Spray
100
125
Phenolic (65% solids)
mil
mil
2 Component Epoxy
micron
micron
Spray
100
125
mil
mil
6.
Top Coat Color
7.
(Section 8.6: Identification of Facilities). Final pipeline top coat colors shall be based upon line list..
8.
Mixing and Thinning
9. thinners shall be used. Amount of thinner used shall be measured, not estimated, to ensure consistency during
10
Application
Coating shall be applied in accordance with manufacturers instructions, NRF-053-PEMEX-2006, PIP
11
12
Surface Profile
micron
SSPC-SP6
Surface
13
Preparation
mil
50-75
Application
Minimum Dry Film
Maximum Dry Film
14
Coat No.
Method
Thickness (DFT)
Thickness (DFT)
2 Component Epoxy
micron
micron
15
1
Spray
100
125
mil
mil
micron
micron
2 Component Epoxy
16
2
Spray
100
125
mil
mil
17
Paint Materials
18 Material
Manufacturer
Product Designation
19 Epoxy Phenolic
International Paint
Intertherm 228
20 Epoxy Phenolic
International Paint
Intertherm 228
Remarks
21
22
Notes
require written approval from UOP before proceeding. This paint system is appropriate under insulation with
23 temperatures up to 205oC.
If exposed to UV, (i.e. not under insulation), the color of the epoxy will fade but will still provide corrosion
protection. Two (2) coats are required for a total DFT of 200 microns.
Intertherm 228
Epoxy Phenolic
PRODUCT
DESCRIPTION
A highly crosslinked, two component, high build Epoxy Phenolic coating which combines properties of corrosion and
chemical resistance when used in high temperature service.
INTENDED USES
Intertherm 228 has been specifically designed to provide a corrosion resistant barrier when used to protect steelwork
beneath thermal insulation in areas subjected to wet and dry cycling.
Suitable for exposure in a wide range of highly corrosive environments, including insulated and uninsulated steel,
and on the exterior or pipework, process vessels etc., operating at temperatures up to 446F (230C).
Intertherm 228 has excellent resistance to "thermal shock" experienced during rapid temperature cycling.
PRACTICAL
INFORMATION FOR
INTERTHERM 228
Color
Limited color range
Gloss Level
Eggshell
Volume Solids
67%
Typical Thickness
4 mils (100 microns) dry equivalent to 6 mils (149 microns) wet

Practical Coverage
Drying Time
Temperature
Touch Dry
Hard Dry
Minimum
Maximum
50F (10C)
8 hours
16 hours
36 hours
5 days
59F (15C)
7 hours
12 hours
24 hours
4 days
77F (25C)
5 hours
8 hours
16 hours
3 days
104F (40C)
3 hours
6 hours
16 hours
2 days

Product Weight

15.5 Ib/gal (1.86 kg/l)
2.83 lb/gal (340 g/lt) EPA Method 24

199 g/kg
VOC
Protective Coatings
Page 1 of 4
Ref:2491
Worldwide Product
Intertherm 228
Epoxy Phenolic
SURFACE
PREPARATION
All surfaces to be coated should be clean, dry and free from contamination. Prior to paint application all surfaces
Where necessary, remove weld spatter, and smooth weld seams and sharp edges.
Oil or grease should be removed in accordance with SSPC-SP1 solvent cleaning.
Abrasive Blast Cleaning
This product must only be applied to surfaces prepared by abrasive blast cleaning to Sa2 (ISO 8501-1:2007) or
SSPC SP6. A sharp, angular surface profile of 2-3 mils (50-75 microns) is recommended.
Intertherm 228 must be applied before oxidation of the steel occurs. If oxidation does occur the entire oxidized area
should be reblasted to the standard specified above.
Surface defects revealed by the blast cleaning process, should be ground, filled, or treated in the appropriate
manner.
Surfaces may be primed with Intertherm 228 (thinned 10% GTA220) to 40 microns (1.5 mils) dry film thickness
before oxidation occurs.
Power Tool Cleaning (Small Areas Only)
Intertherm 228 is suitable for application over power tool cleaned surfaces prepared to a minimum of SSPC SP11.
Note, all scale must be removed and all areas which cannot be prepared adequately should be spot blasted to a
minimum standard of SSPC SP6 or Sa2 (ISO 8501-1:2007).
APPLICATION
Mixing
proportions supplied. Once the unit has been mixed it must be used within the working
pot life specified.
(1)
(2)
Agitate Curing Agent (Part B) with a power agitator.
(3)
Mix Ratio
Working Pot Life
50F (10C)
5 hours
Airless Spray
Recommended

(176 kg/cm)
Air Spray
(Pressure Pot)
Recommended
Gun
Air Cap 704 or 765
Fluid Tip E
Brush
Roller
Thinner
(International GTA415)
Cleaner
International GTA822 or International GTA220

(or International GTA415)
Work Stoppages
Clean Up
59F (15C)
4 hours
77F (25C)
2 hours
104F (40C)
1 hour

legislation
appropriate regional regulations/legislation.
Page 2 of 4
Intertherm 228
Epoxy Phenolic
PRODUCT
CHARACTERISTICS
Intertherm 228 is typically applied as a two coat system at 4 mils (100 microns) per coat to give a total coating
system film thickness of 8 mils (200 microns).
to attain optimum film build. The use of other methods, e.g. brush or roller, may require more than one coat and are
suggested only for small areas, or initial stripe coating.
When applying Intertherm 228 by brush or roller, it may be necessary to apply multiple coats to achieve the total
If Intertherm 228 is to be applied by brush to coat small areas for maintenance purposes, it is recommended that
Intertherm 228 is applied as a three coat system at 2.5 mils (65 microns) per coat to give a total coating system dry
film thickness of 7.5 mils (195 microns).
Surface temperature must always be a minimum of 5F (3C) above dew point.
Application at temperatures below 50F (10C) will result in extended drying times.
The relative humidity during application and curing should not exceed 80%.
Good ventilation throughout application and cure, and firm control of film thickness, are essential to ensure full
removal of retained solvent and optimum performance of cured film. Care should be taken to avoid over-application.
The total coating system film thickness applied must not exceed 12 mils (300 microns) in order to avoid cracking
during high temperature service.
When applying Intertherm 228 in confined spaces, ensure adequate ventilation.
After the last coat has cured hard, the coating system dry film thickness should be measured using a suitable nondestructive magnetic gauge to verify the average total applied system thickness. The coating system should be free
of all pinholes or other holidays. The cured film should be essentially free of runs, sags, drips, inclusions or other
defects. All deficiencies and defects should be corrected.
The curing times will vary depending upon dry film thickness and conditions that exist during application and
throughout curing periods.
Maximum performance is not attained until the film has completely cured. Cure is a function of temperature, humidity
and film thickness. Normally Intertherm 228 coating systems at 8 mils (200 microns) dry film thickness will exhibit full
and complete cure for optimal temperature resistance in 7-10 days at 77F (25C). Curing times are proportionately
shorter at elevated temperatures and longer at lower temperatures.
In common with all epoxies Intertherm 228 will chalk and yellow on exterior exposure. Intertherm 228 will also show
a marked color change when exposed to higher temperatures. This color change is more noticeable in lighter shades
and at temperatures in excess of 302F (150C). However, these phenomena are not detrimental to anti-corrosive
performance provided recommended temperature limits are not exceeded.
Intertherm 228 is suitable for protection of insulated steelwork, which may cycle between wet and dry conditions, and
is operating at continuous in-service temperatures ranging from ambient up to 392F (200C), with intermittent
surges up to 446F (230C).
Intertherm 228 is an immersion grade epoxy phenolic coating, and is suitable for use in situations of continuous
intimate contact with wet insulation. However, Intertherm 228 is not intended for use as an internal tanklining.
SYSTEMS
COMPATIBILITY
Page 3 of 4
This system is self-priming and is not suitable for application over other primers.
Intertherm 228 is normally topcoated with itself, for other suitable topcoats please consult International Protective
Coatings.
Intertherm 228
Epoxy Phenolic
D ADDITIONAL
et INFORMATION
ai
l
T
o
p
Surface Preparation
Paint Application
SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS
Rect Top
PACK SIZE
SHIPPING WEIGHT
STORAGE
Unit Size
Vol
Part A
Pack
Vol
Part B
Pack
20 liter
16.67 liter
20 liter
3.33 liter
5 liter
5 US gal
4.17 US gal
5 US gal
0.83 US gal
1 US gal
Unit Size
Part A
Part B
20 liter
35.7 kg
3.96 kg
5 US gal
73 lb
8 lb
Shelf Life
6 months minimum at 77F (25C).

Subject to re-inspection thereafter. Store in dry, shaded conditions away from
sources of heat and ignition.
Rect
Bottom
Disclaimer
Page 4 of 4
2012-10-30
UOP M&ETTechnical Data Sheet

Structural-Steel Painting and Galvanizing
Page 1 of 1
970086 T905FS-0
Painted or Galvanized
Painted
Galvanized
Other
3 Steel shapes and plates

4 ASTM A490 bolts
NA
Fluorokote #1
5 Bolts other than ASTM A490

6 Nuts and washers
7 Ladders and safety cages
8 Grating and grating fasteners
9 Stair treads
10 Handrails and toeboards attached to handrails
11 Toeboards not attached to handrails
12 Pipe rack support
13 Pipe frames
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Location
At slip-critical (SC) connection
Not SC, fireproofed, or buried
(not galvanized)
Bracing and Secondary Elements
(not galvanized)
Ladders and safety cages
Steps
Rails and Toeboards attached to
Rails
Handrails
Paint System and Touch-Up System

Paint System
Touch-Up
Identifier
System Identifier
02 or 03
02 or 03
02 or 03
02 or 03
Color
YELLOW PMS 803C2X
GREEN PMS 378C or 7498C
02 or 03
02 or 03
GREEN 7489C
02 or 03
02 or 03
02 or 03
02 or 03
02 or 03
02 or 03
YELLOW PMS 803C2X

BLACK (Process Black C)
YELLOW PMS 803C2X
02 or 03
02 or 03
BLACK (Process Black C)
25
26
27 Remarks:
28 Use 03 paint system for better corrosion protection with Carbon Steel (C/S)
29
30
OMM Finalb
Note 3

Paint Application
MRB Finalb
Note 3
Reviewb
Note 2
Proposala
Note 1
2012-10-30
Page 1 of 1
970086 V905F-0
DESCRIPTION
General
4F
1.
Surface preparation and painting procedure
2P
2.
Paint manufacturers product data sheet
3.
Paint application logs
0S
4F
0S
4.
Examination, testing, and inspection plan (ETIP)
5.
Examination, testing, and inspection record (ETIR)
6.
Nomenclature:
P - number of weeks prior to beginning surface preparation.
X - if no due date is established
Notes:
1. For documents indicated in the Proposal column, provide an electronic copy or one hard copy.
2.
3.
For documents indicated in the Final columns provide an electronic copy and one hard copy.
2012-10-08
1.
UOP Specification
Page 1 of 3
970086 S140A-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for language, units, and documents.
2.
3.
Language
1.
Writing shall be in English language for technical documents.
2.
Writing shall be in Spanish language for nameplates.
1.
Values of physical quantities shall be expressed in MKS units.
2.
MKS units shall be defined as follows:
Units
a.
Temperature
b.
Pressure (gauge)
kg/cm(g)
c.
Pressure (absolute)
kg/cm(a)
d.
Mass
kg
e.
Volume
f.
Length
g.
Alternate Length
mm
h.
Liquid Relative Density
sp gr TC/15C
i.
Liquid Absolute Density kg/m at 15C
j.
Vapor Flowing Density
k.
Flowing Quantities
l.
4.
1.
Mass
kg/h
2.
Vapor
m/h
3.
Liquid
m/h
kg/m
Standard Quantities
1.
Vapor
normal m/h at 0C and 1.033 kg/cm(a)
2.
Liquid
std m/h at 15C
m. Enthalpy
kcal/kg
n.
Heat Rate
mm kcal/h
o.
Electrical Power
kW
p.
Viscosity
cP
Document identification
Document shall contain the following identification:
1.
Supplier or original-equipment-manufacturer name
2.
3.
2012-10-08
5.
6.
7.
UOP Specification
4.
Title
5.
Item tag number
Page 2 of 3
970086 S140A-0
Transmittal letter
1.
Transmittal letter shall be provided with document or documents.
2.
Transmittal letter shall contain the following information:

a.
Supplier name
b.
UOP purchase order number
c.
UOP Technical Requisition designator
d.
Supplier reference number
e.
Date of submittal
f.
Street address of location to which comments and approval should be returned
g.
Name and phone number of contact who can confirm receipt of comments and
approval
3.
Submitted document shall be listed in transmittal letter.
4.
For each document listed in the transmittal letter, the following shall be shown:
a.
b.
c.
Title
d.
Number of copies submitted
e.
Reason for submittal, which shall be one or the following:

1.
For bid
2.
For approval
3.
Final
4.
As-built
Reduced copies
1.
If C or D-size document is provided, a copy reduced to A or B size shall be provided.
2.
If A1 or A2-size document is provided, a copy reduced to A3 or A4 size shall be

provided.
Certification of final documentation

1.
2.
Final document shall be both of the following:

a.
Marked Certified for Construction
b.
Signed by a person authorized to bind supplier
Document shall not be certified for construction unless either of the following is true:
a.
It has been approved without comment.
2012-10-08
UOP Specification
b.
8.
Page 3 of 3
970086 S140A-0
If approved with comment, comments have been incorporated without

modification.
References
None
2012-10-08
1.
UOP Specification
Documents for Custom-Designed Goods and Services
Page 1 of 1
970086 S140C-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for documents.
2.
Revisions
1.
3.
a.
Change shall be clouded.
b.
A triangle, with the revision number or letter inside, shall abut cloud.
2.
If information on data sheet changes, an indication of which lines changed shall be

provided.
3.
If information not on data sheet or drawing changes, a markup showing changes shall
be provided.
a.
Addition shall be underlined.
b.
Deletion shall be struck through.
Native File Submittal

1.
4.
If information on drawing changes, the following shall apply:
Final submittal shall include the native file, if available.
Order-specific document
Document created specifically for the order shall comply with this section.
4.1.
Inapplicable information
Inapplicable information shall be excluded or crossed out.
4.2.
Document size
Document size shall be ANSI Y14.1 flat size A, B, C, or D.
5.
References
American National Standard
ANSI Y14.1, Decimal Inch Drawing Sheet Size and Format
2012-10-08
1.
UOP Specification
Electronic Documentation Submittal
Page 1 of 1
970086 S140V-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for submittal of documents in electronic
form for proposals and review.
2.
3.
Requirements
1.
Final documentation shall be submitted in both hard copy and electronic format.
2.
Electronic documentation shall be in both of the following formats:

a.
Adobe PDF file or TIFF file
b.
Native format documents, when available.
3.
Electronic files shall be converted directly into PDF or TIFF from the native file
rather than scanned.
4.
For multi-page documents, a single file containing all pages shall be provided.
5.
Background color shall be white. Text color, line work and diagram shall be black
unless color differentiation clarifies the document.
6.
File size should be kept to a minimum and shall not exceed 9 megabytes.
7.
The file name shall be the same as the paper document designator.
8.
File name shall include revision designator.
Transmittal letter
1.
Transmittal letter shall be provided with each document submittal.
2012-11-15
1.

Insulation Supply and Installation
Page 1 of 1
970086 R907F-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for insulation materials and installation of
insulation.
2.
Insulation and installation

Insulation and related goods and services shall be provided in accordance with the
following documents:
1.
NRF-034-PEMEX-2011, Specification Heat Insulation for High Temperatures in

Equipment, Vessels, and Pipe Surface
2.
UOP Specification 9-11-7, External High Temperature Insulation and

Weathershielding
3.
970086 S907-0, Specification Insulation
4.
970086 S907R-0, Specification Removable and Reusable Insulation Cover

Location
5.
970086 T907R-0, Extent of Hot Service Insulation
6.
970086 T907FE-0, Technical Data Sheet Equipment Insulation Summary
7.
970086 V907F-0, Documentation Data Sheet Insulation Supply and Installation
8.
970086 T801EL-0, Technical Data Sheet, Piping Line List NOTE: Please refer to
the latest Line List for the up-to-date listing of pipeline insulation thicknesses.
9.
970086 W907-0, Insulation Inspection Checklist
10. UOPM S907O-B, Cap for Field-Welded, Shop-Insulated Pipe

11. PIP INIH1000, Hot Insulation Installation Details, September 2012
12. PIP INSA1000, Acoustic Insulation Systems Specification, July 2012
13. PIP INSH1000, Hot Service Insulation Materials and Installation Specification,
February 2011
14. PIP INSR1000, Installation of Flexible, Removable/Reusable Insulation Covers for
Hot Insulation Service, March 2011
3.
Other
Insulation supply, installation, and related goods and services shall comply with the most
recent version, except as otherwise noted, of the following documents:
1.
4.
970086 S150, SpecificationExamination, Testing, and Inspection Plan and Record
Conflicts
In case of conflict among the documents above, the following shall apply:
1.
NRF-034-PEMEX-2011 shall take precedence over UOP specification.
2.
NRF-034-PEMEX-2011 shall take precedence over Process Industry Practices.
3.
UOP specifications shall take precedence over Process Industry Practices.
Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC
25 East Algonquin Road
Des Plaines, Illinois 60017-5017, USA
EXTERNAL HIGH TEMPERATURE INSULATION

AND WEATHERSHIELDING
9-11-7
Page 1
of
17
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
24JAN11
Revised
DNM
RGP
Table of Contents
Table of Contents ......................................................................................................................................... 1
1.
GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Scope ........................................................................................................................................ 1
1.2 References ................................................................................................................................ 2
1.3 Definitions ................................................................................................................................ 4
2.
DESIGN .......................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1 Personnel Protection................................................................................................................. 5
2.2 Heat Conservation .................................................................................................................... 5
2.3 Insulating Temperature ............................................................................................................ 6
2.4 Extent of Insulation .................................................................................................................. 6
2.5 Insulation of Flanges ................................................................................................................ 7
2.6 Steam and Electrical Heat Tracing ........................................................................................... 8
2.7 Fire Insulation .......................................................................................................................... 8
2.8 Noise Reduction ....................................................................................................................... 9
2.9 Weatherproofing ...................................................................................................................... 9
3.
MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................. 9
3.1 Insulation .................................................................................................................................. 9
3.2 Jacket Weatherproofing.......................................................................................................... 10
3.3 Mastics and Coating Finish Weatherproofing ........................................................................ 11
4.
APPLICATION ............................................................................................................................ 12
4.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 12
4.2 Insulation ................................................................................................................................ 12
4.3 Metal Weatherproofing .......................................................................................................... 13
4.4 Mastic Weatherproofing ......................................................................................................... 14
4.5 Handling, Transporting, Cutting, and Fitting of Insulation.................................................... 14
1.
GENERAL
1.1
Form QUA-03-6
Scope
a.
This Standard Specification covers the general requirements for external

insulation and weathershielding applied to equipment and piping operating from
70F (20C) through 1500F (815C). Selection of the insulation system and its
attachment method shall be the responsibility of the Owner/Contractor, consistent
with the requirements of UOP Project Specifications.
b.
Insulation is used to perform the following tasks:

(1)
Personnel protection
(2)
Heat conservation
(3)
Fire insulation
(4)
Noise reduction
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC

c.
1.2
9-11-7
Page 2
of
17
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
24JAN11
Revised
DNM
RGP
Exceptions or variations shown in the UOP Project Specifications take

precedence over the requirements shown herein.
References
Unless noted below, use the edition and addenda of each referenced document current on
the date of this Standard Specification. When a referenced document incorporates
another document, use the edition of that document required by the referenced document.
a.
Form QUA-03-6
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

(1)
A 240 /
A 240M
Standard Specification for Chromium and ChromiumNickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for
Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.
(2)
A 463/
A 463M
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, AluminumCoated, by the Hot-Dip Process.
(3)
A 653/
A 653M
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)
by the Hot-Dip Process.
(4)
A 792/
A 792M
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55%

Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
(5)
B 209/
B 209M
Standard Specification for Aluminum and AluminumAlloy Sheet and Plate.
(6)
C 150
Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
(7)
C 168
Standard Terminology Relating to Thermal

Insulation.
(8)
C 195
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal

Insulating Cement.
(9)
C 449/
C 449M
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber HydraulicSetting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC

Form QUA-03-6
9-11-7
Page 3
of
17
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
24JAN11
Revised
DNM
RGP
(10)
C 450
Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal

Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping and Vessel
Lagging.
(11)
C 533
Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and

Pipe Thermal Insulation.
(12)
C 547
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe

Insulation.
(13)
C 552
Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal

Insulation.
(14)
C 553
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket

Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial
Applications.
(15)
C 585
Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of

Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and
Tubing (NPS System).
(16)
C 592
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket

Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (MetalMesh Covered) (Industrial Type).
(17)
C 610
Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite

Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
(18)
C 612
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and

Board Thermal Insulation.
(19)
C 647
Standard Guide to Properties and Tests of Mastics and

Coating Finishes for Thermal Insulation.
(20)
C 795
Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use

in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel.
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC

1.3
Page 4
9-11-7
of
17
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
24JAN11
Revised
DNM
RGP
(21)
C 892
Standard Specification for High-Temperature Fiber

Blanket Thermal Insulation.
(22)
C 921
Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of

Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.
(23)
C 929
Standard Practice for Handling, Transporting,

Shipping, Storage, Receiving, and Application of
Thermal Insulation Materials for Use in Contact with
Austenitic Stainless Steel.
(24)
C 930
Standard Classification of Potential Health and Safety

Concerns Associated with Thermal Insulation Materials
and Accessories.
(25)
C 1029
Standard Specification for Spray-Applied Rigid

Cellular Polyurethane Thermal Insulation.
(26)
C 1094
Standard Guide for Flexible Removable Insulation

Covers.
(27)
E 84
Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials.
b.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Recommended Practice (RP) 521, Guide for
Pressure-Relieving and Depressuring Systems.
c.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) B31.3, Process Piping.
d.
ASME. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section I, Rules for the Construction
of Power Boilers
e.
National Association of Corrosion Engineer (NACE) International Standard

Practice SP-0198, Control of Corrosion Under Thermal Insulation and
Fireproofing Materials A System Approach
f.
National, state, and local governmental regulations and laws.
Definitions
Terms pertaining to insulation systems used in UOP Specifications shall be defined in
accordance with ASTM C 168.
Form QUA-03-6
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC

2.
9-11-7
Page 5
of
17
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
24JAN11
Revised
DNM
RGP
DESIGN
2.1
2.2
Form QUA-03-6
Personnel Protection
a.
The primary consideration for using personnel protection insulation shall be to

limit the temperature of exposed surfaces.
b.
Personnel protection shall be provided on portions of equipment or piping 7 feet

(2100 mm) or less above grade, platforms, or walkways and within 3 feet (900
mm) horizontally of handrails, platforms, or walkways adjacent to paths traveled
by personnel.
c.
Equipment and piping with a bare metal temperature above 150F (65C) and
that do not require insulation for heat conservation shall be provided with
personnel protection.
d.
Design of personnel protection insulation shall be based upon summer day bulb
temperature of minimum 95 F (35C) and low wind velocity at maximum 2 mph
to reflect a worst case condition.
e.
The outer surface temperature of insulation system(s) shall not exceed 150F
(65C) within the envelope defined in Section 2.1.b.
f.
Where the operating temperature is 250F (120C) or less, corrosion under

insulation is a concern. Personnel protection shall be by barriers, shield, or open
guards, not insulation.
g.
Where personnel protection is required, but insulation is neither permitted nor

provided, protection shall consist of barriers, shields, or open guards at least 3
inches (75 mm) from the hot surface.
Heat Conservation
a.
Heat conservation insulation shall be used if normal operating temperature

exceeds 150F (65C), unless loss of heat is desirable.
b.
When the operating temperature is below 250F (120C) and heat conservation
insulation is needed, measures shall be taken for corrosion under insulation.
c.
The rate of heat loss per unit area through the selected insulation system(s) is
based upon average annual ambient temperature and average annual wind speed
and shall be limited to the values specified below:
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC

Maximum Operating
Temperature
F ( C )
70 400 ( 21 205 )
401 - 500 ( 206 - 260 )
501 - 600 (261 315 )
601 - 700 (316 370)
701 - 900 (371 480)
Above 900 (480)
2.3
b.
Form QUA-03-6
Page 6
9-11-7
of
17
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
24JAN11
Revised
DNM
RGP
Maximum Rate of Heat Loss

(based on insulation system mean
temperature)
Btu/ft2h
W/m2
Kcal/m2h
70
220
186
75
235
200
80
250
213
85
270
226
90
285
240
95
300
253
Insulating Temperature
a.
2.4
Equipment
(1)
Equipment shall be insulated for the highest operating temperature listed

in the UOP Project Specifications. For compressors and exchangers, use
the higher of the inlet or outlet temperature.
(2)
Steam turbines shall be insulated for the maximum operating temperature

of the steam supply listed in the UOP Project Specifications.
Piping
(1)
With the exception of steam supply, exhaust and condensate, piping shall
be insulated for the highest operating temperature of the connected
equipment. The temperatures are listed in the UOP Project
Specifications.
(2)
Steam supply, exhaust, condensate piping and flanges, including valve

body to bonnet flanges, shall be insulated for the maximum operating
temperature listed in the UOP Project Specifications. Lines exhausting
to atmosphere do not require insulation.
(3)
Steam generation piping systems per ASME Section I shall be insulated

for the maximum operating temperature and as shown n UOP project
specification.
Extent of Insulation
a.
Equipment and piping requiring insulation for process reasons are indicated on
the UOP Piping and Instrument Diagrams (P&IDs).
b.
Manways and exchanger heads shall be insulated with easily removable and
reusable insulation system(s).
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC

2.5
9-11-7
Page 7
of
17
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
24JAN11
Revised
DNM
RGP
c.
Piping and equipment insulation shall be continuous at all penetrations.
d.
Expansion joint bellows, ball joints, strainers, steam traps, and valve packing
glands shall not be insulated.
e.
Insulation shall be applied so that there is no interference with either the

operation or function of the equipment, instrument, or valves. Gauges, dials,
sightglasses, etc. shall remain unobstructed and in clear view.
f.
External stiffening rings on vessels and piping shall be insulated with the same
thickness as required for vessels or piping. The entire stiffening ring shall be
maintained at the same temperature as the shell of vessel and piping.
g.
An air space, as defined in Figure 1, is required at vessel to skirt connections

when the operating temperature of the vessel exceeds 700F (370C) or is greater
than 500F (260C) with a wall thickness greater than 2 inches (50 mm).
h.
Insulation shall be applied behind the nameplate mounting bracket(s) but

insulation shall not cover the nameplate.
Insulation of Flanges
a.
Form QUA-03-6
General
(1)
Flanges, including valve body to bonnet flanges, on insulated process

lines or equipment with an operating temperature over 800F (425C)
shall not be insulated.
(2)
Flanges in toxic, or severe cycling services as defined in ASME B31.3,

Paragraph 300.2 shall not be insulated.
(3)
Flanges in hydrogen service [hydrogen service is defined as a system

containing hydrogen as a major component in the process stream or
when the hydrogen partial pressure is equal to or greater than 100 psia
(7.0 kg/cm2) or service containing 90% hydrogen or higher at any
pressure level] shall not be insulated.
(4)
Heat traced flanges shall be insulated.
(5)
Provide adequate space for removal of flange bolting without damage to

the surrounding insulation. Void areas are to be packed with a mineral
fiber insulation.
(6)
Heat traced flanges for hydrogen, toxic, and severe cyclic services, when
insulated, shall meet the requirement of Paragraph 2.5.b.(1).
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC

b.
c.
2.6
2.7
Form QUA-03-6
9-11-7
Page 8
of
17
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
24JAN11
Revised
DNM
RGP
Requirements for Insulated Flanges

(1)
For hydrocarbon and other hazardous services, a flange leak detection

system shall be provided. The use of sniffers shall be determined on a
case by case basis consistent with local laws and codes.
(2)
Insulation systems around flanged joints shall be provided with 1/2 inch
(12 mm) drain and vent tubes ("telltales"). The drains and vents shall be
piped to a safe location.
(3)
The design shall permit removal of the insulation system and flange
bolting without damage to the insulation.
(4)
Bolting materials shall be suitable for the insulated flange maximum

operating temperature, considering stress, strain, and creep.
(5)
Flanges with spectacle blinds shall be provided with flexible type

removable and reusable insulation systems.
Weathershielding
(1)
Requirements for weathershielding are indicated on the UOP P&ID's and

UOP Project Specifications.
(2)
Weathershielding of flanges shall be in accordance with Figures 2 and 3.

Flanges shall not be weathershielded until pressure and leak testing are
complete.
Steam and Electrical Heat Tracing

a.
The primary consideration for using tracing and associated insulation shall be
control of process temperatures.
b.
Insulation for steam and electric heat tracing shall be in accordance with UOP
Project Specifications. The equipment and pipe insulation may be oversized to
accommodate the tracer(s).
Fire Insulation
a.
The primary consideration for the use of fire protection insulation shall be
control of the rate of heat gain in a fire.
b.
Credit for the insulation may be considered for evaluation of the fire exposure
relief case of equipment and piping. Where this credit is taken, the insulation
thickness and other requirements shall be in accordance with API RP 521,
Section 3.15.5.
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC

2.8
2.9
9-11-7
Page 9
of
17
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
24JAN11
Revised
DNM
RGP
Noise Reduction
a.
The primary consideration for use of noise reduction insulation shall be control
of noise to industry standard level.
b.
Where noise reduction is needed, a composite system of a sound absorber and

sound barrier shall be utilized. For more effective treatment, multiple layers of
the composite system shall be used, resulting in a decoupled barrier system.
Securement shall be by glass reinforced adhesive tape. No screws or Z clips
are permitted.
Weatherproofing
Weatherproofing shall be applied to all insulation.
3.
MATERIALS
3.1
Insulation
a.
Form QUA-03-6
Insulation materials shall conform to the following:

(1)
Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement in accordance with ASTM

C 195.
(2)
Mineral fiber hydraulic setting thermal insulating and finishing cement in

accordance with ASTM C 449/C 449M.
(3)
Calcium silicate block and pipe thermal insulation in accordance with

ASTM C 533.
(4)
Mineral fiber pipe insulation in accordance with ASTM C 547.
(5)
Cellular glass thermal insulation in accordance with ASTM C 552.
(6)
Mineral fiber blanket thermal insulation in accordance with ASTM

C 553.
(7)
Mineral fiber blanket insulation (metal-mesh covered) in accordance

with ASTM C 592.
(8)
Molded expanded perlite block and pipe thermal insulation in accordance

with ASTM C 610.
(9)
Mineral fiber block and board thermal insulation in accordance with

ASTM C 612.
(10)
High temperature fiber blanket thermal insulation in accordance with

ASTM C 892.
(11)
Spray-applied rigid cellular polyurethane thermal insulation in

Revision
Indication
UOP LLC

3.2
9-11-7
Page 10
of
17
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
24JAN11
Revised
DNM
RGP
b.
Insulating materials, finishing cements, coatings, fabrics, sealants, flashing

compounds, etc., shall be asbestos-free, non-corrosive whether wet or dry, and
suitable for application to the substrate surface.
c.
Thermal insulation and accessories to be used in contact with austenitic stainless

steel surfaces shall be in accordance with ASTM C 795.
d.
Inner and outer diameters of rigid insulation for piping and tubing shall be in
e.
Insulation used for fire exposure or as part of a fireproofing system shall function
effectively, retaining its integrity and insulating value, when exposed to fire
temperatures and duration in accordance with API RP 521, Paragraphs 3.15.5.2
through 3.15.5.4 for up to two hours. The insulation shall also resist dislodgment
by fire water streams.
f.
Consideration shall be given to select the insulation materials to be used for wet
(e.g. coastal) locations where moisture absorption is a concern. The typical
rankings for resistance to moisture from best to worst are cellular glass, perlite,
mineral wool, and calcium silicate.
g.
Insulation in areas subjected to abuse shall be selected considering its ability to

resist damage. The typical ranking for resistance to damage from best to worst
are calcium silicate, perlite, cellular glass, mineral wool and glass fiber.
h.
Insulation materials and vapor barriers for weatherproofing shall have a

maximum flame spread of 25 in accordance with ASTM E 84.
i.
Joint sealers and flashing compounds shall be non-shrinking and permanently

flexible.
j.
Removable insulation covers shall be in accordance with ASTM C 1094.
Jacket Weatherproofing
a.
Form QUA-03-6
General
(1)
Jacketing material shall be stainless steel, zinc or aluminum coated steel,

or aluminum in accordance with ASTM C 921.
(2)
Stainless steel or steel jackets are required on any insulation system

where insulation is considered to be in place for the relief valve fire
exposure design case, or is a part of a fireproofing system.
(3)
Stainless steel or steel jackets are required in areas subject to severe

mechanical damage.
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC

b.
3.3
Form QUA-03-6
9-11-7
Page 11
of
17
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
24JAN11
Revised
DNM
RGP
(4)
Jacketing shall be provided with a heat laminated factory-installed

moisture barrier.
(5)
Jacketing for exposed heads of vessels and tanks shall be fabricated from
stucco embossed sheet and either a multi-segmented or single piece
tapered type installation. Edges shall be overlapped with a bead of
flexible joint sealant applied on the lap.
(6)
3/16 inch (5 mm) pitch corrugated or crimped jacketing shall be used on

piping over 24 inches in diameter and horizontal vessels, exchangers, and
equipment. Flat or smooth jacketing may be used on piping through 24
inches in diameter, and on equipment heads.
(7)
1-1/4 inch (32 mm) pitch corrugated or crimped jacketing shall be used
on vertical vessels and storage tanks.
(8)
Circumferential corrugations shall be used for services subject to severe

mechanical damage.
(9)
Metal weatherproofing subject to corrosive environments shall be coated

with a material which resists the environment.
Jacketing materials shall conform to the following:

(1)
Stainless steel jacketing materials shall be in accordance with ASTM A

240, Type 304 or 316.
(2)
Aluminum jacketing materials shall be in accordance with ASTM B 209/

B 209M, Type 3003-H14 or 5005-H14.
(3)
Aluminum coated steel jacketing materials shall be in accordance with

ASTM A 463/A 463M.
(4)
Zinc coated steel jacketing materials shall be in accordance with ASTM

A 653/ A 653M.
(5)
55% aluminum alloy-coated steel materials (hot dipped) shall be in

accordance with ASTM A 792.
Mastics and Coating Finish Weatherproofing

a.
Mastic and coating finish materials shall be in accordance with ASTM C 647.
b.
Weatherproofing shall be a vapor-permeable type.
c.
Weatherproofing material shall be asbestos-free, non-corrosive whether wet or

dry, and suitable for application to the substrate surface.
d.
Weatherproofing material shall have a maximum flame spread of 25 in

accordance with ASTM E 84.
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC

4.
Page 12
9-11-7
of
17
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
24JAN11
Revised
DNM
RGP
e.
Reinforcement shall be plain open mesh glass or polyester fiber.
f.
Portland cement shall be in accordance with ASTM C 150.
g.
To minimize the stress corrosion cracking (SCC) under insulation, the substrate
shall be coated as per NACE Standard Practice SP-0198.
APPLICATION
4.1
4.2
Form QUA-03-6
General
a.
Insulation contractor shall have previous experience with the materials, insulating
system, and installation procedures to be used.
b.
Insulation and weatherproofing shall only be applied on dry and clean surfaces.
c.
Weld seams, flanged and threaded connections, and telltale holes shall not be
insulated until pressure and leak testing, non-destructive examination, and heat
treatment are completed.
d.
Valves, gauges, piping, etc. shall be inspected, non-destructive tested and

repaired prior to application of insulation.
e.
Working parts of valves and other mechanical equipment shall be protected when
insulation is applied.
f.
Insulation systems for equipment and piping shall permit access to parts
requiring maintenance without damaging the insulation system.
g.
The insulation system shall accommodate expansion and contraction of

equipment and piping.
Insulation
a.
Materials shall be kept dry. Insulation showing any evidence of moisture

exposure shall not be used.
b.
Exposed insulation shall be protected against moisture until the weatherproofing

is installed. Insulation shall be covered with the weatherproofing on the same
day the insulation is installed. When installation is halted for more than one
hour, the exposed ends shall be temporarily protected with mastic
weatherproofing.
c.
Insulation shall conform to the contour of the item to be insulated. Before

applying weatherproofing, the insulation shall be inspected for open joints, voids,
cracks, and defacing. Insulation with open joints, voids, and cracks shall be
completely removed, replaced, and resealed. Defaced insulation shall be filled
with sealing compound.
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC

4.3
Form QUA-03-6
9-11-7
Page 13
of
17
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
24JAN11
Revised
DNM
RGP
d.
A single layer of insulation shall be used up to 3 inches (75 mm) thick. Over 3
inches (75 mm), the insulation may be applied in single or multiple layers.
Minimum thickness of insulation shall be 1 inch (40 mm).
e.
The bottom 3 feet (900 mm) of tank shells shall be insulated with cellular glass,
mineral fiber blocks and / or expanded perlite.
f.
Longitudinal butt joints in each layer of insulation shall be staggered.
g.
When applying multi-layer insulation, each succeeding layer shall be staggered

relative to the longitudinal and circumferential joints of the preceding layer.
h.
The inner layers of multiple-layer insulation and insulation on irregular

equipment surfaces (where use of bands and seals is impractical) shall be secured
using stainless steel wire. The wire shall be taut and embedded in the insulation.
The ends shall be bent over and embedded into the insulation.
Metal Weatherproofing
a.
Jacketing shall be installed weather-tight, exposed edges of insulation shall not

be permitted. Insulation openings such as for tracers, instrument connections,
hangers, valve glands, etc., shall be flashed weather-tight. Lap joints of jacketing
shall be arranged so that the overlaps shed water. On horizontal installations, the
longitudinal lap shall be approximately 45 from the bottom.
b.
Jacketing shall be installed with a minimum lap of 3 inches (75 mm) for
circumferential joints and the greater of 3 inches (75 mm) or two corrugations for
longitudinal joints. Jacketing shall overlap mastic weatherproofing coatings by a
minimum of 3 inches (75 mm). Each lap shall be filled with a sealer.
c.
Jacketing for vertical piping and equipment shall be installed starting at the
bottom and working upward. Corrugated sheets shall be applied with the
corrugations positioned vertically, except as noted in paragraph 3.2.a (8), and
supported at the horizontal joints by components fabricated from stainless steel.
Vertical joints shall be staggered between courses.
d.
Jacketing shall be secured with stainless steel bands. Bands shall cover seams
between sections of jacketing. Breather springs shall be used where required for
expansion and contraction.
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC

4.4
4.5
Form QUA-03-6
Page 14
9-11-7
of
17
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
24JAN11
Revised
DNM
RGP
Mastic Weatherproofing
a.
For valves, fittings, and other irregular surfaces, mastic coating with reinforcing
fabric may serve as the weatherproofing. In abused areas metal jacket
weatherproofing shall be provided.
b.
Spheres, tanks, pumps, and compressors shall be weatherproofed with reinforcing

fabric and mastic weatherproofing.
c.
Mastic weatherproofing shall be used as flashing at all possible sources of

moisture penetration. Mastic shall be applied to all corners and crevices where
water is likely to collect.
d.
Mastic weatherproofing shall contain reinforcing material.
e.
Prior to application of mastics, the instruments, gauges, metal weatherproofing,

non-insulated items, etc. shall be protected from splatter, rebound, and overspray.
Handling, Transporting, Cutting, and Fitting of Insulation

a.
Health and safety concerns associated with thermal insulation materials,

accessories, and their application shall be evaluated in accordance with ASTM
C 930.
b.
Handling, transporting, and application of thermal insulation materials and

accessories for use in contact with austenitic stainless steel shall be in accordance
with ASTM C 929.
c.
Cutting and fitting of insulation shall be in accordance with ASTM C 450.
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC

Form QUA-03-6
9-11-7
Page 15
of
17
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
24JAN11
Revised
DNM
RGP
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC

Form QUA-03-6
9-11-7
Page 16
of
17
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
24JAN11
Revised
DNM
RGP
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC

Form QUA-03-6
9-11-7
Page 17
of
17
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
24JAN11
Revised
DNM
RGP
2012-11-06
1.
UOP Specification
Insulation
Page 1 of 1
970086 S907-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for selection and specification of the
insulation system.
2.
Insulation
1.
The insulation material shall be mineral wool per ASTM C547, C553, and C612
a.
The density of mineral wool insulation for piping less than 200 mm diameter
shall be 120 kg/m3
b.
The density of mineral wool insulation for piping greater than or equal to 200
mm diameter shall be 144 kg/m3
c.
The density of mineral wool insulation for equipment shall be 144 kg/m3
2.
Personnel protection insulation shall be provided less than 2100 mm vertically from
grade or less than 600 mm horizontally from edges of walkways, ladders and
platforms where surface temperature is greater than 60 deg C.
3.
Lines that require heat dissipation yet must be personnel protected shall be noted on
the MFDs and isometrics Barrier or Screen Installation Required.
4.
Equipment or piping that requires steam tracing shall increase the insulation size to
accommodate the tracer(s).
5.
Equipment and piping that requires steam tracing shall use heat transfer cement in its
installation and shall be listed on the isometric.
6.
Insulation shall never obstruct or interfere with the visibility, operation and
maintenance of any measuring or control instrument.
7.
Insulation of vessels shall take into account support rings

a.
The support rings shall extend to at least of the outermost layer of insulation
without extending to the outermost edge of the insulation
b.
For vertical vessels, the bottom head insulation design must be considered to
prevent sagging due to gravity
8.
Piping and equipment expansion joints (for growth of the base materials) shall be
considered in the design and located on the isometrics
9.
For items that insulation requirements are not defined or unclear, detailed designer
shall contact UOP insulation specialist.
2012-11-08
1.
UOP Specification
Removable and Reusable Insulation Cover Location
Page 1 of 1
970086 S907R-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for the location of removable and reusable
insulation covers.
2.
Location
Removable and reusable covers shall be provided at the following locations:
1.
Process flange and Terminal Box on Regeneration Heater (BH-500)
2.
Process flanges and Terminal Boxes (3) on Air Heater (BH-502)
3.
Process flanges and Disengaging Hopper (FA-513)
4.
Process flanges and Lift Gas Blower Spillback Cooler (EA-516)
5.
Process flanges and Vent Gas Cooler (EA-520)
6.
Process flanges and Preheat Gas Heater (EA-521)
7.
Process flanges and expansion joints of Regeneration Blower (GB-505)
8.
Process flanges of Regeneration Cooler Fan (GB-506)
9.
Expansion joints
10. Control valves in heat traced lines

11. All heat exchanger front and rear heads, including channel barrels, covers, and
bonnets
or used for any purpose without its written permission.
2012-11-06

Extent of Hot Service Insulation
Page 1 of 2
970086 T907R-0
INSULATION REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

(NOTE: PROJECT PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION SPECIFICATIONS MAY MODIFY THESE REQUIREMENTS.)
SJ - STEAM JACKETED
PF - PREVENTION FROM FREEZING
HC - HEAT CONSERVATION
HT - HOT FLUID TRACED
PP - PERSONNEL PROTECTION
PS - PROCESS STABILITY
HJ - HOT FLUID JACKETED
FP - FIRE PROTECTION INSULATION
ET - ELECTRIC TRACED
ST - STEAM TRACED
HC
HC
PP [1]
ET, ST, SJ,
ITEMS
AMB 649C
EXCEPTIONS
61C 649C
HT, HJ, & PF
(AS REQUIRED BY
(AMB TO 1200F)
(141F 1200F)
THE PURCHASER)
- STRAIGHT OR BENT PIPE
YES
[4]
YES
- SOCKETWELD, THREADED, OR BUTTWELD
PIPE FITTINGS.
- SOCKETWELD, THREADED, OR BUTTWELD
VALVES
- PIPE UNIONS
NO [4]
[4]
YES [2, 5]
- STEAM TRAPS
NO [4]
NO
NO [2]
- RELATED STRAINERS
- FLANGED PIPE FITTINGS
YES [5]
[4]
YES [5]
LINES WITH NOTE J
IN MFD'S
- FLANGED MANUAL VALVES
- FLANGE ORIFICE SETS
LINES IN
HYDROGEN
- PIPING FLANGES CONNECTED TO
SERVICE [6]
EQUIPMENT NOZZLES
- FLANGED SPECIALTY ITEMS (I.E.,
STRAINERS)
- PIPE TRUNNIONS
NO
NO
NO
- PIPE SUPPORT CLAMPS
- HANGER RODS
- PRIMARY PIPING FOR INSTRUMENT
NO
NO
NO
YES
CONNECTIONS
- SAMPLE PIPING
- VENT AND DRAIN PIPING
- EXPANSION JOINTS (EJ)
NO [4]
NO
NO
- REGENERATION
LOOP EJs
- EJ ON VENT GAS
COOLER SHELL
- INSTRUMENTS AND ASSOCIATED TUBING
NO
NO
YES
- RELIEF VALVES
NO
NO
NO
NO
- CONTROL VALVES
NO [5]
YES [5]
- VESSELS, SHELL AND HEAD SURFACES
YES
[4]
N/A
- VESSEL HAND HOLES
NO [5]
[4]
N/A
Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or
used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.
2012-11-06

Extent of Hot Service Insulation
Page 2 of 2
970086 T907R-0
INSULATION REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

(NOTE: PROJECT PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION SPECIFICATIONS MAY MODIFY THESE REQUIREMENTS.)
SJ - STEAM JACKETED
PF - PREVENTION FROM FREEZING
HC - HEAT CONSERVATION
HT - HOT FLUID TRACED
PP - PERSONNEL PROTECTION
PS - PROCESS STABILITY
HJ - HOT FLUID JACKETED
FP - FIRE PROTECTION INSULATION
ET - ELECTRIC TRACED
ST - STEAM TRACED
HC
HC
PP [1]
ET, ST, SJ,
ITEMS
AMB 649C
EXCEPTIONS
61C 649C
HT, HJ, & PF
(AS REQUIRED BY
(AMB TO 1200F)
(141F 1200F)
THE PURCHASER)
- VESSEL MANWAYS
NO [5]
[4]
- VESSEL INSTRUMENT TRIM
NO
N/A
- HEAT EXCHANGER SHELL AND INTEGRAL
YES
[4]
N/A
SHELL COVER SURFACES
- HEAT EXCHANGER FRONT AND REAR
YES [5]
[4]
N/A
HEADS, INCLUDING CHANNEL BARRELS,
COVERS, AND BONNETS
- HEAT EXCHANGER FLANGED JOINTS
NO [5]
[4]
N/A
- COMPRESSORS
NO
N/A
N/A
- BLOWERS, FANS
YES [5]
N/A
- INTERNALLY INSULATED ITEMS
NO [4]
N/A
- ELECTRIC HEATERS
YES
NOTES:
1.
PERSONNEL PROTECTION (PP) SHALL BE PROVIDED TO 7 FT (2100 mm) ABOVE GRADE OR PLATFORMS AND 2 FT (600 mm) HORIZONTALLY FROM THE
PERIPHERY OF PLATFORMS, WALKWAYS, OR LADDERS.
2.
INSULATE OR GUARD ONLY IF REQUIRED FOR PERSONNEL PROTECTION.
3.
INSULATION SHALL BE FURNISHED BY EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER.
4.
PROVIDE REMOVABLE METAL GUARDS OR SUITABLE PERSONNEL BARRIERS IF REQUIRED FOR PERSONNEL PROTECTION.
5.
REMOVABLE / REUSABLE COVERS SHALL BE PROVIDED, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED BY PURCHASER.
6.
HYDROGEN SERVICE IS DEFINED AS A SYSTEM CONTAINING HYDROGEN AS A MAJOR COMPONENT IN THE PROCESS STREAM OR WHEN THE OPERATING
HYDROGEN PARTIAL PRESSURE IS EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN 100 PSIA (7.0 KG/CM2)
2012-11-06

Equipment Insulation Summary
Page 1 of 1
970086 T907FE-0
Item
Number
Item Description
Maximum Operating
Temperature (Deg C)
Insulation
Thickness
(mm)
BH-500
Regeneration Heater
483
191
BH-502
Air Heater
571
178
FA-512
Lift Engager No. 1
93
PP Guard, No
Insulation
FA-513
Disengaging Hopper
150
89
FA-517
Lift Engager No. 2
38
PP Guard, No
Insulation
EA-516
Lift Gas Blower Spillback

Cooler
148 SS / 46 TS
Later
Insulation thickness will

depend on the OD of the Heat
Exchanger.
EA-520
Vent Gas Cooler
367 SS / 565 TS
Later

Exchanger.
EA-521
Preheat Gas Heater
156 SS / 375 TS
Later

Exchanger.
GA-513
A/B Organic Chloride

Injection Pumps
35
None
GB-503
Lift Gas Blower
135
38
GB-505
Regeneration Blower
538
Later (229)

depend on the units size
supplied by the vendor.
GB-506
50
Later (38)

GB-507
A/B Instrument Air

Compressor Package
50
Later (38)

ME-502
Air Drier
40
None
ME-503
Dust Collector
38
None
ME-504
38
None
Notes
Note: All insulation is Mineral Wool per ASTM C547, C553, and C612 at 144 kg/m3. Pad must be sewn to a metal
mesh cover (ASTM C592, C585).
ST Denotes Steam Tracing required and insulation support rings have to be increased by one size to allow for
tracer tubes.
OMM Finalb
Note 3

Insulation Supply and Installation
MRB Finalb
Note 3
Reviewb
Note 2
Proposala
Note 1
2012-11-6
Page 1 of 1
970086 V907F-0
DESCRIPTION
General
1.
X
6F
6F
Supplier document index
2.
Examination, testing, and inspection plan
3.
Installation schedule
2S
4.
Approved deviations
2S
5.
Certified material test reports (CMTRs) in accordance with ASTM C547, C553, and C612
2S
6.
Certified material test reports (CMTRs) in accordance with ASTM C795
2S
7.
Certified material test reports (CMTRs) in accordance with ASTM C871 for all mastics, cements,
adhesives, caulks, labels, and marking pens and tapes that come into contact with stainless steel
2S
8.
Certificate of conformance (CFCs) for installation work performed
2S
9.
Applicable manufacturers material safety data sheets (MSDS)
2S
10.
Examination, testing, and inspection record
2S
11.
Non-Conformance reports
12.
Ship Loose insulation packing list
0S
Nomenclature:
Notes:
1. For documents indicated in the Proposal column, provide an electronic copy or one hard copy.
2.
3.
For documents indicated in the Final columns provide an electronic copy and three hard
copies.
INSULATION INSPECTION REPORT
970086 W907-0
PAGE 1 OF 3
November 2012
INSULATION INSPECTION CHECKLIST
FACILITY NAME
PEMEX Refincion - Modernization of CCR Unit
PROJECT NO.
LOCATION
DATE
970086
PO / CONTRACT NO.
EQUIPMENT ID
PIPE LINE ID
P&ID NO.
INSULATION SPEC.
OTHER
I. SAFETY
1.
All appropriate safety equipment is present and in use.
2.
Appropriate Manufacturer Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are available.
3.
All personnel have received safety training appropriate to the job.
4.
Housekeeping in compliance with site requirements.
5.
Comments:
II. MATERIAL
1.
All materials have been received in approved condition.
2.
All materials have been stored in a manner that prevents contamination by water or process
chemicals or physical damage.
3.
The materials are correct per the project specifications.
4.
Insulation samples have been obtained for testing.
5.
Comments:
III. INSTALLATION - INSULATION

1.
All required testing is complete and systems released for insulation by the appropriate authority.
2.
The surface to be insulated is clean and dry.
3.
The surface to be insulated has been coated and released for insulation by the appropriate authority.
4.
Heat tracing has been installed, inspected and released for insulation by the appropriate authority.
5.
Existing installed insulation is protected from damage.
6.
All insulation supports are installed properly.
7.
The insulation is the correct thickness and numbers of layers.
8.
All joints are correctly staggered.
9.
Joints are cut and fit to a maximum of 1/8 inch.
YES
NO
N/A
YES
NO
N/A
YES
NO
N/A
970086 W907-0
PAGE 2 OF 3
November 2012
FACILITY NAME
PROJECT NO.
LOCATION
DATE
970086
PO / CONTRACT NO.
EQUIPMENT ID
PIPE LINE ID
P&ID NO.
INSULATION SPEC.
OTHER
III. INSTALLATION INSULATION (Contd)
YES
NO
N/A
10. The insulation securement is correct.

11. Vapor barrier is correctly installed and undamaged.
12. All joints are sealed / buttered.
13. Expansion / contraction joints are correctly installed and spaced.
14. The extent of insulation is correct.
15. Expansion or contraction springs are correctly installed and spaced.
16. Workmanship (check the appropriate rank).
17
good
average
unacceptable
Comments:
IV. INSTALLATION WEATHERPROOFING, JACKETING, AND FITTING COVERS

1.
The correct material has been used (type, thickness, finish, etc.).
2.
Metal jacket overlap, amount and placement, are correct.
3.
Metal jacket securement is correct.
4.
Mastic type, thickness, reinforcement and overlap are correct.
5.
Joints are properly caulked / sealed.
6.
Flashing is properly installed.
7.
Metal gores are properly installed.
8.
S clips are used as specified.
9.
Expansion or contraction springs are correctly installed and spaced.
YES
NO
N/A
10. Securement is properly spaced.

11. Banding ends and seals are configured to prevent sharp ends.
12. All terminations have been caulked / sealed.
13. Workmanship (check the appropriate rank).
14. Comments:
good
average
unacceptable
970086 W907-0
PAGE 3 OF 3
November 2012
FACILITY NAME
PROJECT NO.
LOCATION
DATE
970086
PO / CONTRACT NO.
EQUIPMENT ID
PIPE LINE ID
P&ID NO.
INSULATION SPEC.
OTHER
V. INSTALLATION FLANGES, VALVES, AND EQUIPMENT

1.
Allowance for bolt removal is correct.
2.
Removable/reusable covers properly made and installed.
3.
Jacketing properly caulked.
4.
Valve extension handles are installed.
5.
Workmanship (check the appropriate rank).
6.
Comments:
INSPECTION COMPLETED BY:

(Printed)
good
YES
average
NO
N/A
unacceptable
s907o-b.dgn 07/19/2004 09:44:39 AM
EDITORIAL REVISION
October 2007

Insulation
PIP INIH1000
Hot Insulation Installation Details


Note (added February 2002): PIP INIH1000, Hot Insulation Installation Details, may
incorporate drawings and other information previously published in standards owned and
copyrighted by the Midwest Insulation Contractors Association (MICA). These are
printed with the express permission of MICA.
PRINTING HISTORY
October 1997
Issued
February 2002 Editorial Revision
September 2005
October 2007
Technical Revision
Editorial Revision
EDITORIAL REVISION
October 2007

Insulation
PIP INIH1000
Table of Contents
1. Introduction................................. 2
1.1 Purpose............................................ 2
1.2 Scope ............................................... 2
2. References .................................. 2
Industry Codes and Standards ................ 2
Details
INIH0001 Piping - General Arrangement
INIH0002 Piping - Layered Insulation
INIH0003 Piping - Vertical Insulation Support
Single Layer
INIH0004 Piping - Vertical Insulation Support
Multi-Layer
INIH0006 Piping - Flange Insulation
INIH0007 Piping - Insulation Connections
INIH0009 Removable and Reusable
Insulation - Flexible
INIH0010 Valve Cover
INIH0011 Pipe Supports
INIH0050 Vertical Vessels with Outside
Diameters over 900 (36)
INIH0051 Vertical Vessels with Outside

Diameters 900 (36) and Less
INIH0052 Vessel Composite Type 1
INIH0053 Vessel Composite Type 2
INIH0054 Vertical Vessel Bottom Head
Insulation
INIH0055 Top/Horizontal Head Nozzles
INIH0056 Vessel Stiffener Insulation Detail
INIH0059 Typical Clip Details
INIH0060 Nozzle Flashing
INIH0061 Head Lap Seam Details
INIH0062 Horizontal Vessels
INIH0064 Horizontal Heat Exchangers
Page 1 of 2
PIP INIH1000
1.
EDITORIAL REVISION
October 2007
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This Practice provides installation details for hot insulation systems.
1.2
Scope
This practice provides details for installing hot insulation systems on piping, valves,
horizontal and vertical vessels, and heat exchangers.
2.
References
appropriate.
x American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM C-450 Standard Practice for Prefabrication and Field Fabrication of
Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping, Vessel Lagging, and Dished
Head Segments
Page 2 of 2
REAFFIRMATION WITH EDITORIAL REVISION

July 2012

Insulation
PIP INSA1000
Acoustic Insulation Systems Specification

been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial
users, contractors, or standards organizations. By harmonizing these technical requirements
into a single set of Practices, administrative, application, and engineering costs to both the
purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. While this Practice is expected to
incorporate the majority of requirements of most users, individual applications may involve
requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice.
Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the
Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on
information contained in these materials. The use of trade names from time to time should
not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the
trade. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be
substituted for those named. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with
applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. To the extent these
Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations,
such laws or regulations must be followed. Consult an appropriate professional before
applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice.
Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of Texas
at Austin, 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500), Austin, Texas 78759. PIP member companies
and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Changes or modifications of any
kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of
PIP. Authorized Users may attach addenda or overlays to clearly indicate modifications or
exceptions to specific sections of PIP Practices. Authorized Users may provide their clients,
suppliers and contractors with copies of the Practice solely for Authorized Users purposes.
These purposes include but are not limited to the procurement process (e.g., as attachments to
requests for quotation/ purchase orders or requests for proposals/contracts) and preparation
and issue of design engineering deliverables for use on a specific project by Authorized
Users client. PIPs copyright notices must be clearly indicated and unequivocally
incorporated in documents where an Authorized User desires to provide any third party with
copies of the Practice.
PRINTING HISTORY
March 2001 Issued
June 2006
Complete Revision
February 2007
May 2008
Editorial Revision
Editorial Revision
July 2012
Reaffirmation with Editorial Revision

July 2012

Insulation
PIP INSA1000
Table of Contents
1. Introduction .................................2
1.1 Purpose ............................................2

1.2 Scope ...............................................2
2. References ..................................2
Process Industry Practices .......................2
INSA1003 Piping Sheet and Mastic

Barrier Layer Attachment
INSA1004 General Arrangement Piping
Insulation
INSA1005 Piping Flange Insulation
INSA1006 Valves without Extended
Bonnets
3. Definitions ...................................2
4. Requirements ..............................3
4.1 Acoustic Insulation General

Design Information ...........................3
4.2 Installation of the Absorptive Layer ..5
4.3. Installation of the Barrier Layer ........5
4.4 Data Sheets ......................................7
4.5 Inspection .........................................7
4.6 Documentation .................................7
Data Forms
INSA1000-D1 Documentation
Requirements Sheet
List of Details
INSA1001 Various Acoustic Insulation
Configurations
INSA1002 Piping Layer Staggering &
Overlapping of Absorptive Barrier
Page 1 of 7
PIP INSA1000
1.

July 2012
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This Practice provides requirements for acoustic insulation systems.
1.2
Scope
This Practice describes the requirements for the design, application, and extent of
acoustic insulation on piping and equipment operating at high and low temperatures.
Systems requiring additional insulation specifications beyond PIP Practices shall be
covered by purchasers documentation.
Listing of or reference to supporting documents within this Practice does not imply
suitability for specific designs.
Comment: Use of this Practice for contractual purposes requires the purchaser to
make specific choices and assemble additional supporting documents.
2.
References
Applicable parts of the following Practices should be considered an integral part of this Practice.
The edition in effect on the date of contract award should be used, except as otherwise noted.
Short titles will be used herein where appropriate.
PIP INEG1000 - Insulation Design and Type Codes
PIP INTG1000 - Insulation Inspection Checklist
PIP INSC1000 - Requirements for Cold Service Insulation Materials
PIP INSH1000 - Hot Service Insulation Materials and Installation Specification
PIP INSA1001 - Various Acoustic Insulation Configurations
PIP INSA1002 - Piping-Layer Staggering and Overlapping of Absorptive Barrier
PIP INSA1003 - Piping-Sheet and Mastic Barrier Layer Attachment
PIP INSA1004 - General Arrangement - Piping Insulation
PIP INSA1005 - Piping-Flange Insulation
PIP INSA1006 - Valves without Extended Bonnets
3.
Definitions
absorptive layer: Porous, resilient, low-density 48 to 128 kg/m (3 to 8 lb/ft) material such as
glass or mineral fiber applied to a sound-radiating surface to absorb sound
outer barrier layer: Impermeable, dense material such as loaded vinyl, elastomer, or mastic
installed over the absorptive layer to provide a sound barrier
acoustic insulation: Insulation that attenuates acoustic energy radiating from surfaces by
absorption and containment. Acoustic insulation can be used to reduce surface radiation from
Page 2 of 7
PIP INSA1000

July 2012
many different types of piping and equipment and to comply with regulatory requirements.
Acoustic insulation is composed of a resilient sound-absorptive layer and an outer-barrier layer
applied to noise-radiating surfaces.
transmission loss: Reduction in magnitude between the incident and transmitted sound for a
given acoustic material
Noise Reduction (NR): Difference in noise, also known as sound pressure level, at a given point
before and after acoustic treatment, measured in dBA
4.
Requirements
4.1
Acoustic Insulation General Design Information

4.1.1
The acoustic insulation type code is AC as defined in PIP INEG1000.
4.1.2
The general requirements for design and installation of insulation contained in

PIP INEG1000 and PIP INSH1000 shall be followed.
4.1.3
Additional acoustic insulation type codes shall be required if two or more

combinations of materials, layers, thicknesses, absorptive layers, or thermal
designs are required.
4.1.4
Acoustic insulation is normally composed of a resilient sound-absorptive layer

and an outer-barrier layer applied to noise-radiating surfaces.
4.1.5
Different combinations of absorptive layers, barrier layers, thermal insulation,

and weatherproof finishes can be used.
Comment: PIP INSA1001 illustrates possible combinations.
4.1.6
The ultimate goal for installing acoustic insulation is to obtain a satisfactory

noise reduction. In designing acoustic insulation treatments, care shall be taken to
ensure that the absorptive layer adequately isolates the outer-barrier layer from
surface vibrations at the frequencies of interest, which is the key factor in
obtaining the required noise reductions at low frequencies.
4.1.7
The best material combination shall be one in which the transmission loss
properties are matched to the sound spectrum of the source (i.e., attenuation is
highest at the frequency having the highest sound pressure level.).
Comment:
4.1.8
A method of matching material properties to the noise to be

controlled is to use laboratory test results of noise reduction for
various insulation systems and field measurements of the sound
to be reduced.
The following are general rules for predicting noise reduction that may be
expected in actual field installations:
a. Normal thermal insulation systems or acoustic insulation with absorptive
and standard weatherproof finish layer only: 5 dBA to 7 dBA
b. Acoustic insulation with absorptive, barrier, and weatherproof finish
layers or thermal insulation with absorptive, outer barrier, and
weatherproof finish layers: 7 dBA to 11 dBA
Page 3 of 7
PIP INSA1000

July 2012
c. Multiple layers of absorptive and barrier material (two layers each)

where it is known that all relevant radiating surfaces are covered, the
outer barrier layer is adequately isolated from the vibrating surface and
the system is completely sealed: 11 dBA to 15 dBA
Comment:
4.1.9
These values assume that background noise has been

compensated for and that the dominant noise is not at or
below 250 Hz.
If the noise reduction properties cannot be rigorously matched to the noise

source, the following rules may be used:
a. If the peak octave band sound pressure level is above 1000 Hz, use a
25 mm thick (1-inch) absorptive layer.
b. If the peak octave band sound pressure level is between 250 Hz and
999 Hz, use a 50 mm thick (2-inch) absorptive layer.
c. Use a nominal 2.4 kg/m (0.5 lb/ft2) outer barrier layer if the peak octave
band sound pressure level is at or above 2000 Hz.
d. Use a nominal 7.3 kg/m (1.5 lb/ft2) outer barrier layer if the peak octave
band sound pressure level is below 2000 Hz.
4.1.10 If insulation is required for reasons other than for acoustic control, the
appropriate thickness table in PIP INEG1000 shall be used to determine the
minimum insulation thickness. Acoustic requirements may call for additional
thickness.
4.1.11 For cold service installations, the complete thermal system shall be applied
according to the appropriate PIP cold service Practice before any acoustic
absorptive material is applied.
4.1.11.1 Alternatively, the acoustic absorptive layer may be applied before the
complete cold service thermal system is applied, followed by the outer
barrier layer.
4.1.11.2 The complete thermal system shall be applied according to the
appropriate PIP cold service Practice.
4.1.12 For hot service, the acoustic absorptive material may be applied directly to the
piping or equipment if its maximum service temperature is not exceeded.
4.1.12.1 If surface temperatures exceed allowable service temperatures of the
selected absorptive layer, a layer of appropriate thermal insulation shall
be applied to reduce the interface temperature to within the range of the
selected absorptive layer.
4.1.12.2 The thermal-insulating properties of the absorptive layer may be utilized
to minimize overall insulation thickness.
4.1.13 An acoustic absorptive layer may be applied directly over existing thermal
insulation without modification to the thermal system. Hangars or other supports
shall be covered with the absorptive material.
Page 4 of 7

July 2012
PIP INSA1000
4.2
Installation of the Absorptive Layer

4.2.1
Acoustic insulation shall cover all relevant radiating surfaces and shall be
acoustically sealed.
Comment:
4.2.2
All joints and interruptions of outer-barrier material at protrusions such as valve

bonnets, hangers, etc., shall be sealed.
Comment:
4.2.3
PIP INSA1004 shows the general arrangement for acoustic

insulation applied to piping. PIP INSA1005 shows the acoustic
insulation of piping flanges, and PIP INSA1006 shows the
acoustic insulation of valves without extended bonnets.
Unless otherwise specified, all surfaces shall be covered, including valve bodies,
flanges, fittings, supports, etc., on the piping or equipment to be acoustically
insulated.
Comment:
4.3.
Acoustic sealing means the insulating materials are free from

gaps or open areas, which permit leakage of undiminished noise
from the surface being insulated. Leaks can render acoustic
insulation treatments ineffective.
PIP INSA1002 shows the installation detail of the absorptive layer.
Installation of the Barrier Layer

4.3.1
When specified, a barrier layer shall be applied over all absorptive layer surfaces.
The barrier layer shall be an impervious, dense sheet material or loaded mastic
and shall not contain lead.
4.3.2
Sheet barrier materials shall be applied in a watershed fashion and stagger all
joints of barrier material and absorptive material.
4.3.2.1 Circumferential and longitudinal joints of sheet barrier material shall be
overlapped a minimum of 50 mm (2 inches).
4.3.2.2 On horizontal transitions between sheet barrier material and loaded
mastics, sheet material shall be extended a minimum of 50 mm
(2 inches) over the mastic.
4.3.2.3 If sheet barrier is applied after mastic has dried or if adhesion between
sheet and mastic is in doubt, a suitable joint sealer shall be applied in the
overlap area between sheet barrier and mastic.
4.3.2.4 On vertical transitions, mastic shall be extended 50 mm (2 inches) over
the sheet material to provide proper watershed.
4.3.2.5 All sheet barrier materials shall be applied in an airtight, gapless fashion.
4.3.3
The continuity of the barrier layer shall not be broken. If it is impossible to fit the
entire specified thickness of absorptive and barrier layers, the thickness of the
absorptive layer may be decreased to provide clearance.
4.3.4
On sheet barrier materials and vinyl or elastomeric barrier materials over which
an additional weatherproof finish is to be applied, bands, wire, tape, or adhesive
bonding shall all be acceptable means of attachment.
Page 5 of 7
PIP INSA1000
4.3.5

July 2012
If vinyl or elastomeric sheet material is the finished surface, bands shall be used
for attachment.
4.3.5.1 If metallic jacket and barrier material laminate is to be applied, bands
shall be used for attachment.
4.3.5.2 All joints in the laminate shall be sealed with a suitable joint sealer to
ensure an airtight installation.
4.3.5.3 To ensure gapless joints on vinyl or elastomeric sheet applications, all
joints shall be adhesively bonded.
4.3.5.4 Sheet metal screws shall not be used on vinyl or elastomeric sheet barrier
materials.
Comment: PIP INSA1003 shows the barrier layer attachment detail.
4.3.6
Loaded mastic shall be applied directly to absorptive materials and reinforced

with glass cloth following the manufacturers recommended procedures.
4.3.6.1 Conflicts between this Practice and the manufacturers recommended
procedure shall be submitted in writing to Purchaser for clarification and
resolution before proceeding with the installation.
4.3.6.2 A tack coat of mastic shall be applied to approximately half the desired
finish thickness with sufficient pressure to assure impregnation of the
absorptive layer.
4.3.6.3 Reinforcing fabric shall be embedded in the wet tack coat, and then the
final coat shall be applied to the specified wet thickness.
4.3.6.4 Adjacent pieces of reinforcing fabric shall be lapped a minimum of
50 mm (2 inches).
4.3.6.5 The installed reinforcing fabric shall be free of wrinkles and protruding
edges.
4.3.6.6 In multiple coat applications, the reinforcing fabric shall be applied to the
middle coating.
4.3.7
Barrier layer applications of loaded vinyl or elastomers can be left unfinished if

all lap joints are adhesively bonded, and the insulated item is not exposed to
direct sunlight or the weather. If such layers are so exposed, an additional
weatherproof finish cover shall be required over vinyl and elastomer barrier
materials.
4.3.8
A 6 mm (1/4-inch) bead of caulking compound shall be applied to all joints in the

outer weatherproof finish to prevent acoustic leakage or moisture penetration.
Comment: Examples include any interruptions of the weatherproof finish or
barrier layer at joints or between finish or barrier layers and
protrusions such as valve bonnets, hangers, and instrument
connections.
4.3.9
Caulk shall be applied to all removable cover joints.
Page 6 of 7
PIP INSA1000
4.4

July 2012
Data Sheets
Project specific requirements for acoustic insulation on piping and equipment shall be
specified on the purchasers data sheet(s) contained in PIP INSH1000 or PIP INSC1000.
4.5
Inspection
Inspection of acoustic insulation shall be in accordance with PIP INTG1000.
4.6
Documentation
Documents required to define the scope of work shall be listed on Documentation
Requirements Sheet PIP INSA1000-D1.
Page 7 of 7
ASSOC. PIP:
INSA1000
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS SHEET
ACOUSTIC INSULATION SYSTEMS

SPECIFICATION
NO.
DATE
REVISION DESCRIPTION
PROJECT NO.
PIP INSA1000-D1
PAGE 1 OF 1
JULY 2012
BY
CHECKED
APPROVED
DATE
NOTES
PROJECT DOCUMENT NO.
FACILITY NAME
LOCATION
PIP DOC NUMBER /
PROJ DOC NUMBER
TITLE
INTG1000
ACOUSTIC INSULATION SYSTEMS SPECIFICATION

COLD SERVICE INSULATION MATERIALS AND
INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION
HOT SERVICE INSULATION MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION
SPECIFICATION
INSA1001
YES
NO
INSA1002
YES
NO
INSA1003
YES
NO
INSA1004
YES
NO
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT PIPING

INSULATION
INSA1005
YES
NO
PIPING FLANGE INSULATION
INSA1006
YES
NO
VALVES WITHOUT EXTENDED BONNETS
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
INSA1000
INSC1000
INSH1000
NOTES:
ACOUSTIC INSULATION INSTALLATION DETAILS

VARIOUS ACOUSTIC INSULATION
CONFIGURATIONS
PIPING LAYER STAGGERING &
OVERLAPPING OF ABSORPTIVE
BARRIER
PIPING SHEET AND MASTIC BARRIER
LAYER ATTACHMENT
REV
EDITORIAL REVISION
August 2007

Insulation
PIP INSH1000
Hot Service Insulation Materials
and Installation Specification


PRINTING HISTORY
October 1997
October 2005
Issued
Complete Revision
August 2007
Editorial Revision
EDITORIAL REVISION
August 2007

Insulation
PIP INSH1000
Hot Service Insulation Materials
and Installation Specification
Table of Contents
1. Introduction................................. 4
1.1 Purpose ............................................. 4
1.2 Scope................................................. 4
2. References .................................. 4
3. Definitions ................................... 5
4. Requirements.............................. 5
4.1 Project Scope .................................... 5
4.2 Materials ............................................ 5
4.3 Storage and Handling of Insulation
Materials ............................................ 6
4.4 Installation Requirements .................. 6
4.5 Quality Plan ..................................... 15
4.6 Inspection ........................................ 16
4.7 Repairs ............................................ 16
Data Forms
INSH1000-D1 Documentation Requirements
Sheet
completed Documentation Requirements
Sheet.
INSH1000-D2 Hot Service Insulation
System Project-Specific Requirements
INSH1000-D3 Extent of Hot-Service
Insulation
INSH1000-D10 Calcium Silicate Insulation
System for Pipe and Equipment
INSH1000-D11 Expanded Perlite Insulation
System for Pipe and Equipment
INSH1000-D12 Mineral Wool Preformed
Pipe Sections Insulation System
INSH1000-D13 Mineral Wool Board
Insulation System for Equipment
INSH1000-D14 Mineral Wool Blanket
Insulation System for Pipe and Equipment
INSH1000-D15 Glass Fiber Preformed Pipe
Sections Insulation System
INSH1000-D16 Glass Fiber Board Insulation
System for Equipment
Page 1 of 16
PIP INSH1000
Hot Service Insulation Materials and Installation Specification
INSH1000-D17 Glass Fiber Blanket

Insulation System for Pipe and Equipment
INSH1000-D18 Cellular Glass Block and
Fabricated Sections Insulation System
INSH1000-D19 Polyisocyanurate Insulation
System
INSH1000-D20 Ceramic Fiber Blanket
Insulation System
INSH1000-D21 Glass Fiber Needled Blanket
Insulation System
INSH1000-D22 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
Thermal Insulation System for Pipe and
Equipment
INSH1000-D23 Rigid Cellular Phenolic
Thermal Insulation System for Pipe and
Equipment
INSH1000-F1 Calcium Silicate Insulation for
Hc ASTM C533 Type I (inches)
INSH1000-F2 Calcium Silicate Insulation for
PP ASTM C533 Type I (inches)
INSH1000-F3 Calcium Silicate Insulation
Combined Table ASTM C533 Type I
(inches)
INSH1000-F4 Cellular Glass Insulation for
Hc ASTM C552 (inches)
INSH1000-F5 Cellular Glass Insulation for
Pp ASTM C552 (inches)
INSH1000-F6 Cellular Glass Insulation
Combined Table ASTM C552 (inches)
INSH1000-F7 Fiberglass Insulation for HC
ASTM C547, Type 1 / C612, Type I
(inches)
INSH1000-F8 Fiberglass Insulation for Pp
ASTM C547, Type 1 / C612, Type I
(inches)
INSH1000-F9 Fiberglass Insulation
Combined Table ASTM C547, Type 1 /
C612, Type I (inches)
INSH1000-F10 Mineral Wool Insulation for
Hc ASTM C547, Type II or III / C612, Type
IVB (inches)
INSH1000-F11 Mineral Wool Insulation for
PP ASTM C547, Type II or III / C612,
Type IVB (inches)
INSH1000-F12 Mineral Wool Insulation
Combined Table ASTM C547, Type II or
III / C612, Type IVB (inches)
INSH1000-F13 Expanded Perlite Insulation
for Hc ASTM C610 (inches)
for PP ASTM C610 (inches)
Combined Table ASTM C610 (inches)
Page 2 of 16
EDITORIAL REVISION
August 2007
INSH1000-F16 Polyisocyanurate for Hc

ASTM C591, Type II or IV (inches)
INSH1000-F17 Polyisocyanurate Insulation
for PP ASTM C591, Type II or IV (inches)
INSH1000-F18 Polyisocyanurate Insulation
IV (inches)
INSH1000-F19 Elastomeric Foam Insulation
for Hc ASTM C534, Grade 3 (inches)
for PP ASTM C534, Grade 3 (inches)
Combined Table ASTM C534, Grade 3
(inches)
INSH1000-F22 Phenolic Foam Insulation for
Hc ASTM C1126, Type III, Grade 1
(inches)
INSH1000-F23 Phenolic Foam Insulation for
PP ASTM C1126, Type III, Grade 1
(inches)
INSH1000-F24 Phenolic Foam Insulation
Combined Table ASTM C1126, Type III,
Grade 3 (inches)
INSH1000-FM1 Calcium Silicate Insulation
for Hc ASTM C533 Type I (mm)
for PP ASTM C533 Type I (mm)
Combined Table ASTM C533 Type I (mm)
INSH1000-FM4 Cellular Glass Insulation for
Hc ASTM C552 (mm)
INSH1000-FM5 Cellular Glass Insulation for
Pp ASTM C552 (mm)
INSH1000-FM6 Cellular Glass Insulation
Combined Table ASTM C552 (mm)
INSH1000-FM7 Fiberglass Insulation for HC
ASTM C547, Type 1 / C612, Type I (mm)
INSH1000-FM8 Fiberglass Insulation for Pp
ASTM C547, Type 1 / C612, Type I (mm)
INSH1000-FM9 Fiberglass Insulation
Combined Table ASTM C547, Type 1 /
C612, Type I (mm)
INSH1000-FM10 Mineral Wool Insulation for
Hc ASTM C547, Type II or III / C612, Type
IVB (mm)
INSH1000-FM11 Mineral Wool Insulation for
PP ASTM C547, Type II or III / C612,
Type IVB (mm)
INSH1000-FM12 Mineral Wool Insulation
III / C612, Type IVB (mm)
INSH1000-FM13 Expanded Perlite
Insulation for Hc ASTM C610 (mm)
COMPLETE REVISION
August 2007
PIP INSH1000

Insulation for PP ASTM C610 (mm)
Insulation Combined Table ASTM C610
(mm)
INSH1000-FM16 Polyisocyanurate for Hc
ASTM C591, Type II or IV (mm)
INSH1000-FM17 Polyisocyanurate Insulation
for PP ASTM C591, Type II or IV (mm)
INSH1000-FM18 Polyisocyanurate Insulation
IV (mm)
INSH1000-FM19 Elastomeric Foam
Insulation for Hc ASTM C534, Grade 3
(mm)
INSH1000-FM20 Elastomeric Foam
Insulation for PP ASTM C534, Grade 3
(mm)
INSH1000-FM21 Elastomeric Foam Insulation
Combined Table ASTM C534, Grade 3
(mm)
INSH1000-FM22 Phenolic Foam Insulation
for Hc ASTM C1126, Type III, Grade 1
(mm)
for PP ASTM C1126, Type III, Grade 1
(mm)
Combined Table ASTM C1126, Type III,
Grade 3 (mm)
Page 3 of 16
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP INSH1000
1.
August 2007
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This Practice provides requirements for materials and installation of hot service
insulation systems on the external surfaces of piping and equipment, ambient to
649 C (1200 F).
1.2
Scope
This Practice describes requirements for hot service insulation materials and
accessories, storage and handling of materials, insulation application, extent of
insulation, and documentation.
Comment: Use of this Practice for contractual purposes requires the
purchaser to make specific choices and to assemble additional
supporting documents. Listing of or reference to supporting
documents within this Practice does not imply suitability for
specific designs.
2.
References
appropriate.
2.1

PIP INTG1000 Insulation Inspection Checklist
2.2

x

ASTM C450 Prefabrication and Field Fabrication of Thermal Insulating
Fitting Covers for NPS Piping, Vessel Lagging, and Dished Head
Segments
ASTM C692 Test Method for Evaluating the Influence of Thermal
Insulation on the External Stress Corrosion Cracking Tendency of
Austenitic Steel
ASTM C795 Specification for Wicking-Type Thermal Insulation for Use
over Austenitic Stainless Steel
ASTM C871 Chemical Analysis of Thermal Insulation Materials for
Leachable Chloride, Fluoride, Silicate and Sodium Ions
x American Petroleum Institute (API)

API 521 Guide for Pressure-Relieving and Depressuring Systems
American Petroleum Institute
Page 4 of 16
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP INSH1000
August 2007
3.
Definitions
owner: Party who owns the facility wherein the insulation system will be used
purchaser: Party who awards the contract to the supplier. The purchaser may be the
supplier: Party responsible for providing the insulation materials and installing the
insulation system
4.
Requirements
4.1
Project Scope
4.1.1
Documents required to define the scope of the work are listed on

Purchasers Data Sheet PIP INSH1000-D1.
4.1.2
Project specific insulation on piping and equipment shall be in

accordance with Purchasers Data Sheet PIP INSH1000-D2. This data
sheet describes the surfaces to be insulated and the materials to be used.
4.1.3
The extent of insulation is listed on Purchasers Data Sheet

PIP INSH1000-D3.
4.1.3.1 This data sheet defines the extent of insulation by surface or
component for each insulation type code required for the project.
4.1.3.2 The extent of equipment insulation may also be defined by the
purchaser for individual items.
4.2
4.1.4
Insulation materials shall be in accordance with Purchasers Data Sheets

PIP INSH1000-D10 through PIP INSH1000-D23 as required in
accordance with Purchasers Data Sheet PIP INSH1000-D1. These data
sheets define requirements for specific insulation materials and
accessories.
4.1.5
Systems requiring additional insulation specifications beyond Practices

shall be covered by purchasers documentation.
Materials
4.2.1
Insulation and accessory materials shall be furnished in accordance with

the requirements of this Practice, including the specific class, grade, or
type.
4.2.2
Asbestos shall not be used as a component in the manufacture of

insulation and accessory materials.
4.2.3
Materials shall be new and shall be used before the expiration date.
4.2.4
Sealant, mastics, and adhesives shall be supplied in factory-sealed

containers.
4.2.5
Multilayer calcium silicate and expanded perlite pipe insulation shall be

ordered factory-nested.
Page 5 of 16
PIP INSH1000
4.2.6
EDITORIAL REVISION
August 2007
All materials shall be qualified for use on austenitic stainless steel in

accordance with ASTM C795.
4.2.6.1 If requested, test reports shall be furnished.
4.2.6.2 A chemical analysis shall be provided in accordance with
ASTM C871 for all materials. This chemical analysis shall not
vary by more than 50 percent from the chemical analysis of the
production lot tested in accordance with ASTM C692.
4.2.7
Use of materials other than those specified in this Practice requires prior
written approval of the purchaser.
4.2.8
Requests for substitutions of materials shall be included as an alternate in

the proposal.
4.2.9
Requests for substitutions of materials after contract award are not

permitted.
4.2.10 All mastics, cements, adhesives, caulks, labels, marking pens, and tapes
that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a maximum leachable
chloride content of less than 50 ppm, when tested in accordance with
ASTM C871.
4.2.11 Use curved segments, beveled lags and V-grooved materials
manufactured to specific inside diameters that assure complete inside and
outside diameter closure.
4.2.12 Fabricated insulation shall conform to with ASTM C450 and the Adjunct.
4.3
4.4
Storage and Handling of Insulation Materials

4.3.1
From delivery to the installed finished product, insulation materials shall

at all times be protected from the elements and have adequate drainage.
4.3.2
Insulation materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with the

manufacturers printed recommendations.
4.3.3
Mastics, adhesives, and sealers that are exposed to temperatures outside

the recommended temperature ranges during storage shall be removed
from the site and replaced with new material.
4.3.4
Materials that have exceeded shelf life and dates shall be removed from
the site and replaced with new material.
Installation Requirements
4.4.1
General
4.4.1.1 All materials shall be stored, mixed, thinned, and applied in
accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions.
4.4.1.2 All conflicts between this Practice and the manufacturers
printed instructions shall be brought to the attention of the
purchaser for resolution.
4.4.1.3 Authorization to proceed with application of insulation shall be
obtained in writing from the purchaser.
Page 6 of 16
EDITORIAL REVISION
August 2007
PIP INSH1000
4.4.1.4 Unless otherwise specified, insulation shall not be applied until

completion of the following has been verified:
a. Required hydrostatic and/or pneumatic pressure testing
b. Application of required substrate protective coating systems,
including touch-up of previously applied coatings
c. Installation and testing of required tracing systems
d. Cleaning of surfaces that require insulation
4.4.1.5 Temporary terminations of installed insulation shall be
adequately protected at all times.
4.4.1.6 All insulation shall be smooth and free from cracks, voids, gaps
and depressions greater than 3 mm (1/8 inch).
4.4.1.7 All cracks, voids, gaps, and depressions in the insulation greater
than 3 mm (1/8 inch) shall be refitted and not filled.
4.4.2
Insulation Layering
4.4.2.1 Unless otherwise specified by purchaser, piping and equipment
insulation shall be applied as a multiple layer for operating
temperatures of 316 C (600 F) and higher.
4.4.2.2 Personnel protection insulation shall be applied as a double layer
for thicknesses greater than 100 mm (4 inches).
4.4.2.3 If applying single-layer insulation, other than hinged pipe
covering, the circumferential butt joints of each half section shall
be staggered.
4.4.2.4 If applying double-layer or multiple-layer insulation, each
succeeding layer shall be staggered to the longitudinal and
circumferential joint of the layer beneath. All joints of all layers
shall be staggered.
4.4.2.5 Each layer of double-layer or multiple-layer insulation shall be
held in place separately.
4.4.3
Insulation Securement
4.4.3.1 Except as modified in accordance with 4.4.3.2, insulation up to
300 mm (12 inches) O.D. shall be held in place with 1.3 mm
(0.050 inch) diameter Type 304 stainless steel tie wire.
4.4.3.2 Cellular glass and polyisocyanurate foam insulation up to
300 mm (12 inches) O.D. may be held in place with fiberglass
reinforced pressure-sensitive tape.
4.4.3.3 Insulation 300 mm (12 inches) O.D. to 600 mm (24 inches) O.D.
shall be held in place with 13 mm (0.5 inch) wide by 0.50 mm
(0.020 inch) thick Type 304 stainless steel bands and wing seals.
4.4.3.4 Insulation above 600 mm (24 inches) O.D. shall be held in place
with 19 mm (0.75 inch) wide by 0.50 mm (0.020 inch) thick
Type 304 stainless steel bands and wing seals.
Page 7 of 16
PIP INSH1000
EDITORIAL REVISION
August 2007
4.4.3.5 All cut ends of wire shall be embedded into the insulation.
4.4.4
Metal Jacketing
4.4.4.1 If fire protection is required in accordance with API 521,
stainless steel jacketing shall be installed on equipment and
piping.
4.4.4.2 If aluminum jacketing is provided on lines with an operating
temperature exceeding 400 C (750 F), stainless steel jacketing
shall be used at points of contact with insulated surface.
4.4.4.3 Exposed edges of metal jacketing shall be machine-bent or rolled
to eliminate sharp edges.
4.4.5
Metal Jacketing Securement

4.4.5.1 Metal jacketing to 600 mm (24 inches) O.D. shall be held in
place with 13 mm (0.5 inch) wide by 0.50 mm (0.020 inch) thick
4.4.5.2 Metal jacketing above 600 mm (24 inches) O.D. shall be held in
place with 19 mm (0.75 inch) wide by 0.5 mm (0.020 inch) thick
4.4.5.3 Jacket banding shall be spaced on maximum 300 mm (12 inch0
centers.
4.4.6
Screws
4.4.6.1 Screws shall be self-drilling No. 8 by 13 mm (1/2 inch) stainless
steel, with elastomeric washers.
4.4.6.2 Screw heads shall be hex, Phillips recessed round, round,
hex-slotted, or pan type.
4.4.7
Insulation System Expansion Provisions

4.4.7.1 Expansion joints shall be provided for rigid insulation materials
on all piping and horizontal equipment in accordance with
Table 1.
4.4.7.2 Expansion joints shall be provided below insulation supports on
vertical piping, except if above an elbow at the bottom of a pipe
run or directly above the pipe flanges.
4.4.7.3 The expansion joint spacing shown in Table 1 shall be the
maximum distance allowable between restraint points in the
insulation system.
Comment: Restraint points are typically pipe supports, pipe
fittings, branch connections, flanges, and valves.
Page 8 of 16
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP INSH1000
August 2007
Table 1 Expansion Joints

Expansion Joint Spacing, mm (feet)
Operating Temperature
Range C (F)
Horizontal Piping and

Equipment (Note 1)
Vertical Piping
Up to 38 (100)
18000 (60)
18000 (60) (18000)
39 to 93 (101 to 200)
18000 (60)
9000 (30)
94 to 149 (201 to 300)
9000 (30)
4500 (15)
150 to 204 (301 to 400)
4500 (15)
4500 (15)
205 to 260 (401 to 500)
3600 (12)
3600 (12)
261 to 371 (501 to 700)
2700 (9)
2700 (9)
372 to 482 (701 to 900)
1800 (6)
1800 (6)
483 to 649 (901 to 1200)
1200 (4)
1200 (4)
4.4.7.4 If piping runs have distances between insulation restraint points

that exceed those shown in Table 1, insulation expansion joints
located approximately midway between the restraint points shall
be provided.
4.4.7.5 Expansion joints shall not be required for personnel protection
insulation or fibrous insulation on horizontal equipment and
piping.
4.4.7.6 Fibrous insulation shall be compressed during installation to
ensure that circumferential joints are tightly butted together.
4.4.7.7 Except as modified in accordance with 4.4.7.8, expansion joints
shall be provided beneath all insulation support rings on vertical
equipment and piping, except for the bottom support ring.
4.4.7.8 Expansion joints should not be provided beneath the insulation
support ring if the support is immediately above an elbow or
flange.
4.4.7.9 Insulation expansion joints shall be installed in all layers of
multiple-layer insulation.
1. Joints in horizontal piping and equipment shall be staggered
between layers.
2. Joints installed below insulation supports on vertical piping
and equipment shall not be staggered.
Page 9 of 16
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP INSH1000
August 2007
4.4.7.10 Insulation expansion joints shall be 25 mm (1 inch) wide and

packed tightly with mineral fiber blanket insulation compressed
a minimum of 50 percent.
4.4.7.11 Insulation bands securing rigid insulation on equipment in hot
service shall incorporate 100 mm (4 inch) long, flat expansion
springs in accordance with Table 2.
4.4.7.12 Insulation bands securing fibrous insulation on equipment in hot
service shall not require expansion springs.
4.4.7.13 Bands securing equipment insulation weather jacketing in hot
service shall incorporate 4-inch (100-mm) long, compression
spring assemblies in accordance with Table 2.
Table 2 Expansion Spring Requirements
Equipment O.D.
mm
Normal Operating Temperature

qC
inches
750 & under
30 & under
>750 to 1800
>30 to 72
>1800 to 3000
>3000 to 3600
>3600
4.4.8
>72 to 120
Number of
Expansion
Devices per Band
qF
up to 649
up to 1200
none
204
400
none
205 to 649
401 to 1200
204
400
none
205 to 427
401 to 800
428 to 649
801 to 1200
204
400
none
205 to 649
401 to 1200
1 per 9 m (30 ft) of

band
66
150
none
>120 to 144
>144
Pipe Insulation Supports in Vertical Piping

4.4.8.1 If specified by purchaser, vertical piping insulation supports
shall be furnished shop-installed by the piping fabricator.
4.4.8.2 If additional vertical piping insulation supports are required,
bolt-on supports shall be furnished and field-installed.
4.4.8.3 Design of vertical pipe insulation supports shall be provided in
the proposal, and shall be subject to review and approval by
purchaser.
4.4.8.4 Location of pipe insulation supports in vertical piping shall
consider:
a. Maximum spacing of supports shall be the same as specified
in Table 1 for expansion joints in vertical pipe insulation.
Page 10 of 16
EDITORIAL REVISION
August 2007
PIP INSH1000
b. Insulation supports shall be provided above all flanged

connections.
c. Supports above flanged sections shall be located a minimum
one stud bolt length plus 25 mm (1 inch) from the back face
of the top flange.
d. Insulation supports shall be provided above elbows and tees,
if the vertical or diagonal run length is equal to or greater
than the maximum spacing allowed in Table 1 for expansion
joints in vertical pipe insulation.
e. If required above elbows or tees, supports shall be located
150 mm (6 inches) from the pipe-to-fitting weld.
4.4.8.5 Supports shall provide adequate clearance for the installation of
required electric or steam tracers.
4.4.9
Piping Insulation
4.4.9.1 Insulation for fittings, flanges, and valves shall be fabricated in
accordance with ASTM C450 and the Adjunct.
4.4.9.2 Molded insulation fitting covers shall be used, subject to the
operating temperature limits of the molded cover material.
4.4.9.3 Socketweld or threaded valves, ells, tees and other fittings shall
be insulated with strips of glass fiber-needled blanket, wrapped
around the valve or fitting and secured with wire.
4.4.9.4 Valve insulation shall be terminated directly below the packing
gland flange and packing follower.
4.4.9.5 Insulation material shall not be applied between the pipe and
tracer, except if spacers to prevent local overheating of the pipe
are specified.
4.4.10 Equipment Insulation

4.4.10.1 Equipment with vessel shell diameters of 900 mm (36 inches) or
less shall have shell insulation extended to cover the heads.
1. Each head shall be blocked in with an insulation disc,
fabricated or cut to match the inside diameter of the
insulation.
2. Nominal disc thickness shall be the thickness required for
the shell.
4.4.10.2 Unless specified otherwise, all exposed heads exceeding
900 mm (36 inches) shall be insulated with block insulation.
1. Block insulation shall be installed full thickness and fit to
follow the curvature of the head.
2. As an alternate to shop-fabricated segments, heads shall be
insulated with field fit block if approved by the purchaser.
3. Scored or V-grooved block shall not be permitted.
Page 11 of 16
PIP INSH1000
EDITORIAL REVISION
August 2007
4.4.10.3 Unless specified otherwise by purchaser, vertical equipment

support legs, lugs, and saddle supports for horizontal equipment
shall not be insulated.
4.4.10.4 Insulation on skirt-supported vertical vessels shall be extended
past the bottom tangent line, down the exterior surface of the
skirt to the bottom insulation support ring.
4.4.10.5 Vessels having skirt inside diameters exceeding 1200 mm
(48 inches) shall have the corresponding inside skirt surface
insulated.
4.4.10.6 Equipment nozzles connected to bare piping shall have the
equipment insulation system terminated on the nozzle and
finished with a metallic cover.
4.4.10.7 For insulation of vessel shells, rigid pipe sections or rigid curved
radius segments shall be utilized up to the maximum
commercially available size.
4.4.10.8 Beveled block insulation for vessel shells shall be used only if
shell diameters exceed the commercially available size of curved
radius segments.
1. Edge beveling of the block shall be in accordance with
ASTM C450 and the Adjunct.
2. Bevels shall be applied to either one or both block edges.
4.4.10.9 Scored block insulation shall not be an acceptable substitute for
beveled lags or curved radius segments.
4.4.10.10 Code or other nameplates shall not be covered by insulation.
4.4.11 Machinery Insulation
4.4.11.1 Machinery, such as pumps and turbines, shall be insulated with
removable/reusable insulation covers, as designated in
PIP INSH1000-D2.
4.4.11.2 If required by purchaser, machinery, such as pumps and turbines,
shall be insulated with insulating and finishing cement.
4.4.11.3 Before applying insulating and finishing cement, a layer of 25 mm
(1 inch) hexagonal chicken wire mesh or expanded metal lath shall
be wrapped around the equipment item to be insulated with a
25 mm (1 inch) overlap at all edges and secured with wire.
4.4.11.4 All cut wire ends shall be turned in so as not to protrude through
the finished surface.
4.4.11.5 The insulating and finishing cement shall be mixed and applied
according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
4.4.11.6 Insulating and finishing cement shall be applied to the same
thickness as the adjoining insulation.
Page 12 of 16
EDITORIAL REVISION
August 2007
PIP INSH1000
4.4.12 Insulation Types ET and ST

4.4.12.1 If insulation design and installation is included with the electrical
tracing system design and installation subcontract, alternate
insulation materials and thicknesses, and combinations thereof,
shall be utilized, provided the intent of the specification is
satisfied. Such alternates shall be approved by the purchaser.
4.4.12.2 Jacketing for insulation on electrical traced piping shall be
installed with bands only.
Comment: Screws and rivets can damage the electrical
tracing and shall not be acceptable fasteners for
any jacketing installed to finish insulation on
electrically traced piping.
4.4.12.3 Screw and rivet fasteners can however be used in the fabrication
of removable insulated covers for use over electrically traced
piping components.
4.4.12.4 Unless required for personnel protection, tube tracer unions
located outside of the pipe or equipment insulation shall not be
insulated.
4.4.12.5 Unless required for personnel protection, tracer expansion loops
located outside of insulation shall not be insulated.
4.4.12.6 If required for personnel protection, insulation for tracer loops
shall be installed in accordance with the following:
a. The tracer shall be wrapped with 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick
fiberglass tape, using a 50 percent overlap to provide a 6 mm
(1/4 inch) thickness.
b. The fiberglass tape shall be secured with wire on 150 mm
(6 inch) centers.
c. The outer surface of the fiberglass tape shall be finished with
weather barrier mastic, without reinforcing membrane,
applied to a nominal dry film thickness of 2 mm (1/16 inch).
4.4.12.7 Pipe insulation shall be oversized, unless otherwise agreed with
purchaser.
4.4.12.8 Grooving or deforming of the insulation to accommodate heat
tracing is prohibited.
4.4.12.9 Oversized insulation shall be installed such that the insulation is
not loose on the piping.
4.4.13 Insulation Finish
4.4.13.1 Weather jacketing shall be fitted tightly around vessel and piping
attachments that pass through the weather jacketing.
4.4.13.2 RTV silicone sealant shall be applied to the extent necessary to
prevent the entrance of water around penetrations through the
weather jacketing.
Page 13 of 16
PIP INSH1000
EDITORIAL REVISION
August 2007
4.4.13.3 Circumferential and longitudinal laps in weather jacketing shall

be overlapped 50 mm (2 inches) to 75 mm (3 inches).
4.4.13.4 Unless otherwise specified, insulation surfaces that have not
been finished with metal jacketing shall be weatherproofed with
membrane-reinforced weather barrier mastic.
1. The membrane-reinforced mastic shall extend under the
adjoining metal jacketing for a distance of 75 mm (3 inches)
minimum.
2. The membrane-reinforced mastic shall also extend onto
uninsulated projections a minimum of 75 mm (3 inches).
4.4.13.5 Weather barrier mastic shall be applied by trowel or brushed on
large surfaces and by brush or glove on small surfaces.
4.4.13.6 Two coats of weather-barrier mastic shall be applied in
accordance with the material manufacturer's instructions and the
following:
a. Substrate temperatures shall be within the application
temperature range established by the material manufacturer.
b. Substrate temperature shall be above dew point temperature at
the time of application and until the mastic has dried.
c. Substrate shall be dry if the mastic is applied.
d. Substrate shall not be subject to freezing temperatures within
24 hours of application.
e. If weather barrier mastic is scheduled for application over
dusty surfaces, the surface shall be primed with suitable
primer, as recommended by the weather barrier mastic
manufacturer.
f. Weather barrier mastic shall not be thinned.
g. Reinforcing membrane shall be applied while first coat is still
tacky.
h. Membrane shall be embedded in first coat of mastic, without
wrinkles, so that mastic comes up through the open mesh.
i. Membrane seams shall be overlapped 50 mm (2 inches).
j. The second coat of mastic shall be applied before the first
coat dries.
k. All outside corners of insulation shall be rounded and the
weather barrier mastic provided with a double layer of
reinforcing membrane.
4.4.13.7 After drying, the membrane reinforced weather barrier mastic
shall be inspected for imperfections (i.e., cracks, pinholes,
openings, or exposed reinforcing membrane). Such
Page 14 of 16
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP INSH1000
August 2007
imperfections shall be repaired with the same material as

originally applied.
4.4.14 Protection of Installed Insulation
4.4.14.1 Installed insulation shall have the required permanent protection
or temporary protection applied before the conclusion of work
on that day.
4.4.14.2 Installed insulation shall have temporary protection applied if
rain or other forms of atmospheric moisture can damage the
insulation during each work shift.
4.4.15 Wet Insulation
4.4.15.1 Insulation that becomes wet shall be removed and replaced with
dry insulation.
4.4.15.2 Wet insulation shall be discarded.
4.4.16 Work Area Housekeeping
4.4.16.1 Insulation materials shall be handled and disposed of in
accordance with applicable federal, state, and local laws and
regulations.
4.4.16.2 Insulation-related materials, such as mastics, shall be handled
and applied with care to prevent splattering on adjacent facilities,
such as concrete foundations, paving, structural steel, equipment,
piping, gauge glasses, instruments, machined surfaces, valve
stems, and packing.
4.4.16.3 All mastic over-spray and splatter shall be removed immediately.
4.4.16.4 Flammable materials shall be stored away from ignition sources
such as welding operations.
4.4.16.5 Debris from insulation application work shall be removed from
the work area on a regular basis and placed in containers at the
end of the workday.
4.5
Quality Plan
A quality plan shall be provided with the proposal that includes the following:
a. Quality assurance, quality control, and inspection criteria
b. A method of providing the purchaser with verifiable evidence that all aspects
of quality are accepted and found acceptable by the suppliers inspector
during the course of the insulation work
c. All elements identified by PIP INTG1000
d. Inspection hold points as necessary to assure work can be properly inspected
before any additional work is performed that could obscure defective
materials or installation
Page 15 of 16
PIP INSH1000
4.6
EDITORIAL REVISION
August 2007
Inspection
4.6.1
All materials, fabrication, and installation work is subject to inspection

by the purchaser or the owner.
4.6.2
The purchaser's inspector shall review the quality procedures to verify

the following information:
a. Quality procedures are appropriate for the work scope being
performed and have been approved by purchaser.
b. The approved quality procedures have been implemented and are
being administrated by the quality personnel.
4.7
Page 16 of 16
4.6.3
Items that are not in accordance with the purchase order shall be subject
to rejection.
4.6.4
Rejected material, fabrication, or installation work shall be replaced at no

cost to purchaser.
4.6.5
Unless otherwise specified, INTG1000 shall be used for inspection

documentation.
Repairs
4.7.1
Damage to installed insulation shall be promptly reported to the

purchaser. The report shall include the location and nature of the
damage.
4.7.2
Damage to insulation weather jacketing shall be repaired immediately if

the damage can result in additional damage to the insulation due to water
leakage into the system.
4.7.3
Damage to the integrity of weather jacketing applied over calcium

silicate shall be of prime concern and shall be given top repair priority.
4.7.4
If permanent repair is not immediately practical, temporary repair of

damaged weather jacketing shall be required.
4.7.5
Damaged insulation shall be replaced if the nature of the damage will

adversely affect the thermal performance of the system.
4.7.6
Any disputes regarding the need for replacement of insulation shall be

referred to the purchaser for resolution.
EDITORIAL REVISION
July 2007

Insulation
PIP INSR1000
Installation of Flexible, Removable/Reusable
Insulation Covers for Hot Insulation Service


PRINTING HISTORY
April 1999
Issued
December 2005 Technical Correction
February 2006
July 2007
Editorial Revision
Editorial Revision
EDITORIAL REVISION
July 2007

Insulation
PIP INSR1000
Installation of Flexible, Removable/Reusable
Insulation Covers for Hot Insulation Service
Table of Contents
1. Introduction................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................. 2
1.2 Scope................................................. 2
2. References .................................. 2
2.2 Industry Codes and Standards.......... 2
2.3 Other References .............................. 2
3. Definitions ................................... 3
4. Requirements.............................. 3
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
Materials ............................................ 3
Design and Fabrication ..................... 5
Installation Requirements .................. 7
Inspection .......................................... 7
Extent of Insulation ............................ 7
Documentation .................................. 7
Thickness Table ................................ 8
Data Forms
INSR1000-D1 Documentation
Requirements Sheet
completed Documentation Requirements
Sheet.
INSR1000-D2 Design Parameters
INSR1000-D3 Flexible,
Removable/Reusable Insulation
Covers for Hot Insulation Service Data
Sheet
INSR1000-F Insulation Thickness Table
(US Customary Units)
INSR1000-FM Insulation Thickness
Table (SI Units)
Page 1 of 8
PIP INSR1000
Application of Underground Coatings
1.
EDITORIAL REVISION
July 2007
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
This Practice provides requirements for the installer of flexible, removable/reusable
insulation covers for hot service insulation systems.
1.2
Scope
This Practice describes the minimum requirements for materials, fabrication, and
installation of flexible, removable/reusable hot service insulation covers, ambient to
538C (1000F).
2.
References
award shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles are used herein where appropriate.
2.1
2.2
2.3
ASTM C680 - Standard Practice for Determination of Heat Gain or Loss

and the Surface Temperatures of Insulated Pipe and Equipment Systems by
the Use of a Computer Program
ASTM C692 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Influence of

Thermal Insulations on External Stress Corrosion Cracking Tendency of
Austenitic Stainless Steel
ASTM C795 - Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic

Stainless Steel
ASTM C871 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Thermal

Insulation Materials for Leachable Chloride, Fluoride, Silicate, and Sodium
Ions
ASTM C1086 - Standard Specification for Glass Fiber Felt Thermal

Insulation
ASTM D3776 - Standard Test for Methods for Mass per Unit Area (Weight)
of Woven Fabric
Other References
North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA)
Page 2 of 8
PIP INSH1000 - Hot Service Insulation Materials and Installation

Specification
3E PLUS Insulation Thickness Computer Program
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP INSR1000
July 2007
3.
Definitions
supplier: Party responsible for furnishing and/or installing the insulation system
owner: The party who owns the facility wherein the installation system will be used
purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the supplier. The purchaser may be the
owner or the owner's authorized agent.
manufacturer: Party responsible for making the insulation covers for hot insulation service
4.
Requirements
4.1
Materials
4.1.1
4.1.2
General
4.1.1.1
Insulation and accessory materials shall be furnished in accordance

with the requirements of this Practice, including the specific grade
or type.
4.1.1.2
Insulation and accessory materials shall be formulated without

asbestos.
4.1.1.3
Materials shall be new and shall be used prior to the expiration

date.
4.1.1.4
Use of materials other than those specified in this Practice shall

require prior written approval of the purchaser. Requests for
substitutions shall be included as an alternate in the bidders
proposal.
4.1.1.5
Alternative insulation materials may be specified by the purchaser

on data sheet INSR1000-D3, as needed.
Testing
4.1.2.1
All materials shall be qualified for use on austenitic stainless steel

in accordance with ASTM C795. If requested, test reports shall be
furnished.
4.1.2.2
Material manufacturer shall also furnish a chemical analysis in

accordance with ASTM C871 for materials. This chemical analysis
shall not vary by more than 50% from the chemical analysis of the
production lot tested under ASTM C692.
4.1.2.3
Unless otherwise specified in the purchase order, certification of

chemical analysis is not required for each production lot from
which material is furnished for this project. However, the
manufacturer shall state that the chemical analysis will not vary by
more than 50% from those done during the production lot tested
under ASTM C795.
Page 3 of 8
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP INSR1000
4.1.2.4
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
July 2007
Testing shall be conducted by a laboratory accredited by the

National Institute of Standards and Technologys National
Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAB).
Insulation Material
4.1.3.1
Insulation material shall be composed of 100% selected-grade

Type E glass fibers fabricated in mat form without the addition of
resinous or organic binders in accordance with ASTM C1086.
4.1.3.2
Insulation shall be suitable for hot face temperatures to 538C

(1000F).
4.1.3.3
Insulation shall have a nominal density of 128 kg/m (8.0 lb/ft).
Inner Liner
4.1.4.1
Inner liner for operating temperatures to 260C (500F) shall be a

fiberglass fabric impregnated with PTFE, having a minimum
weight of 540 g/m (16 oz/yd) in accordance with ASTM D3776,
and grey in color.
4.1.4.2
Inner liner for operating temperatures 261C (501F) to 538C

(1000F) shall be a four-ply laminate, consisting of two layers of
fiberglass cloth and two layers of 25 m (1 mil) thick aluminum
foil, with a minimum weight of 610 g/m (18 oz/yd).
Outer Jacket
Outer jacket shall be a fiberglass fabric impregnated with PTFE, having a minimum
weight of 540 g/m (16 oz/yd2) in accordance with ASTM D3776, and grey in color.
4.1.6
4.1.7
Tie-Down Straps
4.1.6.1
Tie-down straps shall be constructed of the same material as the

outer jacket.
4.1.6.2
Tie-down straps shall be fabricated using a double thickness of the

fabric, with edge trim sewn in place along both edges.
4.1.6.3
Edge trim shall be applied to not leave exposed fabric edges.
4.1.6.4
Ends of the straps shall be turned under 6 to 13 mm (1/4 to

1/2 inch) and double-stitched to prevent unraveling.
Drawstrings
Drawstrings shall be made from 100% textured fiberglass sleeving with plain weave,
10 mm (3/8 inch) inside diameter, 0.8 mm (0.03 inch) wall thickness, and shall be
suitable for 538C (1000F) service.
4.1.8
Page 4 of 8
Thread
4.1.8.1
PTFE-coated fiberglass thread shall be used for service

temperatures to 260C (500F).
4.1.8.2
Fiberglass thread shall be 0.50 mm (0.021 inch) diameter,

minimum 9 kg (20 lbs.) tensile strength.
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP INSR1000
July 2007
4.1.9
4.1.8.3
Kevlar-coated stainless steel thread shall be used for service

temperatures above 260C (500F).
4.1.8.4
Stainless steel thread shall be minimum 0.40 mm (0.015 inch)

diameter and minimum 8 kg (18 lbs.) tensile strength.
Hardware
All hardware such as D-rings, buckles, tags, etc., shall be type 304 stainless steel.
4.2
Design and Fabrication

4.2.1
4.2.2
Piping and Equipment Covers

4.2.1.1
Insulated items shall be pre-measured to assure a tight fit.

Allowances for valve bonnet height, gland openings, protrusions,
etc shall be included.
4.2.1.2
Force-folding or bending of covers shall not be permitted.
4.2.1.3
Covers shall be fabricated with a minimum 50 mm (2 inches) of

overlap at the end flap over adjacent insulation.
4.2.1.4
Covers shall be fabricated to allow easy access to valve packing

glands and flange bolts without having to completely remove the
cover.
4.2.1.5
If possible, covers shall be fabricated with parting faces at the

cover low point to facilitate drainage. Otherwise, a drainage
grommet shall be installed at the cover low point.
4.2.1.6
Any single cover or cover piece shall not exceed 20 kg (45 lbs.)
Covers with a finished weight of 20 kg (45 lbs.) or less shall be
fabricated in one piece.
Jacket Fabric Seam Construction

4.2.2.1
All fabric seams shall be sewn. Machine stitching shall be used

wherever practical. Hand stitching shall be kept to an absolute
minimum.
4.2.2.2
All cover seams shall be turned in or under and sewn to prevent

any raw edges from being exposed on any surface.
4.2.2.3
Gusset-type construction shall be utilized for all cover thicknesses

greater than 1 inch.
4.2.2.4
Sewing shall be double straight stitched with minimum 7 stitches

per 25 mm (1 inch). Each row shall be parallel and spaced a
minimum of 3 mm (1/8 inch) to a maximum of 13 mm (1/2 inch)
apart.
4.2.2.5
Fabric seams shall be inside seams, except that the final closing
seam may be an outside seam.
4.2.2.6
Insulation within the jacketing shall be secured with lacing hooks

or insulation anchors to prevent insulation from settling within the
cover. These supports shall penetrate the cold face jacketing and
Page 5 of 8
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP INSR1000
July 2007
the insulation core, but not the hot face jacketing. Point protectors
shall be used to prevent penetration of the hot face jacketing.
4.2.3
Tie-Down/Anchor Strap Construction

4.2.3.1
The terminal ends of splits in covers shall be constructed with flaps

or drawcord/flaps to seal the covers from wind and water. Flaps
shall have no gaps where they contact adjacent insulation.
4.2.3.2
D-ring type buckles and/or hook-and-loop tie-down/anchor straps

shall be used.
4.2.3.3
Lacing Hooks
1. Lacing hooks and wire shall not be used unless approved by the
Purchaser.
2. If Purchaser approves the use of lacing hooks and wires, the
lacing hooks shall be tufted to the cold face jacketing.
3. If lacing hooks penetrate the hot face, the hooks shall be
secured by self-locking washers with a patch of the hot face
jacketing material sewn over the washer.
4. A silicone rubber patch shall be placed between the washer and
the cover.
4.2.3.4
Ends of straps shall be turned under 6 mm (1/4 inch) to 13 mm

(1/2 inch) and double stitched to prevent unraveling.
4.2.3.5
Strap length and number of straps for covers shall be sufficient to

ensure a snug and proper fit without gaps or sagging of the cover.
4.2.3.6
Tie-down strap length shall have a minimum of 150 mm (6 inches)

excess length for pulling and securing.
4.2.3.7
Drawcords
1. Drawcords shall be used if terminal ends of covers need to be

drawn down around adjacent insulation, valve bonnets, nozzles,
etc., to seal the covers from wind and water.
2. Covers shall incorporate flaps at the terminal ends. Drawcord
shall be located within this flap.
3. Tie-down/anchor straps adjacent to the covers terminal ends
shall be spaced a minimum of 50 mm (2 inches) back from the
drawcord flaps.
4. Cord length shall be sufficient to allow a minimum of 150 mm
(6 inches) of cord to protrude from each end of the flap when it
is drawn down.
5. Cut ends of braided sleeving cord shall be turned back inside
the sleeving a minimum of 25 mm (1 inch) and double-stitched
to prevent fraying.
6. A double stitch shall be located at the middle of the flap to
secure the cord and prevent it from pulling out.
Page 6 of 8
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP INSR1000
July 2007
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.3
4.4
4.5
Valve Covers
4.2.4.1
Valve covers shall be designed to permit full function of the valves

and shall not obscure the valves position indicator.
4.2.4.2
Any leak from the packing gland or flanges must be channeled out
of the cover to prevent soaking the insulation.
Identification Tags
4.2.5.1
Stainless steel identification tags shall be permanently attached to

the outside of the cover.
4.2.5.2
The identification legend shall be mechanically embossed on the

tag.
4.2.5.3
Information contained on each tag shall be specified by the

purchaser.
4.2.5.4
Tags shall not be riveted directly to the cold face jacketing.
4.2.5.5
Tags shall be riveted to straps that are similar to tie-down/anchor

straps. These straps shall be secured to the cold face jacketing to
allow the straps to double as handles or lifting loops.
4.2.5.6
Covers utilizing multi-piece construction shall be appropriately

tagged for assembly.
Installation Requirements
4.3.1
All surfaces to be insulated shall be clean and dry.
4.3.2
Before insulating, any steel requiring coating shall be coated in accordance

with applicable specifications.
4.3.3
Insulation shall not be installed until completion of stress relieving, chemical

cleaning, pressure testing, installation of heat tracing, and authorization in
writing by appropriate authority.
4.3.4
The fit of the covers shall be in accordance with the design requirements of
this Practice.
Inspection
4.4.1
The Purchaser reserves the right to inspect the covers during manufacture.
4.4.2
Any materials or installations that do not meet the requirements of this

Practice shall be replaced or corrected.
Extent of Insulation
The extent of insulation shall be in accordance with the purchaser's PIP INSH1000
data sheet INSH1000-D3.
4.6
Documentation
4.6.1
Documents required to define the scope of work shall be listed on

Documentation Requirements Sheet INSR1000-D1.
Page 7 of 8
EDITORIAL REVISION
PIP INSR1000
4.6.2
4.7
July 2007
Flexible, removable/reusable insulation covers shall be provided in

accordance with purchaser's data sheet INSR1000-D3, as needed to specify
different cover types.
Thickness Table
4.7.1
Table 1 design parameters were used to compute the personnel protection

thicknesses shown in the PIP INSR1000-F or PIP INSR1000-FM.
4.7.2
Users shall determine if these economic and climatic conditions are

applicable to their specific location.
4.7.3
Design parameters other than those shown in Table 1 may be noted in

PIP INSR1000-D2.
Table 1: Design Parameters - Insulation Thickness Calculation

Hot Insulation Thickness - 1998 Design Parameters
Personnel Protection Design Wind Speed
1 m/s (2 mph)
Personnel Protection Design Summer Dry Bulb Temperature
35C (95F)
Personnel Protection Maximum Surface Temperature
60C (140F)
Emittance of Existing Surface
0.9
Reference: ASTM C680, Available from ASTM, Philadelphia, PA.

3E PLUS Insulation Thickness Computer Program ver. 2.0, Copyright North American Insulation Manufacturers
Association (NAIMA).
Page 8 of 8
ASSOC. PIP:
INSR1000
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS SHEET
PIP INSR1000-D1
FLEXIBLE, REMOVABLE/REUSABLE INSULATION

COVERS FOR HOT INSULATION SERVICE
NO.
DATE
PROJECT NO.
BY
PAGE 1 OF 1
JULY 2007
CHECKED
APPROVED
FACILITY NAME
LOCATION
NUMBER
INSR1000-D2
TITLE
FLEXIBLE, REMOVABLE/REUSABLE
INSULATION COVERS FOR HOT INSULATION SERVICE
DESIGN PARAMETERS
INTG1000
INSR1000-D3
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
INSR1000
INSR1000-F
INSR1000-FM
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
INIH0009
NOTES:
YES
REV
SELECTED MATERIALS SYSTEM DATA SHEETS

GENERAL SERVICE, TO 260 C (500 F)
SELECTED INSULATION THICKNESS TABLES

GENERAL SERVICE, US CUSTOMARY UNITS
GENERAL SERVICE, SI UNITS
NO
FLEXIBLE, REMOVABLE / REUSABLE INSULATION COVER DETAILS
REMOVABLE AND REUSABLE INSULATION
NO
FLEXIBLE
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
DATE
NOTES
ASSOC. PIP:
INSR1000
DESIGN PARAMETERS
PIP INSR1000-D2
FLEXIBLE, REMOVABLE/REUSABLE INSULATION

COVERS FOR HOT INSULATION SERVICE
NO.
DATE
PROJECT NO.
BY
PAGE 1 OF 1
JULY 2007
CHECKED
APPROVED
FACILITY NAME
LOCATION
HEAT CONSERVATION DESIGN BASIS:
MAXIMUM HEAT LOSS - INSULATION SURFACE
DESIGN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
WIND SPEED (AVERAGE ANNUAL)
INSULATION FINISH EMISSIVITY
DESIGN FACTOR FOR THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY
MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS
PERSONNEL PROTECTION DESIGN BASIS:

DESIGN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
MAXIMUM SURFACE TEMPERATURE
WIND SPEED
INSULATION FINISH EMISSIVITY
DESIGN FACTOR FOR THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY
MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS
NOTES:
35
60
1
0.90
1.00
25
W/m
C
m/s
Btu/hrft
F
mph
mm
in.
C
C
m/s
F
F
mph
mm
in.
ASSOC. PIP:
INSR1000
DATA SHEET
PIP INSR1000-D3
NO.
DATE
PAGE 1 OF 1
JULY 2007
BY
FACILITY NAME
CHECKED
APPROVED
PROJECT NO.
LOCATION
SERVICE DESCRIPTION: GENERAL SERVICE.

TEMPERATURE RANGE: TO 260 C
MANUFACTURER
COMPONENT
INSULATION
MATERIAL
INNER LINER
OUTER JACKET
KNITTED WIRE
MESH
DRAWSTRINGS
THREAD
NOTES:
(TO 500F)
THICKNESS TABLE:
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
BRAND NAME
MANUFACTURER
DESCRIPTION
TYPE E GLASS FIBER MAT, WITHOUT RESINOUS OR ORGANIC BINDERS
FIBERGLASS FABRIC, PTFE IMPREGNATED, 540 g/m (16 oz/yd)
FIBERGLASS FABRIC, PTFE IMPREGNATED, 540 g/m (16 oz/yd)
NOT REQUIRED
FIBERGLASS SLEEVING, PLAIN WEAVE, 10 mm (3/8 in.) INSIDE DIAMETER AND 0.03 in.
(0.8 mm) WALL THICKNESS
TEFLON-COATED FIBERGLASS THREAD, 0.50 mm (0.021 in.) DIAMETER, MINIMUM 9 kg (20
lb) TENSILE STRENGTH
BRAND NAME
MANUFACTURER
BRAND NAME
ASSOC. PIP:
INSR1000
INSULATION THICKNESS TABLE (US CUSTOMARY UNITS)
PIP INSR1000-F
FACILITY NAME
LOCATION
NO.
PAGE 1 OF 1
JULY 2007
PROJECT NO.
DATE
BY
CHECKED
APPROVED
SERVICE DESCRIPTION: GENERAL SERVICE

Pipe Size
or O.D.
(NPS) (in.)
1 and less
1 1/2
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
>36 to Flat
To
150
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
151
to
200
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
201
to
250
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
251
to
300
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
301
to
350
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
351
to
400
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
401
to
450
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
451
to
500
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
501
to
550
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
Operating Temperature, F
551
601
651
701
to
to
to
to
600
650
700
750
1.5
1.5
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
751
to
800
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
801
to
850
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
851
to
900
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
901
to
950
2.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
951
to
1000
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
to
to
to
NOTES:
1.
Insulation thicknesses are based on design parameters in PIP INSR1000 Table 1 for personnel protection, using maximum thermal conductivity for glass fiber felt insulation
in accordance with ASTM C1086.
to
ASSOC. PIP:
INSR1000
INSULATION THICKNESS TABLE (SI UNITS)
PIP INSR1000-FM
FACILITY NAME
LOCATION
NO.
PAGE 1 OF 1
JULY 2007
PROJECT NO.
DATE
BY
CHECKED
APPROVED
SERVICE DESCRIPTION: GENERAL SERVICE

Pipe Size
or O.D.
(NPS) (in.)
1 and less
1 1/2
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
36
>36 to Flat
To
75
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
76
to
100
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
101
to
125
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
126
to
150
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
151
to
175
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
176
to
200
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
40
40
40
201
to
225
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
226
to
250
25
25
25
25
25
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
50
251
to
275
25
25
25
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Operating Temperature, C
276
301
326
351
to
to
to
to
300
325
350
375
40
25
25
40
40
40
25
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
50
40
40
40
50
50
40
50
50
50
50
50
50
65
50
50
65
65
50
50
65
65
50
50
65
65
50
50
65
65
50
65
65
75
50
65
65
75
50
65
65
75
50
65
65
75
50
65
75
75
65
75
75
376
to
400
40
40
50
50
50
65
65
65
75
75
75
75
75
75
401
to
425
40
50
50
50
65
65
75
75
75
75
75
426
to
450
50
50
50
65
65
75
75
75
451
to
475
50
50
65
65
75
75
476
to
500
50
65
65
75
75
501
to
525
65
65
65
75
75
526
to
538
65
65
75
75
to
NOTES:
1.
Insulation thicknesses are based on design parameters in PIP INSR1000 Table 1 for personnel protection, using maximum thermal conductivity for glass fiber felt insulation
in accordance with ASTM C1086.
to
2012-10-03
1.
UOP Specification
Page 1 of 2
970086-S150-A
Scope
This document defines the technical requirements for Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) and
related activities required by the Supplier.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inspection and Test Plan for Approval

1.
ITP shall be submitted for UOP approval prior to start of manufacturing.
2.
ITP shall be specific to the purchase order.
3.
ITP shall include the Inspection Data Sheets general and specific sections (when
applicable).
4.
A separate ITP shall be provided for each tagged equipment item or module.
5.
ITP shall include suitable space for supplier and other involved parties to initial and
date each inspection activity upon successful completion.
Inspection and Test Plan for Record

1.
The ITP shall be maintained by supplier as a signed and dated record of inspection.
2.
As each inspection activity is completed and accepted by the supplier, the supplier
representative shall sign and date the ITP.
3.
Supplier shall coordinate UOP and client dated signatures, once their inspections are
completed.
4.
Completed ITP record must be included in the supplier final data package.
Definitions (Level of Inspection)

1.
H - (hold point) requires written notice to UOP by the supplier. Activity shall not
proceed until indicated party is present or a written release to proceed is issued.
2.
W- (witness point) requires written notice to UOP by the supplier. Activity may
proceed at the schedule time with or without the indicated party present.
3.
SW- (witness first operation) requires written notice to UOP by the supplier.
Activity may proceed at the schedule time with or without the indicated party present.
First activity is a UOP witness point, random inspection thereafter.
4.
I - (inspection point) does not require notification by the supplier. Activity may be
inspected by indicated party. Activity may proceed at the schedule time with or
without the indicated party present.
5.
R- (review) requires report to be reviewed by indicated party. Report shall be

available to indicated party within two business days of activity. Report shall be ink
stamped and endorsed by both supplier inspector and indicated party.
Inspection Notification
1.
Supplier shall provide written notification ten (10) workdays prior to inspection
activity which requires H, W, or SW per the approved ITP.
2.
Supplier Inspection Notification form shall include the following:

a.
equipment number and name or module
b.
description of inspection activity
2012-10-03
UOP Specification
c.
supplier contact name, email, and phone number
d.
expected inspection date and time
Page 2 of 2
970086-S150-A
3.
Supplier distribution of inspection notification shall be provided by UOP.
4.
Two (2) days prior to scheduled inspection date, supplier shall contact UOP and
client inspectors by phone to confirm readiness for inspection.
2013-01-18
1.
UOP Specification
Cross-Discipline Clearance
Page 1 of 1
RBPC10_PMR S999C-0
Scope
This document defines technical requirements for clearance that are not specific to one
technical discipline.
2.
Clearance
1.
2.
Clearance shall be greater than or equal to the following:

a.
Above platform, walkway, accessway, and stairway tread:
b.
From pump foundation and pump, horizontally:
c.
From compressor and compressor foundation, horizontally:
d.
Platform accessway width: 3 ft (925 mm)
e.
From the face of fireproofed steel: 4 in (100 mm)
f.
From handrail:
g.
Behind non-driving end of motor and above motor:
h.
Above cable tray: 6 in (155 mm)
i.
From electrical chase:
7.88 ft (2.4 m)
3 ft (925 mm)
4 ft (1.25 m)
3 in (75 mm)
3 ft (925 mm)
3 in (75 mm)
A cone with its apex up, that encompasses lighting fixture, and with an angle of 30
degrees from vertical shall be clear from fixture to platform, walkway, or accessway.
Light fixture
30
degre
es
30
es
degre
Platform, walkway, or accessway
3.
Clearance around ladder shall be as follows:
30 in
769 mm
7 in
180 mm
15 in
384 mm
15 in
384 mm
Climbing side
Plan View
2012-10-03
1.
UOP Specification
Page 1 of 2
970086-S150-A
Scope
This document defines the technical requirements for Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) and
related activities required by the Supplier.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inspection and Test Plan for Approval

1.
ITP shall be submitted for UOP approval prior to start of manufacturing.
2.
ITP shall be specific to the purchase order.
3.
ITP shall include the Inspection Data Sheets general and specific sections (when
applicable).
4.
A separate ITP shall be provided for each tagged equipment item or module.
5.
ITP shall include suitable space for supplier and other involved parties to initial and
date each inspection activity upon successful completion.
Inspection and Test Plan for Record

1.
The ITP shall be maintained by supplier as a signed and dated record of inspection.
2.
As each inspection activity is completed and accepted by the supplier, the supplier
representative shall sign and date the ITP.
3.
Supplier shall coordinate UOP and client dated signatures, once their inspections are
completed.
4.
Completed ITP record must be included in the supplier final data package.
Definitions (Level of Inspection)

1.
H - (hold point) requires written notice to UOP by the supplier. Activity shall not
proceed until indicated party is present or a written release to proceed is issued.
2.
W- (witness point) requires written notice to UOP by the supplier. Activity may
proceed at the schedule time with or without the indicated party present.
3.
SW- (witness first operation) requires written notice to UOP by the supplier.
Activity may proceed at the schedule time with or without the indicated party present.
First activity is a UOP witness point, random inspection thereafter.
4.
I - (inspection point) does not require notification by the supplier. Activity may be
inspected by indicated party. Activity may proceed at the schedule time with or
without the indicated party present.
5.
R- (review) requires report to be reviewed by indicated party. Report shall be

available to indicated party within two business days of activity. Report shall be ink
stamped and endorsed by both supplier inspector and indicated party.
Inspection Notification
1.
Supplier shall provide written notification ten (10) workdays prior to inspection
activity which requires H, W, or SW per the approved ITP.
2.
Supplier Inspection Notification form shall include the following:

a.
equipment number and name or module
b.
description of inspection activity
2012-10-03
UOP Specification
c.
supplier contact name, email, and phone number
d.
expected inspection date and time
Page 2 of 2
970086-S150-A
3.
Supplier distribution of inspection notification shall be provided by UOP.
4.
Two (2) days prior to scheduled inspection date, supplier shall contact UOP and
client inspectors by phone to confirm readiness for inspection.
Project
UOP Equitec
Pemex Minatitlan CCR Revamp
Location
INSPECTION DATA SHEET
Mexico
Inspection Activities
Sheet
Reference
documents
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND MISCELLANEOUS ASSEMBLY

MODULE FABRICATION
1. Inspection and test plan approval
970086- S150
7. Stair steps and stair treads installation check

8. Final Inspection and test plan record review
970086- S150
3. Installed equipment bolting grade, number, and tightness check

4. Equipment temporary support installation and site removal color code check
5. Grating installation, piping penetrations, tie down clips check
6. Ladders, handrails, toe plates,and safety gate installation check
Acceptance criteria
UOP
Level of Inspection
PEMEX
970086- U060
1/2
Revision
Notes
(also see 970086-S150)
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
2. Equipment mounting to proper orientation, level, and plumbness check
Document No.
970086 R060
970086 R060
970086 R060
970086 R060
970086 R060
970086 R060
970086 R060
970086 R060
H- hold point, W- witness point, SW- spot witness, I inspection point, R- review point (see 970086- S150 for definitions)
Supplier must complete,

date,
and
sign
the
approved ITP
Project
UOP Equitec
Location
Pemex Minatitlan CCR Revamp
Mexico
Document No.
Sheet
Reference
documents
Acceptance criteria
UOP
Level of Inspection
PEMEX
970086- U060
2/2
Revision
Notes
SHIPPING PREPARATION AND INSPECTION RELEASE (also see 970086-S150)

MODULE FABRICATION
1.
Module preparation for shipping
2.
Preparation of ship loose BOM
3.
Crating and packing of ship loose items
4.
Final overall punch out clearance inspection
5.
Resolution of all Punch Lists
6.
Final Documentation
7.
Final sign off of Inspection Test Plan
8.
Final Inspection Release Acceptance
9.
Module lifting for loading
10. Module loading on to transport

11. Digital photo documentation
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
970086- S150
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
970086- R060
970086- R060
970086- R060
970086- R060
970086- R060
970086- R060
970086- R060
970086- R060
970086- R060
970086- R060
970086- R060

date,
and
sign
the
approved ITP
Project
UOP Equitec
Pemex
Revamp
Minatitlan
CCR
Document No.
Location Mexico
INSTRUMENTATION
Module Fabrication
1.
Inspection and test plan approval
2.
Pre-Instrumentation Installation Meeting
3.
Tube fitting check
4.
Instrument functional testing and report
5.
Correctly installed tagged items check
6.
Final visual and punch out inspection
7.
Final inspection and test records
Sheet
Reference
documents
Acceptance criteria
UOP
(Also see 970086-S150)

Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
970086- R601F
970086- R601F
970086- R601F
SW
970086- R601F
970086- R601F
970086- R601F
970086- R601F
Level of Inspection
PEMEX
970086- U601F
1/1
Revision
Notes
UOP Equitec
Project
Pemex
Revamp
Location
Mexico
Minatitlan
CCR
Document No.
Sheet
Reference
documents
Acceptance criteria
UOP
Level of Inspection
PEMEX
970086- U700
1/1
Revision
Notes
ELECTRICAL
Module Fabrication
1.
Inspection and test plan review
2.
Cable tray installation instructions review
3.
Cable gland manufacturer instructions review
4.
Calibration records for electrical equipment review
5.
Electrical apparatus vendor catalog cut sheets review
6.
Pre- Electrical Installation Meeting
7.
Motor megger test and report
8.
Cable spool megger test and report
9.
Instrument wiring continuity test and report
See 970086- S150
11. Final visual and punch out inspection
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
12. Inspection and test plan record review
See 970086- S150
10. Lighting energizatioin test and report
970086- R701F
970086- R701F
970086- R701F
970086- R701F
970086- R701F
970086- R701F
970086- R701F
970086- R701F
970086- R701F
970086- R701F
970086- R701F
970086- R701F

date, and sign the approved
ITP
UOP Equitec
Project
Pemex
Revamp
Location
Mexico
Minatitlan
CCR
Document No.
Sheet
Reference
documents
Acceptance criteria
UOP
Level of Inspection
PEMEX
970086- U801F
1/7
Revision
Notes
PIPING FABRICATION- GENERAL (see additional requirements and 970086-S150)

1.
Inspection and test plan approval
2.
WPS & PQR and weld matrix approval
3.
Manufacturing procedures approval
4.
Pre-inspection Meeting
5.
WPQ (Welder performance Qualification)
6.
Material test reports, marking & properties check
7.
Weld consumables test reports review
8.
Piping material inspection
9.
Filler metal selection and control
10. Verify flange face finish and protection check

11. Final inspection and test plan record review
Code &
Specification
Code &
Specification
Code &
Specification
Meeting Agenda
Code &
Specification
Code &
Specification
Code &
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
SW
970086 R801F
Verify completed ITP by the

supplier
UOP Equitec
Project
Pemex
Revamp
Location
Mexico
Minatitlan
CCR
Sheet
Reference
documents
1.
Material markings for traceability before cutting
2.
Purge practice for stainless and alloy welds
3.
Weld profile visual, material check, and dimensional of each spool
4.
Weld smoothness orifice flange internal welds
5.
Verify nondestructive examination per requirement for each pipe class
6.
Ferrite test
7.
PMI alloy material and welds check
8.
Pipe support installation check
9.
Hydrotest water < 50 ppm Chloride content check
11. Surface preparation check before painting

12. Atmospheric conditions check before painting
13. Final painting inspection
14. Final spooling test reports
Acceptance criteria
UOP
Level of Inspection
PEMEX
970086- U801F
2/7
Revision
Notes
Also see Piping Fabrication General and Line Class requirement
PIPING SPOOL FABRICATION- SPECIFIC
10. Pressure testing of completed spools
Document No.
(for stainless steel)

(for alloy material)
(for stainless steel)
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Isometric drawing,
Line list
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
970086 R801F
SW, R
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
SW, R
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
SW, R
970086 R801F
SW, R
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
Verify all requirements

completed before pressure
test
UOP Equitec
Project
Pemex
Revamp
Location
Mexico
Minatitlan
PIPING INSTALLATION - SPECIFIC

1.
Pipe spool cleanliness and flange finish before installation
2.
In-progress inspection per B31.3 for closure welds made in the module
3.
100% RT of closure welds made to join spools in the module
4.
Valve installation for each pipe class and orientation per drawing
5.
Expansion joint installation and flow direction check
6.
Spring cans and hanger installation and correct load setting check
7.
Trial fit of ship loose piping check
8.
Dimensional Battery Limit Connections check
9.
Final installation punch out inspection
10. Service gaskets and bolting installation check for each pipe class
11. Final installation test records
CCR
Document No.
Sheet
Reference
documents
Acceptance criteria
UOP
Level of Inspection
PEMEX
Also see Piping Fabrication General and Line Class requirement

Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
SW, R
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086- U801F
3/7
Revision
Notes
UOP Equitec
Project
Pemex
Revamp
Location
Mexico
Minatitlan
CCR
Document No.
Sheet
Reference
documents
Acceptance criteria
UOP
970086- U801F
4/7
Level of Inspection
PEMEX
Process Pipe Classes B1A1 & B2A1

Process with Hydrogen (carbon steel)
1.
Follow Piping & Pipe Spooling fabrication and installation sections
970086 R801F
Process Pipe Class M1A1 - Corrosive Process (316 SS)

1.
Process Pipe Class PR3 - Catalyst (carbon steel)
970086 R801F
Additional Requirements (also see Piping & Pipe Spooling fabrication and installation sections)
1.
Inside of all pipe welds ground smooth to match ID of pipe
Pipe class
970086 R801F
2.
Installation of tapor bore flanges as indicated on UOP P & ID and isometric

drawings
UOP P&ID,
Isometric drawing
970086 R801F
Process Pipe Class PR5 Process Chlorination Gas (carbon

steel)
1.
Process Pipe Class PR6 - Catalyst Lift Line with Hydrogen

(carbon steel)
970086 R801F
1.
Pipe class
970086 R801F
2.

drawings
UOP P&ID,
Isometric drawing
970086 R801F
Process Pipe Class PR8 General Process (carbon steel)

1.
970086 R801F
Revision
Notes
UOP Equitec
Project
Pemex
Revamp
Location
Mexico
Minatitlan
CCR
Process Pipe Class PR17 - Catalyst Lift Line (1-1/4 Cr, Mo)
Document No.
Sheet
Reference
documents
Acceptance criteria
UOP
Pipe class
970086 R801F
2.

drawings
UOP P&ID, Isometric

drawing
970086 R801F
3.
Check MTR for tensile strength not to exceed 100, 000 psi.
Pipe class
970086 R801F
4.
Check fillet welds to pressure parts ground to a smooth, concave contour
Pipe class
970086 R801F
5.
Check PWHT of all welds regardless of thickness
Pipe class
970086 R801F
1.
All 316 base and weld material must have 0.04% minimum carbon content
5/7
Level of Inspection
PEMEX
1.
Process Pipe Class PR36 - Process- Regeneration Gas (316H)
970086- U801F
Pipe class
970086 R801F
Revision
Notes
UOP Equitec
Project
Pemex
Revamp
Location
Mexico
Minatitlan
CCR
Document No.
Sheet
Reference
documents
Acceptance criteria
UOP
Utility Pipe Classes MS-11 & MS-12

Stream, Condensate, and Boiler Feed Water (buttwelded)
1.
970086 R801F
Utility Pipe Class MS-1

Refinery Air and Water (buttwelded)
1.

Refinery Air and Water (screwed)
1.
Verify materials as specified
2.
Verify valves and bolting as specified
3.
Hydro leak test

Instrument Air Lines and Potable Water (screwed)
1.
Verify galvanized materials (inside and outside) as specified
2.
Verify no Teflon tape is used
3.
Verify valves and bolting as specified
4.
Pneumatic leak test

Steel tubing (1 inch OD and smaller)
970086 R801F
Drawing,
Specification
Drawing,
Specification
Drawing,
Specification
Drawing,
Specification
Drawing,
Specification
Drawing,
Specification
Drawing,
Specification
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
SW
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
SW
1.
Specification
970086 R801F
2.
Verify compression fittings by same brand and per approved list
Specification
970086 R801F

Steam Tracing (tubing)
1.
Specification
970086 R801F
2.
Verify compression fittings by same brand and per approved list
Specification
970086 R801F
Level of Inspection
PEMEX
970086- U801F
6/7
Revision
Notes
UOP Equitec
Project
Pemex
Revamp
Location
Mexico
Minatitlan
CCR
Document No.
Sheet
Reference
documents
Acceptance criteria
UOP
MANUAL VALVES (Inspection at Module Fabricator)

1.
Receiving inspection
2.
PMI pressure parts (316H, Inconel, Incoloy etc.)
3.
Tagging of each valve with proper valve code designation
4.
Documentation
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
970086 R801F
SW, R
970086 R801F
970086 R801F
SW, R
970086 R801F
Level of Inspection
PEMEX
970086- U801F
7/7
Revision
Notes
UOP Equitec
Project
Pemex
Revamp
Location
Mexico
Minatitlan
CCR
Document No.
Sheet
Reference
documents
Acceptance
criteria
UOP
Level of Inspection
PEMEX
970086- U901F
1/5
Revision
Notes
STRUCTURAL STEEL - GENERAL (see additional requirements and 970086-S150)

MODULE FABRICATION
1.
Inspection & Test Plan approval
2.
WPS & PQR and weld matrix approval
3.
Manufacturing procedures approval
4.
Pre-inspection Meeting
5.
WPQ (Welder performance Qualification)
6.
Material test reports, marking & properties check
7.
Plate lamination check by UT (as specified)
8.
Structural material inspection
9.
Weld consumables test reports review
10. Material markings for traceability check before cutting

11. Seal welding and venting check for galvanized structure
12. Weld slag and sharp edge removal check
13. Surface preparation check before painting
14. Atmospheric conditions check before painting
15. Final painting inspection
17. Final fabrication test records
Code &
Specification
Code &
Specification
Code &
Specification
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
Meeting Agenda
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
SW
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
SW
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
SW, R
970086 R901F
SW, R
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
Code &
Specification
Code &
Specification
Code &
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing &
Specification
Drawing &
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Documentation Data
Sheet
Supplier must complete, date,

and sign the approved ITP
UOP Equitec
Project
Pemex
Revamp
Location
Mexico
Minatitlan
CCR
Document No.
Sheet
Reference
documents
Acceptance
criteria
UOP
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
Level of Inspection
PEMEX
Structural Bolting
Perform random inspection of three bolts per box and documentation per box
(criteria below) before unpackaging contents or accepting the bolts:
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing &
Specification
Drawing &
Specification
Drawing &
Specification
1.
MTR lot number referenced correctly to bolt box packing slip
2.
MTR review for compliance to industry specification
3.
Bolt manufacturer marking and coating check
4.
Bolt type, size, material grade check
5.
Determine and track number of A325 bolts to send to UOP for testing
Specification
970086 R901F
6.
Bolt tightening mock-up for each connection type
Specification
970086 R901F
Built-Up Shapes (if specified by UOP Structural Drawing)

1.
Carbon equivalent maximum check for plate (as specified)
2.
Permanent material traceability of each plate by hard stamping (before

cutting)
3.
Preheat prior to thermal cutting (as specified)
4.
Inspect thermal cut edges for 2 mm radius
5.
PT examine cut edges for plate (as specified)
6.
PT examine completed welds (as specified)
7.
Weld profile visual inspection all built up members
8.
Cross section and length dimensional of all built up members
Column Splice (if specified by UOP Structural Drawing)

1.
Weld access hole acceptability before welding
2.
100% of columns 2 thick flange or greater, weld access holes ground to

bright metal and PT tested to AWS D1.1
Additional Requirements (Also see general requirement above.)

Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
SW
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
SW, R
970086 R901F
970086 R901F

Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086- U901F
2/5
Revision
Notes
UOP Equitec
Project
Pemex
Revamp
Location
Mexico
Minatitlan
CCR
3.
Cleanliness of weld bevel preparation (removal of paint or galvanizing)
4.
Groove joint fitup check (bevel, root face, root gap) before welding
5.
Column length and straightness dimensional before welding
6.
Material marks and traceability before welding
7.
Column alignment support before and during welding
8.
Weld profile visual inspection after completed welding
9.
100% RT or UT examination after completed welding
10. Column straightness check after completed welding
Column Fabrication
1.
Weld access hole acceptability before welding
2.
100% of columns 2 thick flange or greater, weld access holes ground to

bright metal and PT tested to AWS D1.1
3.
Cleanliness of weld bevel preparation (removal of paint or galvanizing)
4.
Column base and cap weld joint fitup check (bevel, root face, root gap) before
welding
5.
Length and straightness with base chair and column cap fitup before welding
6.
Material marks and traceability before welding
7.
Base chair distortion control support before and during welding
8.
Base plate to column weld sequence
9.
Dimensional layout and fitup of clips before welding
10. Bolt hole layout check before drilling

11. Weld profile visual inspection after completed welding
12. 100% UT of CJP between column and base plate
Document No.
Sheet
Reference
documents
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Acceptance
criteria
UOP
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
Level of Inspection
PEMEX

Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
970086 R901F
SW
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086- U901F
3/5
Revision
Notes
UOP Equitec
Project
Pemex
Revamp
Location
Mexico
Minatitlan
CCR
13. 100% UT of CJP between column and column cap

14. 100% UT of lifting lug welds
Final dimensional (straightness, length, clips and holes location) after
15. completed welding
Document No.
Sheet
Reference
documents
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Acceptance
criteria
UOP
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
Level of Inspection
PEMEX
Column Panel Fabrication
1.
Layout of column ends to reference line, parallel dimension, and level before
welding and/or bolting
2.
Panel cross members fitup per connection details
3.
Weld profile visual inspection per connection detail after completed welding
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
4.
5.
Bolt size, grade, number, tightness check per connection detail after
completed bolting
Final dimensional (straight, flat, and square) after completed welding and/or
bolting
Deck Panel Fabrication

1.
Layout of deck perimeter to correct dimension before welding and/or bolting
2.
Deck cross members fitup and connection details
3.
Weld profile visual inspection per connection detail after completed welding
4.
Dimensional check for equipment mounting bolt hole pattern
5.
Trial fitup of assembled deck before galvanizing
6.
Bolt size, grade, number, tightness per connection detail after completed
bolting
7.
Final dimensional (flat and square) after completed welding and/or bolting
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F

Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
SW
970086 R901F
970086 R060
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
Module Structural Assembly
1.
Plumbness, level, and elevation check of each installed deck to bottom

column panel
2.
Weld profile visual inspection of deck panel to column panel connections
3.
Weld profile visual inspection of diagonal support connections
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086- U901F
4/5
Revision
Notes
UOP Equitec
Project
Pemex
Revamp
Location
Mexico
Minatitlan
CCR
4.
Bolt size, grade, number, tightness per connection detail after completed
bolting
5.
Dimensional inspection of structure prior to equipment installation
6.
Dimensional inspection of structure after top panel installation
7.
Anchor bolt template trial fit of Modules A and D as built base dimensions
8.
Recheck on regular basis, plumbness and level of modules during erection
9.
Check length of actual bolt for each module-to-module connection (site

installed bolts)
10. Dimensional inspection of structure prior to disassembly for shipping
Document No.
Sheet
Reference
documents
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Acceptance
criteria
UOP
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
970086 R901F
Level of Inspection
PEMEX
970086- U901F
5/5
Revision
Notes
UOP Equitec
Project
Pemex
Revamp
Location
Mexico
Minatitlan
CCR
INSULATION
1.
Subcontractor procedure review
2.
Inspection and test plan review
3.
Preinspection Meeting
Document No.
Sheet
Reference
documents
Acceptance criteria
UOP
(also see 970086-S150)

Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
970086- R907F
970086- R907F
970086- R907F
970086- R907F
970086- R907F
SW
970086- R907F
970086- R907F
970086- R907F
970086- R907F
970086- R907F
970086- R907F
970086- R907F
SW
970086- R907F
SW
970086- R907F
SW
970086- R907F
Material
4.
Insulation material compliance check to project requirements and condition

check
5.
Insulation material storage check for preservation until needed
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Surface Preparation
7.
Process equipment or piping insulation supports installed and inspected (as

specified)
Process equipment or piping under insulation, painted and inspected (as
specified)
8.
Process equipment or piping surfaces clean and dry prior to installing insulation
6.
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Installation - Insulation
9.
Mechanical completion signoff document obtained before start of work
10. Heat tracing completion signoff document obtained before start of work
11. Installed insulation protected from weather during installation
12. Insulation fitup, number of layers, and number of securing points correct
13. Vapor barrier and joint sealing completed as specified
14. Expansion joints and/or springs installed as specified
15. Extent of insulation complete as specified
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Level of Inspection
PEMEX
970086- U907F
1/2
Revision
Notes
UOP Equitec
Project
Pemex
Revamp
Location
Mexico
Minatitlan
CCR
Document No.
Sheet
Reference
documents
Acceptance criteria
UOP
Level of Inspection
PEMEX
970086- U907F
2/2
Revision
Notes
Installation - Weatherproofing
24. Inspection port plugs installed per locations (as specified)
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
Drawing, Procedure,
Specification
970086- S150
16. Weatherproof jacketing material grade, type, and thickness check

17. Metal jacket overlap direction check (for horizontal and vertical position)
18. Securement of weatherproofing correct as specified
19. Installation of flashing, metal gores, S-clips, and expansion springs as specified
20. Terminations and joints are sealed and caulked as specified
21. Space allowance for bolt removal at flange connections as specified
22. Removable and reusuable covers are properly made and installed
23. Installation of flange weathershields (as specified)
970086- R907F
970086- R907F
970086- R907F
970086- R907F
970086- R907F
970086- R907F
970086- R907F
970086- R907F
970086- R907F
970086- R907F
Supplier must complete, date,

and sign the approved ITP
2013-01-18

Fabrication
Proposal
Page 1 of 1
UOPM V060-0

b
Review
Final

Ten copies of operating and maintenance manuals shall be provided.
DISTRIBUTION
RECORD
Final-Received from Vendor

c
Final-Due from Vendor
Review-Returned to Vendor
Review-Received from Vendor
c
Review-Due from Vendor
DESCRIPTION
2F
1.
Execution Plan
2F
2.
Schedule
2F
3.
Fabrication plan
4.
Reports
5.
Damage report for components received
6.
Progress report and curves
7.
Inspection Forecast
8.
Inspection/Test Reports
9.
Spare Parts
10.
Manufacturer's parts list, equipment information
11.
Manufacturer's spare parts recommendation (priced), with descriptive maintenance

instructions
12.
Purchasing
13.
Requisition
14.
Purchase Orders
15.
Requisition Indexes
16.
Purchase Order Index
17.
Drawings and Specifications
18.
Drawings, data sheets, specifications, and bills of material
19.
Vendor's drawings, data sheets, specifications, and equipment operating and maintenance
instructions
20.
Drawing index
21.
Miscellaneous
22.
Master Shipping List (including electronic)
23.
Module loading procedure
24.
Final Completion Data
25.
Final as-built drawings
26.
Electronic copy of final drawings and calculations
27.
Photographs of inside of junction boxes, power distribution panels, and control panels
28.
Site Construction Package
29.
Nomenclature:
S - number of weeks prior to Mechanical Completion.
F - number of weeks after Letter of Intent.
D - number of weeks after receipt of Approved Drawings.
X to be provided
c Vendor shall complete these two columns to reflect his actual distribution schedule and include this form with his proposal.
PROGRESSSET
Date
12264-01-f50-250411-001
Equipment Name
Location / Area
Quantity
P&ID (PFD)
Number
Stream / Fluid
Design
Pres.
kg/cm^2
Operating Temp.
deg. C
Rev. A
Rev. Date: 01/17/2013
90%Review
Operating
Manufacturer /
Pres. kg/cm^2
Supplier
Model Number
Type
By:JDS Chk: SDA Aprv: WLJ
Electrical Requirements
Weight (lbs)
Dimensions
mm (in)
(W x H x D)
M.O.C.
Rev. Description: PRELIMINARY ISSUED FOR REVIEW
Equipment Requirements
Design Temp.
deg. C
60%Review
Process Data
Equip. No.
30%Review
Rev.
Preliminary
PRELIMINARY
Disposition (Reuse
Existing / Modify
Exist. / New
Discipline Mechanical
By S. Arnold
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LIST

UOP, LLC (PEMEX)
PEMEX CCR REVAMP
JOB NUMBER: 970086
DOCUMENT NO.: 12264-01-F50-250411- 001
01/17/2012
Empty
Full
Remarks
API
Plan
Driver
HP
VOLTS
Phase
Cycles
AMPS
(Feed)
VFD (Y/N)
BH-500
REGENERATION HEATER
Existing CCR
Purchase New
(970086-D107)
Process Gas
648
0.35 / FV
Outlet: 483
Inlet: 450
0.09364
CCI
1397 x 2870 x
915
Shell: Inconel 600
4290
--
--
480
60
Design:
123 KW
BH-501
CHLORINATION HEATER
Existing CCR
Existing - Unchanged
(970086-D106)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
BH-502
AIR HEATER
Existing CCR
Purchase New
(970086-D107)
Process Gas
677
0.35 / FV
571
0.2838
CCI
3810 x 1778 x
318
Shell: 304SS
2090
--
--
480
60
Design:
44 KW
EA-515
REGENERATION COOLER
Existing CCR
Modify & Reuse
(970086-D108)
Hot Side: Regen Gas

Hot Side: 565
Cold Side:
Cold Side: 477
Atmospheric Air
Hot / Cold
0.21
Hot Side: 512 Inlet Hot Side: 1.05

521 Outlet Cold
Cold Side:
Side: 46
1.11
A&S
Design Only
16" OD inner
pipe, 24" OD
jacket x 18.8 m
OAL
Shell: Killed
Carbon Steel
Tube: Alloy 600
2150
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
EA-516
LIFT GAS BLOWER

SPILLBACK COOLER
Grade
Purchase New
(970086-D111)
Shell: Nitrogen
Tube: Cooling Water
Shell: 180
Tube: 120
Shell: 7.0
Tube: 8.5
Shell: 148 Inlet 38

Shell: 0.9843
Outlet Tube: 32
Tube: 5.0
Inlet 46 Outlet
Peerless Alco
TEMA
Multitube
2870 x 1075 x
458
Shell: Killed
Carbon Steel
Tube: Killed
Carbon Steel
2500
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
EA-520
VENT GAS COOLER
New CCR
Purchase New
(970086-D109)
Shell: Atmospheric Air

Tube: Vent Gas
Shell: 455
Tube: 565
Shell: 0.21
Tube: 0.45
Shell: 66 Inlet 367

Shell: 0.0232
Outlet Tube: 478
Tube: 0.0246
Inlet 138 Outlet
Peerless Alco
TEMA Shell
& Tube
4852 x 410 OD
Shell: Killed
Carbon Steel
Tube: 316 SS
2500
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
EA-521
PREHEAT GAS HEATER
New CCR
Purchase New
(970086-D109)
Shell: Nitrogen
Tube: HP Steam
Shell: 185
Tube: 375
Shell: 0.45
Tube: 34.0
Shell: 11 Inlet 156

Outlet Tube: 345
Inlet 234 Outlet
Shell: 0.07
Tube: 29.5
Peerless Alco
TEMA
Multitube
1950 x 625 x 350
Shell: Killed
Carbon Steel
Tube: Killed
Carbon Steel
1350
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FA-510
REGENERATION TOWER
Existing CCR
Modify & Reuse
(970086-D107)
Catalyst
565
Upper: 0.35
Lower: 0.70
550
ATM
Vertical
1370 ID x 5210
TL
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FA-511
LOCK HOPPER NO. 1
Existing Reactor
(970086-D105)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FA-512
LIFT ENGAGER NO. 1
Existing Reactor
Purchase New
(970086-D105)
260
3.5
93
GCAW
Vertical
1070 TL x 610
OD
Killed Carbon
Steel
750
810
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FA-513
DISENGAGING HOPPER
New CCR
Purchase New
(970086-D108)
Catalyst
425
0.35
150
GCAW
Vertical
4588 TL x 1500
ID
Killed Carbon
Steel
12000
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FA-514
FLOW CONTROL HOPPER
Existing CCR
(970086-D110)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FA-515
SURGE HOPPER
Existing CCR
Modify & Reuse
(970086-D110)
343
0.7
66
Vertical
2950 TL x 1900
ID
Killed Carbon
Steel
10500
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FA-516
LOCK HOPPER NO. 2
Existing CCR
(970086-D110)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FA-517
LIFT ENGAGER NO. 2
Existing CCR
Purchase New
(970086-D110)
260
35.2
38
GCAW
Vertical
1070 TL x 610
OD
Killed Carbon
Steel
1000
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FA-518
CATALYST ADDITION
FUNNEL
Existing CCR
(970086-D110)
--
--
--
--
--
Alfa Laval
Packinox
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FA-519
CATALYST ADDITION
LOCK HOPPER
Existing CCR
(970086-D110)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FA-520
VENT DRUM NO. 1
Existing CCR
(970086-D110)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FA-521
VENT DRUM NO. 2
Existing CCR
(970086-D110)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FA-522
VENT DRUM NO. 3
Existing Reactor
(970086-D105)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FA-523
VENT DRUM NO. 4
Existing Reactor
(970086-D105)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FA-527
CATALYST COLLECTOR
Existing Reactor
(970086-D105)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FD-500
RECYCLE GAS PURGE TO

REACTOR NO.
Existing CCR
(970086-D104)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FD-501
NITROGEN PURGE TO
CHLORIDE INJECTION
LINE
Existing CCR
(970086-D106)
Nitrogen
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
UOP, LLC (PEMEX)

PEMEX CCR REVAMP
Three (3) Bundles in Series
Equipped with Hoist and Drum Tilter
Page 1 of 2
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LIST

UOP, LLC (PEMEX)
PEMEX CCR REVAMP
JOB NUMBER: 970086
DOCUMENT NO.: 12264-01-F50-250411- 001
Rev. A
PRELIMINARY
Rev. Date: 01/17/2013

By:JDS Chk: SDA Aprv: WLJ
Process Data
Rev.
Equip. No.
Equipment Name
Location / Area
Quantity
Disposition (Reuse
Existing / Modify
Exist. / New
P&ID (PFD)
Number
Stream / Fluid
Electrical Requirements
Equipment Requirements
Design Temp.
deg. C
Design
Pres.
kg/cm^2
Operating Temp.
deg. C
Operating
Manufacturer /
Pres. kg/cm^2
Supplier
Model Number
Type
Weight (lbs)
Dimensions
mm (in)
(W x H x D)
M.O.C.
Empty
Full
Remarks
API
Plan
Driver
HP
VOLTS
Phase
Cycles
AMPS
(Feed)
VFD (Y/N)
FD-502
ORGANIC CHLORIDE
INJECTION PUMP
SUCTION FILTER
Grade
(970086-D106)
Perchloroethylene
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FD-503
NITROGEN PURGE TO
VENT DRUM NO. 1 & 2
Existing CCR
(970086-D110)
Verify
Nitrogen
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FD-504
NITROGEN PURGE TO
SURGE HOPPER
Existing CCR
(970086-D110)
Verify
Nitrogen
--
--
--
--
Dresser-Rand
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FD-507
BOOSTER GAS PURGE TO

REACTOR NO.
Existing CCR
(970086-D104)
--
--
--
--
--
Byron Jackson
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
GA-513 A/B
ORGANIC CHLORIDE
INJECTION PUMPS
Existing CCR
Purchase New
(970086-D106)
Perchloroethylene
20 Max
Discharge
Press= 3.515
max.
Pulsar
25 HJ
API 675
Controlled
Volume
316 SS
70
--
GB-503
LIFT GAS BLOWER
Grade
Purchase New
(970086-D111)
Spent Catalyst
Inlet: 38
Outlet: TBD
Inlet: 1.03
Discharge:
1.82
Sundyne
LMC-311P
(42" wide x 72"

OAH)
1510
--
GB-504
CHLORINATION BLOWER
Grade
(970086-D106)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
GB-505
REGENERATION BLOWER
Grade
Purchase New
(970086-D108)
Suction: 463
Suction:
134 mm H2O
Illinois Blower
AMCA
2200 W x 3869 L
x 2301 H
Inconel 600
7300
--
Est.
KW: 73
Need Electrical Data
GB-506
REGENERATION COOLER
FAN
Grade
Purchase New
(970086-D108)
Suction: 40
Suction:
-58.7 mm H2O
Illinois Blower
AMCA
1124 W x 3171 L
x 2553 H
Inconel 600
5070
--
Est.
KW: 264
GB-507 A/B
INSTRUMENT AIR
COMPRESSOR PACKAGE
Grade
Purchase New
(970086-D108)
Air
98% R.H. @ 40oC
Suction temp = 40
Discharge
Pressure= 8.53
Ingersoll Rand
Oil-Free
Rotary
120" x 76" x 80"

48" dia. X 120"
TL Receiver
78.5" x 48" x 80"
Drier
Cast Iron / Steel
15360
--
Est.
KW: 200
Includes Aftercooler and Filter

ME-500
RECYCLE GAS
COALESCER
Existing CCR /
Grade
(970086-D-104)
--
--
--
--
--
Byron Jackson
2x3x10.5 HSJ
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
ME-501
ORGANIC CHLORIDE
DRUM - CONSERVATION
VENT
(970086-D106)
--
--
--
--
--
United
Centrifugal
6x12 DVSHF
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
ME-502
AIR DRIER PACKAGE
New CCR
Purchase New
(970086-D108)
Air
121
10.54
Pneumatic
Products
Desiccant
1400 W x 2000 L
x 2800 H
Carbon Steel
--
ME-503
DUST COLLECTOR
New CCR
Purchase New
(970086-D111)
Nitrogen Gas and

Alumina Dust
120
0.253
38
0.051
Mikropul
ASME
Sec VIII
Div. 1
Killed Carbon
Steel
--
ME-504
BOOSTER GAS
COALESCER
Existing CCR
Purchase New
(970086-D112)
Booster Gas
120
Internal: 35.2
External:
o
FV@38 C
37.8
Inlet Pressure:
29.32
Facet
AGS-1C-D-123-198
Cartridge
10 3/4" OD x 45"
OAH
Killed Carbon
Steel
520
--
R01
REACTOR
Existing Reactor
Modify & Reuse
(970086-D105)
Internal: 543
External: 482
Internal:
16.17
External:
1.05
Shell: SA387,GR.
11 GR.22
Nozzles: SA182
GR.11, GR. 22
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Notes:
Legend: ''--" Not Applicable, X - Information Required - Later, Est - Estimated Value
12264-01-f50-250411-001
UOP, LLC (PEMEX)

PEMEX CCR REVAMP
Page 2 of 2
UOP 970086
Equipment Outline Drawings
Shell weight = 1200 kg

Bundle weight (incl. terminal box) = 800 kg
Total weight = 2000 kg
Shell weight = 350x3 = 1050 kg

Bundle weight (incl. terminal box) = 260x3 = 780 kg
Vessel weight = 600 kg

Catalyst weight = 210 kg
Vessel weight = 600 kg

Weight of vessel (including internals) = 6500 kg

Weight of catalyst = 3700 kg
Total weight = 10,200 kg
Weight (incl. internals and catalyst = 10,500 kg
Lift Gas Blower Spillback Cooler
Vent Gas Cooler
Preheat Gas Heater
PROJECT SPECIFICATION
-
410
SHEET
REV
DATE
BY
APVD
4-May-10
VGS
SAV
REV
DATE
5
BY
APVD
REGENERATION COOLER
REV
ITEM NO:
EA-515
2
3
TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT
HOT SIDE IN
4
5
6
Weight = 2150 kg
7
8
9
16'' OD PIPE
10
11
M.R.mm
402
12
13
14
356
MIN.mm
14'' DIA COLDSIDE OUTLET
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
17.3 m
953469
UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines, Illinois 60017-5017 USA
EXPANSION
JOINT(S)
25
26
27
28
14'' DIA COLD

SIDE INLET
29
30
31
2.5" (65 mm)
32
33
34
35
MIN.mm
356
24'' OD JACKET
36
37
M.R.mm
402
38
39
40
NPS 1 LOWPOINT
DRAIN
41
42
43
44
HOT SIDE OUT
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
410-0.1
TZ-410-02-0.1
UOP LCC
U713045-1-2
4500288716
10/08/08
25HJ
S/N-1/2:B123051A/B
ESE
Organic Chloride Injection Pumps
Pemex Preliminary Drawing

Weight (including motor) = 70 kg
713045
Lift Gas Blower
PEMEX
Preliminary Drawings
Lift Gas Blower
Lift Gas Blower
Lift Gas Blower
Lift Gas Blower
Lift Gas Blower
Lift Gas Blower
Regen Blower
8
3869 APPROXIMATE
152.33
F
L
O
W
1029
40.50
BLOWER DISCHARGE
16" ANSI 150#
1035
40.75
522
20.53
CL
MOTOR: 444TS FRAME

3600 RPM,
COUPLING:
5" SPACER
1035
40.75
BEARING ASSEMBLY,
PDN 2-BEARING UNIT
CL
D
SHAFT SEAL
CARBON RING
WITH N2 PURGE
SPACER
127
5.00
527
20.76
REMOVAL OF
PLUG UNIT
1216
47.86
ATI
OT
R
CL
EXPANSION JOINT
CASING ACCESS PORT
ON
COOLING WHEEL,
ALUMINUM
BLOWER INLET
16" ANSI 150#
INSULATION (TYP)
152
6.00
FLOW
CL
CL
CL
BACK PULLOUT
PLUG UNIT
2301
90.61
1086
42.75
254
10.00
CL
13
.50
BLOWER SUB-BASE
CL
CONCRETE FILL
OF BASE BY OTHERS
2200 APPROXIMATE
86.61
684
26.92
NOTE: DRAWING IS A PRELIMINARY OUTLINE;

IT IS NOT TO BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION PUPOSES.
2200
86.61
1997
78.61
ADVANCED COPY
Not for Manufacturing or Design Basis.
This Drawing is preliminary and subject
to revision and or correction without
notification. It is provided for reference
review only. Updated copies will not be
provided unless requested. Do NOT use
for manufacturing.
934
36.75
684
26.92
3524
138.75
PERFORMANCE
C.F.M. SP (in H2O)
Weight (incl. base and motor) = 7300 kg
RPM
BHP
OPER.
TEMP
DESIGN
TEMP.
DENSITY
ELEV.
- F
- F
---
BLOWER PERFORMANCE (METRIC EQUIVALENT)
UOP Spec 953469, PEMEX Minatitlan CCR Revamp- IBI Quote Q03135 Rev --
m3/hr
mm H2O
RPM
KW
OPER.
TEMP
- C
DESIGN
TEMP.
- C
kg/m3
ELEV.
---
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS MATERIAL AND/OR

INFORMATION WHICH IS THE PROPERTY OF
ILLINOIS BLOWER INC. AND SUPPLIED ONLY ON
A COFIDENTIAL BASIS. NO TRANSMITTAL OR
DISCLOSURE SHALL BE MADE TO ANY PERSON,
FIRM OR CORPORATION WITHOUT THE PRIOR
WRITTEN APPROVAL OF ILLINOIS BLOWER INC.
illinois blower, inc.
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

TOLERANCE UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
FRACTIONAL_______ 1/16
DECIMAL_______ .01
ANGULAR_______ 0-30' (.5)
750 Industrial Drive, Cary, Illinois 60013
CUSTOMER
PURCHASER TO PROVIDE OPENINGS IN

BUILDINGS OR STRUCTURES OF SUFFICIENT
SIZE TO PERMIT ENTRANCE OF ALL EQUIPMENT
AND/OR PARTS AS SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING.
CAUTION
PRIOR TO ERECTION AND

START-UP, CONSULT SERVICE
MANUAL FOR INSTRUCTIONS
AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.
CUSTOMER P.O.
UOP-PEMEX (PROJ: 953469)

DRAWN
HTB
IBI SERIAL NUMBER
TITLE
ITEM: GB-505
APPR'D
DATE
SCALE
SIZE
09/24/10
NONE
G.A. - BLOWER - REGENERATION

CW-UB, SW,100%, GAS-TIGHT
BACK PULLOUT DESIGN-CL SUPPORTED
DRAWING NUMBER
D SK-100924-1
SHEET 1 OF 1
Page 14 of 53
03/23/2012
Cooler Blower
8
3171
124.86
.05
1117
43.99
F
L
O
W
Pemex Preliminary
Drawing
235
9.26
BLOWER DISCHARGE
14" ANSI 150# DRILL PATTERN
CL
13
.50
CL
SPACER
127
5.00
FLOW
759
29.87
EXPANSION JOINT
BEARING ASSEMBLY,
PDN 2-BEARING UNIT
MOTOR: 444TS FRAME

3600 RPM,
INLET SILENCER/
RAINHOOD
COUPLING:
5" SPACER
2553
100.50
ATI
OT
R
ON
CASING ACCESS PORT

2667
105.00
CL
C
C
BLOWER BASE
1029
40.50
CL
13
.50
1124
44.25
2054
80.87
CONCRETE FILL
OF BASE BY OTHERS
3032
119.35
1015
39.98
NOTE: DRAWING IS A PRELIMINARY OUTLINE;

IT IS NOT TO BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION PUPOSES.
1124
44.25
ADVANCED COPY
Not for Manufacturing or Design Basis.
This Drawing is preliminary and subject
to revision and or correction without
notification. It is provided for reference
review only. Updated copies will not be
provided unless requested. Do NOT use
for manufacturing.
200
7.88
2254
88.75
Blower weight (incl. base and motor) = 4520 lb

Inlet silencer weight = 550 lb
Total weight = 5070 lb
8
UOP Spec 953469, PEMEX Minatitlan CCR Revamp- IBI Quote Q03135 Rev --
PERFORMANCE
C.F.M. SP (in H2O)
-
RPM
BHP
OPER.
TEMP
DESIGN
TEMP.
DENSITY
ELEV.
- F
- F
---
BLOWER PERFORMANCE (METRIC EQUIVALENT)
m3/hr
mm H2O
RPM
KW
OPER.
TEMP
- C
DESIGN
TEMP.
- C
kg/m3
ELEV.
---
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS MATERIAL AND/OR

INFORMATION WHICH IS THE PROPERTY OF
ILLINOIS BLOWER INC. AND SUPPLIED ONLY ON
A COFIDENTIAL BASIS. NO TRANSMITTAL OR
DISCLOSURE SHALL BE MADE TO ANY PERSON,
FIRM OR CORPORATION WITHOUT THE PRIOR
WRITTEN APPROVAL OF ILLINOIS BLOWER INC.
illinois blower, inc.
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

TOLERANCE UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
FRACTIONAL_______ 1/16
DECIMAL_______ .01
ANGULAR_______ 0-30' (.5)
750 Industrial Drive, Cary, Illinois 60013
CUSTOMER
PURCHASER TO PROVIDE OPENINGS IN

BUILDINGS OR STRUCTURES OF SUFFICIENT
SIZE TO PERMIT ENTRANCE OF ALL EQUIPMENT
AND/OR PARTS AS SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING.
CAUTION
PRIOR TO ERECTION AND

START-UP, CONSULT SERVICE
MANUAL FOR INSTRUCTIONS
AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.
CUSTOMER P.O.
UOP-PEMEX (PROJ: 953469)

DRAWN
HTB
IBI SERIAL NUMBER
TITLE
ITEM: GB-506
APPR'D
DATE
SCALE
09/24/10
SIZE
G.A. - COOLER BLOWER

CW-UB, SW,100%,
DRAWING NUMBER
D SK-100924-2
NONE
SHEET 1 OF 1
Page 29 of 53
03/23/2012
Instrument
Air Compressor
Also add the following
equipment: Package
Standard vertical receiver tank - 660 gallon/200 psi
-Compressor
- Weight:
2380 lb, Diameter: 48", TL: 120"
-Air
Receiver
5RWDU\6FUHZ$LU&RPSUHVVRU
+36LHUUD2LO)UHH

Also add the following equipment:

,PDJHIRUUHIHUHQFHRQO\
Standard vertical
receiver tank - 660
gallon/200 psi
-Weight: 2380 lb, Diamter: 48", TL: 120"
3URGXFW'HVFULSWLRQ
7HFKQLFDO,QIRUPDWLRQ
&DSDFLW\
x FIP#SVLJ
/
x FIP#SVLJ
+
x FIP#SVLJ
++
0D[LPXP2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH
x SVLJ/
x SVLJ+
x SVLJ++
:HLJKWOEV
&RQQHFWLRQ6L]H$16,)ODQJH
'LPHQVLRQV/[:[+
x [[$LUFRROHG
x [[
:DWHUFRROHG
6RXQG/HYHO
x G%$$LUFRROHG
x G%$ :DWHUFRROHG
7KH 6LHUUD RLOIUHH PRGHOV FRPELQH WKH WHFKQRORJLHV RI WKH ,QWHOOLV\V 6* &RQWUROOHU SUHPLXP
FRPSRQHQWV KLJK DPELHQW UDWHG FRROHUV DQG WKH SDWHQWHG 8OWUD&RDW ERQGLQJ SURFHVV WR SURYLGH D
GXUDEOHUHOLDEOHDQGHQHUJ\HIILFLHQWFRPSUHVVRU
7KHVH GHVLJQ HOHPHQWV SURYLGH WKH FXVWRPHU ZLWK ,62 &ODVV 2 DLU TXDOLW\ FRQWLQXRXV RSHUDWLRQ
UHGXFHGPDLQWHQDQFHFRVWVDQGHQHUJ\HIILFLHQWFRQWUROV7KHVHYDOXHVHQVXUHWKDWWKHFXVWRPHUKDV
VXLWDEOHDLUTXDOLW\DQGTXDQWLW\WRHIILFLHQWO\PDQDJHKLVSURGXFWLRQ
,QJHUVROO 5DQG JXDUDQWHHV WKDW WKH 6LHUUD RLOIUHH FRPSUHVVRU ZLOO PDLQWDLQ LWV YROXPH IORZ UDWH DQG
VSHFLILF HQHUJ\ ZLWKLQ LQLWLDO PDFKLQH DFFHSWDQFH WROHUDQFH IRU D SHULRG RI PRQWKV DIWHU GDWH RQ
LQVWDOODWLRQ
.H\)HDWXUHV %HQHILWV
x,62&ODVV2$LU4XDOLW\
x8OWUD&RRODQW
x,QWHOOLV\V&RQWUROOHU
x8OWUD&RDW5RWRU3URWHFWDQW
x6RXQG$WWHQXDWHG(QFORVXUH
x)$PELHQW5DWHG
.H\2SWLRQV$YDLODEOH

x3RZHU2XWDJH5HVWDUW2SWLRQ
x/RZ$PELHQW0RGLILFDWLRQ
x1HPD(OHFWULFV
x'XSOH[2LO)LOWHU
x2XWGRRU0RGLILFDWLRQ
x3KDVH0RQLWRU
x+LJK'XVW)LOWHU
x6WDLQOHVV6WHHO2LO3LSLQJ
9LVLWWKH,QJHUVROO5DQGZHEVLWHIRUIXUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQKWWSZZZLQJHUVROOUDQGSURGXFWVFRP
Instrument Air Compressor Package

-Instrument Air Drier
([WHUQDOO\+HDWHG'HVLFFDQW'U\HU
(+

7HFKQLFDO,QIRUPDWLRQ
&DSDFLW\VFIP
'HZ3RLQW)
0D[LPXP2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUHSVLJ
:HLJKWOEV
&RQQHFWLRQ6L]H137
'HVLFFDQWZHLJKWSHUYHVVHOOEV
'LPHQVLRQV:['[+
[[

$GGLWLRQDO(QJLQHHULQJ'DWDDYDLODEOHXSRQUHTXHVW
,PDJHIRUUHIHUHQFHRQO\
3URGXFW'HVFULSWLRQ
7KH(++HDWHG'HVLFFDQW'U\HUVSURYLGHFRQVWDQW)&SUHVVXUHGHZSRLQWRSWLRQDO)
& WR HQVXUH WKDW FOHDQ GU\ DLU LV GHOLYHUHG WR WKH FXVWRPHUV SRLQW RI XVDJH 7KHVH GU\HUV
LQFRUSRUDWHKLJKWHPSHUDWXUHQRQOXEULFDWHGVZLWFKLQJYDOYHVDQGDVROLGVWDWHUHOD\KHDWHUFRQWUROWR
H[WHQGYDOYHDQGKHDWHUHOHPHQWOLIH$GLJLWDOFRQWUROOHUDQG1(0$HOHFWULFVFRPSOHWHWKHSUHPLXP
FKDUDFWHULVWLFVRIWKHVHGU\HUV

%\ XVLQJ KHDWLQJ HOHPHQWV WR UHJHQHUDWH WKH GHVLFFDQW EHGV (+ +HDWHG 'U\HUV ZLWK DSSURSULDWH SUH
DQG DIWHUILOWHUV UHPRYH FRQWDPLQDQWV WKDW FRXOG VSRLO WKH FXVWRPHUV SURGXFW RU PDQXIDFWXULQJ
SURFHVVHV 7KH (+ PRGHOV FRQVHUYH WKH FRPSUHVVHG DLU HQHUJ\ UHTXLUHG WR SURYLGH SXUJH DLU LQ D
KHDWOHVV GU\HU 7KH VZLWFKLQJ YDOYHV DQG HOHFWULFDO GHVLJQ SURYLGH LQFUHDVHG UHOLDELOLW\ DQG UHGXFHG
PDLQWHQDQFHZKLOHDIIRUGLQJVDIHDQGVLPSOHRSHUDWLRQ
.H\)HDWXUHV %HQHILWV
x
x
x
3UHILOWHUDQG$IWHUILOWHU
+LJK3HUIRUPDQFH9DOYHV
0LFUR3URFHVVRU&RQWUROOHU
x
x
x
02'%86&RPSDWLEOH
66'HVLFFDQW6FUHHQV
/RZ3URILOH'HVLJQ
.H\2SWLRQV$YDLODEOH
x
x
(QHUJ\0DQDJHPHQW6\VWHP(06
9DOYH%\SDVV

9LVLWWKH,QJHUVROO5DQGZHEVLWHIRUIXUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQKWWSZZZLQJHUVROOUDQGSURGXFWVFRP
Process Air Drier

(separate from instrument air drier for air compressor package)
Weight (including internals) = 1300 lb
563 Commonwealth Dr Ste 600 East Dundee, IL 60118 (630) 629-9440 FAX (630) 620-6383
QUOTATION
TOLL FREE
WITHIN ILLINOIS (800) 325 -8505 OUTSIDE ILLINOIS
(800) 544-6643
QUOTATION NUMBER
10968
PLEASE REFER TO THIS

NUMBER WHEN PLACING ORDER
TO:
UOP
25 E. Algonquin Rd
Des Plaines, IL 60017
ATTENTION:
DATE:
09/24/2010
REFERENCE NO:
PEMEX CCR Revamp
ESTIMATED SHIPMENT ___AFTER RECEIPT

OF YOUR ORDER, AND/OR APPROVED DRAWINGS
F.O.B.
Mr. Mark Wagner
Becker & Associates, Inc appreciates your inquiry and is pleased to offer the following budgetary
proposal for your consideration:
Item Number 1: {Based on the process design criteria}.
Process Conditions:
Fluid: Booster Gas
Flow Rate: 339 kg/hr
Operating Pressure: 417 PSIG
Operating Temperature: 100 F
Effluent Quality:
Effluent Contaminant Level: Solid Particulates and water removed <10 PPM
To satisfy the above design criteria, we propose:
One (1) Facet AGS-1C-D-123-198 Multi Stage Air/Gas Vertical Coalescer Separator
consisting of a 10 OD x 45 Overall Height Vertical, ASME Pressure Vessel (500 PSIG
MAWP @ 250 F) with the following equipment:
A). Components:
1. Blind flange top closure head.
2. Through bolt closure with spiral wound gasket.
3. Inline Inlet and Outlet Connections: 1 1/2 300# RF Flanges.
4. Structural angle legs.
5. Lifting Lugs.
B). Filtration/Coalescing Media
1. (1) CC-23-7 Coalescer Cartridge
2. (1) CS-98-2 Separator Cartridge
C). Internal ferrous surfaces blast cleaned to commercial grade SSPC-6 and coated per UOP
specification.
D). External ferrous surfaces blast cleaned to near-white grade SSPC SP-6 and coated per UOP
specification.
Selling Price, FOB Factory Complete
Estimated Total Shipping Weight
$21,650.00 USD Ea.

520 lbs Ea.
Notes:
1. Approval drawings will be submitted 1 - 2 weeks after receipt of purchase order;
shipment would be 14 - 16 weeks after receipt of final approved drawings with release to
manufacture.
2. Electronic copies of the Operation & Maintenance Manuals will be provided for each unit.
Three hard copies will be provided upon request. Additional copies may be purchased for
$25.00 each.
3. BECKER & ASSOCIATES standard TERMS AND CONDITIONS apply.
4. Freight is not included in the above pricing.
5. Filtration media is installed in the vessel.
6. Any options purchased will be installed by FACET.
7. Pricing is valid for thirty (30) days.
BECKER AND ASSOCIATES, INC
By:
Douglas Kerkman
Douglas Kerkman
Unless otherwise specified, the prices and terms quoted apply to this proposal only and are subject to the acceptance of the purchaser within a period of THIRTY (30) days from the date
hereof unless stated to the contrary, except that BECKER AND ASSOCIATES, INC. shall have the right to withdraw its proposal a t any time before formal acceptance by the purchaser.
Terms - Net 20 Days unless otherwise noted.
SERVICE, MATERI AL AND EQUIPMENT FOR PROCESS AND INDUSTRY
UNIT
CLIENT
15
UOP
REV.
DATE
INITIALS
REV.
DATE
INITIALS
REV.
DATE
INITIALS
REV.
DATE
INITIALS
2013-01-14
TPG
2012-12-07
TPG
2012-11-09
TPG
2012-10-19
TPG
REFERENCIA:
LINE LIST
REAL. POR
APROB. POR
970086-T801EL
Page
of 5
REVISION: 3
DATE: 2013-01-14
LINE LIST
Minatitlan
CCR PLATFORMING
970086_T801EL-3

Piping Line Index
Rev
Date
By
2012-10-19
TPG
2012-11-08
TPG
2
3
2012-12-07
2013-01-14
TPG
TPG
Page 2 of 6
970086_T801EL-3
Description
LINE NUMBER INFORMATION
UOP MFD
TRACING
NEW OR
SIZE
FLUID
NEW LINE
PIPE
MATL
INS.
INS.
TEMP
CODE
THK.
(C)
FROM
MODIFIED?
(NPS)
CODE
NO.
CLASS
MODIFIED
1 1/2
AE
L103R
MS-1
A106B
KCS
NI
TP-22
COOLING WATER SUPPLY
EA-516
LGB SPILLBACK COOLER
D111
MODIFIED
AE
L105R
MS-1
A106B
KCS
NI
TP-114
COOLING WATER SUPPLY
SURGE HOPPER COOLER
MODIFIED
1 1/2
AI
L103R
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
RE-L268N-PR8-3"
NEW
AI
L261N
MS-1
A106B
KCS
NI
NEW
AI
L262N
MS-2
A106
GALV
NEW
AI
L263N
MS-2
MODIFIED
1 1/2
AP
L102R
NEW
1 1/2
AP
MODIFIED
1 1/2
MODIFIED
TO
PIPING FLUID DESIGN

AND STRESS ANALYSIS
NDE
REQUIREMENT
LEAK TEST
PAINTING INFORMATION
PRESS.
TEMP.
PRESS.
TEMP.
STRESS
PRESS.
TEST
INSP.
PAINT
TOP COAT
(C )
(kg/cm^2(g))
(C )
(kg/cm^2(g))
(C )
System
(kg/cm^2(g))
CODE
NO.
CLASS
SYSTEM
COLOR
D111
46
5.00
120
8.50
74
12.75
02
GREEN
(PMS 573C)
D110
D110
46
2.80
120
8.50
74
12.75
02
GREEN
(PMS 573C)
REGENERATION BLOWER
D108
D108
148
0.03
180
0.35
176
0.53
17
BLUE (PMS
622C)
ATM
GB-507A/B
INSTRUMENT AIR
COMPRESSOR PACKAGE
D108
D108
40
0.00
68
1.75
68
1.93
02
BLUE (PMS
622C)
NI
AI-L263N-MS2-2"
TP-46
D108
D108
40
6.00
68
8.00
68
8.80
02
BLUE (PMS
622C)
A106
GALV
NI
GB-507A/B
INSTRUMENT AIR
COMPRESSOR
ME-502
AIR DRYER
D108
D108
40
6.00
68
8.00
68
8.80
02
BLUE (PMS
622C)
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
AI-L601-PR8-1 1/2"
TP-112
(TO CHLORINATION
BLOWER)
D108
D108
40
5.65
68
8.00
68
12.00
02
BLUE (PMS
622C)
L264N
MS-2
A106
GALV
NI
ME-502
AIR DRYER
AI-L601R-PR8-1 1/2"
D108
D108
40
5.65
68
8.00
68
12.00
02
BLUE (PMS
622C)
AP
L601R
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
AI-L264N-MS2-1 1/2"
BH-502
AIR HEATER
D108
D107
40
5.65 / 0.2838
68
8.00
68
12.00
02
BLUE (PMS
622C)
AP
L602R
PR-24
A312
TP304H
HC
BH-502
AIR HEATER
TP-59
FA-510
REGENERATION TOWER
D107
D107
571
0.18
677
0.35
599
2.24
III
NONE
MODIFIED
1 1/2
AR
L103R
MS-1
A106B
KCS
NI
EA-516
LGB SPILLBACK COOLER
TP-21
D111
D111
46
5.00
120
8.50
74
12.75
02
MODIFIED
AR
L105R
MS-1
A106B
KCS
NI
SURGE HOPPER COOLER
TP-6
D110
D110
46
2.80
120
8.50
74
12.75
02
MODIFIED
AR
L107R
MS-1
A106B
KCS
38
AR-L105R-MS1-2"
(TP-6)
PSV-2256
D110
D110
46
2.80
120
8.50
74
12.75
02
MODIFIED
3/4
CL
L502R
M1A1
A312 316
SS
NI
CL-L516R-M1A1-3/4"
ORGANIC CHLORIDE
INJECTION PUMP
(GA-513A)
D106
D106
35
ATM
63
1.75
63
2.63
III
NONE
MODIFIED
1/4
CL
L503R
MS-7
A269 316
SS TUBING
NI
CL-L513R
TP-123
D106
D106
35
3.52
63
5.27
63
7.91
NONE
MODIFIED
CL
L504R
M1A1
A312 316
SS
NI
CL-L502R-M1A1-3/4"
D106
D106
35
ATM
63
1.75
63
2.63
III
NONE
MODIFIED
1/4
CL
L513R
M1A1
A312 316
SS
NI
CL-L503R-MS7-1/4"
D106
D106
35
3.52
63
5.27
63
7.91
III
NONE
MODIFIED
1/4
CL
L514R
MS-7
A269 316
SS TUBING
NI
TP-122
TP-35
D106
D106
35
3.52
63
5.27
63
7.91
NONE
MODIFIED
3/4
CL
L515R
M1A1
A312 316
SS
NI
ORGANIC CHLORIDE
INJECTION PUMP
(GA-513B)
CL-L514R
D106
D106
35
3.52
63
5.27
63
7.91
III
NONE
MODIFIED
3/4
CL
L516R
M1A1
A312 316
SS
NI
TP-34
ORGANIC CHLORIDE
INJECTION PUMP
(GA-513B)
D106
D106
35
ATM
63
1.75
63
2.63
III
NONE
PSV-2253B
(ORGANIC CHLORIDE
INJECTION PUMP B)
CL-L516R-M1A1-3/4"
D106
D106
35
ATM
63
1.75
63
2.63
III
NONE
PSV-2253A
(ORGANIC CHLORIDE
INJECTION PUMP A)
ORGANIC CHLORIDE
INJECTION PUMPS
(GA-513A)
TO
DESIGN
TEMP.
152
FROM
OPERATING
REMARKS
MODIFIED
CL
L517R
M1A1
A312 316
SS
NI
MODIFIED
3/4
CM
L102R
MS-11
A106B
KCS
NI
LM-L103R-MS12-3/4"
OPEN DRAIN
D105
D105
60
5.00
88
6.75
88
10.13
02
MODIFIED
3/4
CM
L104R
MS-11
A106B
KCS
NI
XCV-XXX
OPEN DRAIN
D112
D112
60
5.00
88
6.75
88
10.13
02
NEW
CM
L278N
MS-11
A106B
KCS
NI
LCV-1001
OPEN DRAIN
D109
D109
60
5.00
88
6.75
88
10.13
02
Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.
WHITE
w/VIOLET
(PMS265C)
WHITE
w/VIOLET
(PMS265C)
WHITE
w/VIOLET
(PMS265C)
GREEN
(PMS 573C)
w/ ORANGE
GREEN
(PMS 573C)
w/ ORANGE
GREEN
(PMS 573C)
w/ ORANGE
970086_T801EL-3

Piping Line Index
NEW OR
SIZE
FLUID
NEW LINE
PIPE
MODIFIED?
(NPS)
CODE
NO.
CLASS
UOP MFD
TRACING
MATL
INS.
INS.
TEMP
CODE
THK.
(C)
FROM
TO
FROM
Page 3 of 6
970086_T801EL-3
OPERATING
TO
DESIGN
PIPING FLUID DESIGN

AND STRESS ANALYSIS
NDE
REQUIREMENT
LEAK TEST
TEMP.
PRESS.
TEMP.
PRESS.
TEMP.
STRESS
PRESS.
TEST
INSP.
PAINT
TOP COAT
(C )
(kg/cm^2(g))
(C )
(kg/cm^2(g))
(C )
System
(kg/cm^2(g))
CODE
NO.
CLASS
REMARKS
SYSTEM
COLOR
WHITE
w/YELLOW
and VIOLET
WHITE
w/YELLOW
and VIOLET
WHITE
w/YELLOW
and VIOLET
WHITE
w/YELLOW
and VIOLET
WHITE
w/YELLOW
and VIOLET
WHITE
w/VIOLET
(PMS265C)
NI
PSV-2252
(LOCK HOPPER NO.1)
RELIEF HEADER
D105
D113
38
0.20
66
3.50
66
5.25
02
MODIFIED
DA
L401R
PR-8
A106B
KCS
MODIFIED
DA
L402R
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
PSV-2251
(RECYCLE GAS COALESCER)
RELIEF HEADER
D104
D113
38
0.20
66
LATER
66
0.00
02
MODIFIED
DA
L701R
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
PSV-2258
RELIEF HEADER
D110
D113
38
0.20
204
5.27
66
7.94
02
MODIFIED
DA
L703R
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
PSV-2257
RELIEF HEADER
D110
D113
35
0.20
204
5.27
63
7.94
02
MODIFIED
DA
L801R
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
PSV-2259
(BOOSTER GAS COALESCER)
RELIEF HEADER
D112
D113
35
0.20
204
5.27
63
7.94
02
MODIFIED
DAA
L270N
MS-1
A106B
KCS
NI
PSV-2256
ATMOSPHERE
(SAFE LOCATION)
D110
D110
40
ATM
68
1.75
68
NA
02
NEW
DAA
L273N
MS-11
A106B
KCS
PP
VB-L272-MS11-3/4"
CONDENSATE DRAIN /
COLLECTION SYSTEM
D109
D109
100
ATM
128
1.75
128
NA
MODIFIED
GI
L115R
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
TP-96
GI-L100-PR8-2"
CCR NITROGEN HEADER
RE-L506R-PR8-6
D113
D111
38
7.00
66
10.50
66
15.75
02
MODIFIED
GI
L116R
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
GI-L100-PR8-2"
CCR NITROGEN HEADER
ME-503
DUST COLLECTOR
D111
D111
38
7.00
66
10.50
66
15.75
02
MODIFIED
3/4
GI
L118R
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
MODIFIED
GI
L128R
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
NEW
3/4
GI
L254N
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
NEW
3/4
GI
L255N
MS-7
A269 316
SS TUBING
NEW
3/4
GI
L256N
MS-7
NEW
GI
L257N
NEW
GI
NEW
3/4
NEW
GUARD
PP Insulation if above ground
TP-23
GI-L100-PR8-2"
CCR NITROGEN HEADER
TP-110
GI-L100-PR8-2"
CCR NITROGEN HEADER
TP-58
GI-L100-PR8-2"
CCR NITROGEN HEADER
GB-503
LIFT GAS BLOWER
D113
D111
38
7.00
66
10.50
66
15.75
02
GB-505
REGENERATION BLOWER
D113
D108
38
7.00
66
10.50
66
15.75
02
FIF 1008 & FIF 1009
D107
D107
38
7.00
66
10.50
66
15.75
02
NI
GI-L254N-PR8-3/4"
GI-L257N-PR5-3/4"
D107
D107
38
7.00
66
10.50
66
15.75
Line Deleted
NONE
A269 316
SS TUBING
NI
GI-L255N-MS7-3/4"
GI-L258N-PR5-3/4"
D107
D107
38
7.00
66
10.50
66
15.75
Line Deleted
NONE
PR-5
INCONEL
B168
NI
FIF 1009
D107
D107
38
7.00
66
10.50
66
15.75
III
NONE
L258N
PR-5
INCONEL
B168
NI
FIF 1008
D107
D107
38
7.00
66
10.50
66
15.75
III
NONE
GI
L274N
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
FI-1013
D113
D109
38
7.00
66
10.50
66
15.75
02
3/4
GI
L275N
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
FI-1012
D113
D109
38
7.00
66
10.50
66
15.75
02
NEW
3/4
GI
L279N
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
FIF-1010
D113
D108
38
7.00
66
10.50
66
15.75
02
NEW
3/4
GI
L280N
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
FIF-1011
D113
D108
38
7.00
66
10.50
66
15.75
02
NEW
3/4
RE
L251N
B2A2
A106B
KCS
38
38
TP-76
PDT-1006 LOW
D104
D104
38
LATER
LATER
LATER
66
0.00
02
NEW
3/4
RE
L252N
B2A2
A106B
KCS
38
38
TP-18
PDT-1006 HIGH
D104
D110
38
29.32
66
35.20
66
52.80
02
NEW
RE
L253N
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
RE-L803RPR8-2"
FA-512
LIFT ENGAGER #1
D105
D105
38
0.77
180
7.00
66
10.53
02
D108
D109
66
0.13
94
1.88
94
2.82
02
TP-57
FA-510
REGENERATION TOWER
TP-56
FA-510
REGENERATION TOWER
TP-40
GI-L100-PR8-2"
CCR NITROGEN HEADER
TP-39
GI-L100-PR8-2"
CCR NITROGEN HEADER
TP-37
GI-L100-PR8-2"
CCR NITROGEN HEADER
TP-38
GI-L100-PR8-2"
CCR NITROGEN HEADER
NEW
10
RE
L259N
B1A1
A106B
KCS
NI
RE-L606R-B1A1-14"
EA-520
VENT GAS COOLER
(SHELL)
NEW
RE
L260N
PR-36
A312 316H
SS
NI
TP-67
(EA-515
REGENERATION COOLER)
EA-520
VENT GAS COOLER (TUBE)
D108
D109
469
1.05
565
0.21
497
0.42
III
NONE
NEW
RE
L265N
PR-36
A312 316H
SS
EA-520
VENT GAS COOLER (TUBE)
FA-513
DISENGAGING HOPPER
D109
D108
138
0.012
565
0.45
166
0.89
III
NONE
76
138
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
970086_T801EL-3

Piping Line Index
NEW OR
SIZE
FLUID
NEW LINE
PIPE
MODIFIED?
(NPS)
CODE
NO.
CLASS
UOP MFD
TRACING
MATL
INS.
INS.
TEMP
CODE
THK.
(C)
FROM
TO
FROM
Page 4 of 6
970086_T801EL-3
OPERATING
TO
DESIGN
PIPING FLUID DESIGN

AND STRESS ANALYSIS
NDE
REQUIREMENT
LEAK TEST
TEMP.
PRESS.
TEMP.
PRESS.
TEMP.
STRESS
PRESS.
TEST
INSP.
PAINT
TOP COAT
(C )
(kg/cm^2(g))
(C )
(kg/cm^2(g))
(C )
System
(kg/cm^2(g))
CODE
NO.
CLASS
REMARKS
SYSTEM
COLOR
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
EA-521
PREHEAT GAS HEATER
FA-513
DISENGAGING HOPPER
D109
D108
156
0.057
185
0.45
184
0.68
17
RE-L802R-PR8-6"
FA-513
DISENGAGING HOPPER
D111
D108
148
0.03
180
0.35
176
0.53
17
TP-19
FA-517
LIFT ENGAGER #2
D110
D110
38
29.32
120
35.20
66
52.80
02
NEW
RE
L267N
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NEW
RE
L268N
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
NEW
RE
L271N
B2A1
A106B
KCS
HC
NEW
RE
L283N
PR-5
INCONEL
B168
HC
TP-124
PDT-X HIGH (HOLD)
D108
D108
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
NEW
RE
L284N
PR-5
INCONEL
B168
HC
GB-505
REGENERATION BLOWER
PDT-X HIGH (HOLD)
D108
D108
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
NEW
RE
L285N
PR-5
INCONEL
B168
HC
TP-125
PDT-X LOW (HOLD)
D108
D108
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
MODIFIED
RE
L403
PR-1
A335 P11
1 1/4Cr1/2Mo
PP
TP-89
FA-511
D105
D105
310
12.60
LATER
LATER
MODIFIED
RE
L408R
PR-4
A106B
KCS
NI
FA-512
LIFT ENGAGER #1
FA-513
DISENGAGING HOPPER
D105
D108
93
0.79
260
3.50
121
5.53
02
MODIFIED
RE
L412R
PR-23
A106B
KCS
38
38
ME-500
RECYCLE GAS COMPRESSOR
RE-L414
D104
D105
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
MODIFIED
RE
L421R
B2A2
A106B
KCS
38
38
TP-98
PSV-2251
(RECYCLE GAS COALESCER)
D104
D104
38
13.50
121
16.90
66
25.35
02
MODIFIED
RE
L422R
PR-23
A106B
KCS
HC
51
TP-74
PSV-2252
(LOCK HOPPER NO. 1)
D105
D105
38
12.44
371
16.90
66
30.36
III
02
MODIFIED
1 1/2
RE
L425R
PR-10
A335 P11
1 1/4Cr1/2Mo
38
TP-86
ME-500
RECYCLE GAS COALESCER
REACTOR
D105
D105
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
28
0.00
II
MODIFIED
16
RE
L502R
PR-5
INCONEL
B168
HC
178
TP-36
CHLORINATION BLOWER
BH-501
CHLORINATION HEATER
D106
D106
LATER
LATER
LATER
LATER
MODIFIED
RE
L506R
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
FA-513
DISENGAGING HOPPER
ME-503
DUST COLLECTOR
D108
D111
150
0.03
425
0.35
178
0.91
17
MODIFIED
RE
L509R
PR-8
A106B
KCS
FA-513
DISENGAGING HOPPER
PSV-2254
D108
D108
150
0.03
425
0.35
178
0.91
17
MODIFIED
RE
L510R
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
PSV-2254
ATMOSPHERE
(SAFE LOCATION)
D108
D108
38
ATM
66
2.03
66
NA
02
MODIFIED
RE
L512R
PR-36
A312 316H
SS
64
138
FA-513
DISENGAGING HOPPER
D108
D107
150
0.03
425
0.35
178
0.66
III
NONE
MODIFIED
RE
L513R
PR-36
A312 316H
SS
64
138
FA-513
DISENGAGING HOPPER
D108
D107
150
0.03
425
0.35
178
0.66
III
NONE
MODIFIED
RE
L514R
PR-36
A312 316H
SS
64
138
FA-513
DISENGAGING HOPPER
D108
D107
150
0.03
425
0.35
178
0.66
III
NONE
MODIFIED
RE
L515R
PR-36
A312 316H
SS
64
138
FA-513
DISENGAGING HOPPER
D108
D107
150
0.03
425
0.35
178
0.66
III
NONE
MODIFIED
RE
L516R
PR-36
A312 316H
SS
64
138
FA-513
DISENGAGING HOPPER
D108
D107
150
0.03
425
0.35
178
0.66
III
NONE
MODIFIED
RE
L517R
PR-36
A312 316H
SS
64
138
FA-513
DISENGAGING HOPPER
D108
D107
150
0.03
425
0.35
178
0.66
III
NONE
MODIFIED
24
RE
L603R
PR-5
INCONEL
B168
HC
203
D107
D107
483
0.08
565
0.35
511
5.25
MODIFIED
14
RE
L606R
B1A1
A106B
KCS
NI
MODIFIED
14
RE
L607R
B1A1
A106B
KCS
PP
MODIFIED
RE
L710R
PR-6
A106B
KCS
NI
HC
89
51
64
LATER
38
38
BH-500
REGENERATION HEATER
TP-51
FA-510
REGENERATION TOWER
TP-52
FA-510
REGENERATION TOWER
TP-53
FA-510
REGENERATION TOWER
TP-48
FA-510
REGENERATION TOWER
TP-49
FA-510
REGENERATION TOWER
TP-50
FA-510
REGENERATION TOWER
TP-47
FA-510
REGENERATION TOWER
III
GB-506
REGENERATION COOLER FAN
TP-64
D108
D108
40
0.13
68
1.88
68
NA
TP-66
EA-515
REGENERATION COOLER
ATMOSPHERE
(SAFE LOCATION)
D108
D108
LATER
0.09
371
0.21
28
NA
FA-517
LIFT ENGAGER #2
REACTOR
D110
D110
38
29.20
260
35.20
66
55.58
100% Radiograph All Welds Including

Longitudinal
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
NONE
02
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
02
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
970086_T801EL-3

Piping Line Index
NEW OR
SIZE
FLUID
NEW LINE
PIPE
MODIFIED?
(NPS)
CODE
NO.
CLASS
MODIFIED
4
HOLD
RE
L715R
MODIFIED
6
HOLD
RE
MODIFIED
MODIFIED
UOP MFD
TRACING
MATL
INS.
INS.
TEMP
CODE
THK.
(C)
FROM
PR-8
A106B
KCS
PP
GUARD
TP-5
(FA-515
SURGE HOPPER)
L716R
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI / PP
GUARD
PSV-2255
(SURGE HOPPER)
RE
L731R
B2A2
A106B
KCS
38
38
RE-L811R-PR23-1"
(TP-14)
RE
L733R
B2A2
A106B
KCS
38
38
MODIFIED
RE
L801R
PR-8
A106B
KCS
MODIFIED
RE
L802R
PR-8
MODIFIED
RE
L803R
MODIFIED
RE
MODIFIED
MODIFIED
TO
PSV-2255
(FA-515
SURGE HOPPER)
ATMOSPHERE (3000mm
ABOVE REGENERATION
STRUCTURE)
FROM
Page 5 of 6
970086_T801EL-3
OPERATING
TO
DESIGN
PIPING FLUID DESIGN

AND STRESS ANALYSIS
NDE
REQUIREMENT
LEAK TEST
TEMP.
PRESS.
TEMP.
PRESS.
TEMP.
STRESS
PRESS.
TEST
INSP.
PAINT
TOP COAT
(C )
(kg/cm^2(g))
(C )
(kg/cm^2(g))
(C )
System
(kg/cm^2(g))
CODE
NO.
CLASS
REMARKS
SYSTEM
COLOR
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
WHITE with
YELLOW
(PMS 803
D110
D110
66
0.00
343
0.70
94
1.21
02
D110
D110
AMB
ATM
177
0.25
28
NA
02
PSV-2258
(LIFT ENGAGER NO.2)
D110
D110
38
29.20
260
35.20
66
55.58
02
TP-12
PSV-2257
D110
D110
38
29.20
260
35.20
66
55.58
02
NI
ME-503
DUST COLLECTOR
TP-32
GB-503
LIFT GAS BLOWER
D111
D111
38
0.05
180
7.00
66
10.53
02
A106B
KCS
NI
GB-503
LIFT GAS BLOWER
EA-521
PREHEAT GAS HEATER
D111
D109
148
0.79
180
7.00
176
10.53
17
PR-8
A106B
KCS
PP
RE-L802R-PR8-6"
FA-512
LIFT ENGAGER #1
D111
D105
148
0.79
180
7.00
176
10.53
17
L806R
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
RE-L802R-PR8-6"
RE-L807R-PR8-3"
D111
D111
148
0.79
180
7.00
176
10.53
17
RE
L807R
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
RE-L806R-PR8-3"
RE-L801R-PR8-6"
D111
D111
38
0.05
180
7.00
66
10.53
02
RE
L808R
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
ME-503
DUST COLLECTOR
CATALYST DUST
COLLECTION DRUM
D111
D111
38
0.05
120
0.25
66
0.38
17
MODIFIED
RE
L810R
B2A2
A106B
KCS
NI
ME-504
BOOSTER GAS COALESCER

OUTLET LINE
D112
D104
38
29.32
120
35.20
66
52.80
02
MODIFIED
RE
L811R
B2A2
A106B
KCS
NI
TP-14
(BOOSTER GAS COALESCER)
FA-517
LIFT ENGAGER #2
D110
D110
38
29.32
120
35.20
66
52.80
02
MODIFIED
1 1/2
RE
L811R
B2A2
A106B
KCS
HC
ME-504
TP-28
(LIFT ENGAGER NO. 2)
D112
D112
38
29.32
120
35.20
66
52.80
02
RE-L811R-PR23-1 1/2"
PSV-2259
(BOOSTER GAS
COALESCER)
D112
D112
38
29.32
120
35.20
66
52.80
02
64
51
MODIFIED
RE
L813R
B2A2
A106B
KCS
HC
MODIFIED
1 1/2
RE
L815R
B2A2
A106B
KCS
NI
TP-33
BOOSTER GAS FROM
BOOSTER COMPRESSOR
ME-504
D112
D112
38
29.32
120
35.20
66
52.80
02
NEW
TRIM
L300N
PR-3
A106B
KCS
NI
FA-512
LIFT ENGAGER #1
FA-512
LIFT ENGAGER #1
D105
D105
93
0.79
260
3.50
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NEW
TRIM
L301N
PR-5
INCONEL
B168
GB-505
REGENERATION BLOWER
GB-505
REGENERATION BLOWER
D108
D108
469
1.05
565
0.21
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NEW
TRIM
L302N
PR-8
A106B
KCS
HC
FA-513
DISENGAGING HOPPER
FA-513
DISENGAGING HOPPER
D108
D108
150
LATER
425
0.35
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NEW
TRIM
L303N
MS-1
A106B
KCS
HC
FA-513
REGENERATION COOLER
FA-513
REGENERATION COOLER
D108
D108
40
0.13
149
0.21
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NEW
TRIM
L304N
PR-8
A106B
KCS
NI
ME-503
DUST COLLECTOR
ME-503
DUST COLLECTOR
D111
D111
38
0.05
120
0.25
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NEW
TRIM
L305N
B2A2
A106B
KCS
NI
ME-504
ME-504
D112
D112
38
29.32
120
35.20
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
MODIFIED
3/4
VA
L102R
MS-12
A106B
KCS
HC
89
HP STEAM HEADER
4" X 2500mm
STEAM JACKET
D113
D105
350
30.50
375
34.00
378
62.55
100% Radiographic Testing Required

Per GNT-SNP-T003-2003
15
METALLIC
GRAY
MODIFIED
3/4
VA
L103R
MS-12
A106B
KCS
PP
38
4" X 2500mm
STEAM JACKET
CT-L102R-MS11-3/4"
D105
D113
350
30.50
375
34.00
378
62.55

15
METALLIC
GRAY
MODIFIED
3/4
VA
L104R
MS-12
A106B
KCS
HC
89
TP-24
(HIGH PRESSURE STEAM
HEADER)
D112
D112
350
30.50
375
34.00
378
62.55

15
METALLIC
GRAY
NEW
VA
L276N
MS-12
A106B
KCS
HC
89
HP STEAM HEADER
D113
D109
350
30.50
375
34.00
378
62.55

15
METALLIC
GRAY
NEW
VA
L277N
MS-12
A106B
KCS
PP
38
EA-521
PREHEAT GAS HEATER
(TUBE)
D109
D113
350
30.50
375
34.00
378
62.55

15
METALLIC
GRAY
51
51
66

OUTLET LINE STEAM
JACKET
EA-521
PREHEAT GAS HEATER
(TUBE)
LCV-1001
970086_T801EL-3

Piping Line Index
NEW OR
SIZE
FLUID
NEW LINE
PIPE
MODIFIED?
(NPS)
CODE
NO.
CLASS
MATL
INS.
INS.
TEMP
CODE
THK.
(C)
NEW
3/4
VB
L272N
MS-11
A106B
KCS
NEW
VC
L266N
PR-8
A106B
KCS
76
NEW
10
VC
L269N
B2A1
A106B
KCS
PP
64
NEW
3/4
VC
L281N
B1A1
A106B
KCS
64
NEW
3/4
VC
L282N
B1A1
A106B
KCS
64
SERVICE CODES
AE = Cooling Water Supply
AI = Instrument Air
UOP MFD
TRACING
HC
76
FROM
TO
FROM
Page 6 of 6
970086_T801EL-3
OPERATING
TO
PIPING FLUID DESIGN

AND STRESS ANALYSIS
DESIGN
NDE
REQUIREMENT
LEAK TEST
TEMP.
PRESS.
TEMP.
PRESS.
TEMP.
STRESS
PRESS.
TEST
INSP.
(C )
(kg/cm^2(g))
(C )
(kg/cm^2(g))
(C )
System
(kg/cm^2(g))
CODE
NO.
CLASS
REMARKS
D109
156
3.90
181
4.40
184
6.62
FA-513
DISENGAGING HOPPER
ATM
D108
D109
138
ATM
166
1.75
166
NA
17
METALLIC
GRAY
EA-520
VENT GAS COOLER (SHELL)
ATM
D109
D109
367
0.02
395
0.21
395
NA
15
METALLIC
GRAY
138
RE-L265N-PR36-6"
ATM
D109
D109
138
ATM
166
1.75
166
NA
17
METALLIC
GRAY
138
RE-L266N-PR8-6"
ATM
D109
D109
138
ATM
166
1.75
166
NA
17
METALLIC
GRAY
138
INSULATION CODES
LEAK TEST CODES
Circ
Branch
Support
Fillet
Long.
HC = Heat Conservation
A = Alternative Leak Test (ASME B31.3, para 345.9) - Note 3
Visual
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
PP = Personnel Protection
B = Sensitive Leak Test (ASME B31.3, para 345.8)
Radiograph
10%
100%Socket-
100%
NI = No Insulation
F = Initial Service Leak Test (ASME B31.3, para 345.7)
Spot-
SJ = Steam Jacket
H = Hydrostatic Leak Test (ASME B31.3, para 345.4)
AR = Cooling Water Return
CL = Chloride
Mag.
Particle
Hardness
CT = Trichloroethane
PWHT
Not Required
CM = Medium Pressure Condensate

P number 4, All services UOP Class II
Circ
Branch
Support
Fillet
Long.
Visual
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
GC = Combustible Gas
Radiograph
100%
100%
100%Socket-
100%
RE = Process
Ultrasonic
Spot-
SP = Caustic
VA = Steam (High Pressure)
Mag.
Particle
Hardness
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
VB = Steam (Low Pressure)
PWHT
Not Required
VC = Contaminated Vent (Vent to Atmosphere)

P number 8, All services UOP Class III
Circ
Branch
Support
Fillet
Long.
Visual
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
Radiograph
10%
100%Socket-
100%
Spot-
100%
100%
100%
100%
Ultrasonic
Liq.
Penetrant
Ferrite
Testing
17
D113
Ultrasonic
GI = Utility Nitrogen
COLOR
METALLIC
GRAY
STEAM JACKET
AP = Process Air
DA = Relief
TOP COAT
LP STEAM HEADER
P number 1, All services UOP Class I
DAA = Oily Open Drain
PAINT
SYSTEM
Per UOP 8-12-8 Note 5
T = Traced
P = Pneumatic Leak Test (ASME B31.3, para 345.5)

V = Visual examination only
PIPING TIE-IN LIST

UOP
PEMEX
CLIENT PROJECT NO. 970086
Ambitech
REV.
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
TIE-IN
NUMBER
TP
01
TP
02
TP
03
TP
04
TP
05
TP
06
TP
07
TP
08
TP
09
TP
10
TP
11
TP
12
TP
13
TP
14
TP
15
TP
16
TP
17
TP
18
TP
19
TP
20
TP
21
TP
22
TP
23
PIPING
DRAWING
NUMBER
FLOW SHEET
ISOMETRIC
DRAWING
DRAWING NUMBER
NUMBER
970086-D110
970086-D110
970086-D110
FA-514
INLET/TRIM
RE-L701-PR-3
RE-L703-PR-2
970086-D110
970086-D110
970086-D110
970086-D110
AR-L105R-MS-1
RE-L702-PR-2
RE-L702-PR-2
RE-L703-PR-2
RE-L703-PR-2
DESCRIPTION OF TIE-IN
REPLACE XV-75
FA-510
REPLACE XV-76
RE-L701-PR-3-2"
RECONNECT EXIST PIPING
RE-L703-PR-2-3"
RE-L715R-PR-8-4"
970086-D110
REMARKS
NEW LINE NUMBER

-----------------------------EXISTING LINE NO.
970086-D110
CONNECTION FOR PSV-2255 FROM FA-515 SURGE

HOPPER
REPLACE PSV-2256 RETURN TO SURGE HOPPER
AR-L105R-MS-1-1"
REPLACE XV-42
RE-L702-PR-2-3"
REPLACE XV-43
RE-L702-PR-2-3"
REPLACE XV-53
RE-L703-PR-2-3"
REPLACE XV-56
RE-L703-PR-2-3"
970086-D110
REPLACE PSV-2257
RE-L733R-B2A2-1"
970086-D110
RE-L811R-B2A2
RE-L811R-B2A2-1" TIES INTO RE-L741-B2A2-1"

RE-L741-B2A2
970086-D110
REPLACE PSV-2258
970086-D110
970086-D110
970086-D110
970086-D110
RE-L811-B2A2
RE-L811-B2A2
RE-L811-B2A2
RE-L252N-B2A2
RE-L271N-B2A1
REPLACE FE-346
RE-L811-B2A2-1"
REPLACE FE-346
RE-L811-B2A2-1"
REPLACE FO-14
RE-L811-B2A2-1"
TO PDT-1006
RE-L252N-B2A2-3/4"
RE-L271N-B2A1-1"
RE-L811-B2A2-1"
970086-D111
TO FA-517 LIFT ENGAGER NO.2

FROM AT-388 TO CCR NITROGEN HEADER
970086-D111
970086-D113
AR-L103R-MS-1
AE-L103R-MS-1
GI-L118R-PR-8
AR-L103-MS-1-1 1/2"
AE-L103-MS-1-1 1/2"
LASER SCAN
PICTURE
DEMO
PACKAGE
NO.
TP1,3
31
TP1,3
32
TP5
30
TP6
33
TP7,9 115
35
TP7, 9,115
35
TP10,116
35
TP11
35
TP12,14,29
29
DEMO DRAWING
COOLING WATER RETURN FROM NEW EA-516 LIFT

GAS BLOWER SPILLBACK COOLER
COOLING WATER SUPPLY TO NEW EA-516 LIFT GAS
BLOWER SPILLBACK COOLER
NEW NITROGEN LINE TO GB-503 LIFT GAS BLOWER
CI-L118R-PR-8-3/4"
SCHEDULED
DATE
COMMODITY
1
34
TP15,16,17,19
28
TP15,16,17,19
28
TP15,16,17,19
28
PROGRESSSET
RX4
GI-L117-PR-8-3/4"
970086-D111
DECK
LEVEL
RE-L731-B2A2-1"
970086-D110
12264-01-F70-270414-001
Ambitech Project No.: 12264-01
Issue Date: 1-17-13
Revision: A
Date
TP15,16,17,19
TP21,22
GRADE
TP21,22
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
3
GRADE
01/17/2012
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
I:\UOP\12264-01_PEMEX_CCR_Revamp\Piping\Lists\TieInList REV 2 - 1-16-13.xls
SHEET 1 OF 6
PRINT DATE: 1/17/2013
PIPING TIE-IN LIST

UOP
PEMEX
Ambitech
REV.
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
TIE-IN
NUMBER
TP
24
TP
25
TP
26
TP
27
TP
28
TP
29
TP
30
TP
31
TP
32
TP
33
TP
34
TP
35
TP
36
TP
37
TP
38
TP
39
TP
40
TP
41
TP
42
TP
43
TP
44
TP
45
TP
46
PIPING
DRAWING
NUMBER
FLOW SHEET
ISOMETRIC
DRAWING
DRAWING NUMBER
NUMBER
970086-D112
970086-D112
FA-514
VA-L104R-MS-12
RE-L811R-B2A2
REMARKS
NEW LINE NUMBER

-----------------------------EXISTING LINE NO.
REPLACE
XV-75
TIE
INTO EXISTING
LINE VA-L104R-MS-12-3/4"
VA-L104R-MS-12-3/4"
RE-L811R-B2A2-1"
RE-L813-PR-23-1"
970086-D112
RE-L811R-B2A2-1" CONNECTING TO RE-L813-PR-23-1"

REPLACE PSV-2259
RE-L813R-B2A2-X"
970086-D108
970086-D112
970086-D112
970086-D112
AP-L601R-PR-8
RE-L811R-B2A2
RE-L810R-B2A2
RE-L815R-B2A2
REPLACE FE-380
AP-L601R-PR-8
REPLACE STEAM JACKET
RE-L811R-B2A2
REPLACE FO-24
RE-L810R-B2A2-1"
CONNECTION TO ME-504 BOOSTER GAS COALESCER
RE-L815R-B2A2-1 1/2"
970086-D106
TO GA-513A/B ORGANIC CHLORIDE INJECTION PUMPS

CL-L502-PR-8-3/4"
970086-D106
FROM FT-362
REPLACE FO-25
TO GB-505 REGEN BLOWER

AI-L103N-PR-8-1 1/2"
970086-D108
AP-L601R-PR-8
REPLACE FV-380
CONNECTION FROM NITROGEN HEADER
GI-L112-PR-8-1 1/2"
970086-D108
2" EXISTING DRY INSTRUMENT AIR

A1-L100-MS-2-2"
970086-D108
INSTRUMENT AIR TO DRY IA HEATER

AI-L101N-MS-2-2"
970086-D108
INSTRUMENT AIR FOR PLATFORMS AND CCR

A1-L262N-MS-2-X"
TP24,25,28,31 s.4
TP24, 25,28,31 s.3
TP12,14,19
TP30,42
TP24,25,28,31 s.2
15
TP32,33
13
TP32, 3
DEMO DRAWING
COMMODITY
SCHEDULED
DATE
15
14
GRADE
GRADE
5
AP-L601R-PR-8-1 1/2"
970086-D108
LASER SCAN
PICTURE
DEMO
PACKAGE
NO.
GRADE
RE-L502-PR-5-16"
970086-D108
DECK
LEVEL
CL-L514R-MS-7-1/4"
970086-D106
12264-01-F70-270414-001
Issue Date: 1-17-13
Revision: A
SHEET 2 OF 6
TP30,42
GRADE
GRADE
GRADE
GRADE
PIPING TIE-IN LIST

UOP
PEMEX
Ambitech
REV.
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
TIE-IN
NUMBER
TP
47
TP
48
TP
49
TP
50
TP
51
TP
52
TP
53
TP
54
TP
55
TP
56
TP
57
TP
58
TP
59
TP
60
TP
61
TP
62
TP
63
TP
64
TP
65
TP
66
TP
67
TP
68
TP
69
PIPING
DRAWING
NUMBER
FLOW SHEET
ISOMETRIC
DRAWING
DRAWING NUMBER
NUMBER
970086-D107
970086-D107
970086-D107
970086-D107
970086-D107
970086-D107
970086-D107
FA-514
RE-L603R-PR-5
RE-L515R-PR-36
RE-L516R-PR-36
RE-L517R-PR-36
RE-L512R-PR-36
RE-L513R-PR-36
RE-514R-PR-36
NEW LINE NUMBER

-----------------------------EXISTING LINE NO.
RE-L603-PR-5-24"
RE-L603-PR-5-16"
RE-L515R-PR-36-2"
RE-L515-PR-3- 2"
RE-L515R-PR-36-2"
RE-L516-PR-3-2"
RE-L517R-PR-36-2"
RE-L517-PR-3-2"
RE-L-512R-PR-36-2"
RE-L512-PR-3-2"
RE-L513R-PR-36-2"
RE-L513-PR-3-2"
RE-L514R-PR-36-2"
RE-L514-PR-3-2"
970086-D107
970086-D107
REMARKS
XV-75
REPLACE EXISTING
NOZZLE WITH NEW 24" NOZZLE
ON FA-510. INSTALL NEW RE-L603-PR-5-24"
NEW LINE FROM NEW FA-513 TO EXISTING FA-510
DEMO RE-L515-PR-3-2"
CONNECTION FOR TE 1020 THRU 1028
CONNECTION FOR TE 1002 THRU 1010
TE-1002 --> 1010
NEW NOZZLE ADDED TO FA-510 FOR FIF-1008
970086-D107
G1-L258N-PR-5-1"
970086-D107
NEW NOZZLE ADDED TO FA-510 FOR FIF-1009

G1-L25TN-PR-5-1"
970086D113
970086-D107
970086-D107
970086-D107
GI-L254N-PR-8
AP-L602R-PR-24
RE-L603R-PR-5
RE-L602-PR-5
NEW NITROGEN LINE TO FIF-1008 & FIF-1009

GI-L254N-PR-8-3/4"
FROM BH-502 AIR HEATER TO FA-510 REGEN TOWER
AP-L602R-PR-24-3"
RE-L603R-PR-5-24"
FROM REGEN HEATER BH-500 TO REGEN TOWER FA510

TO NEW BH-500 REGEN HEATER
RE-L602-PR-5-16"
970086-D108
AT REGEN BLOWER GB-505 OUTLET

RE-L602-PR-5-16"
970086-D108
AT REGEN BLOWER GB-505 INLET

RE-L601-PR-5-16"
970086-D108
970086-D108
970086-D107
970086-D108
RE-L606R-B1A1
RE-L607R-B1A1
AP-L601R-PR-8
RE-L260N-PR-36
CONNECTION TO GB-506 REGEN COOLER FAN

RE-L606R-B1A1-14"
CONNECTION TO EA-515 REGEN COOLER
RE-L607R-B1A1-14"
TO AIR HEATER BH-502
AP-L601R-PR-8-1 1/2"
RE-L260N-PR-36-4"
970086-D108
DEMO EXISTING 4" LINE & REPLACING WITH LARGER

6" LINE
REPLACE FV-379
AI-L103N-PR-8-1.1/2"
970086-D108
REPLACE FE-379
AI-L103N-PR-8-1.1/2"
12264-01-F70-270414-001
Issue Date: 1-17-13
Revision: A
SHEET 3 OF 6
DECK
LEVEL
LASER SCAN
PICTURE
DEMO
PACKAGE
NO.
TP47,60
21
TP48,49,50
20
TP48,49,50
20
TP48,49,50
20
TP51,52,53
20
TP51,52,53
20
TP51,52,53
20
TP54,55,109
19
TP54,55,109
19
DEMO DRAWING
COMMODITY
SCHEDULED
DATE
7
7
7
5
TP59
TP47,60
21
TP61
21
GRADE
22
GRADE
22
GRADE
23
24
7
GRADE
TP67,68,69
GRADE
TP67,68,69
38
GRADE
TP67,68,69
38
PIPING TIE-IN LIST

UOP
PEMEX
Ambitech
REV.
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
TIE-IN
NUMBER
TP
70
TP
71
TP
72
TP
73
TP
74
TP
75
TP
76
TP
77
TP
78
TP
79
TP
80
TP
81
TP
82
TP
83
TP
84
TP
85
TP
86
TP
87
TP
88
TP
89
TP
90
TP
91
PIPING
DRAWING
NUMBER
FLOW SHEET
ISOMETRIC
DRAWING
DRAWING NUMBER
NUMBER
970086-D105
12264-01-F70-270414-001
Issue Date: 1-17-13
Revision: A
REMARKS
NEW LINE NUMBER

-----------------------------EXISTING LINE NO.
DECK
LEVEL
LASER SCAN
PICTURE
DEMO
PACKAGE
NO.
DEMO DRAWING
COMMODITY
SCHEDULED
DATE
REPLACE XV-75
FA-514
RE-411-PR23-1.5"
970086-D113
970086-D105
VA-L276N-MS-12
RE-L412-B2A2
VA-L276N-MS-12-1"
NEW STEAM LINE TO EQUIPMENT EA-521 PREHEAT

GAS HEATER
REPLACE FO-05
RX2
RE-L412-PR23-1"
970086-D105
REPLACE PSV-2252
RE-L422-B2A2-X
970086-D104
970086-D104
970086-D105
970086-D105
970086-D105
970086-D105
970086-D105
RE-L251N-B2A2-3/4"
RE-L425-PR-23-1 1/2"
RE-L425-B2A2
RE-L410-B2A2
RE-L409R (B)-B2A2
RE-L409R (B)-B2A2
RE-L411-B2A2
RE-L411-B2A2
970086-D105
970086-D105
970086-D105
FROM PDT-1006
REPLACE FE-313
REPLACE FO-18
REPLACE FE-301
RE-L409-PR-23-1.5"
REPLACE FO-1
RE-L409-PR-23- 1.5"
REPLACE FO-2
RE-411-PR-23-1.5"
REPLACE FE-302
RE-411-PR-23-1.5"
NEW TE-311A/B
RE-L710R-PR-6
RE-L425R-PR-10
RE-L425R-PR-10
TO DC-501 REACTOR TOP

TO DC-501 REACTOR TOP
FROM RECYCLE GAS COALESCER
RE-L425-PR10-1.5"
NEW TE-312
970086-D105
970086-D105
970086-D105
RE-L403-PR-15
RE-L403-PR-15
RE-L403-PR-1
RE-L406-PR-2
REPLACE XV-2
RE-L403-PR-15-3"
REPLACE XV-3
RE-L403-PR-15-3"
REPLACE XV-5
RE-L403-PR-15-3"
REPLACE XV-16
RE-L406-PR-2-3"
TP78
RX2
TP79,80,81,82
RX2
TP79,80,81,82
RX2
TP79,80,81,82
RX2
TP79,80,81,82
RX2
TP88,89,90
RX1
TP88,89,90
RX1
TP88,89,90
RX
GROUND
TP91,92,94
RX9
RX9
RX9
11
DC-501 REACTOR TOP

970086-D105
RX2
11
RE-L425-PR10-1.5"
970086-D105
RX2
RE-L410-PR-23-1"
DC-501 REACTOR TOP

RE-L710-PR-6
TP74
RE-L425-PR-23-1 1/2"
970086-D105
SHEET 4 OF 6
PIPING TIE-IN LIST

UOP
PEMEX
Ambitech
REV.
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
TIE-IN
NUMBER
TP
92
TP
93
TP
94
TP
95
TP
96
TP
97
TP
98
TP
99
TP
100
TP
101
TP
102
TP
103
TP
104
TP
105
TP
106
TP
107
TP
108
TP
109
TP
110
TP
111
TP
112
TP
113
TP
114
PIPING
DRAWING
NUMBER
FLOW SHEET
ISOMETRIC
DRAWING
DRAWING NUMBER
NUMBER
970086-D105
970086-D104
970086-D105
FA-514
RE-L406-PR-2
RE-L460-B2A2
RE-L406-PR-2
12264-01-F70-270414-001
Issue Date: 1-17-13
Revision: A
REMARKS
NEW LINE NUMBER

-----------------------------EXISTING LINE NO.
XV-75
REPLACE XV-13
RE-L406-PR-2-3"
REPLACE F0-19
RE-L420-PR-23-1"
REPLACE XV-14
RE-L406-PR-2-3"
DECK
LEVEL
LASER SCAN
PICTURE
DEMO
PACKAGE
NO.
RX1
TP91,92,94
GROUND
TP93
RX1
TP91,92,94
TP98
RX2
TP99,100,101,102
RX2
TP99,100,101,102
RX2
TP99,100,101,102
RX2
TP99,100,101,102
DEMO DRAWING
COMMODITY
SCHEDULED
DATE
970086-D113
970086-D104
970086-D105
970086-D105
970086-D105
970086-D105
REPLACE PSV-2251
VA-L102R-MS-12
VA-L102R-MS-12
RE-L409R (A)-B2A2
RE-L409R (A)-B2A2
RE-421R-B2A2-X"
VM-L102R-MS-12-3/4"
VM-L103R-MS-12-3/4"
VA-L102R-MS-12-3/4"
CT-L103-MS-11-3/4"
STEAM CONNECTION TO JACEKET

CONDENSATE CONNECTION FROM JACKET
REPLACE STEAM JACKETING
GI-L101-PR-23-1"
REPLACE STEAM JACKETING
GI-L101-PR-23-1"
970086-D105
NEW LE-309
REACTOR
970086-D105
NEW LY-309
REACTOR
970086-D105
NEW LE-307
LOCK HOPPER #1 FA-511

970086-D105
NEW LY-307
970086-D107
CONNECTION FOR TE-1012 THRU 1019

REGEN TOWER FA-510
970086-D107
970086-D113
970086-D113
CONNECTION FOR TE-1029 THRU 1037

GI-L128R-PR-8
VB-L272N-MS-11
REGEN TOWER FA-510

GI-L128R-PR-8-1 1/2"
GI-L112-PR-8-1 1/2"
NEW NITROGEN LINE TO GB-505 REGEN BLOWER

NEW LP STEAM LINE TO INSULATE STEAM JACKET
VB-L272N-MS-1-3/4"
970086-D108
TP54,55,109
TO GB-504 CHLORINATION BLOWER

AP-L102R-PR-8-1 1/2"
970086-D110
970086-D110
RE-L741-B2A2
AE-L105R-MS-1
REPLACE FO-13
RE-L741-PR-23-1"
WATER SUPPLY TO FA-515
AE-L105R-MS-1-2"
SHEET 5 OF 6
PIPING TIE-IN LIST

UOP
PEMEX
Ambitech
REV.
A
A
A
A
TIE-IN
NUMBER
TP
115
TP
116
TP
117
TP
118
TP
119
TP
120
PIPING
DRAWING
NUMBER
FLOW SHEET
ISOMETRIC
DRAWING
DRAWING NUMBER
NUMBER
970086-D110
970086-D110
FA-514
RE-L702-PR-2
RE-L703-PR-2
NEW LINE NUMBER

-----------------------------EXISTING LINE NO.
REMARKS
XV-75
REPLACE XV-45
RE-L708-PR-23-1 1/2"
REPLACE XV-54
RE-L703-PR-2-3"
970086-D110
12264-01-F70-270414-001
Issue Date: 1-17-13
Revision: A
DECK
LEVEL
LASER SCAN
PICTURE
DEMO
PACKAGE
NO.
TP7,9,115
35
TP10,116
35
DEMO DRAWING
COMMODITY
SCHEDULED
DATE
REPLACE LE-347
970086-D110
REPLACE LV-347
970086-D108
970086-D108
RE-L606R-B1A1
RE-L606R-B1A1
CONNECTION TO EA-515 REGEN COOLER

RE-L606R-B1A1-14"
REPLACE TV-373
GRADE
RE-L606R-B1A1-14"
GRADE
SHEET 6 OF 6
UOP/PEMEX 12264-01
Bulk BOM by SPEC.
Spec
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
Length(M)/
Bore1 Bore2 Quant.
12.7
0.5
0
32.6
10
0
23.5
14
0
1
0.5
0
8
0.5
0
2
0.5
0
1
0.5
0
2
0.5
0.5
1
1
0
1
1
0.5
1
10
0
9
10
0
2
10
4
1
14
0
3
14
0
1
14
10
1
14
14
1
1
0
2
4
0
1
10
0
2
14
0
2
14
0
1
0.5
0
1
1
0
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
B1A1
10
14
0
0
1
2
B1A1
14
B1A1
0.625
B1A1
0.625
16
B1A1
16
B1A1
24
B1A1
12
12264-01-f70-200316-001.xlsx
Issued: 1/17/13
Rev. A
Description
PROGRESSSET
PE SMLS PIPE ASTM A106 GR.B SCH. 80
Date 01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
BE SMLS PIPE ASTM A106 GR.B STD. WT.
By T. Battle
Preliminary
45DEG 3000# SW ELBOW ASME B16.11 ASTM A105
30%Review
NIPPLE PBE 150MM LONG SMLS ASTM A106 GR.B SCH. 80
60%Review
90%Review
3000# SW TEE ASME B16.11 ASTM A105

CONC. SWAGED PBE NIPPLE ASTM A234 GR.WPB SCH. 80
45DEG LR BW ELBOW ASME B16.9 ASTM A234 GR.WPB STD. WT.
BW CONC. REDUCER ASME B16.9 ASTM A234 GR.WPB STD. WT.
BW TEE ASME B16.9 ASTM A234 GR.WPB STD. WT.
300# RF SW FLANGE ASME B16.5 ASTM A105 SCH. 80
150# RF WN FLANGE ASME B16.5 ASTM A105 STD. WT.
150# FF WN FLANGE ASME B16.5 ASTM A105 STD. WT.
800# SWxSCRD GATE VALVE , FORGED STEEL, ASTM A105, GA-801
800# SW GATE VALVE , FORGED STEEL, ASTM A105, GA-800
GASKET 300# RF 3MM ASME B16.20 , SPIRAL WOUND W/FLEX. GRAPHITE (95% MIN.)
FILLER, TP316SS WINDING, CS SOLID CENT. RING
150# FF 1/8IN GASKET ASME B16.21 , COMPRESSED NON-ASBESTOS
3.1/4 LONG STUD BOLTS, ASTM A193 GR.B7 THRD. FULL LENGTH WITH TWO ASTM
A194 GR.2H HVY. SEMI-FINISHED HEX NUTS
Page 1 of 12
UOP/PEMEX 12264-01
Bulk BOM by SPEC.
Spec
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
Bore1 Bore2
1.5
0
1.5
0
1.5
0.75
1.5
1.5
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0.75
2
0.75
2
0.75
2
1
2
1.5
2
2
3
0
3
0
3
0.75
3
1.5
3
2
3
3
4
0
4
2
6
0
Length(M)/
Quant.
1
4
1
1
1
12
1
1
4
2
1
1
1
3
30
2
3
4
4
1
1
3
22
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
1
1
1.5
1.5
1.5
2
0
0
0.75
1
2
3
3
3
4
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
10
4
1
2
1
4
3
1
3
5
5
4
1
8
PR-8
PR-8
2
2
0
0
2
4
12264-01-f70-200316-001.xlsx
Issued: 1/17/13
Rev. A
Description
150# RF WAFER TYPE SPECIALITY ITEM SUPPLIED BY OTHERS
150# RF SPECIALITY ITEM SUPPLIED BY OTHERS
3000# SOCKOLET MSS SP-97 ASTM A105
CONC. SWAGED BLE/PSE NIPPLE ASTM A234 GR.WPB STD. WT. X SCH. 80
BW CONC. REDUCER ASME B16.9 ASTM A234 GR.WPB STD. WT. X SCH. 80
BW ECC. REDUCER ASME B16.9 ASTM A234 GR.WPB STD. WT.
300# RF WN ORIF FLANGE ASME B16.36 W/ 4 1/2IN NPT TAPS, SEE DETAIL SUPPLIED BY
OTHERS
3000# NPT THREDOLET MSS SP-97 ASTM A105
WELDOLET MSS SP-97 ASTM A105 STD. WT.
WELDOLET MSS SP-97 ASTM A105 STD. WT.
300# RF LWN FLANGE ASME B16.5 ASTM A105 SCH. 80
300# RF WN FLANGE ASME B16.5 ASTM A105 SCH. 80
300# RF WN ORIF FLANGE WITH JACK SCREWS ASME B16.36 W/ 1/2IN NPT TAPS ASTM
A105 STD. WT.
Page 10 of 12
UOP/PEMEX 12264-01
Bulk BOM by SPEC.
Spec
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
Length(M)/
Bore1 Bore2 Quant.
5
3
0
6
3
0
1
4
0
10
6
0
5
6
0
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
6
0.25
0.5
0.5
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
1
3
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
2
1
11
2
11
1
6
6
1
1
2
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
1.5
PR-8
1.5
11
PR-8
PR-8
10
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
11
PR-8
0.5
12
12264-01-f70-200316-001.xlsx
Issued: 1/17/13
Rev. A
Description
300# RF WN ORIF FLANGE WITH JACK SCREWS ASME B16.36 W/ 1/2IN NPT TAPS ASTM
A105 STD. WT.
800# SW GLOBE VALVE , FORGED STEEL, ASTM A105, GL-800
800# SW BALL CHECK VALVE , FORGED STEEL, ASTM A105, CH-800
THR'D SOLID ROUND HEAD PLUG ASME B16.11 ASTM A105
150# RF GATE VALVE ASME B16.10 , CS, ASTM A216 GR. WCB, GA-100
150# RF GATE VALVE ASME B16.10 , CS, ASTM A216 GR. WCB, GA-100
Page 11 of 12
UOP/PEMEX 12264-01
Bulk BOM by SPEC.
Spec
Bore1
PR-8
0.5
PR-8
0.625
PR-8
0.625
PR-8
0.625
PR-8
0.625
PR-8
PR-8
0.625
0.625
PR-8
0.75
PR-8
PR-8
0.75
0.75
PR-8
0.75
PR-8
0.75
PR-8
0.75
PR-8
0.75
12264-01-f70-200316-001.xlsx
Issued: 1/17/13
Rev. A
Length(M)/
Bore2 Quant. Description
3 LONG STUD BOLTS, ASTM A193 GR.B7 THRD. FULL LENGTH WITH TWO ASTM A194
4
GR.2H HVY. SEMI-FINISHED HEX NUTS
0
60
0
24
0
8
0
12
0
24
0
4
3.3/4 LONG JACK SCREW, ASTM A307 GR.B THRD. FULL LENGTH, HEX HEAD
0
40
0
36
0
6
4 LONG JACK SCREW, ASTM A307 GR.B THRD. FULL LENGTH, HEX HEAD
0
64
0
40
0
8
0
60
0
Page 12 of 12
UOP/PEMEX 12264-01
Bulk BOM by SPEC.
Spec
B2A1
B2A1
B2A1
B2A1
B2A1
B2A1
B2A1
B2A1
B2A1
Length(M)/
Bore1 Bore2 Quant.
3.5
1
0
15
10
0
3
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
4
10
0
5
1
0
1
1.5
0
1
10
0
B2A1
B2A1
1.5
B2A1
10
B2A1
0.625
20
B2A1
0.75
B2A1
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
1
0.75
1
1.5
0.75
0.75
0.75
1
1
1
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.75
0.75
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.75
0
0
1
0
0
0
0.75
1
1
1.5
0
0
0
0
16
26.8
2.1
9.6
2
1
1
5
2
1
1
1
6
1
1
2
2
2
1
3
1
B2A2
0.5
12264-01-f70-200316-001.xlsx
Issued: 1/17/13
Rev. A
Description
300# RF ORIFICE ASSEMBLY SUPPLIED BY OTHERS
300# RF LWN FLANGE ASME B16.5 ASTM A105 SCH. 80
6000# SW FULL CPLG ASME B16.11 ASTM A105
REDUCING INSERT SW #6000 ASTM A105
6000# SW REDUCING TEE ASME B16.11 ASTM A105
REDUCING INSERT SW #6000 ASTM A105
Page 2 of 12
UOP/PEMEX 12264-01
Bulk BOM by SPEC.
Spec
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
B2A2
M1A1
M1A1
M1A1
M1A1
M1A1
M1A1
M1A1
M1A1
M1A1
M1A1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
12264-01-f70-200316-001.xlsx
Issued: 1/17/13
Rev. A
Length(M)/
Bore1 Bore2 Quant. Description
10
1
0
1
1.5
0
9
1.5
0
3 LONG STUD BOLTS, ASTM A193 GR.B7 THRD FULL LENGTH W/ TWO ASTM A194 GR.2H
4
HVY SEMI-FINISHED HEX NUTS, W/ FLUOROKOTE #1
0.5
0
3.3/4 LONG JACK SCREW, ASTM A307 GR.B THRD. FULL LENGTH, HEX HEAD, BOTH
2
COATED FLUOROKOTE #1
0.625
0
4.3/4 LONG STUD BOLTS, ASTM A193 GR.B7 THRD FULL LENGTH W/ TWO ASTM A194
20
GR.2H HVY SEMI-FINISHED HEX NUTS, W/ FLUOROKOTE #1
0.625
0
4
0.75
0
12
0.75
0
4
0.75
0
8
0.75
0
12.2
PE SMLS PIPE ASTM A312 GR.TP316/316L SCH. 80S
0.75
0
18
90DEG 3000# SW ELBOW ASME B16.11 ASTM A182 GR. F316/316L
0.75
0
6
3000# SW TEE ASME B16.11 ASTM A182 GR. F316/316L
0.75 0.75
1
3000# SW FULL CPLG ASME B16.11 ASTM A182 GR. F316/316L
0.75
0
4
3000# SW CONC REDUCER ASME B16.11 ASTM A182 GR. F316/316L
0.75
0.5
4
600# RF SW FLANGE ASME B16.5 ASTM A182 GR. F316/316L, SCH. 80S
0.5
0
GASKET 600# RF 3MM ASME B16.20 , SPIRAL WOUND TP316 WINDING, FLEXIBLE
GRAPHITE (95%) FILLER, CS SOLID CENTERING RING
4
0.5
0
3.1/4 LONG STUD BOLTS, ASTM A193 GR. B8 THRD. FULL LENGTH, WITH TWO ASTM
16
A194 GR. 8 HEAVY SEMI-FINISHED HEX NUTS
0.5
0
4
800# SW GATE VALVE , FORGED STEEL, ASTM A182 GR. F316, GA-880
0.75
0
2
800# SWxSCRD GATE VALVE , FORGED STEEL, ASTM A182 GR. F316, GA-881
0.75
0
4.2
TBE SMLS PIPE ASTM A106 GR.B SCH. 80
1
0
4.4
1.5
0
3.2
2
0
1
NIPPLE TBE NPT 75MM LONG SMLS ASTM A106 GR.B SCH. 80
0.75
0
6
90DEG 3000# NPT ELBOW ASME B16.11 ASTM A105
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
4
3000# NPT UNION MSS SP-83 ASTM A105
1
0
1
3000# NPT FULL CPLG ASME B16.11 ASTM A105
1.5
0
1
1.5
0
8
1.5
0
Page 3 of 12
UOP/PEMEX 12264-01
Bulk BOM by SPEC.
Spec
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-1
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
Bore1 Bore2
1.5
0
1.5
1.5
2
0
2
0
2
0.75
2
1
2
2
3
0
3
1
3
1.5
0.75
0
1
0
1.5
0
1
0
1
0
1.5
0
0.75
0
1
0
1.5
0
0.75
0
1
0
1.5
0
4
0
12
0
0.75
0
0.75
0
0.75
0
0.75 0.25
1
0
1
0
1
0.25
1.5
0
1.5
0.75
1.5
1
1.5
1.5
2
1.5
4
0
4
0
6
4
12
0
12
0.75
0.75
0
1
0
Length(M)/
Quant.
4
2
2
1
1
6
5
2
2
4
2
4
2
2
2
1
1
4
2
11.4
5
40.7
24.9
1.6
1
1
4
1
3
1
1
9
1
1
1
1
7
3
1
2
3
2
2
12264-01-f70-200316-001.xlsx
Issued: 1/17/13
Rev. A
Description
3000# NPT TEE ASME B16.11 ASTM A105
3000# NPT FULL CPLG ASME B16.11 ASTM A105
CONC. SWAGED TBE NIPPLE ASTM A234 GR.WPB SCH. 80
CONC. SWAGED TBE NIPPLE ASTM A234 GR.WPB SCH. 80
3000# NPT ELBOLET MSS SP-97 ASTM A105
CONC. SWAGED BLE/TSE NIPPLE ASTM A234 GR.WPB SCH. 80
150# RF SCRD FLANGE ASME B16.5 ASTM A105
150# NPT BRONZE GATE VALVE , MSS SP-80, BRONZE, ASTM B62, GA-1160
150# NPT GLOBE VALVE , MSS SP-80, BRONZE, ASTM B62, GL-1160
150# RF 1.5MM GASKET ASME B16.21 , COMPRESSED NON-ASBESTOS
CONC. SWAGED PLE/TSE NIPPLE ASTM A234 GR.WPB SCH. 80
CONC. SWAGED PLE/TSE NIPPLE ASTM A234 GR.WPB SCH. 80
BW CAP LONG ASME B16.9 ASTM A234 GR.WPB STD. WT.
Page 4 of 12
UOP/PEMEX 12264-01
Bulk BOM by SPEC.
Spec
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
Length(M)/
Bore1 Bore2 Quant.
2
1
0
1
0.75
0
1
0.75
0
MS-11
0.75
MS-11
MS-11
MS-11
0.5
MS-11
0.5
MS-11
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
MS-12
0.625
0.75
1
1.5
4
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
1.5
1.5
3
3
3
4
4
4
1
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.75
0
0
0
0
0.75
1
0
1
1.5
0
1
1
0
0
0.75
0
0
0
0
0
8
3.4
6.6
28.1
5.3
9
3
1
1
5
2
1
9
1
1
3
1
1
2
4
2
2
4
4
6
1
1
1
1
12264-01-f70-200316-001.xlsx
Issued: 1/17/13
Rev. A
Description
3000# NPT ELBOLET MSS SP-97 ASTM A105
BW CAP LONG ASME B16.9 ASTM A234 GR.WPB STD. WT.
Page 5 of 12
UOP/PEMEX 12264-01
Bulk BOM by SPEC.
Spec
MS-12
MS-12
PR-1
PR-1
PR-10
PR-10
PR-10
PR-10
PR-10
PR-15
PR-15
PR-15
PR-15
PR-2
PR-2
PR-2
PR-2
PR-24
PR-24
PR-24
PR-24
PR-24
PR-24
PR-3
PR-3
PR-36
12264-01-f70-200316-001.xlsx
Issued: 1/17/13
Rev. A
Length(M)/
2
1
0
4
1
0
2
3
0
16
0.75
0
1.3
PE SMLS PIPE ASTM A335 GR.P11 SCH. 80
1.5
0
1
90DEG LR BW ELBOW ASME B16.9 ASTM A234 GR.WP11 SCH. 80
1.5
0
2
300# RF WN FLANGE ASME B16.5 ASTM A182 GR.F11 SCH. 80
1.5
0
1
1.5
0
4
0.75
0
3
3
0
1
3
0
24
0.75
0
8
0.75
0
2
2
0
7
3
0
16
0.625
0
56
0.75
0
1
BE SMLS PIPE ASTM A312 GR.TP304H SCH. 40S
3
0
1
90DEG LR BW ELBOW ASME B16.9 ASTM A403 GR. WP304H S/WX/WU, SCH. 40S
3
0
1
300# RF LWN FLANGE ASME B16.5 ASTM A182 GR.F304H SCH. 40S
1
0
1
300# RF WN FLANGE ASME B16.5 ASTM A182 GR.F304H SCH. 40S
3
0
GASKET 300# RF 3MM ASME B16.20 , SPIRAL WOUND TP304 SS WINDING,
1
THERMICULITE 835 FILLER, 304 SS INNER RING
3
0
4.1/4 LONG STUD BOLTS, ASTM A193 GR. B8M CLASS 2, THRD. FULL LENGTH, WITH
8
TWO ASTM A194 GR. 8M HEAVY SEMI-FINISHED HEX NUTS
0.75
0
2
2
0
16
0.625
0
3.8
PE SMLS PIPE ASTM A312 GR. TP316H SCH. 80S
0.75
0
Page 6 of 12
UOP/PEMEX 12264-01
Bulk BOM by SPEC.
Spec
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
PR-36
Length(M)/
Bore1 Bore2 Quant.
0.2
1
0
47.6
2
0
71.3
2
0
39.3
6
0
7
0.75
0
10
0.75
0
1
0.75
0.5
3
0.75 0.75
2
1
0
7
2
0
1
2
1
3
6
0
12
6
0
1
6
0.75
2
6
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1.5
0
26
2
0
2
6
0
1
0.5
0
2
0.75
0
4
0.75
0
PR-36
PR-36
1.5
PR-36
19
PR-36
PR-36
0.625
12
PR-36
0.625
136
PR-36
0.75
PR-36
PR-4
PR-4
PR-4
PR-4
0.75
2
5
12
5
0
0
0
0
2
24
6.3
0.8
1.1
1
12264-01-f70-200316-001.xlsx
Issued: 1/17/13
Rev. A
Description
PE SMLS PIPE ASTM A312 GR. TP316H SCH. 80S
BE SMLS PIPE ASTM A106 GR.B SCH. 80
BE SMLS PIPE ASTM A312 GR. TP316H SCH. 40S
BE SMLS PIPE ASTM A312 GR. TP316H SCH. 40S
90DEG 3000# SW ELBOW ASME B16.11 ASTM A182 GR. F316H
NIPPLE PBE 75MM LONG SMLS ASTM A312 GR. TP316H SCH. 80S
CONC. SWAGED PBE NIPPLE ASTM A403 GR. WP316H SCH. 80S
3000# SW TEE ASME B16.11 ASTM A182 GR. F316H
300# RF SPECIALITY ITEM SUPPLIED BY OTHERS
BW DUROLOK PIPE COUPLING ASTM A403 GR.WP304-S SCH. 80
3000# SW LATROLET MSS SP-97 ASTM A182 GR. F316H
3000# SOCKOLET MSS SP-97 ASTM A182 GR. F316H
3000# NPT THREDOLET MSS SP-97 ASTM A182 GR. F316H
300# RF BLIND FLANGE ASME B16.5 ASTM A182 GR. F316H
300# RF SW FLANGE ASME B16.5 ASTM A182 GR. F316H, SCH. 80S
300# RF LWN FLANGE ASME B16.5 ASTM A182 GR. F316H, SCH. 80S
300# RF WN FLANGE ASME B16.5 ASTM A182 GR. F316H, SCH. 40S
300# RF WN FLANGE ASME B16.5 ASTM A182 GR. F316H, SCH. 40S
800# SW BALL CHECK VALVE , FORGED STEEL, ASTM A182 GR. F316, CH-880
GASKET 300# RF 3MM ASME B16.20 , SPIRAL WOUND TP316 WINDING, THERMICULITE
835 FILLER, 316 SS INNER AND OUTER RING
5 LONG STUD BOLTS, ASTM A193 GR. B8M CLASS 2, THRD. FULL LENGTH, WITH TWO
ASTM A194 GR. 8M HEAVY SEMI-FINISHED HEX NUTS
BW ECC. REDUCER ASME B16.9 ASTM A234 GR.WPB SCH. 80
Page 7 of 12
UOP/PEMEX 12264-01
Bulk BOM by SPEC.
Spec
PR-4
PR-4
PR-4
PR-4
Length(M)/
Bore1 Bore2 Quant.
1
12
0
1
12
0
1
12
5
2
12
0
PR-4
12
PR-4
PR-5
PR-5
PR-5
PR-5
PR-5
PR-5
PR-5
PR-5
PR-5
PR-5
PR-5
PR-5
PR-5
0.875
0.75
2
18
24
0.75
0.75
24
24
24
2
24
24
0.75
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.75
2
3
0
0
0
0
12
0.3
0.3
0.8
1.5
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
PR-5
PR-5
24
PR-5
PR-6
PR-6
PR-6
PR-6
PR-6
PR-6
PR-6
PR-6
PR-6
PR-6
PR-6
PR-6
PR-6
0.625
2
3
5
12
2
3
5
12
12
12
3
3
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
5
0
2
0
4
55.8
0.1
0.8
0.9
8
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
PR-6
12264-01-f70-200316-001.xlsx
Issued: 1/17/13
Rev. A
Description
45DEG LR BW ELBOW ASME B16.9 ASTM A234 GR.WPB SCH. 80
BW CAP LONG ASME B16.9 ASTM A234 GR.WPB SCH. 80
PE SMLS PIPE ASTM B167 UNS N06600, SCH. 80S
BE SMLS PIPE ASTM B167 UNS N06600
BE SMLS PIPE ASTM B167 UNS N06600
BE EFW PIPE ASTM B168 UNS N06600, SCH. 5S
3000# SW CAP ASME B16.11 ASTM B564 UNS N06600
NIPPLE PBE 75MM LONG ASTM B167 UNS N06600, SCH. 80S
3000# SOCKOLET MSS SP-97 ASTM B564 UNS N06600
WELDOLET MSS SP-97 ASTM B564 UNS N06600 SCH. 80S
WELDOLET MSS SP-97 ASTM B564 UNS N06600 SCH. 80S
150# RF WN FLANGE ASME B16.5 ASTM B564 UNS N06600
SHORT PATTERN STUB-END ASME B16.9 INCONEL 600, SCH. 5S
300# LAP JOINT FLANGE ASME B16.5 ASTM A182 GR.F11 SCH. 5S
600# SW GATE VALVE , ASTM A494 GR. CY-40 CLASS 2, GA-6180
GASKET 150# RF 3MM ASME B16.20 , SPIRAL WOUND, W/ INCONEL 600 WINDINGS
AND GRAFOIL FILLER
GASKET 300# RF 3MM ASME B16.20 , SPIRAL WOUND, W/ INCONEL 600 WINDINGS
AND GRAFOIL FILLER
A194 GR.4 NUTS
BW DUROLOK PIPE COUPLING ASTM A403 GR.WP304-S SCH. 80
300# SPEC BLIND ASME B16.48 ASTM A285 GR.C API 590
45DEG LR BW ELBOW ASME B16.9 ASTM A234 GR.WPB SCH. 80
BW CAP LONG ASME B16.9 ASTM A234 GR.WPB SCH. 80
300# RF REDUCING WN FLANGE ASME B16.5 ASTM A105 SCH. 80
Page 8 of 12
UOP/PEMEX 12264-01
Bulk BOM by SPEC.
Spec
PR-6
PR-6
PR-6
PR-6
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
PR-8
12264-01-f70-200316-001.xlsx
Issued: 1/17/13
Rev. A
Length(M)/
1
12
0
8
0.75
0
8
0.75
0
16
1.125
0
1.4
0.5
0
28
0.75
0
7.4
1
0
3.7
1.5
0
64.6
2
0
53.1
3
0
0.6
4
0
102.1
6
0
1
3000# CAP SCRD ASME B16.11 ASTM A105
0.25
0
1
NIPPLE POE/TOE NPT 75MM LONG SMLS ASTM A106 GR.B SCH. 80
0.25
0
2
3000# CAP SCRD ASME B16.11 ASTM A105
0.5
0
2
0.5
0
1
0.5
0
1
0.5
0
1
0.5
0
4
0.5
0
6
0.5
0
2
0.5
0
2
0.5
0.25
2
0.5
0.5
24
0.75
0
2
0.75
0
1
0.75
0
16
0.75
0
3
0.75
0
1
0.75 0.25
1
3000# SW REDUCING TEE ASME B16.11 ASTM A105
0.75
0.5
2
0.75
0.5
2
CONC. SWAGED PLE/TSE NIPPLE ASTM A234 GR.WPB SCH. 80 X SCH. 160
0.75
0.5
7
0.75 0.75
1
150# RF ORIFICE ASSEMBLY SUPPLIED BY OTHERS
1
0
4
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0.5
2
1
0.75
Page 9 of 12
2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Piping Material Line Class B1A1
Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Corrosion Allowance:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
Page 1 of 4
970086 S8B1A1-2
B1A1
GENERAL PROCESS, PROCESS WITH HYDROGEN
CLASS 150 RF
-20F THRU 700F / -29C THRU 371C
0.063 inch (1.5 mm)
KILLED CARBON STEEL
ASME B31.3
ASME B16.5 for sizes to NPS 24
UOP Valve
Code (Note 1)
Flanges
Socket Weld
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 150 RF, SCH. 80,
ASME B16.5.
Flanges
Weld Neck
(Note11)
NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, Class 150 RF, SCH. STD., ASME B16.5.
NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, Class 150 FF, SCH. STD., ASME B16.5.
NPS 30, ASTM A 105, Class 150 RF, SCH STD, ASME B16.47 Series A
Orifice Flanges
Weld Neck
NPS 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. 80, with jack screws
ASME B16.36 NPT taps.
NPS 2 to 24 ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. STD., with jack screws
Gaskets
(Note11)
For RF Flanges - Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.) filler,
TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring, per ASME
B16.20.
NPS 1/2 to 24 for ASME B16.5 flanges, per ASME B16.20.
NPS 30 for ASME B16.47 Series A flanges
For flat face flanges Compressed non-asbestos, full face, 1/16" thick
NPS 1/2 to 24 ASME 16.21, dimensions per ASME B16.5 Class 150
Small Fittings
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, ASME B16.11, socket weld.
Large Fittings
(Notes 5)
NPS 2 to 30, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, BW, wall thickness to match pipe,
ASME B16.9.
Branch Outlet
Fittings
Elbolet. NPS 1 & 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, socket weld.
Sockolet. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, MSS SP-97.
Weldolet. NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, SCH. STD., BW, MSS SP-97.
Concentric
Swages
(Note 8)
NPS 1/41/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80160, seamless,
PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95.
NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE,
MSS SP-95.
2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Page 2 of 4
970086 S8B1A1-2
Eccentric
Swages
(Note 8)
PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95.
Nipples
(Note 6, 9)
NPS 1/4NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 160, seamless,
TBE.
MSS SP-95.
NPS 1/4NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 160, seamless,
POE/TOE.
NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 16080, seamless, PBE.
Blinds
Spectacle
NPS 1 to 12, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized, Class 150 RF, ASME
B16.48.
Blinds
Spacer Ring
B16.48.
Blinds
Plate
B16.48.
GL-800
NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld.
GL-801
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld x
threaded.
GL-100
NPS 2 to 6 Class 150, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged.
GA-800
GA-802
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld, full port.
GA-801
threaded.
GA-803
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 300, forged, ASTM A 105, flanged.
GA-100
NPS 2 to 24, Class 150, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged.
CH-800
CH-100
Wafer
Check Valves
CH-102
NPS 2 to 24, Class 150, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, retainerless,
lug type, flangeless.
Spring Check
valve
CH-3080
NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2, 207 bar, ASTM A 582 Grade 303 stainless steel body
Female pipe thread, Viton-O-ring seal.
Ball Valve
(Max Operating
Temp 150 C)
BA-104
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Standard port, socket weld ends, fire safe design
carbon steel body 316 stainless steel ball and stem, Reinforced Teflon
seat, PTFE/Graphite body seal, TFM/Graphite stem seal,
Globe Valves
(Note 3)
Gate Valves
(Notes 2, 3, 4)
Check Valves
Bolting
Stud Bolts. ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded full length, with two ASTM
A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts.
Jack Screw. ASTM A 307 Grade B, threaded full length, hex head.
Seamless
Pipe
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 80, PBE.

NPS 2 to 14, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. STD., BBE.
2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Page 3 of 4
970086 S8B1A1-2
NPS 16 to 30, ASTM A 672 Grade B65 Class 22, SCH. STD., BBE.
Electric Fusion
Welded Pipe

RUN
SIZE
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
BRANCH SIZE
3/4 1
11/2
T
RT T
RT RT T
BS RT RT
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
T
RT
RT
RT
T
RT
RT
T
RT
BRANCH CODES:
T
= STRAIGHT TEE
RT
= REDUCING TEE (Note 10)
BS
= SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET ) Full couplings are permitted;
Half Couplings are NOT Permitted
BW
= WELDOLET
2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Page 4 of 4
970086 S8B1A1-2
Note 1
See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in
this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number.
Note 2
For drain, vent, and purge connections, forged valves shall have one end socket
weld, other end threaded.
Note 3
For instrument root valves, forged valves shall have one end socket weld, other
end threaded.
Note 4
For level connections, forged valves shall have ASME Class 150 raised face
flanged ends.
Note 5
Short radius elbows shall not be used.
Note 6
Use thread compound for threaded joints. Teflon tape is not permitted.
Note 7
Deleted
Note 8
Use of swaged nipples is not permitted when large end exceeds 2 inch NPS.
Note 9
Plain one end / threaded other end (POE / TOE) nipples for use on orifice flanges
shall have threaded connection seal welded.
Note 10
For Reducing Tees, socket weld reducer inserts fabricated in accordance with
MSS SP-79 are permitted.
Note 11
Use flat face flanges and full face gaskets to match flat face flanges only.
2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
Page 1 of 3
970086 S8B2A1-2
B2A1
CLASS 300 RF
-20F THRU 800F / -29C THRU 427C
0.063 inch (1.5 mm)
KILLED CARBON STEEL
ASME B31.3
UOP Valve
Code (Note 1)
Flanges
Socket Weld
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. 80, ASME B16.5.
Flanges
Weld Neck
Orifice Flanges
Weld Neck
Gaskets
Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.) filler, TP316 SS winding
and carbon steel solid centering ring, NPS 1/2 to 24, per ASME B16.20.
Small Fittings
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, ASME B16.11, socket
weld.
Large Fittings
(Notes 5)
NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, BW, wall thickness to match
pipe, ASME B16.9.
Branch Outlet
Fittings
(Note 7)
Concentric
Swages
(Note 8)
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80160, seamless,
PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95.
Eccentric
Swages
(Note 8)
PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95.
Nipples
(Note 6, 9)
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 160, seamless, TBE.
MSS SP-95.
MSS SP-95.
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 160, seamless,
POE/TOE.
Blinds
Spectacle
B16.48.
2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Page 2 of 3
970086 S8B2A1-2
Blinds
Spacer Ring
B16.48.
Blinds
Plate
B16.48.
GL-800
GL-801
threaded.
GL-300
GA-800
GA-802
GA-801
threaded.
GA-803
GA-300
CH-800
CH-300
Wafer
Check Valves
CH-302
NPS 2 to 24, Class 300, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, retainerless, lug
type, flangeless.
Spring Check
valve
CH-3080
Ball Valve
(Max Opr.
Temp 150 C)
BA-104
seat, PTFE/Graphite body seal, TFM/Graphite stem seal.
Ball Valve
(Max Opr.
Temp 150 C)
BA-304
NPS 1/2 to 4, Full Port, Soft-Sealed, "Fire-Safe" design, ASME Class

300 flanged RF, cast carbon steel, ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, 316
stainless steel ball and stem, Filled Teflon seats. TFE/Graphite body
seal and stem seal, Manufacturers standard gear operator.
Globe Valves
(Note 3)
Gate Valves
(Notes 2, 3, 4)
Check Valves
Bolting
All bolts, nuts & screws are to be coated with FluoroKote #1 .
Seamless
Pipe
Electric Fusion
Welded Pipe

NPS 16 to 24, ASTM A 672 Grade B65 Class 22, SCH. STD.,BBE
2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Page 3 of 3
970086 S8B2A1-2

RUN
SIZE
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
BRANCH SIZE
3/4
1
1-1/2 2
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
T
RT
RT
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
T
RT
RT
RT
T
RT
RT
T
RT
T
RT
RT
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
T
RT
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BRANCH CODES:
T
= STRAIGHT TEE
RT
BS
BW
= WELDOLET
Note 1
See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this
Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number.
Note 2
For drain, vent, and purge connections, forged valves shall have one end socket weld,
other end threaded.
Note 3
For instrument root valves, forged valves shall have one end socket weld, other end
threaded.
Note 4
For level connections, forged valves shall have ASME Class 300 raised face flanged
ends.
Note 5
Note 6
Note 7
Deleted
Note 8
Note 9
Plain one end / threaded other end (POE / TOE) nipples for use on orifice flanges shall
have threaded connection seal welded.
Note 10
2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
Page 1 of 3
970086 S8B2A2-1
B2A2
CLASS 300 RF
-20F THRU 800F / -29C THRU 427C
0.125 inch (3.0 mm)
KILLED CARBON STEEL
ASME B31.3
UOP Valve
Code (Note 1)
Flanges
Socket Weld
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. 160, ASME B16.5.
Flanges
Weld Neck
NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. Same as pipe, ASME
B16.5.
NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, Class 300 FF, SCH. STD., ASME B16.5.
Orifice Flanges
Weld Neck
NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. STD., with jack screws
Gaskets
For raised face flanges:-Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.)
filler, TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring, NPS 1/2
to 24, per ASME B16.20.
For flat face flanges:- Compressed non-asbestos, full face, 1/16" thick
NPS 1/2 to 24 ASME 16.21, dimensions per ASME B16.5 Class 300.
Small Fittings
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 6000, ASME B16.11, socket
weld.
Large Fittings
(Notes 5)
NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, BW, wall thickness to match
pipe, ASME B16.9.
Branch Outlet
Fittings
Weldolet. NPS 2 to 20, ASTM A 105, SCH. Match Pipe BW, MSS SP-97.
Concentric
Swages
(Note 8)
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. XXS160, seamless,
PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95.
Eccentric
Swages
(Note 8)
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. XXS160, seamless,
PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95.
MSS SP-95.
MSS SP-95.
2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Page 2 of 3
970086 S8B2A2-1
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. XXS160, seamless,

TBE.
Nipples
(Note 6, 9)
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. XXS160, seamless,

POE/TOE.
Blinds
Spectacle
B16.48.
Blinds
Spacer Ring
B16.48.
Blinds
Plate
B16.48.
GL-800
GL-801
threaded.
GL-300
GA-800
GA-802
GA-801
threaded.
GA-803
GA-300
CH-800
CH-300
Wafer
Check Valves
CH-302
NPS 2 to 24, Class 300, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, retainerless, lug
type, flangeless.
Spring Check
valve
CH-3080
Ball Valve
(Max Opr.
Temp 150 C)
BA-104
seat, PTFE/Graphite body seal, TFM/Graphite stem seal.
Ball Valve
(Max Opr.
Temp 150 C)
BA-304
NPS 1/2 to 4, Full Port, Soft-Sealed, "Fire-Safe" design, ASME Class

300 flanged RF, cast carbon steel, ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, 316
stainless steel ball and stem, Filled Teflon seats. TFE/Graphite body
seal and stem seal, Manufacturers standard gear operator.
Globe Valves
(Note 3)
Gate Valves
(Notes 2, 3, 4)
Check Valves
Bolting
Seamless
Pipe

NPS 2 to 14, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. (later if needed), BBE.
2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Page 3 of 3
970086 S8B2A2-1
2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Page 4 of 3
970086 S8B2A2-1

RUN
SIZE
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
BRANCH SIZE
3/4
1
1-1/2 2
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
T
RT
RT
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
T
RT
RT
RT
T
RT
RT
T
RT
T
RT
RT
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
T
RT
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BRANCH CODES:
T
= STRAIGHT TEE
RT
BS
BW
= WELDOLET
Note 1
Note 2
For drain, vent, and purge connections, forged valves shall have one end socket weld,
other end threaded.
Note 3
For instrument root valves, forged valves shall have one end socket weld, other end
threaded.
Note 4
For level connections, forged valves shall have ASME Class 300 raised face flanged
ends.
Note 5
Note 6
Note 7
Deleted
Note 8
Note 9
Plain one end / threaded other end (POE / TOE) nipples for use on orifice flanges shall
have threaded connection seal welded.
Note 10
2013-01-07
UOP Specification
Piping Material Line Class M1A1
Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
Page 1 of 2
970086 S8M1A1-1
M1A1
CORROSIVE PROCESS
CLASS 150 RF
-50F THRU 700F / -45C THRU 370C
0.063 inch (1.6 mm)
TP 316/316L STAINLESS STEEL
ASME B31.3
ASME B16.5
UOP Valve
Code (Note 1)
Flanges
Socket Weld
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F316/316L, Class 150,

RF, SCH. 80S, ASME B16.5.
Gaskets
Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.) filler, TP316 SS

winding and carbon steel solid centering ring.
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, dimensions per ASME B16.20.
Small Fittings
(Socket weld)

ASME B16.11, socket weld.
Small Fittings
(Butt weld)
(Note 5)
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 403 Grade WP316/316L S, WP 316L

WX or WP 316L WU, SCH. 80S, BW, ASME B16.9.
Concentric
Swages

ASME B16.11, SW or BW.
Eccentric
Swages

ASME B16.11, SW or BW.
Globe Valves
(Note 2)
GL-880
NPS 1/2-to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged stainless steel, ASTM A

182 Grade F316, socket weld.
Gate Valves
(Notes 2)
GA-880
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged stainless steel, ASTM A 182
Grade F316, socket weld.
GA-881
Grade F316, socket weld x threaded.
CH-880
Grade F316, socket weld.
Check Valves
Bolting
Stud Bolts. ASTM A 193 Grade B8 threaded full length, with two
ASTM A 194 Grade 8 heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts.
Seamless
Pipe
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 312 Grade TP316/316L, SCH. 80S,

PBE or BBE.
or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission..
2013-01-07
UOP Specification
Piping Material Line Class M1A1
Page 2 of 2
970086 S8M1A1-1

RUN
SIZE
3/4
1
1-1/2
3/4
1-1/2
T
RT
RT
T
RT
BRANCH CODES:
T
= STRAIGHT TEE
RT
= REDUCING TEE
BS
= SOCKOLET (THREDOLET) CLASS 3000 MINIMUM Full couplings are permitted;
BW
= WELDOLET
Note 1
Note 2
For instrument root valves, drain, vent, and purge connections forged valves shall
have one end socket weld, other end threaded.
Note 3
Short radius elbows shall not be used except for jacketed piping..
Note 4
Note 5
Use butt welded fittings for jacketed piping
or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission..
2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Piping Material Line Class MS-1
Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
Page 1 of 3
970086 S8MS1-2
MS-1
REFINERY AIR AND WATER
CLASS 150 RF/FF
-20F THRU 300F / -29C THRU 149C
0.063 inch (1.5 mm)
CARBON STEEL / BRONZE / DUCTILE IRON
ASME B31.3
ASME B16.5 for sizes to NPS 24, ASME B16.47 for NPS 30
UOP Valve
Code (Note 1)
Flanges
Threaded
NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 105, Class 150, RF/FF, ASME B16.5.
Flanges Weld
Neck
NPS 30, ASTM A 105, Class 150 RF, SCH STD, ASME B16.47 Series A.
Gaskets
Compressed non-asbestos, ring type, 1/16" thick, punched per ASME

B16.5 Class 150, dimensions per ASME B 16.21
NPS 1/2 to 24, for ASME B16.5 flanges
NPS 30, for ASME B16.47 series A flanges.
Small Fittings
NPS 1/4 to 2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, ASME B16.11, threaded.
Large Fittings
NPS 3 to 30, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. STD., BW, ASME B16.9.
Unions
NPS 1/4 to 2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, MSS SP-83, integral bronze seat,
threaded.
Couplings
NPS 1/4 to 2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, ASME B16.11, Threaded.
Plugs
NPS 1/4 to 2, ASTM A 105, solid forged steel, hex/round head, threaded.
Branch Outlet
Fittings
Elbolet. NPS 1/4 to 2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, threaded.

Thredolet. NPS 1/4 to 2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, MSS SP-97.
Concentric
Swages
NPS 1/41/2 to 2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 160, seamless, TBE,
MSS SP-95.
Eccentric
Swages
NPS 1/41/2 to 2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 160, seamless, TBE,
MSS SP-95.
Nipples
NPS 1/41/2 to 2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, seamless, SCH. 160, TBE.
Blinds
Spectacle
NPS 1 to 12, ASTM A 516 Grade 70, Normalized, Class 150, RF, ASME
B16.48.
2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Page 2 of 3
970086 S8MS1-2
GL-1160
NPS 1/4 to 2, bronze, ASTM B62 Alloy C83600, Class 150, threaded.
GL-1170
NPS 3 to 6, ductile iron body, ASTM A 395, Class 150, flanged, raised
face.
Gate Valves
(Note 2)
GA-1160
NPS 1/4 to 2, bronze, ASTM B 62 Alloy C83600, Class 150, threaded.
GA-1170
NPS 3 to 12, ductile iron body, ASTM A 395, Class 150, flanged, raised
face.
Check Valves
CH-13160
NPS 1/4 to 2, bronze, ASTM B 61 Alloy C83600, Class 200, threaded.
CH-1170
NPS 3 to 12, ductile iron body, ASTM A 395, Class 150, flanged, flat face.
Ball Valves
(Note 2)
BA-1160
NPS 1/4 to 3, bronze, forged, ASTM B 124 Alloy C37700, or cast ASTM B
584 Alloy C 84400, Class 150, threaded.
Butterfly
Valves
BF-1170
NPS 2 to 12, ductile iron body, ASTM A 395 or ASTM A 536, Class 150,
lug type.
Globe Valves
Bolting
Machine Bolts. ASTM A 307 Grade B, square head, with one ASTM A 563
Grade A heavy semi-finished hexagonal nut. Nuts and bolts shall be
coated with FluoroKote #1 .
Pipe
NPS 1/41/2 to 2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, seamless, SCH. 160, TBE.

NPS 3 to 14, ASTM A 106 Grade B seamless, SCH. STD., BBE.
Electric Fusion
Welded Pipe
2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Page 3 of 3
970086 S8MS1-2

RUN
SIZE
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
3/4
1-1/2
10
12
14
16
18
20
T
RT
RT
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
T
RT
RT
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
T
RT
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
T
RT
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
T
RT
RT
RT
T
RT
RT
T
RT
20
BS
BS
BS
BS
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
RT
RT
RT
RT
24
30
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
RT
BW
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
24
30
T
RT
:
BRANCH CODES:
T
= STRAIGHT TEE
RT
= REDUCING TEE
BS
= THREDOLET CLASS 3000 MINIMUM, Full couplings are permitted;
BW
= WELDOLET
Note 1
Note 2
Ball valves may be substituted for gate valves.
2012-10-29
UOP Specification
Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
Page 1 of 2
970086 S8MS2-0
MS-2
INSTRUMENT AIR, DRINKING WATER
CLASS 150 RF
-20F THRU 150F / -29C THRU 66C
NONE
GALVANIZED STEEL / BRONZE / TP316 / MALLEABLE IRON
ASME B31.3
100 PSIG / 7.03 kg/cm2g.
UOP Valve
Code (Note 1)
Flanges
Threaded
NPS 1/2 to 4, ASTM A105, Class 150, RF, ASME B16.5,

galvanized inside and outside.
Gaskets

winding and carbon steel solid centering ring, per ASME B16.20.
Small Fittings
(Note 2)
NPS 1/2 to 4, malleable iron, ASTM A 197, Class 150, threaded,

ASME B 16.3, galvanized inside and outside.
Branch
Fittings
See branch connection table.
Unions
(Note 2)
NPS 1/4 to 3, malleable iron, ASTM A 197 with brass seats,

threaded, ASME B16.39, galvanized inside and outside.
Connections
NPS 1/4 to 4, threaded couplings for steel pipe, galvanized inside

and outside.
Couplings
(Note 2)
NPS 1/4 to 4, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, ASME B16.11, threaded,

galvanized inside and outside,
Plugs
NPS 1/4 to 3, solid forged steel, ASTM A 105, hex head/round,

threaded, galvanized.
Blinds
Spectacle
NPS 3/4 to 3, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 normalized , for use with

Class 150 RF Flanges, ASME B16.48, galvanized steel
304 or 316 stainless steel can be substituted in lieu of galvanized
steel blinds.
Globe Valves
GL-1160
NPS 1/4 to 3, bronze, ASTM B 62 Alloy C 83600, Class 150,

threaded.
Gate Valves
GA-1160

threaded.
Check Valves
CH-13160

threaded.
2012-10-29
UOP Specification
Ball Valves
BA-1160
Page 2 of 2
970086 S8MS2-0
NPS 1/4 to 3, bronze, forged ASTM B 124 Alloy C 37700 or cast

ASTM B 584 Alloy C 84400, Class 150, threaded.
Stud Bolts. ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded full length, with two
ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts.
Bolting
Nuts and bolts shall be coated with FluoroKote #1 .

NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, seamless, SCH. 80, TBE,
Pipe
NPS 3 to 4, ASTM A 106 Grade B seamless, SCH. STD., TBE,


RUN
SIZE
1/2
3/4
1
11/2
2
3
4
BREANCH SIZE
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/2 2
T
T
RT
RT
T
RT
RT
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
RT
T
RT
RT
T
RT
BRANCH CODES:
T
= STRAIGHT TEE
RT
= REDUCING TEE (or REDUCING FITTING)
Note 1
Note 2
For fittings, unions and couplings, ASTM A 338 material is an acceptable

substitute for ASTM A 197 material.
2012-10-29
UOP Specification
Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
Page 1 of 1
970086 S8MS7-0
MS-7
STAINLESS STEEL TUBING
N/A
-20F THRU 800F / -29C THRU 427C
NONE
TP 316
ASME B31.3
Thru 800 psi
UOP Valve
Code (Note 1)
Class 3000, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316, threaded,
compression type.
Parker CPI or Crawford Swagelok.
Small Fittings
(Notes 3, 4)
Globe Valves
GL-882
NPS 1/2 to 1, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316,

threaded.
Gate Valves
GA-882

threaded.
Check Valves
CH-882

threaded.
Tubing
(Note 2)
NPS 1/4 to 1/2, seamless, ASTM A 269 Grade TP316,

0.035 inch (0.889 mm) wall.
NPS 5/8 to 1, seamless, ASTM A 269 Grade TP316,
0.049 inch (1.25 mm) wall.
Note 1
Note 2
Hydrotest limited by tubing.
Note 3
Seal welding of threaded components not required.
Note 4
Branch connections are to be made with an equal tee and union reducer.
2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Piping Material Line Class MS11
Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
Page 1 of 4
970086 S8MS11-2
MS11
STEAM AND CONDENSATE
CLASS 150 RF
-20F THRU 700F / -29C THRU 371C
0.063 inch (1.5 mm)
KILLED CARBON STEEL
ASME B31.3
UOP Valve
Code (Note 1)
Flanges
Socket Weld
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 150 RF, SCH. 80, ASME
B16.5.
Flanges
Weld neck
NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, Class 150 RF, SCH. STD.

ASME B16.5.
Gaskets

winding and carbon steel solid centering ring.
NPS 1/2 to 24, per ASME B16.20.
Small Fittings
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, ASME B16.11,

socket weld.
Large Fittings
(Note 5)
NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. STD. BW

ASME B16.9.
Branch Outlet
Fittings
Elbolet NPS 1 & 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, socket weld.
Sockolet NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000,
MSS SP-97.
Weldolet NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, SCH. STD.,BW,
MSS SP-97.
Concentric
Swages
(Note 8)
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 16080,

seamless, PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95.
Eccentric
Swages
(Note 8)

seamless,
PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95.

seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95.

seamless,
PBE, MSS SP-95.
2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Page 2 of 4
970086 S8MS11-2
Nipples
(Note 6, 9)

TBE.
POE/TOE.
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 80160,
seamless, PBE.
Blinds
Spectacle
NPS 1 to 12, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized, Class 150 RF,

ASME B16.48.
Blinds
Spacer Ring

ASME B16.48.
Blinds
Plate

ASME B16.48.
Globe Valves
(Note 3)
Gate Valves
(Notes 2, 3)
Check Valves
Wafer Check
Valves
Bolting
GL-800
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged ASTM A 105, socket weld.
GL-801
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged ASTM A 105, socket weld x
threaded.
GL-100
GA-800
GA-802
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged ASTM A 105, socket weld,
full port.
GA-801
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged ASTM A 105, socket weld x
threaded.
GA-100
CH-800
CH-100
NPS 2 to 24 Class 150 cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged.
CH-102
NPS 2 to 24, Class 150, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, lug
type, retainerless, flangeless
Stud Bolts ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded full length, with
two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts.
Seamless
Pipe
Electric Fusion
Welded Pipe

NPS 16 to 24, ASTM A 672 Grade B60 Class 21 SCH.STD.
BBE.
2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Page 3 of 4
970086 S8MS11-2

BRANCH SIZE
RUN 3/4
1
1-1/2 2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
SIZE
3/4
T
1
RT
T
1-1/2 RT
RT
T
2
BS
RT
RT
T
3
BS
BS
BS
RT
T
4
BS
BS
BS
BW RT
T
6
BS
BS
BS
BW BW RT
T
8
BS
BS
BS
BW BW BW RT
T
10
BS
BS
BS
BW BW BW RT
RT
T
12
BS
BS
BS
BW BW BW BW RT
RT
T
14
BS
BS
BS
BW BW BW BW RT
RT
RT
T
16
BS
BS
BS
BW BW BW BW BW RT
RT
RT
18
BS
BS
BS
BW BW BW BW BW BW RT
RT
20
BS
BS
BS
BW BW BW BW BW BW RT
RT
24
BS
BS
BS
BW BW BW BW BW BW BW RT
BRANCH CODES:
T
= STRAIGHT TEE
RT
BS
= SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET) Full couplings are permitted;
BW
= WELDOLET
16
18
20
24
T
RT
RT
RT
T
RT
RT
T
RT
2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Page 4 of 4
970086 S8MS11-2
Note 1
Note 2
Note 3
end threaded.
Note 4
Note 5
Note 6
Note 7
Deleted
Note 8
Use not permitted when large end exceeds 1-1/2 inch NPS.
Note 9
2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
Page 1 of 3
970086 S8MS12-2
MS12
STEAM AND CONDENSATE
CLASS 300 RF
-20F THRU 800F / -29C THRU 427C
0.063 inch (1.5 mm)
KILLED CARBON STEEL
ASME B31.3
UOP Valve
Code (Note 1)
Flanges
Socket Weld
ASME B16.5.
Flanges
Weld Neck
Gaskets

winding and carbon steel solid centering ring,
Small Fittings
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, ASME B16.11,

socket weld.
Large Fittings
(Note 5)
NPS 2 to 12, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. STD., BW, ASME
B16.9.
Branch Outlet
Fittings
(Note 7)
Concentric
Swages
PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95.
PBE, MSS SP-95.
Eccentric
Swages
PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95.
PBE, MSS SP-95.
Nipples
(Note 6, 9)

TBE.
POE/TOE.
Blinds
Spectacle

ASME B16.48.
2013-01-09
Globe Valves
(Note 3)
Gate Valves
(Notes 2, 3, 4)
Check Valves
Wafer
Check Valves
Bolting
UOP Specification
Page 2 of 3
970086 S8MS12-2
GL-800
NPS 1-1/2 and smaller, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld.
GL-801
NPS 1-1/2 and smaller, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld
x threaded.
GL-300
GA-800
GA-802
NPS 1-1/2 and smaller, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld,
full port.
GA-801
NPS 1-1/2 and smaller, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld
x threaded.
GA-300
CH-800
CH-300
CH-302
Stud Bolts. ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded full length, with two
Seamless
Pipe

2013-01-09
UOP Specification
Page 3 of 3
970086 S8MS12-2

BRANCH SIZE
RUN 3/4
1
1-1/2 2
3
4
6
8
10
12
SIZE
3/4
T
1
RT
T
1-1/2 RT
RT
T
2
BS
RT
RT
T
3
BS
BS
BS
RT
T
4
BS
BS
BS
BW RT
T
6
BS
BS
BS
BW BW RT
T
8
BS
BS
BS
BW BW BW RT
T
10
BS
BS
BS
BW BW BW RT
RT
T
12
BS
BS
BS
BW BW BW BW RT
RT
T
BRANCH CODES:
T
= STRAIGHT TEE
RT
BS
BW
= WELDOLET (Note 7)
PIPET, manufactured by WFI, is acceptable alternate to WELDOLET for branch outlet fittings.
Note 1
Note 2
Note 3
end threaded.
Note 4
Note 5
Note 6
Note 7
Deleted
Note 8
Deleted
Note 9
2013-01-10
UOP M&ET Specification

Piping Material Line Class PR-1
Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
Page 1 of 2
970086 S8PR1-2
PR-1
CATALYST WITHDRAWL LINE WITH HYDROGEN
CLASS 300 RF
-20F THRU 1025F / -29C THRU 551C
Note 3
1.25 CR - 0.5 MO (Notes 2)
ASME B31.3
ASME B16.5
UOP Valve
Code (Note 1)
Flanges
Weld Neck
NPS 1 to 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, Class 300, RF, SCH. 160,
ASME B16.5.
(Note 5)
ASME B16.5.
Gaskets
Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.) filler,

TP304 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring.
NPS 1/2 to 10, dimensions per ASME B16.20.
Fittings
NPS 1 to 2, ASTM A 234 Grade WP11, SCH. 160,

ASME B16.9. BW
NPS 3 to 8, ASTM A 234 Grade WP11, SCH. 80, BW,
ASME B16.9.
Elbolet NPS 1 & 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, SCH 160,
BW, MSS SP-97.
Branch Outlet
Fittings
Latrolet NPS 1 & 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11 SCH 160,
BW, MSS SP-97, for use with reinforcement pad.
Weldolet NPS 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, SCH. 160, BW,
MSS SP-97.
Weldolet NPS 2 to 8, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, SCH. 80,
BW, MSS SP-97.
Ball Valves
(Note 6)
BA-387
NPS 1 to 8, Class 300, 316 SS, flanged, RF, Stellite or 316 SS

with Stellite overlay or 316 SS with metallurgically bonded
abrasion resistant coating ball and seat, 316 stainless steel stem.
Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any
purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.
2013-01-10
Bolting

Page 2 of 2
970086 S8PR1-2
Stud Bolts { 900F (482C) and under} - ASTM A 193 Grade B7,
threaded, full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy
semi-finished hexagonal nuts
Stud bolts {Over 900F (482C)} - ASTM A 193 Grade B16,
threaded, full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 4 heavy semifinished hexagonal nuts.
Pipe
NPS 1 to 2, ASTM A 335 Grade P11, seamless, SCH. 160, BE.
(Note 3, 4)
Note 1
See UOP Project Specification UOPM S8V000 for description of UOP Valve
Codes used in this Pipe Class.
Note 2
Postweld heat treatment (PWHT) shall follow the requirements of ASME B31.3
and UOP Project specification 801 requirements as listed below, applicable to 1Cr
- 1/2 Mo and 1-1/4 Cr - 1/2 Mo Materials
Pressure retaining components (regardless of size, thickness or product form)
shall be postweld heat treated (PWHT) in accordance with the requirements of
ASME B31.3. No exemptions from postweld heat treatment are permitted.
The maximum room temperature tensile strength of all pressure retaining
components and welds shall be 100,000 psi (7030 kg/cm2).
Fillet welds to pressure retaining components shall be ground to a smooth,
concave contour.
Pressure retaining welds, whether shop or field, shall be 100% radiographed.
Branch welds that cannot be radiographed shall be 100% ultrasonically
examined.
Note 3
Piping schedules indicated herein include corrosion and erosion allowances due to
the process catalyst flow.
Note 4
Design and Fabrication of piping shall allow for all welds to be ground smooth to
match I.D. of pipe. This is to minimize catalyst attrition.
Note 5
Welding neck flanges must be tapered bored where indicated on UOP Mechanical
Flow Diagrams.
Note 6
Maximum temperature 450 Degrees F ( 232 Degrees C).
2013-01-04

Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
Page 1 of 2
970086 S8PR2-1
PR-2
CATALYST WITHDRAWAL LINE
CLASS 300 RF
-20F THRU 550F / -29C THRU 288C
NOTE 2
KILLED CARBON STEEL
ASME B31.3
ASME B16.5
UOP Valve
Code (Note 1)
Flanges
Weld Neck
(Note 4)
NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 105, Class 300, RF, SCH. 160,

ASME B16.5.
Gaskets

Large Fittings
NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 160, BW,

ASME B16.9.
NPS 2 1/2 to 10, ASTM A 105, Class 300, RF, SCH. 80,
ASME B16.5.
NPS 3 to 10, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, BW,

ASME B16.9.
Weldolet NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 105, SCH. 160, BW,
MSS SP-97.
Branch Outlet
Fittings
Weldolet NPS 3 to 10, ASTM A 105, SCH. 80, BW,

MSS SP-97.
Latrolet NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 105, SCH. 160, BW,
MSS SP-97.
B-Ball Valves
(Note 5)
BA-386X
NPS 1 to 10, Class 300, cast Steel, ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M,
flanged, RF, 316 Stainless steel ball and stem, Filled Teflon
seated
Bolting
Stud Bolts ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded, full length, with
two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts.
Pipe
(Note 2, 3)
NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, seamless, SCH. 160, BE.

NPS 3 to 10, ASTM A 106 Grade B, seamless, SCH. 80, BE.
2013-01-04

Page 2 of 2
970086 S8PR2-1
Note 1
See UOP Project Specification 970086 S8V000 for description of UOP Valve
Note 2
the process catalyst flow.
Note 3
Note 4
Flow Diagrams.
Note 5
Valve shall be installed where indicated as B on UOP Mechanical Flow

Diagrams.
2012-11-02
UOP Specification
Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
Page 1 of 2
970086 S8PR3-0
PR-3
CATALYST
CLASS 150 RF
-20F THRU 850F / -29C THRU 454C
NOTE 2
KILLED CARBON STEEL
ASME B31.3
ASME B16.5
UOP Valve
Code (Note 1)
Flanges
Weld Neck
(Note 4, 5)
NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 105, Class 150, RF, SCH. 160, ASME B16.5.
NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 105, Class 300, RF, SCH. 160, ASME B16.5.
NPS 2-1/2 to 10, ASTM A 105, Class 300, RF, SCH. 80, ASME B16.5.
NPS 2-1/2 to 10, ASTM A 105, Class 300, RF, SCH. 80, ASME B16.5.
Gaskets
and carbon steel solid centering ring.
Fittings
NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 160, BW, ASME B16.9.
NPS 2 1/2 to 10, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, BW, ASME B16.9.
Branch Outlet
Fittings
Weldolet NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 105, SCH. 160, BW, MSS SP-97.
Weldolet NPS 2 1/2 to 10, ASTM A 105, SCH. 80, BW, MSS SP-97.
Latrolet NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 105, SCH. 160, BW, MSS SP-97.
Latrolet NPS 2 1/2 to 10, ASTM A 105, SCH.80, BW, MSS SP-97.
Bolting
Stud Bolts - ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded, full length, with two
Pipe
(Note 2, 3)
NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, seamless, SCH.160, BE.

NPS 2 1/2 to 10, ASTM A 106 Grade B, seamless, SCH.80, BE.
Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose
whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.
2012-11-02
UOP Specification
Page 2 of 2
970086 S8PR3-0
Note 1
Note 2
Piping schedules indicated herein include corrosion and erosion allowances due to the
process catalyst flow. For the purpose of code pipe stress calculations, a minimum
corrosion (erosion) allowance of 0.094 shall be used, unless noted otherwise in the
project specifications.
Note 3
Design and Fabrication of piping shall allow for all welds to be ground smooth to match
I.D. of pipe. This is to minimize catalyst attrition.
Note 4
Flow Diagrams.
Note 5
Use Class 300 flanges to match with Class 300 flanges.
2012-10-30

Page 1 of 2
970086 S8PR4-0
Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
PR-4
CATALYST LIFT LINE
CLASS 150 RF
-20F THRU 550F / -29C THRU 288C
NOTE 2
KILLED CARBON STEEL
ASME B31.3
ASME B16.5
Flanges
Weld Neck
(Note 3)
NPS 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 105, Class 150, RF, SCH. 80,

ASME B16.5.
Gaskets

TP304 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring,
Couplings
(Notes 1 &.3)
DUR O LOK coupling.

ASTM A 403 Grade WP304-S, SCH. 80.
Fittings
NPS 1 1/2 and smaller, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, forged, socket
weld, ASME B16.9
ASME B16.9.
Branch Outlet
Fittings
Latrolet NPS 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 105, SCH. 80.
Swages
Concentric NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH.

80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95.
Eccentric NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH.
80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95.
Blinds
Spectacle
NPS 1 to 8, ASTM A 285 Grade C, Class 150, RF, API 590.
Bolting
two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H, heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts.
Pipe
(Notes 1 & 2)
NPS 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 53 Grade B or ASTM A 106 Grade B,

seamless, SCH. 80,
2012-10-30
Note 1

Page 2 of 2
970086 S8PR4-0
To minimize catalyst attrition, this piping is to be fabricated in accordance with the

following requirements:
1.1.
Refer to UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams for piping section requirements

and special 110 elbow detail. Use minimum lineal feet (meters) of pipe.
1.2.
Use maximum lengths of pipe. 20 feet (6.1 meters) minimum, to minimize

the number of joints.
1.3.
Join pipe sections together as shown on UOP Standard Drawing 8-127

(latest revision) using a TP 304 stainless steel UOP Dur O Lok coupling.
No substitution allowed.
1.4.
Use long radius pipe bends for all changes in direction with radius as
specified on UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams.
Note 2
Pipe schedule indicated herein includes corrosion and erosion allowances due to
the process catalyst flow. For the purpose of code pipe stress calculations, a
minimum corrosion (erosion) allowance of 0.094 shall be used, unless noted
otherwise in the project specifications.
Note 3
Flanged connections are to be welding neck with the inside weld ground smooth.
2013-01-10

Page 1 of 3
970086 S8PR5-1
Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
PR-5
PROCESS CHLORINATED HOT AIR
CLASS 150 RF (NOTE 1)
-20F THRU 1000F / -29C THRU 540C
0.063 inch (1.5 mm)
Inconel 600 (UNS N06600)
ASME B31.3
ASME B16.5
Flanges
NPS 1/2 to 1 1/2, ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600, Class 150,
RF, socket weld
Flanges
Weld Neck
NPS 2 to 8 inch, ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600, Class 150, RF,
ID to match the inside of pipe.
10 inch and larger ASME Class 150 forged lap joint, ASTM A 182
F11 with Inconel 600ASTM B564 UNS N06600 stub ends.
Orifice Flanges
NPS 1-1/2, ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600, Class 150 RF,
Socket Weld, with jack screws ASME B16.36 NPT taps.
NPS 2 to 24 ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600, Class 150 RF,. ID
to match the inside of pipe, with jack screws ASME B16.36 NPT
taps.
Gaskets
Spiral wound with in accordance with ASME B16.20 with Inconel

600 windings and Garfoil filler.
Fittings
NPS 1 1/2 and smaller, ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600, Class
3000, forged, socket weld
NPS 2 and larger, ASTM B 366 Class WPNCI, SCH. Same as
Pipe.
Fittings for tubing Class 3000 forged threaded compression type
ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600
Branch Outlet
Fittings
ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600, SCH. 80.
Swages
Concentric NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPBB366

Class WPNCI, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95.
Eccentric NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPBB366
Class WPNCI, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95.
2013-01-10
Globe Valves

GL-6180
NPS to 1 , ASME Class 600 cast socket weld, OS&Y,

bolted bonnet, ASTM A494 Gr. CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600
body/bonnet, Alloy 600 trim, hard faced seats, ASME B16.34
GL-6181
NPS , ASME Class 600 cast, OS&Y, bolted bonnet, ASTM

A494 Gr. CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet, Alloy
600 trim, hard faced seats, ASME B16.34, SW X Threaded
GL-1180
NPS 2 to 6, CL 150 RF, OS&Y bolted bonnet, ASTM A494 Gr.

CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet, Alloy 600 trim,
hard faced seats, ASME B16.34
GA-6180
NPS to 1 , ASME Class 600 cast socket weld, OS&Y,

bolted bonnet, ASTM A494 Gr. CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600
body/bonnet, Alloy 600 trim, hard faced seats, API 602
GA-1180
NPS 2 to 24, CL 150 RF, OS&Y bolted bonnet, ASTM A494 Gr.
CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet, Alloy 600 trim,
flexible wedge, hard faced seats, API 600.
GA-1181
NPS 1, CL 150 RF, OS&Y bolted bonnet, ASTM A494 Gr. CY-40
Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet, Alloy 600 trim, flexible
wedge, hard faced seats, API 600.
CH-6180
to 1 , CL 600 SW, bolted Cap, Swing Check, ASTM A494

Gr CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet cap, Alloy 600
trim, HF seat, ASME B16.34
CH-1180
2 to 12, CL 150 RF, bolted Cap, Swing Check, ASTM A494 Gr

CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet cap, Alloy 600
trim, HF seat, ASME B16.34
(NOTES 3 & 4)
Gate Valves
(NOTES 3 & 4)
Check Valves
Page 2 of 3
970086 S8PR5-1
(Notes 3 & 4)
Blinds
Spectacle
NPS 1 to 8, ASTM A 285 Grade CA168 UNS N06600, Class 150,

RF, API 590ASME B16.48.
Bolting
two ASTM A 194 Grade 4, nuts.
Pipe
(Notes 1 & 2)
NPS to 1 in, Seamless, ASTM B 167, Alloy UNS N06600

SCH. 80S PE.
NPS 2 to 6 in, Seamless, ASTM B 167, Alloy UNS N06600 SCH.
STD BE.
NPS 24 18 in and larger, Hot rolled, fusion welded per ASTM
B168, Alloy UNS N06600, longitudinal welds 100% radiograph
per ASME B31.3, SCH 5S0.375 in.
Nipples
NPS to 1 in, Seamless, ASTM B 167, Alloy UNS N06600

SCH. 80S PBE.
Tubing
OD, ASTM B 444 Gr 1, Alloy UNS N06600, 0.035 inch

(0.89mm) wall.
2013-01-10
Note 1
Note 2
Note 3

Page 3 of 3
970086 S8PR5-1
All Inconel 600 (Alloy UNS N06600) material shall be supplied in annealed
condition.
Where the flange design temperature exceeds the limit of ASME B16.5, the
contractor shall verify the flange ratings in accordance with Appendix 2, section
VIII, Division 1 of the ASME Code.
Each casting shall meet the hydrostatic test requirements of ASTM Specification A
703.
Note 4
No elastomeric components shall be allowed in the valves.
2012-10-30

Page 1 of 2
970086 S8PR6-0
Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
PR-6
CATALYST LIFT LINE WITH HYDROGEN
CLASS 300 RF
-20F THRU 550F / -29C THRU 288C
NOTE 2
KILLED CARBON STEEL
ASME B31.3
ASME B16.5
Flanges
Weld Neck
(Note 3)
NPS 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 105, Class 300, RF, SCH.80,

ASME B16.5.
Gaskets

Couplings
(Note 1.3)
DUR O LOK coupling.

ASTM A 403 Grade WP 304-S, SCH. 80.
Fittings
NPS 1 and smaller, ASTM A 105, Class 3000 forged socket

weld
ASME B16.9.
Branch Outlet
Fittings
Latrolet NPS 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 105, SCH. 80.
Swages
Concentric NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB,

SCH. 80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95.
Eccentric NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB,
SCH.80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95.
Blinds
Spectacle
NPS 1 to 8, ASTM A 515 Grade 70, Class 300, RF, API 590.
Bolting
two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H, heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts.
Seamless
Pipe
NPS 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 80.
2012-10-30
Note 1

Page 2 of 2
970086 S8PR6-0
To minimize catalyst attrition, this piping is to be fabricated in accordance with the

following requirements:
1.1.
Refer to UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams for piping section requirements

and special 110 elbow detail. Use minimum lineal feet (meters) of pipe.
1.2.
Use maximum lengths of pipe. 20 feet (6.1 meters) minimum, to minimize

the number of joints.
1.3.
Join pipe sections together as shown on UOP Standard Drawing 8-127

(latest revision) using a TP 304 stainless steel UOP Dur O Lok coupling.
No substitution allowed.
1.4.
Flanges are not allowed except as noted as FLANGE on the UOP

Mechanical Flow Diagrams. Flanged connection is to be welding neck
with inside ground smooth after welding. The flanged connection is to be
inspected by the UOP chief operator before assembly.
1.5.
Use long radius pipe bends for all changes in direction with radius as
specified on UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams.
Note 2
Note 3
Flanged connections are to be welding neck with the inside weld ground smooth.
2013-01-10
UOP Specification
Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
Page 1 of 4
970086 S8PR8-1
PR-8
GENERAL PROCESS
CLASS 150 RF
-20F THRU 700F / -29C THRU 371C
0.063 inch (1.5 mm)
KILLED CARBON STEEL
ASME B31.3
ASME B16.5 for sizes to NPS 24, ASME B16.47 series A for NPS 30
UOP Valve
Code (Note 1)
Flanges
Socket Weld
ASME B16.5.
Flanges
Weld Neck
(Note11)
NPS 30, ASTM A 105, Class 150 RF, SCH STD, ASME B16.47 Series A
Orifice Flanges
Weld Neck
NPS 2 to 24 ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. STD., with jack screws
Gaskets
(Note11)
and carbon steel solid centering ring, per ASME B16.20.
NPS 1/2 to 24 for ASME B16.5 flanges, per ASME B16.20.
NPS 30 for ASME B16.47 Series A flanges
Small Fittings
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, ASME B16.11, socket weld.
Large Fittings
(Notes 5)
NPS 2 to 30, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, BW, wall thickness to match pipe,
ASME B16.9.
Branch Outlet
Fittings
Concentric
Swages
(Note 8)
PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95.
Eccentric
Swages
(Note 8)
PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95.
MSS SP-95.
MSS SP-95.
2013-01-10
UOP Specification
Page 2 of 4
970086 S8PR8-1
NPS 1/21/4 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 80160, seamless, TBE.
Nipples
(Note 6, 9)
NPS 1/21/4 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 80160, seamless,

POE/TOE.
Blinds
Spectacle
B16.48.
Blinds
Spacer Ring
B16.48.
Blinds
Plate
B16.48.
GL-800
GL-801
threaded.
GL-100
GA-800
GA-802
GA-801
threaded.
GA-803
GA-100
CH-800
CH-100
Wafer
Check Valves
CH-102
Spring Check
valve
CH-3080
Needle Valves
(Later)NE-3080
NPS 1/4, Bar stock globe-type metering valve, 316 SS body, 0.063 in (1.5
mm) orifice, female pipe thread.
Globe Valves
(Note 3)
Gate Valves
(Notes 2, 3, 4)
Check Valves
(Temp Limit
250F (120C))
NPS 1/4, integral-bonnet needle valve, 316 SS body, 0.175 in (4.4 mm)
orifice, regulating stem, male pipe thread.
NPS 1/4, straight through rising plug valve, 316 SS body, 0.187 in (4.8
mm) orifice, female pipe thread.
Bolting
Stud Bolts. ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded full length, with two ASTM A
194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts.
Seamless
Pipe
Electric Fusion
Welded Pipe

2013-01-10
UOP Specification
Page 3 of 4
970086 S8PR8-1

RUN
SIZE
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
BRANCH SIZE
3/4 1
11/2
T
RT T
RT RT T
BS RT RT
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
BS BS BS
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
T
RT
RT
RT
T
RT
RT
T
RT
BRANCH CODES:
T
= STRAIGHT TEE
RT
BS
BW
= WELDOLET
2013-01-10
UOP Specification
Page 4 of 4
970086 S8PR8-1
Note 1
Note 2
Note 3
end threaded.
Note 4
For level connections, forged valves shall have ASME Class 150 raised face
flanged ends.
Note 5
Note 6
Note 7
Deleted
Note 8
Note 9
Note 10
Note 11
Use flat face flanges and full face gaskets to match flat face flanges only.
2012-12-19

Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
Page 1 of 2
970086 S8PR10-1
PR-10
CLASS 300 RF
-20F THRU 1025F / -29C THRU 551C
Note 2
1.25 CR - 0.5 MO (Note 3)
ASME B31.3
ASME B16.5
UOP Valve
Code (Note 1)
NPS 1/2 to 12, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, Class 300, RF, SCH. 80,
ASME B16.5.
Flanges
Weld Neck
(Note 7)
Gaskets

Fittings
(Note 4)
NPS1 1/2 to 12, ASTM A 234 Grade WP11, SCH. 80, BW, ASME
B16.9.
Branch Outlet
Fittings
SCH. 80
Gate Valves
(Note 5, 6)
Bolting
Weldolet NPS 1 1/2 to 10, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, SCH. 80,
BW, MSS SP-97.
GA-820
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F11,
socket weld.
GA-821
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F11,
socket weld x threaded.
GA-320
NPS 2 to 12, Class 300, cast steel, ASTM A 217 Grade WC6,
flanged, RF.
Stud Bolts {900F (482C) and under} - ASTM A 193 Grade B7,
semi-finished hexagonal nuts.
Pipe
NPS 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 335 Grade P11, seamless, SCH. 80,

PEBE.
2012-12-19

Page 2 of 2
970086 S8PR10-1
Note 1
See UOP Specification 970086 S8VCI for description of UOP Valve Codes used in
Note 2
- 1/2 Mo and 1-1/4 Cr - 1/2 Mo Materials:
concave contour.
examined.
Note 3
Note 4
Note 5
For drain, vent, and purge connections, forged valves shall have one socket weld
end and other threaded end
Note 6
For instrument root valves, forged valves shall one socket weld end and other
threaded end
Note 7
Welding neck flanges are to be bored to suit schedule of pipe. In addition the
flanges must be tapered bored to a depth of 1 1/2 inch (38 mm) as required to
match the ID of all connecting piping and valves.
2012-12-14

Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
Page 1 of 3
970086 S8PR15-1
PR-15
CATALYST WITHDRAWL LINE WITH HYDROGEN
CLASS 300 600 RF
-20F THRU 1025F / -29C THRU 551C
Note 3
1.25 CR - 0.5 MO (Notes 2)
ASME B31.3
ASME B16.5
UOP Valve
Code (Note 1)
Flanges
Weld Neck
NPS 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, Class 600, RF, SCH. 160,
ASME B16.5.
(Note 5)
ASME B16.5.
Gaskets

Fittings
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 160, BW,
ASME B16.9., socket weld.
NPS 2, ASTM A 234 Grade WP11, SCH. 160, BW, ASME B16.9.
NPS 2 to 8, ASTM A 234 Grade WP11, SCH. 80, BW,
ASME B16.9.
Elbolet NPS 1 & 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11ASTM A 335
Grade P11, Class 6000, socket weldSCH. 160 BW, MSS SP-97.
Branch Outlet
Fittings
Sockolet NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11,

Class 6000, MSS SP-97.
Weldolet NPS 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, SCH. 160, BW,
MSS SP-97.
Weldolet NPS 2 to 8, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, SCH. 80,
BW, MSS SP-97.
Ball Valves
(Note 6)
BA-680
NPS 1 to 8, Class 600, 316 SS, flanged, RF, Stellite or 316 SS

with Stellite overlay or 316 SS with metallurgically bonded
abrasion resistant coating ball and seat, 316 stainless steel seat.
2012-12-14
Bolting

Page 2 of 3
970086 S8PR15-1
Stud Bolts { 900F (482C) and under} - ASTM A 193 Grade B7,
semi-finished hexagonal nuts
Pipe
NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 335 Grade P11, seamless, SCH. 160,

PEBE..
(Note 3, 4)
2012-12-14

Page 3 of 3
970086 S8PR15-1
Note 1
See UOP Project Specification 970086 S8V000 for description of UOP Valve
Note 2
concave contour.
examined.
Note 3
Note 4
Note 5
Flow Diagrams.
Note 6
Maximum temperature 450 Degrees F ( 232 Degrees C).
2012-12-14
UOPM & ET Specification

Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
Page 1 of 2
970086 S8PR17-1
PR-17
CLASS 600 RF
-20F THRU 1025F / -29C THRU 551C
Note 3
1.25 CR - 0.5 MO (Note 2 and 6)
ASME B31.3
ASME B16.5
UOP Valve
Code (Note 1)
Flanges
Weld Neck
NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, Class 600, RF, SCH. 160,
ASME B16.5.
(Note 5)
NPS 2 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, Class 600, RF, SCH. 80,
ASME B16.5.
Gaskets
Spiral wound TP316 winding, Thermiculite TM 835 filler, TP316 inner

and outer ring.
Fittings
NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 234 Grade WP11, SCH. 160, BW, ASME
B16.9.
NPS 2 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 234 Grade WP11, SCH. 80, BW,
ASME B16.9.
Branch Outlet
Fittings
Elbolet NPS 1 & 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, SCH. 160ASTM
A 335 Grade P11, Class 6000, BW.
Weldolet NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, SCH. 160, BW,
MSS SP-97.
Weldolet NPS 2 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, SCH. 80, BW,
MSS SP-97.
Blinds
Spectacle
NPS 1 to 10, ASTM A 387 Grade 11, Class 600, RF, ASME B16.48.
Bolting
Stud bolts -ASTM A 193 Grade B16, threaded, full length, with two
ASTM A 194 Grade 4 heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts.
Pipe
NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 335 Grade P11, seamless, SCH. 160, BE.
(Note 3, 4)
NPS 2 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 335 Grade P11, seamless, SCH. 80, BE.
2012-12-14
UOPM & ET Specification

Page 2 of 2
970086 S8PR17-1
Note 1
Note 2
concave contour.
examined.
Note 3
Note 4
Note 5
Flow Diagrams.
Note 6
Requirements Applicable to 1 Cr-1/2 Mo and 1 1/4 Cr-1/2 Mo Materials for

Services with Operating Temperatures Over 825F (440C):
a. Charpy V-notch impact testing is required for all pressure retaining
longitudinally fusion welded pipe, components and welds. Impact tests shall be
conducted in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.3, except that there
shall be no exemptions from impact testing and the test temperature shall be the
lower of the design minimum metal temperature and 0F (-18C). The test
pecimens shall be supplied in the same heat treated condition as the new pipe.
b. The product analysis content of tin and phosphorous for pressure retaining
components and welding consumables shall be less than 0.015% and 0.012%
respectively. The percentage limits are weight percent.
uop
25 East Algonquin Road PO Box 5017 Des Plaines, Illinois 60017-5017 USA
8-1303-0
PAGE 1
NOTE - These data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by
written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.
PIPE CLASSES
PR-22
Service
Process with Hydrogen
Temperature Range
-20F thru 1025F / -29C thru 551C
OF 1
Approved
Date
Authorized
R - Revision
REVISED
Material and Rating

1 1/4%Cr-1/2%Mo Class 300 RF
Pressure Range
Per ANSI B16.5
Corrosion Allowance
0.125 Inch
Flanges
ANSI Class 300 forged raised face welding neck. ASTM A 182 Grade F11.
2 inch and smaller socket welding.
2 1/2 inch to 10 inch welding neck bored to suit pipe.
Gaskets
Spiral wound per API 601 except with flexible graphite filler.
Fittings
Class 3000 forged socket weld. ASTM A 182 Grade F11.

Welding same schedule as pipe. ASTM A 234 Grade WP11 or WP11-W.
Branch connection welding fittings. ASTM A 182 Grade F11.
Globe Valves
2 inch and smaller Class 800 forged soket weld. ASTM A 182 Grade F11.
DSI 4211-C8, Smith G80 KOOOW, Velan W-2074B-05TY, or Vogt SW-12351.
2 1/2 inch to 6 inch Class 300 cast flanged. ASTM A 217 Grade WC6.
Poyam 4GBP-2R12-U, or Stockham Triangle A.3822V-U.
Gate Valves
2 inch and smaller Class 800 forged socket weld. ASTM A 182 Grade F11.
DSI 4111-C8, Smith 800 KOOOW, Velan W-2054B-05TY, or Vogt SW-12321.
2 1/2 inch to 10 inch Class 300 cast flanged. ASTM A 217 Grade WC6.
Poyam 45BW-2R12-U, or Stockham Triangle A.3822V-U.
Bolting
900F (482C) and under - stud bolts ASTM A 193 Grade B7 threaded full length with 2 ASTM A
194 Grade 2H nuts.
Over 900F (482C) - stud bolts ASTM A 193 Grade B16 threaded full length with 2 ASTM 194
Grade 4 nuts.
Pipe
ASTM A 335 Grade P11 seamless.

Contractor to calculate wall thickness. However, 2 inches and smaller shall be no less than
Schedule 80.
Note
1.
See UOP Project Specification 801 Piping for notes applicable to 1 1/4Cr - 1/2Mo materials.
2012-10-29
UOP Specification
Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
Page 1 of 3
970086 S8PR24-0
PR-24
PROCESS HOT AIR
CLASS 300 RF
-20F THRU 1300F / -29C THRU 704C
0.063 inch (1.6 mm)
TP 304H / TP 316 STAINLESS STEEL
ASME B31.3
ASME B16.5
UOP Valve
Code (Note 1)
Flanges
Socket Weld
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H, Class 300, RF, SCH.
80S, ASME B16.5.
Flanges
Weld Neck
NPS 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H, Class 300, RF, SCH. 80S, ASME
B16.5.
NPS 3 to 12, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H, Class 300, RF, SCH. 40S,
ASME B16.5.
Orifice Flanges
Weld Neck
NPS 1-1/2 & 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H, Class 300, RF,
SCH. 80S, with jack screws ASME B16.36 NPT taps.
NPS 3 to 12, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H, Class 300, RF, SCH. 40S,
with jack screws ASME B16.36 NPT taps.
Gaskets
Spiral wound with TP304 SS winding, Thermiculite TM 835 filler, 304

stainless steel inner ring.
Small Fittings
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H, Class 3000,

ASME B16.11, socket weld.
Large Fittings
NPS 2, ASTM A 403 Grade WP304H S, WP 304H WX or

WP 304H WU, SCH. 80S, BW, ASME B16.9.
NPS 3 to 12, ASTM A 403 Grade WP304H S, WP 304H WX or
Branch Outlet
Fittings
Elbolet NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H, Class 3000,
socket weld.
Sockolet NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H,
Class 3000, MSS SP-97.
Weldolet NPS 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H, SCH. 80S, BW, MSS
SP-97.
Weldolet NPS 3 to 10, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H, SCH. 40S, BW,
MSS SP-97.
Swages
Concentric NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 403 Grade WP304H,

SCH. 80S, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95.
Eccentric NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 403 Grade WP304H,
SCH. 80S, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95.
2012-10-29
UOP Specification
Page 2 of 3
970086 S8PR24-0
Nipples
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 312 Grade TP304H, SCH. 80S, seamless,
PBE.
Blinds
Spectacle
NPS 1 to 12, ASTM A 240 Grade TP304H, Class 300, RF, ASME
B16.48.
Blinds
Spacer Ring
NPS 12, ASTM A 240 Grade TP304H, Class 300, RF, ASME B16.48.
Blinds Plate
NPS 12, ASTM A 240 Grade TP304H, Class 300, RF, ASME B16.48.
Globe Valves
(Note 2)
Gate Valves
(Note 2)
Check Valves
(Note 2)
Wafer
Check Valve
(See Note 2)
Bolting
GL-883
Grade F316H, socket weld.
GL-381
NPS 2 to 6, Class 300, cast stainless steel, ASTM A 351 Grade

CF8M, flanged, RF.
GA-883
GA-884
Grade F316H, socket weld x threaded.
GA-381
CF8M, flanged, RF.
CH-883
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged stainless steel,, ASTM A 182
CH-381
CF8M, flanged, RF.
CH-383
NPS 2 to 12, Class 300, cast stainless steel, ASTM A351 Grade
CF8M retainerless, lug type, flangeless, 316 SS trim, hard faced seat.
Stud Bolts ASTM A 193 Grade B8M Class 2, threaded, full length,
with two ASTM A 194 Grade 8M heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts.
Jack Screw 304/316 stainless steel, threaded, full length, hex
head.
Seamless
Pipe
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 312 Grade TP304H, SCH. 80S, PE.
NPS 2, ASTM A 312 Grade TP304H, SCH. 80S, BE.
NPS 3 to 12, ASTM A 312 Grade TP304H, SCH. 40S, BE.
2012-10-29
UOP Specification
Page 3 of 3
970086 S8PR24-0

Connections on headers and pieces of equipment shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch.
RUN
SIZE
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
BRANCH SIZE
3/4
1
1-1/2 2
10
12
T
RT
RT
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
BW
T
RT
RT
T
RT
T
RT
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
T
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BRANCH CODES:
T
= STRAIGHT TEE
RT
= REDUCING TEE
BS
= SOCKOLET ( THREDOLET ) CLASS 3000 MINIMUM Full couplings are permitted;
BW
= WELDOLET
Note 1
Note 2
All 316 stainless steel material shall have a 0.04% minimum carbon content.
Note 3
Note 4
2013-01-15
UOP Specification
Pipe Class:
Service:
Rating/Facing:
Temperature Range:
Material:
Design Code:
Pressure Range:
Page 1 of 4
970086 S8PR36-1
PR-36
CATALYST TRANSFER & PROCESS REGENERATION GAS
CLASS 300 RF
-20F THRU 1100F / -29C THRU 593C
0.125 063 inch (1.6 3.2 mm)
TP 316H STAINLESS STEEL
ASME B31.3
ASME B16.5 for sizes to NPS 24, ASME B16.47 Series A for NPS
30
UOP Valve
Code (Note 1)
Flanges
Socket WeldWeld
Neck
(Note 2, 7)
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/22, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300 RF

SCH.80S 160 ASME B16.5.
NPS 2 1/2 to 12, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300 RF SCH.40S
ASME B16.5.
NPS 14 to 18, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300 RF
SCH. 0.25.Wt. ASME B16.5.
NPS 20 to 24, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300 RF
SCH. 0.375.Wt. ASME B16.5.
NPS 30, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300 RF SCH. 0.375.Wt.
ASME B16.47 type A .
Orifice Flanges
Weld Neck (Note
2)
NPS 2 to 12, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300H RF

SCH.40S160
NPS 2 1/2 to 12, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300H RF
SCH.40S
Gaskets
Spiral wound TP316 winding, Thermiculite TM 835 filler, 316 stainless

steel inner and outer ring.
NPS 30, per ASME B16.47 Series A
Small Fittings
(Note 2, 3, 7)
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H, Class 3000SCH 160,
ASME B16.11, socket BWweld.
2013-01-15
Large Fittings
(Note 2, 3, 7)
UOP Specification
Page 2 of 4
970086 S8PR36-1
NPS 2, ASTM A 403 Grade WP 316H S, WP 316H WX or

WP 316H WU, SCH. 160, BW, ASME B16.9.
NPS 2 1/2 to 12, ASTM A 403 Grade WP 316H S, WP 316H WX or
NPS 14 to 18, ASTM A 403 Grade WP 316H S, WP 316H WX or
WP 316H WU, SCH. 0.25, BW, ASME B16.9.
NPS 20 to 30, ASTM A 403 Grade WP 316H S, WP 316H WX or
WP 316H WU, SCH. 0.375, BW, ASME B16.9.
Stub-Ins
Reinforced
(Note 2)
NPS 14 to 18, ASTM A 358 Grade TP316H Class 1, SCH.0.25 Wt.

BBE.
BBE.
Branch Outlet
Fittings
(Notes 2, & 5, 7)
ElboletNPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 3000,

socket weld.
SockoletNPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 3000
MSS SP-97.
Weldoletper MSS SP-97
NPS 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H SCH.160, BW
Weldoletper MSS SP-97
NPS 2 1/2 to 12, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H SCH.40S, BW
NPS 14 to 18, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H SCH.0.25, BW
NPS 20 to 24, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H SCH.0.375, BW
Swages
(Note 2, 6, 7)
Concentric. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 403 Grade WP316H,

SCH.80S160, seamless BBEPBE, MSS SP-95.
Eccentric. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 403 Grade WP316H,
SCH.80S160, seamless PBEBBE, MSS SP-95.
Nipples
(Note 2, 7)
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 312 Grade TP316H SCH.80S 160

seamless PBE.
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 312 Grade TP316H, SCH. 160, seamless
POE/TOE.
Blinds Spectacle
(Note 2)
NPS 1 to 24, ASTM A 240 Grade TP316H, Class 300 RF,

ASME B16.48.
Blinds Spacer
Ring (Note 2)

ASME B16.48.
Blinds Plate
(Note 2)

ASME B16.48.
2013-01-15
Globe Valves
UOP Specification
Page 3 of 4
970086 S8PR36-1
GL-883
GL-884
GL-381
NPS 2 to 6, Class 300, cast stainless steel ASTM A 351 Grade

CF8M, flanged, RF.
GA-883
GA-884
GA-381
NPS 2 to 12, Class 300, cast stainless steel ASTM A 351 Grade
CF8M, flanged, RF.
CH-883
CH-381
CF8M, flanged, RF.
(Note 7)
Gate Valves
(Note 7)
Check Valves
(Note 7)
Bolting
Stud Bolts. ASTM A 193 Grade B8M Class 2 threaded full length,
with two ASTM A 194 Grade 8M heavy semi-finished hexagonal
nuts.
Jack Screw. 304/316 stainless steel, threaded, full length, hex head.
Seamless
Pipe (Note 2 & 6)
NPS 1/2 to 21-1/2, ASTM A 312 Grade TP316H SCH.80S 160

PBEBBE.
NPS 2 1/2 to 12, ASTM A 312 Grade TP316H SCH.40S BBE.
Electric Fusion
Welded Pipe
(Note 2)
NPS 10 to 12, ASTM A 358 Grade TP316H Class 1, SCH.40S BBE.

BBE.
BBE.
2013-01-15
UOP Specification
Page 4 of 4
970086 S8PR36-1

Connections on headers and pieces of equipment shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch, except for steam tracer
leads which may be 1/2 inch.
RUN
SIZE
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
BRANCH SIZE
3/4
1
1-1/2
T
RT
RT
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
T
RT
RT
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
T
RT
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
BW
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
BW
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
BW
T
RT
RT
RT
RT
T
RT
RT
RT
T
RT
RT
T
RT
BRANCH CODES:
T
= STRAIGHT TEE
RT
BS
= SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET ) CLASS 3000 minimum Full couplings are permitted;
BW
= WELDOLET
Note 1
See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe
Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number
Note 2
All 316 stainless steel material shall have a 0.04% minimum carbon content.
Note 3
Short radius elbows are acceptable only where space considerations dictate and only if the
design pressure of the piping system is within the ASME B16.28 allowable pressure
ratings.
Note 4
Note 5
Weldolets may be replaced by a stub-in with reinforcement pad where weldolet is not
available.
Note 6
To minimize the number of joints, use double random length of pipe as applicable.
Note 7
Socket Weld connections are not permitted on Catalyst piping.
2013-01-11
1.
UOP Specification
Piping Specialty Items
Page 1 of 2
970086 S890-0

Piping specialty items shall be supplied in accordance with the following guidelines:
1.1.
1.2.
Identification Marking Requirements

1.
A metal tag shall be attached to each piping specialty item quoting the item tag number:
SP-XXX.
2.
Metal tags shall be stainless steel or brass.
3.
Metal tags shall be minimum 1/32 inch (1 mm) thick
4.
Metal tags shall be riveted securely wired to the items with stainless steel wire of a
minimum diameter of 1/32 inch (1 mm).
Materials
1.
1.3.
Certification
1.
1.4.
Material Certificates are required and as a minimum shall include:

a.
Chemical Analysis by Product
b.
Mechanical Properties
c.
Heat Treatment Statement
d.
Non Destructive Test results
e.
Heat or Melt Number
f.
All certificates shall state the Manufacturers name and location. Certificates shall
include the BUYERS purchase order number and purchase order item number.
2.
Hydrostatic Test Certificates are required for Strainers.
3.
Positive Material Identification (PMI) is required for Stainless Steel or Alloy Steel
pressure containing components.
Surface preparation and protective coating

1.
2.
2.
Materials shall not contain asbestos.
All external surfaces of all Carbon or low alloy steel items, except socket weld, or butt
weld ends, shall be prepared and painted in accordance with the following requirements:
a.
Paint shall be suitable for a severe marine environment. UOP requests to review the
vendors painting specification for a severe marine environment.
b.
Dry film thickness shall be at least 3 mils.
All external surfaces of all Carbon or low alloy steel items, with socket weld, or butt weld
ends, shall be prepared and supplied with temporary storage coating, in accordance with
manufacturers standard coating system.
Preparation for Shipping

1.
Flange surfaces shall be coated with either:

a.
A rust-preventative grease.
b.
A protective coating that is removable with one of the following:
2013-01-11
UOP Specification
2.
3.
1.
Acetone.
2.
Isopropyl alcohol.
Page 2 of 2
970086 S890-0
The gasket surface of the connections shall be covered with either:

a.
Heavy-duty plastic connection protectors.
b.
Bolted or steel-strapped wood, wood-fiber, or metal covers.
If wood, wood fiber, or metal covers are used, a plastic sheet shall be placed between the
coated connection and cover.
2013-01-14
1.

Page 1 of 2
970086 T890-0
Piping specialty items List
REV
NO.
SP1002
SP1003
SP1005
ITEM
Y-TYPE
STRAINER
Y-TYPE
STRAINER
CONE TYPE
STRAINER
(START-UP)
SIZE
3/4"
3/4"
6"
RATING
150#
150#
150#
UOP
SPEC.
M1A1
M1A1
PR8
LINE NO.
CL-L502RM1A1-3/4"
CL-L516RM1A1-3/4"
RE-L801R-PR86"
UOP
MFD
NO.
DESCRIPTION
D106
Strainer Shall Be Furnished

With Plugged, Blow-Off Outlet.
Cast Stainless Steel, ASTM A
351 Grade CF8M, ASME Class
600, Socket Weld Connections.
Screens Shall Be A Minimum
Of 24 Gauge (0.0239 Inch)
Perforated Type 316 Stainless
Steel Plate With 5/32 Inch (4
mm) Diameter Staggered Holes
At 3/16 Inch (5 mm) Centers
And 63 Percent Open Area,
Lined With 30 Mesh (567
Micron) And 0.011 Inch (0.28
mm) Diameter Wire Type 316
Stainless Steel Mesh And 45
Percent Open Area.
Mueller Model No 862-SS, Titan
Model No. YS82-SS-UOP Or
Equal.
D106
Strainer Shall Be Furnished

With Plugged, Blow-Off Outlet.
Cast Stainless Steel, ASTM A
351 Grade CF8M, ASME Class
600, Socket Weld Connections.
Screens Shall Be A Minimum
Of 24 Gauge (0.0239 Inch)
Perforated Type 316 Stainless
Steel Plate With 5/32 Inch (4
mm) Diameter Staggered Holes
At 3/16 Inch (5 mm) Centers
And 63 Percent Open Area,
Lined With 30 Mesh (567
Micron) And 0.011 Inch (0.28
mm) Diameter Wire Type 316
Stainless Steel Mesh And 45
Percent Open Area.
Mueller Model No 862-SS, Titan
Model No. YS82-SS-UOP Or
Equal.
D111
Perforated Conical Strainer

(short pattern), 150% open area
relative to flow area of same
size pipe , Std. wt. pipe (based
on 40% perforated plate) 14 Ga.
304 SS Perforated plate 1/8
dia. Holes on 3/16 centers
(40% open area, 33 holes/Sq.
in.) Line Size 6, Mating flange
class 150# RF, Proposal to
include pressure drop
calculations across strainer
under the following conditions:
Flow medium: Nitrogen
Molecular Weight: 28.0
Operating Pressure: 0.05
kg/cm2 Operating Temperature:
38 oC
2013-01-14
SP1006

Liquid Drainer
Assembly
NPS
Inlet &
NPS
Outlet
150#
B1A1
V-747-B1A1-
Page 2 of 2
970086 T890-0
D115
Oil Drainer for the Lift Gas

Blower Drains. Stainless Steel
body, valve, seat, leverage
system and cap. Free floating
guided lever drain trap.
Recommended Model:
Armstrong 11-LD
2012-10-05
1.
UOP Specification
Carbon Steel Gate Valve
Page 1 of 2
970086 S8V003-0
Gate valves
CODE
NUMBER
GA-100
GA-300
GA-800
GA-801
GA-802
DESCRIPTION OF VALVE
RECOMMENDED
VALVE MODELS
NPS 2 to 24, Class 150, flanged, raised face,

smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 600,
cast steel, ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, API 600
Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), solid plain
or flexible wedge, bolted gland, outside screw
& yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosioninhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing
with anti-extrusion rings.
Hand wheel operator up to 14 NPS
Gear operator above 14 NPS
Crane 47-XU

smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 600,
cast steel, ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, API 600
or flexible wedge, bolted gland, outside screw
with anti-extrusion rings.
Hand wheel operator up to 10 NPS.
Crane 33-XU
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, socket weld

ends, API 602, forged, ASTM A 105, API 600
wedge, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke
(OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited
die-formed flexible graphite packing with antiextrusion rings, hand wheel operator.
Bonney HL-11-SW
NPS 1/2 to 2, Class 800, socket weld x female

threaded, NPT, API 602, forged, ASTM A 105,
API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats),
solid plain wedge, bolted gland, outside screw
with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator.
NPS 1/2 to 2, Class 800, socket weld ends, full
bore, API 602, forged, ASTM A 105, API 600
(OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited
die-formed flexible graphite packing with antiextrusion rings, hand wheel operator.
Newco 11F-CB2
Powell 1503-C2
Poyam 22SBW-1R8
Velan F-0064C-02TY
Walworth 5202-F
Newco 13F-CB2
Powell 3003-C2
Poyam 22SBW-2R8
Velan F-1064C-02TY
Walworth 5206-F
Newco 18S-FS2
Smith 800-OOOOW
Velan W-2054B-02TY
Vogt SW-12111
DSI-4111-A8
Bonney HL-11-SW/T
Newco 18S/T-FS2
Smith 800-OOOOU
Velan C-2054B-02TY
Vogt TSW-12111
DSI-4101-A8
Bonney H-11-SW
Newco 18S-FS2FP
Smith 888-OOOOW
Velan W-2064B-02TY
Vogt SW-13111
DSI-4161-A8
2012-10-05
GA-803
UOP Specification
Carbon Steel Gate Valve
Page 2 of 2
970086 S8V003-0
NPS 1/2 to 2, Class 800 body, Class 300,

Vogt 363
flanged, raised face, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing,
Newco 13F-FS2-INT
API 602, forged ASTM A 105, API 600 Trim 8
(13% Cr., hard faced seats), solid plain wedge, DSI 2131-A8
bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y),
bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed
flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion
rings, hand wheel operator.
2012-10-05
1.
UOP Specification
Carbon Steel Globe Valve
Page 1 of 1
970086 S8V004-0
Globe valves
CODE
NUMBER
GL-100
GL-300
GL-800
GL-801
NPS 2 to 6, Class 150, straight pattern,
ASME B16.34, cast steel, ASTM A 216 Grade
WCB, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced
seats), plug type disc, bolted gland, outside
screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet,
corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite
packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel
operator.
ASME B16.34, cast steel, ASTM A 216 Grade
WCB, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced
operator.
NPS 1/4 to 2, Class 800, straight pattern,
socket weld ends, reduced bore, ASME
B16.34, forged, ASTM A 105, API 600 Trim 8
(13% Cr., hard faced seats), plug type disc,
NPS 1/2 to 2, Class 800, straight pattern,
socket weld x female threaded NPT, reduced
bore, ASME B16.34, forged, ASTM A 105,
API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats),
plug type disc, bolted gland, outside screw &
yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosioninhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing
with anti-extrusion rings, handwheel operator.
RECOMMENDED
VALVE MODELS
Crane 143-XU
Newco 21F-CB2
Powell 1531-C2
Poyam 22GBP-1R8
Velan F-0074C-02TY
Walworth 5275-F
Crane 151-XU
Newco 23F-CB2
Powell 3031-C2
Poyam 22GBP-2R8
Velan F-1074C-02TY
Walworth 5281-F
Bonney HL-31-SW
Newco 28S-FS2
Smith G80-OOOOW
Velan W-2074B-02TY
Vogt SW-12141
DSI 4211-A8
Bonney HL-31-SW/T
Newco 28S/T-FS2
Smith G80-OOOOU
Velan C-2074B-02TY
Vogt TSW-12141
DSI 4201-A8
2012-10-05
1.
UOP Specification
Carbon Steel Check Valve
Page 1 of 1
970086 S8V005-0
Check valves
CODE
NUMBER
CH-100
smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, ASME B16.34 cast
steel. ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, API 600 Trim
8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), bolted cover,
swing type.
RECOMMENDED
VALVE MODELS
Crane 147-XU
Newco 31F-CB2
Powell 1561-C2
Poyam 22RBA-1R8
Velan F-0114C-02TY
Walworth 5341-F
CH-102
NPS 2 to 24, Class 150, serrated raised face

Crane Duo Check II H15SPF-169
ends, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 594, dual
Goodwin BFR-015-C-E-U-P-R-Y-E
plate design, retainerless, lug type, cast steel,
ASTM A 216 Grade WCB body, 410 SS plates
and pins, 410 SS overlay body seat, Inconel X750 springs.
CH-300

smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, ASME B16.34, cast
steel, ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, API 600 Trim
8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), bolted cover,
swing type.
Crane 159-XU
Newco 33F-CB2
Powell 3061-C2
Poyam 22RBA-2R8
Velan F-1114C-02TY
Walworth 5344-F
CH-302
NPS 1-1/2 to 24 Class 300, serrated raised

Crane Duo Check II H30SPF-169
face ends, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 594,
Goodwin BFR-030-C-E-U-P-R-Y-E
dual plate design, retainerless, lug type, cast
ASTM A 216 Grade WCB body, 410 SS plates
and pins, 410 SS overlay body seat, Inconel X750 springs.
CH-800
NPS 1/2 to 2, Class 800, socket weld ends,

reduced bore, ASME B16.34, forged, ASTM A
105, Stellite seat, bolted cover, ball type, 304
SS ball.
Bonney HL-51-SW
Newco 58S-FS2
Smith B80-OOOOW
Velan W-2024B-02TY
Vogt SWB-701
DSI 4511-A8
2012-10-05
1.
UOP Specification
Carbon Steel Ball Valve
Page 1 of 1
970086 S8V006-0
Ball valves
CODE
NUMBER
RECOMMENDED
VALVE MODELS
BA-104
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Standard port, socket weld

ends, fire safe design meeting requirements of
API 607-4 and BS 6755-part 2, ASME B31.3, API
598, MSS-25, carbon steel body 316 stainless
steel ball and stem, Reinforced Teflon seat
certified to API 607, PTFE/Graphite body seal,
TFM/Graphite stem seal, lever operator.
BA-304
NPS 4, Full Port, Soft-Sealed, "Fire-Safe" design, Jamesbury 9300-31API 598 ASME B16.34, B16.5, API 607, MSS SP2236-XTZ -1-M10/Q
25, MSS SP-72 cast steel, ASTM A 216 Grade
WCB, ASME Class 300, flanged, raised face,
smooth 3.2/6.3 (125/250) Ra facing, 316 stainless
steel ball and stem, Filled Teflon seats certified to
API 607, TFE/Graphite body seal and stem seal,
Manufacturers standard gear operator.
Jamesbury 2236-XT-1
2012-10-05
1.
UOP Specification
Low & Intermediate Alloy Steel Gate Valve
Page 1 of 1
970086 S8V013-0
Gate valves
CODE
NUMBER
GA-320
GA-620
GA-820
GA-821
GA-822
smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 600, cast steel,
ASTM A 217 Grade WC6, API 600 Trim 8
(13% Cr., hard faced seats), solid plain or
flexible wedge, bolted gland, outside screw &
smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 600, cast steel,
ASTM A 217 Grade WC6, API 600 Trim 8
(13% Cr., hard faced seats), solid plain or
RECOMMENDED
VALVE MODELS
Powell 3003-P140/P100WC6
Poyam 4SBW-2R8
Velan F-1064C-05TY
Powell 6003-P140/P100WC6
Poyam 4SBW-3R8
Velan F-2064C-05TY

ends, API 602, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade
F11 Class 2, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard
faced seats), solid plain wedge, bolted gland,
outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet,
operator.
Bonney HL-19-SW
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, socket weld x

female threaded, NPT, API 602, forged, ASTM
A 182 Grade F11 Class 2, API 600 Trim 8
(13% Cr., hard faced seats), solid plain wedge,
Bonney HL-19-SW/T

ends, FULL BORE, API 602, forged, ASTM A
182 Grade F11 Class 2, API 600 Trim 8 (13%
Cr., hard faced seats), solid plain wedge,
DSI 4111-C8
Velan W-2054B-05TY
Vogt SW-12321
DSI 4101-C8
Velan C-2054B-05TY
Vogt TSW-12321
Bonney W-19-SW
Velan W-2064B-05TY
2012-10-05
1.
UOP Specification
Stainless Steel Gate Valve
Page 1 of 2
970086 S8V023-0
Gate valves
CODE
NUMBER
GA-180
GA-381
GA-880
GA-881
GA-882
RECOMMENDED
VALVE MODELS

smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 600, cast,
ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, API 600 Trim 12
(316 SS, hard faced seats), solid plain or
Cooper 115

smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 600, cast,
ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, 0.04% C Min.,.
API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced seats),
solid plain or flexible wedge, bolted gland,
operator.
Cooper 130

ends, API 602, forged ASTM A 182 Grade
F316, API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced
seats), solid plain wedge, bolted gland, outside
operator.
Bonney HL-18-SW

female threaded, API 602, forged, ASTM A
182 Grade F316, API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS,
hard faced seats), solid plain wedge, bolted
gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted
bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible
graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings,
hand wheel operator.
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, female threaded
NPT both ends, API 602, forged, ASTM A 182
Grade F316, API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard
faced seats), solid plain wedge, bolted gland,
operator.
OIC S151G
Ladish 8275
Powell 2456-C3
Poyam 12SBF-1R12
Velan F-0064C-13MY
Ladish 8375
OIC S301G
Powell 2467-C6
Poyam 12SBF-2R12
Velan F-1064C-13MY
OIC 8GT-6-SW
Velan W-2054B-13MY
Vogt SW-12401
DSI 4111-D12
Bonney HL-18-SW/T
OIC 8GT-6-SW/T
Velan C-2054B-13MY
Vogt TSW-12401
DSI 4101-D12
Bonney HL-18-T
OIC 8GT-6-T
Velan S-2054B-13MY
Vogt 12401
DSI 4121-D12
2012-10-05
GA-883
GA-884
UOP Specification
Stainless Steel Gate Valve
ends, API 602, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade
F316H, 0.04% C Min., API 600 Trim 12 (316
SS, hard faced seats), solid plain wedge,
female threaded NPT, API 602, forged, ASTM
A 182 Grade F316, 0.04% C Min., API 600
Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced seats), solid plain
(OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited dieformed flexible graphite packing with antiextrusion rings, hand wheel operator.
Page 2 of 2
970086 S8V023-0
Bonney HL-18-SW
OIC 8GT-6-SW
Velan W-2054B-13MY
DSI-4111-D12
Bonney HL-18-SW/T
OIC 8GT-6-SW/T
Velan C-2054B-13MY
DSI 4101-D12
2012-10-05
1.
UOP Specification
Stainless Steel Globe Valve
Page 1 of 2
970086 S8V024-0
Globe valves
CODE
NUMBER
GL-180
GL-381
GL-880
GL-882
GL-883
RECOMMENDED
VALVE MODELS

ASME B16.34, cast, ASTM A 351 Grade
CF8M, API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced
operator.
Cooper 215

ASME B16.34, cast, ASTM A 351 Grade
CF8M, 0.04% C Min., API 600 Trim 12 (316
SS, hard faced seats), plug type disc, bolted
gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted
bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible
graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings,
hand wheel operator.
Cooper 230
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, straight pattern,

B16.34, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H,
API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced seats),
plug type disc, bolted gland, outside screw &
Bonney Forge HL-38-SW

female threaded NPT both ends, reduced
bore, ASME B16.34, forged, ASTM A 182
Grade F316, API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard
faced seats), plug type disc, bolted gland,
operator.
Bonney HL-38-T

B16.34, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H,
0.04% C Min., API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard
faced seats), plug type disc, bolted gland,
operator.
Ladish 7272
OIC S152G
Powell 2475-C3/2629-C3
Poyam 12GBP-1R12
Velan F-0074C-13MY
Ladish 7372
OIC S302G
Powell 2447-C6
Poyam 12GBP-2R12
Velan F-1074C-13MY
OIC 8GL-6-SW
Smith G80-HAOOW
Velan W-2074B-13MY
Vogt SW-12501
DSI 4211-D12
OIC 8GL-6-T
Smith G80-HAOOO
Velan S-2074B-13MY
Vogt 12501
DSI 4221-D12
Bonney HL-38-SW
Smith G80-HSOOW
Velan W-2074B-13MY
DSI 4211-D12
2012-10-05
GL-884
UOP Specification
Stainless Steel Globe Valve
socket weld x female threaded NPT, reduced
bore, ASME B16.34, forged, ASTM A 182
Grade F316H, 0.04% C Min., API 600 Trim 12
(316 SS, hard faced seats), plug type disc,
Page 2 of 2
970086 S8V024-0
Bonney HL-38-SW/T
Velan C-2074B-13MY
DSI 4201-D12
2012-10-05
1.
UOP Specification
Stainless Steel Check Valve
Page 1 of 2
970086 S8V025-0
Check valves
CODE
NUMBER
CH-180
smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, ASME B16.34, cast,
ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, API 600
Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced seats), bolted
cover, swing type.
RECOMMENDED
VALVE MODELS
Cooper 315
Ladish 5272
OIC S153G
Powell 2342/2633
Poyam 12RBA-1R12
Velan F-0114C-13MY
CH-183
NPS 1 1/2 to 24, Class 150, serrated raised

Crane Duo Check IIG15CPF-385E
face ends, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 594,
Goodwin BFR-015-S-S-U-P-R-Y-S
lug type, cast ASTM A351 Grade CF8M body,
dual plate design, 316 SS plates and pins, 410
SS overlay body seat, Inconel X-750 springs.
CH-381

smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, ASME B16.34, cast,
ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, 0.04% C Min., API
600 Trim 12 (316 SS, Hardfaced seat), bolted
cover, swing type.
Cooper 330
Ladish 5372
OIC S303G
Powell 2346-C6
Poyam 12RBA-2R12
Velan F-1114C-13TY
CH-382
CH-383
CH-880

ends, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 594, lug
type, cast stainless steel, ASTM A351 Grade
CF8M body, 0.04 C-min., dual plate design,
retainerless, Monel plates and pins, Monel
overlay body seat, Inconel X-750 springs. .
Crane Duo Check II H30-CPF-772

ends, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 594, lug
type, cast ASTM A351 Grade CF8M body,
0.04 C-min., dual plate design, retainerless,
316 SS plates and pins, 410 SS overlay body
seat, Inconel X-750 springs.
Crane Duo Check II H30 CPF-385E

ends, reduced bore, ASME B16.34, forged,
ASTM A 182 Grade F316, Stellite seat, bolted
cover, ball type, spring loaded, 304 SS ball
and spring.
Goodwin BFR-030-S-M-M-P-R-Y-M
Goodwin BFR-030-S-S-U-P-R-Y-S
Bonney HL-58-SW
OIC 8CH-6-SW
Smith B80-HSOOW
Velan W-2024B-13MY
DSI 4511-D12
Vogt SW-718
2012-10-05
CH-882
UOP Specification
Stainless Steel Check Valve
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, female threaded
NPT both ends, reduced bore, ASME B16.34,
forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316, bolted
cover, ball type, spring loaded, 304 SS ball
and spring.
Page 2 of 2
970086 S8V025-0
Bonney HL-58-T
OIC 8CH-6-T
Smith B80-HAOO0
Velan W-2024B-13MY
DSI 4521-D12
Vogt 718
CH-883

ends, reduced bore, ASME B16.34, forged,
ASTM A 182 Grade F316H, 0.04% C Min.,
Stellite seat, bolted cover, ball type, spring
loaded, 304 SS ball and spring.
Bonney HL-58-SW
OIC 8CH-6-SW
Smith B80-HSOOW
Velan W-2024B-13MY
DSI 4511-D12
Vogt SW-718
CH-3080
NPS 1/4 to 1, 303 Stainless Steel, 3000 psi,

spring loaded, Buna-N O-ring seal, female
threaded NPT both ends.
Circle Seal 259T-XPP
2013-01-04
1.
UOP Specification
Stainless Steel Ball Valve
Page 1 of 1
970086 S8V026-0
Ball valves
CODE
NUMBER
BA-386
NPS 1 to 8, Full Port, Soft-Sealed, "Fire-Safe" design, ASME B16.34,
B16.5, API 598, API 607, MSS SP-25, MSS SP-72.
Temperature limit shall not exceed 450 F (232 C) for filled Teflon.
CONSTRUCTION:
Body:
Cast ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M.

(316L SS acceptable alternate).
Rating/Facing:
ASME Class 300, flanged, raised face,

smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing.
Stem:
316 stainless steel.
Seats:
Filled Teflon certified to API 607.
Ball:
316 stainless steel.
Gaskets:
304 SS / Flexible Graphite.
Stem Seals:
Graphite.
Actuator:
Lever or handwheel operated (Manual).
Leakage:
Manufacturer's standard testing.
Inspection/Testing:
Manufacturer's standard.
RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS:

Neles-Jamesbury
6300-EH008-3600-ML
9300-EH008-3600-ML
2012-10-05
1.
UOP Specification
Stainless Steel Needle Valve
Page 1 of 1
970086 S8V029-0
Needle valves
CODE
NUMBER
RECOMMENDED
VALVE MODELS
NE-3080
NPS 1/4, Needle Valve, Type 316 Stainless

Steel, 3000 psig at 100 Deg. F, straight
pattern, metering type, PTFE stem packing.
Hoke 2315F4Y
NE-5080
NPS 1/4, Needle Valve, ASTM A 182 F316

body, 316 Stainless Steel blunt stem, 5000
psig at 100 Deg. F, compression ends, PTFE
stem packing.
Parker CPI V6AR-SS
2012-10-05
1.
UOP Specification
Bronze and Iron Gate Valve
Page 1 of 1
970086 S8V033-0
Gate valves
CODE
NUMBER
GA-1160
NPS 1/4 to 3 Class 150, threaded,
MSS SP-80, bronze ASTM B 62 Alloy 836
body and bonnet, bronze solid wedge,
bronze stem, Teflon packing, union bonnet,
rising stem.
RECOMMENDED
VALVE MODELS
Crane 431-UB
Lunkenheimer 3151
Milwaukee 1151
Nibco T-135
Powell 2714
Stockham B-120
GA-1170
GA-1161
NPS 3 to 24, Class 150, flanged, flat face,

grooved 6.3/12.5 Ra facing, MSS SP-70,
ASME B16.10, ASME B16.1, Ductile iron
ASTM A 395 body and bonnet, bronze seat
rings, solid wedge, iron disc, bronze faced,
bronze stem, Teflon packing, outside screw &
yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, non-rising stem.
Handwheel operator up to 14 NPS
Nibco F-637-31
Walworth W9726-F
NPS 4 & 6, Class 150, flanged, ASME B16.24, Powell 1414

bronze, ASTM B 62 Alloy 836 body and
Williams 142F
bonnet, TP410 SS seat rings, bronze solid
wedge, bronze stem, Teflon packing, bolted
flanged yoke-bonnet, outside screw rising
stem.
2012-10-05
1.
UOP Specification
Bronze and Iron Globe Valve
Page 1 of 1
970086 S8V034-0
Globe valves
CODE
NUMBER
GL-1160
NPS 1/4 to 3, Class 150, female threaded NPT

both ends, MSS SP-80, bronze, ASTM B 62
Alloy 836 body and bonnet, Teflon plug type
disc, bronze stem, Teflon or Graphite packing,
union bonnet.
RECOMMENDED
VALVE MODELS
Crane 7 TF
Milwaukee 590-T
Nibco T-235-Y
Powell 150
Stockham B-22T
GL-1170

ASME B16.1, Ductile iron ASTM A 395 body
and bonnet, bronze seat rings, solid bronze
disc or iron bronze faced, bronze stem, Teflon
packing, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted
bonnet.
Nibco F-738-31
2012-10-05
1.
UOP Specification
Bronze and Iron Check Valve
Page 1 of 1
970086 S8V035-0
Check valves
CODE
NUMBER
RECOMMENDED
VALVE MODELS
CH-1170

ASME B16.10, ASME B16.1, Ductile iron
ASTM A 395 body and cap, cast iron seat
rings, solid bronze disc, iron bronze faced,
bolted cap, horizontal swing type.
Nibco F-938-31
CH-13160
NPS 1/4 to 3, Class 150, female threaded

NPT both ends, MSS SP-80, bronze, ASTM
B 61 Alloy 836 body and cap, bronze disc,
screwed cap, Y-pattern, horizontal swing
type.
Walworth W9928-F
Crane 36
Milwaukee 510-T
Nibco T-433-Y
Stockham B-345
2012-10-05
1.
UOP Specification
Bronze and Iron Ball Valve
Page 1 of 1
970086 S8V036-0
Ball valves
CODE
NUMBER
BA-1160
NPS 1/4 to 2, Reduced Port, Soft-Sealed,

ASME B16.34, B1.20.1, MSS SP-25, MSS SP-110.
CONSTRUCTION:
Body:
Forged Brass ASTM B 124 Alloy

UNS No. C37700, or
Cast Bronze ASTM B 584 Alloy
UNS No. C84400.
Rating/Facing:
ASME Class 150, female threaded NPT

both ends.
Stem:
Brass.
Seats:
Teflon (TFE).
Ball:
Brass (Chromium plated acceptable alternate).
Stem Seals:
Teflon (TFE)
Actuator:
Lever or handwheel operated (Manual).
Leakage:
Manufacturer's standard testing.
Inspection/Testing:
Manufacturer's standard.
RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS:

Conbraco Industries, Inc. Apollo 70-100 Series
Crane
9302
Nibco
T-585-70
Smith
125-T
Watts
B-6000
Stockham
S216-BR-RT
2012-10-05
1.
UOP Specification
Bronze and Iron Butterfly Valve
Page 1 of 1
970086 S8V037-0
Butterfly valves
CODE
NUMBER
BF-1170
NPS 2 to 24, Class 150, lug type, MSS SP-67,

API 609, Ductile iron, ASTM A 395 or ASTM A
536 body, bronze disc, TP316 SS or 17-4PH
SS shaft and pins, BUNA-N resilient seat,
luberized bronze bushings.
Latch lock handle for sizes up to 6"
Enclosed weatherproof gear operator for 8"
and over.
RECOMMENDEDVALVE
MODELS
Centerline Series 200
Keystone 122/129
Nibco LD 2100
Mueller Steam 52-U
2013-01-15
1.
UOP Specification
Nickel and Nickel Alloy Gate Valve
Page 1 of 2
970086 S8V053-0
Gate valves
CODE
NUMBER
GA-1180
NPS 2 to 24, Class 150, flanged, RF, cast,

ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS
N06600, API 600, hard faced seat, flexible
wedge, bolted bonnet, Alloy 600 trim, outside
screw & yoke (OS&Y), Graphoil packing and
gasket, handwheel operator.
Cooper 115RF
NPS 1, Class 150, flanged, RF, cast, ASTM A

494 Grade CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600,
API 600, hard faced seat, flexible wedge,
bolted bonnet, Alloy 600 trim, outside screw &
yoke (OS&Y), Graphoil packing and gasket,
handwheel operator.
Cooper 115RF
GA-3180
NPS 1/2 to 1 1/2, Class 300, socket weld

ends, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1
or ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C, API 602,
integral seat, solid plain wedge, bolted bonnet,
rising stem, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y),
bolted bonnet, Graphoil packing and gasket,
handwheel operator.
Cooper 3381-X
GA-3181
NPS 1/2 to 1 1/2, Class 300, socket weld end

Cooper 3381-X/SE
x screwed end NPT, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade
CY-40 Class 1 or ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C ,
API 602, integral seat, solid plain wedge,
bolted bonnet, rising stem, outside screw &
yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, Graphoil packing
and gasket, handwheel operator.
GA-3182
NPS 1, Class 300, flanged, RF, cast, ASTM A

494 Grade CY-40 Class 1 or ASTM A351
Grade CT-15C, API 602, integral seat, solid
plain wedge, bolted bonnet, rising stem,
Graphoil packing and gasket, handwheel
operator.
Cooper 130 RF
GA-3183

ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1 or ASTM
A351 Grade CT-15C, API 600, integral seat,
solid plain wedge, bolted bonnet, rising stem,
operator.
Cooper 130 RF
GA-1181
RECOMMENDED
VALVE MODELS
Xanik G-B-015-R-CY4060H-F
Xanik G-B-015-R-CY4060H-F
2013-01-15
GA-3184
GA-6180
UOP Specification
Nickel and Nickel Alloy Gate Valve
ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1 or ASTM
A351 Grade CT-15C, API 600, hard faced
seat, flexible wedge, bolted bonnet, outside
screw & yoke (OS&Y), corrosion-inhibited dieformed Graphite packing with braided antiextrusion rings
Page 2 of 2
970086 S8V053-0
Cooper 130RF
Xanik G-B-03-R-CY40-60HF
NPS 1/2 to 1 1/2, Class 600, socket weld, cast, Cooper 3611X
ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS
N06600, API 602, hard faced seat, Alloy 600
Xanik G-B-06-W-CY40trim, bolted bonnet, outside screw & yoke
60H-H
(OS&Y), corrosion-inhibited die-formed
Graphite packing with braided anti-extrusion
rings
2012-10-30
1.
UOP Specification
Nickel and Nickel Alloy Globe Valve
Page 1 of 1
970086 S8V054-0
Globe valves
CODE
NUMBER
RECOMMENDED
VALVE MODELS
GL-1180
NPS 2 to 6, Class 150, raised face, ASME

Cooper 215RF
B16.34, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class
2, Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet, hard faced
Xanik Fig Number: B-B-015seat, Alloy 600 trim, bolted bonnet, outside
R-CY40-60H or equal
screw & yoke (OS&Y), corrosion-inhibited dieformed Graphite packing with braided antiextrusion rings.
GL-3180

Cooper 4301-X
ends, ASME B16.34, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade
CY-40 Class 1, ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C,
integral seat, solid plain wedge, bolted bonnet,
rising stem, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y),
operator.
GL-3181

Cooper 230RF
2, Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet, hard faced
Xanik Fig Number: B-B-03seat, Alloy 600 trim, bolted bonnet, outside
R-CY40-60H or equal
screw & yoke (OS&Y), corrosion-inhibited dieformed Graphite packing with braided antiextrusion rings.
GL-3183
NPS 2 to 6, Class 300, flanged, ASME B16.34, Cooper 230

cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1,
ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C, integral seat,
solid plain wedge, rising stem, outside screw &
yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, Graphoil packing
and gasket, handwheel operator.
GL-6180

Cooper 4601-X
CY-40 Class 2, Alloy UNS N06600
Xanik Fig Number: B-B-06body/bonnet, hard faced seat, Alloy 600 trim,
W-CY40-60H-H or equal
bolted bonnet, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y),
corrosion-inhibited die-formed Graphite
packing with braided anti-extrusion rings.
GL-6181
NPS 3/4, Class 600, socket weld X Threaded

Cooper 4601-X/SE
Ends, ASME B16.34, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade
CY-40 Class 2, Alloy UNS N06600
Xanik Fig Number: B-B-06body/bonnet, hard faced seat, Alloy 600 trim,
W/T-CY40-60H-G-H or
bolted bonnet, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y),
equal
corrosion-inhibited die-formed Graphite
packing with braided anti-extrusion rings.
2012-10-30
1.
UOP Specification
Nickel and Nickel Alloy Check Valve
Page 1 of 1
970086 S8V055-0
Check valves
CODE
NUMBER
RECOMMENDED
VALVE MODELS
Ch-1180

Cooper 315RF
2 Alloy UNS N06600, Alloy 600 trim, ASME
Xanik W-B-015-R-CY40-60H
B16.34, hard faced seat, swing check, bolted
cap
CH-3180

Cooper 2301-X
CY-40 Class 1 or ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C,
ASME B16.34, integral seat, Swing type,
bolted cap, Graphoil packing and gasket,
CH-3181
NPS 1/2 to 4, ASME Class 300 cast raised

face flanged, Incoloy 800 ASTM A351 Grade
CT-15C body/ bonnet cap, Incoloy 800 trim,
spiral wound with Incoloy 800 windings cap
gasket, incompliance with ASME B16.34.
CH-3182

Cooper 330RF
2 Alloy UNS N06600, Alloy 600 trim, ASME
Xanik W-B-03-R-CY40-60H
B16.34, hard faced seat, swing check, bolted
cap
CH-6180
NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 600, socket weld,

ASME B16.34, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600, Alloy 600 trim,
ASME B16.34, hard faced seat, swing check,
bolted cap
Cooper 330-RF
Cooper 2601-X
Xanik W-B-06-W-CY40-60H
UOP/PEMEX1226401
PIPESUPPORTSbyLINE
LineNumber
AEL103RMS1
AEL105RMS1
APL601RPR8
APL601RPR8
APL601RPR8
ARL103RMS1
ARL103RMS1
ARL105RMS1
CML278NMS11
CML278NMS11
CML278NMS11
CML278NMS11
CML278NMS11
CML278NMS11
DAAL273NMS11
DAAL273NMS11
DAAL273NMS11
DAAL273NMS11
DAAL273NMS11
DAAL273NMS11
DAAL273NMS11
GIL115RPR8
GIL115RPR8
GIL116RPR8
GIL116RPR8
GIL118RPR8
GIL118RPR8
GIL118RPR8
GIL118RPR8
GIL118RPR8
GIL254NPR8
GIL275NPR8
GIL275NPR8
Type
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
PipeSize
1.5
2
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2
1
1
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
2
0.75
2
2
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
4
5
1
3
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
1226401f70200316002.xlsx
Issued:1/17/13
Rev.A
Description
FIELDSUPPORTFS1,("W"=356mm)
ANCHOREDBASELINESUPPORTPS21A,("L"=440mm)
FIELDSUPPORTFS9B,("L"=193mm)
RODHANGERRH2,("L"=324mm)
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
BASELINESUPPORTPS21B,("L"=1058mm)
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
FIELDSUPPORTFS10TYPEE,("A"=600mm),"B"=272mm)
FIELDSUPPORTFS9C,("L"=304.8mm)
PIPEGUIDEPS25A
PIPESHOEPS32A
FIELDSUPPORTFS9C,("L"=213mm)
LONGTANGENTUBOLTPS52L
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
ANCHOREDBASEELLSUPPORTPS20A,("L"=744mm)
STANDARDPIPERISERCLAMPFS15,TYPEA
FIELDSUPPORTFS9E,("L"=137mm)
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
FIELDSUPPORTFS9D,("L"=300mm)
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
FIELDSUPPORTFS9E,("L"=189mm)
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
1of4
UOP/PEMEX1226401
PIPESUPPORTSbyLINE
LineNumber
GIL275NPR8
GIL275NPR8
REL253NPR8
REL253NPR8
REL253NPR8
REL259NB1A1
REL259NB1A1
REL259NB1A1
REL259NB1A1
REL259NB1A1
REL259NB1A1
REL260NPR36
REL260NPR36
REL265NPR36
REL265NPR36
REL265NPR36
REL267NPR8
REL267NPR8
REL267NPR8
REL268NPR8
REL268NPR8
REL268NPR8
REL268NPR8
REL268NPR8
REL271NB2A1
REL408RPR4
REL408RPR4
REL408RPR4
REL408RPR4
REL408RPR4
REL408RPR4
REL408RPR4
REL408RPR4
Type
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
PipeSize
2
2
1
1
1
10
10
10
10
10
10
6
6
6
6
0.75
3
3
6
3
3
3
3
3
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
12
12
Quantity
6
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
5
1
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
4
2
1
1
1
1
7
11
2
1
Description
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
FIELDSUPPORTFS12A,("L"=208mm)
RODHANGERRH2,("L"=1523.6mm)
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
TRUNNIONSUPPORTPS13,("L"=200mm)
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
PIPESHOEPS32A
PIPESHOEPS32A,("L"=229mm),("H"=101.6mm)
BASEELLSUPPORTPS17,("L"=437mm)
FIELDSUPPORTFS13
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
ANCHOREDBASELINESUPPORTPS21A,("L"=631.2mm)
FIELDSUPPORTFS9B
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
PIPESHOEPS32B
1226401f70200316002.xlsx
Issued:1/17/13
Rev.A
2of4
UOP/PEMEX1226401
PIPESUPPORTSbyLINE
LineNumber
REL506RPR8
REL506RPR8
REL606RB1A1
REL607RB1A1
REL607RB1A1
REL607RB1A1
REL607RB1A1
REL607RB1A1
REL607RB1A1
REL607RB1A1
REL607RB1A1
REL710RPR6
REL801RPR8
REL801RPR8
REL801RPR8
REL801RPR8
REL801RPR8
REL801RPR8
REL802RPR8
REL802RPR8
REL802RPR8
REL802RPR8
REL802RPR8
REL802RPR8
REL802RPR8
REL802RPR8
REL803RPR8
REL803RPR8
REL803RPR8
REL803RPR8
REL803RPR8
REL803RPR8
REL806RPR8
Type
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
PipeSize
6
6
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
12
3
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
Quantity
1
3
1
7
2
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
4
1
2
1
1
1
3
1
1226401f70200316002.xlsx
Issued:1/17/13
Rev.A
Description
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
BASELINESUPPORTPS15,("L"=294mm)
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
GUIDEDSLIDEPLATEASSEMBLYFORBASESUPPORTPS61C
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
3of4
UOP/PEMEX1226401
PIPESUPPORTSbyLINE
LineNumber
REL806RPR8
REL807RPR8
VAL276NMS12
VAL276NMS12
VAL276NMS12
VAL276NMS12
VAL276NMS12
VAL276NMS12
VAL276NMS12
VAL277NMS12
VBL272NMS11
VBL272NMS11
VBL272NMS11
VBL272NMS11
VBL272NMS11
VBL272NMS11
VBL272NMS11
VBL272NMS11
VBL272NMS11
VBL272NMS11
VBL272NMS11
VCL266NPR8
VCL266NPR8
VCL266NPR8
VCL266NPR8
VCL269NB2A1
VCL269NB2A1
VCL281NB1A1
VCL281NB1A1
VCL282NB1A1
Type
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
Supports
PipeSize
3
3
1
1
1
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
1
1.5
1.5
1.5
6
0.75
0.75
6
10
10
0.5
0.5
0.5
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
7
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
6
4
6
1
1
1
3
1
1
2
5
2
1226401f70200316002.xlsx
Issued:1/17/13
Rev.A
Description
FIELDSUPPORTFS10A,("A"=457mm),"B"=397mm)
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
FIELDSUPPORTFS9C,("L"=304.8mm)
FIELDSUPPORTFS9D,("L"=214mm)
PIPEGUIDEPS25A
PIPESHOEPS32A
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
PIPESHOEPS32A
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
PIPEGUIDEPS25A
PIPESHOEPS32A
FIELDSUPPORTFS1,("W"=650mm)
PIPESHOEPS32A
LONGTANGENTUBOLTPS52L
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
STANDARDUBOLTPS52
4of4
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
AMBITECH JOB NUMBER

CORPORATE PROCEDURE
PIPING DEPARTMENT INDEX

TO STANDARD
PIPE SUPPORTS
DOCUMENT NUMBER
MDI-1
ENGINEERS AND DESIGNERS

Downers Grove, Illinois
BY:
STB
CHKD:
JRB
APVD:
TAE
DATE
08/08
REV
PAGE
OF
Number
Description
FS-1
Field Support Unbalanced Loads (3/4 4 Piping)
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
FS-9A-D
Field Installed Horizontal Pipe Supports Single Line
FS-9E
Field Installed Vertical Pipe Support Single Line
FS-10A&B
Field Installed Horizontal Pipe Supports Multiple Line
FS-10E
Field Installed Vertical Pipe Supports Multiple Line
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
NOTE THIS PRINT IS THE PROPERTY OF AMBITECH ENGINEERING CORPORATION AND SHALL NOT BE TRACED, PHOTOGRAPHED, PHOTOSTATED, OR REPRODUCED
IN ANY MANNER, NOR USED FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER EXCEPT BY WRITTEN PERMISSION OF AMBITECH ENGINEERING CORPORATION.
FS-15
Miscellaneous Field Installed Pipe Supports Riser Clamp
PS-13
Trunnion Support
PS-15
Base Support (No Holes in Base Plate)
PS-17
Base Ell Support (No Holes in Base Plate)
PS-20A
Anchored Base Ell Support for 2 & Under Piping
PS-21A
Anchored Base Line Support for 2 & Under Piping
PS-21B
Base Support for 2 & Under Piping
PS-25A
Guide Lug for Support Shoe Welded Type
PS-32A
Pipe Shoe Through 10 CS Pipe in Hot Service (3 Max. Insulation)
PS-32B
Pipe Shoe 12 Through 18 CS Pipe in Hot Service (3 Max. Insulation)
PS-52/52L
U-Bolt Details (Standard and Long Tangent)
PS-61C
Guided Slide Plate Assembly Sitting on Steel
RH-1
Rod Hanger Insulated Lines
RH-2
Rod Hanger Insulated & Uninsulated Lines
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSULATION LIST

UOP, LLC (PEMEX)
PEMEX CCR REVAMP
JOB NUMBER: 970086
DOCUMENT NO.: 12264-01-F50-250411- 002
Rev. A
PRELIMINARY
Rev. Date: 01/17/2013

By: SDA Chk: JDS Aprv: WLJ
Process Data
Rev.
Equip. No.
Equipment Name
Location / Area
Quantity
Disposition (Reuse
Existing / Modify
Exist. / New
P&ID (PFD)
Number
Stream / Fluid
Maximum Operating Temp.

deg. C
Insulation Type
Insulation
Thickness
mm (Inch)
Jacket
191
Remarks
BH-500
REGENERATION HEATER
Existing CCR
Purchase New
(970086-D107)
Process Gas
483
Mineral Wool Per

ASTM C547, C553,
and C612 at 144
kg/m3
EA-515
REGENERATION COOLER
Existing CCR
Modify & Reuse
(970086-D108)
Hot Side: Regen Gas

Cold Side: Air
Hot Side: 512 Inlet 521

Outlet Cold Side: 46
65
(2.5)
Insulate Jacketed Sections for

EA-520
VENT GAS COOLER
New CCR
Purchase New
(970086-D109)
Shell: Air
Tube: Vent Gas
Shell Side: 367

Tube Side: 565
Mineral Wool Per

ASTM C547, C553,
and C612 at 144
kg/m3
Insulation Thickness is dependant on

O.D. of Heat Exchanger
Shell Side: 156

Tube Side: 375
Mineral Wool Per

ASTM C547, C553,
and C612 at 144
kg/m3
Insulation Thickness is dependant on

O.D. of Heat Exchanger
EA-521
PREHEAT GAS HEATER
New CCR
Purchase New
(970086-D109)
Shell: Nitrogen
Tube: HP Steam
FA-510
REGENERATION TOWER
Existing CCR
Modify & Reuse
(970086-D107)
Catalyst
GB-505
REGENERATION BLOWER
Grade
Purchase New
(970086-D108)
538
Mineral Wool Per

ASTM C547, C553,
and C612 at 144
kg/m3
229 (HOLD)
R01
REACTOR
Existing Reactor
Modify & Reuse
(970086-D105)
Insulation thickness will depend on

the unit's size supplied by the
vendor.
Notes:
Legend: ''--" Not Applicable, X - Information Required - Later, Est - Estimated Value
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Mechanical
By S. Arnold
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
p:\falcon\view\uop\12264-01\mech\docs\12264-01-f50-250411-002
90%Review
UO, LLC (PEMEX)

PEMEX CCR REVAMP
Page 1 of 1
PROJECT: PEMEX 750 PPH CCR REVAMP

DOCUMENT NO. : 970086-D660
INSTRUMENT BILL OF MATERIAL

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
MECHANICAL
PNEUMATIC
ELECTRICAL
SUPPORT
INSTRUMENT JUNCTION BOXES
INSTRUMENT CABLE
INSTRUMENT CONDUIT
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
A
REV
DATE
DJN
DESCRIPTION
BY
DOCUMENT REVISIONS
FFN
CHKD
KOB
APPD
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
316 STAINLESS STEEL SEAMLESS TUBING ASTM A269

GRADE TP 316
GRADE TP 316
GRADE TP 316
1/4"O.D x 0.035"WT
3/8"O.D x 0.035"WT
1/2"O.D x 0.049"WT
1/4"NPT-M x 1/4"O.D
MALE CONNECTOR, 316SS COMP. TYPE WITH DOUBLE FERRULE
1/4"NPT-M x 1/2"O.D
SWAGELOK/SS-T4-S-0356ME
D667-2
D667-3
D667-4
D667-6
D667-8
D667-13
D667-14
D667-15
D667-16
D667-17
D667-18
D667-22
NUMBER OF INSTALLATION PER DETAIL
D667-1
UNIT
MFR. / PART
NO.
MECHANICAL HOOK-UP DWG. NO. 970086-D667-X

ACTUAL
DESCRIPTION
SPARE
SIZE
UOP
PURCHASE
ITEM
NO.
QUANTITY
0:%
130
FT.
0%
10
FT.
0%
190
FT.
SWAGELOK/SS-400-1-4
0%
20
EA
SWAGELOK/SS-400-1-8
0%
EA
3/4"NPT-M x 1/4"O.D
SWAGELOK/SS-400-1-12
0%
21
EA
3/4"NPT-M x 1/4"O.D
0%
EA
1/2"NPT-M x 1/2"O.D
SWAGELOK/SS-810-1-8
0%
74
EA
10
3/4"NPT-M x 1/2"O.D
0%
EA
11
1"NPT-M x 1/2"O.D
0%
11
EA
16
1/2"NPT-M
BUG SCREEN, 316SS
SWAGELOK/SS-MD-8
0%
EA
18
1/2"O.D
EQUAL TEE, 316SS COMP. TYPE WITH DOUBLE FERRULE
SWAGELOK/SS-810-3
0%
EA
19
1/2" x 1/2" x 1/4"O.D
REDUCING TEE, 316SS COMP. TYPE WITH DOUBLE FERRULE
SWAGELOK/SS-810-3-8-4
0%
EA
20
1/4"NPT-F x 1/4"O.D
FEMALE CONNECTOR, 316SS COMP. TYPE WITH DOUBLE

FERRULE
HY-LOK/CFC4-4N
0%
EA
24
1/4"O.D.
STRAIGHT UNION, 316SS COMP. TYPE WITH DOUBLE FERRULE
SWAGELOK/SS-400-6
0%
EA
25
1/2"O.D. x 1/4"O.D.
REDUCING UNION, 316SS COMP. TYPE WITH DOUBLE FERRULE
SWAGELOK/SS-810-6-4
0%
EA
26
1/4"NPT
HEX NIPPLE, 316SS
HY-LOK/H-SNA-4N
0%
EA
28
1/4"
UNION, 316SS COMP. TYPE W/ DOUBLE FERRULE
HY-LOK/CUA-4
0%
EA
30
1/4"NPT-M
PIPE PLUG, 316SS
SWAGELOK/SS-4-P
0%
EA
33
1/4"O.D x 0.049"WT
0%
10
FT.
10
34
3/8"O.D x 0.049"WT
0%
10
FT.
10
35
1/2"O.D
SWAGELOK/SS-63TS8
0%
EA
36
1/2"O.D
SWAGELOK/SS-58S8
0%
EA
37
1/2"NPT-F x 1/4"O.D
SWAGELOK/SS-400-S-8
0%
EA.

GRADE TP 316
GRADE TP 316
BALL VALVE, 316SS
SPRING CHECK VALVE 316SS COMP. TYPE WITH DOUBLE
FERRULE
FEMALE CONNECTOR, 316SS COMP. TYPE WITH DOUBLE
FERRULE
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
2
3
1
2
1
2
O'BRIEN/HY19-1-X-M1
0%
EA
42
O'BRIEN/TPL1S-B4-F2
0%
EA.
43
HEAT SHRINK END SEAL BOOT
O'BRIEN/TPKHS-C2
0%
EA
DONG SUNG/TR-3002
0%
20
FT.
Page 1 of 1
10
316SS SEAMLESS TUBE BUNDLE W/ ONE 1/2"O.D x 0.049"WT

TRACER
TUBING RACEAY, 304SS
10
ENCLOSURE FOR INSTRUMENT BODY & MANIFOLD VALVE
40 x 19 x 1.6mm THK.
10
10
41
45
10
10
REMARK

D668-1
UNIT
MFR. / PART
NO.
PNEUMATIC HOOK-UP DWG. NO. 970086-D668-1

ACTUAL
DESCRIPTION
SPARE
SIZE
QUANTITY
UOP
PURCHASE
ITEM
NO.
REMARK
30
3/8"O.D x 0.049"WT

GRADE TP 316
12
1/4"NPT-M x 3/8"O.D
13
1/2"NPT-M x 3/8"O.D
SWAGELOK/SS-T6-S-49-6ME
0%
300
FT.
10
SWAGELOK/SS-600-1-4
0%
30
EA
SWAGELOK/SS-600-1-8
0%
30
EA
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
Page 1 of 1
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
3/4"NPT-F
TEE, FERALOY IRON ALLOY W/COVER & SOLID GASKET
10
1"NPT-F
TEE, FERALOY IRON ALLOY W/COVER & SOLID GASKET
11
1 1/2"NPT-F
CONDUIT, GALVANIZED STEEL, PVC COATED
14
1/2"NPT-M
DRAIN, STAINLESS STEEL
15
1/2"NPT-M x 1/2"NPT-F
90 DEGREE ELBOW, (IF REQUIRED) FERALOY IRON ALLOY
16
19
15
10
0%
176
EA
0%
15
EA
0%
30
FT.
0%
10
FT.
0%
500
FT.
0%
105
EA
0%
51
EA
0%
76
EA
0%
196
EA
CROUSE-HINDS EL196
0%
134
EA
90 DEGREE ELBOW, (IF REQUIRED) FERALOY IRON ALLOY
CROUSE-HINDS EL296
0%
16
EA
REDUCER, STEEL
CROUSE-HINDS RE21
0%
278
EA
20
1"NPT-M x 1/2"NPT-F
REDUCER, STEEL
CROUSE-HINDS RE31
0%
51
EA
21
1"NPT-M x 3/4"NPT-F
REDUCER, STEEL
CROUSE-HINDS RE32
0%
19
EA
22
1 1/2"NPT-M x 1/2"NPT-F
REDUCER, STEEL
CROUSE-HINDS RE51
0%
72
EA
25
3/4"
COUPLING, GALVANIZED STEEL
CROUSE-HINDS -
0%
160
EA
27
1 1/2"NPT
COUPLING, GALVANIZED STEEL
CROUSE-HINDS -
0%
40
EA.
29
UNION, STEEL
CROUSE-HINDS UNY105
0%
196
EA
30
UNION, STEEL
CROUSE-HINDS UNY205
0%
48
EA
31
1"NPT-M x 1"NPT-F
UNION, STEEL
CROUSE-HINDS UNY305
0%
EA
32
1 1/2"NPT-M x 1 1/2"NPT-F
UNION, STEEL
CROUSE-HINDS UNY506
0%
116
EA
33
SEAL FITTING, FERALOY IRON ALLOY
CROUSE-HINDS EYS116
0%
155
EA
34
CROUSE-HINDS EYS216
0%
23
EA
35
1"NPT-M x 1"NPT-F
CROUSE-HINDS EYS316
0%
EA
36
1 1/2"NPT-M x 1 1/2"NPT-F
CROUSE-HINDS EYS516
0%
76
EA
37
1 1/2"NPT-F x 1 1/2"NPT-F
CROUSE-HINDS EYSX51
0%
40
EA
38
1/2"NPT-F
CONDUIT OUTLET BOX W/TERMINALS FERALOY IRON ALLOY
0%
EA
39
1/2"NPT
NIPPLE, TBE, GALVANIZED STEEL, PVC COATED
0%
24
EA
CROUSE-HINDS EABC16WOD
PLASTI-BOND PRHNIP1/2x3
Page 1 of 2
D669-20
D669-18
36
D669-17
1 1/2"NPT-M
D669-16
D669-15
D669-14
1"NPT-M
D669-13
21
D669-12
19
D669-11
3/4"NPT-M
23
D669-10
D669-8
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
D669-7
3/4"NPT-M x 3/4"NPT-M
D669-6
CROUSE-HINDS
ECGJH118
CROUSE-HINDS
ECGJH218
PLASTI-BOND
PRHCONDUIT-3/4
PLASTI-BOND
PRHCONDUIT-1
PLASTI-BOND
PRHCONDUIT-1 1/2
CROUSE-HINDS EABT26WOD
CROUSE-HINDS EABT36WOD
PLASTI-BOND
PRHCONDUIT-1 1/2
CROUSE-HINDS ECD1N4D
D669-5
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
D669-4
1/2"NPT-M x 1/2"NPT-M
D669-3
D669-2
D669-1
UNIT
MFR. / PART
NO.
ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP DWG. NO. 970086-D669-X

ACTUAL
DESCRIPTION
SPARE
SIZE
UOP
PURCHASE
ITEM
NO.
QUANTITY
D669-9
1
10
10
10
10
10
1
10
1
10
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
5
1
2
1
1
4
1
6
1
1
2
1
1
6
1
1
1
4
1
5
REMARK

41
1"NPT
PLASTI-BOND PRHNIP-1x3
0%
35
EA
42
1 1/2"NPT
PLASTI-BOND PRHNIP-11/2x3
0%
40
EA
43
1"NPT-M
PLUG, FERALOY IRON ALLOY
CROUSE- HINDS
0%
EA
RECTIFIER DIODE
RADIOSHACK 1N4005
0%
15
FT.
44
D669-2
D669-3
D669-4
D669-5
D669-6
D669-7
D669-8
D669-9
D669-10
D669-11
D669-12
D669-13
D669-14
D669-15
D669-16
D669-17
D669-18
D669-20
D669-1
UNIT
MFR. / PART
NO.
ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP DWG. NO. 970086-D669-X

ACTUAL
DESCRIPTION
SPARE
SIZE
UOP
PURCHASE
ITEM
NO.
QUANTITY
23
19
21
36
15
10
5
4
1
45
ADAPTER, STEEL
CROUSE-HINDS REA12
0%
EA
46
3/4'NPT-M x 1"NPT-F
ADAPTER, STEEL
CROUSE-HINDS REA23
0%
EA
51
1/2"NPT-F x 1"NPT-F
REDUCER, STEEL
CROUSE-HINDS REC53
0%
EA
WEIDMULLER
0%
EA
53
TERMINAL STRIP W/MOUNTING KIT
REMARK
1
1
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
Page 2 of 2

D670-11
D670-13
D670-14
10
D670-19
D670-10
D670-18
D670-9
D670-15
D670-6
D670-2
UNIT
MFR. / PART
NO.
SUPPORT HOOK-UP DWG. NO. 970086-D670-X

ACTUAL
DESCRIPTION
SPARE
SIZE
UOP
PURCHASE
ITEM
NO.
QUANTITY
10
10
2"
PIPE, SCHEDULE 40, A120 CS GALV., L=1500
0%
25
EA.
L75x200x6mm THK
GUSSET PLATE, PAINTED
0%
50
EA
M12x85L
PAINTED MACHINE BOLT AND NUT, WASHER
0%
260
EA
L250x250x12mm THK
PLATE, PAINTED
0%
46
EA
L50x50x6mm THK
ANGLE, PAINTED, L=250
0%
8,760
MM
250
250
250
250
560
L50x50x6mm THK
0%
1,870
MM
110
110
110
110
110
L50x50x6mm THK
ANGLE, PAINTED
0%
330
MM
110
110
L250x250x12mm THK
PLATE, PAINTED
0%
EA
L50x50x6mm THK
0%
800
MM
800
10
L100x50x6mm THK
CHANNEL, PAINTED, L=1500
0%
40
EA
11
L100x50x6mm THK
CHANNEL, PAINTED, L=952.5
0%
80
EA.
12
L75x200x6mm THK
GUSSET PLATE, PAINTED
0%
80
EA
13
L300x300x12mm THK
PLATE, PAINTED
0%
41
EA
14
L100x50x6mm THK
CHANNEL, PAINTED, L=1905
0%
20
EA
15
M12x50L
0%
EA
16
M12x25L
0%
EA
17
M6x25L
0%
EA
REMARK
250 3200
2
2
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
Page 1 of 1

TAKE OFF MATERIALS : JUNCTION BOX (CCR SECTION - INSTRUMENT)
ACTUAL
UNIT
JUNCTION BOX W/HINGED COVER,

COPPER FREE ALUMINUM, CLASS 1,
DIVISION 1 (FOR THERMOCOUPLE)
CROUSE-HINDS EJB242408-S598
0%
EA.
JUNCTION BOX W/HINGED COVER,

COPPER FREE ALUMINUM, CLASS 1,
DIVISION 1 (Analog/Digital - DCS/LHCS)
CROUSE-HINDS EJB242408-S598
0%
EA.
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
MFR. / PART
NO.
REMARK
D654
SPARE
JUNCTION BOX ASSEMBLY DWG. NO. 970086-DXXX
D653
QUANTITY
UOP
PURCHASE
ITEM NO.
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
Page 1 of 1

TAKE OFF MATERIALS : CABLE (CCR SECTION - INSTRUMENT)
QUANTITY
ACTUAL
UNIT
INSTRUMENTATION CABLES
SPARE
UOP
PURCHASE
ITEM NO.
Multipair of insulated stranded copper wire,

Tinned copper drain wire 7 Strand
16AWG, 12PAIR concentric bare copper 300V, 105 , PVC
insulation, Aluminum-Mylar tape shield
(Analog/Digital - DCS/LHCS)
BELDEN
0%
10000
ft
Wire color : Black & White,

Outer jacket color : Black
Multipair shielded, Tinned copper drain wire

Solid alloy wire, 300V, 105 , PVC
16AWG, 12PAIR
insulation, Aluminum-Mylar tape shield (T/C
Cable)
BELDEN
0%
2000
ft
Wire color : Yellow & Red,

Outer jacket color : Yellow
Type "K"
Multipair shielded, Tinned copper drain wire

Solid alloy wire, 300V, 105 , PVC
16AWG, 12PAIR
insulation, Aluminum-Mylar tape shield (T/C
Cable)
BELDEN
0%
2000
ft
Wire color : Purple & Red,

Outer jacket color : Yellow
Type "E"
16AWG, 1PAIR
Single pair, 105C, PVC insulation (T/C

Cable)
BELDEN
0%
1800
ft
Wire color : Yellow & Red,

Outer jacket color : Purple
Type "K"
16AWG, 1PAIR
Single pair, 105C, PVC insulation (T/C

Cable)
BELDEN
0%
1800
ft
Wire color : Purple & Red,

Outer jacket color : Purple
Type "E"
16AWG, 1PAIR
Single pair, 105C, PVC insulation

(Analog/Digital - DCS/LHCS)
BELDEN
0%
4500
ft
Wire color : Black & White,

Outer jacket color : Black
SIZE
MFR. / PART
NO.
DESCRIPTION
REMARK
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
Page 1 of 1

TAKE OFF MATERIALS : CONDUIT (CCR SECTION - INSTRUMENT)
QUANTITY
PLASTI-BOND PRHCONDUIT-3/4
0%
2500
FT
UNF205
0%
250
EA
3/4"-1" Reducer
RE32
0%
100
EA
Conduit Hangers
UNISTRUT P1112 SS
0%
EA
0%
100
EA
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
MFR. / PART
NO.
UNIT
ACTUAL
INSTRUMENTATION CONDUITS W/HARDWARE
SPARE
UOP
PURCHASE
ITEM NO.
REMARK

1
3/4"
Conduit, PVC Coated
3/4"
Conduit Connectors
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
Conduit Outlet Box
1"
Conduit, PVC Coated
1"
Conduit Connectors
PLASTI-BOND PRHCONDUIT-1
0%
14000
FT
UNF305
0%
400
EA
UNISTRUT P1113 SS
0%
200
EA
0%
200
EA
1"
Conduit Hangers
10
1"
Conduit Outlet Box
11
1 1/2"
Conduit, PVC Coated
12
1 1/2"
Conduit Connectors
13
1 1/2"
1 1/2"-2" Reducer
RE65
14
1 1/2"
Conduit Hangers
UNISTRUT P1115 SS
15
1 1/2"
Conduit Outlet Box
16
2"
Conduit, PVC Coated
17
2"
Conduit Connectors
UNF605
18
2"
2"-2 1/2" Reducer
RE76
19
2"
Conduit Hangers
UNISTRUT P1117 SS
20
2"
Conduit Outlet Box
PLASTI-BOND PRHCONDUIT-1 1/2
0%
1000
FT
UNF505
0%
200
EA
0%
50
EA
0%
100
EA
0%
100
EA
0%
150
FT
0%
15
EA
0%
13
EA
0%
15
EA
0%
EA
PLASTI-BOND PRHCONDUIT-2 1/2
0%
200
FT
UNF705
0%
40
EA
21
2 1/2"
Conduit, PVC Coated
22
2 1/2"
Conduit Connectors
23
2 1/2"
2 1/2"-3" Reducer
RE97
0%
20
EA
24
2 1/2"
Conduit Hangers
UNISTRUT P1118 SS
0%
20
EA
25
2 1/2"
Conduit Outlet Box
0%
20
EA
26
3"
Conduit, PVC Coated
0%
100
FT
27
3"
Conduit Connectors
UNF805
0%
10
EA
28
3"
Conduit Hangers
29
3"
Conduit Outlet Box
UNISTRUT P1119 SS
0%
10
EA
0%
EA
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
Page 1 of 1

DOCUMENT NO. : 970086-D732
ELECTRICAL BILL OF MATERIAL

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
PANELBOARDS
GROUNDING
CONDUITS
CONTROL STATIONS
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
POWER CABLES
LIGHTING
RECEPTACLES
MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline Electrical
By D.
NOLTE
NOTE: REFER TO INSTALLATION DETAILS

(DWG'S 970086-D743 THRU D760)
FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILED MATERIAL LIST.
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
A
REV
DATE
DJN
DESCRIPTION
BY
DOCUMENT REVISIONS
FFN
CHKD
KOB
APPD

1. PANELBOARDS
REV.
ITEM
1.1
RECEPTACLE PANEL (RP-1), 220/127V, 3PH, 4W, 60HZ
CLASS 1, DIV.1 GROUP B, C & D
CONSISTING OF :
a. MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER MODULE
RATING AMP : 100AF/50AT (MCB)
b. BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKER MODULE
CONSISTING OF 9 (NINE) - 1POLE 20A, GFI TYPE (5wA SENSITIVITY)
BREAKER MODULE ENCLOSURE
- BODY AND COVER : CAST COPPER FREE ALUMINUM
- GASKET : NEOPRENE
- HINGES AND OPERATING HANDLES : EXTRUDED ALUMINUM (COPPER - FREE)
c. TERMINAL BLOCK MODULE
CONSISTING OF 2P - TERMINAL BLOCK FOR INCOMING CIRCUIT
UNIT
QTY
MANUFACTURER/CATALOG #
set
CROUSE-HINDS
"POWERPLUS" PANELBOARD
EPLB314-G-09-20-3M100
set
CROUSE-HINDS
50P - #6 AWG TERMINAL BLOCK FOR OUTGOING WITH EARTH TERMINAL

INCOMING & OUTGOING ENTRIES : SIDE (NPT THREAD) WITH STAINLESS STEEL MYERS HUB AND THREADED METAL PLUGS
1.2
LIGHTING PANEL (LP-1), 220/127V, 3PH, 4W, 60HZ

CONSISTING OF :
EPLB322-G-09-2-20-3M100

CONSISTING OF 9 (NINE) - 2POLE 20A
- GASKET : NEOPRENE
1.3
EMERGENCY LIGHTING PANEL (EM-LP), 220, 2PH, 3W, 60HZ

CONSISTING OF :
CONSISTING OF 5 (FIVE) - 2POLE 20A
- GASKET : NEOPRENE
set
CROUSE-HINDS
EPLB314-05-2-20-2M100
1.4
INSTRUMENT POWER PANEL (IPP-1), 220/127V, 3PH, 4W, 60HZ

CONSISTING OF :
CONSISTING OF 15 (FIFTEEN) - 1POLE 10A, GFI TYPE (5wA SENSITIVITY)
- GASKET : NEOPRENE
set
CROUSE-HINDS
EPLB320-G-15-1-10-3M100
Page 1 of 1
2. GROUNDING
REV.
UNIT
QTY
SET
30
#2/0 AWG
FT
1500
#2 AWG
FT
500
FT
300
#2/0 AWG
EA
140
BURNDY YGA TYPE YGA26-2N
#2 AWG
EA
100
BURNDY YGA TYPE YGA2C-2N
BUSHING, GROUND, IRON INSULATED 3/4" 4-14 LUG
EA
CROUSE HINDS HGLL-2C
BUSHING, GROUND, IRON INSULATED 1 1/2" 4-14 LUG
EA
BUSHING, GROUND, IRON INSULATED 1" 4-14
EA
BUSHING, GROUND, IRON INSULATED 2" 4-14 LUG
EA
BUSHING, GROUND, IRON INSULATED 2 1/2" 4-14 LUG
EA
BUSHING, GROUND, IRON INSULATED 3" 4-14
EA
CONDUIT PVC SCHEDULE 80 1" DIAMETER
FT
100
CONNECTOR SERVIT POST #2 - #2/0 AWG 1/2" - 13 WITH SPLIT LOCKWASHER AND NUT
EA
200
GROUND CLIP 6 1/8"L X 2" X 1/4" COPPER BAR WITH 2-1/2" HOLES
EA
80
CONNECTOR SERVIT #2 - #2/0 AWG
EA
120
BURNDY KS26
UNISTRUT 3/4" CONDUIT CLAMP WITH SCREW AND NUT STAINLESS STEEL
EA
160
UNISTRUT P1112 SS
CONDUIT CLAMP, ONE HOLE, MALLEABLE IRON 1"
EA
40
CROUSE-HINDS 512
WASHER, LOCK 3/8 SS
EA
10
UNISTRUT HLKW037 SS
ITEM
2.1
GROUNDING STATION
TINNED COPPER PLATE
2"W x X"L x 3/8"THK W/GROUNDING CONNECTORS (SEE 2.6)
2.2
DETAIL A (DWG. D759)
GROUND WIRE
STRANDED SOFT DRAWN COPPER WIRE WITH GREEN COLORED THW INSULATION, 600 VOLTS
2.3
PVC CONDUIT SCHEDULE 40

1"DIAMETER
2.4
COMPRESSION TERMINAL LUG

TIN PLATED COPPER, SEAMLESS RING TONGUE TYPE
2.5
2.6
BURNDY K2C26BINSP OR KC23BINSP
NUT HEX 3/8-16 SS
EA
10
UNISTRUT HHXN037 SS
ANCHOR, CONCRETE, 3/8"-16 SS
EA
10
HILTI KB2 21655 3/8 X3
UNISTRUT CHANNEL 1 5/8" X 1 5/8" SS
EA
400
UNISTRUT P1000SS
BOLT, HEX HEAD 1/4" -20 X 1 1/2" SS
EA
30
UNISTRUT HHCS025150SS
WASHER, 1/4" SS
EA
30
UNISTRUT HFLW025SS
EA
30
UNISTRUT HLKW025SS
WASHER, LOCK 1/4" SS
Page 1 of 1

3. CONDUITS
REV.
ITEM
3.1
3.2
UNIT
MANUFACTURER / CATALOG #
QTY
CONDUITS
3/4" CONDUIT
FT
2500
PLASTI-BOND, PRHCONDUIT-3/4
1" CONDUIT
FT
1800
PLASTI-BOND, PRHCONDUIT-1
1 1/2" CONDUIT
FT
3000
PLASTI-BOND, PRHCONDUIT-1 1/2
2" CONDUIT
FT
2400
2 1/2" CONDUIT
FT
400
3" CONDUIT
FT
400
3 1/2" CONDUIT
FT
430
a. RE 52 (1 1/2" X 3/4")
EA
20
CROUSE-HINDS RE 52
b. RE 32 (1" X 3/4")
EA
30
CROUSE-HINDS RE 32
c. RE 54 (1 1/2" X 1")
EA
10
CROUSE-HINDS RE 53
1 1/2"
EA
10
CROUSE-HINDS XJG58 - BJ54
1"
EA
18
CROUSE-HINDS XJG38 - BJ34
REDUCERS
REDUCERS : ALL OTHERS IN FERALOY IRON ALLOY
3.3
CONDUIT EXPANSION JOINT

WITH INTERNAL GROUNDING FOR RIGID METAL CONDUIT AND IMC
BODY : STEEL ELECTRO GALVANIZED
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
RIGID GALVANIZED CONDUIT COUPLINGS

3/4"
EA
225
CROUSE-HINDS UNF 205
1"
EA
225
1 1/2"
EA
60
3/4"
EA
250
UNISTRUT P1112SS
1"
EA
180
UNISTRUT P1113SS
1 1/2"
EA
300
UNISTRUT P1115SS
2"
EA
240
UNISTRUT P1116SS
2 1/2"
EA
40
UNISTRUT P1117SS
3"
EA
40
UNISTRUT P1118SS
3 1/2"
EA
50
UNISTRUT P1119SS
CONDUIT CLAMPS
DRAIN SEALING FITTING, FERALOY IRON ALLOY (STAINLESS STEEL)

1" (FEMALE HUB)
EA
15
CROUSE-HINDS EYDX 31
1 1/2" (FEMALE HUB)
EA
10
CROUSE-HINDS EYDX 51
BREATHER AND DRAIN UNIVERSAL SS 1/2" SS (MALE & FEMALE HUB)
EA
16
CROUSE-HINDS ECD 16
3/4" CONDUIT OUTLET BOX - 2 WAY
EA
100
CROUSE HINDS: GUAL24
3/4" CONDUIT OUTLET BOX - 3 WAY
EA
50
CROUSE HINDS: GUAT24
1" CONDUIT OUTLET BOX - 2 WAY
EA
100
EA
100
1 1/2" CONDUIT OUTLET BOX - 2 WAY
EA
50
1 1/2" CONDUIT OUTLET BOX - 3 WAY
EA
50
EA
50
EA
50
CONDUIT OUTLET BOX
Page 1 of 1

4. CONTROL STATIONS
REV.
ITEM
UNIT
QTY
set
CONTROL SWITCH AND PUSHBUTTON STATION

600VAC, HEAVY DUST, FACTORY SEALED PUSHBUTTON START-STOP, DEAD END, 60Hz, CLASS I, DIV 1, B, C & D
4.1
PUSHBUTTON, START-STOP, DEAD END (QUANTITY INCLUDES 2 FOR INSTRUMENT COMPRESSORS)
EDS215 GB
CABLE ENTRY : BOTTOM 3/4" HUB

4.2
CROUSE-HINDS
set
SELECTOR SWITCH, HAND-OFF-AUTO, DEAD END

CABLE ENTRY : BOTTOM 3/4" HUB
Page 1 of 1
CROUSE-HINDS
EDS21274 GB

5. DISCONNECT SWITCHES
REV.
ITEM
5.1
1 POLE ON/OFF SWITCH, 120VAC, 20A, FRONT OPERATED, 3/4" HUB
UNIT
QTY
set
12
CROUSE-HINDS CAT. #
EDSC2129 GB
Page 1 of 1

6. POWER CABLE
REV.
ITEM
6.1
600V, SINGLE CONDUCTOR, STRANDED COPPER THHN/THWN, 75 DEGREE RATED PVC INSULATION
#12 (GND)
#12
#10 (GND)
#10
#2 (GND)
#2
#4
#6 (GND)
#1/0
#2/0
#4/0
#250MCM
#350MCM
Page 1 of 1
UNIT
QTY
FT
FT
FT
FT
FT
FT
FT
FT
FT
FT
FT
FT
FT
3500
6500
500
4000
4500
4000
3000
3000
5000
1500
1500
1500
1500
5KV CABLE
5KV CABLE

7. LIGHTING
REV.
ITEM
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
PENDANT MOUNTING TYPE
220W, METAL HALIDE, 200V, 3/4" HUB, PENDANT MOUNTED FIXTURE WITH GLOBE AND GUARD
100W, MOGUL BASE METAL HALIDE LAMP
PENDANT FIXTURE MOUNTING HARDWARE
3/4" COATED CONDUIT
CONDUIT OUTLET FITTING, 3/4"
PVC COATED U-BOLT W/2 COATED NUTS
STEEL ANGLE, 3"x3"x1/4"t (75x75x6)
REDUCE BUSHING, 1 1/2"x3/4"
CONDUIT UNION, 3/4"
UNIT
QTY
EA
EA
6
6
FT
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
STANCHION MOUNTING TYPE

100W, METAL HALIDE, 220V, 1 1/4" HUB, PENDANT MOUNTED FIXTURE WITH GLOBE AND GUARD
100W, MOGUL BASE METAL HALIDE LAMP
EA
EA
STANCHION FIXTURE MOUNTING HARDWARE

3/4" COATED CONDUIT
1 1/2" COATED CONDUIT
CONDUIT OUTLET FITTING, 3/4"
CONDUIT OUTLET FITTING, 1 1/2"
PVC COATED U-BOLT W/2 COATED NUTS, 3/4"
PVC COATED U-BOLT W/2 COATED NUTS, 1 1/2"
RIGHT ANGLE CONDUIT CLAMP, 3/4"
REDUCE COUPLING, 1 1/2"x3/4"
REDUCE BUSHING, 1 1/2"x3/4"
REDUCE BUSHING, 3/4"x1/2"
CONDUIT NIPPLE, 3/4"x6" LONG
CONDUIT NIPPLE, 1 1/4"x1 5/8" LONG
CONDUIT UNION, 3/4"
CONDUIT COUPLING, 1 1/2"
DRAIN, 1/2"
FT
FT
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
Page 1 of 1
CROUSE-HINDS: EVLPA092101 GB-220V WITH EV512
SYLVANIA MOGUL BASE LUMALUX CLEAR 100W MH
200
10
50
50
50
30
20
CROUSE-HINDS: EABL26
PLASTI-BOND, PBU-BOLT-3/4, PBNUT-KIT-1
75
75
CROUSE-HINDS: EVLPA094101 GB-220V WITH EV512

SYLVANIA MOGUL BASE LUMALUX CLEAR 100W MH
1200
750
75
75
150
150
150
150
150
75
150
75
75
75
75
75
75
CROUSE-HINDS: RE52
CROUSE-HINDS: UNY205
CROUSE-HINDS: EABT26-WOD
CROUSE-HINDS: EAJT59-WOD
PLASTI-BOND, PBU-BOLT-3/4, PBNUT-KIT-1
PLASTI-BOND, PBU-BOLT-1 1/2, PBNUT-KIT-2
PLASTI-BOND, PBRA-3/4
CROUSE-HINDS: REC52
CROUSE-HINDS: RE52
CROUSE-HINDS: RE21
PLASTI-BOND, PRHNIP-3/4x6
PLASTI-BOND, PRHNIP-1 1/4x1 5/8
CROUSE-HINDS: UNY205
CROUSE-HINDS
CROUSE-HINDS: ECD1-N4D

8. RECEPTACLES
REV.
ITEM
UNIT
QTY
8.1
CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLE
125V AC, 60Hz, 20A, 1P+E, CLASS I, DIV.1 GROUP B,C,D
FACTORY SEALED TYPE, DUAL GANG
CABLE ENTRY : TOP & BOTTOM
PLUG : COPPER FREE ALUMINUM ALLOY WITH CABLE GRIP AND NEOPRENE BUSHING
SET
20
8.2
C CHANNEL 4"x2" (100x50)

UNISTRUT CHANNEL SS 1 5/8" X 1 5/8"
BASE PLATE 8" X 8" X 1/2 (4) 9/16" WITHOUT HOLES
UNISTRUT CONDUIT CLAMP WITH SCREW 4 NUT SS 1"
FT
FT
EA
EA
50
50
6
32
RECEPTACLES AND WELDING OUTLETS, HAND STATIONS HARDWARE

BOLT, MACHINE 1/4" 20 X 1"
BOLT, MACHINE 1/2" 20 X 1 1/2"
NUT, HEX 1/4" - 20 SS
WASHER, FLAT 1/4" SS
WASHER, FLAT 1/2" SS
CONDUIT UNION 3/4"
CONDUIT UNION 1 1/2"
CONDUIT OUTLET FITTING 3/4"
CONDUIT OUTLET FITTING 2"
REDUCE BUSHING 3/4" TO 1/2"
REDUCE BUSHING 2" TO 1/2"
PVC COATED U-BOLT W/2 COATED NUTS
CONDUIT OUTLET FITTING, 1 1/2"
SEAL, DRAIN EXPANDED FILL, FEMALE STEEL 1/2"
REDUCE BUSHING 1 1/2" TO 3/4"
SEAL FITTING, 3/4" TYPE EYS M/F
SEAL FITTING, 2" TYPE EYS M/F
REDUCE COUPLING, 2" TO 1 1/2"
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
120
12
120
120
12
40
4
20
2
20
2
40
20
22
60
20
2
2
8.3
CROUSE - HINDS CAT. #
ENR5201 GFS-1 IN EDSC272 BOX
PLUG: ENP5201
UNISTRUT P1000SS
UNISTRUT P1113
BOLT DEPOT 130

BOLT DEPOT 3817
BOLT DEPOT 2954
BOLT DEPOT 2956
BOLT DEPOT 2959
CROUSE HINDS UNY205
CROUSE HINDS UNY506
CROUSE HINDS EABT26-WOD
CROUSE HINDS EAJT69-WOD
CROUSE HINDS RE21
CROUSE HINDS RE61
PLASTI-BOND PUB BOLT-3/4, PBNUT-KIT-1
CROUSE HINDS EAJT59
CROUSE HINDS ECD1-N4D
CROUSE HINDS RE52
CROUSE HINDS EYS216
CROUSE HINDS EYS616
CROUSE HINDS REC605
8.4
WELDING RECEPTACLE (ITEM NO - WR-1 & WR-2)

CLASS I, DIV 1, GROUP B, C, D
600V AC, 60A, 60Hz, 3P+N+GND
CIRCUIT BREAKER INTERLOCKED TYPE, ARKTITE
BODY: COPPER FREE ALUMINUM
SET
CROUSE-HINDS CAT. #
EBBRA604-WT60-3
PLUG: APJ6485
8.5
JUNCTION BOX (ITEM NO. WR-1)

CLASS I, DIV. 1 GROUP B, C, D
EXPLOSION PROOF JUNCTION BOX 11"x12"x8 3/16"
FERALOY IRON ALLOY
W/ COPPER FREE ALUMINUM COVER
4-1 1/2" OPENINGS AND TERMINAL BLOCKS (FACTORY INSTALLED FOR #2/O CABLE)
EA
CROUSE-HINDS CAT. #
GUB03-108-FFFF
W/GUB103 COVER
AND TERMINAL BLOCKS (10)
Page 1 of 1

9. MISC HARDWARE
REV.
ITEM
9.1
UNIT
QTY
UNISTRUT 1" CONDUIT CLAMP WITH SCREW AND NUT STAINLESS STEEL (RELATED TO CONDUIT SUPPORT)
EA
40
UNISTRUT P1113SS
UNISTRUT 1 1/4" CONDUIT CLAMP WITH SCREW AND NUT STAINLESS STEEL (RELATED TO CONDUIT SUPPORT)
EA
100
UNISTRUT P1114SS
UNISTRUT 1 1/2" CONDUIT CLAMP WITH SCREW AND NUT STAINLESS STEEL (RELATED TO CONDUIT SUPPORT)
EA
100
UNISTRUT P1115SS
BEAM CLAMP SS (RELATED TO CONDUIT SUPPORT)
EA
200
B-LINE B441-22SS
UNISTRUT, 2 HOLE NO TWIST CORNER ANGLE SS (RELATED TO CONDUIT SUPPORT)
EA
100
UNISTRUT B231SS
WASHER, FLAT 1/2" STAINLESS STEEL (RELATED TO CONDUIT SUPPORT)
EA
200
UNISTRUT HFLW050SS
UNISTRUT SPRING NUT 1/2" - 13 SS (RELATED TO CONDUIT SUPPORT)
EA
200
UNISTRUT P1010SS
WASHER, LOCK 1/2" SS (RELATED TO CONDUIT SUPPORT)
EA
200
UNISTRUT HLKW050SS
SCREW, HEX HEAD CAP 1/2" - 13 X 1 1/2" SS (RELATED TO CONDUIT SUPPORT)
EA
200
UNISTRUT HHC5050150SS
CAP SCREW 1/2" X 1 3/16" SS (RELATED TO CONDUIT SUPPORT)
EA
200
BEAM CLAMP W/ 1/2" X 13 SET SCREW SS (RELATED TO CONDUIT SUPPORT)
EA
320
UNISTRUT P19865SS
CRS ANGLE 2" X 2" GALVANIZED (RELATED TO CONDUIT SUPPORT)
FT
300
NINETY DEGREE ANGLE FITTING STAINLESS STEEL (RELATED TO CONDUIT SUPPORT)
EA
100
UNISTRUT P1325SS
FLAT PLATE FITTINGS STAINLESS STEEL (RELATED TO CONDUIT SUPPORT)
EA
UNISTRUT P1067SS
CHANNEL NUT W/SPRINGS 3/8" - 16 SS (RELATED TO CONDUIT SUPPORT)
EA
30
UNISTRUT P1008SS
SCREW, HEX HEAD CAP 3/8" - 16 X 1 1/2" SS (RELATED TO CONDUIT SUPPORT)
EA
30
WASHER, FLAT 3/8" SS (RELATED TO CONDUIT SUPPORT)
EA
30
UNISTRUT HFLW037SS
WASHER, LOCK 3/8" SS (RELATED TO CONDUIT SUPPORT)
EA
30
UNISTRUT HLKW037SS
Page 1 of 1
PROCEDURE
FOR
USE OF STAMPS
CORPORATE PROCEDURE
DOCUMENT NUMBER
DE-M-001
2
DATE 9/217/2007 REV
Engineering Corporation
BY: RMJ
CHKD: GRB/DCF APVD: GRH
PAGE
OF
PRELIMINARY
THIS DOCUMENT HAS NOT BEEN CHECKED.
THIS COPY IS FOR PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
ONLY.
WARNING NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
Non-Construction type documents:
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
FOR APPROVAL
NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
Approved No Comments
Approved As Noted
JUL 26 2007
Not Approved Resubmit new Design
By:
Date:
ISSUED FOR
JUL 26 2007
CONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR BID
JUL 26 2007

BASIS OF ESTIMATE
Date
Discipline
By
ISSUED FOR DESIGN

JUL 26 2007

OFFICIAL COPY
C:\DOCUMENTS AND SETTINGS\REK\LOCAL SETTINGS\TEMPORARY INTERNET FILES\OLK1A2D\DEM001.DOC
C.P.
FECHA
R E V I S I O N E S
MCA.
D E S C R I P C I O N
NUM.
FECHA
POR
Vo. Bo.
PLANOS DE REFERENCIA
APROBADO POR:
FECHA:
DIBUJO:
ING.
ESPECIALISTA
ING.
SUBDIRECCION DE PROYECTOS
MECHANICAL FLOW DIAGRAM
REV. X
DIBUJO:
LEGEND AND GENERAL NOTES (1 OF 3)
SUBGERENCIA
ING.
GERENTE
GERENCIA DE PROYECTOS
Vo. Bo.:
ALTA RENTABILIDAD DE REFINERIAS
DIBUJO ELABORADO EN MINATITLAN, VER. FECHA:AGOSTO-12 ESCALA:
PROYECTO:
acot. en :
REV.
970086-D101
10
PROCEDURE
FOR
USE OF STAMPS
CORPORATE PROCEDURE
DOCUMENT NUMBER
DE-M-001
2
DATE 9/217/2007 REV
BY: RMJ
PAGE
OF
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
FOR APPROVAL
Approved As Noted
JUL 26 2007
By:
Date:
ISSUED FOR
JUL 26 2007
CONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR BID
JUL 26 2007

BASIS OF ESTIMATE
Date
Discipline
By
ISSUED FOR DESIGN

JUL 26 2007

OFFICIAL COPY
C.P.
FECHA
R E V I S I O N E S
MCA.
NUM.
FECHA
POR
Vo. Bo.
APROBADO POR:
FECHA:
DIBUJO:
ING.
ESPECIALISTA
ING.
REV. X
DIBUJO:
SUBGERENCIA
ING.
GERENTE
Vo. Bo.:
PROYECTO:
acot. en :
REV.
970086-D102
10
PROCEDURE
FOR
USE OF STAMPS
CORPORATE PROCEDURE
DOCUMENT NUMBER
DE-M-001
2
DATE 9/217/2007 REV
BY: RMJ
PAGE
OF
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
FOR APPROVAL
Approved As Noted
JUL 26 2007
By:
Date:
ISSUED FOR
JUL 26 2007
CONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR BID
JUL 26 2007

BASIS OF ESTIMATE
Date
Discipline
By
ISSUED FOR DESIGN

JUL 26 2007

OFFICIAL COPY
C.P.
FECHA
NUM.
R E V I S I O N E S
MCA.
FECHA
POR
Vo. Bo.
APROBADO POR:
FECHA:
DIBUJO:
ING.
ESPECIALISTA
ING.
REV. X
DIBUJO:
SUBGERENCIA
ING.
GERENTE
Vo. Bo.:
PROYECTO:
acot. en :
REV.
970086-D103
10
PROCEDURE
FOR
USE OF STAMPS
CORPORATE PROCEDURE
DOCUMENT NUMBER
DE-M-001
2
DATE 9/217/2007 REV
BY: RMJ
PAGE
OF
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
FOR APPROVAL
Approved As Noted
JUL 26 2007
By:
Date:
ISSUED FOR
JUL 26 2007
CONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR BID
JUL 26 2007

BASIS OF ESTIMATE
Date
Discipline
By
ISSUED FOR DESIGN

JUL 26 2007

OFFICIAL COPY
C.P.
FECHA
NUM.
R E V I S I O N E S
MCA.
FECHA
POR
Vo. Bo.
APROBADO POR:
FECHA:
DIBUJO:
ING.
ESPECIALISTA
ING.
REV. X
DIBUJO:
SUBGERENCIA
ING.
GERENTE
Vo. Bo.:
PROYECTO:
acot. en :
REV.
970086-D104
10
PROCEDURE
FOR
USE OF STAMPS
CORPORATE PROCEDURE
DOCUMENT NUMBER
DE-M-001
2
DATE 9/217/2007 REV
BY: RMJ
PAGE
OF
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
FOR APPROVAL
Approved As Noted
JUL 26 2007
By:
Date:
ISSUED FOR
JUL 26 2007
CONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR BID
JUL 26 2007

BASIS OF ESTIMATE
Date
Discipline
By
ISSUED FOR DESIGN

JUL 26 2007

OFFICIAL COPY
C.P.
FECHA
NUM.
R E V I S I O N E S
MCA.
FECHA
POR
Vo. Bo.
APROBADO POR:
FECHA:
DIBUJO:
ING.
ESPECIALISTA
ING.
REV. X
DIBUJO:
LIFT ENGAGER NO.1, LOCK HOPPER NO.1

AND CATALYST COLLECTOR
SUBGERENCIA
ING.
GERENTE
Vo. Bo.:
PROYECTO:
acot. en :
REV.
970086-D105
10
PROCEDURE
FOR
USE OF STAMPS
CORPORATE PROCEDURE
DOCUMENT NUMBER
DE-M-001
2
DATE 9/217/2007 REV
BY: RMJ
PAGE
OF
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
FOR APPROVAL
Approved As Noted
JUL 26 2007
By:
Date:
ISSUED FOR
JUL 26 2007
CONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR BID
JUL 26 2007

BASIS OF ESTIMATE
Date
Discipline
By
ISSUED FOR DESIGN

JUL 26 2007

OFFICIAL COPY
C.P.
FECHA
R E V I S I O N E S
MCA.
NUM.
FECHA
POR
Vo. Bo.
APROBADO POR:
FECHA:
DIBUJO:
ING.
ESPECIALISTA
ING.
REV. X
DIBUJO:
ORGANIC CHLORIDE INJECTION PUMPS, CHLORINATION BLOWER AND

CHLORINATION HEATER
SUBGERENCIA
ING.
GERENTE
Vo. Bo.:
PROYECTO:
acot. en :
REV.
970086-D106
10
PROCEDURE
FOR
USE OF STAMPS
CORPORATE PROCEDURE
DOCUMENT NUMBER
DE-M-001
2
DATE 9/217/2007 REV
BY: RMJ
PAGE
OF
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
FOR APPROVAL
Approved As Noted
JUL 26 2007
By:
Date:
ISSUED FOR
JUL 26 2007
CONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR BID
JUL 26 2007

BASIS OF ESTIMATE
Date
Discipline
By
ISSUED FOR DESIGN

JUL 26 2007

OFFICIAL COPY
C.P.
FECHA
R E V I S I O N E S
MCA.
NUM.
FECHA
POR
Vo. Bo.
APROBADO POR:
FECHA:
DIBUJO:
ING.
ESPECIALISTA
ING.
REV. X
DIBUJO:
REGENERATION TOWER, AIR HEATER AND REGENERATION HEATER
SUBGERENCIA
ING.
GERENTE
Vo. Bo.:
PROYECTO:
acot. en :
REV.
970086-D107
10
PROCEDURE
FOR
USE OF STAMPS
CORPORATE PROCEDURE
DOCUMENT NUMBER
DE-M-001
2
DATE 9/217/2007 REV
BY: RMJ
PAGE
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
FOR APPROVAL
Approved As Noted
JUL 26 2007
By:
Date:
ISSUED FOR
JUL 26 2007
CONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR BID
JUL 26 2007

BASIS OF ESTIMATE
Date
Discipline
By
ISSUED FOR DESIGN

JUL 26 2007

OFFICIAL COPY
OF
10
PROCEDURE
FOR
USE OF STAMPS
CORPORATE PROCEDURE
DOCUMENT NUMBER
DE-M-001
2
DATE 9/217/2007 REV
BY: RMJ
PAGE
OF
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
FOR APPROVAL
Approved As Noted
JUL 26 2007
By:
Date:
ISSUED FOR
JUL 26 2007
CONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR BID
JUL 26 2007

BASIS OF ESTIMATE
Date
Discipline
By
ISSUED FOR DESIGN

JUL 26 2007

OFFICIAL COPY
C.P.
FECHA
NUM.
R E V I S I O N E S
MCA.
FECHA
POR
Vo. Bo.
APROBADO POR:
FECHA:
DIBUJO:
ING.
ESPECIALISTA
ING.
REV. X
DIBUJO:
VENT GAS COOLER AND PREHEAT GAS HEATER
SUBGERENCIA
ING.
GERENTE
Vo. Bo.:
PROYECTO:
acot. en :
REV.
970086-D109
10
PROCEDURE
FOR
USE OF STAMPS
CORPORATE PROCEDURE
DOCUMENT NUMBER
DE-M-001
2
DATE 9/217/2007 REV
BY: RMJ
PAGE
OF
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
FOR APPROVAL
Approved As Noted
JUL 26 2007
By:
Date:
ISSUED FOR
JUL 26 2007
CONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR BID
JUL 26 2007

BASIS OF ESTIMATE
Date
Discipline
By
ISSUED FOR DESIGN

JUL 26 2007

OFFICIAL COPY
C.P.
FECHA
R E V I S I O N E S
MCA.
NUM.
FECHA
POR
Vo. Bo.
APROBADO POR:
FECHA:
DIBUJO:
ING.
ESPECIALISTA
ING.
REV. X
DIBUJO:
SURGE HOPPER, LIFT ENGAGER NO.2 AND LOCK HOPPER NO.2
SUBGERENCIA
ING.
GERENTE
Vo. Bo.:
PROYECTO:
acot. en :
REV.
970086-D110
10
PROCEDURE
FOR
USE OF STAMPS
CORPORATE PROCEDURE
DOCUMENT NUMBER
DE-M-001
2
DATE 9/217/2007 REV
BY: RMJ
PAGE
OF
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
FOR APPROVAL
Approved As Noted
JUL 26 2007
By:
Date:
ISSUED FOR
JUL 26 2007
CONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR BID
JUL 26 2007

BASIS OF ESTIMATE
Date
Discipline
By
ISSUED FOR DESIGN

JUL 26 2007

OFFICIAL COPY
C.P.
FECHA
NUM.
R E V I S I O N E S
MCA.
FECHA
POR
Vo. Bo.
APROBADO POR:
FECHA:
DIBUJO:
ING.
ESPECIALISTA
ING.
REV. X
DIBUJO:
DUST COLLECTOR, LIFT GAS BLOWER AND LIFT GAS BLOWER

SPILLBACK COOLER
SUBGERENCIA
ING.
GERENTE
Vo. Bo.:
PROYECTO:
acot. en :
REV.
970086-D111
10
PROCEDURE
FOR
USE OF STAMPS
CORPORATE PROCEDURE
DOCUMENT NUMBER
DE-M-001
2
DATE 9/217/2007 REV
BY: RMJ
PAGE
OF
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
FOR APPROVAL
Approved As Noted
JUL 26 2007
By:
Date:
ISSUED FOR
JUL 26 2007
CONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR BID
JUL 26 2007

BASIS OF ESTIMATE
Date
Discipline
By
ISSUED FOR DESIGN

JUL 26 2007

OFFICIAL COPY
C.P.
FECHA
NUM.
R E V I S I O N E S
MCA.
FECHA
POR
Vo. Bo.
APROBADO POR:
FECHA:
DIBUJO:
ING.
ESPECIALISTA
ING.
REV. X
DIBUJO:
SUBGERENCIA
ING.
GERENTE
Vo. Bo.:
PROYECTO:
acot. en :
REV.
970086-D112
10
PROCEDURE
FOR
USE OF STAMPS
CORPORATE PROCEDURE
DOCUMENT NUMBER
DE-M-001
2
DATE 9/217/2007 REV
BY: RMJ
PAGE
OF
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
FOR APPROVAL
Approved As Noted
JUL 26 2007
By:
Date:
ISSUED FOR
JUL 26 2007
CONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR BID
JUL 26 2007

BASIS OF ESTIMATE
Date
Discipline
By
ISSUED FOR DESIGN

JUL 26 2007

OFFICIAL COPY
C.P.
FECHA
R E V I S I O N E S
MCA.
NUM.
FECHA
POR
Vo. Bo.
APROBADO POR:
FECHA:
DIBUJO:
ING.
ESPECIALISTA
ING.
REV. X
DIBUJO:
UTILITY HEADERS
SUBGERENCIA
ING.
GERENTE
Vo. Bo.:
PROYECTO:
acot. en :
REV.
970086-D113
10
PROCEDURE
FOR
USE OF STAMPS
CORPORATE PROCEDURE
DOCUMENT NUMBER
DE-M-001
2
DATE 9/217/2007 REV
BY: RMJ
PAGE
OF
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
FOR APPROVAL
Approved As Noted
JUL 26 2007
By:
Date:
ISSUED FOR
JUL 26 2007
CONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR BID
JUL 26 2007

BASIS OF ESTIMATE
Date
Discipline
By
ISSUED FOR DESIGN

JUL 26 2007

OFFICIAL COPY
C.P.
FECHA
NUM.
R E V I S I O N E S
MCA.
FECHA
POR
Vo. Bo.
APROBADO POR:
FECHA:
DIBUJO:
ING.
ESPECIALISTA
ING.
REV. X
DIBUJO:
AIR DRYER AND DUST COLLECTOR DETAIL
SUBGERENCIA
ING.
GERENTE
Vo. Bo.:
PROYECTO:
acot. en :
REV.
970086-D114
10
PROCEDURE
FOR
USE OF STAMPS
CORPORATE PROCEDURE
DOCUMENT NUMBER
DE-M-001
2
DATE 9/217/2007 REV
BY: RMJ
PAGE
OF
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
PRELIMINARY
ONLY.
FOR APPROVAL
Approved As Noted
JUL 26 2007
By:
Date:
ISSUED FOR
JUL 26 2007
CONSTRUCTION
ISSUED FOR BID
JUL 26 2007

BASIS OF ESTIMATE
Date
Discipline
By
ISSUED FOR DESIGN

JUL 26 2007

OFFICIAL COPY
C.P.
FECHA
R E V I S I O N E S
MCA.
NUM.
FECHA
POR
Vo. Bo.
APROBADO POR:
FECHA:
DIBUJO:
ING.
ESPECIALISTA
ING.
REV. X
DIBUJO:
OIL MIST AND LIFT GAS BLOWER DETAIL
SUBGERENCIA
ING.
GERENTE
Vo. Bo.:
PROYECTO:
acot. en :
REV.
970086-D115
10
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
Revision
UOP LLC
Indication
STANDARD DRAWING

R
6-105-7
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
30APR11
REAFFIRMED
RED
RGP
THERMOWELLS
ASME B16.5 FLANGE. FOR SIZE AND CLASS
1/2 NPT (NATIONAL
SEE UOP PROJECT SPECIFICATION.
STANDARD PIPE
TAPER THREAD)
FLANGE FURNISHED AND FABRICATED
1.315
BY THERMOWELL SUPPLIER.
(33)
(38)
1 1/2
1/2
(13)
5/8
1 NPT
(16)
SEAL WELD
3/16 (5) RADIUS

ALL THREADS IN FLANGE SHALL BE COVERED BY
TANGENTIALLY
(NOTE 1)
LENGTH
CURVE AND TAPER
THREADS ON THE THERMOWELL (CHASE THREADS TO SUIT)

11
STEM SHALL BE
/ 16 (17.5) (NOTE 2, 3)
BUFFED AND
BORE SHALL BE CONCENTRIC WITH OUTSIDE
POLISHED
(6)
1/4
DIAMETER WITHIN 10% OF WALL THICKNESS

11
/
32
+
+
0.002 (8.73 0.05)
(NOTE 2)
-
17
/ 32
(13.5)
DETAIL B
DETAIL A
FLANGED TEST THERMOWELL SAME AS DETAIL A
1 1/2
STANDARD PIPE
(38)
TAPER THREAD)
EXCEPT WITH PLUG AND CHAIN PER DETAIL Z
1/4 (6)
5/8 (16)
1/2 NPT (NATIONAL
7/8 (22)
FLANGED THERMOCOUPLE / RESISTANCE ELEMENT THERMOWELL
CHAIN ATTACHED WITH

7/8
(22)
1/2
(13)
DRIVE SCREWS
1 NPT
KNURLED
HEAD
CURVE AND TAPER

TANGENTIALLY
3/16 (5) RADIUS

11
/ 16 (17.5) (NOTE 2, 3)
1/2 NPT
STEM SHALL BE
BUFFED AND
BORE SHALL BE CONCENTRIC WITH OUTSIDE
POLISHED
(6)
DIAMETER WITHIN 10% OF WALL THICKNESS

1/4
LENGTH
(NOTE 1)
11
/
32
+
+
0.002 (8.73 0.05)
(NOTE 2)
-
DETAIL Z
17
/ 32
(13.5)
DETAIL E
SCREWED THERMOCOUPLE / RESISTANCE ELEMENT THERMOWELL
DETAIL F
SCREWED TEST THERMOWELL SAME AS DETAIL E
NOTES:
1. SEE UOP PROJECT SPECIFICATION FOR LENGTH DATA.
2.
CONFIRM INSIDE AND OUTSIDE DIAMETER BASED ON TEMPERATURE ELEMENT REQUIRMENTS.
3.
OUTSIDE DIAMETER: 7/8 (22) MAXIMUM
4.
DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN PARENTHESES ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
Revision
UOP LLC
Indication
STANDARD DRAWING

R
6-106-6
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
30APR11
REAFFIRMED
RED
RGP
THERMOMETER ASSEMBLIES
1/2 NPT (NATIONAL
STANDARD PIPE
TAPER THREAD)
ALL THREADS IN FLANGE
STANDARD PIPE
1 NPT
/ 16
(5) RADIUS
7/8 (22) MAXIMUM
STEM SHALL BE
/ 32
(2.4)
BUFFED AND
MINIMUM
POLISHED
THREADS ON THE
WELD
THERMOWELL (CHASE
THREADS TO SUIT)
ASME B16.5 FLANGE. FOR

SIZE AND CLASS SEE UOP
PROJECT SPECIFICATION.
/ 16
(5) RADIUS
FLANGE FURNISHED
AND FABRICATED BY
7/8 (22) MAXIMUM
THERMOWELL SUPPLIER.
/ 32
(2.4)
STEM SHALL BE BUFFED
MINIMUM
AND POLISHED
3
1/4
1/4
(6)
SEAL
1 NPT
(6)
(25)
TAPER THREAD)
2 +
-3/8
THERMOMETER STEM LENGTH (NOTE 1)
2 +3/8
(50 +
10)
-
1/2 NPT (NATIONAL
(50 +10)
-
SHALL BE COVERED BY
THERMOMETER STEM LENGTH (NOTE 1)
DETAIL A
DETAIL B
THERMOMETER WITH SCREWED THERMOWELL
THERMOMETER WITH FLANGED THERMOWELL
DETAIL C
DETAIL D
SCREWED TEST THERMOWELL SAME AS DETAIL A
FLANGED TEST THERMOWELL SAME AS DETAIL B
CHAIN ATTACHED
WITH DRIVE
KNURLED HEAD
SCREWS
1/2 NPT
DETAIL Z
NOTES:
1. SEE UOP PROJECT SPECIFICATION FOR LENGTH DATA.
2.
DIAL THERMOMETER COMPLETE WITH THERMOWELL SHALL BE FURNISHED BY THERMOMETER SUPPLIER.
3.
THERMOWELL AND THERMOMETER SHALL BE INSTALLED SUCH THAT THERMOMETER DIAL IS NOT IN THE HORIZONTAL
PLANE. WHERE NECESSARY A SWIVEL NECK THERMOMETER MAY BE USED.
4.
WHEN TEST THERMOWELL IS SPECIFIED, FURNISH THERMOWELL ONLY, WITHOUT THERMOMETER.
5.
Revision
UOP LLC
Indication
STANDARD DRAWING

R
TEMPERATURE SENSOR TERMINAL

HEAD ASSEMBLIES
6-107-7
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
30APR11
REAFFIRMED
RED
rgp
6 (150)
HEAD AND TERMINAL
1/4 SET SCREW
1/2 CONDUIT NIPPLES
CONNECTOR
MINIMUM LENGTH 1 1/2 (38)
HEAD AND TERMINAL

CONNECTOR
1 SCHEDULE
1/2
80 PIPE
(13)
CONNECT TO
THERMOWELL
1/2 CONDUIT NIPPLE

1/2 NPT (NATIONAL

HEAD AND TERMINAL
STANDARD PIPE
TAPER THREAD)
1/2 UNION
CONNECTOR
1/2 SCHEDULE 40
1/2 UNION (COMPLETE)
(COMPLETE)
PIPE SCREWED INTO
3/4 X 1/2 BUSHING

NOTE 3
HEADER THERMOWELL
LENGTH 3 (75)
(FURNISHED IN FIELD
TO 6 (150)
CONNECTOR
NOTE 3
TO FIT)
1 NPT (NATIONAL
NOTE 1
CONNECTOR
STANDARD PIPE
TAPER THREAD)
NOTE 1
3/4 X 1/2
BUSHING
1/2 NPT (NATIONAL
DETAIL A
1/2 SCHEDULE 40 PIPE
DETAIL C
STANDARD PIPE
SCREWED INTO HEADER
TAPER THREAD)
FOR USE WITH THERMOCOUPLE THERMOWELLS
THERMOWELL
FOR USE WITH THERMOCOUPLE WELL INSIDE

3/4 X 1/2 BUSHING
HEATER TUBE HEADER COMPARTMENT
(FURNISHED IN FIELD)
NOTE 3
CONNECTOR
NOTE 1
1/2 STAINLESS STEEL
HEAD AND TERMINAL
CONDUIT OUTLET
COMPRESSION FITTING
CONNECTOR
DETAIL D
BODY (NOTE 2)
1/2 CONDUIT NIPPLES
FOR USE WITH THERMOCOUPLE WELL OUTSIDE
HEATER TUBE HEADER COMPARTMENT
MINERAL OXIDE INSULATED
3 COVER
STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH

1/2 UNION
THERMOCOUPLE ELEMENT
(COMPLETE)
3/4 X 1/2 BUSHING
NOTE 3
1/2 NPT (NATIONAL

STANDARD PIPE
TAPER THREAD)
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
NOTE 1
NOTES:
NOTE 1
1. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE CONNECTION ASSEMBLY (BY OTHERS). INSTALL AS DRIP LOOP.
2.
FOR USE WITH MINERAL OXIDE INSULATED STAINLESS STEEL

SHEATH THERMOCOUPLE ELEMENT
CONDUIT OUTLET BODY SHALL BE SUITABLE FOR THE ELECTRICAL CLASSIFICATION OF

THE INSTALLATION.
DETAIL E
3.
FASTEN THE CAP TO THE BASE BY A SMALL CHAIN ON A SWIVEL.
4.
CAPS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH SCREW DRIVER SLOT, AND A HEAT AND MOISTURE
DETAIL F
FOR USE WITH RESISTANCE ELEMENT THERMOWELLS
RESISTANT GASKET.
5.
Revision
UOP LLC
Indication
STANDARD DRAWING

R
6-108-6
THERMOWELL AND SKIN

THERMOCOUPLE INSTALLATION
ASSEMBLIES
"C"
(NOTE 1)
6 (150)
FOR SMALLER LINES
MINIMUM
"C"
MINIMUM SIZE 3.
(NOTE 1)
INCREASE TO 3 AS
INDICATED
1 CLASS 3000
DATE
STATUS
APVD
AUTHD
30APR11
REAFFIRMED
RED
RGP
1 LONG WELDING
THREADED
NECK NOZZLE
FL
ELBOLET
FL
MINIMUM SIZE 3.
FOR SMALLER LINES
INCREASE TO 3 AS
INDICATED
REDUCER
REDUCER
FLANGED
THREDOLET
"C"
COUPLING OR
(NOTE 1)
1 CLASS 3000 FULL
6 (150)
ELBOW INSTALLATION
MINIMUM
"C"
SCREWED
(NOTE 1)
1 LONG WELDING
NECK NOZZLE
MINIMUM SIZE 6.
1-0 (300)
FOR SMALLER LINES INCREASE
1-0 (300)
TO 6 AS INDICATED
SCREWED
FLANGED
VESSEL AND LINE INSTALLATION

DETAIL A
NOTES:
1. "C" DIMENSION SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF
3-0 (915) CLEAR SPACE FOR REMOVAL OF
1/2 (13) DIAMETER X 1 1/2 (40) LONG THREADED STUD WITH WASHER AND
2 HEX NUTS. THE STUD AND HEX NUTS SHALL BE THE SAME
METALLURGY AS THE EQUIPMENT TO WHICH THEY ARE ATTACHED.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. INCREASE

CLEARANCE FOR VESSEL THERMOWELLS.
3/4 (19) INSIDE DIAMETER

THERMOCOUPLE WASHER
2.
WHEN INSTALLING REDUCERS IN A

TO CLEAR OUTSIDE
HORIZONTAL LINE, USE THE ECCENTRIC
DIAMETER OF WELD
TYPE TO AVOID POCKETS.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
THE SHEATH MUST EXTEND OUTSIDE
FLANGES SHALL BE ASME B16.5 STANDARD.

INSIDE DIAMETER OF FLANGED CONNECTION
SHEATHED TYPE
ANY INSULATION IN ORDER TO
THERMOCOUPLE ASSEMBLY
AVOID EXPOSING THE THERMOCOUPLE
SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 1 (25).
LEAD WIRE INSULATION TO
FOR THERMOWELL INSTALLATIONS WHERE THE
EQUIPMENT TEMPERATURES.
FLUID VELOCITY IS A CONCERN, THE ELBOW
NOTE:
INSTALLATION SHOULD BE CONSIDERED.
STUDS (NELSON TYPE PREFERRED) SHALL BE WELDED TO THE EQUIPMENT PRIOR
ELBOW INSTALLATION IS PREFERRED FOR LINES
TO FINAL POST WELD HEAT TREATMENT IN THE FABRICATORS SHOP. STUDS
6 AND SMALLER.
MUST BE PROTECTED DURING SHIPMENT OF EQUIPMENT TO PREVENT BREAKAGE
DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN PARENTHESES ARE IN

MILLIMETERS.
SKIN THERMOCOUPLE FOR EXTERNAL INSTALLATION

DETAIL B
Revision
UOP LLC
Indication
STANDARD DRAWING

6-112-4
PIPING ARRANGEMENTS FOR

ORIFICE PLATE INSTALLATIONS
DATE
STATUS
11JAN12 REAFFIRMED
(WITH TAPPED ORIFICE FLANGES)
APVD
AUTHD
RED
RGP
R
M
ORIFICE PLATE
K
H
G
GLOBE,
CONTROL,
F
VALVE
OR CHECK
VALVE
TWO
LESS
PLANE
THAN 10D
Not
e:The i
nf
or
mat
i
on i
n t
hi
s documenti
s conf
i
dent
i
aland t
he pr
oper
t
y of UOP LLC and mustnotbe di
scl
osed t
o ot
her
s orr
epr
oduced i
n any mannerorused f
orany pur
pose what
soeverwi
t
houti
t
s wr
i
t
t
en per
mi
ssi
on.
FLOW
FLOW
10D OR
ECCENTRIC
GREATER
REDUCER OR
EXPANDER
CONCENTRIC
REDUCER OR
EXPANDER
CONCENTRIC
WIDE OPEN
CONCENTRIC
EXPANDER
GATE OR
REDUCER
TEE,
CROSS, OR
BALL VALVE
ECCENTRIC
LATERAL
REDUCER OR
*WHEN DISTANCE BETWEEN ELBOWS IS 10D OR LESS.
EXPANDER
NOMINAL
LENGTH OF STRAIGHT RUN
PIPE
DIAMETER
A
7D
10D
14D
15D
18D
31 D
38D
5D
7 (195)
10
(270)
1-3 (385)
2-3 (690) 3-10 (1 185)
4-9 (1450)
2-4 (715)
2-6 (765)
3-0 (915)
5-2(1575)
6-4 (1935)
2-6 (765)
3-6 (1070)
3-9 (1 145)
4-6 (1375)
7-9(2365)
9-6 (2900)
1-3 (385)
6-0 (1830)
10-4(3150)
12-8 (3865)
1-8 (510)
15-6(4725)
19-0 (5795)
2-6 (765)
1-2 (360)
1-8 (510)
1-9 (535)
1-9 (535)
1-10 (575)
2-4 (715)
3-4 (1020)
4-8 (1425)
5-0 (1525)
3-6 (1070)
5-0 (1525)
7-0 (2135)
7-6 (2290) 9-0 (2745)
10 (255)
4-8 (1425)
6-8 (2035)
9-4 (2845)
10-0 (3050) 12-0 (3660) 20-8(6300) 25-4 (7725)
3-4 (1020)
10
5-10 (1780)
8-4 (2540)
1 1-8 (3560)
12-6 (3810)
31-8 (9655)
4-2 (1270)
12
7-0 (2135)
31-0(9450) 38-0 (1 1585)
5-0 (1525)
14
8-2 (2490)
10-0 (3050) 14-0 (4270)

1 1-8 (3560)
16-4 (4980)
15-0 (4575) 25-10(7875)
15-0 (4575) 18-0 (5490)

17-6 (5335) 21-0 (6405)
36-2(1 1025) 44-4 (13515)
5-10 (1780)
16
9-4 (2845)
13-4 (4065)
18-8 (5690) 20-0 (6100) 24-0 (7320)
41-4(12600) 50-8 (15445)
6-8 (2035)
18
10-6 (3200)
15-0 (4575)
21-0 (6405) 22-6 (6860)27-0 (8230)
46-6(14175) 57-0 (17375)
7-6 (2290)
20
1 1-8 (3560)
51-8(15750) 63-4 (19305)
8-4 (2540)
24
16-8 (5080) 23-4 (71 15)
25-0 (7620)30-0 (9145)
14-0 (4270) 20-0 (6100) 28-0 (8535) 30-0 (9145) 36-0 (10975) 62-0(18900) 76-0 (23165) 10-0 (3050)
NOTES:
1. TABULATED DIMENSIONS ARE GENERALLY BASED ON INFORMATION IN THE INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION
(ISO) 5167-1
AND ALSO AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME), FLUID METERS - 6th EDITION, AT A MAXIMUM
ORIFICE DIAMETER RATIO (d/D) OF 0.70.

2. THE DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE TO THE UPSTREAM FACE OF THE ORIFICE PLATE AND ARE THE MINIMUM REQUIRED. WHEN POSSIBLE
THE DIMENSIONS SHOULD BE INCREASED.
3. WHEN SEVERAL FITTINGS (OTHER THAN 90 BENDS) ARE UPSTREAM OF THE ORIFICE PLATE, THE FIRST FITTING CLOSEST TO THE
ORIFICE PLATE SHALL BE PER THE TABLE. THE MINIMUM STRAIGHT LENGTH FROM THE SECOND FITTING (TO THE FIRST FITTING)
SHALL BE
OF THE DIMENSION LISTED IN THE TABLE FOR THE SECOND FITTING.
4. WHEN BENDS ARE USED INSTEAD OF FITTINGS TO CHANGE DIRECTION, DIMENSION LINES SHALL BE TO TANGENT LINE OF BEND.
5. DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN PARENTHESES ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS

MECHANICAL HOOK-UP
--
ALTA RENTABILIDAD EN REFINERIAS
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
PROJECT: PEMEX MINATITLAN CCR REVAMP
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D667-14
REV.
FI-302
FI-306
PDI-354
FI-346A
FI-396A
PDT-1007
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D669-1
REV.
FT-306
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

MECHANICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D667-1
REV.
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

MECHANICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D667-2
REV.
FT-380
FT-1003
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

MECHANICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D667-3
REV.
Conduit installation
FT-362
FT-1016
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D669-5
REV.
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

MECHANICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D667-8
REV.
PDT-1006
FT-313
FT-301
FT-302
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D669-18
REV.
)*+ ,,
10 &2 3% 4 "$
# +&" #56&&
#5
78
911
75)
1
41
#.
' ! ##
41
! . &&
TE-312
4 $%
! . &&
?&" 2
?"
' $%
" ( !"
%# $
" ( '% ' # . " #
4 $%
!!
<
- $# & # $
#
!
". 2
)*+ ,, " $ !%#
4 "
' '
'
4 $%
! . &&
!"
#$
%!
"& " $
"
! . && & 2 < : =

$! #
:
"
>>&
&" 2
UOP LLC
25 E. Algonquin Road
Des Plaines, Illinois, 60017-5017, USA
953469
REV
DATE
BY
20MAY10 DMK
THERMOCOUPLES AND WELLS
606-D
APVD REV
SHEET
DATE
BY
4
APVD
VGS
Sketch " D "
TE-1045
TE-1046
Heat Conservation Thermowell Installation TE-1047
TE-1048
TE-1049
TE-1050
TE-1051
TE-1052
Provide clearance for
removal of thermocouple
Head and Terminal Connector

(See Note 2)
"
"
Conduit Union
x 2" (50 mm) conduit nipple
"
nipple
Length per Table 1
See Table 1
Field seal weld
1" 3000# Threadolet
Material per piping specification
Minimum size 6"
For smaller lines increase to 6"
Note 1
12" (300 mm)
Thickness per UOP Standard

Specification 9-11
Table 1
Note:
1. See UOP Standard Drawing 6-105, Detail E for
thermowell fabrication.
2. See UOP Standard Drawing 6-107, for terminal
head assembly.
Form
QUA-16-2
Process Line Insulation

Thickness
1"
Nipple Length and

Insulation Depth
- 6" (25 - 150 mm)
8" (200 mm)
6.5" - 9" (155 - 225 mm)
10" (250 mm)
9.5" - 12" (230 - 300 mm)
12" (300 mm)
606D-C-312-0
UOP LLC
ProjectNumber
DATE
BY
APVD REV
DATE
BY
APVD
TE-372 and TE-373
Flange Without Thermowell for use with Two Mineral Insulated Thermocouple
Elements with Radiant Heat Shield
1 "
/8 NPT x 0.25
Mounting Adapter
(See Note 1)
Seal Weld
2" ASME B16.5
Flange
Note: Outside diameter of weldments

must not exceed 2.0" (50 mm)
Length
(See Note 2)
holes
Thermocouple
Elements
Process Flow
Orientation
Dimension A
REV
SHEET
606-D
"
(12 mm)
"
(12 mm) holes located as shown

over bottom 3" (75 mm) of element
length on both sides
"
Dimension
A is based
on a 9 inch
nozzle
projection
(12 mm)
"
1- Inconel Pipe or tubing
(12 mm)
60
Process Flow
Notes:
1. Mounting adapters shall be provided with metal ferrule compression seals. All components of the
mounting adapters in contact with the process shall be the same material as the flange. The flange shall be
the same material as the piping
2. Element length is based on an estimated nozzle projection required for the nozzle flange to clear the
insulation and locating the end of the element approximately 6" (150 mm) into the pipe. The Contractor
shall coordinate and shall confirm the nozzle projection.
3. The shield opening shall face downstream. The Contractor shall coordinate the nozzle and flange bolting
alignment and match mark the flow direction on both flanges.
Form
QUA-16-2
606D-E-745-2
UOP LLC
ProjectNumber
REV
DATE
SHEET
606-D
BY
APVD REV
DATE
BY
TE-375 and TE-376
Flange Without Thermowell for use with Two Mineral Insulated Thermocouple
Elements
1 "
/8 NPT x 0.25
Mounting Adapter
(See Note 1)
Seal Weld
1" ASME B16.5

Flange
Dimension A
(See Note 2)
Notes:
1. Mounting adapters shall be provided with metal ferrule compression seals. All components of
the mounting adapters in contact with the process shall be the same material as the flange. The
flange shall be the same material as the piping.
2. Element length is based on an estimated nozzle projection required for the nozzle flange to
clear the insulation and locating the end of the element approximately 6" (150 mm) into the pipe.
Dimension A is based on a 9 inch nozzle projection.
Form
QUA-16-2
606D-E-745-2
4
APVD
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D669-2
REV.
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D669-3
REV.
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D669-4
REV.
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D669-8
REV.
953469
305
05 A1
100
100
34.5
95
95
THERMOCOUPLE
BY OTHERS
3 x 1 1/2 SCH 40
REDUCER
(NOTE 2)
T
THERMOCOUPLE
T
BY OTHERS
(NOTE 2)
90
90
TANGENT LINE
40
85
MEASUREMENT
TYP
5
LOCATION (TYP)
3 PLATE
SCREEN
MR
22
TYP
20
3
TYP
80
TYP
80
35
TI GUIDE PIPE
(NOTE 6)
1 1/2 SCH 40
80
MR
INNER
TYP
50 DIA HOLE
TYP
REDUCER
TEMPERATURE
REGENERATOR ID
4 x 3 SCH 40
80
D05
T
NOTE 3
D05
85
TYP
TYP
MAX
25
DETAIL J05
34.5
BAFFLE
65
SECURE CHLORINATION ZONE TI GUIDE
1 1/2 TI GUIDE PIPE
(LOCATIONS L10 TO L18) TO HIGHEST SUPPORT ROD

INLINE WITH THE ORIENTATION OF NOZZLE H
3
3
THERMOCOUPLE
BY OTHERS
(NOTE 2)
THERMOCOUPLE
60
BY OTHERS
(NOTE 2)
80
NOTE 4
TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT
55
TRANSISTION AND CHLORINATION ZONE TI GUIDE PIPE PRE-CUT LENGTH: 4700
1000
50
TOP OF TRANSITION
55
F05
60
F05
T
65
70
50 DIA HOLE
BURN ZONE TI GUIDE PIPE PRE-CUT LENGTH: 3050
TYP
5
LOCATIONS L10, L1 1, L12
3 PLATE
INNER
TYP
TYP
TI GUIDE PIPE
3 SCH 40
13-REQUIRED TOTAL
35
(NOTE 6)
TYPICAL FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT
5 PLATE
75
TYP
LOCATIONS L1 THROUGH L9 AND L13 THROUGH L16, SEE NOTE 2.
70
SCREEN
50
26
TYP
80
45
45
MR
5 PLATE
13-REQUIRED TOTAL
DWG 953469-305-04-A1
T
SECTION D05-D05
DETAIL C05
30
75
VIEW F05-F05
1-REQUIRED TOTAL
TRANSITION BAFFLE EXCLUDED FOR CLARITY
3 x 1 1/2 SCH 40
DETAIL E05
REDUCER
40
40
DWG 953469-305-04-A1
TOP OF INNER SCREEN
WELD RING
LOCATIONS L10 THROUGH L12 (TRANSITIONAL ZONE), SEE NOTE 2.
NOTES:
1. WORK THIS DRAWING WITH UOP DRAWINGS
953469-305-01-A1, 953469-305-02-A1,
35
35
THERMOCOUPLE
DETAIL A05
THERMOCOUPLE
BY OTHERS
BY OTHERS
(NOTE 2)
(NOTE 2)
2.
THERMOCOUPLES PER UOP PROJECT SPECIFICATION

953469-640. THERMOCOUPLE TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT
LOCATIONS PER UOP PROJECT SPECIFICATION 953469-640.
DWG 953469-305-04-A1
30
30
3.
FLOW OPENING SHALL BE 10mm LARGER THAT SPACE
MEASUREMENT
LOCATION L9
TEMPERATURE
(NOTE 5)
6
MAX
25
25
(NOTE 5)
BETWEEN WELD BEADS, WITH MINIMUM OPENING OF 75mm,

TEMPERATURE
OTHERS OR REPRODUCED IN ANY MANNER OR USED FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER WITHOUT ITS WRITTEN PERMISSION.
953469-305-03-A1 AND 953469-305-04-A1
CENTERED ABOUT THE WELD BEADS
MEASUREMENT
LOCATION L17
4.
OPENING OF 320mm, CENTERED ABOUT THE WELD BEADS
DETAIL B05
5.
3 THK x 80 x 80 PLATE
20
25
OF THE THREE TRANSITION ZONE WELD BEADS, WITH MINIMUM
300 RAD
DWG 953469-305-04-A1
FLOW OPENING SHALL BE 10mm LARGER THAN THE SPAN
TRIM TI GUIDE PIPE AS REQUIRED IN FIELD

TO MEET DIMENSION
NOTE: THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS CONFIDENTIAL AND THE PROPERTY OF UOP LLC AND MUST NOT BE DISCLOSED TO
1 - REQUIRED TOTAL
DIMENSIONS INCLUDES ADDITIONAL LENGTH FOR FIT-UP.
6.
WELD AFTER FLOW OPENINGS HAVE BEEN CUT IN TI GUIDE
20
TRIM AS REQUIRED IN FIELD TO MEET DIMENSIONAL
29 ID THERMOWELL GUIDE
TOLERANCES AS SHOWN IN DETAIL G05 AND DETAIL H05.
HOLE AT SAME ORIENTATION

AS NOZZLE H
REV
DFTR
CKR
DATE
APVD
REV
DFTR
CKR
APVD
DATE
UOP LLC
15
15

Des Plaines, Illinois 60017-5017 USA
10
REGENERATION TOWER
DETAIL H05
MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS
DWG 953469-305-03-A1
DETAIL G05
10
SHEET NO 3
LOCATION L17, SEE NOTE 2.
REGENERATION TOWER ASSEMBLY
1-REQUIRED TOTAL
ATMOSPHERIC CCR REGENERATOR SECTION (U-300)

PLATFORMING PROCESS UNIT
DWG 953469-305-04-A1
PEMEX-REFINACION
LEGEND:
1-REQUIRED TOTAL
EXISTING
NEW/MODIFIED
REFINERIA GRAL. LAZARO CARDENAS
DFTR
CKR
APVD
PHS
PHS
JRG
DATE
30APR
10
PROJECT
TYPE
953469
305
DWG NO
05 A1
REV
0
0
FT-382
FIF-451
FIF-452
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

SUPPORT HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D670-11
REV.
PDT-1001
FIF-1010
PDT-1354
FIF-1011
FT-313
PDT-1006
FI-302
FI-306
FT-301
FT-302
FT-306
PDT-354
FT-1004
FI-346A
FT-1005
PDT-386
FT-380 and FT-1003

FT-396 and FT-1007
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

SUPPORT HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D670-6
REV.
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

SUPPORT HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D670-9
REV.
TXT-1040
TXT-1038
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

SUPPORT HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D670-2
REV.
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

MECHANICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D667-6
REV.
FIF-431
FIF-432
FIF-1012
FIF-1013
AT-388
AT-388
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

MECHANICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D667-16
REV.
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D669-7
REV.
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

SUPPORT HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D670-15
REV.
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D669-20
REV.
One for Lift Gas Blower
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

MECHANICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D667-17
REV.
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
INSTRUENT INSTALLATION DETAILS

MECHANICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D667-18
REV.
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
REV.
DWG NO.: 970086 669-6
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

PNEUMATIC HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D668-1
REV.
FV-379
FV-380
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D669-10
REV.
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D669-11
REV.
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D669-12
REV.
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D669-17
REV.
Need 1 qty.
One for Air Dryer ME-502
9 qty. junction boxes
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D669-14
REV.
7 qty.
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DEATILS

SUPPORT HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D670-18
REV.
2 qty.
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DEATILS

SUPPORT HOOK-UP
--
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.: 970086 -D670-19
REV.
INSTRUMENT DESIGN SUMMARY

PROJECT
: PEMEX Minatitlan 750pphAtmoCCR Revamp 2011
PROJECT NO.
: 970086
DOC. NO.
: 970086-D601
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
DJN
FFN
KOB
REV.
DATE
DESCRIPTION
DFTR
CKR
APVD
DOCUMENT REVISIONS
CONFIDENTIAL NOTE: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

PROJECT
PROJECT NO.
: 970086
DOC. NO.
: 970086-D601
Rev.: A
TYPE OF SIGNAL ON LEGEND

- AI
: Analog(4-20 mA) Input Signal
- AO
: Analog(4-20 mA) Output Signal
- DI
: Discrete Input Signal
- DO
: Discrete Output Signal
- TC
: Thermocouple Signal to Temperature Transmitter
- AC
: AC Power (AC 120V)
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
CONFIDENTIAL NOTE: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

PROJECT
Color
Status
Instrument
PROJECT NO.
: 970086
Orange
New
Never existed
DOC NO.
: 970086-D601
Yellow
Color Legend
Pink
Light Purple
Green
Replace with
new
Being
evaluated
Supplied by
others
Reuse
Rev.: A
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Existing
Preliminary
Existing
30%Review
New or Existing
60%Review
90%Review
Existing
Tag No.
Service
Instrument Type
MFD No.
Status
System
Signal
Range
Engr Units
Requisition
No.
Mfr.
Model No.
Deck
Location
Plan
Junction Box
Wiring
Suppl.
Wiring
Mech
Install
Elect
Install
Support
Install
Pneu
Install
Comments
FO-30A
Cooling Water to Surge Hopper
Restriction Orifice
D103
Replace with new
672
See Detail "C" on D103
FO-30B
Cooling Water to Surge Hopper
Restriction Orifice
D103
Replace with new
672
See Detail "C" on D103
FE-313
Reduction Zone Purge
Flange Tap Orifice Assembly
D104
Replace with new
605
FO-19
Recycle Gas Compressor Drain
Restriction Orifice
D104
Replace with new
672
FT-313
Reduction Gas to Reduction Gas Heater No.1
Differential Pressure Transmitter
D104
Replace with new
DCS
AI
0 to 3796
mm H2O
604
Rosemount
3051 Series
D667-1
D669-1
D670-X
Regenerated Catalyst Lift Line DP
D104
New
LHCS
AI
0 to 0.45
kg/cm2
604
Rosemount
3051 Series
D667-13
D669-1
D670-X
FE-1001
Secondary Lift Gas to Lift Engager No. 1
Orifice Assembly w/Honed Flow Section
D105
New
605
Fluidic Techniques
Refer to fabrication dwg: FAB-2837-3
FE-301
Catalyst Collector High Rate Purge
D105
Replace with new
605
D607
Reactor
FE-302
Catalyst Collector Low Rate Purge
D105
Replace with new
605
D607
Reactor
FE-306
Lift Gas to Lift Engager No. 1
D105
Replace with new
605
PDT-1006
FI-302
Electronic Field Output Indicator
D105
Replace with new
DCS
AI
623
D670-X
FI-306
Electronic Field Output Indicator?
D105
Replace with new
DCS
AI
623
D670-X
Restriction Orifice
D105
Replace with new
672
FO-1
FO-18
Catalyst Collector Standby Purge
Restriction Orifice
D105
Replace with new
672
FO-2
Restriction Orifice
D105
Replace with new
672
FO-5
Lock Hopper No. 1 Pressure
Restriction Orifice
D105
Replace with new
672
FSL-302
Switch
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
623
FSLL-302
Switch
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
623
FT-1001
D105
New
DCS
AI
0 to 625
mm H2O
604
Rosemount
3051 Series
FT-301
D105
Replace with new
DCS
AI
0 to 2500
mm H2O
604
Rosemount
3051 Series
D607
300-JB-D-A-011
FT-302
D105
Replace with new
DCS
AI
0 to 625
mm H2O
604
Rosemount
3051 Series
D607
300-JB-D-A-011
FT-306
D105
Replace with new
DCS
AI
0 to 8642
mm H2O
604
Rosemount
3051 Series
Control Valve (Globe)
D105
New
DCS
AO
616
MASONEILAN
28-28122
Lock Hopper No. 1
Nuclear Level Instrument (Radioactive Source)
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
613
PANCAKE GM PROBE
489-110D
D607
300-JB-L-D-011
D607
300-JB-L-D-011
FV-1001
LE/LSHH-307
LE/LSLL-309
LY-307
Reduction Zone
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
613
PANCAKE GM PROBE
489-110D
Lock Hopper No. 1
Nuclear Level Instrument (Detector)
D105
Replace with new
613
VEGA
MINITRAC 31
MINITRAC 31
LY-309
Reduction Zone
D105
Replace with new
613
VEGA
TE-312
Reduction Zone
Thermocouple ("K" Type)
D105
Replace with new
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
TI-337
Thermometer
D105
Replace with new
D667-2
D669-1
D670-X
D667-1
D669-1
D670-6
Reactor
D667-1
D669-1
D670-6
Reactor
D669-1
D670-X
D668-1
Reactor - Requires 120V Power
Reactor - Requires 120V Power
D669-10
D669-18
Requires Air
TXE-1001
Regenerated Catalyst Lift Line
Skin Thermocouple ("E" Type)
D105
New
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
15
D617
D669-4
TXE-1055
Catalyst Transfer Line
D105
New
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D608
300-JB-D-T-021
D669-3
TXE-1056
D105
New
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D608
300-JB-D-T-021
D669-3
TXE-1057
D105
New
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D608
300-JB-D-T-021
D669-3
TXE-1058
D105
New
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D608
300-JB-D-T-021
D669-3
TXE-1059
D105
New
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D608
300-JB-D-T-021
D669-3
TXE-1060
D105
New
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D608
300-JB-D-T-021
D669-3
TXE-1061
D105
New
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D608
300-JB-D-T-021
D669-3
TXE-1062
D105
New
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D608
300-JB-D-T-021
D669-3
TXE-1063
D105
New
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D608
300-JB-D-T-021
D669-3
TXE-1064
D105
New
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D608
300-JB-D-T-021
D669-3
TXE-1065
D105
New
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D608
300-JB-D-T-021
D669-3
TXE-1066
D105
New
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D608
300-JB-D-T-021
D669-3
TXT-1001
Remote Temperature Transmitter ("E" Type)
D105
New
LHCS
AI
0-100
609
15
D617
D669-4
D670-2
XV-1001
On-Off Valve (Ball)
D105
New
671
METSO
XA03DWTAS6SJGADDY+T6Y71
D669-12
D668-1
XV-13
Lock Hopper No. 1 Outlet
Control Valve (V-Ball)
D105
Replace with new
616
FISHER
SS-138B
D606
D669-12
D668-1
Requires Air - Reactor
XV-14
On-Off Valve (Ball)
D105
Replace with new
671
METSO
D606
D669-12
D668-1

Reactor
Reactor
Requires Air
XV-16
On-Off Valve (Ball)
D105
Replace with new
671
METSO
D606
D669-12
D668-1
XV-2
Lock Hopper No. 1 Inlet
D105
Replace with new
616
FISHER
SS-138B
D607
D669-12
D668-1
Requires Air
XV-3
On-Off Valve (Ball)
D105
Replace with new
671
METSO
D607
D669-12
D668-1
Requires Air
XV-5
On-Off Valve (Ball)
D105
Replace with new
671
METSO
D607
Requires Air
Mounted on XV-1001
3-Way Solenoid Valve
D105
New
LHCS
DO
671
ASCO
EV8327G042 24VDC
XY-1001
D669-12
D668-1
D669-12
XY-13
Mounted on XV-13
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DO
616
ASCO
EV8327G042 24VDC
D606
300-JB-L-D-012
D669-12
Reactor
XY-14
Mounted on XV-14
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DO
671
ASCO
EV8551G421 24VDC
D606
300-JB-L-D-012
D669-12
Reactor
XY-16
Mounted on XV-16
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DO
671
ASCO
EV8551G421 24VDC
D606
300-JB-L-D-012
D669-12
Reactor
XY-2
Mounted on XV-2
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DO
616
ASCO
EV8327G042 24VDC
D607
300-JB-L-D-012
D669-12
Reactor
XY-3
Mounted on XV-3
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DO
671
ASCO
EV8551G421 24VDC
D607
300-JB-L-D-012
D669-12
Reactor
XY-5
Mounted on XV-5
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DO
671
ASCO
EV8551G421 24VDC
D607
300-JB-L-D-012
D669-12
Reactor
Mounted on XV-1001
Limit Switch
D105
New
LHCS
DI
671
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D669-12
ZSH-13
Mounted on XV-13
Limit Switch
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
616
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D606
300-JB-L-D-012
D669-12
Reactor
ZSH-14
Mounted on XV-14
Limit Switch
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
671
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D606
300-JB-L-D-012
D669-12
Reactor
ZSH-16
Mounted on XV-16
Limit Switch
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
671
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D606
300-JB-L-D-012
D669-12
Reactor
ZSH-2
Mounted on XV-2
Limit Switch
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
616
WESTLOCK
360SBY2B2M0600
D607
300-JB-L-D-012
D669-12
Reactor
ZSH-3
Mounted on XV-3
Limit Switch
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
671
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D607
300-JB-L-D-012
D669-12
Reactor
ZSH-1001

PROJECT
Color
Status
Instrument
PROJECT NO.
: 970086
Orange
New
Never existed
DOC NO.
: 970086-D601
Yellow
Color Legend
Pink
Light Purple
Green
Replace with
new
Being
evaluated
Supplied by
others
Reuse
Rev.: A
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Existing
Preliminary
Existing
30%Review
New or Existing
60%Review
90%Review
Existing
Tag No.
ZSH-5
Service
Instrument Type
MFD No.
Status
System
Signal
Range
Engr Units
Requisition
No.
Mfr.
Model No.
Deck
Location
Plan
Junction Box
Wiring
Suppl.
Wiring
D607
300-JB-L-D-012
Mech
Install
Elect
Install
Mounted on XV-5
Limit Switch
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
671
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
Mounted on XV-1001
Limit Switch
D105
New
LHCS
DI
671
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
ZSL-13
Mounted on XV-13
Limit Switch
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
616
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D606
300-JB-L-D-012
ZSL-14
Mounted on XV-14
Limit Switch
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
671
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D606
300-JB-L-D-012
ZSL-16
Mounted on XV-16
Limit Switch
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
671
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D606
ZSL-2
Mounted on XV-2
Limit Switch
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
616
WESTLOCK
360SBY2B2M0600
ZSL-3
Mounted on XV-3
Limit Switch
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
671
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
ZSL-5
Mounted on XV-5
Limit Switch
D105
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
671
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
FO-25
Chlorination Gas
Restriction Orifice
D106
Replace with new
672
FT-362
Chloride Injection
Coriolis Mass Flow Meter
D106
Replace with new
LHCS
AI
642
ENDRESS+HAUSER
D667-4
D669-1
PI-1004
Organic Chloride Injection Pump B Discharge
Pressure Gauge
D106
New
0 to 4
kg/cm2(g)
602G
Ashcroft
D667-14
Ashcroft
ZSL-1001
Support
Install
Pneu
Install
D669-12
D669-12
D669-12
Reactor
D669-12
Reactor
300-JB-L-D-012
D669-12
Reactor
D607
300-JB-L-D-012
D669-12
Reactor
D607
300-JB-L-D-012
D669-12
Reactor
D607
300-JB-L-D-012
D669-12
Reactor
D670-X
Requires 120V Power / Coriolis
83A01-CSVW9ADABEAT+Z1
Organic Chloride Injection Pump A Discharge
Pressure Gauge
D106
New
0 to 4
kg/cm2(g)
602G
D667-14
AT-383
CCR Regeneration Gas
Oxygen Analyzer (Zirconium Oxide)
D107
Replace with new
LHCS
AI
630
D667-22
D669-1
D670-X
AY-383
CCR Regeneration Gas
Oxygen Analyzer (Zirconium Oxide)
D107
Replace with new
LHCS
DO
623
FIF-1008
Burn Zone / Chlorination Zone DP Purge (High Pressure Tap)
Rotameter
D107
New
621
D612
D667-6
D670-11
FIF-1009
Burn Zone / Chlorination Zone DP Purge (Low Pressure Tap)
Rotameter
D107
New
621
D612
D667-6
D670-11
FIF-431
Regeneration Gas Flow Meter Tap Purge
Rotameter
D107
TBD
621
D667-6
D670-X
FIF-431
Regeneration Gas Flowmeter Tap Purge
Rotameter
D107
TBD
FIF-432
Regeneration Gas Flow Meter Tap Purge
Rotameter
D107
TBD
621
D667-6
D670-X
FIF-432
Regeneration Gas Flowmeter Tap Purge
Rotameter
D107
TBD
LHCS
DI
623
LHCS
DI
623
DCS
AI
604
D667-1
D670-X
LHCS
AI
FSL-382
Chlorination Gas
Switch
D107
Replace with new
Chlorination Gas
Relay
D107
TBD
FSLL-382
Chlorination Gas
Switch
D107
Replace with new
FSLL-382
Chlorination Gas
Relay
D107
TBD
FT-382
Chlorination Gas
Flow Transmitter
D107
TBD
FT-382
Chlorination Gas
Flow Transmitter
D107
TBD
D669-1
FY-382
Chlorination Gas
Solenoid Valve
D107
Replace with new
FY-382
Chlorination Gas
Relay
D107
TBD
JC-1001
Air Heater
Thyristor Power Controller
D107
Supplied by heater mfr
LHCS
DO
669
JC-478
Regeneration Heater
Thyristor Power Controller
D107
LHCS
DO
669
JY-1001A
Air Heater
Relays
D107
LHCS
DO
669
JY-1001D
Air Heater
Relays
D107
LHCS
DO
669
JY-478A
Regeneration Heater
Relays
D107
LHCS
DO
669
JY-478D
Regeneration Heater
Relays
D107
LHCS
DO
669
Regeneration Tower Burn Zone / Chlorination Zone DP
D107
New
DCS
AI
-50 to 50
mm H2O
604
Rosemount
TE-1002
Regeneration Tower Transition Zone
Multi Thermocouple ("K" Type) Multi-point Type
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
TE-1003
Regeneration Tower Upper Chlorination Zone
D107
New
DCS
TC
TE-1004
D107
New
DCS
TC
TE-1005
D107
New
DCS
TC
TE-1006
D107
New
DCS
TE-1007
Regeneration Tower Lower Chlorination Zone
D107
New
TE-1008
D107
TE-1009
TE-1010
Regeneration Tower Drying Zone
TE-1011
PDT-1007
Reactor
D670-X
PI-1005
FSL-382
Comments
3051 Series
D612
300-JB-D-A-071
D667-8
D669-1
D670-11
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-8
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-8
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-8
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-8
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-8
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-8
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-8
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-8
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-8
Regeneration Tower Transition Zome
D107
New
LHCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
D669-8
TE-1012
D107
New
LHCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
D669-8
TE-1013
D107
New
LHCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
D669-8
TE-1014
D107
New
LHCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
D669-8
TE-1015
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-8
TE-1016
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-8
TE-1017
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-8
TE-1018
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-8
TE-1019
Regeneration Tower Drying Zone
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-8
TE-1020
Regeneration Tower Burn Zone
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-8
TE-1021
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-8
TE-1022
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-8
TE-1023
D107
New
LHCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
D669-8
TE-1024
D107
New
LHCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
D669-8
TE-1025
D107
New
LHCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
D669-8
TE-1026
D107
New
LHCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
D669-8
TE-1027
D107
New
LHCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
D669-8
TE-1028
D107
New
LHCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
D669-8
TE-1029
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-8

PROJECT
Color
Status
Instrument
PROJECT NO.
: 970086
Orange
New
Never existed
DOC NO.
: 970086-D601
Yellow
Color Legend
Pink
Light Purple
Green
Replace with
new
Being
evaluated
Supplied by
others
Reuse
Rev.: A
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Existing
Preliminary
Existing
30%Review
New or Existing
60%Review
90%Review
Existing
Tag No.
Service
Instrument Type
MFD No.
Status
System
Signal
Range
Engr Units
Requisition
No.
Mfr.
Model No.
Deck
Location
Plan
Junction Box
Wiring
Suppl.
Wiring
Mech
Install
Elect
Install
Support
Install
Pneu
Install
TE-1030
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-8
TE-1031
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-8
TE-1032
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-8
TE-1033
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-8
TE-1034
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-8
TE-1035
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-8
TE-1036
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-8
TE-1037
D107
New
DCS
TC
640
Daily Thermetrics
D613
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-8
TE-372
Regeneration Heater Outlet
Multi Thermocouple ("K" Type) Dual Type
D107
Replace with new
DCS
TC
Daily Thermetrics
D611
300-JB-D-T-021
D669-18
TE-373
D107
Replace with new
DCS
TC
Daily Thermetrics
D611
D669-2
TE-375
Air Heater Outlet
D107
Replace with new
DCS
TC
Daily Thermetrics
D611
300-JB-D-T-021
D669-18
TE-376
Air Heater Outlet
D107
Replace with new
DCS
TC
Daily Thermetrics
D611
D669-2
TT-1011
Regeneration Tower Transition Zone
Remote Temperature Transmitter ("K" Type)
D107
New
LHCS
AI
0-700
609
Rosemount
3144 Series
D614
300-JB-L-A-091
D669-2
D670-9
TT-1012
D107
New
LHCS
AI
0-700
609
Rosemount
3144 Series
D614
300-JB-L-A-091
D669-2
D670-9
TT-1013
D107
New
LHCS
AI
0-700
609
Rosemount
3144 Series
D614
300-JB-L-A-091
D669-2
D670-9
TT-1014
D107
New
LHCS
AI
0-700
609
Rosemount
3144 Series
D614
300-JB-L-A-091
D669-2
D670-9
TT-1023
D107
New
LHCS
AI
0-700
609
Rosemount
3144 Series
D614
300-JB-L-A-091
D669-2
D670-9
TT-1024
D107
New
LHCS
AI
0-700
609
Rosemount
3144 Series
D614
300-JB-L-A-091
D669-2
D670-9
TT-1025
D107
New
LHCS
AI
0-700
609
Rosemount
3144 Series
D614
300-JB-L-A-091
D669-2
D670-9
TT-1026
D107
New
LHCS
AI
0-700
609
Rosemount
3144 Series
D614
300-JB-L-A-091
D669-2
D670-9
TT-1027
D107
New
LHCS
AI
0-700
609
Rosemount
3144 Series
D614
300-JB-L-A-091
D669-2
D670-9
TT-1028
D107
New
LHCS
AI
0-700
609
Rosemount
3144 Series
D614
300-JB-L-A-091
D669-2
D670-9
TT-373
D107
Replace with new
DCS
TC
0-700
609
Rosemount
3144 Series
D612
300-JB-D-A-071
D669-2
D670-9
TT-376
Air Heater Outlet
D107
Replace with new
DCS
TC
0-700
609
Rosemount
3144 Series
D612
300-JB-D-A-071
D669-2
D670-9
Air Heater Inlet Bundle Element
Skin Thermocouple ("?" Type)
D107
LHCS
TC
D612
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-4
TXE-1038A
TXE-1038B
D107
LHCS
TC
D612
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-4
TXE-1039A
D107
DCS
TC
D612
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-3
TXE-1039B
D107
DCS
TC
D612
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-3
TXE-1040A
Air Heater Middle Bundle Element
D107
LHCS
TC
D612
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-4
TXE-1040B
D107
LHCS
TC
D612
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-4
TXE-1041A
D107
DCS
TC
D612
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-3
TXE-1041B
D107
DCS
TC
D612
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-3
TXE-1042A
Air Heater Outlet Bundle Element
D107
LHCS
TC
D612
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-4
TXE-1042B
D107
LHCS
TC
D612
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-4
TXE-1043A
D107
DCS
TC
D612
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-3
TXE-1043B
D107
DCS
TC
D612
300-JB-D-T-081
D669-3
TXE-374A
Regerneration Heater Element
D107
LHCS
TC
TXE-374B
D107
LHCS
TC
TXSH-374B
Switch
D107
LHCS
DO
TXSHH-374B
Switch
D107
LHCS
DO
TXT-1038
Remote Temperature Transmitter ("?" Type)
D107
New
DCS
AI
0-750
609
D612
300-JB-D-A-071
D669-4
D670-9
TXT-1040
D107
New
DCS
AI
0-750
609
D612
300-JB-D-A-071
D669-4
D670-9
TXT-1042
D107
New
DCS
AI
0-750
609
D612
300-JB-D-A-071
D669-4
D670-2
FE-379
Upper Combustion Air
D108
Replace with new
605
FE-380
Comments
Lower Combustion Air / Nitrogen Purge
D108
Replace with new
605
FIF-1010
Disengaging Hopper Surge / Adsorption Zone DP (Low Pressure Tap)
Rotameter
D108
New
621
D667-6
D670-10
FIF-1011
Disengaging Hopper Surge / Adsorption Zone DP (Low Pressure Tap)
Rotameter
D108
New
621
D667-6
D670-10
FIF-3452
Regeneration Blower Seal Purge
Rotameter
D108
Supplied by Blower vendor
621
D667-15
D670-X
FIF-3453
Regeneration Blower
Rotameter
D108
621
D667-15
D670-X
FIF-3454
Regeneration Blower
Rotameter
D108
621
D667-15
D670-X
FT-1003
D108
New
LHCS
AI
0 to 1250
mm H2O
604
Rosemount
3051 Series
D667-1
D669-1
D670-X
FT-379
D108
Replace with new
DCS
AI
0 to 1250
mm H2O
604
Rosemount
3051 Series
D667-1
D669-1
D670-X
FT-380
D108
Replace with new
DCS
AI
0 to 1250
mm H2O
604
Rosemount
3051 Series
D667-2
D669-1
D670-X
FV-379
D108
Replace with new
616
MASONEILAN
88-21114
D669-13
D668-1
Requires Air
FV-380
D108
Replace with new
616
MASONEILAN
87-21114
D669-13
D668-1
Requires Air
FY-379
Solenoid Valve
D108
Replace with new
DCS
DO
616
MASONEILAN
SVI-2-AP-21113111
D669-13
616
MASONEILAN
SVI-2-AP-21113111
D669-13
D670-X
FY-380
Solenoid Valve
D108
Replace with new
DCS
DO
IT-1001
Regeneration Blower
Transmitter
D108
DCS
AI
LE/LSHH-349
Disengaging Hopper
D108
Replace with new
LHCS
DO
613
PANCAKE GM PROBE
LY-349
Disengaging Hopper
D108
Replace with new
613
Ohmart
PDCV-3461
Regeneration Blower
Pressure Regulator
D108
PDI-354
Disengaging Hopper
Electronic Output Field Indicator
D108
Replace with new
DCS
AI
623
Disengaging Hopper Surge Zone / Adsorption Zone DP
D108
New
LHCS
AI
0 to 500
mm H2O
604
PDT-1008
489-110D
10
D615
300-JB-L-D-051
Rosemount
3051 Series
D667-15
D670-X
D670-X
D667-8
D669-1
Requires 120V Power

PROJECT
Color
Status
Instrument
PROJECT NO.
: 970086
Orange
New
Never existed
DOC NO.
: 970086-D601
Yellow
Color Legend
Pink
Light Purple
Green
Replace with
new
Being
evaluated
Supplied by
others
Reuse
Rev.: A
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Existing
Preliminary
Existing
30%Review
New or Existing
60%Review
90%Review
Existing
Tag No.
Service
Instrument Type
MFD No.
Status
System
Signal
Range
Engr Units
Requisition
No.
Mfr.
Model No.
Deck
Location
Plan
Junction Box
Wiring
Suppl.
Wiring
Mech
Install
Elect
Install
Support
Install
Pneu
Install
PDT-354
Disengaging Hopper Surge Zone / Adsorption Zone DP
D108
Replace with new
DCS
AI
0 to 500
mm H2O
604
Rosemount
3051 Series
D667-8
D669-1
D670-10
PI-3463
Regeneration Blower
Pressure Gauge
D108
Supplied by blower mfr.
602
D605
PST-3464
Regeneration Blower
Pressure Transmitter
D108
DCS
AI
D605
300-JB-D-A-011
PST-3465
Regeneration Blower
D108
DCS
AI
D605
300-JB-D-A-011
SC-1001
Regeneration Blower
Speed Control
D108
DCS
DO
D605
Daily Thermetrics
Comments
TE-1044
Disengaging Hopper
Thermocouple ("E" Type)
D108
New
DCS
TC
606
11
D616
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-18
TXE-1067
Disengaging Hopper
D108
New
DCS
TC
606
10
D615
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-3
TXE-1068
Disengaging Hopper
D108
New
DCS
TC
606
10
D615
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-3
TXE-1069
Disengaging Hopper
D108
New
DCS
TC
606
10
D615
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-3
TXE-1070
Disengaging Hopper
D108
New
DCS
TC
606
10
D615
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-3
TXE-1071
Disengaging Hopper
D108
New
DCS
TC
606
10
D615
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-3
TXE-1072
Disengaging Hopper
D108
New
DCS
TC
606
10
D615
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-3
XV-72
Air Dryer Outlet
On-Off Valve (Globe)
D108
Reuse
D668-1
Requires Air
XV-74
Air Dryer Outlet
On-Off Valve (Globe)
D108
Reuse
D668-1
Requires Air
FE-1004
Preeheat Gas to Preheat Gas Heataer
D109
New
605
FIF-1012
Vent Gas from Disengaging Hopper Adsorption Zone Sample Tap Purge
Rotameter
D109
New
621
D667-6
D670-X
FIF-1013
Vent Gas from Disengaging Hopper Adsorption Zone Sample Tap Purge
Rotameter
D109
New
621
D667-6
D670-X
FT-1004
Preeheat Gas to Preheat Gas Heataer
D109
New
DCS
AI
0 to 625
mm H2O
604
Rosemount
3051 Series
D613
300-JB-D-A-071
D667-1
D669-1
D670-X
FT-1016
Condensate from Vent Gas Coller Air Stream Jacket
D109
New
DCS
AI
642
ENDRESS+HAUSER
83A01-CSVW9ADABEAT+Z1
D614
300-JB-D-A-091
D677-4
D669-1
D670-X
FV-1004
Preheat Gas to Preheat Gas Heater
D109
New
DCS
AO
616
MASONEILAN
87-21114
D614
300-JB-D-A-071
D669-10
D668-1
Requires Air
FV-1016
Condensate from Vent Gas Coller Air Stream Jacket
D109
New
DCS
AO
616
MASONEILAN
28-28172
D614
300-JB-D-A-091
D669-10
D668-1
Requires Air
TE-1045
Vent Gas from Disengaging Hopper Preheat Zone
D109
New
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
11
D616
300-JB-D-T-082
D669-18
TE-1046
D109
New
LHCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D669-2
TE-1047
Vent Gas to Disengaging Hopper Preheat Zone
D109
New
LHCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D669-2
TE-1048
D109
New
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D669-2
TE-1049
Air to Vent Gas Cooler
D109
New
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D669-2
TE-1050
D109
New
LHCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D669-2
TE-1051
Preheat Gas to Disengaging Hopper Preheat Zone
D109
New
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D669-2
TE-1052
D109
New
LHCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D669-2
TI-3001
Preheat Gas Heater Inlet Steam
Thermometer (threaded)
D109
New
TI-3002
Preheat Gas Heater Outlet Condensate
D109
New
TI-3003
Preheat Gas Heater Inlet
Thermometer (Flanged)
D109
New
TI-3010
Vent Gas Cooler Vent to atmosphere
D109
New
TI-3011
Regeneration Cooler to Vent Gas Cooler Inlet
D109
New
TT-1046
D109
New
LHCS
AI
0-250
609
Rosemount
3144 Series
10
D615
300-JB-L-A-091
D669-2
D670-9
TT-1047
D109
New
LHCS
AI
0-250
609
Rosemount
3144 Series
10
D615
300-JB-L-A-091
D669-2
D670-9
TT-1048
D109
New
DCS
AI
75-175
609
Rosemount
3144 Series
10
D615
300-JB-D-A-091
D669-2
D670-9
TT-1049
D109
New
DCS
AI
0-100
609
Rosemount
3144 Series
10
D615
300-JB-D-A-091
D669-2
D670-9
TT-1050
D109
New
LHCS
AI
0-200
609
Rosemount
3144 Series
10
D615
300-JB-L-A-091
D669-2
D670-9
TT-1051
D109
New
DCS
AI
75-175
609
Rosemount
3144 Series
10
D615
300-JB-D-A-091
D669-2
D670-9
TT-1052
D109
New
LHCS
AI
0-250
609
Rosemount
3144 Series
10
D615
300-JB-L-A-091
D669-2
D670-2
TV-1048
Control Valve (Eccentric Disc)
D109
New
DCS
AO
616
MASONEILAN
34-39223
10
D615
300-JB-D-A-091
D669-10
D668-1
TV-1051
Preheat Gas Bypassing Preheat Gas Heater
D109
New
DCS
AO
616
MASONEILAN
88-21114
D614
300-JB-D-A-091
D669-10
D668-1
FE-1015
Secondary Lift Gas to Lift Gas Engager No. 1
D110
New
605
Fluidic Techniques
FE-346
D110
Replace with new
605
FI-346A
Electronic Field Output Indicator?
D110
Replace with new
DCS
AI
623
FO-13
Lock Hopper No. 2 Pressure
Restriction Orifice
D110
Replace with new
672
FO-14
D670-X
Lift Engager No. 2 Lift Gas
Restriction Orifice
D110
Replace with new
672
FT-1015
Secondary Lift Gas to Lift Gas Engager No. 1
D110
New
DCS
AI
0 to 1250
mm H2O
604
Rosemount
3051 Series
D667-1
D669-1
D670-X
FT-346
D110
Replace with new
DCS
AI
0 to 1250
mm H2O
604
Rosemount
3051 Series
D667-1
D669-1
D670-X
D110
New
DCS
AO
616
MASONEILAN
28-28142
D669-10
D668-1
Lock Hopper No. 2
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DO
613
PANCAKE GM PROBE
489-110D
LY-347
Lock Hopper No. 2
D110
Replace with new
613
VEGA
MINITRAC 31
XV-42
D110
Replace with new
616
FISHER
XV-43
On-Off Valve (Ball)
D110
Replace with new
671
XV-45
On-Off Valve (Ball)
D110
Replace with new
XV-53
D110
Replace with new
XV-54
On-Off Valve (Ball)
D110
Replace with new
XV-56
On-Off Valve (Ball)
D110
Replace with new
XV-75
Flow Control Hopper Inlet
D110
Replace with new
XV-76
Flow Control Hopper Outlet
D110
Replace with new
XY-42
Mounted on XV-42
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DO
XY-43
Mounted on XV-43
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DO
FV-1015
LE/LSHH-347
D607
300-JB-L-D-012
SS-138B
D607
METSO
D607
671
METSO
616
FISHER
SS-138B
671
METSO
671
METSO
FISHER
Requires 120V Power / Coriolis
Requires Air
Requires Air
Refer to fabrication dwg: FAB-2837-3
Requires Air
D669-12
D668-1
Requires Air
D669-12
D668-1
Requires Air
D607
D669-12
D668-1
Requires Air
D606
D669-12
D668-1
Requires Air
D606
D669-12
D668-1
Requires Air
D606
D669-12
D668-1
Requires Air
SS-138B
D610
D669-12
D668-1
Requires Air
FISHER
SS-138B
D609
D669-12
D668-1
Requires Air
616
ASCO
EV8327G042 24VDC
D607
300-JB-L-D-011
D669-12
671
ASCO
EV8551G421 24VDC
D607
300-JB-L-D-011
D669-12
Requires 120V Power

PROJECT
Color
Status
Instrument
PROJECT NO.
: 970086
Orange
New
Never existed
DOC NO.
: 970086-D601
Yellow
Color Legend
Pink
Light Purple
Green
Replace with
new
Being
evaluated
Supplied by
others
Reuse
Rev.: A
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Existing
Preliminary
Existing
30%Review
New or Existing
60%Review
90%Review
Existing
Tag No.
Service
Instrument Type
MFD No.
Status
System
Signal
Range
Engr Units
Requisition
No.
Mfr.
Model No.
Deck
Location
Plan
Junction Box
Wiring
Suppl.
Wiring
Mech
Install
Elect
Install
Support
Install
Pneu
Install
XY-45
Mounted on XV-45
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DO
671
ASCO
EV8551G421 24VDC
D607
300-JB-L-D-011
D669-12
XY-53
Mounted on XV-53
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DO
616
ASCO
EV8327G042 24VDC
D606
300-JB-L-D-011
D669-12
XY-54
Mounted on XV-54
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DO
671
ASCO
EV8551G421 24VDC
D606
300-JB-L-D-011
D669-12
XY-56
Mounted on XV-56
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DO
671
ASCO
EV8551G421 24VDC
D606
300-JB-L-D-011
D669-12
XY-75
Mounted on XV-75
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DO
616
ASCO
EV8327G042 24VDC
D610
300-JB-L-D-051
D669-12
XY-76
Mounted on XV-76
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DO
616
ASCO
EV8327G042 24VDC
D609
300-JB-L-D-051
D669-12
ZSH-42
Mounted on XV-42
Limit Switch
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
616
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D607
300-JB-L-D-011
D669-12
ZSH-43
Mounted on XV-43
Limit Switch
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
671
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D607
300-JB-L-D-011
D669-12
ZSH-45
Mounted on XV-45
Limit Switch
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
671
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D607
300-JB-L-D-011
D669-12
ZSH-53
Mounted on XV-53
Limit Switch
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
616
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D606
300-JB-L-D-011
D669-12
ZSH-54
Mounted on XV-54
Limit Switch
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
671
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D606
300-JB-L-D-011
D669-12
ZSH-56
Mounted on XV-56
Limit Switch
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
671
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D606
300-JB-L-D-011
D669-12
ZSH-75
Mounted on XV-75
Limit Switch
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
616
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D610
300-JB-L-D-051
D669-12
ZSH-76
Mounted on XV-76
Limit Switch
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
616
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D609
300-JB-L-D-051
D669-12
ZSL-42
Mounted on XV-42
Limit Switch
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
616
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D607
300-JB-L-D-011
D669-12
ZSL-43
Mounted on XV-43
Limit Switch
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
671
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D607
300-JB-L-D-011
D669-12
ZSL-45
Mounted on XV-45
Limit Switch
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
671
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D607
300-JB-L-D-011
D669-12
ZSL-53
Mounted on XV-53
Limit Switch
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
616
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D606
300-JB-L-D-011
D669-12
ZSL-54
Mounted on XV-54
Limit Switch
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
671
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D606
300-JB-L-D-011
D669-12
ZSL-56
Mounted on XV-56
Limit Switch
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
671
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D606
300-JB-L-D-011
D669-12
ZSL-75
Mounted on XV-75
Limit Switch
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
616
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D610
300-JB-L-D-051
D669-12
ZSL-76
Mounted on XV-76
Limit Switch
D110
Replace with new
LHCS
DI
616
WESTLOCK
360KBY2B2M0600
D609
300-JB-L-D-051
D669-12
AT-388
Lift Gas Hydrogen/Hydrocarbon
Hydrogen/Hydrocarbon Detector (Thermal Conductivity)
D111
TBD
DCS
AI
630
D667-22
D669-1
D670-X
FE-1005
Lift Gas Blower Discharge
D111
New
605
FE-396
Circulating Gas from Lift Gas Blower
D111
Replace with new
605
FI-396A
Elutriation Gas
Electronic Field Output Indicator
D111
Replace with new
DCS
AI
623
FIF-3006
Lift Gas Blower Seal Purge
Rotameter
D111
Supplied by Blower Vendor
621
FT-1005
D111
New
DCS
AI
0 to 625
mm H2O
604
Rosemount
3051 Series
FT-1007
D111
New
DCS
AI
0 to 625
mm H2O
604
Rosemount
3051 Series
FT-396
D111
Replace with new
DCS
AI
0 to 625
mm H2O
604
Rosemount
3051 Series
FV-1005
Lift Gas Blower Spillback
D111
New
DCS
AO
616
MASONEILAN
FV-396
Elutriation Gas
D111
Replace with new
DCS
AO
616
MASONEILAN
HK-358
Dust Collection Blowback System
Switch
D111
Reuse
DCS
DI
-
300-JB-D-A-011
D667-1
D669-1
D670-X
D611
300-JB-D-A-071
D667-3
D669-1
D670-X
D611
300-JB-D-A-071
D667-3
D669-1
D670-X
87-21114
D606
300-JB-D-A-011
D669-10
D668-1
Requires Air
88-21114
D612
300-JB-D-A-071
D669-10
D668-1
Requires Air
D609
300-JB-L-D-051
D669-15
D670-X
D669-1
D670-X
D668-1
Pressure Regulator
D111
D111
New
DCS
DO
PDV-354
Makeup Nitrogen
D111
Replace with new
DCS
AO
616
PI-3101
Nitrogen Puge to Lift Gas Blower Seal
Pressure Gauge
D111
PI-391
Pressure Gauge
D111
Replace with new
0 to 1.6
kg/cm2(g)
602G
PI-393
Lift Gas Blower Suction
Pressure Gauge
D111
Replace with new
616
Rosemount
3051 Series
D667-8
MASONEILAN
27-28142
D667-14
D667-14
D667-14
TE-1053
Lift Gas blower Discharge
D111
New
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D605
300-JB-D-T-021
D669-18
TE-1054
D111
New
DCS
TC
606
Daily Thermetrics
D605
300-JB-D-T-021
D669-18
TI-3020
Low Voltage Signal
D111
New
Ashcroft
-
Low Voltage Signal
D111
New
Thermometer
D111
Replace with new
XV-82A
Control Valve
D111
Replace with new
XV-82B
Control Valve
D111
Replace with new
ZS-82A
Limit Switch
D111
Replace with new
ZS-82B
Limit Switch
D111
FO-24
Booster Gas Coalescer Drain
Restriction Orifice
D606
Nitrogen Purge to Lift Gas Blower Seal
Lift Gas Blower Spillback Cooler Outlet
D670-X
PCV-3102
TI-418
PDT-1386
TI-3021
D670-X
Comments
D669-11
D668-1
D669-11
D668-1
D669-11
Replace with new
D669-11
D112
Replace with new
672
AI-1002
Air Drier Package
Moisture Indicator
D114
Supplied by Air Drier Mfr.
633
AT-1001
Air Drier Package
Moisture Analyzer
D114
DCS
AI
633
D670-X
PDI-1013
Air Drier Package
Differential Pressure Gauge
D114
D670-X
PDI-1014
Air Drier Package
Differential Pressure Gauge
D114
D670-X
PI-1012
Pressure Gauge
D114
Supplied by DCBS Mfr.
PI-1015
Air Drier Package
Pressure Gauge
D114
PI-1016
Air Drier Package
Pressure Gauge
D114
PI-1017
Air Drier Package
Pressure Gauge
D114
PI-1018
Air Drier Package
Pressure Gauge
D114
PI-1021
Air Drier Package
Pressure Gauge
D114
PSV-2260
Air Drier Package
Safety Relief Valve
D114
PSV-2261
Air Drier Package
Safety Relief Valve
D114
PT-1019
Air Drier Package
D114
DCS
AI
D670-X
PT-1020
Air Drier Package
D114
DCS
AI
D670-X
Requires Air

PROJECT
Color
Status
Instrument
PROJECT NO.
: 970086
Orange
New
Never existed
DOC NO.
: 970086-D601
Yellow
Color Legend
Pink
Light Purple
Green
Replace with
new
Being
evaluated
Supplied by
others
Reuse
Rev.: A
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Existing
Preliminary
Existing
30%Review
New or Existing
60%Review
90%Review
Existing
Tag No.
Service
Instrument Type
MFD No.
Status
System
Signal
Range
Engr Units
Requisition
No.
Mfr.
Model No.
Deck
Location
Plan
Junction Box
Wiring
D610
300-JB-L-D-051
Suppl.
Wiring
Mech
Install
Elect
Install
D668-9
Support
Install
Pneu
Install
UA-1001
Air Drier Package
Common Trouble Alarm
D114
DCS
DI
UY-1002
Blowback Solenoid Valve
D114
DCS
DO
UY-1003
D114
DCS
DO
UY-1004
D114
DCS
DO
UY-1005
D114
DCS
DO
LG-1002
Oil Mist Generator
Level Gauge
D115
Supplied by Oil Mist Generator Mfr.
612
LSL-1003
Oil Mist Generator
Level Switch
D115
DCS
DI
612
PI-1011
Lift Gas Blower
Pressure Gauge
D115
PI-1027
Oil Mist Generator
Pressure Gauge
D115
PSL-1025
Oil Mist Generator
Pressure Switch
D115
DCS
DI
PSV-2259
Lift Gas Blower
Pressure Relief Vavle
D115
PSV-2263
Oil Mist Generator
Safety Relief Valve
D115
PT-1003
Lift Gas Blower
D115
DCS
AI
PT-1009
Lift Gas Blower
D115
DCS
AI
D670-X
TI-1062
Lift Gas Blower
Thermometer
D115
TI-1064
Oil Mist Generator
Temperature Indicator
D115
D670-X
Comments
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
SIGNATURE
DATE
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
DATE
BY
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
DWG BY:
CHECKED
INSTRUMENT SYMBOL LIST

AND GENERAL NOTES
REV BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
SUPVSED
BY:
APP BY:
PLANT
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.:
REV.
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
Discipline
Instrumentation
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
SIGNATURE
DATE
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
DATE
BY
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
DWG BY:
CHECKED
ELECTRICAL
DRAWING LIST
REV BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
SUPVSED
BY:
APP BY:
PLANT
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.:
REV.
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
SIGNATURE
DATE
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
DATE
BY
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
DWG BY:
CHECKED
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
AND GENERAL NOTES
REV BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
SUPVSED
BY:
APP BY:
PLANT
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.:
REV.
UNIT:
REFINER:
LOCATION:
PROJ #:
DWG#:
Load List
Revision
750pph Atmospheric CCR

PEMEX
970086
970086-D702
Electrical
A: 10-Jan-13
Equipment
Description
PAGE 1 OF 1
Fed from Motor
Control Center
Location
Existing kW rating on
Equipment Nameplate
Rating
Existing
Voltage
New kW rating on
Equipment Nameplate
Rating
New Voltage for

Revamp Volts
Phase
Hz
Local Control
Station
Full Load
Amps Existing
Equipment
Full Load
Amps New
Equipment
Revamp
Scope
REV A
Remarks
BH-500
Regeneration Heater (2 circuits)
CCM-1
Deck 7
123 KW
480 V
159.5 KW
480 V
60
149 A
191 A
Replace
Heater has 2 circuits - balanced 3

phase load of
79.75 kW each bundle. Control
Voltage is 127V.
BH-502
Air Heater (1 circuit per bundle)
CCM-1
Deck 7
28.4 KW
480 V
57 KW
480 V
60
35 A
68 A
Replace
Control Voltage is 127V.
Air Heater - Bundle A
480 V
8.9 KW
480 V
60
Replace
Air Heater - Bundle B
480 V
18 KW
480 V
60
Replace
Air Heater - Bundle C
480 V
30.1 KW
480 V
60
Replace
480 V
57 KW
480 V
60 Start-Stop
GB-503
Lift Gas Blower
CCM-1
At grade
29.8 KW
54 A
96 A
Replace
GB-505
Regeneration Blower Motor
CCM-1
At grade
14.92 KW
480 V
125 (HP)
480 V
60 Hand-Off-Auto
31.8 A
160 A
Replace
Variable Frequency Drive

GB-506
Regeneration Cooler Blower Motor
CCM-1
At grade
37/18.65 KW
Two Speed Motor
480 V
100 (HP)
480 V
60 Start-Stop
25.8 A
124 A
Replace
Air Instrument Compressor A
CCM-1
74.6 KW
480 V
300 (HP)
4160 V
60 Start-Stop
122 A
40 A
Replace
Air Instrument Compressor B
CCM-1
480 V
300 (HP)
4160 V
60 Start-Stop
40 A
New
GB-507 A
GB-507 B
GA-513 A
GA-513 B
BH-501
GA-512 A
GA-512 B
GB-504
GB-505
LP-1
Organic Chloride Injection

Pump Motor A
Organic Chloride Injection
Pump Motor B
Chlorination Heater
Washing Equipment
Pump Motor A
Washing Equipment
Pump Motor B
CCM-1A
CCM-1A
CCM-1
CCM-1
CCM-1
At grade - Off
Module
At grade - Off
Module
At grade - Off
Module
At grade - Off
Module
Deck 7
At grade - Off
Module
At grade - Off
Module
0.18 KW
220 V
1 (HP)
480 V
60 Start-Stop
1A
2.1 A
Replace
0.18 KW
220 V
1 (HP)
480 V
60 Start-Stop
1A
2.1 A
Replace
123 KW
480 V
60 Not Applicable
149 A
No Change
7.46 KW
480 V
60 Start-Stop
15 A
7.46 KW
480 V
60 Start-Stop
15 A
Demolish/
Remove
Demolish/
Remove

(Note 1)
(Note 1)
Motor will no longer be used

Motor will no longer be used
Chlorination Gas Blower
CCM-1
37/18.65 KW
Two Speed Motor
480 V
60 Hand-Off-Auto
65 A
No Change
Lube Console (GB-504)
CCM-1
5.52 KW
480 V
60
11 A
No Change
Lube Console (GB-505)
CCM-1
5.52 KW
480 V
60
Demolish/
Remove
CCM-1A
At grade
7.611 KVA
220 V
60 Not Applicable
New
(Note 2)
Normal Lighting Panel
EM-LP
Emergency Lighting Panel
UPS
At grade
1.935 KVA
220 V
60 Not Applicable
New
(Note 2)
IPP-1
Instrument Power Panel
UPS
At grade
3.29 KVA
220 V
60 Not Applicable
New
(Note 2)
RP-1
Receptacle Panel
CCM-1A
At grade
3.75 KVA
220 V
60 Not Applicable
New
(Note 2)
WR-1
Welding Receptacle
CCM-1
At grade
60A
480 V
60 Not Applicable
New
(Note 2)
WR-2
Welding Receptacle
CCM-1
At grade
60A
480 V
60 Not Applicable
New
(Note 2)
TR-3
Transformer
CCM-1
Substation 3
45 kVA
480 V
45 kVA
480/220- 127 V
60 Not Applicable
55 A
Replace
Note 1: Loads are preliminary and to be confirmed with purchase of equipment

Note 2: Loads are preliminary and to be determined from detail design
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
SIGNATURE
DATE
NUMBER
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
DWG BY:
CHECKED
ELECTRICAL
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
REV BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
SUPVSED
BY:
APP BY:
PLANT
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.:
REV.
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
SIGNATURE
DATE
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
DATE
BY
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
DWG BY:
CHECKED
ELECTRICAL DEMOLTION
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
REV BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
SUPVSED
BY:
APP BY:
PLANT
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.:
REV.
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
SIGNATURE
DATE
NUMBER
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
DWG BY:
CHECKED
ELECTRICAL
SUBSTATION NO. 3 LAYOUT
REV BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
SUPVSED
BY:
APP BY:
PLANT
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.:
REV.
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
SIGNATURE
DATE
NUMBER
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
DWG BY:
CHECKED
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
SUBSTATION NO. 3 LAYOUT
REV BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
SUPVSED
BY:
APP BY:
PLANT
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.:
REV.
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
SIGNATURE
DATE
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
DATE
BY
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
DWG BY:
CHECKED
ELECTRICAL HOMERUN
CONDUIT ROUTING PLAN
REV BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
SUPVSED
BY:
APP BY:
PLANT
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.:
REV.
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
SIGNATURE
DATE
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
DATE
BY
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
DWG BY:
CHECKED
MATERIAL SCHEDULE FOR

POWER SYSTEM NAME PLATE
REV BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
SUPVSED
BY:
APP BY:
PLANT
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.:
REV.
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
SIGNATURE
DATE
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
DATE
BY
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
DWG BY:
CHECKED
ELECTRICAL
HOMERUN CABLE SCHEDULE
REV BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
SUPVSED
BY:
APP BY:
PLANT
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.:
REV.
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
SIGNATURE
DATE
NUMBER
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
DWG BY:
CHECKED
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
HOMRUN CABLE SCHEDULE
REV BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
SUPVSED
BY:
APP BY:
PLANT
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.:
REV.
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
ELECTRICAL PANELBOARD SCHEDULE

RP-1 RECEPTACLE PANEL
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
REV.
DWG NO.: 970086 -D739
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

LP-1 LIGHTING PANEL
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
REV.
DWG NO.: 970086 -D740
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

EM-LP EMERGENCY LIGHTING PANEL
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
REV.
DWG NO.: 970086 -D741
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER

IPP-1 INSTRUMENT POWER PANEL
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
REV.
DWG NO.: 970086 -D742
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
REV.
DWG NO.: 970086 -D743
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DATE:
CHECKED
MANAGER
DWG BY:
REV BY:
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
REV.
DWG NO.: 970086 -D744
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DATE:
CHECKED
MANAGER
DWG BY:
REV BY:
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
REV.
DWG NO.: 970086 -D745
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DATE:
CHECKED
MANAGER
DWG BY:
REV BY:
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
REV.
DWG NO.: 970086 -D746
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DATE:
CHECKED
MANAGER
DWG BY:
REV BY:
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
REV.
DWG NO.: 970086 -D747
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
REV.
DWG NO.: 970086 -D748
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
REV.
DWG NO.: 970086 -D749
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
REV.
DWG NO.: 970086 -D751
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
REV.
DWG NO.: 970086 -D752
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
REV.
DWG NO.: 970086 -D753
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
REV.
DWG NO.: 970086 -D754
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DATE:
CHECKED
MANAGER
DWG BY:
REV BY:
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
REV.
DWG NO.: 970086 -D755
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
APPROVED BY:
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
DWG BY:
REV BY:
DATE:
CHECKED
SUPVSED
BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
APP BY:
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
PLANT
UNITS: MM
REV.
DWG NO.: 970086 -D756
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
SIGNATURE
DATE
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
DATE
BY
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
DWG BY:
CHECKED
ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS

GROUNDING SYSTEM
REV BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
SUPVSED
BY:
APP BY:
PLANT
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.:
REV.
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
SIGNATURE
DATE
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
DATE
BY
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
DWG BY:
CHECKED
ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS

GROUNDING SYSTEM
REV BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
SUPVSED
BY:
APP BY:
PLANT
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.:
REV.
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
SIGNATURE
DATE
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
DATE
BY
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
DWG BY:
CHECKED
ELECTRICAL
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
MOTOR CONTROL - EXISTING
REV BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
SUPVSED
BY:
APP BY:
PLANT
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.:
REV.
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
SIGNATURE
DATE
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
DATE
BY
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
DWG BY:
CHECKED
ELECTRICAL DEMOLTION
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
MOTOR CONTROL
REV BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
SUPVSED
BY:
APP BY:
PLANT
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.:
REV.
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
SIGNATURE
DATE
NUMBER
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
DWG BY:
CHECKED
ELECTRICAL
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
MOTOR CONTROLS - NEW
REV BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
SUPVSED
BY:
APP BY:
PLANT
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.:
REV.
PROGRESSSET
Date 01/17/13
By D.
NOLTE
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
SIGNATURE
DATE
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
DATE
BY
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
DWG BY:
CHECKED
ELECTRICAL
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
HEATER CONTROLS AND AIR COMPRESSORS - NEW
REV BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
SUPVSED
BY:
APP BY:
PLANT
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.:
REV.
Use for:
FA-513
Use for:
EA-520
Process line size

is 2"
Use for:
RE-L512R-PR-36-2"
Process line size

is 2"
Use for:
RE-L514R-PR-36-2"
Process line size

is 2"
Use for:
RE-L515R-PR-36-2"
Process line size

is 2"
Use for:
RE-L516R-PR-36-2"
Process line size

is 2"
Use for:
RE-L513R-PR-36-2"
Process line size

is 2"
Use for:
RE-L517R-PR-36-2"
Use for:
RE-L421-PR-23-1"
PSV-2251
Use for:
RE-L422-PR-23-1"
PSV-2252
Use for:
RE-L733-PR-23-1"
PSV-2257
Use for:
RE-L731-PR-23-1"
PSV-2258
Use for:
FT-301
Use for:
FT-302
Use for:
FT-313
Process line size

is 3/4"
Use for:
RE-L251N-B2A2
RE-L252N-B2A2
Use for:
RE-L265N-PR-36-6"
Use for:
VC-L266N-PR-8-6"
Use for:
PR-8-3/4"-XXX-ST
Use for:
PR-36-3/4"-XXX-ST
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline CSA
By B. Singh
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PEMEX REFINACION
INVITATION TO BID
SECTION 3
DEMOLITION AND MODIFICATION
PROGRESSSET
Date
11/21/2012
Discipline Process
Ilic
By Srdjan
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PROGRESSSET
Date
11/21/2012
Discipline Process
Ilic
By Srdjan
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
Not depicted in as-built conditions.

Use laser scans/photos/existing
area drawings during detail design
to provide supporting
documentation to supplement
Demo MFDs.
2B
PROGRESSSET
Date
11/21/2012
Discipline Process
Ilic
By Srdjan
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
2B
SI
11/30/12
970086
PROGRESSSET
Date
11/21/2012
Discipline Process
Ilic
By Srdjan
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
2B

Use laser scans/photos/existing area
drawings during detail design to
provide supporting documentation
to supplement Demo MFDs.
SI
11/30/12
970086
2B
Not depicted in as-built conditions. Use

laser scans/photos/existing area drawings
during detail design to provide supporting
documentation to supplement Demo MFDs.
PROGRESSSET
Date
11/21/2012
Discipline Process
Ilic
By Srdjan
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
Only Inner Pipe to

Remain
2B
2B
SI
11/30/12
970086
2B

Use laser scans/photos/existing area
drawings during detail design to
provide supporting documentation to
supplement Demo MFDs.
2B
PROGRESSSET
Date
11/21/2012
Discipline Process
Ilic
By Srdjan
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
2B
SI
11/30/12
970086

laser scans/photos/existing area
drawings during detail design to provide
supporting documentation to
supplement Demo MFDs.
2B
PROGRESSSET
Date
11/21/2012
Discipline Process
Ilic
By Srdjan
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
B
2B
SI
11/30/12
970086
Not depicted in as-built conditions. Use laser scans/

photos/existing area drawings during detail design to
provide supporting documentation to supplement Demo
MFDs.
2B
PROGRESSSET
Date
11/21/2012
Discipline Process
Ilic
By Srdjan
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
2B
SI
11/30/12
970086
PROGRESSSET
Date
11/21/2012
Discipline Process
Ilic
By Srdjan
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
Not depicted in as-built conditions. Use laser scans/

photos/existing area drawings during detail design to
provide supporting documentation to supplement
Demo MFDs.
2B
SI
11/30/12
970086
2B
PROGRESSSET
Date
11/21/2012
Discipline Process
Ilic
By Srdjan
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review

laser scans/photos/existing area drawings
during detail design to provide supporting
documentation to supplement Demo
MFDs.
2B
SI
11/30/12
2B
970086
GB-506
REGENERATION
COOLER FAN
970086-D-764-D
CONDUIT STUB UPS
FOR BH-500 & BH-502
970086-D-768-D
GB-505
REGENERATION BLOWER
970086-D-763-D
EXISTING
CCR
GB-507-A/B
BH-500 (REGEN HEATER)
INSTRUMENT
& BH-502 (AIR HEATER)
AIR COMPRESSOR ON DECK 6
970086-D-767-D
NORTH
GB-503A
LIFT GAS BLWR
970086-D-765-D
REACTOR
GB-503B
LIFT GAS BLWR
970086-D-766-D
GA-513B
ORGANIC CHLORIDE INJ PUMP
970086-D-762-D
GA-513A
ORGANIC CHLORIDE INJ PUMP
970086-D-761-D
DEMOLITION DRAWING: 970086-D-770-D
DRAWING: 970086-D-761-D
SIGNATURE
DATE
NUMBER
REVISIONS
REV.
DESCRIPTION
DATE
BY
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
DWG BY:
CHECKED
ELECTRICAL HOMERUN
CONDUIT ROUTING PLAN
--
REV BY:
CHECKED BY:
MANAGED BY:
MANAGER
SUPVSED
BY:
APP BY:
PLANT
CHK BY:
SCALE: NONE
UNITS: MM
DWG NO.:
REV.
DEMO
GA-513A
ORGANIC CHLORIDE
INJECTION PUMP
GENERAL NOTES:
1. CUT AND CAP CONDUIT

ENTERING UNDERGROUND
DUCTBANK.
2. SEE DEMO ELECTRICAL SINGLE
LINE DIAGRAM DRAWING
970086-D-703-D.
3. SEE DRAWING 970086-D-760-D
FOR LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT.
DEMO
GENERAL NOTES:

DUCTBANK.
970086-D-703-D.
GA-513B
ORGANIC CHLORIDE
INJECTION PUMP
DEMO
GB-505
REGENERATION BLOWER
GENERAL NOTES:
1. CUT AND CAP CONDUIT ENTERING UNDERGROUND

DUCTBANK.
2. SEE DEMO ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM DRAWING
970086-D-703-D.
3. SEE DRAWING 970086-D-760-D FOR LOCATION OF
EQUIPMENT.
DEMOLITION DRAWING:
970086-D-773-D
DEMO
GENERAL NOTES:

DUCTBANK.
970086-D-703-D.
GB-506
REGENERATION COOLER FAN
DEMO
GB-503-A
LIFT GAS BLOWER

GENERAL NOTES:

DUCTBANK.
970086-D-703-D.
DEMO
GB-503-B
GENERAL NOTES:

DUCTBANK.
970086-D-703-D.
LIFT GAS BLOWER
DEMO
GB-507-A
INSTRUMENT AIR COMPRESSOR
GB-507-B
INSTRUMENT AIR COMPRESSOR
GENERAL NOTES:

DUCTBANK.
970086-D-703-D.
DEMO
BH-500
BH-502
REGEN HEATER - CONDUIT

UP TO SPLITTER BOX ON
DECK 6. SPLITTER BOX NOT
SHOWS AS IT WAS NOT
ACCESSIBLE.
AIR HEATER - CONDUIT UP

TO SPLITTER BOX ON DECK
6. SPLITTER BOX NOT
SHOWS AS IT WAS NOT
ACCESSIBLE.
GENERAL NOTES:

DUCTBANK.
970086-D-703-D.
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
TP
30%Review
60%Review
01
90%Review
REMOVE AND STORE
XV-75
TP
03
REMOVE AND STORE
XV-76
VALVE REPLACEMENT
TP-01 & TP-03
DECK 5 EL. 116.510
LOOKING N/W
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
TP
10
REMOVE AND DISCARD
XV-53
XV-54
TP
116
REMOVE AND DISCARD
VALVE REPLACEMENT
TP-10 & TP-116
DECK 1 EL. 104.000
LOOKING S/E
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
TP
30%Review
11
90%Review
60%Review
REMOVE AND DISCARD
XV-56
VALVE REPLACEMENT
TP-11
DECK 1 EL. 104.000
LOOKING S/E
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
PSV-2258
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PSV-2259
PSV-2257
TP
TP
TP
29
12
14
REMOVE AND DISCARD
REMOVE AND DISCARD
REMOVE AND DISCARD
PSV REPLACEMENT
TP-12, TP-14, & TP-29
DECK 3 EL. 110.125
LOOKING N/E
REV. 0
TP
PROGRESSSET
Date
16
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
REMOVE AND DISCARD
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
TP
17
FE-346
TP
REMOVE AND DISCARD
15
REMOVE AND DISCARD
FO-14
TP
19
REMOVE AND DISCARD
FE/FT REPLACEMENT
TP-15
FO REPLACEMENT
TP-17
BRANCH TIE-IN
TP-16 & TP-19
DECK 1 EL. 104.000
LOOKING N/E
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
TP
20
TP
23
TP
37
TP
38
TP
39
TP
40
NITROGEN HEADER
TIE POINTS
TP-20, TP23, TP-37, TP-38,
TP-39, TP-40
DECK 4 EL. 113.210
LOOKING N/W
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
STEAM JACKET INSULATE
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
TP
25
REMOVE AND DISCARD

REPLACEMENT
TP-25
DECK 1 EL. 104.000
LOOKING N
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
TO TP-24
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
TP
XX
TP
REMOVE AND DISCARD
31
REMOVE AND DISCARD
TP
16
REMOVE AND DISCARD

REPLACEMENT
TP-16, TP-31, & TP-XX
DECK 1 EL. 104.000
LOOKING N
REV. 0
TP
28
REMOVE AND DISCARD
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review

REPLACEMENT
TP-28
DECK 1 EL. 104.000
LOOKING N/W
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
TP
24
REMOVE AND DISCARD

REPLACEMENT
TP-24
DECK 2 EL. 106.400
LOOKING S/E
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
FV-380
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
FE-380
TP
42
REMOVE AND STORE
TP
30
REMOVE AND DISCARD
FV REPLACEMENT
TP-42
FT REPLACEMENT
TP-30
DECK 5 EL. 116.510
LOOKING S/W
REV. 0
TP
33
PROGRESSSET
REMOVE AND REUSE
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
TP
FO-24
32
60%Review
90%Review
REMOVE AND DISCARD
FO REPLACEMENT: TP-32
PIPING REPLACEMENT: TP-33
DECK 1 EL. 104.000
LOOKING W
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
TP
30%Review
60%Review
36
90%Review
FO-25
REMOVE AND DISCARD
FO REPLACEMENT
TP-36
GRADE EL. 100.000
LOOKING N
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
BH-500
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
RE-L603-PR-5-16"
FA-510
TP
60
REMOVE AND DISCARD
TP
47
REMOVE AND DISCARD
PIPING DEMO
TP-47 & TP-60
DECK 7 EL. 122.845
LOOKING N/W
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
TP
50
REMOVE AND DISCARD
TP
49
TP
48
REMOVE AND DISCARD
REMOVE AND DISCARD
PIPING DEMO
TP-48, TP-49, & TP-50
DECK 8 EL. 125.245
LOOKING W
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PSV-2255
TP
05
PSV REPLACEMENT
TP-05
DECK 5 EL. 116.510
LOOKING W
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
TP
51
REMOVE AND DISCARD
TP
53
REMOVE AND DISCARD
TP
52
REMOVE AND DISCARD
PIPING DEMO
TP-51, TP-52 & TP-53
DECK 8 EL. 125.245
LOOKING N/E
REV. 0
TE-455A-C
PROGRESSSET
Date
TE-454A-D
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
TE-369A-M
60%Review
90%Review
TP
TP
TP
54
55
109
REMOVE AND DISCARD
REMOVE AND DISCARD
REMOVE AND DISCARD
TE REPLACEMENT
TP-54, TP-55, & TP-109
DECK 8 EL. 125.245
LOOKING N/E
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
TP
59
REMOVE AND DISCARD
PIPING DEMO
TP-59
DECK 5 EL. 116.510
LOOKING S/W
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PSV-2256
TP
06
REMOVE AND DISCARD
PSV REPLACEMENT
TP-06
DECK 3 EL. 110.125
LOOKING S
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
TP
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
61
Preliminary
30%Review
REMOVE AND DISCARD
60%Review
90%Review
RE-L605-PR-5-14"
PINPING DEMO
TP-61
DECK 6 EL. 120.045
LOOKING S
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
TP
Preliminary
30%Review
69
60%Review
REMOVE AND DISCARD
90%Review
FE-379
TP
FV-379
67
REMOVE AND DISCARD
TP
68
REMOVE AND STORE
VALVE REPLACEMENT
TP-68
FO REPLACEMENT
TP-69
BRANCH CONNECTION
TP-67
GROUND EL. 100.000
LOOKING N/E
REV. 0
XV-42
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
TP
Preliminary
07
60%Review
30%Review
90%Review
REMOVE AND DISCARD
TP
09
REMOVE AND DISCARD
XV-43
XV-45
TP
115
REMOVE AND DISCARD
VALVE REPLACEMENT
TP-07, TP-09, & TP-115
DECK 2 EL. 106.400
LOOKING S/E
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PSV-2252
TP
74
REMOVE AND DISCARD
PSV REPLACEMENT
TP-74
DECK 3 EL. 110.125
LOOKING N
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
FO-18
TP
78
REMOVE AND DISCARD
FO REPLACEMENT
TP-78
DECK 3 EL. 108.925
LOOKING N/E
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
TP
Preliminary
30%Review
81
TP
REMOVE AND DISCARD
60%Review
90%Review
80
FO-2
REMOVE AND DISCARD
FT-302
FO-1
TP
82
REMOVE AND DISCARD
TP
79
REMOVE AND DISCARD
FT-301
FO/FT REPLACEMENT
TP-79, TP-80, TP-81 &
TP-82
DECK 3 EL. 108.925
LOOKING E
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
TP
XV-2
01/17/2012
Preliminary
88
30%Review
REMOVE AND STORE
90%Review
60%Review
TP
89
REMOVE AND STORE
XV-3
XV-5
TP
90
REMOVE AND STORE
VALVE REPLACEMENT
TP-88, TP-89, & TP-90
INTERMEDIATE DECK
AT EL. 106.000
LOOKING N/E
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
TP
Date
92
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
REMOVE AND STORE
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
XV-13
XV-14
TP
94
REMOVE AND STORE
TP
91
REMOVE AND STORE
XV-16
VALVE REPLACEMENT
TP-91, TP-92 & TP-94
DECK 1 EL. 104.000
LOOKING S/E
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
TP
93
FO-19
REMOVE AND DISCARD
FO REPLACEMENT
TP-93
GRADE EL. 100.000
LOOKING S
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
Preliminary
30%Review
60%Review
90%Review
PSV-2251
TP
98
REMOVE AND DISCARD
PSV REPLACEMENT
TP-98
DECK 3 EL. 110.125
LOOKING S/E
REV. 0
PROGRESSSET
Date
01/17/2012
Discipline Piping
By T. Battle
STEAM INLET
TP
TP
Preliminary
102
99
60%Review
REMOVE AND DISCARD
30%Review
90%Review
REMOVE AND REUSE
TP
101
REMOVE AND DISCARD
CONDENSATE OUTLET
TP
100
REMOVE AND REUSE

REPLACEMENT
TP=99, TP-100, TP-101, &
TP-102
DECK 3 EL. 110.125
LOOKING N/E
REV. 0
Equipment Removal, Replacement

and Modification Guidelines
RBPC10_PMR
450 PPH
Scope
These instructions are intended to provide a general description of the work
required to remove, replace and modify equipment affected by the revamp.
Installation of brand new equipment that is being added to the unit is covered
here as this is considered standard work.
This document is meant to be used as a guideline that describes the major steps
and considerations for each piece of affected equipment. This is not an
exhaustive or all-inclusive list of activities. Site-specific details and technical
requirements of the work process, as well as execution strategy for performing
the work, are the responsibility of the Contractor.
General Notes
1. All equipment must be properly shut down, cooled, isolated from power
supply and process and utility streams, and the environment made safe
for entry prior to commencement of any work.
2. For a schematic representation of equipment, piping and instrumentation
referenced in these instructions, see the following documents:
a. Attachment 1 Demolition P&IDs
b. Attachment 2 Construction P&IDs
c. Attachment 3 Equipment General Arrangement Drawings
3. For details regarding removal and replacement of instrumentation
referenced in these instructions, see the following documents:
a. Attachment 11 Instrumentation System
4. For details regarding removal and replacement of power supply and
control for electric heaters and rotating equipment referenced in these
instructions, see the following documents:
a. Attachment 9 Electrical System
b. Attachment 10 Electrical Bill of Material
5. For technical requirements related to performance of work referenced in
these instructions, see the following documents:
a. RBPC10_PMR R601F (instrumentation system specifications)
b. RBPC10_PMR R701F (electrical system specifications)
c. RBPC10_PMR R801F (piping system specifications)
d. RBPC10_PMR R905F (painting specifications)
e. RBPC10_PMR R907F (insulation specifications)
Page 1
Rev.0

Project: Minititlan CCR Revamp
RBPC10_PMR
450 PPH
Date : 2011-01-27
Item No.
DC-501ABCD
Service
Platforming Reactor
Status
Modification
Dimension, mm
N/A
Weight (Empty / Oper.), Metric Tons
N/A
Rating, kW
N/A
Location
On Tabletop
Support Type
Skirt
Demolition of Existing Equipment
No
Reference Drawing
Modification of Supporting Structure

Modification of Internals
Yes
Insulation
Yes
No
Heat Tracing
No
Specific Notes
The
areshall
beingverify
modified
place
to lengthen
Reductioncondition
Zone vessel
of the
Contractor
thatinthe
structural
andthe
mechanical
of on
thetop
existing
1. Reactors
reactors
and addsupport
a new internal
piping inside
Reduction for
Zone
vessel. and
For details
of the
vessel(s),
and foundation
arethe
satisfactory
erection
continuing
modifications, see Project Specification 953469-304.
operation at the revamp design conditions.
Contractor
shall
verifynext
the to
existing
dimensions
in field.
2. The
1.
Reactors are
located
the existing
CCR structure.
3.
Fabricate and install a new cylindrical shell at the upper section of the reduction
4.
Install one new vapor disengaging pipe that goes betweent the reduction pot and
2. The existing nuclear level source and detector LE/LY-309 must be removed and disposed of
zone.
in a safe
manner. This instrument is powered by the Lock Hopper Control System. The power
must be turned off at the source.
3. The
connections
the
undersidefor
of the
theexisting
reactorthermocouples
1 coverplates.TE-311A/B must be disconnected and
preserved for reinstallation.
Fabricate
andfor
install
one new
cone to beTE-312
installed
in the
bottom of the
existing
5. The
4.
connections
the existing
thermocouple
must
be disconnected
and
preserved
reduction pot.
for reinstallation
with the new TE. The existing TE-312 is to be demolished and replaced with a
new TE.
6.
Refer to 953469-304 for detail of modification.
5. The existing 1 catalyst lift line `6' must be disconnected at the flange. Line `6' must also
be disconnected from Lift Engager No. 2 before being removed. Line `6' is to be demolished
and replaced with a new 2 line.
6. The existing 1 recycle gas inlet line `59' must be disconnected and removed. Line `59' is
flanged. Line `59' must be shortened to accommodate the additional height of the Reduction
Zone vessel and preserved for reinstallation.
7. With the above piping and instrument connections removed, the top blind flange can be
unbolted and removed for access into the vessel to perform the modification work. The top
blind flange must be preserved for reinstallation.
8. Installation of the new Reduction Zone vessel shell section and internal piping shall be in
accordance with UOP Project Specification 953469-304.
Page 2
Rev.0
953469
304
03 A1
70
70
10 PLATE
2 x 150 DIA VENT HOLE
INSIDE EDGE
A387 GR. 1 1 OR 22
T
(LOCATION MR)
65
OF SEAL PLATE
65
1.2 THICK x 175 OD PERFORATED
3 TO 5
63
HOLE TO BE COVERED WITH
PLATE (STAINLESS STEEL).

60
SEE DETAIL F03 FOR SLOT
DIMENSIONS
10
WELD LINE FOR REDUCTION POT

IN ORDER TO BE ABLE TO INSTALL
THE NEW CONE AND VAPOR DISENGAGING
60
60
PIPE
SECTION D03-D03
DETAIL B03
55
M.R.
55
435 OD
GRIND WELD SMOOTH

GRIND SHARP EDGE OF
AND FLUSH WITH I D OF
INSIDE OF PIPE SMOOTH
PIPE (NO SHARP EDGES)
50
T
50
TACKWELD IN
2-PLACES AFTER
REACTOR IS ERECTED
45
550
45
CL. 150 RF
CL. 150 RF
SLIP-ON FLANGE
THREADED FLANGE
1 SCH XX STRONG
DETAIL E03
LAP JOINT STUB END

1 CL. 150 RF SLIP-ON
RAD 200
40
VAPOR LINE FLANGES (NOTE 2)
(A234 GR. WP11 OR WP22)
2.
FLANGE (A182 GR. F11 OR F22)
40
DETAIL E03
NOTE:
STAGGERED SLOT SPACING AS AN ALTERNATIVE
1 CL. 150 LAP JOINT
PUNCH EXIT SIDE SHALL BE ON THE OUTER SURFACE
150
DETAIL B03
RAD 200
35
IS ACCEPTABLE
OBLONG SLOT SIDE
35
CENTERS: 3.18+
-0.13
3.
M.R. DIA HOLE IN COVERPLATE
1.2 PERFORATED PLATE

HOLE ORIENTATION IS ALSO M.R.
1 CL. 150 RF SLIP-ON
30
(18 GA US STD)
1 XX STRONG PIPE
BY OTHERS
DETAIL E03
SLOT WIDTH: 1.02
SLOT END CENTERS: 15.88 +0.13

-
FINISHED OD
SLOT LENGTH: 12.7 +

-0.13
OF PIPE
0.55
(A240 TYPE 316L, 321 OR 347)
4.
CHAMFER AS SHOWN ON
DETAIL F03
SECTION D03-D03
1 SCH XX STRONG PIPE
TO COVERPLATE ON 4-
(A335 GR. P1 1 OR P22)
CORNERS
NOTES:
1 1/2 SCH 40 PIPE SLEEVE

(A335 GR. P1 1 OR P22)
1. WORK THIS DRAWING WITH UOP DRAWINGS 953469-304-01-A1 AND
953469-304-02-A1.
COVERPLATE
20
25
VAPOR LINE
2.
(EXISTING)
3 x 1 SCH 80
2 DIA VENT HOLE
A194 GR.3 NUTS. TACKWELD A SINGLE NUT ON ONE END
CONCENTRIC REDUCER
(1-REQUIRED)
20
VAPOR LINE FLANGE STUD BOLTS SHALL BE A193-B16 WITH
OF EACH STUD BOLT AND DOUBLE NUT THE OTHER END.
(A234 GR. WP1 1 OR WP 22)
3" SCH 80 PIPE
15
3.
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS NOTED.
4.
ALL SURFACES IN CONTACT WITH CATALYST SHALL BE

SMOOTH AND FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES.
15
150
(A335 GR. P1 1 OR P22)
REV
DFTR
CKR
DATE
APVD
REV
DFTR
CKR
APVD
DATE
DETAIL C03
UOP LLC
10
10
REACTOR DETAILS SHEET 2

38
TYP
REACTOR ASSEMBLY
25
+0.1 3
RADIAL GAP
-0.00
63
730 RAD
DETAIL E03
63
555
NOTE: OBLONG SLOT DIMENSIONS

MEASURED AFTER ROLLING PLATE

T
1 CL. 150 RF THREADED
30
+0.08
-0.05
3 x 6 DIA x 50
SUPPORT LUGS
6 PLATE
(A387 GR. 1 1 OR GR. 22)
PEMEX-REFINACION
(EQUALLY SPACED)

NEW
DETAIL A03
DETAIL C03
EXISTING
DFTR
CKR
APVD
PHS
JG
JRG
DATE
06MAY
10
PROJECT
TYPE
DWG NO
953469
304
03 A1
REV
0
0
953469
304
02 A1
REACTORS
70
C
LREACTORS
MATING FLANGE
REDUCTION ZONE
NC
NB
B02
C0
2
NC
CUSTOMER MAY RE-USE EXISTING TOP BODY FLANGE
THERMOWELL
ND
65
330
NA
B02
70
200
MATCH MARK WITH
NA
AND NOZZLES IF THEY ARE IN SATISFACTORY CONDITION
LONG WELDING
AND SUITABLE FOR THE NEW SERVICE
NECK NOZZLE
LONG WELDING NECK NOZZLE
65
INLET PIPE (NEW)
MATCH EXISTING RADIUS
750 ID x M.R. WALL ROLLED PLATE (NEW)
DETAIL G02
270
90
M.R.
(NOTE 3)
NOTES 3, 6 & 7
150
460 MIN
BODY FLANGES (NEW)
FACE OF FLANGE
SEE NOTE 3
REACTORS
(NOTES 3 & 4)
MATCH EXISTING RADIUS

TYP
F02
C
LNUCLEAR LEVEL
(NEW)
CONTROL DEVICE
(EXISTING)
750 ID
(REF)
125 125
LONG WELDING NECK NOZZLE
LONG WELDING
(LOCATE IN LINE WITH ONE

210
NECK NOZZLE
EXCHANGER PIPE BELOW, SEE
225
SECTION F02-F02
SECTION E02-E02
180
SEE NOTE 2
675
530 (REF)
C
LNUCLEAR LEVEL
55
ND
1750 (REF)
CONTROL DEVICE
60
NB
925
F02
C0
2
60
55
VIEW B02-B02
CUSTOMER/CONTRACTOR SHALL CONFIRM
THAT NEW NOZZLE ORIENTATIONS AND RADIAL
4930
1041 (REF)
222
LOCATIONS MATCH EXISTING ORIENTATIONS AND
50
RADIAL LOCATIONS
50
PU
NOTES:
2340
850 OD x 22 PLATE
TUBESHEET (EXISTING)
1. WORK THIS DRAWING WITH UOP DRAWINGS 953469-304-01-A1 AND
953469-304-03-A1.
THE DIAMETER AND ALIGNMENT

OF HOLE IN BLIND FLANGE MUST
10 PLATE BAFFLE (EXISTING)
MATCH BORE OF NOZZLE NA
45
2. THE EXISTING NUCLEAR LEVEL CONTROL LUGS MAY BE
ALL WELDS AND SHARP EDGES ARE
E02
E02
ND
NA
TO BE GROUND SMOOTH AND
REDUCTION POT
C
L
(EXISTING)
45
RE-USED IF THEY ARE SUITABLE FOR THE NEW SERVICE.

NOTE THAT THE CENTERLINE OF THE NUCLEAR LEVEL CONTROL
FLUSH ON INSIDE SURFACE
DEVICE HAS MOVED UP BY 145 mm. CUSTOMER/CONTRACTOR

SHALL DETERMINE IF NEW LUGS ARE REQUIRED. IF NEW LUGS
ARE REQUIRED, POST WELD HEAT TREATMENT IS REQUIRED.
1230
TIP OF REDUCTION
3. THE 460mm DIMENSION FROM THE BOTTOM OF THE NEW
75
150
INLET PIPE
4 SCH 40 PIPE
CATALYST TRANSFER PIPE (TYP)
FLANGE MAY HAVE TO BE INCREASED TO ALLOW ROOM FOR

THE FLANGES. THE THICKNESS OF THE TWO BODY FLANGES
MAY EXCEED 460 mm. IF SO, THEN THE CUSTOMER/CONTRACTOR
(A335 GR. P1 1 OR P22)
3
6 PLATE SUPPORT
(EXISTING)
40
LOWER BODY FLANGE TO THE TOP OF THE NEW UPPER BODY
D02
M.R.
D02
(NOTE 3)
40
75
25
ZONE THERMOWELL
SHALL INCREASE THE 460 mm DIMENSION. THE CRITICAL DIMENSION
WHICH MUST BE HELD IS THE 150mm DISTANCE THAT THE INLET
5
5
PIPE EXTENDS BELOW THE NEW LOWER BODY FLANGE. THE FINAL
INTERNAL EDGE TO BE
THIS DIMENSION TO
35
OVERALL LENGTH OF THE INLET PIPE IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF
VAPOR DISENGAGING PIPE
THE NOZZLE LOCATION
AND CONE
GROUND SMOOTH AND

CORRESPOND WITH
35
THE CUSTOMER/CONTRACTOR. CUSTOMER SHALL DETERMINE, IF
FLUSH WITH I D OF PIPE
REQUIRED, THE 750mm ID ROLLED PLATE LENGTH.
GIVEN IN VIEW B02-B02

DETAIL A03
DWG 953469-304-03-A1
4.
SECTION C02-C02
IT IS THE GENERAL CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO

ADVISE THE INSTRUMENT SUPPLIER OF THE NUCLEAR LEVEL
CONTROL DEVICE OF THE ACTUAL TOTAL THICKNESS.
30
30
5.
ALL SURFACES IN CONTACT WITH CATALYST SHALL BE

SMOOTH AND FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES.
150 DIA x 6 PLATE
GASKETS FOR EXTERNAL NOZZLES AND REACTOR BODY FLANGES SHALL BE

SPIRAL WOUND IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE GENERAL GUIDELINES IN
ASME B16.20 AND CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWING:
INNER RING:
25
SA240 TYPE 304

25
OUTER RING: SA240 TYPE 304

FILLER:
INHIBITING GRAPHITE (OUTER 3 WINDINGS) SHALL CONTAIN
FILLER MATERIAL WHICH PROVIDES AN OXIDATIVE BARRIER FOR
DETAIL A02
THE GRAPHITE)
SECTION D02-D02
WINDINGS:
7.
20
SA240 TYPE 304
SPECIAL WELDING NECK FLANGES AND MANWAY FLANGES SHALL BE WEATHER

20
SHIELDED PER UOP PROJECT SPECIFICATION 953469-907.
688 DIA
(REF)
8.
10 PLATE LUG (3-REQUIRED)

270
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS NOTED.
90
15
15
1
MAXIMUM
230
REV
DFTR
CKR
DATE
APVD
REV
DFTR
CKR
APVD
DATE
C
L 15 DIA HOLES
180
25
3
75
(T
YP
)
(TYP) (BOLTS TO BE
UOP LLC
SUPPLIED BY OTHERS)
20
10
10
75
TUBESHEET (EXISTING)
85 - 2 SCH 80 PIPES (EXISTING)
(TYP)
SECTION E02-E02
35
6.
REACTOR DETAILS SHEET 1

REACTOR ASSEMBLY
THE PURPOSE OF THIS DETAIL IS TO ALLOW THE

CUSTOMER/CONTRACTOR TO LINE UP TI NOZZLE "NB" CORRECTLY

10 PLATE LUG (3-REQUIRED)
THIS PIPE MUST BE IN LINE WITH
5
PEMEX-REFINACION
1 NOZZLE NB LOCATED AT TOP
DETAIL G02
OF REACTOR
NUCLEAR LEVEL CONTROL DEVICE LUGS
NEW
EXISTING
DFTR
CKR
APVD
PHS
JG
JRG
DATE
06MAy
10
PROJECT
TYPE
DWG NO
953469
304
02 A1
REV
0
0
953469
304
01
A1
DESIGN DATA
CODE:
ASME SECTION VIII, DIVISION 1.

UOP PROJECT SPECIFICATION: 953469-304 AND
953469-907
70
70
UOP STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS: 3-12-6, 9-1 1-6
REACTOR RO1
REACTOR RO2
REACTOR RO3
REACTOR RO4
1750
LINE
WELD
ND
NC
55
2438
(REF)
50
SURGE POT
REACTOR R01
EXTERNAL
16.87 kg/cm 2@ 543 C
1.05 kg/cm 2@ 482 C
16.17 kg/cm2@ 543 C
1.05 kg/cm 2@ 482 C
65
SOLID LINES INDICATE NEW INTERNALS
NA
NB
60
INTERNAL
(ORIGINAL)
PHANTOM LINES INDICATE EXISTING REACTORS AND INTERNALS
MODIFIED ELEVATION STACKED REACTORS
DWG 953469-304-02
65
DETAIL A02
MODIFIED REDUCTION ZONE
DESIGN CONDITIONS
REACTOR R02
15.47 kg/cm @ 543 C
1.05 kg/cm @ 482 C
REACTOR R03
14.76 kg/cm 2@ 543 C
1.05 kg/cm 2@ 482 C
REACTOR R04
14.06 kg/cm 2@ 543 C
1.05 kg/cm 2@ 482 C
MINIMUM DESIGN METAL TEMPERATURE:
2 C
CUSTOMER/CONTRACTOR MUST VERIFY SUITABILITY FOR
60
CONTINUED OPERATION OF EXISTING VESSEL AND SUPPORTS

FOR REQUIRED DESIGN CONDITIONS, INCREASED VESSEL
HEIGHT AND WEIGHT UNDER PRESENT APPLICABLE CODES
MATERIALS
SHELL
EXTERNAL NOZZLES
AND FLANGES
SA387 GR.1 1 GR.22
55
SA182 GR.F1 1 OR GR.22

:
NOZZLES
50
N0
MARK
SIZE
SERVICE
REQD
45
NA
CATALYST INLET
NB
TI
NC
TI
ND
1 1/2
45
RECYCLE GAS INLET
ALL NEW EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS SHALL BE ANSI
CLASS 600
RAISED FACE WITH 125 RA SURFACE FINISH.
SEE DETAIL A02 FOR NOTES REGARDING IF NOZZLES MAY BE
40
40
RE-USED.
35
35
NOTES
1. WORK THIS DRAWING WITH UOP DRAWINGS 953469-304-02-A1,
953469-304-03-A1.
30
30
2. BEFORE INSTALLING NEW INTERNALS, REMAINING CATALYST
AND CATALYST FINES ARE TO BE REMOVED.
SPECIFICATION 953469-304.
4. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS NOTED.
REACTOR RO1
REACTOR RO2
REACTOR RO3
REACTOR RO4
1750
LINE
WELD
ND
NC
15
2438
(REF)
10
PHANTOM LINES INDICATE INTERNALS TO BE REMOVED
NA
NB
20
SOLID LINES INDICATE EXISTING REACTORS AND INTERNALS
TO BE REMOVED
EXISTING ELEVATION STACKED REACTORS
25
TOP FLANGE
25
3. FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SEE UOP PROJECT
20
15
REV
DFTR
CKR
DATE
APVD
REV
DFTR
CKR
DATE
APVD
UOP LLC
10
REACTOR SECTIONAL ELEVATION

REACTOR ASSEMBLY
5
PEMEX-REFINACION
DFTR
CKR
APVD
PHS
JG
JRG
DATE
06MAY
10
PROJECT
TYPE
953469
304
DWG NO
01
A1
REV
0
0
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC
953469 304
REV
DATE
BY
06MAY10 JRG
APVD
REV
SHEET
BY
APVD
DATE
VGS
REACTORS
Platforming Process Unit

Atmospheric CCR Regenerator Section (U-300)
Description
Sheet
Drawing List
References
General Notes
Material Requirements
Other specifications
referenced in this
specification:
Form QUA-04-4
UOP Standard Specification: 3-12-6, 9-11-6

UOP Standard Drawing:
UOP Project Specification:
(F-PSD-45)
304-3
304-2 Revamp
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC
953469 304
REV
DATE
BY
06MAY10 JRG
APVD
REV
SHEET
BY
APVD
DATE
VGS
REACTORS
Drawing List
For details of reactor, refer to the following UOP Drawings:
Number
Revision
953469-304-01-A1
953469-304-02-A1
953469-304-03-A1
Title
0
0
0
Reactor Sectional Elevation

Reactor Details Sheet No 1
Reactor Details Sheet No 2
References
The existing reactors were originally specified under UOP Project 6776 in the year 1976, and were
revamped extensively by UOP under Project 580023 in the year 1992.
As no drawings were submitted to UOP from Pemex, UOP relied heavily on the dimensions from the
Project 580023 Sch. A drawings. The customer shall confirm that the dimensions shown on UOP Drawing
953469-304-01-A1, 953469-304-02-A1 and 953469-304-03-A1 do match the existing dimensions.
General Notes
A. Where MR is specified, it indicates that it is the Manufacturer's and/or Contractor's responsibility to
meet the requirement in compliance with applicable codes and standards, including any additional
requirements specified in the UOP Standard Specifications and UOP Project Specifications.
B. Vacuum design is specified for equipment that can undergo a vacuum condition if the process fluid is
allowed to cool. For existing equipment affected by this condition and not presently designed for
vacuum, UOP will specify a full vacuum design condition. The customer/contractor should evaluate
the modifications required or any suitable alternatives that guarantee a vacuum condition will not occur.
C. The required modifications are as follows:
1. Fabricate and install a new cylindrical shell at the upper section of the Reduction Zone. The
purpose of this is to increase the catalyst residence time in the Reduction Zone based on the
increased capacity of the Regeneration Tower.
2. Install one new Vapor Disengaging Pipe that goes between the Reduction Pot and the underside of
the Reactor 1 coverplates. The purpose of this vapor disengaging pipe is to reduce the pressure
drop of the Lift Gas through the existing catalyst transfer pipes, based on the new, increased Lift
Gas rate.
3. Fabricate and install one new Cone to be installed in the bottom of the existing Reduction Pot.
Material Requirements
Form QUA-04-4
(F-PSD-45)
304-3
304-2 Revamp
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC
953469 304
REV
DATE
BY
06MAY10 JRG
APVD
REV
SHEET
BY
APVD
DATE
VGS
REACTORS
Notes Applicable to 1 Cr - Mo Materials
a. Materials shall conform to the following material designations:

Plate:
Forgings:
Welded Pipe:
SA387 GR 11
SA182 GR F11 or SA336 GR F11
SA335 GR P11
b. For additional material requirements,

see UOP Standard Specification 3-12, sections 4 and 5.
c. All pressure containing welds, whether shop or field, are to be fully radiographed.
Notes Applicable to 2 Cr - Mo Materials
a. Materials shall conform to the following material designations:

Plate:
Forgings:
Welded Pipe:
SA387 GR 22
SA182 GR F22 or SA336 GR F22
SA335 GR P22
b. For additional material requirements,

see UOP Standard Specification 3-12, sections 4 and 5.
c. All pressure containing welds, whether shop or field, are to be fully radiographed.
It is the Contractors/Vessel Fabricators responsibility to ensure that the creep/rupture strength of
the weldments is equivalent to that of the vessels base metal.
Form QUA-04-4
(F-PSD-45)
304-3
304-2 Revamp

RBPC10_PMR
450 PPH
Date : 2011-01-27
Item No.
BH-500
Service
Regeneration Heater
Status
New (Replacement)
Dimension, mm
24" OD x 2920 mm L
1.8 / 1.8
Rating, kW
143.2
Location
Deck 6
Support Type
Trunnion
Yes
Reference Drawing

No
Insulation
Yes
No
Heat Tracing
No
Specific Notes
The existing
Regeneration
Heater
is being
replaced
with
a new piece
of equipment.
Contractor
shall verify
that the
structural
and
mechanical
condition
of theProper
existing 15. New insulation for the Regeneration Heater and outlet piping must be
1.
installed in place after installation of the heater is complete.
shutdown
of the support
Regeneration
Heater mustare
be satisfactory
implementedfor
before
any work
started.
vessel(s),
and foundation
erection
and iscontinuing
operation
at the revamp
design
conditions.
1. The
existing Regeneration
Heater
is installed
vertically in an upflow arrangement and is
2.
Contractor
verify
the existing
dimensions
supported
off theshall
side of
the existing
structure
near Deckin7.field.
The new Regeneration Heater will
be installed in the same location as the existing equipment.
3.
Power control panel will be supplied with the heater, and shall be installed in MCC
room.
FollowingHeater
are the
estimated
and weight
of the
2. The
Regeneration
is powered
by size
the MCC.
Make sure
thatpanel.
power to the heater is
turned off at the power source.
A. Dimension : 1220 mm H x 914 mm W x 300 mm D
3. The connections for the existing skin thermocouples TXE-374A/B must be disconnected and
preserved
for reinstallation
B. Weight
: 130 kg with the new TXEs. The existingTXE-374A/B are welded to the
heater bundle and will be demolished with the heater bundle.
4. The power cable connecting the existing heater bundle to the existing power controller JY/
JC-478 must be disconnected and removed. The existing JY/JC-478 is located in the MCC.
The existing JY/JC-478 and power cable is to be demolished and replaced with a new power
controller and power cable.
5. The existing heater bundle is to be unbolted at the body flange and removed from the heater
shell. The existing heater bundle is to be demolished and replaced with a new heater bundle.
6. The existing 16 regeneration gas inlet line `54' runs vertically up the side of the structure
and is welded to the heater shell using a 16 x 18 concentric reducer. The new heater bundle
will be longer than the existing heater bundle, and the heater outlet elevation is fixed. The 16
inlet piping must be cut upstream of the reducer at an elevation that will accommodate the
increased length of the new heater bundle while keeping the heater outlet at the same
elevation. The diameter of the new heater shell is increasing from 18 to 24 so the length of
the transition from the 16 pipe to the 24 shell must be considered when determining where to
cut the inlet piping.
7. The existing AT-383 in line `20' is to be demolished and replaced with a new AT-383.
8. The existing TE-372 and TE-373 in line `20' must be removed and preserved for
reinstallation with the new line `20'.
9. The existing 16 regeneration gas outlet line `20' is welded to the heater shell using a 16 x
18 concentric reducer and connected to the Regeneration Tower by a flange. Line `20' must
be unbolted from the Regeneration Tower and removed together with the heater shell. The
heater shell and outlet line `20' are to be demolished.
10. The new heater outlet line `20' should be welded to the new heater shell prior to installation
of the heater in the structure.
11. The diameter of the new Regeneration Heater shell and new outlet piping are both 24.
The new heater shell and outlet piping are to be installed in the same location as the existing
equipment.
12. The closure weld between the new heater shell and the existing inlet piping must be done
in place.
13. The inlet nozzle on the Regeneration Tower is being replaced with a new 24 nozzle so no
transitions are required in the new outlet piping. The new heater outlet piping will bolt directly to
the new Regeneration Tower inlet nozzle.
14. The new heater bundle (including TXEs pre-installed by the equipment vendor), heater
power cable, existing TXE connections, and AT-383 must be installed after installation of the
new heater shell and outlet piping is complete.
Page 3
Rev.0

RBPC10_PMR
450 PPH
Date : 2011-01-27
Item No.
BH-502
Service
Air Heater
Status
New (Replacement)
Dimension, mm
1780 W x 350 D x 3600 H
0.6 / 0.6
Rating, kW
44
Location
Deck 6
Support Type
Trunnion
Yes
Reference Drawing

No
Insulation
Yes
No
Heat Tracing
No
Specific Notes
The existing
Air Heater
is being
replaced
with a new
of equipment.
Proper
of
1.
Contractor
shall verify
that
the structural
andpiece
mechanical
condition
of shutdown
the existing
the Air
Heater must
be implemented
beforeare
anysatisfactory
work is started.
vessel(s),
support
and foundation
for erection and continuing
1. The existing Air Heater has three (3) shells and is located on Decks 6 and 7 in the existing
2.
Contractor
shall
verify the
dimensions
in field.
structure.
The new
Air Heater
alsoexisting
has three
(3) shells and
will be installed in the same
location as the existing equipment.
3.
Power control panel will be supplied with the heater, and shall be installed in MCC
room.
Following
are the
size and
of the
panel.
2. The
Air Heater
is powered
byestimated
the MCC. Make
sureweight
that power
to the
heater is turned off at
the power source.
A. Dimension : 1220 mm H x 914 mm W x 300 mm D
3. The connections for the existing skin thermocouples TXE-359A/B, TXE-360A/B and
B. Weight
: 130
kg
TXE-377A/B
must
be disconnected
and preserved for reinstallation with the new TXEs. The
existingTXEs are welded to the heater bundles and will be demolished with the heater
bundles.
4. The power cables connecting the existing heater bundles to the existing power controller
JY/JC-479 must be disconnected and removed. The existing JY/JC-479 is located in the MCC.
The existing JY/JC-479 and power cables are to be demolished and replaced with a new
power controller and power cables.
5. The existing heater bundles are to be unbolted at the body flanges and removed from the
heater shells. The existing heater bundles are to be demolished and replaced with new heater
bundles.
6. The existing 1 air inlet line `53' must be disconnected and removed. Line '53' is welded to
the heater shell using a reducer. Line `53' is to be demolished and replaced with a new 1
line. The new heater inlet nozzle is flanged so the new line will also be flanged.
7. The existing TE-375 and TE-376 must be removed and preserved for installation with the
new heater outlet line `57'.
8. The existing 3 air outlet line `57' is welded to the heater shell using a 3 x 4 concentric
reducer and connected to the Regeneration Tower inlet nozzle by a flange. Line `57' must be
unbolted from the Regneration Tower and removed together with the heater shell. The heater
shells and outlet line `57' are to be demolished.
9. The new heater outlet line `57' should be welded to the new heater shell prior to installation
of the heater in the structure.
10. Due to overhead height limitations inside the structure, the new heater bundles (including
TXEs pre-installed by the equipment vendor) must be installed in the heater shells pirior to
installation of the heater in the structure.
11. The diameter of the new Air Heater shells is increasing from 4 to 6. The new heater
shells and outlet piping are to be installed as close to the same location as the existing
equipment as possible. Due to the increase in size and limited space around the equipment,
the exact location of the heater and routing of the outlet piping may be slightly different to
accommodate the larger heater.
12. The new heater power cables, existing TXE connections, and TE-375/376 must be
installed after installation of the new heater shells and outlet piping is complete.
13. New insulation for the Air Heater and outlet piping must be installed in place after
installation of the heater is complete.
Page 4
Rev.0

RBPC10_PMR
450 PPH
Date : 2011-01-27
Item No.
FA-510
Service
Regeneration Tower
Status
Modification
Dimension, mm
1370 ID x 5210 TT
Reference Drawing

Rating, kW
N/A
Location
On Tabletop
Support Type
Skirt
No

Yes
Insulation
Yes
No
Heat Tracing
No
Specific Notes
The
Tower
is being
in place
to replace
various
nozzles of
andthe
internals.
1. Regeneration
Contractor shall
verify
that modified
the structural
and
mechanical
condition
existing
For details
of thesupport
modifications,
see Projectare
Specification
953469-305.
vessel(s),
and foundation
satisfactory
for erection and continuing

Contractor shall verify the existing dimensions in field.
1. The Regeneration Tower is located on Decks 5, 6, 7 and 8 of the existing structure.
2.
2. All catalyst must be removed from the Regeneration Tower and stored in a safe location.
3.
Refer to 953469-305 for detailed field modification and installation.
3. The existing thermocouples TE-369A-M, TE_454A_D and TE-455A-C and their wiring
connections must be disconnected and removed. The existing TEs and wiring connections are
to be demolished and replaced with new TEs and wiring connections.
4. The six (6) existing 2 catalyst transfer lines `9-1' through `9-6' must be disconnected at the
flanges. Lines `9-1' through `9-6' must also be disconnected from the Disengaging Hopper
before being removed. Lines `9-1' through `9-6' are to be demolished and replaced with new
2 lines. The two 1 ball valves attached to one of the existing catalyst transfer lines must be
preserved and reinstalled with the new lines.
5. The existing 16 regeneration gas outlet line `54' must be unbolted at the flange.
6. The existing 16 regeneration gas inlet line `20' must be unbolted at the flange. Line `20' is
welded to the Regeneration Heater and is to be removed and demolished along with the
existing Regeneration Heater shell. Line `20' is to be replaced with a new 24 line.
7. The existing 3 air inlet line `57' must be unbolted at the flange. Line `57' is welded to the
Air Heater and is to be removed and demolished along with the existing Air Heater shell. Line
`57' is to be replaced with a new 3 line.
8. The existing 2 catalyst outlet line `11' must be disconnected at the flange. Line `11' must
also be disconnected from the Flow Control Hopper before being removed.. Line `11' is to be
preserved for reinstallation.
9. The existing 16 chlorination gas outlet line `58' must be unbolted at the flange.
10. With the above piping and instrument connections removed, the top and bottom head
body flanges can be unbolted and removed for access into the vessel to perform the
modification work. The top head and attached inner screen can be pulled straight up and
removed through the tope of the structure.
11. Replacement/installation of nozzles and modification of internals shall be in accordance
with UOP Project Specification 953469-305.
Page 5
Rev.0
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC
953469 305
REV
DATE
BY
30APR10 PHS
APVD
REV
DATE
VGS
REGENERATORS (REVAMP)
Platforming Process Unit

Atmospheric CCR Regenerator Section (U-300)
Description
Sheet
Drawing List
References
General Notes
Screen Notes
45
Field Modification and Installation
6-7
Screen Notes for Final Field Inspection
Thermocouple Installation Notes
Screen Straightness Requirement
10
Other specifications
referenced in this
specification:
Form QUA-04-3
UOP Standard Specification: 3-13-4 , 9-11- 6

UOP Standard Drawing:
UOP Project Specification:
305-0
305-312-8
SHEET
BY
APVD
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC
953469 305
REV
DATE
BY
30APR10 PHS
APVD
REV
DATE
SHEET
BY
APVD
VGS
Drawing List
Regeneration Tower Item No.:
FA 510
For Regeneration Tower Details, see the following UOP drawings:
Drawing No
Revision Number
Drawing Title
953469-305-01-A1
Rev. 0
Sectional Elevation
953469-305-02-A1
Rev. 0
Screen Details
953469-305-03-A1
Rev. 0
Miscellaneous Details Sheet No 1
953469-305-04-A1
Rev. 0
953469-305-05-A1
Rev. 0
References:
As no drawings were submitted to UOP from Pemex, UOP relied heavily on the dimensions on the original
UOP Sch. A drawings. The customer shall confirm that the dimensions shown on UOP Drawing 953469305-01-A1, 953469-305-02-A1, 953469-305-03-A1, 953469-305-04-A1 and 953469-305-05-A1 do match
the existing dimensions.
The original UOP Sch. A drawings used as references are:
C26750-F Revision 0 dated December 13, 1991
Form QUA-04-3
305-0
305-312-8
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC
953469 305
REV
DATE
BY
30APR10 PHS
APVD
REV
SHEET
BY
APVD
DATE
VGS
General Notes
1. For supplemental pressure vessel codes and site information pertaining to the final mechanical design
of the Regeneration Tower, see Basic Engineering Design Questionnaire.
1.
Internals using profile wire construction shall be supplied by:

Suppliers/Manufacturers (Recommended)
Johnson Screens
www.johnsonscreens.com
Nagaoka International Corporation
www.nagaokajapan.co.jp
Costacurta S.p.A. VICO
www.costacurta.it
3. UOP inspection of inner and outer profile wire screens is recommended.

4. Shipping details, e.g., shipping skid design, shipping support of internals, etc., shall be mutually
developed by vessel fabricator, screen fabricator and general contractor.
5. All flanges intended for use with spiral wound gaskets shall have a flange surface finish of 125 Ra
minimum to 250 Ra maximum. Finishes shall be judged by visual comparison with surface finish
roughness standards conforming to ASME B46.1. It is the Contractor's/Purchaser's responsibility both
to comply with the above finish requirements and to assure that such flange finishes be protected from
damage during shipping, storage, and installation.
6. Customer to confirm the outer screen adequacy for continuing service and should repair screen if
necessary.
7. Any paint on or in contact with the Inconel material shall be approved by the Inconel manufacturer
8. All dimensions are in millimeters unless noted.
Form QUA-04-3
305-0
305-312-8
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC
953469 305
REV
DATE
BY
30APR10 PHS
APVD
REV
DATE
SHEET
BY
APVD
VGS
Screen Notes for Fabrication

The following notes pertain to the fabrication, inspection, and shipment of the profile wire inner screen.
1. Basket screen slot width and tolerances:
Manufacturing standard for inner screen:
Average slot width
Standard deviation
Maximum slot width
Minimum slot width
=
=
=
=
0.483 0.076
0.0635 Max
0.686
0.280
The above measurements are to be checked with feeler gage only.

2. Longitudinal profile wire waviness:
The surface of the profile wire between two adjacent support rods must be essentially flat. Any
deviation from a flat surface shall average 0.25 or less with a maximum deviation of 0.38.
3. The maximum width of any vertical (longitudinal) joint on the screens shall be 10 unless specified
otherwise in UOP Drawing 953469-305-02-A1. The maximum number of longitudinal seams is shown
on UOP Drawing 953469-305-02-A1.
4. The maximum width of any circumferential joint on the screens shall be 10 unless specified otherwise in
UOP Drawing 953469-305-02-A1. The maximum number of circumferential seams is shown on UOP
Drawing 953469-305-02-A1.
5. Weld material on the screen surface shall be ground smooth but not flush, so that weld shall have a
small, smooth contour on top. Do not grind profile wire when performing weld finishing operation. No
sharp edges or burrs will be permitted.
6. Inner screen straightness over the entire length shall not deviate by more than 6. (Figure 1, Sheet 9).
7. Unless otherwise noted screen basket dimension tolerance:
0-300
300-1525
1525-3050
3050 & Over
Form QUA-04-3
1.6
3.2
6.4
12.8
305-0
305-312-8
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC
953469 305
REV
DATE
BY
30APR10 PHS
APVD
REV
DATE
SHEET
BY
APVD
VGS
8. Inspect the inner screen while at the screen fabricator's shop using the criteria outlined in notes 1
through 7.
f.
Plumbness:
0.8 maximum per 300, with a 25 maximum for lengths greater than 9750.
9. The screen surface shall be free of marks or indentations caused by clamps or other handling devices.
10. Adequate support of screen shall be provided by the screen vendor so that the dimensions and
tolerances, as shown, are maintained after shipping.
11. All dimensions are in millimeters unless noted.
Form QUA-04-3
305-0
305-312-8
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC
953469 305
REV
DATE
BY
30APR10 PHS
APVD
REV
DATE
SHEET
BY
APVD
VGS
Field Modification and Installation

The following notes are specific to the field installation of the inner and outer screens.
1. Remove the top head with existing inner screen and chlorination gas outlet pipe attached.
2. Cut and remove the outer screen for access to interzonal baffle and Burn Zone Inlet baffle.
a. Replace Burn zone inlet, Nozzle D.
b. Install new pressure taps(2), Nozzle P.
c. Complete baffle work.
3. Remove the inner screen up to and including the fit up ring. Remove all existing TI support
brackets from the chlorination outlet pipe as shown on Detail A04 on UOP Drawing 953469-30504-A1.
4. Remove Chlorination zone outlet piping below the tangent line per UOP Drawing 953469-305-04A1.
5. Measure as-built TI lengths (to each TI locations weld beads) relative to the highest TI in the
respective sheaths.
6. Prepare/Cut flow gaps in 1 TI guide Pipe at weld beads per UOP Drawing 953469-305-05-A1
7. Install 2 upper TI guides (3 pipe) directly beneath Nozzles H and H1 (180 apart) per Detail A05
on UOP Drawing 953469-305-04-A1.
8. Nest the screens vertically by placing the new inner screen inside the outer screen. Locate the
screens relative to each other both vertically and horizontally in accordance with the details shown
on UOP Drawing 953469-305-02-A1. The procedure on Sheet 8 describes the method used to
dimensionally check the annulus created by the nested screens
9. After satisfying the requirements of Sheet 8, the respective items are to be permanently match
marked
10. Temporarily weld new inner screen to weld ring (without lower cone blankoff).
11. Trial fit the TIs into TI guides to insure weld beads fall in flow openings. Mark elevation of the
top of TI guides on inner screen.
12. Install Burn zones prepared TI Guide with deflectors/installation plates per UOP Drawing
953469-305-05-A1
13. Install Chlorination zones prepared TI Guide with deflectors/installation plates per UOP Drawing
953469-305-05-A1
14. Grind temporary welds and cut off inner screen with installed TI guides, remove screen from below
head to allow for installation of Chlorination zone outlet piping
15. Install Chlorination outlet piping with weld ring and the transition zone baffle, keeping the notches
in line with the upper guide pipes and Nozzles H and H1.
16. For the final installation of the inner screen, install without lower cone blankoff. Ensure screen TI
guides are directly inline with the upper guide pipes.
17. Install transition zone baffle notch fillers ensuring that:
a. The notch filler containing the pipe sleeve is installed below Nozzle H for passage of the
Chlorination zone TI guide, per Detail E04 on UOP Drawing 953469-305-04-A1.
b. The notch filler without the pipe sleeve is installed below Nozzle H1 for zone separation
per View D04-D04 on UOP Drawing 953469-305-04-A1.
18. Install the Burn zone TI sheath containing TI locations L1-L9 through Nozzle H1 passing it
through the upper guide and the screen TI guide.
19. Install the Chlorination zone TI sheath containing TI locations L10-L18 through Nozzle H passing
it through the upper guide and the screen TI guide.
Form QUA-04-3
305-0
305-312-8
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC
953469 305
REV
DATE
BY
30APR10 PHS
APVD
REV
DATE
SHEET
BY
APVD
VGS
20. Install lower cone blankoff, by passing Drying zone TI location (L18) through blankoff hole and
welding cone to the Inner Screen lower blankoff per Detail H05 on UOP Drawing 953469-305-05A1
21. Install outer screen ensuring match marks are orientated to allow head to be at the final desired
orientation in reference to the inner screens match marks
22. Install head with new inner screen, TIs, and Chlorination zone outlet piping in accordance with
match marks.
Form QUA-04-3
305-0
305-312-8
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC
953469 305
REV
DATE
BY
30APR10 PHS
APVD
REV
SHEET
BY
APVD
DATE
VGS
Screen Notes for Final Field Inspection

The following notes are specific to the field inspection of the installed inner and outer screens. All other
inspection requirements are as outlined for fabricator shop inspection on Sheets 4 and 5.
The following procedure describes the method used to dimensionally check the annulus created by the
installed screens.
A. One set of measurements shall be taken and recorded at the top of a tier, the bottom of a tier, and
approximately every 300 between the top set and the bottom set. The elevation of each set of
measurements relative to a fixed point shall also be recorded.
B. Step A. above shall be repeated to every tier on the screens.
C. One set of measurements shall consist of the following:
1. Eight measurements at equal increments around the circumference of the basket, i.e. one
measurement every 45 .
2. One additional measurement at each vertical seam.
D. The annular space tolerance of each reading in a horizontal plane shall be 7% of the average of the
eight readings in that plane.
E. A tolerance of 10 shall be allowed in comparing the average annulus of any horizontal plane to the
nominal annulus for that plane. The nominal annulus shall be calculated using the plane elevation
recorded in Step A. above and the screen dimensions shown on UOP Drawing 953469-305-02-A1.
F. The difference of horizontal plane average for two adjacent planes shall be no more than 4.8.
G. All dimensions are in millimeters unless noted.
Form QUA-04-3
305-0
305-312-8
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC
953469 305
REV
DATE
BY
30APR10 PHS
APVD
REV
DATE
SHEET
BY
APVD
VGS
Thermocouple Installation Notes

Refer to UOP Project Specification 953469-640 and 953469-606 for thermocouple assembly details.
For multipoint thermocouple assemblies in the Burn, Transition and Chlorination Zones that enter through
the top head, one thermocouple casing opening is required for each temperature measurement point in the
Burn, and Chlorination Zones. One thermocouple casing opening is required for the three temperature
measurement points in the Transition zone. The thermocouple casing openings are to be positioned
according to the details shown on UOP Drawing 953469-305-05-A1. To facilitate installation, it is
recommended that the weld between the thermocouple deflector plate and the casing is made prior to
installation and the attachment weld between the deflector plate and inner screen be performed during the
thermocouple installation.
Form QUA-04-3
305-0
305-312-8
Revision
Indication
UOP LLC
Form QUA-04-3
305-0
953469 305
REV
0
30APR10 PHS
DATE
BY
APVD
VGS
REV
DATE
305-312-8
SHEET
10
BY
APVD
953469
305
05 A1
100
100
34.5
95
95
THERMOCOUPLE
BY OTHERS
3 x 1 1/2 SCH 40
REDUCER
(NOTE 2)
T
THERMOCOUPLE
T
BY OTHERS
(NOTE 2)
90
90
TANGENT LINE
40
85
MEASUREMENT
TYP
5
LOCATION (TYP)
3 PLATE
SCREEN
MR
22
TYP
20
3
TYP
80
TYP
80
35
TI GUIDE PIPE
(NOTE 6)
1 1/2 SCH 40
80
MR
INNER
TYP
50 DIA HOLE
TYP
REDUCER
TEMPERATURE
REGENERATOR ID
4 x 3 SCH 40
80
D05
T
NOTE 3
D05
85
TYP
TYP
MAX
25
DETAIL J05
34.5
BAFFLE
65
SECURE CHLORINATION ZONE TI GUIDE
1 1/2 TI GUIDE PIPE
(LOCATIONS L10 TO L18) TO HIGHEST SUPPORT ROD

INLINE WITH THE ORIENTATION OF NOZZLE H
3
3
THERMOCOUPLE
BY OTHERS
(NOTE 2)
THERMOCOUPLE
60
BY OTHERS
(NOTE 2)
80
NOTE 4
TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT
55
TRANSISTION AND CHLORINATION ZONE TI GUIDE PIPE PRE-CUT LENGTH: 4700
1000
50
TOP OF TRANSITION
55
F05
60
F05
T
65
70
50 DIA HOLE
BURN ZONE TI GUIDE PIPE PRE-CUT LENGTH: 3050
TYP
5
LOCATIONS L10, L1 1, L12
3 PLATE
INNER
TYP
TYP
TI GUIDE PIPE
3 SCH 40
13-REQUIRED TOTAL
35
(NOTE 6)
5 PLATE
75
TYP
LOCATIONS L1 THROUGH L9 AND L13 THROUGH L16, SEE NOTE 2.
70
SCREEN
50
26
TYP
80
45
45
MR
5 PLATE
13-REQUIRED TOTAL
DWG 953469-305-04-A1
T
SECTION D05-D05
DETAIL C05
30
75
VIEW F05-F05
1-REQUIRED TOTAL
TRANSITION BAFFLE EXCLUDED FOR CLARITY
3 x 1 1/2 SCH 40
DETAIL E05
REDUCER
40
40
DWG 953469-305-04-A1
TOP OF INNER SCREEN
WELD RING
LOCATIONS L10 THROUGH L12 (TRANSITIONAL ZONE), SEE NOTE 2.
NOTES:
953469-305-01-A1, 953469-305-02-A1,
35
35
THERMOCOUPLE
DETAIL A05
THERMOCOUPLE
BY OTHERS
BY OTHERS
(NOTE 2)
(NOTE 2)
2.

DWG 953469-305-04-A1
30
30
3.
FLOW OPENING SHALL BE 10mm LARGER THAT SPACE
MEASUREMENT
LOCATION L9
TEMPERATURE
(NOTE 5)
6
MAX
25
25
(NOTE 5)
BETWEEN WELD BEADS, WITH MINIMUM OPENING OF 75mm,

TEMPERATURE
953469-305-03-A1 AND 953469-305-04-A1
CENTERED ABOUT THE WELD BEADS
MEASUREMENT
LOCATION L17
4.
OPENING OF 320mm, CENTERED ABOUT THE WELD BEADS
DETAIL B05
5.
3 THK x 80 x 80 PLATE
20
25
OF THE THREE TRANSITION ZONE WELD BEADS, WITH MINIMUM
300 RAD
DWG 953469-305-04-A1
FLOW OPENING SHALL BE 10mm LARGER THAN THE SPAN
TRIM TI GUIDE PIPE AS REQUIRED IN FIELD

TO MEET DIMENSION
1 - REQUIRED TOTAL
DIMENSIONS INCLUDES ADDITIONAL LENGTH FOR FIT-UP.
6.
WELD AFTER FLOW OPENINGS HAVE BEEN CUT IN TI GUIDE
20
TRIM AS REQUIRED IN FIELD TO MEET DIMENSIONAL
29 ID THERMOWELL GUIDE
TOLERANCES AS SHOWN IN DETAIL G05 AND DETAIL H05.
HOLE AT SAME ORIENTATION

AS NOZZLE H
REV
DFTR
CKR
DATE
APVD
REV
DFTR
CKR
APVD
DATE
UOP LLC
15
15

10
REGENERATION TOWER
DETAIL H05
DWG 953469-305-03-A1
DETAIL G05
10
SHEET NO 3
1-REQUIRED TOTAL

DWG 953469-305-04-A1
PEMEX-REFINACION
LEGEND:
1-REQUIRED TOTAL
EXISTING
NEW/MODIFIED
DFTR
CKR
APVD
PHS
PHS
JRG
DATE
30APR
10
PROJECT
TYPE
953469
305
DWG NO
05 A1
REV
0
0
953469
305
04 A1
100
100
C REGENERATION
TOWER
C REGENERATION
TOWER
95
95
300
300
(REF)
(REF)
PIPE NOTCH FILLER

T
H1
BELOW NOZZLE H1
DETAIL E04
FACE OF FLANGE
90
90
750 I D SHELL (REF)
DETAIL A05
DWG 953469-305-05
750 I D SHELL (REF)
85
(REF)
80
29
4.5
80
RA
D
(REF)
6 (REF)
1380
457 OD
85
480 OD x 430 ID
5 PLATE
25 THK RING
5 PLATE
6
(REF)
TANGENT LINE
DETAIL B05
75
75
225
DWG 953469-305-05-A1
WELD LINE
PIPE NOTCH FILLER
BELOW NOZZLE H
457 OD x 406 OD REDUCER
DETAIL E04
30
585
6 THK
70
70
INNER SCREEN AND UPPER
3
T
DETAIL J05
(REF)
DWG 953469-
BLANKOFF JUNCTION
NOTE 2
406 OD
VIEW D04-D04
65
65
305-05-A1
DETAIL C05
DWG 953469-305-05-A1
THERMOCOUPLE LOCATION
REMOVE EXISTING TI SUPPORT
BRACKETS FROM CHLORINATION
OUTLET PIPE
60
60
THERMOCOUPLE ASSEMBLY DETAIL
BY THERMOCOUPLE ASSEMBLY PROVIDER.
C REGENERATION
3533
TOWER
55
DETAIL G05
55
DWG 953469-305-05-A1
DETAIL E05
DWG 953469-305-05-A1
50
50
DETAIL C05
DWG 953469-305-05-A1
45
45
300
DETAIL C04
16
40
40
DETAIL B04
D
THERMOCOUPLE LOCATIONS
A
5 RA
D
NOTES:
289.
EF
)
4.5
29
D04
(R
20
5
D04
35

953469-305-01-A1, 953469-305-02-A1,
DETAIL A04
30
953469-305-03-A1, AND 953469-305-05-A1
30
DWG 953469-305-01-A1
2.

25
25
TYP
TYP
3
T
8-3 THICK GUIDE VANES

EQUALLY SPACED
20
20
3 PLATE CYLINDER
~
REV
2 SCH 40 PIPE SLEEVE
DFTR
CKR
ONLY ON ONE PIPE NOTCH FILLER

TO BE INSTALLED INLINE WITH NOZZLE H
REV
DFTR
CKR
APVD
DATE
15
UOP LLC
15
DATE
APVD
RA
D
DWG 953469-305-01-A1
35
5 PLATE (TYP)
589 OD

1.5 TO 3 CLR FOR ASSEMBLY

AND THERMAL EXPANSION
3 PLATE
REGENERATION TOWER
+0
25
-6
10
10
SHEET NO 2
DETAIL C04
PEMEX-REFINACION
DETAIL E04
LEGEND:
EXISTING
DFTR
CKR
APVD
PHS
PHS
JRG
NEW/MODIFIED
DATE
30APR
10
PROJECT
TYPE
953469
305
DWG NO
04 A1
REV
0
0
953469
305
03 A1
100
100
BAFFLE
95
95
WELD LINE
3 THICK PLATE
(6-REQUIRED PER NOZZLE,
3 AT TOP AND 3 AT
90
BOTTOM OF BAFFLE)
75
205
100
25
90
50
175
BOTTOM OF BAFFLE
85
75 CL
1220 OD
85
TYP
200
610
50 CL
6 SCH 40 PIPE
80
80
C OF NOZZLE
SYMMETRICAL ABOUT
(REF)
STIFFENER
EQUALLY SPACED
(4-REQUIRED)
830 I D
75
75
DETAIL B03
3 PLATE
135
SECTION G03-G03
915 I D SHELL
3 PLATE CONE
370
(REF)
70
70
DETAIL D03
65
65
DETAIL H05
DWG 953469-305-05-A1
DETAIL A03
13 RAD
DWG 953469-305-01-A1
60
60
TYP
LAP JOINT
FLANGE
DETAIL D03
TYP
125-250
55
55
250-500
T
50
50
DETAIL H03
45
1350
45
3-6 x 75 x 34 GUIDE LUGS
VIEW E03-E03
EQUIALLY SPACED (CUT TO
830 ID
ACHIEVE CLEARANCE SHOWN)

6 SCH 40 PIPE
40
40
E03
REMOVE SHARP EDGES
CLEARANCE
100
(TYP)
3 COLD
ROUND CORNERS &
~
35
25
2 CL
35
30
30
3 PLATE
4-3 THICK GUIDES
BAFFLE
45
EQUALLY SPACED
CREGENERATOR
NOTES:
TOWER
G03
25
G03
25
D
75
6 SCH 40 PIPE
SLOT PIPE FOR GUIDES
FFL
BA
IR
585
E03
953469-305-01-A1, 953469-305-02-A1,
45
953469-305-04-A1, AND 953469-305-05-A1.
2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS NOTED
20
EL
20
DETAIL H03
RA
DWG 953469-305-01-A1
68
DETAIL B03
(R
EF
)
SH
DETAIL C03
15
REV
DFTR
CKR
DATE
APVD
REV
DFTR
CKR
APVD
DATE
15
UOP LLC
(REF)
(T
REGENERATION TOWER
10
10
SHEET NO 1
SECTION F03-F03

DWG 953469-305-01-A1

PEMEX-REFINACION
LEGEND:

EXISTING
NEW/MODIFIED
DFTR
CKR
APVD
PHS
PHS
JRG
DATE
30APR
10
PROJECT
TYPE
953469
305
DWG NO
03 A1
REV
0
0
953469
305
02 A1
100
100
95
95
90
90
~
~
85
85
REMOVE EXISTING
INTERZONAL BAFFLE
TANGENT LINE
BLANKOFF
GRIND TO WITHIN 3mm OF VESSEL WALL
225
80
BEFORE WELDING
735 ID X 785 OD
SCREEN OPENING
SEE NOTE 4
X 25 RING
DWG 953469-305-01-A1
65
565 I R
REF
60
687 OD
INNER SCREEN BLANKOFF
6 PLATE
+0
-5
SEE NOTE 6
15
60
C 12 DIA HOLES
12-REQUIRED,
EQUALLY SPACED
WIDTH OF
VERTICAL
INNER
150
(NOTE 5)
70
10 MAX
WIDTH OF
65
NOTES:
953469-305-01-A1, 953469-305-03-A1, 953469-305-04-A1, AND
2.
NO. 1 10 PROFILE WIRE WELDED TO SUPPORT RODS

2.67 x 19 ON 25 CENTERS WITH AVERAGE
SLOT OPENING 0.483+0.051.
-
55
3.
75
4.
150
5240
(NOTE 2)
5.
OFFSET VERTICAL SPLICE SHALL BE A

MINIMUM OF 150 FROM TIER TO TIER.
6.
3 CONTINUOUS PLATE
TEMPLATE OF ACTUAL OUTER SCREEN BASKET MUST

BE MADE PRIOR TO FABRICATION OR INSTALLATION
TYP
OF RING TO INSURE PROPER CLEARANCE AS SHOWN.
7.
45
8. WELD MATERIAL ON THE SCREEN SURFACE SHALL BE GROUND
SHELL
SMOOTH BUT NOT FLUSH SO THAT WELD SHALL HAVE A SMALL,
40
SMOOTH CONTOUR ON TOP. DO NOT GRIND PROFILE WIRE WHEN
OUTER
687 OD SCREEN
FOR DESIGN DATA AND ADDITIONAL NOTES

SEE UOP DRAWING 953469-305-01-A1.
INSIDE
SCREEN
PERFORMING WELD FINISHING OPERATION. NO SHARP EDGES OR
635 RAD
BURRS WILL BE PERMITTED.

9.
TIG WELDING REQUIRED ON THE CATALYST SIDE OF PROFILE WIRE

SPLICE WELD. INNER SCREEN TO BE ASSEMBLED USING ARGON GAS
DETAIL B02
35
BACKUP SHIELDING ON THE REVERSE SIDE OF THE PROFILE WIRE
DWG 953469-305-01-A1
TYP
10.
G
SUPPORT ROD-TO-SUPPORT ROD SPLICE WELD TO BE DONE WITHOUT

SPLICE STRIPS. DOUBLE BEVEL GROOVE WELD WITH GRIND OUT OF
THE ROOT PASS IS PREFERRED. THE ENTIRE CIRCUMFERENCE OF
5 PLATE
BOTTOM CONE
30
SUPPORT ROD SHOULD BE INSPECTED FOR WELD TACK POINTS,
255
SUPPORT
30
GRINDING MARKS, OR IMPERFECTIONS. LOCATIONS WHERE THESE
ROD
ARE FOUND SHOULD BE SMOOTHED TO REMOVE ANY STRESS RISER
687 OD
POINTS. ANY UNDERCUTTING IN THE WELD JOINTS ARE TO BE FILLED

TIGHT WIRE
INNER SCREEN BLANKOFF
COMPLETELY WITH NO SHARP BREAKPOINTS ON THE EDGE OF THE
NOTE 10
TO WIRE SPLICE
SUPPORT ROD.
35
SPLICE WELD.
ASME SFA 5.1 1 CLASSIFICATION ENiCrFe-3 ELECTRODE
50
THICKNESS
40
SPECIFICATION 953469-305.
SCREEN
FOR ADDITIONAL SCREEN AND ANNULUS

REQUIREMENTS SEE UOP PROJECT
SCREEN ELEVATION
TY
(NOTE 1 1)
INNER PROFILE WIRE SCREEN CONSTRUCTION :
FULL RADIOGRAPH.
50
45
4625 +
6
- SCREEN OPENING
TIER JOINT
60
953469-305-05-A1
~
TYP TIER TO
SEAM (TYP)
25-150
OF VERTICAL
SEAMS PER TIER
SCREEN
50
NUMBER
OF TIERS
SEAM (TYP)
PLATE
55
MAXIMUM NUMBER
HORIZONTAL
6 CONTINUOUS
TYP
MAXIMUM
BLANKOFF
300
558mm BELOW EXISTING BAFFLE
6 PLATE
NEW INTERZONAL BAFFLE TO BE
70
762 OD
75
10 MAX
TIER (TYP)
75
80
25
25
1 1.
DETAIL A02
NOTE 8
FULL BACK WELDING REQUIRED AT HORIZONTAL SEAMS. GRIND

SUPPORT ROD AS REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE.
AND NOTE 9
DWG 953469-305-01-A1
12.
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS NOTED
INNER SCREEN
20
20
VERTICAL SPLICE DETAIL
REV
DFTR
CKR
DATE
APVD
15
REV
CKR
DFTR
APVD
DATE
15
UOP LLC
REGENERATION TOWER
SCREEN DETAILS
10
10

LEGEND:
EXISTING
PEMEX-REFINACION
NEW/MODIFIED

DFTR
CKR
APVD
PHS
PHS
JRG
DATE
30APR
10
PROJECT
TYPE
953469
305
DWG NO
02 A1
REV
0
0
953469
305
01
A1
100
100
95
95
TANGENT LINE
5210
90
305-02-A1
80
DWG 953469-
DETAIL B02
85
NOTE 10
F03
(REF)
85
305-03-A1
1780
DWG 953469-
3608
NOTE 12
90
(REF)
80
F03
(REF)
915 I D SHELL
1370 I D SHELL (REF)
750 I D SHELL (REF)
(REF)
H1
60
H2
300
65
4193
TOWER
70
75
SECTIONAL ELEVATION
C REGENERATION
75
NOTE 5
60
55
305-03-A1
DWG 953469-
DETAILS C03
305-03-A1
E
NOTE 12
65
50
45
1450
304
DWG 953469-
TANGENT LINE
45
305-04-A1
DWG 953469-
DETAIL A04
305-04-A1
DWG 953469-
DETAIL B04
305-02-A1
DWG 953469-
DETAIL A02
TO BE WITHIN 1 0 (NOTE 7)
OF INNER AND OUTER SCREENS
45
BETWEEN START OF OPEN AREA
INSTALLED RELATIVE ELEVATION
305-05-A1
DWG 953469-
DETAIL A05
50
45
DETAILS A03
55
70
40
40
35
NOZZLES AND MANWAYS

N0.
CODE:
ASME SECTION VIII, DIVISION 1
SPECIFICATION:
UOP STANDARD SPECIFICATION 3-13,
MARK
REQD.
NOTES:
PIPE
SIZE
1. WORK THIS DRAWING WITH UOP DRAWINGS 953469-305-02-A1,
12.
REMARKS
SERVICE
SCHEDULE
953469-305-03-A1, 953469-305-04-A1, AND 953469-305-05-A1.
MATERIAL FOR PRESSURE TAP NOZZLES

P AND REGENERATOR INLET NOZZLE D
35
SHALL BE ASME SB-167-600 AND

2. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR NOZZLE REINFORCEMENT
UOP PROJECT SPECIFICATION 953469-305

DESIGN DATA
CATALYST IN
SB-564-600. WELDING ELECTRODE SHALL

WHICH WILL ACCOMMODATE MOMENTS AND FORCES PRODUCED
DESIGN CONDITIONS:
1
16 OD
BE AWS A5.1 1 OR ASME SFA-5.1 1
REGENERATION GAS OUT
BY CONNECTING PIPING.
UPPER AREA: .35 kg/cm (g) @ 565 C
CLASS ENiCrFe-3. BOLTING SHALL BE
LOWER AREA: .70 kg/cm (g) @ 565 C
18 OD
CHLORINATION GAS OUT
30
OPERATING CONDITIONS:
INTERNAL: EXISTING
ASME CLASS 300

D
24 OD
REGENERATION GAS IN
MR
(NOTE 12 AND NOTE 14)
2 C
MDMT:
RADIOGRAPH:
25
MR
POSTWELD HEAT TREAT:
CHLORINATION GAS IN
16 OD
CATALYST OUT
AIR INLET
NONE
H, H1
THERMOWELL
NUTS. GASKET SHALL BE SPIRAL WOUND
SUPPORT AND FOUNDATION ARE SATISFACTORY FOR CONTINUING
PER ASME B16.20 WITH WINDINGS TO MATCH
OPERATION AT THE REVAMP DESIGN CONDITIONS AND UNDER
VESSEL FLANGE MATERIAL WITH GRAFOIL
CURRENT APPLICABLE CODES AND PRACTICES.
FILLER. GASKET INNER RING METALLURGY
30
H2
STAINLESS STEEL CARBON CONTENT SHALL BE 0.04% MINIMUM ON
THERMOWELL
13.
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
EXISTING
ZONE SEPARATION BAFFLE AND IN-LINE
(NOT REQD FOR NEW SERVICE)
PIPE:
B167-600
TUBE:
B163-600
FITTINGS:
B366 CLASS WPNCI
FORGINGS:
B564-600
EXTERNAL BOLTS:
A193 B16
PURGE
PRESSURE TAP
ARE AT THE SAME ORIENTATION AND THE RELATIVE ELEVATION
BLANKOFF
REQUIREMENT SHOWN IN SECTIONAL ELEVATION IS MET.
7. INNER SCREEN SHALL BE INSTALLED SUCH THAT MATCH MARKS
PRESSURE TAP
FITTINGS:
A403 GR. WP316 OR GR. WP304
FORGINGS:
A182 GR. F316 OR GR. F304
LEGEND:
EXISTING
NEW/MODIFIED
8.
REV
DFTR
PRESSURE TAP
ASME CLASS 300 (NOTE 12)
REV
DFTR
CKR
DATE
APVD
15
UOP LLC
REGENERATION TOWER
DWG 953469-305-03-A1
TEMPLATE OF ACTUAL OUTER SCREEN BASKET MUST BE MADE
SECTIONAL ELEVATION
10
WHERE "MR" IS SPECIFIED IT INDICATES THAT IT IS THE
RATING: AS NOTED
MANUFACTURERS AND/OR CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO MEET
FLANGE FINISH: RAISED FACE WITH A 125Ra-250Ra SURFACE FINISH IN ACCORDANCE
THE REQUIREMENT IN COMPLIANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES AND
WITH ASME B46.1
40
9.
DATE
APVD
INCONEL COMPOENTS.
PROPER CLEARANCE AS SHOWN.

2
CKR
PRIOR TO FABRICATION OR INSTALLATION OF RING TO INSURE
(NOT REQD FOR NEW SERVICE)
A194 GR. 4
P
20
14. SEE LAP JOINT DETAIL - DETAIL H03

BLANKOFF EXISTING NOZZLE
A312 GR. TP316 OR GR. TP304
MIX STAINLESS STEEL COMPONENTS WITH
15
PIPE:
METALLURGY OF THE INTERNALS. DO NOT
10
A240 TYPE 316 OR TYPE 304
MAINTAIN CONSISTENCY THROUGHOUT THE
6. CUSTOMER/CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY EXISTING DIMENSIONS IN
INSPECTION
FIELD
B168-600 HOT ROLLED AND ANNEALED
PLATE:
INLET NOZZLES D & E , SYMETRICAL ABOUT THE
METALLURGY FOR INTERNALS:

SHELL AND PLATE:
ALTERNATE METALLURGY FOR INTERNALS:
5. NOZZLES P SHALL BE ORIENTED 90 AWAY FROM
BASE METAL HEAT ANALYSIS AND WELDING CONSUMABLES.

1
25
4. NOZZLE PROJECTIONS SHALL BE DETERMINED BY CONTRACTOR,
BLANKOFF EXISTING NOZZLE
MATERIAL AS PER: ASTM SPECIFICATION

:
UNLESS NOTED
NUTS:
AND MECHANICAL CONDITION OF THE EXISTING VESSEL(S),
SHALL MATCH VESSEL FLANGE MATERIAL.
MATERIAL
20
ASTM A193 GR. B16 WITH ASTM A194 GR. 4
3. CUSTOMER/CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THAT THE STRUCTURAL
NOZZLES NOT LISTED IN THE NOZZLE DESIGNATION TABLE ARE
NOT REQUIRED BY UOP AND HAVE NOT BEEN REVIEWED

PEMEX-REFINACION
10. MODIFY PIPE SLEEVE AND SKIRT AS NECESSARY TO
UNLESS NOTED.
CLEAR INSULATION ON NOZZLE D .
STANDARDS INCLUDING ANY ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED

IN THE UOP STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS.

1 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS NOTED

SCALE: NONE
DFTR
CKR
APVD
PHS
PHS
JRG
DATE
30APR
10
PROJECT
TYPE
953469
305
DWG NO
01
A1
REV
0
0

RBPC10_PMR
450 PPH
Date : 2011-01-27
Item No.
FA-512
Service
Lift Engager No. 1
Status
New (Replacement)
Dimension, mm
610 OD x 1070 TT
0.8 / 1.0
Rating, kW
N/A
Location
Grade
Support Type
Spring Hangers with Lugs
Yes
Reference Drawing

No
Insulation
No
Open Guards, Shields or Railing
Heat Tracing
No
Specific Notes
The
Lift Engager
No. that
1 is being
replaced with
new piece ofcondition
equipment.
Contractor
shall verify
the structural
and amechanical
of the existing
1. existing
vessel(s), support and foundation are satisfactory for erection and continuing
1. The existing Lift Engager No. 1 is located at grade underneath the Reactors and hangs from
spring supports connected to steel immediately above Lift Engager No.1. The new Lift Engager
shallinverify
the existing
dimensions
field.
2. 1Contractor
No.
will be installed
the same
location as
the existinginequipment.
3.
Contractor shall ensure to provide clearance and access for 55 gallon drum.
2. All catalyst must be removed from the existing Lift Engager No. 1 and stored in a safe
location.
3. The existing 3 catalyst inlet piping line `1' and ball valves XV-13, XV-14, and XV-16 must be
disconnected and removed. Line `1' and the ball valves are flanged. Line `1' and the ball valves
must be preserved and reinstalled with the new Lift Engager No. 1.
4. The existing 1 catalyst lift line `2' must be disconnected. Line `2' must also be
disconnected at Disengaging Hopper before being removed. A Dur O Lok coupling is present
on line `2' that must be undone before removal of line. Line `2' is to be demolished and
replaced with a new 2 line.
5. The existing 1 lift gas line `3' must be disconnected. Line `3' is flanged. Line `3' must also
be disconnected at the Lift Gas Blower before being removed. Line `3' is to be demolished and
replaced with a new 2 line. Existing FT-306 is to be demolished and replaced with a new FT.
The new Line `3' includes a new branch line that connects to the side of Lift Engager No. 1. A
new flow element FE-1001 and a new control valve FV-1001 must be installed in the new line.
6. Both 1 ball valves attached to the existing Lift Engager No. 1 must be preserved and
reinstalled on the new Lift Engager No. 1.
7. The existing Lift Engager No. 1 may be lowered with a chain secured to the steel above the
vessel and the lifting lugs on the vessel. The existing Lift Engager No. 1 is to be demolished.
8. The new Lift Engager No. 1 is to be installed in the same location as the existing equipment
using the same support points. The existing Lift Engager No. 1 has a diameter of 508 mm and
the new Lift Engager No. 1 has a diameter of 610 mm. This should be noted to support the new
Lift Engager No. 1 properly with the existing spring supports. Rods may need to be adjusted.
9. The new Lift Engager No. 1 will be supplied with the catalyst inlet nozzle in the correct
position so that the existing line `1' can be reinstalled without modification.
Page 6
Rev.0

RBPC10_PMR
450 PPH
Date : 2011-01-27
Item No.
FA-513
Service
Disengaging Hopper
Status
New (Replacement)
Dimension, mm
1500 ID x 4588 TT
6.2 / 11.5
Rating, kW
N/A
Location
Deck 10 & 11
Support Type
Lugs
Yes
Reference Drawing

No
Insulation
Yes, Bottom and Lower Shell
No
Heat Tracing
Yes, Bottom and Lower Shell
Specific Notes
The
Disengaging
Hopper
being
replaced
with
a new piececondition
of equipment.
1. existing
Contractor
shall verify
that isthe
structural
and
mechanical
of the existing
1. The existing Disengaging Hopper is located on a platform on Deck 10 in the existing

structure. The new Disengaging Hopper will be relocated to Deck 11 in the new structure.
2.
2. All catalyst must be removed from the existing Disengaging Hopper and stored in a safe
location.
3. The existing nuclear level source and detector LE/LY-349 must be removed and disposed of
in a safe manner. This instrument is powered by the Lock Hopper Control System. The power
must be turned off at the source.
4. The existing PSV-3325 and associated piping must be disconnected and demolished.
5. The existing PDT-354 and associated impulse tubing must be disconnected and demolished.
6. The existing 1 catalyst inlet line `2' (from Lift Engager No. 1) is connected by Dur O Lok
Coupling. Line `2' must also be disconnected at Lift Engager No. 1 before being removed. Line
`2'is to be demolished and replaced with a new 2 line.
7. The six (6) existing 2catalyst transfer lines `9-1' through `9-6' must be disconnected at the
flanges. Lines `9-1' through `9-6' must also be disconnected from the top head of the
Regeneration Tower before being removed. Lines `9-1' through `9-6' are to be demolished and
replaced with new 2 lines. The two 1 ball valves attached to one of the existing catalyst
transfer lines must be preserved and reinstalled with the new lines.
8. The existing 4 elutriation gas outlet line `10' must be disconnected. Line `10' is flanged. Line
`10' must also be disconnected at the Dust Collector before being removed. Line `10' is to be
demolished and replaced with a new 6 line.
9. The existing 3 elutriation gas inlet line `22' must be disconnected. Line `22' is flanged. Line
`22' must also be disconnected from the Lift Gas Blowers before being removed. Line `22' is to
be demolished and replaced with a new 3 line.
10. The existing Disengaging Hopper is to be removed and demolished. The existing
Disengaging Hopper is located near the top of the existing structure and may need to be
removed and lowered with a crane.
11. The new Disengaging Hopper is to be installed on Deck 11 in the new structure. Note that
most of the equipment connected to the new Disengaging Hopper will also be located in the
new structure so installation of new piping will be within the new structure. However, the new
catalyst transfer lines `9-1' through `9-6' must be installed from the bottom of the Disengaging
Hopper in the new structure to the top head of the Regeneration Tower in the existing structure.
12. Installation of steam heat tracing and insulation will be done in the field.
Page 7
Rev.0

RBPC10_PMR
450 PPH
Date : 2011-01-27
Item No.
FA-515
Service
Surge Hopper
Status
Modification
Dimension, mm
1900 ID x 2950 TT
9.9 / 10.3
Rating, kW
N/A
Location
Deck 3 & 4
Support Type
Skirt
No
Reference Drawing

Yes
Insulation
No
No
Heat Tracing
No
Specific Notes
The Surge
Hopper
is being
place to replace
the internal condition
cooling water
panel
coils
Contractor
shall
verifymodified
that theinstructural
and mechanical
of the
existing
1.
and catalyst
inletsupport
baffle. For
of the modifications,
seefor
Project
Specification
953469-301,
vessel(s),
anddetails
foundation
are satisfactory
erection
and continuing
Sheets 9 and 10.
Contractor
shallisverify
theonexisting
field. structure.
2.
1. The
Surge Hopper
located
Decks 3dimensions
and 4 of the in
existing
3.
Modifications Required:
2. All catalyst must be removed from the Surge Hopper and stored in a safe location.
A. Remove existing flow dampener and replace with new flow dampener.
3. The nuclear level source and detector LE-340 must be removed and stored in a safe
location.
This instrument
powered by
thereplace
Lock Hopper
Control
System, the power must be
B. Remove
existingis platecoils
and
with new
platecoils.
turned off at the source.
4.
Contractor shall ensure to meet the cooling water inlet & outlet nozzle width with
4. The
inlet linepanel
`11', catalyst
outlet line `12', catalyst addition line `13', cooling water
thecatalyst
new revised
coil width.
inlet line `14' and cooling water outlet line `38' should be disconnected or isolated so that
nothing can accidentally enter the vessel while work is being performed inside. These lines are
For details, refer to UOP specification 953469-301, sheet 9 and 10.
5.
all flanged.
5. The existing relief valve PSV-2255 and associated inlet and outlet line `36' must be
disconnected and removed. Line `36' is flanged. The existing PSV-2255 and line `36' are to be
demolished and replaced with a new PSV and inlet/outlet piping.
6. The ten (10) existing panel coils inside the vessel must be removed. The existing panel coils
are to be demolished and replaced with new panel coils. Each panel coil has an upper and
lower pipe nipple on the front end that is socket welded to a water inlet and outlet nozzle on
the side of the vessel, as well as a support bracket on the back end that is bolted to a lug on
the vessel wall. The support brackets must be unbolted from the support lugs and the pipe
nipples must be cut off. The panel coils can be removed through the vessel manway.
7. The existing catalyst inlet baffle located inside the top head must be removed and
demolished. The baffle is welded and must be cut out.
8. The new catalyst inlet baffle must be welded to the inside of the top head.
9. The ten (10) new panel coils must be installed inside the vessel. The new panel coils will
use the existing water inlet and outlet piping connections. The back end of the panel coils will
be bolted to the existing support lugs on the vessel wall. The new panel coils can be brought
into the vessel through the manway.
Page 8
Rev.0

RBPC10_PMR
450 PPH
Date : 2011-01-27
Item No.
FA-517
Service
Lift Engager No. 2
Status
New (Replacement)
Dimension, mm
610 OD x 1070 TT
1.3 / 1.5
Rating, kW
N/A
Location
Grade
Support Type
Spring Hangers with Lugs
Yes
Reference Drawing

No
Insulation
No
Open Guards, Shields or Railing
Heat Tracing
No
Specific Notes
The
Lift Engager
No. that
2 is being
replaced with
new piece ofcondition
equipment.
1. existing
Contractor
shall verify
the structural
and amechanical
of the existing
1. The existing Lift Engager No. 2 is located at grade in the existing structure and hangs from
spring supports connected to Deck 1. The new Lift Engager No. 2 will be installed in the same
2. Contractor
shall verify
the existing dimensions in field.
location
as the existing
equipment.
3.
Contractor shall ensure to provide clearance and access for 55 gallon drum.
2. All catalyst must be removed from the existing Lift Engager No. 2 and stored in a safe
location.
3. The existing 3 catalyst inlet line `5' and ball valves XV-53, XV-54, and XV-56 must be
disconnected and removed. Line `5' and the ball valves are flanged. Line `5' and the ball
valves must be preserved and reinstalled with the new Lift Engager No. 2.
4. The existing 1 catalyst lift line `6' must be disconnected. Line `6' must also be
disconnected at the Reduction Zone on top of the Reactor before being removed. A Dur O Lok
coupling is present on line `6' that must be undone before removal of line. Line `6' is to be
5. The existing 1 lift gas line `7' must be disconnected. Line `7' is flanged. Line `7' is to be
preserved for use with the new Lift Engager No. 2. The existing FO-14, FT-346 and PSV-2258
(w/piping) are to be demolished and replaced with new instruments and a new relief valve (w/
piping).
6. LSH-433 connected to the existing Lift Engager No. 2 is to be demolished.
7. The existing Lift Engager No. 2 is to be removed and demolished. The existing Lift Engager
No. 2 may be lowered with a chain secured to the steel above the vessel and the lifting lugs on
the vessel.
8. The new Lift Engager No. 2 is to be installed in the same location as the existing equipment
using the same support points. The existing Lift Engager No. 2 has a diameter of 508 mm and
the new Lift Engager No. 2 has a diameter of 610 mm. This should be noted to support the
new Lift Engager No. 2 properly with the existing spring supports. Rods may need to be
adjusted.
9. The new Lift Engager No. 2 will be supplied with the catalyst inlet nozzle in the correct
position so that the existing line `5' can be reinstalled without modification.
Page 9
Rev.0

RBPC10_PMR
450 PPH
Date : 2011-01-27
Item No.
GB-503
Service
Lift Gas Blower
Status
New (Replacing)
Reference Drawing
Dimension, mm
0.4 / 0.4
Rating, kW
15 (Existing) & 55 (New)
Location
Grade
Support Type
Base
Yes

No
Insulation
No
No
Heat Tracing
No
Specific Notes
1.
New blower and motor will be located in new structure
2.
Contractor shall install new blower and motor (supplied by UOP) in new
structure
3.
Contractor shall install new pipe from the new dust collector to the inlet of the lift
gas blower. Contractor shall install new outlet piping including four main
branches. The first branch is to the lift gas spillback cooler which will be
adjacent to the lift gas blower in the new structure. The second and third branch
will go to the preheat gas heater and the disengaging hopper, which are located
at a higher elevation in the new structure. The fourth branch will tie into the
exisiting piping in the exisiting structure and go to the lift engager in the reactor
structure.
4.
Contractor shall connect electrical cables (see electrical bid instructions for
details).
Existing Blower
Page 10
Rev.0

RBPC10_PMR
450 PPH
Date : 2011-01-27
Item No.
GB-505
Service
Regeneration Blower
Status
New (Replacing)
Dimension, mm
1600 W x 4100 L x 2400 H (Existing)
Reference Drawing

Rating, kW
37/18.6 (Existing) & 125 w/VFD (New)
Location
Grade
Support Type
Baseplate
Yes

No
Insulation
Yes (by Blower Supplier)
No
Heat Tracing
No
Specific Notes
1.
2.
Contractor shall verify that the structural and mechanical condition of the existing
equipment, support and foundation are satisfactory for erection and continuing
Existing Blower
3.
Contractor shall disconnect existing piping connections and electrical cables (see
electrical bid instructions for details).
4.
Contractor shall demolish existing blower, motor, and accessories leaving the
existing foundation.
5.
Contractor shall determine suitability of existing foundation for new equipment.

New blower and motor will be located in same location as the existing equipment.
6.
Contractor shall install new blower and motor (supplied by UOP)
7.
Contractor may need to modify existing inlet/outlet piping to accommodate the

dimensions of the new blower
8.
details).
Page 11
Rev.0

RBPC10_PMR
450 PPH
Date : 2011-01-27
Item No.
GB-506
Service
Status
New (Replacing)
Dimension, mm
1200 W x 4200 L x 1800 H (Existing)
Reference Drawing

Rating, kW
15 (Existing) & 93 (New)
Location
Grade
Support Type
Baseplate
Yes

No
Insulation
No
No
Heat Tracing
No
Specific Notes
1.
2.
Contractor shall verify that the structural and mechanical condition of the existing
equipment, support and foundation are satisfactory for erection and continuing
Existing Blower
3.
Contractor shall disconnect existing piping connections and electrical cables (see
electrical bid instructions for details).
4.
5.

New blower and motor will be located in same location as the existing equipment.
6.
7.
Contractor may need to modify existing outlet piping to accommodate the

dimensions of the new blower
8.
details).
Page 12
Rev.0

RBPC10_PMR
450 PPH
Date : 2011-01-27
Item No.
GB-507
Service
Instrument Air Compressor Package
Status
New (Added)
Reference Drawing
Dimension, mm
Rating, kW
Location
Grade
Support Type
Baseplate
No

No
Insulation
No
No
Heat Tracing
No
Specific Notes
1.
2.
Contractor shall verify that the structural and mechanical condition of the
existing equipment, support and foundation are satisfactory for erection and
continuing operation at the revamp design conditions.
3.
Contractor shall disconnect existing piping connections and electrical cables

(see electrical bid instructions for details).
4.
5.

New blower and motor will be located in same location as the existing
equipment.
6.
7.
Contractor will need to install new outlet piping to the air dryer which will be
located on approximately deck 5 of the new structure
8.
details).
Page 13
Rev.0

RBPC10_PMR
450 PPH
Date : 2011-01-27
Item No.
GA-513A/B
Service
Organic Chloride Injection Pumps
Status
New (Replacing)
Reference Drawing
Dimension, mm
Rating, kW
0.75 each
Location
Grade
Support Type
Baseplate
Yes
No
No
Insulation
No
No
Heat Tracing
No
Specific Notes
1.
2.
Contractor shall verify that the structural and mechanical condition of the
existing equipment, support and foundation are satisfactory for erection and
continuing operation at the revamp design conditions.
3.
Contractor shall disconnect existing tubing connections and electrical cables

(see electrical bid instructions for details).
4.
Contractor shall demolish existing pumps, motors, and accessories leaving the
5.

New pumps and motors will be located in same location as the existing
equipment.
Contractor shall install new pumps and motors (supplied by UOP)
6.
7.
Contractor shall install new outlet tubing and may need to modify existing
inlet/outlet tubing to accommodate the dimensions of the new pumps
8.
details).
Page 14
Rev.0

RBPC10_PMR
450 PPH
Date : 2011-01-27
Item No.
ME-502
Service
Air Drier Package
Status
New (Added)
Dimension, mm
2000 W x 1400 D x 2900 H
0.5 / 0.7
Flowrate, Nm3/h
196
Reference Drawing
Location
Support Type
Legs
No

No
Insulation
No
No
Heat Tracing
No
Specific Notes
The
Drier is a shall
pieceverify
of packaged
equipment
of two dessicant
chambers,
Contractor
that the
structuralconsisting
and mechanical
condition
of the existing
1. Air
interconnecting
and
valving,
prefilter,are
after
filter, and control
panel. and
The continuing
existing Air Drier
vessel(s), piping
support
and
foundation
satisfactory
for erection
is being replaced with a new piece of packaged equipment consisting of similar components.
Contractor
the existing
in field.
2. The
1.
existing Airshall
Drierverify
is located
at grade dimensions
next to the existing
structure. The new Air Drier will
be located at grade.
3.
2. All dessicant must be removed from the existing Air Drier and disposed of in a safe manner.
3. The existing 2 air inlet line `41' must be disconnected. Line `41' must also be disconnected
from the Instrument Air Compressor before being removed. Line `41' is flanged. Line `41' is to
be demolished and replaced with a new 2 line.
4. The existing 2 air outlet line and instrument air inlet line `64' must be disconnected. Line
`64' is flanged. Line `64' is to be partially demolished immediately downstream of the existing
Air Drier and replaced with a new 2 line routed to the new Air Drier.
5. The existing 1 air outlet line `53' must be disconnected. Line `53' must also be
disconnected from the Air Heater before being removed. Line `53' is flanged at the Air Drier
outlet and welded at the Air Heater inlet. Line `53' is to be demolished and replaced with a new
1 line. As part of the replacement of Line `53', portions of the 1' lines from XV-71 and to
FT-482 must be modified to connect to the new line `53'.
6. The existing 1 air outlet line `63' must be disconnected. Line `63' is flanged. Line `63' is to
be partially demolished and replaced with a new 1 line that connects to the new line `53'.
7. The existing Air Drier is to be removed and demolished.
8. The new Air Drier is to be installed on Deck 5 in the new structure. For connection to the Air
Heater, new piping will have to be routed from the new structure to the existing structure. For
connection to existing piping tie-ins, new piping must be routed to grade.
Page 15
Rev.0

RBPC10_PMR
450 PPH
Date : 2011-01-27
Item No.
ME-503
Service
Dust Collector
Status
New (Replacement)
Dimension, mm
920 OD x 4500 H
1.0 / 1.0
Gas Quantity, N3/h
800
Location
Deck 1 & 2
Support Type
Lugs
Yes
Reference Drawing

No
Insulation
No
No
Heat Tracing
No
Specific Notes
The existing
Dustshall
Collector
beingthe
replaced
withand
a new
piece of equipment.
1.
Contractor
verifyis that
structural
mechanical
condition of the existing
1. The existing Dust Collector is located on Decks 1 and 2 in the existing structure. The new
Dust Collector will be relocated to Decks 2 and 3 in the new structure.
2. Contractor shall verify the existing dimensions in field.
2. All catalyst must be removed from the existing Dust Collector and stored in a safe location.
3.
3. The existing 4 gas inlet line `10' must be disconnected. Line `10' must also be disconnected
from the Disengaging Hopper before being removed. Line `10' is flanged. Line `10' is to be
4. The existing 4 gas outlet line `32' must be disconnected. Line `32' must also be
disconnected from the Lift Gas Blowers before being removed. Line `32' is flanged. Line `32' is
to be demolished and replaced with a new 6 line.
5. The existing nitrogen purge/make-up line `66' must be disconnected and removed. Line
`66' is flanged. Line `66' is to be demolished and replaced with a new line. The existing
HS-453 is to be demolished and replaced with a new HS. The existing PDV-354 must be
demolished and replaced with a new PDV.
6. The existing 2 catalyst dust removal line `67' must be disconnected and removed. Line `67'
is flanged. Line `67' is to be demolished and replaced with a new 2 line. The existing XV-82A/
B are to be demolished and replaced with new XVs.
7. The existing impulse tubing between the Dust Collector and PDSH-386 and the associated
PDI must be disconnected and removed. The impulse tubing, PDSH-386 and the PDI are to be
demolished and replaced with new tubing and instruments.
8. The filter bags must be removed from the inside of the Dust Collector and demolished.
9. The existing Dust Collector is to be removed and demolished. The existing Dust Collector is
very large and will be difficult to remove in one piece because of surrounding piping and
structural steel. The vessel may need to be cut in place and removed in pieces to get it out of
the existing structure.
10. The new Dust Collector is to be installed on Decks 2 and 3 in the new structure. Note that
the equipment connected to the new Dust Collector will also be located in the new structure so
installation of new piping will be within the new structure.
Page 16
Rev.0

RBPC10_PMR
450 PPH
Date : 2011-01-27
Item No.
ME-504
Service
Status
New (Replacement)
Dimension, mm
300 ID x 1500 H
0.3 / 0.3
Rating, kg/hr
339
Location
Grade
Support Type
Legs
Yes
Reference Drawing

No
Insulation
No
No
Heat Tracing
No
Specific Notes
The existing
Booster
Coalescer
being replaced
with a new piece
of equipment.
Contractor
shallGas
verify
that theisstructural
and mechanical
condition
of the existing
1.
1. The existing Booster Gas Coalescer is located on Deck 1 in the existing structure. The new
Booster Gas Coalescer will be relocated to Deck 1 in the new structure.
2. Contractor shall verify the existing dimensions in field.
2. The existing 1 booster gas inlet line `52' must be disconnected. Line `52' is flanged.
3.
3. The existing 1 drain line `51' must be disconnected. Line `51' is flanged. The existing
FO-24 is to be demolished and replaced with a new FO.
4. The existing 1 booster gas outlet line `50' must be disconnected. Line `50' is flanged. The
existing 4 x 1800 mm steam jacketing on line `50' must be demolished and replaced with a
new 4 x 3500 mm steam jacket.
5. The coalescing element(s) must be removed from inside the Booster Gas Coalescer and
demolished.
6. The existing Booster Gas Coalescer is to be removed and demolished.
7. The new Booster Gas Coalescer is to be installed on Deck 1 in the new structure.
8. Because the new Booster Gas Coalescer is located in the new structure, new piping must
be installed to connect the new equipment to the existing lines `50', `51' and `52'. The existing
lines do not need to be modified. Because the existing piping is flanged, the new piping can be
routed to connect to the existing flanges for each line.
Page 17
Rev.0
PEMEX REFINACION
INVITATION TO BID
SECTION 4
CUSTOMER SPECIFICATIONS

PROYECTO:

NORMAS O REGULACIONES TCNICAS EXTRANJERAS:
LIST OF PROJECT PEMEX REFINACION

SPECIFICATIONS
(SPECIFICATIONS ATTACHED SEPARATELY)
Es aquel documento normativo emitido por un organismo de Normalizacin Extranjero y que es de

aplicacin exclusiva en su pas de origen y que Pemex Refinacin puede utilizarlo como referencia de
conformidad con lo dispuesto en el artculo 28, fraccin IV del reglamento de la Ley Federal sobre
Metrologa y Normalizacin.
NORMAS Y ESPECIFICACIONES GENERALES.

Como mnimo, pero sin ser limitante, las normatividades a emplear durante el proyecto son las siguientes:
A. NORMAS OFICIALES MEXICANAS (NOM)

IDENTIFICACIN
NOM-005-STPS-1998
NOM-011-STPS-2001
NOM-015-STPS-2001
NOM-017-STPS-2008
NOM-020-STPS-2002
NOM-021-STPS-1994
NOM-022-STPS-2008
NOM-024-STPS-2001
NOM-025-STPS-2008
NOM-026-STPS-2008
NOM-027-STPS-2008
NOM-031-STPS-2011
NOM-100-STPS-1994
NOM-113-STPS-2009
NOM-115-STPS-2009
NOM-001-SEDE-2005
PEC-NOM-001-SEDE-2005
NOM-007-ENER-2004
NOM-014-ENER-2004.
NOM-016-ENER-2010
NOM-017-ENER/SCFI-2005
NOM-003-SCFI-2000
NOM-063-SCFI-2001
NOM-064-SCFI-2000
DESCRIPCIN
Condiciones de seguridad e higiene en los centros de trabajo para el manejo, transporte y
almacenamiento de sustancias qumicas peligrosas.
Relativa a las condiciones de seguridad e higiene en los centros de trabajo donde se
genere ruido.
Relativa a la exposicin laboral de las condiciones trmicas elevadas o abatidas en los
centros de trabajo.
Relativa a la seleccin y manejo de equipo de proteccin personal para los trabajadores en
los centros de trabajo.
Recipientes sujetos a presin y calderas-funcionamiento-condiciones de seguridad.
Relativa a los requerimientos y caractersticas de los informes de los riesgos de trabajo que
ocurran, para integrar las estadsticas.
Electricidad esttica en los centros de trabajo condiciones de seguridad e higiene.
Relativa a las condiciones de seguridad e higiene en los centros de trabajo en donde se
generen vibraciones.
Condiciones de iluminacin en los centros de trabajo.
Colores y seales de seguridad e higiene e identificacin de riesgos de productos
conducidos por tuberas.
Condiciones de seguridad industrial en los trabajos de soldadura y corte.
Construccin-condiciones de seguridad y salud en el trabajo.
Establece las especificaciones de los extintores contra incendio a base de polvo qumico
seco.
Calzado de proteccin.
Especificaciones, mtodos de prueba y clasificacin de los Cascos de proteccin.
Instalaciones Elctricas (Utilizacin)
Procedimiento para evaluacin de la conformidad de la norma oficial mexicana NOM-001SEDE-2005.
Eficiencia energtica para sistemas de alumbrado en edificios no residenciales. (Nota:
aplicar slo para sistemas de control de alumbrado)
Eficiencia energtica de motores de corriente alterna monofsicos, de induccin, tipo jaula
de ardilla, en potencia nominal de 0,180 a 1,500 kW. Lmites, mtodos de prueba y
marcado.
Eficiencia energtica de motores de corriente alterna trifsicos de induccin, tipo jaula de
ardilla, de uso general, en potencia nominal de 0,746 a 343 kW. Lmites, mtodos de
prueba y marcado.
Eficiencia energtica de lmparas fluorescentes compactaslmites y mtodos de prueba.
Productos elctricosespecificaciones de seguridad.
Conductoresrequisitos de seguridad.
Luminarias para uso en interiores y exterioresespecificaciones de seguridad y mtodos de
prueba.
Que establece los lmites mximos permisibles de emisin de gases contaminantes
provenientes del escape de los vehculos automotores en circulacin que usan gasolina
como combustible.

PROYECTO:

IDENTIFICACIN
NOM-008-NUCL-2003
NOM-025/1-NUCL-2000
NOM-025/2-NUCL-1996
NOM-127-SSA1-1994
NOM-230-SSA1-2002
NOM-201-SSA1-2002
DESCRIPCIN
Que establece los niveles mximos permisibles de opacidad del humo proveniente del
escape de vehculos automotores en circulacin que usan diesel o mezclas que incluyan
diesel como combustible
Vehculos en circulacin que usan gas licuado o natural u otros combustibles alternos.
Que establece los lmites mximos permisibles de emisin de ruido provenientes del
escape de los vehculos automotores, motocicletas y triciclos motorizados en circulacin y
su mtodo de medicin.
Que establece los lmites mximos permisibles de emisin de ruido de las fuentes fijas y su
mtodo de medicin.
Control de la contaminacin radioactiva.
Requisitos para equipos de radiografa industrial Parte 1: Requisitos generales.
Requisitos para equipos de radiografa industrial Parte 2: Operacin.
Salud Ambiental. Agua para uso y consumo humano. Lmites permisibles de calidad y
tratamientos a que debe someterse el agua para su potabilizacin.
Salud ambiental. Agua para uso y consumo humano. Requisitos sanitarios que se deben
cumplir en los sistemas de abastecimiento pblicos y privados durante el manejo del agua.
Procedimientos sanitarios para el muestreo
Productos y servicios. Agua y hielo para consumo humano, envasados y a granel,
especificaciones sanitarias.
B. NORMAS MEXICANAS (NMX)

IDENTIFICACIN
NMX-B-482-1991
NMX-C-090-1978
NMX-C-117-1978
NMX-C-155 ONNCCE 2004
DESCRIPCIN
Industria siderrgica-acero estructural-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba.
Industria siderrgica-malla electrosoldada de acero liso o corrugado para refuerzo de
concreto-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba
Capacitacin, calificacin y certificacin de personal de ensayos no destructivos.
Industria de la construccin-agregados-muestreo
Industria de la construccin-cemento hidrulico -mtodo de prueba para la determinacin
de la finura de cementantes hidrulicos mediante la malla 0,045 mm (No. 325)
Industria de la construccin-cementantes hidrulicos- determinacin de la finura de los
cementantes hidrulicos (mtodo de permeabilidad al aire)
Industria de la construccin-cementantes hidrulicos -determinacin de la consistencia
normal.
Industria de la construccin-cementos hidrulicos-determinacin del tiempo de fraguado de
cementantes hidrulicos (mtodo VICAT)
Industria de la construccin-cementos hidrulicos-determinacin de la resistencia a la
compresin de cementantes hidrulicos
Industria de la construccin-cementos hidrulicos-determinacin de la sanidad de
cementantes hidrulicos.
Industria de la construccin -Agregados- Determinacin de partculas ligeras. TII:
BUILDING INDUSTRY - AGGREGATES - DETERMINATION OF LIGHTWEIGHT PIECES
Industria de la construccin -Agregados para concreto -Anlisis granulomtrico-mtodo de
prueba. TII: BUILDING INDUSTRY - AGGREGATES FOR CONCRETE-GRANULOMETRIC
ANALYSIS-METHOD OF TEST
Industria de la construccin -Agregados-Determinacin de impurezas orgnicas en el
agregado fino. BUILDING INDUSTRY - AGGREGATES-DETERMINATION OF ORGANIC
IMPURITIES IN FINE AGGREGATE.
Mtodo de prueba para aditivos expansores y estabilizadores de volumen del concreto.
Industria de la construccin-agregados para concreto hidrulico-especificaciones y mtodos
de prueba.
Aditivos estabilizadores de volumen.
Industria de la construccin-agua para concreto-especificaciones.
Industria de la construccin-concreto-concreto hidrulico industrializado-especificaciones.
Industria de la construccin-concreto hidrulico-determinacin del revenimiento en el
concreto fresco.

PROYECTO:

IDENTIFICACIN
NMX-C-283-1982
NMX-C-305-1980
NMX-CC-9001-IMNC-2008
NMX-EC-17025-IMNC-2006
NMX-J-010/1-ANCE-2010
NMX-J-010-ANCE-2005
NMX-J-019-ANCE-2006
NMX-J-035-ANCE-2001
NMX-J-075/1-ANCE-1994
NMX-J-075/3-ANCE-1994
NMX-J-098-ANCE-1999
NMX-J-109-ANCE-2010
NMX-J-118/1-ANCE-2000
NMX-J-118/2-ANCE-2007
NMX-J-170-ANCE-2002
NMX-J-199-ANCE-2002
NMX-J-294-ANCE-2008
NMX-J-295/1-ANCE-2010
NMX-J-295/2-ANCE-2010
NMX-J-429-ANCE-2002
NMX-J-438-ANCE-2003
NMX-J-451-ANCE-2011
NMX-J-503-ANCE-2005
DESCRIPCIN
Industria de la construccin-agregados-determinacin de la masa especfica y absorcin de
agua del agregado grueso.
Industria de la construccin-agregados-determinacin de la masa especifica y absorcin de
agua del agregado fino-mtodo de prueba
Industria de la construccin - agregados - reduccin de las muestras de agregados
obtenidas en el campo, al tamao requerido para las pruebas. TII:BUILDING INDUSTRY AGGREGATES - REDUCING FIELD SAMPLES OF AGGREGATES FOR TESTING SIZE
Industria de la construccin-cemento hidrulico-determinacin de la reactividad potencial de
los agregados con lcalis de cementantes hidrulicos por medio de barras de mortero.
Industria de la construccin -Aditivos qumicos para concretoespecificaciones, muestreo y
mtodos de ensayo.
Industria de la construccin-agregados para concreto hidrulico-examen petrogrficomtodo de ensayo.
Industria de la construccin-agua para concreto-muestreo.
Industria de la construccin - agua para concreto anlisis
Industria de la construccin- agregados para concreto- descripcin de sus componentes
minerales naturales.
Industria de la construccin-concreto hidrulico para uso estructural.
Industria de la construccin-varilla corrugada de acero proveniente de lingote y palanquilla
para refuerzo de concreto-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba.
Industria de la construccin-cementantes hidrulicos-especificaciones y mtodos de
ensayo.
Sistemas de gestin de la calidad-requisitos.
Requisitos generales para la competencia de los laboratorios de ensayo y de calibracin.
Productos elctricosconductoresconductores con aislamiento termoplstico a base de
policlorur de vinilo con medidas internacionales-especificaciones.
Conductores-conductores con aislamiento termoplstico para instalaciones hasta 600 V.
Especificaciones.
Iluminacin-lmparas-lmparas incandescentes de filamento metlico para alumbrado
general-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba.
Conductoresalambres de cobre semiduro para usos elctricosespecificaciones.
Aparatos elctricos-Maquinas rotatorias-Parte 1: Motores de induccin de corriente alterna
del tipo rotor en cortocircuito en potencias de 0.062 a 373 Kw. Especificaciones.
Aparatos elctricos-Maquinas rotatorias-Parte 3: Mtodos de prueba para motores de
induccin de corriente alterna, del tipo de rotor en cortocircuito, en potencias desde 0.062
Kw.
Sistemas elctricos de potenciasuministrotensiones elctricas normalizadas.
Transformadores de corriente-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba
Productos elctricos-Tableros de alumbrado y distribucin en baja tensinespecificaciones
y mtodos de prueba.
Tableros-Tableros de distribucin de fuerza en baja tensinespecificaciones y mtodos de
prueba.
Conectadores-Conectadores de tipo compresin para lneas areas-especificaciones y
mtodos de prueba.
Terminales para cable aislado con pantalla para uso interior y exterior, 2.5 Kv a 230 Kv en
corriente alternaespecificaciones y mtodos de prueba.
Conductores-resistencia de aislamientomtodo de prueba.
Iluminacinlmparas fluorescentes para alumbrado generalespecificaciones y mtodos
de prueba.
Iluminacin-lmparas fluorescentes de doble base para alumbrado generalespecificaciones y mtodos de prueba.
Conductores-alambres, cables y cordones con aislamiento de PVC 80C, 90C y 105C,
para equipos elctricos-especificaciones.
Conductores-cables con aislamiento de policloruro de vinilo, 75 C y 90 C para alambrado
de tableros-especificaciones.
Conductores-conductores con aislamiento termfijo-especificaciones.
Iluminacin-balastros para lmparas de descarga de alta intensidad y lmparas de vapor de

PROYECTO:

IDENTIFICACIN
NMX-J-519-ANCE-2006
NMX-J-549-ANCE-2005
NMX-W-144-1996
NMX-W-147-1996
DESCRIPCIN
sodio de baja presin-especificaciones.
Conectadores-conectadores sellados-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba.
sistema de proteccin contra tormentas elctricas especificaciones, materiales y mtodos
de medicin
Escaleras metlicas porttiles-recomendaciones para seleccin, uso y cuidado.
Escaleras metlicas porttiles-informacin de seguridad.
C. NORMAS DE REFERENCIA (NRF).

IDENTIFICACIN
NRF-004-PEMEX-2003
NRF-006-PEMEX-2011
NRF-009-PEMEX-2004
NRF-010-PEMEX-2004
NRF-028-PEMEX-2004
NRF-027-PEMEX-2001
NRF-032-PEMEX-2005
NRF-034-PEMEX-2004
NRF-035-PEMEX-2005
NRF-036-PEMEX-2003
NRF-046-PEMEX-2003
NRF-048-PEMEX-2007
NRF-051-PEMEX-2006
NRF-053-PEMEX-2006
NRF-065-PEMEX-2006
NRF-070-PEMEX-2004
NRF-091-PEMEX-2007
NRF-095-PEMEX-2004
NRF-115-PEMEX-2006
NRF-125-PEMEX-2005
NRF-137-PEMEX-2006
NRF-138-PEMEX-2006
NRF-139-PEMEX-2006
NRF-140-PEMEX-2005
NRF-146-PEMEX-2011
NRF-147-PEMEX-2006
NRF-148-PEMEX-2005
NRF-149-PEMEX-2005
NRF-150-PEMEX-2005
NRF-152-PEMEX-2006
NRF-159-PEMEX-2006
NRF-160-PEMEX-2007
NRF-162-PEMEX-2006
NRF-163-PEMEX-2006
NRF-164-PEMEX-2006
NRF-168-PEMEX-2006
DESCRIPCIN
Proteccin con recubrimientos anticorrosivos a instalaciones superficiales de ductos.
Ropa de trabajo para trabajadores de Petrleos Mexicanos y Organismos Subsidiarios
Identificacin de productos transportados por tuberas o contenidos en tanques de
almacenamiento.
Espaciamientos mnimos y criterios para la distribucin de instalaciones industriales en
centros de trabajos de Petrleos Mexicanos y Organismos Subsidiarios.
Diseo y construccin de recipientes a presin.
Esprragos y tornillos de acero de aleacin y acero inoxidable para servicios de alta y baja
temperatura.
Sistemas de tuberas en plantas industriales-diseo y especificaciones de materiales.
Aislamiento trmico para altas temperaturas, en equipos, recipientes y tubera superficial.
Sistemas de tuberas en plantas industriales. Instalacin y pruebas.
Clasificacin de reas peligrosas y seleccin de equipo elctrico.
Protocolos de comunicacin en sistemas digitales de monitoreo y control.
Diseo de instalaciones elctricas en plantas industriales.
Sistemas de aire acondicionado.
Sistemas de proteccin anticorrosiva a base de recubrimientos para instalaciones
superficiales.
Recubrimientos A Base de Concreto A Prueba de Fuego en Estructuras y Soportes de
Equipos
Sistema de proteccin a tierra para instalaciones petroleras.
Grupo generador (planta de emergencia).
Motores elctricos.
Mangueras para servicio de contraincendio.
Sistemas fijos contra incendio cmaras de espuma.
Diseo de estructuras de acero.
Diseo de Estructuras de concreto
Soportes de concreto para tubera.
Sistemas de drenajes.
Tablero de distribucin en media tensin.
Apartarrayos tipo estacin.
Instrumentos de medicin para temperatura.
Secadores de aire para instrumentos.
Pruebas hidrostticas de tuberas y equipos.
Actuadores para vlvulas.
Cimentacin de estructuras y equipo.
Demoliciones y desmantelamientos.
Placas de orificio concntricas.
Vlvulas de control con actuador tipo neumtico.
Manmetros.
Bancos de resistencia.

PROYECTO:

D. ESPECIFICACIONES DE PEMEX
IDENTIFICACIN
3.243.01 (1976)
3.301.01 (1988)
800-18540-DE-SISOPA-001
DESCRIPCIN
ESCALERAS MARINAS Y RECTAS.
EMBALAJE Y MARCADO PARA EMBARQUE DE EQUIPOS Y MATERIALES.
DISPOSICIONES ESPECFICAS DE SISOPA PARA EL USO DE EQUIPOS DE
IZAJE (GRAS Y TORRES).
800-18540-DE-SISOPA-002
DISPOSICIONES ESPECFICAS DE SISOPA PARA TRABAJOS EN ALTURA.
800-80000-DCSIPA-L-001
LINEAMIENTOS PARA LA REALIZACIN DE OPERACIONES PELIGROSAS.
800-80000-DCSIPA-L-002
LINEAMIENTOS PARA EL CONTROL DE ACCESO Y CIRCULACIN DE

VEHCULOS AUTOMOTORES Y VEHCULOS PESADOS EN LOS CENTROS DE
TRABAJO.
CME-004 REV. 1
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA RECEPCIN DE MOTORES ELCTRICOS.
CME-010 REV. 3
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA PRUEBAS DE CAMPO PARA LA RECEPCIN DE

CABLES AISLADOS DE ALTA TENSIN
CME-035 REV. 2
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA PRUEBAS ELCTRICAS A ARRANCADORES MAYORES

DE 600 VOLTS.
CME-036 REV.1
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA PRUEBAS DE INTERRUPTORES TERMO MAGNTICOS.
CME-048 REV. 2
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA INSTALACIN DE PORTACANDADO, CANDADOS,

ETIQUETAS Y DOBLE SEGURO DE DESCONEXIN EN ARRANCADORES
CME-049 REV. 1
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA PUESTA EN SERVICIO DE UNA SUBESTACIN

ELCTRICA O DE UN CENTRO DE CONTROL DE MOTORES (INSTALACIONES
NUEVAS)
DG-ASIPA-SI-08600 REV. 1
DG-GPASI-IT-00202 REV. 2
DG-GPASI-IT-00204
DG-GPASI-IT-00400 REV. 1 (1996)
DG-GPASI-IT-04006 REV. 1 (1995)
DG-GPASI-SI-02510 REV. 3 (2008)
GUA PARA ORIENTAR LAS ACTIVIDADES DE DIFUSIN, EXPLICACIN Y

APLICACIN DE LA POLTICA DE SEGURIDAD INDUSTRIAL Y DE PROTECCIN
AMBIENTAL DE PETRLEOS MEXICANOS.
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA LA INSPECCIN DE TUBERA RECIN CONSTRUIDA
ANTES DE OPERAR.
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EL REGISTRO, ANLISIS Y PROGRAMACIN DE LA
MEDICIN PREVENTIVA DE ESPESORES.
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EFECTUAR LAS PRUEBAS HIDROSTTICAS A
TUBERAS Y EQUIPOS DE LAS INSTALACIONES DEPENDIENTES DE PEMEX
REFINACIN.
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EL ESTABLECIMIENTO DEL INDICE DE CONFIABILIDAD
DEL ESTADO FISICO DE LAS INSTALACIONES DE LOS CENTROS DE TRABAJO
DE PEMEX REFINACION
REGLAS DE SEGURIDAD PARA EFECTUAR TRABAJOS EN ESPACIOS
CONFINADOS.
GUA PARA EL VAPORIZADO DE LNEAS Y EQUIPOS DE PROCESO.
DG-GPASI-SI-02703 (1999)
DRENAJES EN LAS REAS INDUSTRIALES DE PEMEX REFINACIN.

SISTEMAS AUTOMTICOS PARA LA DETECCIN Y ALARMA POR FUEGO O POR
ATMSFERAS RIESGOSAS.
DG-GPASI-SI-06101 REV. 2 (2007)
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EL ANLISIS DE INCIDENTES. (RBOL DE CAUSAS DE

RAZ).
DG-GPASI-SI-08200 REV. 4 (2008)
REGLAMENTO DE SEGURIDAD PARA CONTRATISTAS.
REGLAMENTO DE SEGURIDAD FSICA

INDUSTRIALES DE PEMEX REFINACION.
ADMINISTRACIN
INDUSTRIALES
DE
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA
ACCIDENTES
CAMBIOS
EN
PARA
LAS
INSTALACIONES
INSTALACIONES
DE
INCIDENTES Y
PROCESOS
EL ANLISIS Y
REPORTE

PROYECTO:

IDENTIFICACIN
DG-SASIPA-SI-06920 REV. 3
GNT-SNP-E008
GNT-SNP-T001
GNT-SNP-T003
GNT-SSIME-G002-2008 REV. 0
GPASI-IT-0209
NO.2.425.01 (1991)
NO.2.431.01(1986)
P.1.0000.06 (2000)
P.1.0000.09 (2005)
P.2.0220.01 (2000)
P.2.0401.01 (1999)
P.2.201.01 (1990)
P.2.201.03 (1990)
P.2.211.03 (1998)
P.2.211.04 (1999)
P.2.220.02 (1999)
P.2.225.01(1990)
P.2.231.01 (1999)
P.3.0226.01(2000)
P.3.0403.01(2007)
P.3.223.01 (2000)
P.3.231.01 (1999)
P.3.346.01 (1983)
P.4.0217.03 (2000)
SP-SASIPA-SI-02310
DESCRIPCIN
GUA PARA LA COMUNICACIN DE ACCIDENTES.
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA VERIFICAR LAS CONDICIONES DE SEGURIDAD Y LOS
REQUERIMIENTOS AMBIENTALES ANTES DE INICIAR LA OPERACIN DE
INSTALACIONES INDUSTRIALES NUEVAS.
DISPOSICIN ADMINISTRATIVA PARA EL USO DE ROPA Y EQUIPO DE
PROTECCIN POR PERSONAL AJENO A PETRLEOS MEXICANOS.
RTULOS PARA EQUIPO ELCTRICO EN PLANTAS Y SUBESTACIONES
ELCTRICAS.
FLEXIBILIDAD DE TUBERAS.
DISEO DE TUBERAS.
LINEAMIENTOS PARA ELABORAR PLANOS Y DOCUMENTOS.
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EFECTUAR LA INSPECCIN DE TUBERAS DE
PROCESO Y SERVICIOS AUXILIARES EN OPERACIN DE LAS INSTALACIONES
DE PEMEX REFINACIN.
SISTEMAS DE TUBERAS DE REFINERAS DE PETRLEO.
SISTEMAS PARA AGUA DE SERVICIO CONTRAINCENDIO
ESTRUCTURACIN DE PLANOS Y DOCUMENTOS TCNICOS DE INGENIERA
EMBALAJE Y MARCADO DE EQUIPOS Y MATERIALES.
DISEO DE SISTEMAS DE TIERRAS.
SIMBOLOGA DE EQUIPO DE PROCESO.
SMBOLOS ELCTRICOS
SMBOLOS DE COMUNICACIONES ELCTRICAS
CABLES DE ENERGA MULTICONDUCTORES.
CABLES DE ENERGA MONOCONDUCTORES.
CANALIZACIONES ELCTRICAS Y TELEFNICAS.
CANALIZACIONES ELCTRICAS Y TELEFNICAS
ALUMBRADO PARA INSTALACIONES INDUSTRIALES.
(EMPALMES).
COLORES Y LETREROS PARA IDENTIFICACIN DE INSTALACIONES Y
VEHICULOS DE TRANSPORTE.
INSTALACIN DE SISTEMAS DE CONEXIN A TIERRA
INSTALACIN DE SISTEMAS DE ALUMBRADO PARA PLANTAS INDUSTRIALES.
PRUEBAS DE AISLAMIENTO EN CAMPO DE EQUIPO ELCTRICO.
PROCEDIMIENTO PARA LA AUTORIZACIN DE TRABAJOS EN INSTALACIONES
INDUSTRIALES DE LA SUBDIRECCIN DE PRODUCCIN.
E. CODIGOS, ESTANDARES Y PRCTICAS RECOMENDADAS

Deber usarse la edicin/revisin y adendas ms recientes de los citados documentos.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)

IDENTIFICACIN
ASME B1.1
ASME B16.1
ASME B16.10
ASME B16.11
ASME B16.20
ASME B16.21
ASME B16.25
ASME B16.34
ASME B16.36
ASME B16.47
DESCRIPCIN
UNIFIELD INCH SCREW THREADS (UN AND UNR THREAD FORM)
GRAY IRON PIPE FLANGES AND FLANGED FITTINGS CLASSES 25, 125, AND 250
FACE TO FACE END TO END DIMENSIONS OF VALVES.
FORGED FITTINGS, SOCKET-WELDING AND THREADED
METALLIC GASKETS FOR PIPE FLANGES. RING-JOINT, SPIRAL-WOUND, AND JACKETED
NONMETALLIC FLAT GASKETS FOR PIPE FLANGES
BUTTWELDING ENDS
VALVES-FLANGED, THREADED, AND WELDING END.
ORIFICE FLANGES.
LARGE DIAMETER STEEL FLANGES. NPS 26 THROUGH NPS 60 METRIC/INCH

Itb 13.01.20 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Itb 13.01.20 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PEMEX MINATITLAN CCR REVAMP

GRAL. LAZARO CARDENAS REFINERY

JANUARY 20, 2013

TECHNICAL BID INSTRUCTIONS

1. Bid Package Contents

TECHNICAL BID INSTRUCTIONS

2. Contractor Bid Preparation

TECHNICAL BID INSTRUCTIONS

TECHNICAL BID INSTRUCTIONS

TECHNICAL BID INSTRUCTIONS

TECHNICAL BID INSTRUCTIONS

TECHNICAL BID INSTRUCTIONS

PROCUREMENT AND SITE CONSTRUCTION

SCOPE OF WORK, SERVICES AND SUPPLY

TECHNICAL BID INSTRUCTIONS

SCOPE OF WORK, SERVICES AND SUPPLY

TECHNICAL BID INSTRUCTIONS

SCOPE OF WORK, SERVICES AND SUPPLY

TECHNICAL BID INSTRUCTIONS

SCOPE OF WORK, SERVICES AND SUPPLY

TECHNICAL BID INSTRUCTIONS

SCOPE OF WORK, SERVICES AND SUPPLY

Piping specialty items (engineered spring supports,

TECHNICAL BID INSTRUCTIONS

SCOPE OF WORK, SERVICES AND SUPPLY

Rearrangement of cabinets and wiring in MCC as

TECHNICAL BID INSTRUCTIONS

SCOPE OF WORK, SERVICES AND SUPPLY

d. Installation of wiring between new field instruments

TECHNICAL BID INSTRUCTIONS

SCOPE OF WORK, SERVICES AND SUPPLY

10. Insulation and Weather Shielding

TECHNICAL BID INSTRUCTIONS

SCOPE OF WORK, SERVICES AND SUPPLY

LOCATION OF NEW STRUCTURE

AREA DIRECTLY WEST OF THE EXISTING CCR

CCR AND REACTOR

AREA TO THE SOUTH OF THE EXISTING CCR

Existing Structures - Green

Existing CCR Structure

UOP Technical Requisition

UOP Technical Requisition

7. 970086 S999F-0, SpecificationCross-Discipline Clearance and Accessibility

970086 U901F-AStructural Steel Inspection Data Sheet

g. 970086 U907F-AInsulation Inspection Data Sheet

g. Piping Specialty Items

Pipe Support Bill of Material

Steam Tracing Bill of Material To be provided later

k. Structural Steel Bill of Material

Equipment Insulation Summary

m. Instrument Bill of Material

UOP Technical Requisition

c. Instrument Engineering Design Drawings

Piping Engineering Design Drawings

g. Structural Steel and Civil Engineering Design Drawings

Demolition and Modification

Customer Specifications (Attached Separately)

Organization for project

Names of lead project personnel

Schedule shall include the following:

Project execution plan shall include the following:

Work breakdown structure

Start date and duration of each task